A GREEK GRAMMAR, FPOR SC.HOOLS AND COLLEGES BY JAMES HADLEY PROFESSOR IN YALE COLLEGE. NEW YORK: D, APPLETON & COMPANY, 549 & 551 BROADWAY LONDON: 16 LITTLE BRITAIN. 1871. ENThRED, according to Act of Configess, in the year 1860, by D. APPLETON & COMPANY, Is: the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District oi New York. PREFACE. THE grammar which is here submitted to the public, is founded on the Griechische Schulgrammatik of GEORGE CURTIUS, Professor in the University of Kiel. The work of Professor Curtius was first published in 1852, and was received in Germany with marked favor: a second edition was called for in 1855, a third in 1857, and a fourth in 1859. Having been led, soon after it appeared, to study it with some care, I became satisfied that it possessed important advantages of plan and execution; and I was therefore easily induced, more than three years ago, to undertake the task of bringing it before the American public. My first thought went no further than to reproduce it in an English version, with only such changes as might seem necessary to adapt it to the wants and habits of instructors in our country. But in carrying out thi. purpose, it happened, by what is probably a common experience in such cases, that one change led on to another, until at length the alterations had assumed an extent out of all proportion to the original design. To give the book, as it stands here, the name of Curtius, would be to make him responsible in appearance for many things which he has not said, and might perhaps fail to approve. Under these circumstances, it has seemed to be the only proper course, that I should assume the responsibility of the work, while making, as I cheerfully do, the fullest acknowledgments of obligation to the German scholar. Should this volume prove to be of service in the work of classical instruction, the result will be perhaps mainly due to his broad and thoughtful scholarship, and his sound, practical judgment. It may be proper for me here to follow the example of Professor Curtius, by calling attention, at the outset, to some features in the plan and arrangement of this Grammar. It is a fact generally understood, that the Greek, in common with the other Indo-European languages, has of late received, and is still receiving, much tight fromn the scientific comparative study of the whole class to which it be i~. PREFACE. longs. The new views of Greek etymology and structure, developed and es tablished by that study, have been made the object of special attention in' the preparation of this work; and have been taken up into it, as far as seemed to be consistent with the practical ends which must always be paramount in an elementary grammar. The multiplicity of forms presented by the different Greek dialects is the occasion of considerable embarrassment to the grammarian. Scattered through the sections which describe the Attic language, they interfere seriously with the unity of exhibition and impression which it is important to becure: but when thrown together by themselves at the end of the book, they lose in clearness and significance, by being severed from those common facts and principles with which they are naturally associated. In this Grammar, will be found a sort of compromise between the opposite difficulties. The peculiarities of euphony and inflection which belong to the other dialects, are given in smaller type at the foot of each page, under the corresponding Attic forms, so as to be kept clearly distinct from the latter, while yet presented with them in the same view. It is hardly necessary to say that a complete exhibition of the dialects is not attempted in these pages. The multitude of forms which appear only in lyric fragments, or in ancient inscriptions, or in the writings of grammarians, are passed over without notice. The object has been simply to supply what is necessary in this respect for a proper reading of the classic authors, and particularly Homer, Herodotus, Pindar, and Theocritus. For the language of Homer, I have derived much assistance from the Homeric Grammar of Ahrens (Griechische Formenlehre des Homerischen u2nd Attischen Dialektes: Gittingen, 1852); and for that of Herodotus, from the careful and thorough investigations of Bredow (Quaestiones Criticae de Dialecto Hterodotea: Lipsiae, 1846). In the sections on the verb, the forms of voice, mode, and tense are reduced to a small number of groups, called "tense-systems." Under this arrangement, which is similar to those already adopted by Ahrens and Curtius, the inflection of the verb is represented as the inflection of a few tense-stems, which are formed, each in its own way, from the common verb-stem. It is hoped that the arrangement may commend itself in use, not only as consistent with the obvious analogies of verb-formation, but also as calculated to mak the structure of the verb simpler and more intelligible to the learner. PREFACE V Among these tense-systems, the most prominent is that which includes the piesent and imperfect, the tenses of continued action; and it is also the one which shows the greatest variety of formation. Hence the formation of the present is taken as the basis of a new classification, the whole mass of verbs being divided into nine classes, according as the stem of this tense coincides with that of the verb, or varies from it by different changes. The special formation of particular verbs-" anomalous" formation, as it has been generally, but to a great extent inappropriately, termed-is exhibited with considerable fulness, and according to a uniform method, intended to assist the apprehension and memory of the learner. In the Syntax, the leading aim has been-not to construct a philosophical system of human expression, with Greek sentences for illustrations-but to represent, as fully and clearly as possible within the prescribed limits, the actual usage and idiom of the Greek language. It has also been an object to accompany the full statement of rules and principles with brief phrases, describing their substance, and convenient for use in the recitation-room. In regard to the examples by which the Syntax is illustrated, it has not been thought necessary to give for each one the name of the author from whom it is cited. Only those taken from non-Attic sources, as Homer and Herodotus, are credited to their authors: those which come from Attic poets are marked simply as poetic: while those which come from Attic prose-writers, and constitute perhaps nine-tenths of the whole number, are given without any indication of their source. The examples are translated throughout, untranslated examples being (if I may trust my own observation) of but little use, in general, even to the better class of students. Regarded as illustrations, they are imperfect, since it is only with difficulty, and perhaps with uncertainty, that the learner recognizes their relation to the rule or principle to be illustrated. And if we view them as exercises in translation, it may be questioned, whether detached sentences, torn from the connections in which they stood, and involving often peculiar difficulties of language and construction, are best suited for this purpose. A similar rule has been followed even in the earlier portions of the Grammar; except, indeed, in the first part (Orthography and Euphony), where it could hardly be carried out with convenience: but in the second and third parts, which treat of Inflection and Formation, the Greek words introduced are accompanied regularly by a statement of their significao Vi PREFACE. tion. This course has been adopted, partly, from the feeling that a student cannot fairly be expected to take much interest in words that have no meaning to his mind; and partly, in the belief that it is possible for a student, in this way, as he goes through his grammar, to acquire, with little trouble, a useful vocabulary of Greek expression. In preparing this division of the work, I have made frequent use of the Syntax der GriechischLen Sprache (Braunschweig, 1846), by the late Professor Madvig of Copenhagen. But my obligations are much greater-not for the Syntax only, but for almost every part of the book-to K. W. Kruger, whose Greek Grammar (like that of Buttmann before it) marks a new epoch in the scientific treatment of its subject. Important aid has been received also from the school-grammars of Buttmann and Kiihner, which are familiar to American students in the skilful translations of Dr. Robinson and Dr. Taylor. Nor must I omit to acknowledge myself indebted, for many valuable suggestions, to the excellent grammars produced in our own country by Professor Sophocles and Professor Crosbvy. In the appended chapter on Versification, I have relied, partly on Munk's Metres of the Greeks and Romans (translated by Professors Beck and Felton, Cambridge, 1844), but still more on the able treatises of Rossbach and Westphal (Griechische Rhythmik, Leipzig, 1854; and Griechische Metrik, Leipzig, 1856). CONTENTS. vii CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. Adjectives.. 20 Greek Language and Dialects,. ~1 Comparison of Adjectives. 220 Form. and Compar. of Adverbs 225 PART FIRST. Pronouns. 230 Numerals. 253 ORTIIOGRAPHY AND EUPHONY. VERBS 2G0 Alphabet. 5 Paradigms of Verbs... 269 Vowels. 7 Elements of the Verb.. 306 Diphthongs. 11 Augment.. 307 Breathings. 14 Reduplication.. 318 Consonants... 16 Stem and Changes of Stem. 324 Euphony of Vowels 24 Classes of Verbs... 325 Vowels Interchanged. 25 Passive-Sign... 343 Vowels Lengthened 28 Tense-Signs.. 344 Vowels Contracted. 32 Connecting Vowels, Mode-Signs 346 Vowels Omitted. 38 Endings.. 354 Euphony of Consonants 40 Accent of the Verb. 365 Consonants Doubled. 40 Formation of Tense-Systems. 369 Consonant-Changes 44 Present and Imperfect.. 369 Euphony of Final Sounds. 67 Future Active and Middle. 372 Crasis.. 68 First Aorist Act. and Mid.. 380 Elision...'70 Second Aorist Act. and Mid. 383 Final Consonants'74 Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 385 Movable Consonants. 78 Perf., Pluperf., Fut. Perf., Middle 388 Syllables.. 81 Aorist and Future Passive. 395 Quantity. 86 Verbal Adjectives.. 398 Accent.. 89 Systems of the /LL-form.. 399 Punctuation. 113 Enumeration of RLt-forms. 403 Verbs in,u of Eighth Class. 403 PART SECOND. Verbs in /u of First Class. 404 INFLECTION. Verbs in ML of Fifth Class. 407 Second Aorists of /Lt-form 408 NouNs, 114 Second Perfects of Ms-form. 409 First Declension (A-Decl.). 123 Dialectic Formations.. 410 Second Declension (O-Decl.). 138 Irregularities of Meaning.. 412 Attic Second Decl. 146 Special Formation... 418 Third Declension (Cons.-Decl.). 151 First Class (Stem-Class).. 419 Labial and Palatal Stems 163 Second (Protracted) Class. 425 Lingual Stems.. 165 Third Class (Tau-Class). 427 Liquid Stems.. 172 Fourth Class (Iota-Class). 428 Stems in s... 176 Fifth (Nasal) Class... 435 Stems in L and v.. 185 Sixth (Inceptive) Class 444 Diphthong Stems.. 189 Seventh Class (Epsilon-Class). 448 Stems in o. 193 Eighth (Reduplicating) Class 449 Irregular Declension... 197 Ninth (Mixed) Class. 450 Local Endings... 203 Index of Verbs:. 451 Vl~i CONTENTS. PART THIRD. Middle. 681 FORMATION OF WORDS. Passive.... 693 Formation of Simple Words 452 The Tenses... 6 Substantives 457 Tenses of the Indicative 697 Adjectives.. 468 Tenses in other Modes. 14 Denominative Verbs. 472 The Modes.... 719 Composition of Words. 473 Finite Modes Form of Compound Words. 473 in Simple Sentences.. 719 Meaning of Compound Words. 480 in Compound Sentences..'24 Indirect.. 733 PART FOURTH. Final.... 39 SYNTAX. Conditional... 744 Definitions.. 485 Relative.... 55 Agreement (general rules). 497 Infin.. 63 Omitted Subject, Predicate, and Subject and Predica. Object...:504 Infin. with Neuter Article.'778 Number and Gender.. 511 Infin. with..'783 The Article D. 524 Infin. for Imperative.. 784'0 in the Dialects.. 524 Participle'O as a Demonstrative.. 25 Attributive Participle... 85 525 Attributive Participle.. 785 0 as an Article.526 Predicate-Participle.. 87 The Cases 3....Circumstantial Participle.. 788 Nominative 5.. Part. with Case Absolute. 790 accusative.. 544 Adjuncts of the Participle. 95 Two Accus. ith one verb Supplementary Participle. 796 verb 553 Participle with di... 803 Genitive.. 55 Verbal Adjectives in eoS. 804 with Substantives.558 Relative Sentences. 807 with Verbs.. 570 Attraction, Incorporatipn 807 with Adjectives and Adverbs 584 Other Peculiarities.. 818 in looser Relations. 590 in looser Relationsv. 590 Interrogative Sentences. 824 Dative.... 594 Negative Sentences. 832 of Influence.. 5695 Particles 849 of Interest... 596 Conjunctions. 853 of Association and Likeness. 602 Figures of Syntax. 880 of Instrument, Means, Manner, Figures of Syntax Cause.. 606 APPENDIX. of Place and Time. 612 o.... 887 Prepositions with Cases 88614 T caic 87 with Accusative only. 620 I ambic Rhythms. 8 9 with only622Iambic Rhythms. 903 with Genitive only.. 622 Dactylic Rhythms. 908 with Dative only. 627n with Ace. and Gen. 629 Anapaestic Rhythms.. 912 with Ace. and Dat. 635 Logaoedic Rhythms. 916 with-Ace., Gen., and Dat. 637 Choriambetic Rhythms.. 924 Adjectives.. 658 Choriambic Rhythms. 24 Degrees of Comparison 659 Ionic Rhythms.... 925 Pronouns..' 667 Dochmiac and Bacehic Rhythms 928 The Voices. 684 GREEK INDEX... page 332 Active.. 684 ENGLISH INDEX... page 356 INTRODUCTION. Greek Language and D'icldects. 1. The inhabitants of ancient Greece called themselves iellenco ('EXr/ves), and their country Hellcs ('EXX.s9). The name " iellenes " was applied also to the members of the same race, dispersed by colonization over the islands and coasts of the Mediterranean. By the Romans they were called Grecians (Graeci). Their language-the Greek-is connected with the languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, the Slavonic, Germanic, and Celtic nations. These are all kindred languages, and together form the Indo-European family of languages. 2. The Hellenes referred themselves for the most part to three principal divisions,-Aeolians, Dorians, and Ionians. To these belonged three principal dialects: the Aeolic, spoken in Aeolis, Boeotia, and Thessaly;.-the Doric, in Peloponnesus, Isthmus, and north-western Greece,also in Crete and Caria, Sicily and southern Italy- the Ionic, in Ionia and Attica, and in most of the Aegean islands. Each of them was early used in poetry,-for a long time the only species of literature. They were spoken under many different forms-secondary dialects-in different times and places. But as regards the written works which have come down to us, it is enough to specify the following forms: 3. a. The Aeolic (of Lesbos), found in the lyric fragments of Alcaeus and the poetess Sappho (600 B. c.). b. The Doric, found in the lyric poetry of Pindar (470 B. c.) and the bucolic (pastoral) poetry of Theocrltus (270 B. c.). Even the Attic dramas in their lyric parts contain some Doric forms. The language of Pindar has some peculiarities derived friom the Aeolic, and still more from the Epic. c. The Ionic, including 1) The Old Ionic, or Epic, found in the poetry of Homer (before 800 B. c.) and Hesiod (before 700 B. c.). In all the poetry of later times (though least of all in the dramatic dialogue) we find more or less admixture of Epic words and forms. 2) The New Ionic, the language of Ionia about 400 B. c., found in the history of Herodotus and the medical writings of Hippocrates. 1 D. In Homer, Hellas is only a district in northern Greece, the Hellenes Its inhabitants. For the Greeks at large, he uses the names'AXalo[,'Ap'yezot, havaot, which, strictly taken, belong only to a part of the whole people. 2 D. The division into Aeolians, Dorians, Ionians, is unknown to Homer 2 GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS. [3 The following dialect, though in strictness the Ionic of Attica, and closely related to the two preceding, is always distinguished as d. The Attic, the language of Athens in her flourishing period (from 490 B. c.), found in many works of poetry and prose, especially the tragedies of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, the comedies of Aristophanes, the histories of Thucydides and Xenophon, the philosophical writings of Plato, and the orations of Lysias, Isocrates, Aeschines, and DemosthSnes. The political importance of Athens and the superiority of her literature gave a great ascendancy to her dialect, which at length banished the others from literary use; though the Doric and the Old Ionic were still retained, the latter for epic, the former for lyric and bucolic poetry. The Attic thus became the common language of all cultivated Greeks; but at the same time began to lose its earlier purity. In this state, commencing about the time of Alexander (who died 323 B. c.), it is called e. The Common dialect (; KOlV/ &8dXEKroS), in distinctionfrom the purer Attic. On the border between the two, stands the great philosopher Aristotle, with his pupil Theophrastus. Among later authors, the most important are the historians Polybius (140 B. c.), Plutarch (100 A. D.), Arrian (150 A. D.), and Dio Cassius (200 A. D.), the geographer Strabo (1 A. D.), and the rhetoricians Dionysius of Halicarnassus (30 B. c.), and Lucian (170 A. D.). REMARK. There is a noticeable difference between the earlier and later Attic. The first is seen in the tragic poets and Thucydides; the last, in most other Attic writers. The language of Plato has an intermediate character. The tragic language is further marked by many peculiarities of its own. 4. For completeness, we may add f. The Eellenistic, a variety of the Common dialect. found in the New Test., and in the LXX., or Septuagint version of the Old Test. The name comes from the term Hellenist ('EXXqvltrTs from iXX,/lu'C), applied to Hebrews, or others of foreign birth, who used the Greek language. g. The Modern Greek, or popular language for the last thousand years, found in written works since about 1150 A. D. It is also calledt Romaic from ('PcoLLol (Romans), the name assumed in place of'EXX/veg by the Greeks of the middle ages. NOTE. Through the first two Parts of the Grammar, the forms of Attic Greek, especially the Attic prose, are described iin the body of the text; while the peculiarities of other dialects (particularly those of Homer and IHerodotus) are added in smaller type at the foot of each page. EHm. stands for Homer, and Hd. for HIerodotus; —cf. is used for Lat. conifer (compare),-?sc. for scilicet (to wit),-ib. for ibidem (in the same place),-i. e. for id est (that is),-e. g. for exempli gratia (for example), -KrX. for Kal ra Xo rra (Lat. et cetera). Other abbreviations will explain themselves. ALPHABET. 3 PART FIRST. ORTHOGRAPHY AND EUPHONY. Alphabet. 5. The Greek is written with twenty-four letters, viz.. Form. Name. Roman. A a "AXfa Alpha a B /3 BrTa Beta b r' y raJI/a Gamma g A 8 A&ra Delta d E e "E q4Xdv Epsilon C_ Z q ZTra Zeta z H - l' IHTa Eta 0 flS 0 Oy')a Theta th I t'IKra Iota i K K'-' Kabrrra IKappa c A X Aa./38a Lambda 1 MI M Ml Mu m N v Nvi Na n f k W;t Xi x o o'O JI/KpOV Omicron o HII Z Ii Pi P P p'PW Rho r cr S. ~ly/ja Sigma s T T Tav Tau, t Y u Y X&ov Upsilon ~y @fD Phi ph X X XC ahi ch V. T4 P Psi ps 2 n fuELya Omega VOWELS. r1 REMARK. a. Sigma has the form or in the beginning and middle of a word, s at the end of a word: ca-(rLS faction. The final s is retained by some editors, even when it is brought by composition into the middle of a word: thus the compound word made up of 8vv ill (never used separately), 7rpos to, and 06b6 way, is written by some 8vsvrpososov, by others vo'rpo'o-osov, difficult of access. REM. b. Abbreviations. For many combinations of two or three letters, and for many short words in frequent use, the manuscripts and old editions have peculiar forms, connected and abridged. Two of these are still occasionally used: 8 for ov, and s (named ari or crr-y/a) for Sr. 6. REM. c. The term alphabet is formed from the names of the first two letters. The Greek alphabet is not essentially different from the Roman, and from those of modern Europe. They are all derived from the alphabet of the Phoenicians. NOTE. d. Various other signs, beside the letters of the alphabet, are used in writing Greek. Such are the breathings (14), the coronis (68) and the apostrophe (70), the accents (89) and the marks of punctuatioln (113). Vowels. -7. The vowels are a, E, 7, t, 0, (o, v. Of these, c, o, are always short, q, O, always long, a, L, v, short in some words, long in others, and hence called doubtftd vowels. 8. The short sounds of a, t, v, are indicated in the grammar by a,, v i the long sounds, by a, t, v. We have then the short vowels, a, c, a, o, v, and the long vowels, a, a, o, 9. The long vowels were sounded as a, e, i, o, u, in the English words par, prey, caprice, prone, prune, slowly and fully uttered. The short vowels had the same sounds, only less prolonged in utterance,-a little different, therefore, from the English short sounds in the words pat, pet, pit, pot, put. 10. The vowels (sounded as above) are close or open. The most open vowel is a; less open are Ec r,,o, o; the close vowels are t, v. Thus we have the open short vowels, a, (, o, the open long vowels, a, a, wo, the close vowels, l, V. 12J DIPHTHONaGS. 5 Dipt ihongs. 11. The diphthongs (b$9Soyyoo double-sounds) combine two vowels-an open and a close vowel-in one syllable. They are at, Ei, oi, av, Ev, ov, ~a, A, A, also'qv, wvt, and vi: but in vt, both. the vowels are close. Of these,,p, pa, are called improper diphthongs. Their second vowel is called iota subscript (written below the first). But when the first vowel is a capital letter, l stands upon the line: 02IAHI ='f,-I =1 REAM. a. In the diphthongs, as at first pronounced, each vowel received its proper sound, while the two, being uttered without break, coalesced in one syllable. Thus at, pronounced ah-ce, giving the sound of Eng. ay affirmatiye: av, ah-oo, like Eng. ou in our: Ev, L, Vt, not quite like eum in feud, oi in foil, ui in quit: et, or, still further from ei in height, ou in youth; though ov afterwards assumed the latter sound (12 b). REST. b. In a, p, c, the second vowel was at first written on the line and sounded, as in other diphthongs. But it early ceased to be prolounced, being swallowed up by the long a, r, co, before it. For a long time it was generally omitted in writing, and, when afterwards restored, was placed as a silent letter under the line. Hence a, TI, c, were called improper diphthongs, their second vowel having no effect upon the sound. The same name has sometimes been extended to include.7v, cov, and vi, which are distinguished from the other diphthongs by special peculiarities. Thus rv is always the result of augment (310) or of crasis (68), wv of crasis only; vL is composed of two close vowels, and is never followed by a consonant in the same word. 12. In Romaan letters the diphthongs were represented, all 01sOt avX ev, ov, v, q, r] c, by ae, 6 or, oc, au, eu, f, yi i, Ae, 0. Exc. a. For at, or, in a few proper names, we have Roman ai, oi; Mata Afaia, Tpoia Troia or Troja, ALas lAjtax. For p, in a few compounds of 3col song, we have oe: rpayw6dos tragoedus. REM. b. From the representation of Greek words by Roman letters, it appears that at an early time (as early as 100 B. c.) several of the diphthongs had becorne simple sounds. Thus ei had assumed the sound 11 D.b. The Ionic has 7,v also in'76rs (Hm. Hd.) Att. Pacs ship, and 7ypqv. (Ilm.) Att. ypacs old woman.-cov is scarcely- Attic. The New Ionic has it in WCUTs,. Twvi$, etc., by crasis for abcds, rb abto (68 D);-also in reflexive pro. nouns, as eoiUvro (235 D), which seems to have arisen by crasis from e'o avTou6; -further in rcoDia Att. [aiPua wonder, and words derived from it; though here some deny the diphthong and write cvi/iia or ~,&/a. 6 BREATmNGS. [12 of Eng. ei in rein or in seize-most commonly the latter; ov that of ou in your. For a, y, c, see 11 b. REM. c. It appears also that, prior to the same time, v had taken the sound of French u, or German ui intermediate between Eng. oo and eewhich the Romans, not having this sound, represented (as they did the sound of C) by using the Greek letter for the purpose ( y= v). The diphthong vt underwent a corresponding change. But v at the end (.f a diphthong retained its earlier sound. 13. Diaeresis. Sometimes two vowels, which might coalesce as a diphthong, are separated in pronunciation. A mark of diaeresis (separation) is then placed over the second vowel: pCaoVTO)V, Vpov7r pX','orpv;. REM. a. The diaeresis is sometimes omitted, when it is evident from a breathing (14), or an accent (89), or from L written on the line (11), that the two vowels do not unite as a diphthong. Thus in avri5, Ixv&F, Xrlp'fEVOSe, the vowels are evidently separate (= Airy, Lx~6V, XtjYC4LEvov), while in abri, Xyv, kqXC61eJvos, they unite as diphthongs. Breathings. 14. The weak sound h, at the beginning of a word, was indicated by the mark' placed over the initial vowel, and called the rough breathing (spiritus asper): thus Divas (pronounced hi&-nai) to send. The absence of this sound was also indicated by a mark' placed over the initial vowel, and called the smooth breathing (spiritus lenis): thus i&vaL (pronounced i-d-nai) to go. Words beginning with a diphthong take the breathings over the second vowel: aVrTo of himself, arro9 of him. But in the improper diphthongs, t never takes the breathings, even when it stands upon the line:'SQ8r = &8i song. 15. All words which begin with v have the rough breathing. Further, the initial consonant p always has the rough breathing (thus I, Roman rh): ITop rhetor orator. - pp appears in most editions as PP (Roman rrh): II'PPos Pyrrhuss; though some write IIvppos. REM. a. Except in pp, the breathings belong only to initial letters; if brought into the middle of a word by composition, they disappear: rrpoevaL (from 7rpdO+L Eat and from 7rpOd+ lvat); though the Roman form in some such cases shows an h: C&vAplS enhydris rroXvi`rcp Polyhistor. 15 D. The Epic pronouns tlues, UiU1, tVu/te (233 D) have the smooth breathing. The Aeolic dialect had other exceptions. 201 CONSONANTS. SEMIVOWELS. MUTES. 7 Consonacnts. 16. The consonants were sounded, for the most part, as we sound the Roman letters used to represent them (5). To c, g, s, t, we give a variety of sounds: the corresponding Greek letters K, y, O, r, had only the sounds which are heard in Eng. coo, go, so, to: thus in AVKl'a Lycia, 4pvo yia Phrygia, Mvo-a ilfysia, Boltorla Boeotia. But Gamma (y) before K, A, X, or A, had the sound of n in anger, anxious, and was represented by a Roman n: a yKvpU Lat. an. c'ra anchor,'XEyXo0 elenchus proof. 17. The letters q, 2, X, seem to have had at first the sounds of ph, th, ch, in Eng. uphill, hothouse, blockhead. But afterwards they came to sound as in Eng. graphic, pathos, and German machen (the last being a rough palatal sound no longer heard in English). REM. a. Every consonant was sounded: thus K was heard in KValo to scratch, Kr7,ya possession, and pq in qbicos- phthisis consumption. Similarly edvov stranger, 4a/qos sand, were pronounced ksnzos, 2samminos, with k and p distinctly heard. -Among consonants, we distinguish semivowels, nmutes, and dcouble consonants. 18. The SEMrrOWELS are XA /, v, p, a-; of which, a is called a sibilant, from its hissing sound,:X, v, p, liquids, from their flowing sound, /t, v, nasals, being sounded with the nose. To the semivowels must be added also y nasal, that is, 7 be bore K,, X, (16). 19. The IUTES are 7r-mutes r /i or labial mutes, r-mutes r 3 lingual mutes, c-mutes K 7y X palatal mutes. Those in the same horizontal line are said to be cognate, o. mutes of the same organ. 20. According to another division, the mutes are smooth mutes 7r r K (tenues), middle mutes (f a y7 (mediae), rough mutes. 3 X (aspiratae). Those in the same horizontal line are said to be co-ordinate, or mutes of the same order. REM. a. The middle mutes 3, a, y, are so named from the place given "hem in the arrangement. They are also called sonant (sounding with soud voice), in distinction from Tr, a, K-, q, 2, X, which are szued (hushed 8 DOUBLE CONSONANTS. DIGAMMA. 120 or whispered). Of the latter, k, Z, X, are called rough, aspiratae, on account of the h (rough breathing, spiritus asper) contained in them (17); while ir, r, K, which have no h, are called smooth. 21. The DOUBLE CONSONANTS are 4, $, J; of which, i is written for fro-, and e for Kcr. REM. a. Zeta (C) is not written for Tro, a combination of sounds re-. jected by the Greek ear as offensive. But it has in prosody the force of two consonants,-placed after a short vowel, it makes a syllable long by position (86). Many scholars pronounce it as dz; but it is at least very doubtful whether it ever had that sound. 22. The relations of the consonants may be seen from the following table: Semivowels. Mutes. Double A ------— ~- Conso. Sibilant. Liquids. Smooth. Middle. Rough. nants. Nasals. | Labials K wr la s + Linguals C X, p, v r 8 3 a Palatals (7) K Y X R1F,:. a. a-, 4r,, are surd like the smooth and rough mutes; the other consonants and all the vowels are sonant (20 a). 23 D. DIGAMMA. The oldest Greek had another consonant sound, represented by the sixth letter of the primitive alphabet. This was the semivowel F, named Fac Vau, —named also from its form Digamma (a&yalcqta i. e. double gamma, one placed upon another). It corresponds in place and form to Lat. but in power to Lat. u consonant (v), being sounded probably much like Ing. w. Thus oTs sheep was originally ouFs Lat. ovis. It is sometimes called Aeolic digamma, having been retained by the Aeolians and Dorians long after it was lost by the Ionians: thus c'TOS year Aeol. FETOS,,LoS own Dor. FrLaOs. It must have existed, however, in the old Ionic of Homer, although not written in the text of his poems. Thus it must have been sounded by Hm., more or less constantly, at the beginning of these words: &7YVfU to break, aths in numbers, enough, A&xhcoyam to be taken, &va4 lord, avdov-w to be lord, &yd'ow to please, apards slender, &o-rv city, tap (ver) spring,`'6vov bride-gift, *vos host, people, euIcooL twenty (Dor. FicKar-, Lat. viginti), eOXcw to yield, ei'co to press,'KrITL by will of, Ecvp&s father-in-law, 5bcc6 willing, eAmrouaL to hope, the pronoun-stem e (eio sui), Viros word (e-rov I said), epyov work, (Ipsao to do), 4pyco to shut in or out, ipco to go to harm,?pwco to draw, eigg dress, eiLua vest (root Fes, Lat. ves-tis), ea7repos (vesper) evening, emSus clansman, i1Jb5s pleasant, IdXw to cry, root ig (oie47 videre, ol7a I know), root Iac (YiexAos and &eXkxos like, eKica I am like, seem),'IXros Troy, 7aos equal, olvos house, ovroi (vinum) wine, o's, 5, or suns, -a, -um. REM. a. At the beginning of some words, Um. has e at times in place of an original F: i' him, e'ricoax twenty, 4it'ar fem. of laos equal. For effects of the digamma in Hm., see 67 D a, 86 D, 87 D. 27] VOWELS INTERICHANGED. 9 EUPHONY OF VOWELS. Vowels Interchanged. 25. The open short vowels (a, c, o) are often interchanged in the inflection and formation of words: Tpe'-o to nourish,'-Trpac,v was nourished, E'-Tpoo-a have nourished; yevos (for yEvyes) race, Gen. 7yE'eos for yEcvco-o3; X1IKE (for XvKO) from XV'Ko-S wolf. In like manner, EL (when made by lengthening I, 30) is inter changed with ot: XdEr-to (stem MXr) to leave, -XXotrr-a have left, Xou 7r&o left. -And v is sometimes interchanged with o:'pjy-o to telp,.poy-o'- helper. 26. ao, ao, interchange with ow: vao' and i'Evcs temple, LECTc. opos (for /eIdraopos) raised aloft, rTE-VECs (for TE3V-qW,% earlier form TES(vaws) dead. 27. A close and open vowel are much less often interchanged: m(rt' is,;.'L be thou;'KCO) poet. aCxo, am come; ovojua name, dv'covvlos nameless; 24 D. DIVERSITY OF VOWELS IN TEE DIALECTS. The other dialects, in many words and forms, have different vowels from the Attic. The most important differences are these: a. The Ionic (Epic and New Ionic) has X for Attic a: Ion. yvetyiS for Att. reailas young man, Sr&pn~ for r&pd5 breast-plate: so also 7ever for 7yie.E to birth, ryes for Yavs ship.- But not so, when a arises by contraction, or Pven i is lengthened on account of t omitted after it (48, 49): Ion. and Att. TSrIa (for rTia-E) honor thou, vKEc. (for vLxd-EL) he conquers,'e'as (for seAaz-s) black. -(Conveisely, Hd. in a few instances has a for;: eoral~,;3p for rpeo7,qBpta mid-day, south.) b. The Doric, on the other hand, has a for Attic V: Dor. Bapuos for Att. rluos people, uLaTnp (Lat. mater) for tt1'v7p mother,'ASahva (found also in Trag.) for'Aarnva the goddess Athena; so Movtio for Molop to a Muse. But not so, when 71 arises from a lengthening of e: Dor. and Att. f-LapWu (stem be) to put, AleUY (Gen.,XLele,-os) harbor. The Attic dramatists in lyric passages use the Dor. a for -; (3 b). c. The Ion. often lengthens e to EL, and o to ov: erazos for /eos stranger, guest, E'lveca (found also in later Att.) for EveLca on account of, Aov^os for ju&,os alone, otho Aa for,vo;ya name.- Hm. sometimes lengthens o to or: 7'yLo~7ae for ~yro&~oe from &yvoew to be ignorant of; and a to at: 7rapat for 7rapd by, near. d. The Dor. sometimes has Xo for Att. ou: Moa-a for Movaoa (Aeolic Mooa'a, usual in Pindar and Theocritus), &ixos (Theoc.) for aovXos slave. So Zv Dor. (and Hd.) for our therefore. 25 D. A similar variation of eu to ov is seen in eiX*XkovS a (Hm.) for iXAXvaP I have come (stem ex.a, lengthened eAeuv, 30). Even in the Attic, we find rsrovuA haste frem ~rae5ow to hasten. 26 D. So Ion.'ATpepew, originally'ATpELgao, Att.'AT-pEtdov of Atrides; Ion1. rvvCer, orig.?rvXd,0, Att. rvXwv of gates; Ion. IlooeatSfeov, orig. fIoave 8dwPc, Att. no~rO-Lnv the god Poseidon. 10 VOWELS LENGTHEENED. [27 poetic ticp2osg blame, aduiv'lO blameless, illustrious; r&oXt -s city, rT7Xv-s cubit, Gen. 0rrde-cs, srixe-ow; 3vivrqs1 (for ov-ovqju) to benefit; poetic rTlrTUXXo (for ar-araXXco) to foster. Vowels lengthlened. 28. Lengthening of Vowels (Protraction) is A. Formative, when it is used as a means for the inflection and formation of words. By this, a.,,, o,, become j or a, Wl, c), v. Thus the verbs rtLaho, UlXfc, WicoV, aXo'co, /c6 (v), make the futures TroLiu(Tw, OLX\ co, O/lucro, 8XiC0Go, OVIco. 29. After c, L, p, the lengthened form of a is a, not V: thus the verbs fJoa to permit, iaonual to heal, repaow to pass through, make the futures caro-, idtaocat, 7reparco. REM. a. In general, the use of q was avoided in the Attic after c, L, p, and a was used instead. 30. The close vowels (t, v) are sometimes lengthened by a prefixed c, giving et, Ev, instead of, -i. Thus from the stems AIrt, 4biy, are formed XErorw to leave, /Ecyo toffee. - 31. B. Vicarious, when it takes the place of, an omitted consonant. By this, a, C, l, o, v, become a,, Z., or, j. Thus for dra-vr- o, are-Ys-vo-,?yt-y-votlal, Xvo-v-o-t, erXYv-o —a, we have iartac, O7rel(rco, yfivoLat, XvovL, MrrXkva. For an exception in which a becomes a, see 337: for one in which E, o, become a, c, see 156. 28 D. Um. lengthens a short vowel in many words which would otherwise be excluded from his verse, or could only come in by ciasis (68) or elision (70). This occurs chiefly under the rhythmic accent (in arsis, 894), and most frequently in the first syllable of a word. Thus, where otherwise three short syllables would stand in succession:'14'ophl (for avopes?) from'avip man, elapvds from Eap spring, ovActcevos for OXdeWzos destroying, oipeos, oepea, from tpos (never op,os) mountain, i~LrETSqAos from nrE'saXov leaf, ri'l~ievos for l'eusCeVos putting, avsacorw for 6vsaecov from 5vsams ill-blowing.-Also, where two long syllables would stand between two short ones: Ovihuroto (for'OrX6 uroo) of Olympus, eixAxovua (for exoXkovua) I have come. 29 D. In the Ionic (Old and New), the combinations eql, rr, pOl, are not avoided: oI4f for I'rea willow, ITpds for idxpds physician-; rreipaooam for ireapS frotaL I shall try. The Doric, on the other hand, uniformly lengthens a to a: ssaac for orLccw I shall honor (24 D b). 33], VOWELS CONTRACTED. 11 Vowels Contracted. 32. Contraction unites concurrent vowels of different syl!ables into one long vowel or diphthong. Concurrent vowels are generally contracted, when the first is short and open (a, c, o). Thus, An open short vowel' (-, C, o), a. before a close vowel (t, v), forms a diphthong with it; b. before a,,:e, q, go'es into the open long; c. before o, o,'gives to. d. But cE gives EL; Eo, oe, oo give ov. a. E-L cL 7roXE-L 7rVXEL c. a-o ot rtL.a-oCIEv 7TzI,U COI o-L' O 7TreLtJ'-L 7TELtoE a-co o) T/Ia-ceOev L 7tLcopZLev b. a-a a yepa-a EPda C-Co CO L/'e-cortL tLXCLoL a-e a rTla-e2.e rLoaT8e o-co o /kXo-CoCL (ry )Xk tL a- a 7T1/ia-71TE TLIaTE d. E-c EL OL Xc-Ec qJXeL C-a 7 rTEXE-a TrExI E-o ov y7ve-oS ye7oJV C-q 7) (/)eLXE-,TE /LX7)Te 0-E oV 87)Xo-e UrXov o-a C) alad-a at8l o-o ov' 7rX-os 7rXoDg 0-1 Co'? ahXd-o-rET ar)XTr REM. e. a before L gives a: ylipa-i, y/lpa (but see 183). 33. Concurrent vowels are not generally contracted, when the first is either long or close. But sometimes, a, c, t, after a close or long yowel, are absorbed. - t, when it is thus absorbed in an open long vowel, becomes & subscript. - qo gives 0o. yVav Ds s IJ-Oavvoq Vc@Ivog q7pco-a rpao pa-cov paWv TL/L?-ePTL ntyLnrYL XCk-imrrOC XcaOro 32 D. The dialects differ widely in respect to the contraction of vowels. Thus, e. The Ionic (Old and New) has uncontracted forms in very many cases, where the Attic contracts: voos for vovs mind, T'CXEa for rEtXt walls, pX.E's for pX. s thou mayst love, &e'ccw for &icKwv unwilling, aoa4j for,o1, oong.- In a few instances, however, these dialects have contracted forms, where the Attic does not contract: Ion.'ipds (and iepos) Att. iEpJs sacred, ljclocuat for Bo4oo'oat from /oda to cry. f. The Ionic (especially the New Ionic) contracts co, cov, into ev (instead of ov): 7rOLcev, 7roteavt, (from IroLe-oger, 7roLL-Ovol,) for Att. 7rouzovce, we do, lroLoO- they do. This contraction is found also in the Doric. g. The Doric often contracts ae, aLu, to 7, p:'p7, 6prs, (from 3pa-e, p&d-eis,) for Att. 5pa, see thou, opjs thou seest. h. The Doric sometimes contracts ao, ac, to a:'A'rpe5a, orig.'A'rpefado, Att.'ATrpetfov; rnoareav (or rIo'rcav), Hn. nloo'elwz,, Att. rIooeiciv; ecay, orig. Sedwce dearum, Att. bevy. 12 VOWELS CONTRACTED. L34 34. A simple vowel before a diphthong is often contracted with its first vowel; the last vowel is then rejected, unless it can be written as L subscript. Exc. a. EOL and oot give o0. a-EL a rtia —etL vtya u-at 77 Xlt7-aL Xv, a-n a 7Ta-CLa- 7t/a A-EL y T/ 7'L7-ELL TLtIyr a-oL co TL/a-oL rt / -0tCOL tX uVc-s o PtCv cE/v a-ov CA) tCI/a-ov 7L/tLU 7-OV c /t77 ovY /LV E-aL XV ke-ac XV7 o v-E o0 Otvo-el oLtvovs c-EL EL t)LXE-EtL tLX 0 o-oV ov rxo-ov arlXoi e-.7 n.tX;-p (LX/;. E-OL o )L.X;E-Ot /tXoO c-ov ov tLX-OLV (PAOD O-o o 8tqXO,-ot aXoi 35. In a few exceptional cases, the contraction is made with the last vowel of the diphthong. Thus,.a. act sometimes gives at instead of a: aLKS Zunseemly from adCKe, a'lpo to ta/ke up from adtpco. b. Eat in the second person singular of verbs gives both n and Lt: Xvq or XVEL from XveatL. c. OEL and op, in the second and third persons of verbs in co, give or: 87Xo7ls fromnl XdOEtL and qBXdor. 36. Important cases of irregular contriaction depend upon the following rules: a. In contracts of the vowel-declension (Decl. I. and II.), a short vowel followed by a, or by any long vowel-sound, is absorbed: o'trT-a, o0ra (not o0-Tv7); dp-yvpE-av, apyvp&v; drnXo-7, ab7rX; (not drAXo); &r7Xdatls, aTrXas. - Only in the singular, Ea, after any consonant but p, is contracted to 7: XPv(r-E', Xpvcrf. b. In the consonant-declension (Decl. III.), the contracted aceusatire plural takes the form of the contracted nominative plural: thus Nom. P1. CVyevE-eS', evyEVE7iL Acc. Pi. EVyFvE-as, FVSyEV~E (not EvyEvqS); Nom. P1. /lEtCoves [yvELO-eE] aLELcovs, Acc. P1. iot Elovas [oLeto.as] CLetlovv (not nLecos). Other cases of irregular contraction will be noticed as they occur. 37. SYNIZESIS. Sometimes two vowels, which could not form a diphthong, were yet so far united in pronunciation, as to pass for one syllable: thus sEdS god, used in poetry for one syllable. This is called syniztsis (settling together). It is not indicated in the writing, and therefore appears only in poetry, where it is detected by the measure of the verse. FI7 D. Synizesis is very frequent in Hm., especially after E: vpecov of doors,.ll, SOS golden, o're'Ea breasts, 7r4dXa cities, 0iySoos eighth, all used as wordn ef two syllables. 42] VOWELS OMITTED. CONSONANTS DOUBLED. 1 Vowels Omitted. 28. A short vowel between two consonants is sometimes drop. ped (syncope): 7rarpos (for -rae'pos) from 7-ar-pfather, XJov (for ~l jov) from'pXoaLt to come. 39. v at the end of a stem is often dropped between two vowels: faotXE-wv (for 3acrLXEv-wv) from f/aco-XE1v-s king, aKo-r (for aKOv- ) hearing from aKOv'-O to hear. In this case, v was first changed to the cognate semivowel, the digamrma (gao-tLXeFr,, aKoFq7), which afterwards went out of use (23 D). REM. a. Similarly, t is sometimes dropped between two vowels: Kai-'4 for Kai-co to burn, 7rXA-,wv for 7rXei-cov more. EUPHONY OF CONSONANTS. Consonants.Doubled. 40. The semivowels are often found doubled; less often, the smooth and rough mutes; the middle mutes and double consonants, never. Thus 3dXXco to throw, tadqose sand,;Evva ninel KOppqd temple, rdcrco = TaTTrd to arrange,'7rrros horse, KO'KKV cuckoo. REM. a. Double gamma (yy = ng) is not an exception; the two letters, though alike in form, are different in sound. REM. b. When the rough mutes are doubled (which occurs mostly in proper names), the first goes into the cognate smooth, making 7ra, Tr, KX, instead of kP, ni XX: thus 2awrcbo,'ATrSi, BadKXo. 41. Double tau (rr) occurs mostly as the later Attic form, for o-r in the earlier Attic and the other dialects: TaTrrW to. ar9range, KpetTTwv stronger, later Attic for Tao'rco, KpElOO(v. 42. Double sigma (a —) is sometimes produced by composition od words: ao-vc-orosr messmate from crvv with and hr-osfood (52). But usually it is the result of euphonic changes described in 58-60. Only in the latter case does it become Tr in the later Attic. 38 D. Syncope is frequent in Hm.: r[rt'e for ithroTe wherefore, ElCeXcEAso for e-Ice-ICEX-ETo he cried. 40 D. Hm. in many words doubles a consonant which is single in the common form, espec. a semivowel: eXa/ae for t-Aa/3e he took, qnxAojusjei$hs for cnAoAEL,8'S fond of smiles, Elvilvv'ros for e6-/yros well-spun, oaitov for -~orv quantum, 07r ac for'ato-co backward; —less often a mute: srrroos for rorws as, b-r' for oTL that, e~Eore for MELO-e he feared. In some words he has both a single and a double form:'AXLXAevs,'O8vraeiEs, less often'AXLe6s,'OavaOets. For some cases in llm. (Icauo-aat, v/,idYXAew etc.), in which a middle mute:s found doubled, see 73 D. 14 MUTES BEFORE MUTES OR LIQUIDS. [L43 43. Rho (p) at the beginning of a word is doubled, when, by formation or by composition, a simple vowel is brought beford it: pEw toflow,'-pEI't was flowing, KaTaC-PPjEC'v flowing down. - After a diphthong, p remains single: Ev-poosfair-flowing. REar. a. In other cases, p is the later Attic form, for po- in the earlier Attic and the other dialects: K'pprq temple, a9 aos cou'1age, for Ko'pOr, 3appoos.; Consonant- Chancges. MUTES BEFORE MUTES. 44. Before a r-mute, a 7r- or K-mute becomes co-ordinatN Thus, 3r and pr become 7rr rT and Xr become Kr "a " a Ka " X8a Y 771rt CC i 2; CC 4; K2; C K'i 7~ X5 Te7'Tp7rrat for rErpltf-rat XXACKra for XeXey-rat yEypa7rrTa yeypaf-raLt WdEKrat We3eX-rat ypci3?1v ypar-8q7v CrXfy jv 1rTK-8qV iXEl qcv eXEtc~r-?lv 7rXEX?V E7rXfK-2qV CTpL Joqv crptfi-Zliv d) ExIpv EXey-2qv REM. a. The combinations allowed by this rule (7rr, K, f38, y8, C1, X) and the double mutes in 40 (7r-, 7rr, 7r-,.r~, KK, KX), are the only combi nations of mutes with mutes, which occur in Greek. 45. A 7-mute before another r-mute is changed to -r. uare for ta-re rETreto7rra& for 7re7-et5-rat t'ct -L&2c f7TEL0 [ V VlSv 7rEL;-?V' But 7r and rt stand without change, when both letters belong to the stem: rarrco,'Ar-s I. MUTES BEFORE LIQUIDS. 46. Before j, a 7r-mute becomes 1u; a K-mute " 7; a r-mute " r. X)ietqi/at for XEXcErr-,aI 8Aeyiacl for &8&EX-/Cta r'ErptltJat TrE'pltf3-Latc 7re7racr/aac 7reZarT-UatL y ypa~caL YeYPac/-/lat E'1/IEvo-ltat E+ftEv-/Aat Ire7Xeyyat r7re7rXeK-/iaL t reTretolLat 7re7rcLt-patL 43 D. In Hm., p sometimes remains single, even after a simple vowel: EpEt from Se'c to do, c4)Kd-poos swift-flowing. 46 D. In Hm., a final K-mute or — mute in the: stem often remains un changed before Iu in the ending: Yic-/%evos favoring (stem Kic: iKcdaw to come), aKiaX-&Eos sharpened (stem atc or aX: Lat. acuo), l-&xAi Att. lo-uz smetll (stem o5: O'ow to smell, Lat. odor), B-Ixcev Att. touraev we know (stem LS: o?8a), KeIKoovUjufVor equirped (stem Kcopov: icooV~~w 61] N AND ~ BEFORE OThER CONSONANTS. 13 REM. a. This rule seldom fails, when a final mute- in the stem is fol lowed by th in the ending: aK-PI acme. In other cases it is not much observed: KE-K11-K~a am wearied out, i-rp5-~rqv was cut, pv-do'sV rhythm L-afpos isthmus. REMr. b. Before the other liquids, X, p, v, the mutes remain unchanged. Yet we find auvo's revered for aoO-vos (o4E3-optat to revere), and fpey&o's murky for epei3-vos ('pef3os thick darkness). MIUTES BEFORE E. 47. Before a-, a E-mute forms / (= -rcr); a K-mute forms K (= KC); a T-mute is dropped without further change, Xed4+o for XeLr-aco Kdpa$ for KopaK-S a- cdIaoc for o-co/ar —t rp I'co rpL-(TO-) qw'h oxoy-s AXLct CXnaLfcTL apc' ypao-co 8iq x-wx opVuYLL OpvLJ-oTC RE~M. a. The preposition et (== eK) in composition drops v before any consonant (54), but undergoes no further change:'K-Paivco to go out, not eyfatvYc, EK-oTrpareVo to march out, not efrparevo. N AND ~ BEFORE OTHER CONSO1NANTS. 48. N before a labial becomes /u; before a palatal becomes y (nasal); before X, p, is assimilated; before ca is dropped, and the preceding vowel is leng. thened.(31).'E/Lrav for ev-7ras oavyKato, for cvv-Katoco fXdcrco for ev-Xetr-co EfaLvo) erv-f3atlvo avyyEVqr crvv-yerl)E ovppeco a7l)Yvpeo flt; avr's ev-c])avv?]r orvyXeC avv-xeoo VZV e E pEXavE/A/*VxOs Ev.fVXo0 ly~E oA Ev-&Eco KTELs KrElY-v eLIEPV cO evJ-efJvo Xk5ovr'L Xvov-r-& 49. So also vr, v, v0, are dropped before or (47), and the preceding vowel is lengthened (31). Sovs for oyVr-s ~oreo-lO for aevr-o-o rdlo-oiatCL for wrtvZ-oolpat 50. Before &rt of the dative plural, the vowel remains unchanged, when v alone is dropped: uEXao-t, Xtqdcl, batUout, for kEXaV-o%, XkEv —%t, Saqov-crL. But when VT is dropped, the vowel is lengthened; 7raLT, 3.CoL Xvovo-t, for 7rav'r-a-t, evTr —t, XUovrT —L. Exc. a. Adjectives (not participles) in -edc make -eo-t, instead of -ELlt,.n the dative plural: Xaple(tL for Xapcvr-oa from Xapetr pleasing. 51. a. Before pt in the endings of the perfect middle, v is commonly changed to a-: /rafoaarat for reqbav-Iiat. 47 D. In Himi., a -mute is sometimes assimilated to a following ar: 7row-o for wro6-o Att. 7road to feet. 16 CONSONANTS AND VOWELS TRANSPOSED. [53 b, Before C- in the endings of the perfect middle, v retains its place. Trrefav-orat. Similarly we find Yr in the nominatives'Xpltv worm, Tiptlvs Tiryns, for iX/tvs-s, TLpvvz.-s (47). 52. In composition, iv before p, a-, retains v: fv-pv3.zov, e'v-ardaCca. 7raiv, rdXlv, before a-, retain v: rdv-aroq-os; or change v to a-: 7raXla —vros. av., before a- with a vowel, becomes a-vcr-: ava —TtLov; before r- with a cons., or A, becomes av-: aV-rfrtlMa, au —Cvyo. 53. N, brought by syncope before p, is strengthened by an inserted d: this happens in the declension of advp man: dsvpdv for avpos for advipos. Similarly, M before p is strengthened' by-an inserted A, in izeaI,3IplIa mnidday, south, for iUe-ot-1(e)pla from'(aaros and i/f~i pa. 54. Sigma (C) between two consonants is dropped: yeypad-. 9at for yeypa-cr3at, Ef3atvw for e~-/iawov (47 a). Not so, however, when initial r- is brought by composition between two consonants: fV-aCrdfwo not es-raco. 55. When two sigmas are brought together by inflection, one of them is dropped:,LeXea L for TretXo —o-, f'a-raa-ac for c-7rac —cat. 56. The combination a8, in some adverbs of place (204), passes into i: Pupalc out for Zvpac —8e. For r- omitted, in the nom. sing. 3d decl., see 156; in the 1 Aor. of liquid verbs, see 382; in the verbs d/Ltl to be and liuat to sit, see 406. CONSONANTS AND VOWELS TRANSPOSED (tletathesis). 57. The liquids (especially p, X) are subject to this change. Sa9pc-og (43 a) courage, also 3pac-os-; thus, too, aorist'-Zop-ov, present 2pc'-arKco; present fda-XXco, perfect 3e';-3Xrl-Ka; In the last four examples the vowel is also lengthened. 53 D. In a few Epic words, p before p or X is strengthened by an inserted I: e-axUco-cK a have gone (from stem /soA, by transposition /Ao, Axco, 57). At the beginning of a word, Ac before p or A becomes 3: B3Aco to go, from stem uOX. (cf. aocatcw from stem bop, 57); BSpords mortal, from stem nop, Azpo (57). Lat. mor-ior, mor-tuus. 55 D. In Hm., both sigmas are often retained: Fr'er-o'- Att. ffiret to words, &f-cr Att. ed thou art. 56 D. The Aeolic has o' for Cin the middle of a word; this is often found Ia I'heocritus: lexafo-w Att. sceMco to make melody. 57 D. Metathesis is very frequent in Hm.: capfrepds and Kparepds powerful, KdprLo-ros = Att. IcpdrLTrosr most powerful, best, from ICPdros power; a&ap7r4d Att. &rparss path, -rpareiotpev for TapreLotyev (stem repr: TeoD7ro to delight): similarly, gepatcov from 8epKc-ocua to see, Eirpaaov- from,roOa-o to destroy. 64J CONSONANTS BEFORE I. WITIT VCWELS. 1; CONSONANTS BrEFORE I. 58. The close vowel t, following a consonant, gives rise to various changes. Thus, frequently, 1. Iota, after v and p, passes over to the preceding vowel and unites with it by contraction. Xeglpav for Xep-zw raoveo for rev-tLc &retoLpa 8oreTp-ta Kcpna KpLV-IL alavoioat Viv-t2o/tat UpVCO (-V p-ltn REM. a. In like manner we have -ets, originally -Ec-, in the second person singular of verbs: XvEIt for Xv-Ert. 59. 2. Iota, after X, is assimilated. p.iaXXov for /iaX-t 6 - adXXor for aX-tov Lat. allus, Q-TrXwc a-,, So, too, in names of nations and compound words, which make the nom. in?V: Il;pao- (nom. II;po-rs Persian), yeco-treipa (nom. y7eco-trpr/ land-measurer). Other words in Vs haven in the voc.: KpovlaG (nor. KpoviBrls son of Cronus). REM. a. zAEio7rora, vOc. of &E7r1OTq minaster, has irregular accent (120). 136. The declension of masculines differs in only two points from that of feminines: a. The Nom. Sing. takes the case-ending s. b. The Gen. Sing. ends in ov. REM. C. In the Gen. Sing. of masculines, the proper ending is o, which with a of the stem gives ao (as in Homer); from this, by weakening a to e (25), and then contracting (32 d), comes ov the common form: 7roX'ra-o (7roXLreo) 7roXTrov. REM. d. In the Gen. Sing. of 3oppavS (contracted from /3ope;r north owind), the original ao has the Doric contraction to a: /3oppu. This occurs also in some Doric and Roman proper names, and in a few other words: v.XXav Sulla, i3pl'to2par bird-catcher, G. S. ~EXXa, 3pvwtosUpa. 137. Two masculines have an irregular acdecent in the Gen. P1. (128): XPOr-Tr usurer, G. P. xp'ororv (but Xprcrrov G. P. of the adj. Xpro-reV good), and ErI7-o-'ac annual winds, G. P. rloG-rlo. So also the fem. adqb5 anchovy, G. P. qc46cov (but d/v&wv G. P. of the adj. adtvi dully). SECOND DECLENSION (O-D)ecGlesiZOn). 138. To this declension belong stems that end in o. They are chiefly masculine and neuter, with a few feminines. The masculines and feminines have os in the Nom. Sing., the neuters ov. The feminines are declined like the masculines: the neuters differ from them in two respects: a. The Nom. and Voc. Sing. take v, the accusative-ending. b. The Nom., Ace., and Voc. Plur. end in a. 136 D. a. In some masculine words, iHm. has a Nom. Sing. in Ta for xers: i7irrdia for r7r-drts horseman, a'ie77czL for aixlr.ms.spearman, etc.: also, with accent thrown back, ImrIT[eT-a counsellor, &vcacgia favorer. So too ebpeovra far. sounding. Cf. Lat. poeta, scriba. b. In the Gen. Sing., Hm. has 1. -5o, the original form:'Arpei3ao. 2. -eco, the Ionic form (26 D):'Arpei'eco. This -ew in Him. is always sound ed as one syllable (37). The accent remains as in the original form (96). 3. -ce, a contraction of ao, used after vowels:'EpceLw (nom. Ep?&efas Att. Egpius), 13op~4 (nom. Bopeas, 136 d). 1411 SECOND DECLENSION. FEMININES. 37 Example. 6 Iv23pWroo rnman 0 o'v way 7r3 3&poV gift Stem. avtpcowro 60o acopo Sing. Nom. 6 a'vpcow7o-s d6o-s T 86pO-v Gen. Tro dv'pcnrov r7q 6bdoD roDv 8cpov Dat. rTO avprT T acop rCW 8d pp I Ace. Toy 6vlpO7ro-v TIv 6jo-v TO 63po-v Voc. CI O v po)E @ _ _ _'lpo-Y Du. N. A. V. To d, 6pc&rrO r 6 8cpco G. D. TOtL davSpo'rotv Tra zv OoLv rToWv &8pOtv Plur. Nom. OL avJpoWrOL al 6oM Ira L pa Gen. TrWv av6pCorvv Trv 08&v riiv 8pov Dat. TOiS avMpco7roLS TaL4 8 OLS roLs &opOtr Ace. TOVw dv2pcdrovg rTa 60 ov ra 8copa Voc. _ av@pcoVrol. 68oOt C 8fpa So rySor law, Kil3vOSr danger, raipor bul) 7roral6vO river, rgdvos labor, B1os life, aeTvaros death, 2eds god (1l1), - rv OS (fem.) island, oLKO,7fi~g, IEirpoV measure, LLC ILov outer garment. 139. The feminines may be known, in part, by the general rules (117): 71 0Jqnyds kind of 6ak, 7};v7rreosv vine, ~ r'retpov mainland,,l' 2 cos (the island) Samos, ~ K'dpLtso (the city) Corinth. Of the remaining feminines, the most important are a. Several names of mineral or earthy substances: 45tL4or sand yyv4or chalk, 7rXivor bri7:c, 0ro8O&' ashes, KO'drpov dung, +qjos Ipebble, 13aayro touch-stone. b. Several words that denote something hollow: XrqXos coffer, yva2or jaw, KqtOJTOS chest, copo's coffin, Xqvo'v wine-press, Kidp8orov kneadingtrough, KZaltvor oven. So rTa4pov trench. c. Several words for way': 6'sr, K;EXcvoS; carpamrosfoot-path, ocaLtrdo wagon-road; but 65 -re-voros narrrow passage. d. Several adjectives used as substantives: 71 bMafrpfov (SC. ypaeots line) diameter, av6yKXTros (sc. /3ovXr council) legislative assembly. e. Further, i1Xov book, 00 aJ3os staff~, 8&aXEKroS dialect, 6o' os disease. 0po(rOS dewz, BOKog beam. 140. In the Genitive Singular, the proper ending is o, which, by contraction with o of the stem, gives ov: avPropwro-o, da'3pcrov. 141. In the Vocative Singular of masculines and feminines, o of thX stem becomes e (25). But the Nominative is often used in place of the Vocative; in ze:s god, it is always so: Z Ed& (Lat. deus). REM. a. The vocative singular of aEXqb0s bsrother is /1AeXqe, with irregular accent (120). 140 D. In the Gen. Sing., HIn. has two forms, -o and -owo; in the latter of the stem is combined with-'an- earlier e-ndinog io: v'a pUcrolo. The Doric (but not Pindar) has sometimnes co for ov (24I1D d). Other peculiarities of dialect are the following: a. In the Gen. Dat. Du., Hm. has owu for ow: 6tIOvIY from,uos shoulder 38 SECOND DECLENSION. CONTRACT WORDS. [l42 142. In the Genitive Plural, o of the stem is always lost ink the ending o v: but this ending does not therefore (as in the A-Declension, 128) require the accent: avpworro-oov, avMpmoowv. 143. The Dative Plural (formed as in the A-Declension, 129) ended at first in oLOL; and this ending is found, not only in the other dialects, but often in Attic poetry, rarely in Attic prose. 144. Contract Substantives and Adjectives. Words which have stems in Eo, oo, suffer contraction. This takes place ao cording to the rules in 32 and 36 a. Example. 6 rovs mind r5 aoro v bone Stem. Voo O(TEOa Sing. Nom. (vJo-e) OV-S~ (aCro-v) 3oTro-v Gen. (voov)- roy (o0rTov) o-ro Dat. (vdP) reC3 (tdo-ri) 0orc7 Acc. (vo) o ro-v) oaO-) orov-v Voc. (vo'e) VoV (SoarEo-v) o00rov-v Du. N. A. V. (vo) V V (d co) oar7C G. D. (vootv) V0oV ( o-7riotv) o-ro70v Plur. Nom. (vo'o) VoiL (o-rEa) oira Gen. (vo)v &v (rio) dor Dat. (V'ot,) vo;E (o,TeoCS) doroiS Ace. (vodovs) vovd (o-riEo) 00or Voc. (vdol) Voi (orT) o-raii So 7rXors (from rX6oos) sailing, rrEpl7rXovs (7rep1rXoos) circumnavigation, povs (poos) streanm KavoYv (from Ka'VeoV, cf. 145 c) basklet (of cane). 145. The accent of the contract forms is, in some points, inconsistent with the rules in 98: a. The Nominative Dual, when accented'on the ultima, is oxytone: o-ro (froml orico) instead of aorfl. b. Compounds keep the accent on the same syllable as in the contract Nominative Singular: 7rrplTXovv (from wrpl7rXoos), dat. sing. 7rept&X (from,repLXao) instead of irepLrXo. c. Contracts are made in oVs from barytone adjectives of material in cos, and oxytone names of kindred in eds: dpyvpodg (not dpyvpovs, from dpyVpoos) of silver, (BXcXL8ovs (not -tLovs, fromn -tL&oS) brother's son. Attic Second.Declension. 146. The O-Declension includes a few stems ending in o. This o appears in all the cases; but takes; subscript where the b. In.the Dat. P1., Hm. usually has-ouri, Hld. always so. c. In the Ace. PI., the Doric (not Pindar) has cos or os for ovs: x4Vcws o! UDtcos for'icovs wolves. 144 D. The Ionic generally has the uncontracted forms. 156] TIltRDI DECLENSION. CASE-ENDINGS. 41 rorpse, r7aXv-r ear of corn, 7iEXrKv-C axe, 7nrXv-s fore-arm: also 60, / vor vi-E hog; to 1,, Voaitu (Efwr1r) dress, ro pC4 (for) light. --— to m, fem. Op5v (0peP) midriff, mind, dKrTI (aKrtv) ray, yXooXt t7Xo\XtvL) point of arrow,'It (Lv) strength, pLS (i6w) nose, co'8i (ovw) pang; aXKv v (aXKvov) halcyon, ElK@Cv (etKov) image, iV'bvi (qliov) shore, X2&v Q(3ov) earth, X1trv (Xtov) snow, tXixwov peennyroyal, zIjKoV pooppy. — to n, femn.?yarrZjp (yaorep) belly, Krp fate, Xeip hand; neut. rrip (r p) fire. REM. r. Th6"qollowing in r stand by themselves: fern. Sa[s (8atr) feast, Iv (vwKT) night, XaptS (Xaptr) favor, and neut. yaCXa (yaXaKr) milk. LEXL ([LEXLT) honey. 154. The CASE-ENDINGS are as follows: Masc. and Fem. Neut. Sing. Nom. s (or vowel lengthened) none Gen. os Dat. Acc. a or v none Voc. none (or like nom.) none Du. N.A.V. G.D. oLV Plur. N.V. s a Gen.. o Dat. c(v) Acc. s 155. The nominative, accusative, and. vocative singular of NEUTER words are like the stem. Final r of the stem is either dropped (75), or changed to s (76): o-S)ua (for o-wuaTr) body, Te'pag (for r7paT) Iprodigy. 156. The NOMINATIVE SINGULAdr of masculines and feminines adds s to the stem. But stems in v, p, 0, o, oovr, reject the end. ing, and lengthen c, o, to V, o: thus XltLuY (XtEV) harbor, prwop (pqrop) orator, Tptpl)ppv (rptupeS) trireme, reL23 (rEL'o) persuasion, XEXVKgO (for XEXvroor 76, st. XXVKOTr) hoaving loosed, Xccov (for XEcovr 75, st. XEOVr) lion. For the euphonic changes caused by s, see 47-49. 153 D. n. Several poetic stems (most of them defective) in op, wp, are neuter: top sword,'-0op heart, eAxop prey, r-qcoIwp = TEtIK'ap bound. 154 D. a. In the Gen. Dat. Dual, Hm. has our for oev: wro8oZv. b. In the Dat. P1., Hm. has both O1 and saer: lray (for iravYT-c) and rdr.Ca0-; (rarely eeL:.t'y-eL.) The e of E0-0L is sometimes omitted when the stem ends in a vowel: vrv-obr,,rexe'e-,L. The irreg. Eo-o-l (from 6r-s sheep) should perhaps be written ori-0o, But in forms like E~reee-, = Ere + oL (55 D), the first a belongs to the stem' go in 81Erao-o', and nroaff( = wo3-o (41 D), Ypcrai = tpinfflat 42 THIRD DECLENSION. CAS-FORTIrAON. [150o Exe. a. Stems in wt take s, though some of them have both forms: &3eXtcs or 8EXc'v dolphin. b. Participles in oVr take s, when o belongs to the verb-stem: UoVs (= ao-cr-S) giving. c. s appears alsoin L;Xac (= FeXaa-r) blalck, radcg (= raXav-r) wretched, ekL (= Ci-sY) one, KTELs (= KTEV-S) comb, oauovs (= o8orr-S) tooth. 15-7. The ACCUSAiTIVE SINGULAR of masculines and feminines adds a to stems ending in a consonant: 7rolvsfoot, ace. rwo8a. v to stems ending in a vowel: 7ro-Xt-s city, ace. 7roXt-v. Exo. a. Stems in ev take a: f3aLaiXEae-s king, ace. f3ao-tX-a (39). For the ace. sing. of stems in o, see 193-4. For v in the ace. sing. of certain stems in r, &, 7, see 171. 158. The VOCATIVE SINGULAR Of masculines and feminines is regularly like the stem. For dropping of a final consonant, see 75. But many words make the vocative singular like the nominative: thus a. Stems of one syllable, not ending in a diphthongr: nom. voc. Kl-5 Aveevil (but nom. ra-s ship, voc. ra). —— Only nraiv (r-a8) child makes voc. sing. 7ral (75). b. Oxytone stems ending in a liquid: nom. voc. 7rot(tv (tropeY ) shepherd (but aalitcor divinity, barytone, voc. MaLuov like the stem). For irregular vocative in 7raT7p father, dzuip man, see 173: also in ecorljp savior,'Anr-oXCv, I-Iovo&v, see 172 b. c. Stems ending in a mute: nom. voc. bvfXa$ ( UvXaiK) watchman. —-- But the following are exceptions, and use the stem as a voc. sing.: Exc. d. A few stems in L8: voc.'AprepL (- Aprewp), nom. "Apreqtl. So voc. nral (-= nra), nom. rrats child. Also y~vaL (= yvvatL) with irregular accent, nom. yvvy, woman. e. Substantive and adjective stems in vr, unless oxytone: voc. XioP (- XEovr), nom. XEac lion, XapLeV (= XapteVr), nom. Xapert p2leasing. REM. f. All participles of this declension make the vocative singular like the nominative. So also the adjectives.rnas (7rav7) all, every, and EK&o (Ekorr)'willing. For the vocative singular of stems in o, see 194 a. 159. The DATIVE PLURAL of all genders adds oa-(v) to the stem. For the euphonic changes, see 47-49. 160. ACCENT. In the accent of this declension, we have the following special rule, contrary to 120: 156 D. c. For b3ods, Hd. has ObcY according to the rule. 158 D. c.. From &vat king, Hm. has, beside the regular voc. sing. tval, a form dvca (fcr avacr', 75) used in addressing gods.-e. From some proper names in -as (stem -av-), he forms a voc. sing. in -a: nIovxvadla (cf. 31), foi lovAvsapuar(r), nom. rlovAvid/cas Polyddmvas. 163] ACCENT. LABIAL AND PALATAL STEMS. 14 Stems of one syllable, in the Genitive and Dative of all numbers, throw the accent on the case-ending: if the case-endmg is long, it receives the circumflex (121): Thus ro6v (7roa) foot, ace. sing. vro'-a, nom. pl. 7r6o-er; but genitives 7roa-d&, 7ro83-ov, roa —wv, datives 7ro-i1, 7ro-olY, 7ro-T-. Exc. a. All genitives and datives of participles: C v being, gen. oTros, OVTOLV, ovrwov, dat. OGTL, OVTOLVI OU(Vt. b. The gen. and dat. plural of 7ras all, every: radvrwov, 7rat. c. The gen. dual and plural of 7ra7r boy. girl, ap&4~ slave, zcbe jackal, Tpcov Trojan, rTO bS light,?'cs blister, as torch, ro ovs ear 6 O'smoth: 7ralacov, a,/zov, ZcoWr, Tpzcov, bcoTov cv, w, rvo, aCcov. d. Some words in which a stem of two syllables is contracted to one: gap spring, gen. capoS or i/po), dat. EapL or- pl. 161. QUANTITY. Several stems lengthen a short vowel in monosyllabic forms: st. 7ro8, nom. sing. wro;v (for 7roa-r) foot; st. 7ravr, neuter raiv all; st. 7rop, nom. sing. rvppfire; st. a-v, nom. sing. o'v-s hog. 162. The PARADIGMS of this declension will be given in the following order: 1. Stems ending in a labial or palatal (7r, 3, cq, K, y, X). 2. a lingual mute (r, 8, s). 3. a liquid (X, v, p). 4. the sibilant (a). 5. a simple close vowel (t, v). 6. a diphthong (ev, av, ov). 7. the open vowel o. 163. I. Stems ending it a LLabial or Palatal. O c uXa a Ai4,\+ 7? a-6XrZy m y (qxCaK) (OX6A) (a-aXrwyy) (Tptx) watchman vein trumpet hair Sing. Nom. ~v a AM- iX7rty Ip Gen. /'nXaK-oS Xe3-o's. aAX7rLyy —O:' 7XptX-o Dat. V.XaK-i dXq3-i ("oa7rtyy-L rptX.4 Acc. 4wX aK. d /A/3-a a adX7rLyy-a TpIx-a Voc. - OvXa$.'e4, a-'X7rey$ BpLI Du. N. A. V. VXaK-E' t x/o. a-Xa,7y-e TrPLX-E G. D. NVXaK-o'V / Ef/3-o. a-X7rL'yy-OLV TpLx-oLV Plur. N. V..vXaK-ae X/ei3-eV a-dX7rtyy-ev. rpLX-eV Gen. cvXaK-Cov AXefI-&Ov araX7rLyy-AV TpLX-cOV Dat.- /.iXaa& q)AXEL uaixrtyz. BJtptL Ace. - XacLK-'' X//-a - (a-dX7rLyy-as -rptx-av So 6 -yv, (yTor) vulture, 6' ASIoloa' (AteO7w) Aethiopian, 6 4Apa4, (Apa3) Arabn (IK) anta, o pia-6 (opaa-iy) a whip, 1 ('7X) cough,,) c'pbuy$ (Oopauyy) lyre. 4l TIIRD DECLENSION. LINGUAL STEMS-NEUTER. [lT3 For the gender, see 152 o. For the formation of the nominative, ao, cusative, and vocative, singular, see 155-8. For the change of aspiration in 2p'L, rpLXdO, see 66 a. 164. The stem aXcowrec makes nom. sing. 77 aXcnri7j fox irregularly for aXco7re (gen. dXrreKor, dat. dXn7EKt, etc.). On the contrary, the stems KpVK, dpOLVZK, make nom. sing. o6 K6pv~ herald, 6 olivLt palm, where the accent shows that v and L were sounded short (93 b): but many editors write K'pV,) jOlL$. II. Stems ending in a;inzgual lXte (-r, 3,?). 165. A. Neuter Stems. TO acoxLa body TO 17Irap liver rO KEpaU horn (0T-60 ), (w76T) (KEpTr) Sing. Nom. crwa = r'ap KEpaS Gen. a6-uar —os iyrar-ov KEpda-oS (Kepaor) KfP o.S Dat. cocariT-L 77rar-t KEpar-L (Kepa') Kpa Ace. acria irap KEppaS Voc. ao-ca r7rap Kipa' Du. N. A. V. o-,4,ar-e, 7'7raTr-E K"par-e (KEpae) Kipa G. D. octoair-otv y7wTar-otv KpcJar-oLV (Kepaotv) Kepcv Plur. N. V. o-aTc-a?Tar-a KEpaor-a (KEpaa), Kpa Gen. o-o6ar-cov i7Trair-ov KEpa —arv (Kepacov) Kep&OV Dat. co-&acLt ir7raot KEpa(t Ace. carLT-a J -a Kepar-a (Kepaa) KEpa SO o-rda (-rTo/alr) mnouth, o'vooua (ovojiaT) name, iAxeap (8XeaTr) bait rEPpaO (Tepar) prodigy. 166. Here belong the stems in aT-, together with ya'Xa (yaXaKr) milk, dXxtc (LeX~tr) honey, and /&FS (bcor) light. Of stems in ar, by far the greater part end in,ar: these drop r in the nom., ace., voc., sing. (75); rpaiyt/a (7rpayxayr) affair. 167. Several in ar have ap in the nom., ace., voc., sing.: OpEap wlell, gen. qpEaT-or (also contracted Opr/roS), aXle)ap (also aXEltqa) unguent, gen. aXfLqar-or. It is supposed that these ended originally in apr, and that r has been dropped in the cases above named (75), but p in all the other forms. "'Yaop (Bar) water and craop (Kar) filth have o irregularly for a in the same three cases. 168. A few in ar have as in the nom., ace., voc., sing. (76): vrlpav end, gen. 7ripar-ovq. KEpaE (Kepar) horn and rTpav ( epar) prodigy sometimes _ _. 166 D. For pss, Hm. has only cpdos or q6ws (cf. 370 D a), dat. ccdeL, plural d~ea. qpdos is used also by Attic (Tragic) poets. 168 D. In Icepas, TrEpas, the forms with r are not used in the Ionic. Im., has the forms with a pure: icpaos, icepaY; and sometimes contracts them: cedpq. Rd. changes a pure to c, and does not contract' Kepid, Tepea. —For irepas WfpaTos, Imr. has 7respap, 7retpaTos. 171] LINGUAL STEMS-MASCULINE AND FEMININE. 45 drop r between two vowels; the vowels are then regularly c, ntracted. In such cases, it is probable that r was first changed to cr (62 a), and then dropped according to 64. For vyovv (gen. ydvar-or) knee, aopv (gen. aopar-os) spear, and ovr (gen. wr-os) ear, see 202, 3, 5, 13. 169. B. Masculine and Feminine Stems. I3 g iXrrI - iplS - gjIpvtr I Y7P90 (Zq7T) (EXnrL8) (epta) (opVn) (yrpovr) {_________ hired man hope strife bird old man Sing. Nom. Xr&s tit b f'ppl OpVS YEpc I Gen. 3r-os E'hXrl-os Ef'pl-oS o'pVt-os y/povr-os Dlat. ZrT-Li X[L'a-& epLt- Opm2L3-L y'porr-L Ace. j r-a -;Xfr8-a EpLV OpVL V yepovr-a Voc. T irSe EXl__ dp pVlV yfpol Du. N. A. V. irT —E fiXnrl-e feptl-e pVL-e yEpovr-E G. D.?Irp-onv XnLr8-otv ipS-Omv ) OpVtJ-OLV yepo'Tr-otv Plur. N. V. Z1r-Es;X7rXl8-eS epL8-Es opVLt-Es 7eporr-~Es Gen. Zpir-&v friO-cov ipal-ov c pVl3-ov yWEpdvr-owv Dat. q -ci EX7rtL epLctL dpV1rL yipovoAce. SrJT-aS;7Xrrla - as apvt3-av yppvtoT-ar So 0 1V6$ (vvKr) night, j Xap7rasd (Xaurdab) torch, j X'pL (Xapir) favor, 6 ylyav (yL/avr) giant, o XEowv (XEovr) lion. For some irregular forms of'pVLtr bird, see 202, 12. 170. In the Nominative Singular, 7rovs (7roS) foot lengthens the short vowel, contrary to 47, see 161. Aaiyap (8atzapr) wife, chiefly poetic, rejects s on account of the harshness; see 156. 171. In the Accusative Singular, barytone stemns in r:, 8,, after a close vowel, commonly reject the final mute, and annex v to the close vowel. This applies to barytone stems in ir, La, Lt, vS, vs. Thus Xa'pis (xapTr) favor, ace. Xaptrv, rarely xapLr-a; but Kpeirril (Kpl7r/8) base, oxytone, ace. KpprL7a, never KpqrItv. Only the oxytone KXL'S (KXelt) key has in the ace. sing. KX&Ev (rarely KXEida), and in the ace. pl. KXELS or KXEBMas. 169 D. A few stems in wr- have forms without - (cf. 16fi8 D). XpcSs (Xpwr) skin is declined in Ionic, Xpcs, Xpo&r, Xpol, Xpda. Hm. has also, but rarely, XpWTJs, Xp'Cra. Even the Attic has dat. sing. Xpg in the phrase Ei Xpw cdose by. From Isp&s (Wipoo) sweat, yiEAws (yeAwr) laughter, &'pws (epwr) love (also epos, 2d declension, poetic), the forms with - are unknown to Itm. He has only dat. Bing. ispc, ytx, e'q, p and ace. ispcJ,?yAxco (or ydwX', 2d decl.), fpov. 171 D. In HJm., words of this class often form the Acc. Sing. in a: EplSa more frequent than EpIZv, 7yavKi67r8Sa from AauKWv7rts bright-eyed. For tcAeis, HIm. uses the Ionic Kct;i, -ace. sing.- KIA7lbi the Doric has xhaits (Lat. clavis), rarely Ktad. {6 TIlIRD DECLENSION. LIQUID STEMS. L172 172. III. Stems ending in a; Ifquid. 6 notrocfv 6 6aiaov' a.chvw 6 Zp g p6Tp P (7r0oLfe)' (8aLtov) (acov) (Zp) (I top)' shepherd divinity age woild beast orator Sing. Nom. 7rocijv altcov auiv - 2iP p rcop Gen. -7rot'iv-Ov Gatlov-o9 aL'ov-o9?t7p-o'S prop-osv Dat. 7rotlEV-L aalov-L a6Z.L?p-iL eqrop-L Ace. 7rotlEv-a 8altzov-a a1i6 v-a Zrp-a-. rop-a Voc. 7rOtMv.-aqLOv atloJ cvp PTiOp Du. N. A. V. 7roltLEV-E 6aljov-E alvW-e?7p-E pqrop-e G. D. 7rOl;EV-ot-OL8V aaV-O L C-OlV J?7p-OLV prTp-OLV PlurN.N V. 7roL,LEv-Es al-lov-Er acv-er ~p-'Es - - op-e S Gen. 7rot&'J-oov_.aLIo6v-cov al-c - qp-op-v v Dat. r-oto-&lc daoo' & aLo'Fo-. qp-or' erop-o'&L Ace. 7rotcE'v-a-r alEpov-av. al cLv-a(I I p-a I pqrop-a | So 6 p6V (p qv) month, 65 XIt/,Uv (XLq/v) harbor, 6 qyc/qV (,?eMov) leader, n ratav (rulav) paean, 6 dcycv (aycov) contest, 5 ali p (at9ep) aether) 6 Kparnp (Kpar]p) mixing-bowl, 6d 0op (qcop) thief. a. The only stem in X is AX, nom. 6 /XE5 salt, a/Xrs (poetic) sea. b. In the Voc. Sing., aoraip savior,'ArodXcov, and 1loaTELOPV shorten the long vowel of the stem, and throw the accent back upon the first syllable: -ccrep,"ArroXXov, HII6o'C( v. -The accent is also thrown back in some compound proper names:'Ayapi;vcwv,'APLrTTOYEiTry), OC.'Ayai-,UM/Otvv, ApLoryErLToV. 1 73. Syncopated Stems in Ep. Ilar7'p (7rarep) father makes the vocative singular like the stem, but with the accent on the first syllable, contrary to 120: rairEp. In the genitive and dative singular, it drops e and accents the case-ending (cf. 160): -rarp6o, 7raTpl. In the other cases, it retains E and accents it: nrarTpa, 7rarepers. Only in the dative plural, by metathesis and change of vowel,;p becomes pci -rarpcicr. The same peculiarities belong also to inrjnp mother, Zvydrqp daughter, and -yacr'rp belly.-The proper name AtIT?7p (vocative AijDIrep) syncopates all, the oblique cases, but accents them on the first syllable: AgjTrlpOv, Aqlnrpa.-'ArT p (aTrep) star has no syncopated forms, but makes dat. pl. (o-Trpa-t. 172 D. b. The Epic &aap (8aep) husband's brother has voc. sing. Maep. 173 D. The poets often have the full forms in the gen. and dat. sing.: 7ra-?repos and rcaTpds. In Jv'd7i7p, they sometimes syncopate other cases: W-?arpa,,Ti6'aTpes, vuyaup&v; this happens also in nra'Tp&k for wrar epwv. In the dat. pl., the Epic -Ea-a may be used: vruya7Tpetol. From ayvp, the poets use'av'pos,'avepes, etc., as well as &vOp6s, 60pes, etc.; in the dat. pl., Hm. has both iv pdos and &vpcowr. 1LQ5] UQrD sTEMIS. 47'AviYp (avep) man follows the analogy of rar'rp, but syncopates all the eases.in which ep comes before a vowel: it also inserts 8 between v and p, to strengthen the sound (53): dva6pdr, avape r, avpact. 6o rarr0p i 7 Tr7rl7p vyairrp 6 dvip,!4(rarep) I (,q7ep) (2vya7fp) (avep) father mother daughter man - Sing. Nom. 7rar ip 7Ur lp Svydrqp avqp Gen. 7rarpos /lorpod wvyarpo' dvapds Dat. rrarpl!,tLrpL vyarpl dvSp, - Ace. vrarsp-a Imp-TP`-a?jvyar'p-a av'paa Voc. 7rarrp,I LTeEp vyatrEp __ _p Du. N. A. V.;arvp-e Irlrep-E Svyarep-e - aSvape G. D. 7rarTp-otv IrtlrEp-otL,'Zvyarep-otv dvapotv Plur. N. V. 7raarEp- / lrTEp-er 2ivyarep-eSr'vpeS Gen.. rarcp-ov zre'p-co Zvyar4p-cov avapcov Dat. 7rarparc t Lqrpao-, yvtyacrpatl dvapdTL Acc. 7rarTp-ar ntr1epI-ar vyarEp-as avapart 174. Conmparative Stems in ov, Adjectives of the comparative degree in ov, (stem ov) drop v i1 certain forms, and then contract the concurrent vowels. Masculine and Femninine. Neu-ter. Sing. Nom.'ielAyc v greater tCel7OV Gen. fle[ov-os XE[Iov-OE Dat. IELfobV Idlov-. Ace..te fov-a [tIetco-a] /teltco /el coV Voc. Aido Cv i EfoLOv | Du. N. A. V. PLEI1ov-E LoELOV-f G. D. LE1COV-OLV flOeCdV-Otv Plur. N. V. t Efov-e,,[tjeLto-Evj'LCEOVg fLzELOV-a iEdLt-o-a] tEL;'O Gen. ifJl-o'V........ -Fl;v-COY Dat. pELofL ( oEL OO, Ace.,ELfov-aS [ftpfo-uaS],FEL;ovq,AtFLv-a [,etSo-a] Le'ico So SeXTloV better.aicXaloov more Ahamefui dX7ylov more painful. 175. a. In comparatives of more than two syllables, the forms which end in ov throw back the accent on the antepenfilt: fi3Xrtov, alCoXLov. b. The forms with v and the contracted forms are both in use. The intermediate forms (as!kettoa) are never found. c. According to the same analogy,'ArrdXXov, IIOo-et8v malke in thl ace.'Ardoh'cora and'ArrdoXo, loret6oSva and [Ioa-e6to. For substantive stems in ov which occasionally drop v, see 194 c. 175 D. The statement in b. applies also to 1Hm. and Hd. —— The contract ace. of'A7r4dXXcv and IIooaersr is not used by Hm. and ild., but froram vUe&Cd asixed dr ctagh t Hm. makes ace. sing. ICVUEC or KIvUELO. 48 THIRD DECLENSION. STEMS IN 8. t[176 IV. Stevns ecding t,] i. 176. A. Stemns in es. ro yevoSe race M.I. E yEvy1e N. eyerveS well-born _ _ (yf ev6) (EV7EVfS) S. N. 7E~yEo MA. F. Evyev'vS N V. Eev YEe G. (Ev-oe) evov (eVr-EV ) EyYVOVs D. (ye've-i) yI'etL (EfyrVE-i ) evYEJEL A. y vO (ev;yev-a) N. EV7EVE. V. vYevoS evrye_.s Dual. (ye've-a) yv -L- (evyEer-e) eYerYe'. (yfvd-otv) y EVoV (eVryeV-Otv) EVYEVOLV P. N (^yiYe-a)'yiy7i (eyrve-es) cvyYvevL N. (EuyEvz-a) EvyEvTj G. (yEve-ov) yvev) (cbyeve-cov) evyervo D. YeVCOL EvYyeveTL A. (y7Yve-a) yE'vq7 (evyrW-as) eVyeyeLE N. (rEVyrve-a) EvyEP1 So ro deoS formn Ka'XXoE beauty, ue;Xov song. Adjectives (raors (neut.'adpis) clear, abptf3s' ( dKp,3es) exact, ievqs (ev'reS) simple. 177. The stems in es are very numerous. The substantive stems are neuter, and change er to os in the. nom. sing. (25). The adjective stems retain es in the neut., but change it to r7s in the nom. mase. and fem. (156).'H rpt ptS (rp,7pES) trireme, and some others in rpqv6, though used as substantives, are properly adjectives, belonging to an implied vais sship. 178. Before all case-endings, s falls away (64). The vowels, which come together, are then contracted. —e in the dual gives 7 (contrary to 32 d). —ea coming after a vowel gives a (contrary to 32 b): Lytsv (vyter) healthy, acc. yti& (but also vytiO), xp;or (Xpees) debt, neut. pl. Xpia. But adjectives in (bvr7 have both Ovij and iva': ecqvrjs witty, evc/v7 and evqva. For contraction of eas to EtE in the ace. pl., see 36 b. 179. Barytone words in 7r7 have recessive accent (97) everywhere, even in contract forms: GCKpad7-r), voc. JSKpareS (not rogKpaTEs) 120), avr-aPK79 self-svuicing, neuter av'rapKEr, gen. pl. (arl-apK'oov) aVer(pKcov (not TVrapKCJv, 98). 176 D. The uncontracted forms prevail in Hm.; yet he often contracts e' to EL in the dat. sing., and sometimes EEs to es in the nom. pl.- In the gen. sing., he sometimes contracts eos to evs: tdpeuvs from adpaos courage. ICxKAos fame makes nora. pl. ic4a for tcXeEa.-In the dat. pl., Hm. has three. forms: 9EAX-Ea1ot, $BXeA —a, and &/Xe-o-L (55), from,3'os missile. iEd. has only the uncontracted forms. 1(8 D. In Hm., a vowel before the eis sometimes contracted with it: E" AXcSs glorious, acc. pl. ebvcAeras for evicAeeas; but &TyatcXpos for a&yacCXEEos gen. of a&yacXEsS (in a'CXVerS for &KAEes, the first e is irreg. lengthened to ). —-- crEoS' or oirezos cave has gen. aorelovs, dat. q-7rri (for re6E-i'), dat. pl. a71rcEt (fo re-ea') and irreg. rE' —ov-z Oosfear has irreg. gen. &e[ous. 184] STEMS IN Z. 49 The neuter dX/;rs (M. F. adXrl-sq ) true throws back the accent when used as a question: a'AXqler; really? 180. Proper names in KXe)Sr, compounded with KXeoS (KX1EE) fames have in some forms a double contraction: nom. (IlEptKXfrqS) IlEptKX'sV, gen. (lIEPLKXEEoS) 1EFPLKXf'OVS, dat. (IIEPLKXEe'F, IEpLKXel) PIIeptKXe, ace. (IfpIKXEa) pEPLKXa&, VOC. (HuptLKXEE) JIpplKXELS. 181. B. Stems in a, o;, wos. Ti0 KpEaS flesh iq ai8sw shcame 6 ojpcso (Kpear) (at.os) hero Sing. Nom. KpEas a LZs' jp(o Gen. (Kpea-oC) Kpeco (at8'-or) aI6oi3 i"po-os Dat.' (Kpea-4) KPe'a aiso-L a7Po-( Acc. cKpeaS (alo'-a) aWi' ripco-a VOC. Kpeav at's6r qrpos Du. N. A.. r7pco-e G. D. _tpCO-oLV Plur. N. V. (Kp&ea-a) KpEa. ]pw-es Gen. (KpEa-0oV) KpeC, Opv-V Dat. Kpeacrl &'pO-o Ace. (Kpea-a) Kpa. e7ipoW-ar 182. These stems are few in number, and all substantives. Those in aS are neuter: r7i yripar old age, Tr KvENas darkness. Those in sr are masculine: o zs rjackal, o6 ftlpcooS mother's brother. In os there are but two, both feminine: aiG8sr (atLos) shame, and Epic 7rA (y~oy) morn (= Attic Erg) which is declined according to 146 and 148). 183. These all drop s before a case-ending, like stems in Es. In the dat. sing., ai is contracted to a: vypa (for ypai), though some would write yijpat. —The quantity of a in the contracted nom., ace., pl. is variable.- In late writers, KpEav has forms with r: KpEaror, etc. (cf. 168). 184. The dat. and ace. sing. of cipos are usually contracted: q'p%, ipco (for'po'i,,pcoa); so, sometimes, the nom. and ace. pl.:,'pco (for,pIEr, VtpCoas). Some of the stems in cos have occasional forms according to the Attic Second Decl.: gen. sing. i'po, ace.,ipor. 180 D. Hm. declines'HpaicXenr,'HpaKwcXos (178 D),'HpacAi^;'Hpatcxi~a,'HpdAeLs. —— Hd.'HpatcAEs,'HpacAkeos,'HpatcAEh,'HpaKAea,'HpcaKceE, one e being rejected before endings that begin with a vowel. 182 D. Stems in as. Hm. always has a for aa in the nom., ace., pl.: ydpa prizes, S6ra- cups; he sometimes contracts in other cases: o-e'x, icpewv or KpECLv,. —— oas ground, floor, ccVarfleece, ie'rpar possession, in all other forms take e for a: ovtSeos ovOie oiv'er, Iccea Kc6El,, IKCTpea rCTepEWZ funeral-gifts: so also poetic &pEras, BpfTeos,, image. Cf. yyipea Hd. for?yfpaa. The only con. tract forms in Hd. are icpda, Kipei. -Dor. icpis = Kpeas. The two stems in os always show the contract form, even in Hm, and Hd. From stems in ws, Hm. has ipwi' and i~S, Mtvwa and Mtv,. 50 T11Rm DECLENStON. STEMS IN I AND Y. [185 185. V. Stemis in t and v (simple close vowels). t n 0 X r X6 rrxvs To a'arvv g6 -6 LX6v N(7roXt) (7rqXv) (ar-v) (AV) (iX'V) city fore-arm city mouse iA Sing. Nomr. 7ro6X-l rxv-s aYrv IUV-' Gen. 7ro'XE-co r7rXEC-Co (rcre-os L-V-OS LX-o Dat. (rOXE-i) X afrf-L IV.L LXJV-L rrdXELt flXEL daorrr Ace. 7rOdXL-v 7OXV-V aoruv Mv' - ix' v' Du. N. A. V. o7rdOe-c q7XE e af' E,X T e LXV -e O.D. rroM~-o wu nr)x~-o t crg0-ot, tv-oly lXff'-ot G. D. irO-E'-Otv 7T7XEOV ( OTEOIV 7LV-OLv,zyV-OLv Plur. N. V. (ro'XE-e) reE) (a'oTre-a) /IV-ev LXJV-EE. rrAt 7qdXLt XLv arq Gen. IaroXE-uv 7rl7XE-Cv'CrTE-COv /I v wv LXJ-wJ Dat. TrAEc-ctL 7?XE-O't adrTE-rL /Lv-rL I XltCLZ-o Acc. (7roXeav) (7r?1XE-as) (do-re-a) pv-as or I''-as or 7rOXEts rt Xq do) a rr PO LXtvS - So r 8vatL-r power, o-Crdo —r faction, 6 7r1XEKv-s axe (like rf7xvC), 6'i r-v-s swine (like /s-), o6 30drpv-s cluster of grapes (like'XSvs). 186. The final t or v of the stem always appears in the nom., aec., and voc., sing. Elsewhere, it is generally changed to e. Contraction then occurs in'the dat. sing. and in the nom. and ace. pl. For car contracted to Elp in the acc. pl., see 36 b. The nom. and ace. dual are seldom contracted (EE to rq, cf. 178): 7ro'Xr, aolrq. After e, the gen. sing. takes os, the so-called Attic ending, which, however, does not prevent the accent from standing on the antepenult (96): 7ro'Xeco, 7rFIXEXO. The gen. pl. follows the accent of the gen. sing.: 7r6Xocov,,rTXEov. The neuter a7-rv has gen. sing. a'creos, less often ao'TEWos. 186 D. Stems in I. The New Ionic retains t in all the forms, but contracts t in the dat. sing. to i, and tas in the ace. pl. to is. Thus Sing. rd4Ais, rJdAios,.d4A5 rdJ,, 7rG'm, P1. rGALes, nroxAte,, 7rd'trA, wrGxAs. The older editions of Hd. admit other forms to some extent, as dat. sing. arGdcX, nom. pl. 7rdMxs, ace. pl. rdALas or wrGActs. Hm. changes t to e before t in the dat. sing. and ai in the dat. pl. Thus Sing. )rJXts, 7rxrdlo, 7r6xei or rJAXe, tr4'Aw, 7rJA, P1. 7rALES, roALov, rJ'A~o- or wroAeom0, 7rdmras. In the dat. sing. and ace. pl., he sometimes has the contract forms of the New Ionic: Kedr dat. sing. of Ko'ir dust, a&KOCs ace. pl. of 1&KOt-LS wife. He even uses Trdtacs for 7rdtLas. From rd6Ars itself, Hm. has also a peculiar form with 7: rbd.7os, 7roMrx', 1r4AXes, mrdA7as. —For the datives -7re.Xceao, 6O-OE-, see 154 D. Stems in v. The Ionic always has os in the gen. sing. Hm. sometimes contracts si to e, vi' to vm, in the dat. sing., and vas to Vs in the ace. pl.: WriXeL, tXUv?, iXaOs.. —. Hd. has only the contraction of vas to vs. For the'datives wicvuooia,,rtrOvaO-, see 164 D. 190] DIPHTHONG-STEiMS. 51 187. a. Most stems in t follow the formation just described. So too all adjective stems in v: these, however, take os in the gen. sing., and have no contraction in the neuter plural: 7XvKwV-s sweet, 7XV~K-Or, 7XVK;-a. Even in substantives, such forms as 7rO6XEos, 7r-xcos, are sometimes found, especially in poetry. b. Most substantive stems in v preserve this vowel through all the cases. wv in the dual and plural may be contracted to v: ixZB (for iXSv), t'X2s (for?XzeEs): the aec. pl. generally has ov for vas (33). 188. "EyXeXvs eel is declined like iXsrv in the Sing., but like,r7Xv;9 in the Pl.: gen. sing. EyXXv-os, nom. p1. EyXetXEt. The poetic adjective'1pLs (tpL) knowing retains the final t of the stem in all the cases. 189. VL Stemzs ending in a Dipithong.. 6 <3arLXkE-s o f30o-Y i ypav- ri v-v 7cing ox, cow old woman ship Sing. Nom. 3aarLh-t X- - O[o- ypaP-S rav-s Gen. f3aO(tX'-Ow I3e-o's ypa-o.s E-oS) Dat. (Oa3w -tX) 3aCaXEL,ra 13-t ypa-t vq-L Acc. -3aLtXe-a 3o3-v ypad-v vav-z VOC. 8aoTLXEV., aoi3 ypa vayu Du.. A. V. aottX-e [3o-e ypa-e vl-e Plur. N. V. (acrltXi-cE) faortXrLc I 30-e ypa-s A ij v-s Gen. /3aao-tLX-oWc o-v.._ ypa-wv Ve-CV Dat. facrLXEv-ot'ov-fo'L ypav-o' av-oa Acc. 3acrXe-Ev N -s - ypav-s vai-s So 6 yovev-s Yparent, d kepEu-5 priest,'O8vaco-s,'AXLXXE6-Y. 190. The final v of the diphthong disappears before all vowels, according to 39. —The stem vav, after dropping v, becomes v? before a thort vowel-sound, ve before a long one. In regard to stems in ev, observe that a. the gen. sing. has ws instead of or, cf. 1,86. b. the dat. sing. always contracts ci to E. 189 D. Stems in vu. Id. has only the uncontracted forms. Hm. has 7 instead of e, wherever-v falls away: 13craXesSs, acaAlrEv, ia3cXeva'z but 3aoriXios, 9ao'tAri, etc., dat. pl. &ptre-ooLt. Yet in proper names, he often has e: IlvXnos and rI14,Eos, MIAix' and rInvx6e., etc.; rarely with contraction: gen.'Oavo-eos, dat.'AXlAkxE acc. Tv&.. Bovs Dor. I3c~s, ace. sing. /,o9v Dor. /v Kone in rHm.): IIm. has in dat.?1. Veoosi and,Bovi, acc. pl.,o'as and hoys.-; —-rpas: UHm.rl as only,ypnvs (11 D) and'ypivs,- dat. ypt", voc.?ypv and yp7y.,-. Nas is declined by Hm., nom. sing. vqUs (11 D), gen. (v7$s,) veos, dat. 7tI, acc. (vmia,) eta, nom. pl. (v Ves,) ves, gen. (vYv,) vecOv, dat. rvr-t (vm~iEo-,, vfo-0,lS), ace. (mvas,) ev&s. The forms ano in () belong also to Hd. 52 THIRD DECLENSION. STEMS IN O. [190 c. the acc. sing. and acc. pl. have a and remain uncontracted., d. the contract nom. pl. has as in the older Attic writers: thus /3arltXi in Thucydides, instead of 3ao(LXer. e. when ev follows a vowel, contraction may occur in the gen. and acc. sing.: IIetpatev-s Piraeeus, gen. IHelpatLo, ace. IlELpata (cf. 178). r —-REM. f. The gen. in eos and the ace. in ea, eav, arose, by interchange of long and short quantities, from the Homeric forms in los, da, 7as. 191. Some compounds of grov' (rro) foot form the ace. sing. as if from a stem in ov: TrpL7roV (rpt7roa) three-footed, ace. Trp'7rovv (but in the sense tripod, ace. rplrrosa). OilZrovv Oedipus makes Oti7roo0s and OlITrov, Oi1I/ro&, OZ8troBa and OiL'7rovv, OiSnrovs and Oili7rov. 192. The only diphthong-stem ending in t is or, Sing. ol-r sheep, ol-o'S, ol-' o/-v; P1. ot-er, ol-6or, oi-o-i, o-os (of. 23 D). VII. Stens endingy t o. 193. Sing. Nom. q 7rELIc persuasion. Gen. (OrErL-os) 7TEt3OVS Dat. (rElZ6-' ) 7rtoi Voc. 7rEtloZ So 7'Xy, (lXo) echo, KaXv4C'O, Al.rca. 194. a. These are all oxytone feminine substantives. -The.contract ace. sing. is oxytone like the nom. (contrary to 98). The voc. sing., varying from all analogy, ends in oz. b. In the dual and plural (which occur very rarely), they are declined like stems in o of the 2d or O-Decl.: XeXc0, nom. pl. XFXOL. c. A few stems in ov have occasional forms as if from stems in o: ELKCO (ELKOV) image, gen. ELKOVr7 ace. ELK), ace. pi. pl. KOVro d1av (a8ov) nightingale, voc. dq8oi. 195. DECLENSIONS COMIPARED. The C6onsonant-Declension (Decl. III.) and the Vowel-ZDeclension (Decl. I. II.) agree in the following points: 1. In all genders, a. the D. S. ends in l (in the Vowel-Decl., l subscript). b. the G. D. Dual end in Lw (acvw ov). c. the G. P. ends in cov. d. the D. P. ended originally inao-. 2. In the neuter, (e) the N. A. V. P. end in a. 191 D. To Oi3trovs belong also gen. O1n7r6d3a-o Elm., and in Trag. gen. Oi1ar8as, ace. Oisa7rdoad, voc. OiL7rda. 192 D. Ilm. (commonly) and Hd. have o' for o0: os, oi'os, etc., dat. pL Um. O'to-o-e (once oYeos) and o'eao0L (154 D). 193 D. Even the Ionic has only the contract forms. Hd. makes the ace sing. in ovi:'Ioz,' for'Ici. 1991 IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 53 3. In the masculine and feminine, f. the N. S. takes v (or an equivalent for it). This, however. -loe not apply to feminine stems of the A-Declension. g. the A. S. takes v generally when the stem ends in a vowel. h. the A. P. ends in s. REM. i. In the Ace. Sing., v (MA) was originally applied even to consonant-stems, a being inserted as a connecting vowel; but v afterwards fell away (77). Compare 3idvr-a(v) with Lat. dent-e-m. In the Ace. P1., the ending was originally ys. Here also a was inserted after consonant-stems. When v fell away (48), a preceding a or o of the stem became long, ds, ovv; but the connective a remained short: 30dvr-Ta-(v)e Lat. dent-6-s. 196. The principal differences of ending are found a. in the G. S. of all genders, where the Cons.-Decl. has or (eor). b. in the N. P. masc. and fem., where the Cons.-Decl. has cE. c. in the N. A. V. S. neuter, where the Cons.-Decl. does not take v. Irregudar ZDeclezsion. 197. In some instances, a word has forms belonging to twoo different stems. Such words are called heteroclites, when the Nom. Sing. can be formed alike from either stem (&TEpo'KX-ra differently declined). Thus N. S. aWKOroS darkness (stem OKOTro Decl. II., or OKOreS Decl. III.), G. S. OcKOdov or OrKdrOTOVS: cf. 184. 198. Thus proper names in r/, of the 3d Decl. often have forms belonging to the 1st DecL, especially in the Acc. Sing.::WioKpad'ri (stem 2coKpareE), Ace. aOKparrTV (as if from a stem &roKpara), together with the regular Ace. oCKpaTr7. But proper names in cKXTJ (180) have only forms of the third declension. 199. But usually the Nom. Sing. can be formed from only one of the two stems. Then forms belonging to the other stem are called metaplastic (from tzera7rXarordoe change of formation). Thus 7-i &1vpo-v tree, D. P. 8evapeat (as if from stem 8evapes); ro 8dKpVO-v tear, D. P. 8&iKpv —L 197 D. In Hd., some words in Vs of the first declension have ea for A, in the Ace. Sing.: &eo-ro'rs- master, A. S. e-rJTcdea.-From Sap7rm1c', Hm. has 4ap~rylovos, etc., also apvr8o0vros, etc. From Mlvcws, Att. Gen. Miro, etc. (146), Hm. Miwos, etc. (182 D). 199 D. htm. &kc-[ D. S. of &Axc{ strength,-b-zuZ,-zt D. S. of zioypdfl battle,AdTes D. S., ud~'tr,-v A. S., of Pcadir(7y) whip, —IXci (as if for Xoc[~rla) A. S. of i&Rp lynzmph, —& 6c-a A. S. of iwctK rout, —[rppa Hes. A. S. of vnpds(b) snow],&yKahm-e~iya D. P. of Wyicdxqr elbow, -vs'pa7rd-eo~~t D. P. of apapdiroao-, slave, — o'iacr-a P1. of Beasd-s bond, —rposol7raT-a P1. of r7rpdswwo-v face,-&- 7rAwvpa Ion. and poet. = ac 7rAevpac PI. of' swrAevp side. From Ic'rpoicxo-s, declined regularly, Hm. has also Hrapocx'ios, IIcapoKiXa, nacpKlxteLs (stem IIaTpoICEEs, 180 D). From iV1'oXo-s charioteer, declined regularly, Tim. has also fm/VoX71a, vvoxjies (stem fm',oxev, 189 D): cf. Aoirorcas and A;i'o~r7as, A. P. of Ai[io4o (163). 54 RREGULAR DECLJENSION. 19~J (poetic N. S. bMKpv)') rri p fire, P1. ra 7rvpca (2d Decl.) watch-fires, D vrvpois; 6 ovvltpo-s dream-(2d Decl,), but also G. S. ovelpar-os, N. P. OVEL paT-a (3d Decl.),; XAo-e threshing-floor declined like &e0 (148), but sometimes G. aXwr-os, etc.: like akXco are 0 raTs p acoack, and (in poetry) 0 Trvoo) whirlwind. Cf. 194 c. 200. In some words, the Sing. and Plur. are of different genders (heterogeneous), though alike in stem. Thus 6 roLro-s corn, P1. ra ao-la; 6 crrau0o's station, stall, P1. often ra o7ralita; 6 ~o-o'rs band, P1. often Ta 8e/.Ctda o ro ardtoy stade, P1. commonly ol araT&OL. 201. a. Many words are defective in number, often from the nature of their meaning. Thus a1tjp aether, only in the Sing.; oi'rTrroiat annuad winds, ra Atova TLCafestivaZ of Dionysus, only in the Plural. b. Other words are defctive in case. Thus Goap dream, Zirap wqaking,,O'OeXos uzse, all neuter and used only in the Nom. and Ace.; pauXV arm-pit used only in the phrase v7ro' aciXs.; (later r-6' 1/aXr/v). 202. The most important irregularities of declension, which have not been noticed already, will be found in the following alphabetic table: 1.'Aprls (Apes) the god Ar-es, G. "Apeco and "Apeos-, D. "Apel, A. "ApvP (198) and "Ap77, V. reg.'Ap~e. 2. apv lamb, stem without N. S.; hence (tog, 7-7) adpv6, dpiv, iapva)''pvues, apvio~t. The N. S. is supplied by apvos, 2d decl., reg. 8. 0'6 ydOv knee (Lat. genu), N. A. V. S. All other cases are formed from stem yovar: yodvaros, yOvaTL, etc. 4. i yvvi woman. All other forms come from a stem yielatK they are accented (all but the V. S.) as if this were a stem of one syllable, Ty'vatK (160): G. S. yvvatKr0s, D. yvvatKt, A.'vvaUKa,: V. yvu'aL; Dual yvvalKe -yvvatKoiy; P1. VuvaKCrs, yVMK(w, yvvat4L, yvvaLrarO. 5. ro 8dopv spear, N. A. V. S. All other cases from stem Uopar (cf., no. 3): aoparor,'dpart, etc.- Poetic G. aopos, D. 6opl and Uopel. 200 D. Hm. apvuAc P1. of 8pojds oa7c-wood, —fE7rrpa PI. of e'arepos evening,iceXheva (also Kf4eUao-) P1. of v KedAevaos way. Hd. A6Xtra PI. of AXvYos lamp. 201 D. a. Hm. P1. V7YKaIa entrails, D.'yIcaota, —ro'oE eyes, only N. A. Dual (in Trag. also PI., G. ~go-awv, D. &r~ots) —Pl. l'xEa, OXw'w, bXEbG4L, chariot (Sing. ~ 6'xos, not in Hm.). b. Only Nom. or Ace., THm. & (for G8&4a) ho-use, —cp? (for 1Kota) barley,-, &eevos wealth, —eupas body, —ios delight,-i-pa only in Jpa cpepetv to render a service, —JTop heart,-Te-'lpwp (Att. T#Iquap) bound, —ll neuter. Only Voc., Ae' or i/xee' (Hm.) foolish,-p- te (Attic poets) my good sir or madam. Only Dat., Hm. Kred7C-eewt to possessions, —(iv) a't in battle. 202 D. The dialects have the following peculiar forms: 1. "AprD s: H m. Ap7r os,'AplF,; Apna, also Apeos,'ApeL (i d.'Apei, "Apea). 3. *ydvu: Ion. and poetic yoYva-ros, Y07YoaTL, 7 yoVraa, 7)ovyw5vTr 7yo&roT, Epic also oyovyds, Jyovvt,'yovva, 0yo6Vov, yoveo'ao. 5. dpv: Ion. 8o0paT.os, 8ot part, o' pa, rat ovpcw', o' aoz0pc. Epic also $o,, ~4s, ovpt, aevpe, ~O 0v0.pwr, O.6peo-0,m 202] IRttGULAR DECLENSION. 55 6. ZE6V the god Zeus, G. ALOS, D. Altl A. Alga, V. zev. 7.? SEt/tL ( reiqL) right, declined reg.: but in the phrase tzus lvai (fas esse, Indic. ttILs Zi-rifas est), the N. S. is used for the Acc.?tePlv. 8. 6 i KOLVroo'-s partaker, regular; but also N. A. P. Kotvw v-es, -as, only found in Xenophon. 9. 6 q KVOV dog, V. S. KVov. All other cases from stem KVV: KVVo's, RVVu, Kvva; P1. KW'ES, KVZVolJ KV(TGl Kvvas. 10. 6 Xa-s stone, contr. from Xaa-s, G. Xi-or, D. Xa-t, A. Xaa-v, Xa-v; P1. Xa-esr X-wv, X,, ld-eo or XaL-et,. Poetic word for MXios. 11. 6 ij _LaprTV-s witness, D. P.,taiprV —c. All other cases from stem tAaprp /iapruposr, iaptrpt, etc. 12. o6 7 opLs (opviz) bird, declined reg. (169); A. S. Opvtv, also 6OpvZja. Less frequent forms, made from stein opvt, are N. P. Ipvets', G.'pVeCoV) A.;pveti and rarely o'pvts. 13. r6o ovs ear, N. A. V. S. All other cases from stem or:; r0T0o, 5 r7 P1. -ra,'ro, dcll. These forns were made by contraction from ovas, ovarov, etc., see below. 14. 71 IIvv6 Pnyx, place for the popular assemblies of Athens, stem IIVYKV (57): HvKvods, IIVKVl, lKva. 15. 6 rrpEa-3tEvrrS (7rpeofievra) embassador: in the Plur. commonly rpff-etLS, Trp;reio3C, Trpro-p3Eo-t. These forms come from the poetic Sing..rpeaf3v-s embassador, also old man, in which latter sense glrapfvT7rqv is the common prose word for all numbers. 16. rdv a defective stem, only in Voc. c rav, also written o'arv, 0 friend, rarely plural O friends. 17. 6 vLO-S son, declined reg.: also from a stem vLEs, G.. vLEos, D. vle' (A. viLa rare); Du. vi&, vtiow; P1. vtsi, viiEov, vlio-t, vrilS. 18. r XdEP hand, stem Xelp; but G. D. D. Xepolv, D. P. Xfpo-l. 19. 6 xoov congius, reg. like %ois., but A. P. xdas. Also G. S. Xoso,) A. S. Xoa, A. P. Xoas (as if from st. Xoev, cf. 190 e); these are sometimes written Xod0, Xda, X6oa. 20. ro Xpgoo debt, N. A. V. S.; also G. S. Xpi;so. Other cases are supplied by rO XpiOs debt, which is declined regularly (178). 202 D. The following appear as irregular only in the dialects: 21. 6 a5p (fem. in Hm.) air. Ion. J pos, 4.pt, ijpa. 22. 6'A-'fs Hm. (Att. "ASr7s the god Hades) 1st decl., G.'AtMao or'A'l'e, 1).'Ai'Bp, A.'AnvYv: but also G.'Ai'os, D.'Ai'r (st. Ai', 3d decl.). Rare N. Aiw'ove6-s, D.'Ai'ruvii (189 D). 6. Ze6r: Poet. also ZPvzds, Z/vt, Ziva. Pind. A[ for ALt;'7. tezLrs: Hm.'eZALatros, etc., Pind. &e'tULTOs, etc. 11.,tdprvs: Hm. always tudpTvpos, 2d decl. Cf.,pAaKcos Ed. (once in Hm.) for 0p6Aa watchman. 12. 4oprts: Dor. ptyXors, o'ptXL, etc., from st. operX. 13. ois: Dor. &s, Hm. ou;aros, P1. ovtara, ovao-t, once Wca-[. 17. vids: Hm. often has vols, vl,', vhi,-other forms of the 2d decl. very rarely. Of the forms from st. vies, he has all (mostly uncontracted) except D. P. Further, from st. vi, he has vios (gen.), vrI, via, vrE, vies, vidas, vTas. 18. Xelp: Poet. Xepds, Xept. Hm. D. P. Xeplt and Xetpeawt. 56 LOCAL ENDINGS. [202 202 D. 23. Nb 8Ys6pov tree, Ion. and poet. E3'Speo, 8eV8pEOv, etc. For irreg. D. P. 8E&pef', see 199. 24. Tb Ic'pa head, Hm. icdpp, stems Caper and cpaT, also with inserted a, Ktap7aTr, cpaar-. Gen. Sing. KcdpOToS icapraTos KpaciaTos KpaTJs Dat. KdcPVTL (Trag. icdpa) Kapia'rt IcpaaTr KpaTL Ace. Kcdp7, also Kidp Kpa-ra mase. and neut.. Nom. Plur. icdpa, also cdpvpa Kap5laTa KpaaTa Gen. IapYCiOv ipzTsyv, Dat. topac Ace. = Nom. (cparas Trag. mase.) The Attic (Tragic) poets have only N. A. V. S. Kdpa, D. S. Kcdpa, and the forms from st. ICpaT. 25. 6 A's poetic for xE'Wy lion, A. S. xA?, defective. 26. D. S. ALT-, A. P. XA'a, smooth cover, Hm., defective. 27. 6 Aets (for usev-s, and that for /z7v-s), only Nom. Sing., Ionic and poetic form for 6 Ahv month. 28.' wrrAvr/s (declined like iXSas) Ionic for Tb irAros multitude; of the latter, Hm. has only TrAhaei, 7rAnh1E. 29. (aj rTrvXO fold, not in Hm., who uses only the defective) D. S. 7r'vXI, N. A. P. rTvdXes, 76xacs. 30. (6 oaTXos row, not in Him., who uses only the defective) G. S. oTiX6S, N. A. P. aTXIes, aT[xas. Local ]Endings. 203. Closely analogous to case-endings are certain endings which mark relations of place. These are a. -St for the place where: JXXo-St elsewhere. b. -3EV for the place whence: o"Wo-rev from home; less frequently, for the place where. c.- 8E for the place whither: o't'a-Se home-ward. These endings are affixed to the stem:'AS{vqI-2ev from Athens, KvKXod-JE vfrom the circle (cvKXo'-r); but o is sometimes used for final a of the stem: AlCd-2;EV from the root (from pt'la root); and after consonantstems, o is used as a connecting vowel: rdaiyr-o-2ev from every side. The ending aE is often affixed to the accusative form: Miyapdi-8e toward Megara,'EXevo-va'-ae toward Eleusis; ot'K-a-ae (st. oLKo) is irregular: for the accent of these forms, see 105 d. 204. Instead of ae, the ending -c-c or -re is sometimes used: I'XXo-0e toward another place,'Atray'e (for A27vas-&e, 56) toward Athens, 0,jfafe (for Oq3ar-8e) toward Thebes, topafe (for Zvpavs-3) out (Lat. foras). 203 D. The local endings are much more frequent in IHm.: otcoat at home,'I;7dbt'rpJ before Troy, obpavdaev from heaven, &yopierv from the assembly. The form with,ev is sometimes used by Hm. as a genitive case: CaTm& Fcp?bey from the head down, wholly,,'~ &lA'Aev out of the sea. In Hm., 8e is commonly added to the Ace. (not to the stem): oovPSe home. ward, GSae 8dovse to his own house, jle'Trep4dve to our (house), nrdAxve to the city, p4buovue to jfight: peculiar are p6vyaae to flight,'paSe to earth, Ai'dsae te (the abode of) Hades (202 D, 22). 207] ADJECTIVES. VOWEL-DECLENSION. 57 205. For some words, we find an ancient Locative case, denoting the place where, with the ending c for the singular, and for the plural ut(v) without t before it: o'KoCt at home, rlvsol at Pyth/o,'IcTo- o at the Isthmus, A2vr1-otZ (79 b) at Athens, IlXarataorl at Plataea, v~pao-l (Lat. foris) at the doors, abroad, cpaoL at the proper season. ADJECTIVES. A. ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL-DECLENSION. 207. This is much the most numerous class. The masculine and neuter follow the O-Declension; the feminine usually fol. lows the A-Declension. Thus the nominative singular ends in os, q (or 4), ov (Lat. us, a, um). M. good F. N. M. friendly F. N. S. N. d)yalos dyue dyaedv C iXtos f/lg l fLXlOY G. dyaiov,1yas tyaov ILXMov qV X[las a t1XOv D. diyauo adya5, y ayc,3o otXIpo;Xuai tX 10V A. ayaU&v a/ya~&v dya(t&.v ctXLov qh/IPtXtav 0tLOV V. dyuyatE e yaQO1 Jya-O a ilXLE LAt /lXla 0JXtLov Dual aya~So aya~a dya25o / Xtco nXbtix tCcXo ayatow cayualv yayao }7ao / OW tv LXoIav qa tX otv P. N. dya2ol ayacTai duya a /lAlot qLXetat OCLea G. ayaZ&3v ayae&w' ayaZiov. NlXLov LtXt'Cov 4tX'c'v D. ayauiolr dya2ars aya~o4e fIotOl OLXat lCOtS A. __ aya__ yovs a yadae acyaSc; /Xltovr /wXieSe.IXlte RrEM. a. The vowel a in the nom. sing. femrn. is always long. It is used after a vowel or p: &8Katov just, femrn. 8tKai-i, alropos shameful, fem. aicrXpa. But q is used after the vowel o, unless p precedes it: arXdoosv simple, fern. ardXdb, adpo'o collected, femrn. apo'a. REM. b. The Feminine, in the Nom. and Gen. P1., follows the accent of the Masculine: 5;Eaios fiJrm, nom. pl. masc. 3auLtot, fern. fji3ataLt, not efi3ailt, as we might expect from nom. sing. f3e3aa (120); gen. pl. fem. 3e3aiov, like the masc., not f3e[fativ, aq in substantives (128). 206 D. EPic CASE-ENDING pz. A peculiarsiuffix of the Epic language is pt (or pqn, t9 D), added to the stem. The form:Avith qt serves as a genitive or dative, both singular and plural. Thus (a) in the 1st declension, always singular: 38[1l-L (less correctly Bip(tp) with violence, cALzo'-[qL in the tent, &rrb vevp~ip from the bow-string; irregular Eir' ocXapqpt (for Eo'xap1-qpL):on the hearth.(b) in the 2d declension:'Ixio'-Q of T5roy, e6pqn with the gods. —— (c) in the 8d declension, almost always plural: &ar' xeo-~p-q from the car, 7rap& /av-pL b5 the ships, 7rpbs Ko rvXqov-4-'p' (genitive) to the feelers; irregular &rb'KPL'eo~-Cn from the head (202 D, 24). 207 D. For Ionic, instead of a in the Feminine, see 125 )D. Im. has bia. fem,. of 58os divine, with short a: Kiaa edcev divine among godlksses. J8 AADJECTIVES. VOWEL-DECLENSION. L208 208. Adjectives in EOs and oos are subject to contraction. Thus a7rXoZs simple, Jpyvpogs of silver, contracted from (X7r0-o%, apyvpeo0. The uncontracted forms may be known from 207; the contract forms are as follows: S. N.'rXoiv 6a7lXr a ho a dpyvpovr dpyvpa apyvpovv (1. rdo 6wrXis ChroXei CtdjiYVpOV3 dpYVpAS dpYvpOei I). a7rXXc (iOX! airXhi dpy vpp3 pyp capyupc A. CAriO i~ a7r-X~V airXO Iv Cp yvpo'v dpyvpaii (pyvpofv V. aiAXois aXrXir chrXorv dpyvpov3 cdpyvpa cdpy'poi3 D) ual c7TXcj 6rWri crX rX! c r dpyvpc apyvpa d pyvpd _LroZv 6rrXeiv irrXoLv dpyVpoiv apyVapv pyvpo^v P. N. chrko& cbrkXar ciirXo apyvpo,,ipyvpaL c/pyopi G. ariXov irrXov aiprXov apyvpov i(pyvpaCv apyvpov D. adrXoV arirXaLr 7rXohL apyvpooi apyvpas apyvpOei A. aTrXos nrX&i ca7rX a dapyvpoe adpyvpas apyvpai the contract forms, see 145.o 209. Many adjectives of this class have but two endings, the masculine form being used also for the feminine: bN. F. 2voiio% N. vxov, quiet. This is the case with most compound adjectives: M. F. a-iEK-VO childlessl, M. F. Kaprpo-4po fuzit-tearing.v p REM. a. In many adjectives of three endings, the fe. is sometimes D. contract forms, see 145. 209. Many adjectives of this class have but two endings, t he A.. Dual i fn vedXo ieX.. P. N. O hildless va fruit-bearing. X GE. In many adjectives of three e. is so metimesv 210. like the is a specimen of the few adjectives h follo the Attic Second Decl. —Xiwscly f ll is declined thus i the e-exceptas. and Ncasesut 2')8 D. For contraction omitted in Ion., see 144 D. 132 I. 210 D. For 2'eias, Em. has p'ecos (also in Att. poets): for 7rAycsr yHm..rsS. 7rN. X Il7, F o,. Rd. r eo,', ov.-l m. has a..s (only in -this form), b'Xt for Do.S he has ooS, O-x, Oo, Comnp. ao7epos.- itl oS d, wi liovi2g, he- has Wq. s.:s, A. C~v. 214] CONSONANT-DECLENSION. STEMS IN Y. 59 but forms a Fem. 7rXea of the A-Decl. —The defective adj. M. F. oc3s, N. aoiv (formed from owaor safe) has A. S. ocrv, A. P. oc3v; also o-~t as N. S. Fem. and Neut. P1. The kindred ao-os, aaoa, oc3ov, is also confined to the Nom. and Ace. 211. B. ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT-DECLENSION. The Fem. of these, when it differs from the Masc., follows the A-Decl.: it is formed from the stem of the MIasc. by annexing La; but this addition causes various changes (32. 58. 60). Here belong 212. 1.- Stems in v. The Masc. and Neut. have E, instead of v, in most of the. cases (cf. 186-7). The Fem. has c-La, contracted into ELa. sweet black S. N. av's' 7,ELa E os; lCEXdo l.iXatva,IvXao G. ciEos 7.E-as 7sEcos ALeXdVowv ticXaLvq.v uiXdvos D. Mje/EL 7seCIeta sEL tLEXavxt ieXalv p7 ideXaVL A. i8v S 8IEiLaV C78a piXava pi6'Xatvav MAEXav v. ra. n i1ema 7th etsXav eatva i us te'Xav Dual J8iE 1J8La d 7f-E C IeXavE u EXalva'piXave q75oLtv tBEaCalav?7)EQLY.LEXaCvotV tfXaltvaLV FeX(LVOLV P. N. 1 eiES?EiatL?7a IaiXavcs IXiaLvaL LEpXava G. 71'CVo'V 7 7;EwL 1V sa LEvX co v eLXatvwov peXLiVaW D. 3.en rjcEte-s i c at.heXaFtoa /tEXLbvaoLs I-EXaoL A. peced owels is entisa heeXae are m Xasvatv yeXava So YaXVKvS 8weet, Inpam v slow, /3paXvs ssort, raXXs w swft, cp s' etwide. REM. a. In lzSXve female, the poets sometimes use the masculine form for the femuinine. 213. 2. A few stems in v. In these, the t of the fem. ending ta passes into the preceding syllable: pXias (PXiav) black, Fem. 1udXatva, for ckXav-tLa (58).- For full inflection of ju~nas, see 212. Similarly declinied- are TaXL% hralXa, TraXv unhappy and repvra repEtva, TepEV tender. 214. 3. Stems in vr. In these, the Fem. v-eta becomes -(-a, and the preceding vowel is lengthened. They are mostly participles. 212 D. For fem. et, eirs, etc., Hd. has fa, 6 ar, ap, Ie, etc. Jim. commonly has E4a,-eqs, etc., but chKda for cLcEca, o3aaCtfs and SacersS, jaaa3EZv andl Ia Eav. In JIm., 7166s and rovAis (for groats), as well as amAvs, are sometimes fem. In the A. S., Hm. sometimes has ea for al: eupeea lr4vTov the wide sea. 214 D. Adjectives in eLs (eit) are much more-frequent in poetry: those in 77Cis, oels are sometimes contracted: Hm. TSWU$=S.TaJ1ES honorable, AW67eTCIl =-Ahrdev'cT filled with lotus, poet. 7repov a=7repeoeac winged. Hm. sometimes uses these adjectives in the masc. form with fem. names of places. O0 ADJECTIVES. STEMS IN NT. r214 Adjectives in EVT have co-rra, not Ewa, in the Fer., for evr-tx. For their D. P., see 50 a. S n g. i 7 -"t ~-. m -; giving S. N. XV5ov -'ovroa X;kov 8t o6s 8tioviroa U8t,;v G. XvovTog Xvovcriso XvroYTO 8td0vrov 83OVcJr5 &8 TvroS D. XVOVTL XVOvGn XAvov T MomL T aOJO?/ aOaVvrL A. Xvovra XMovtoav Xiov &taovra &aoovav M36Ov V. XVCov Xo'ovo-a XDov &Movr' 3isoora tS6dv Dual XvovrE Xvov(Ta MXovre r 88L&TE c )ov'o-a t86V6re XvovrowV XVOV'CLtV Xvovrotv M&Tdvotv 1Y ov&Catv aL.8Y vroTv P. N. Xvovres Xvovo-uc Xovrra dvorev U EY &8ovOact 86vTra G. Xvovzrov XvovOr()v Xv6OrotV aLa6vrov &ovOciJv &8tavrov ID. x5)VO(t Xvov'uatvs XvovrL & tOV L &laov(TratS Lf88ovrL A. XV'ovra'S vooCas Xvoovra th8ovras 8tov'o-as &aLvrL loosirng, showing S. N. X;vcas o'' Xvvciaa Xvo'-v (&LKVV9 (ELKVYiC(To 8(FKV'V G. Xvtcavros Xvoa'oTrs Xvo'avrog 8elKJvvroTeOS aelKvVtrO? 8etKrVTO D. Xvc(vrT XvLt(r17 XlV(Lvrt e3EKVVVTL (3lKVVTn etVLVV;rtL A. Xvroavra XVacto'av Xuo'av 8ELKVvvTa 8(etKV;r'aV etLKVVv V. X)voas Xvraot Xvo-aiv 8eLKVVw aetLKvvca aetKVtlwv 1)ual Xvo-avrT XvTaora X',CavTE 8eLKVV'tre 5eLtfvvY'(a 8(etKVvVrT Xvrvrotv vcv Xvoa vVvroav etwv LKVVVTOl etI ELKVvo-aLV. eLKvVIvr — P. N. Xv' —avvre Xtuc(rtla XvravrTa 8ELKVVTreS 8EtKVV3TCU 83ELKVVVTa G. XvatdvToov Xvcraorv XVO-r6vovt 8eLK1VTCOV teKvvrCKV v 8etCJ KVvVTCooV D. Xvora-rL XvcraratL Xvgacr 8ELKVVOL t 8ELKVV-SatL 8ELKtV(TL A. XUo-avras Xvovaoas Xto-avra 8etLKvvraVTaE 8 uKVo'aE 8eLKtvvra loosed b...../?.leasing S. N. X)elSE. Xv vSeLa eXv'V xapt_. Xaptlcora xaplEv G. XVV; vros Xvaeo'Gr Xvze rog xapEevroS xapLteo'' XaptevroE D. XvZev'r t XVSEl7 XvZgro L )v atJLEVT X*P-, xXape xap xap A. XvgEvra XVJeLo'av XvZev Xa apra X aP vr aptEv VI f(I e x apgetrta xapev XV. " E;' XvEuoT'a ]XV;ev XapLEV. xapie(r(ra xaplerV D-ual XV2VejTE XvSELo'a XVSEVTre XaPLEVTE XaPLE Toa XapLEvITE XvZEvrTOLV XvUElJTaLV o XvJevrotv xaptfvroLv xaptErcatv xaptEvroLv -P). N. XvOEvrev Xvluo-a, XvievTa xaplvrTE xapPco' at xaplevra G. XvEvrcov XvElcto&v XvZEvrTcov xaplEvrov XapLe-cr ov xaptLvrTCv D. XveJEUL Xvetllatgl XVieLt oL- XaplEtL xapLo-(oatg xapetP L A. XvEvraC Xvelrav XvEVTra XapEVTas XapL a apto'av xapLevra j REM. a. The fem. adj. Xapeoe(cra arose probably from a formn without v, XapeLr-ta (60); while the fem. part. Xveio'ra arose from XvEVr-t(1, tXv-ev(o)(ra (48), Xvovo'a, from Xvovr-ta, Xvov(T)o-ca, etc. 215. Participles which have ovT after a, e, o, are contracted: rTLaov (rtpuaovr), Taqdove-a, z ~aov honoring, contr. rtLpv, ry1iwJ a, rtljv; Ot(IOv (AtXEovr), ctXpEovra, ctkXeov loving, contr. ctXrv, tXocra, 2171] STEMaS IN OT. 61 btLXovv; 8?XO'wv (TqXoovT), 8rX6oovora, 8&qXoov z/manisting, contr. 8rqXWv, 8&Xo-cra, 8iXo;v. The uncontracted forms are like tboso of Xkvlr (214); the contract forms are as follows: S. N. T/,&)ZV rtr co-a TlJL)L (ltxV OlXOVoia tLXov 1 G. rLrrog rioTr OTl r7otvro r T bCoavvro /LXOOV Toer fboiOV l c/AOx |X0r'D. DTrlu, or r-oT. rL TtorC OrtL (/LXOVrT frtXouery /lXOVVT A. rt/aovra rntiroa-av r 7tlv t Xo{Jrna ctXovo-ar btnXo r V. rtlOV Tl7CO ra rtl/v' nXcVr cbtXoeo-a cftXov, Dual rtlZovre rtltoo-a a TLovre qtLXOVre tXovoera tLXoVrea nt/o)rOLt T'IcAo-ratw rTLwIrotLV tXocvrotLv pt;oioeatv coXoVVTOL' P. N. TN. llVTE TLE oat rtpeovra /lXOVrae /ltXOVCoaTL CtXorVra G. tiRkWVT@ T1/IAtTOCOV TL/XvL(OVTO fjLtXovrV (CP LT/XOVLV qLXoVVT(LV D. nrt/L1(t 7ttic o-atL rt/IcXo(L (Pov Lt ()XoEvaoL JcAoi0 rt A. rtxvraq ntL7wc'Toas -tpco5vTa tLXoOvTag t/ lXOVTUa OT\ovrTa AqXv (contracted from 8qX6ocov) is declined exactly like qAXovr. 216. Stems in or. These' are participles of the Perfect Active. The ending or in connection with the fern. ta is changed to vta. having loosed standing Xf.Xve(croT XeXvtCvlcVaLv XvKOE rov erTrc-rot o'rTOCatLV- trrTTrotOV P. N. XXvKO'Tre -XeXvKVTaL XEXvKOra eo-3ros ero-oa ECror a G. XEXvKiJL' XAXVK1LOA XEXVKorEv ECrorL' E~r~iM TOc EOn P. XfXVKoTEa XEXVKVClLt XEXVKO'Sa ECfoTEE e-rToctata EJTLoTa D. XeXvKOr'o XEXvKVL', XEXVKOToL EOr(rOT, E CoTr ato e EoT'CrTL A. XEXvKdorart XcXvKvla XEXVKOTra Eocrrorav crToraS or'c)ra REM. a. EcrrTs is contracted from;errawt, and is irregular in the formation of the Fern. The neuter form;e-rr& is also irregular. REM. b. vta of the Fern. appears to imply a mase. and neut. ending vr (= or) j vr-ta would give vora (62), and then via (64). 217. Adjectives of Two Endings. In many adjectives of the Consonant-Declension, the masculine form is used also for the feminine (cf. 209). Here belong. a. Stems in s: AM. F. aAXr3sj (aXr&3es) true, N. aXr-q9E (cf. 176). b. Most stems in v: M. F. EcvSatl'wv (evSatqov) happy, N. "d'at.,ov, M1. F. apprqv (aporYqv, st. apo-Ev) male, N. a/Iev (cf. 172). c. A few simple stems ending in other letters, as M. F.'tap-r knowqving 217 D. b. lid. has gpnrl for Sparv. 62 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. L217 N. 1'pt (cf. 188). —Also some compounds of substantives, as AM. F. acrd rwop (a-rrarop) fatherless, N. 617rarop; EVEX7rrl (ev-eXrt8) of' good hope, N. EVeXrtL;,LX01roXLS (bLXo-roTXB) city-loving, N. bLXJoXLt; evXapts (ev-xaptr) agreeable, N. ev'XapLt; 8' rovs (8-7r83) two-footed, N. &frovv, A. S. 8&rovt (191) and b8rroaa. S. N. AXlrlis dXrtIs ev5llaqco ev EvSatLov eVeX7rA e EVEXA7r G..cXr7/jovs eV'al/ovos. o veXA7r8o D. Ea, Oet eivalEovVTt 6 L A. a'Xs dij a iEsv efVllalova cV' atL.o ZU' EX7VLV EVEX7rl V. e atoEas e eGatov Ef/ v EV' E 7 rt Dual aX rVa e3vatLove' eEX7rtde.dXoT0v Ef V'al/odvoLv VEX f 31O8tv PN. aXtr/eLZ aXiM/S ev&LaiLoves ev C lMova eveXrtLaSe EV'EX7rrta G. U aX,/cr v evaatpLOvoov eVeX7TLr/8ov D. j aXi3hftt eaoLLo' L eVEXdrtLrl A. dX,?ElFs, aXiXr X7 enval/Lovas evaalbxova EVuEXrtaL EVEX7rtl8a So efyev4S -well-born (176), 8vvUevIrq hostile, da-craX,' safe,'EFVS&' false, 7rX5pv7s full, —— rErrCo ripe, ocp4ovpv discreet, zoIlt7cov mindful,'7rLXTrLov forgetful, sroXvvrpadyuov busy. For comparatives in ov, see 174. 218. Adjectives of One Ending. In these the Femrn. is like the Masc.; but, owing either to their meaning or their form, they have no Neuter: thus aprra$ (dp7rry) rapacious,. 4vyds (5-7ya8) fugitive, JyvCo (a-yver) unknown, aIrraL (arcatc) childless, IJuaKPoXEtp long-armed, rz-vrq (7rCvrT) poor, Yv1lVO1i (yv/,zV T) light-armed. REa. a. Some adjectives of one ending, which belong to the A-Decl., occur only in the Masc., and differ little from substantives: thus EdEXov -ir, G. C'eEXovroV, volunteer. 219..Irregular Acldjectives. Some adjectives are. irregular, their forms being derived from different stems. So 4e'yas (,enya and!zcyaXo) great;, roX~vs (vroXv and TroXXo) much, many. 218 D. Hm. has many acj. which appear only in the Fem.: lrorvSa (in Voc. also wr'Tva) revered, xcdXeta (or perhaps exAcIXEa small); eibraTrpela of noble father, O3pqluorac'Trp of mighty father, &mTL&delpa match for men, wcoTidLvepa nourishing men, KvLdveipa making men glorious, 7rovAvBo'repa much-nourishing, Zioxatpa drrow-showering, brirodcaela thick with horse-hair, taaXTXLzycrKa A. S. rich in fair women. To Femrn. dxea rich there is a Neut. P1. Adxea. 219 D. Hm. and Hd. have roXxds, 4, dv reg. like a&yars (also neut. 7roAXdo for 7roVX as adverb). But Hm. has also the common forms 7roxvs, sroVX, 7roXI,. as well as 7rovoXs, IrovXd, irovX6v (24 D. c); and from the- same stem 7roXv, he makes likewise G. S. SroXeos, N. P. 7romXEs, G. vroX&Wv, D. 7roAXeELoi or 7rohXar,.,roXe'ar. The masc. ozpors ls found in Pind. Comp. 7rpaivIepos in lHd. 220J IRREGUtLAR AI)JECTIVES. COMPARISON. 63 1S. N. -ys 1ya77 p ey(M / a TaroX7S 7TroAX7 7roXV G. ulEyarov 1peycXqr/r peyaXov 7roXXno romoXXer 7roXXoi D. i/eya X. yXq I eya A9co 7roXX) roAXj 7roXXc3 A. pcsTyav eLEyfirlv tpya 7roXi rrVoX Av 7FroX, v V. YEtya eeyXart peya roxvk 7roXX0 7,roXv Dual yLEyaXco peydcXa /~cydaXo _ ly_ Xotv a yaXawv 1ieydiXootv ]'.. E. /yaiXot /eFey6Xalt ieyaXa 7roXXoi 7roXXai 7roXX A G. zeydXcov ieeyaiXov /ieydXaov rroXXcv 7roXXcov 7roXXcv D. tq/yaXots zAEyaXails,Lzyaotos 7roXXol rroXXals 7roX;ois A. ieyaXovs ueyaXlkar pFeya.Xa rroXXo's 7roXXad 7roXXc REM. a. 7rpos mild forms the whole Fern. from st. 7rpaVi: 7rpaeta, 7rpaias, etc. The Masc. and Neut. Sing. are formed from st. srpqo, rarely from nrpai;: 7rpaov, upVp, 7rpov. In the Mase. and Neut. P1., both formations are used: 7rpqot and srpaes, 7rpaEa and srpaa. Comzparis8o of Adjectives. A. By repoS and Tairo3.'220. The usual ending of the Compai'ative clegree is TEpo (N. S. repos,,epa, repov); of the Superlative, iaro (N. S. taro, -rarr, arov). These endings -are applied to the masculine stem of the Positive. Thus, Positive. Comparative. Superlative. xiOboS0 (Kovbo) light K ov0'frepos, a, oV Kov0'rarosr, r Ov 7XvK6s (7XvKv) sweet yXvKVrepoe 7yXVKvraros,xduXas (1eXav) black PLEX(Wrepos #EXaVmTraroE IdiKap (ti(Kap) blessed 4aKa'prepoY,laKapraTos foajis (o-aoes) clear raaio-repos raqbEa-Taroo XO'tplL (XaptFvr)L)leasing XapteTrep)o XaptLErraros,rervrE (rrerqr) poor 7rEEoTrepoE 7-wervETaros xapaorepos and rrevecrrepos arise from xaptevr-repos and 7rerrqr-repos by change of r to v (45), before which v is dropped in the former (48), and q7 shortened in the latter. Hm. has some fem. adjectives which are not formed from the stem of the mase.: ~ovpms(a) impetuous, M. ~oipo-s; -rte[p& fat, rich, M. srtco,; srp-t13a5 and yrpeo'3eipa honored, M.?rp6o'u-s (202, 15); *'rpdppaaoa (for?rporppa- ta. from ippdCo) favorable, M. srpdJppwr (from pprv).- The following are:made& from the stem of; the masc.,-but by an unusual mode of formation: Xa\KoBdpeta heavy with brass, M. XaXicoBapis; ipLrylvea ecrly born (M.- ipryevs.later);,3veuirea (Hes.):sweet-speaking, k M. veuM ns rs; sdcva pa (Pind.) blessed, M.,a&dcap; and in the P1. only, ciauetla crowded, rapipetaffrequent,: M. hap.es, vapcpges. In Hm., ipl[qpo-s trusty, makes P1.?[ptp-es (only Nom. and Acc. in each number). 6G COMPARISON BY TEpos AND TaTros. [221 221. The following adjectives depart more or less widely from the rule above given. a. Stems in o with short penult, lengthen o to o: this prevents the excessive multiplication of short syllables: croabc-rEpos wiser, ado-Traros worthziest, from oa-cO-s, i ao-s.-But if the penult is long by nature or position, o remains: 7rovrqpo-repos more wicked, EwrTO-'.a'ros finest. So always, when a mute and liquid follow the vowel of the penult: -rrKp6-raTos bitterest. b. The adj. yepat'r- (senex) always, 7raXatods ancient, and cXoXaios leisurely, sometimes, drop o after at: yepairTpos, 7raXat-araro. C. Mr'EGo medius, I'oo egqual, Ev'tS- serene, -rpciorv early, 05tsto late, take at in place of o or co: /terararosr, rpcot'areCpo0. —V. — xo0v quiet has 7ravXalrepoa and ovXCdoTepov; qfLXo declea, beside )tX\cTepOV, -raToS, has 0ltX7repOa, -raaro and 0tXairepos, -raroTsO. From rkXq-rtov adv. near come 7Xq-aLmTEpOC, -araros; likewise rraparrXqra-larrpos mzore simnilar; and from 7rpoVipyov (for 7rpo fEpyov advantageous) comes 7rpoVpytat-rTpoa. d. Some adjectives take the irregular endings eraTepor, eoraros. So 1. Stemns in ov: acobpwvo ((o-opov) discreet, (raoppovE-repoas, eV3al/tov (evbatltov) ccp)py, Ev8atlovea'-rro. —SaT.-Special exceptions are 7rtoov fat, 7rZoIepor, -raTos, and 7reiroov ripe, 7rer7raLTepo,-, -Tarot. 2.;tKpadro unZmixed,;ppwolE&vov strong, iraevors glacd, and occasionally some others in or: (ttcparearrepoS, EPO)CtEVE-TEpor. 3. Some contract adjectives in (oos) ovr: Euvorvrrepoa (for evvoE-Tre pos) from EV"vovo (e'IvOOr) well-disposed. e. The adj. XalXos talkative, rrrox6r beggcarly, 3+o' 7iyoS dainty, Povofaiyoa eating alone, and some adjectives of one ending, as KXi7rTrq thievish, have LtorepOS, Ltraroer: XaXaoTepO TrrwXTTCOXTraroS, KXE7TTrL-repoa. f. Other adjectives of one gender in qs (G. ov) follow the rule for stems in o: bvfpptro-repos from Vi3pLtoTrr insolent. g. Compounds of Xapls facvor, form the Comp. and Sup. as if they ended in xaptro-s i rltaplrordepoa from rwlxcptS agreeable. B. By twv and tc-ros. 222. A much less frequent ending of the Compar. is Lov (Nom. M. F. owv, N. lov), of the Superl. t(rro (Nom. to70 o Uo'r-, to, to ). Dzi D. The poets sometimes use co after a long syllable: uirOpc6rTepor llm. ntore wretched.-From'ilaVs straight, Hm. makes 16v'aTa; from paervds shining, cpaErotarepos, but cpadctaros (cf. 370 D a); from &Xapls unpleasinzq, &iXaprlTepos (for aXaptr-repos). - The force of the ending is nearly lost in alqXvTepoS feminine, aypdOrepos wild (living in the country), opea-repos living in the mountains, aec6'epos belonging to the gods, 8EstIEpO' Lat. dexter, which differ little from ~aAvs, Tpltos, UpetOS, aE70r, Eeos, s. 222 D. The forms with cow, la-Tos are mluch more frequent in poetry: thus (the starred forms are un-Homeric), ",l3ato, 83cria-ros (3paavs deep), — Bpdaoa-wV =*,p'V, BcpL'o — Bp8rtaqros (3pa3vs sloV), --— pXtro(Tos (spaxVis 7hort), —yXviUctwv ((yxvic s s weet), —IgXe IyXiar' o (eAryXe~r P1. infazous), — 223] COMPARISON 13Y Lov AND tLoros. 65 rhese endings are applied, not to the stem of the Positive, but to the root of the word. Hence a final vowel in the stem of the Pos. disappears: Positive. Comparative. Superlative. a-vc-s- pleasasnt ('a3-o/cat ampleased) 3- 0ov'8-Lorog rax-v- swift (dra-or swiftness) Zdarcorv (for TaX-Low). riX-Luror Pyra-g great (piEy-eos greatness) eiSzWv (for/,ey-Ltov) izy-tTcros Similarly po in the stem of the Pos. disappears: iXz-p'-r hostile (,xr -or hatred) ExT-tov fEXZ-L-cror atcrX-po-s9 shameful (alo-x-ov shame) alcrx-t ov aioX-Lctoros REM. a. In /dl~cIv, for cEy-ctv, the t passes into the first syllable, as in Cdtevmov for aiev-lmv (58). So also in cdacr-ov, acro-ov, where a absorbs it and becomes long. Cf. f./iXXov (for LaX-ltov, 59). 223. In the following words, this mode of formation is found connected with various peculiarities, especially the euphonic changes described in 58-61. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 1. Jya!6s good alletveov (for aCIEv-toov) [c- pEiCoP Hm.] aipt'-ros ("Apils, cUpETr virtue) Kpel(r-croZ (Kperr77WO) KpaTrOToS (Kpa'Tor stren2Fth) ~XC OV XCOro REM. a. dtLLIovW, adplCror, refer more to excellence or worth; KpELocoCWv, fpartC rof7S more to power and superiority. The opposite of KpEl-o-Ov is 2. KagKOE had' KaKLwov KCaKL(ToS XpEiP v (deterior) Xlpltoros "o-o-rov (inferior) mo-Klra adv. lea-st of all 3.,itcpor small 1wtKPdfpO S tItKporaror /eL(AWV 4. &X/yov little, few IXVlylrTOq XSa(Trcovr (AX&T7rv) EXCiXLoros ~*"1VagW(, tIO'TOS' (ICVOpdS glorious), —tCjau'ov, zLictaT'os, Dor. zdMo'oWS (,ptpds long),-; oYiKcros (oiK'pds pitiable), —iravcw v =*-raXhaov, 7rdXltrOS (iraxvs thick), —pptxwixo, *pAiLros (pxos dear), &iKCiaTos (Zcs quick).-). lHd. has u dEwv for u e'Cov. In Epic and'Doric poetry, the t of irwv is short. 223 D. 1. rHm Comp. &pecv: Pos. iKpaT'zs powoeful, Sup. IcdpTrLa'os (57): Comp. AwCovY and xwltrepos. — Hd. and Dor. KpEaOwv for Kpeto-awv. - Poet. 13eA'repos, BEXTaLrOS (not used in Urm.): p6epTEpos more excellent,.pe'praos and,p~P7roS, 2. Hm. Comp. tcaccrepos: Xepecwv (Dor. xepwv), XEpel!dTEpos, XELpT'epoS: also the defective forms, D. S. X`epvr, A. S. %e'p a, N. P. Xepnes, Neut.,epnq or XpELa.. -Hd. aowv.for ~ rovov. 4. rHm. Comp. oX'bCv. 4 6b IRREGULAR COMPARISON. ADVERBS. E223 Positive. Comparative. - Superlative. 5. r-oX v much, many rAclov or rkXiov (39) 7rNeGo-roS Neut. sXE'ov, also rXETv 6. KSX0,s beautitful KaXXLOV KakXXItTro (kaXXko becauty) 7..daos easy oacov aGcarov 8. adyetLvos paivful dAXylTor aXlyToror 224. Defective Comparison. The following adjectives are withont the Positive: (7rpo before) rrpdrepos prior 7rrpTJro primus vcrrepos later, latter v'-raros latest, last REM. a. 7rpxros is probably made by contraction from 7rpo-aTro. The same superlative ending tdror appears also in E'oXaTro extremus; and in the two following (mostly poetic) forms: r;aror novissimus, last in place (from v;or novus), and Wrarov supremus, summus (from rer'p super, whence come also a poetic Comp. v7rEprvpoC, Sup. pvr;pTaror). r'o)rmation, and Comy2ariwson of Adverbs. 225. Adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding ws to the stem. The stem takes the same form as before wv in the Gen. P1. The adverb has also the accent of the Gen. P1.; and is contracted, when the latter is contracted. Thus qb4Xov dear, (G. P. 4qXnov) Adv. blXcov, a&Katos just (&CKaaov) 3&KalcosX, vxpos cold (4vXpc)>) +4vxprS, 7rav'whole, all (7rauv7Toe) 7ravTos, raXvs quick (raxEwov) raXEcov, oa4H. clear (oaco)v contr. from aa oEwv) oaoJs contr. from oaaEcW. 5. In the Comp., Im. has also the defective forms 7rXesr, 7rXias.; lHd. contracts eo to ev: rXAevY, rX Aees, for rXoor,'VovEs. q. Hm. Pos. p7'15aos (also in Hd.): adv. 05,i//ios, often pe-a, pea: Comp. W4txepos: Sup. ~pv'ra'os and p1oi'ros. To the above add for Hlm. 9. icepatcov, iccpatoLTOS (tcepoaXEos gaiqf/ul, artful, ctpOs gain). 10. ptiryo,, pty17Tos more, most dr'eadful (pygxds lies. chilling, p'yos cold). 11. K{caijOTso (Ic&e7os dear, c6ios care). 12. Poet. (not in Hm.) V~oYwr, v4aros (4t7xAs high, v'ios height). 224 D. lHm. sometimes forms a Comp. or Sup. from a substantive: 8ao'tAeT-epos,'a-os (from Baotxe'Ss king), IKovp&'epos (KODpos youth), cvT'epos more dog-like (tcvwv, dog). Other defectives in Hm. are: 7irXJ'Tepos younger, 67rX'a'os, —-a&pdTp'epos (9iqap forthwith);- and several expressing place: E'VEp'rpos lower (Trag. VE'pTepos, wEYpot inferi, Ev4paep or Ov pEv infra),7 — rapoeTiepos ( vrdpoeiv before), --— r[fora'Tos (7riiLa'ev behind),-'Vaoafarepos (aeoov, nearer), uvXo[Ti-aros (v, IAXcq in a recess). -The ending aros appears also in poyeo'aTros from La&os middle, and 7r'vmaTos last = Xoio'aos (Trag. Xoloaoos), XoiaoLZ'os. Hm. has jTlraTo1 = V'ta'rTos, and in the same sense 8e0'TaTos (eT'Irepos second). —— A strengthened Sup. is HIm. xrprT'TQos = -rd4rpwTros first of all. 230] PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 67 226. Very often, also, the accusative neuter of the adjective, either singular or plural, is used as an adverb. Thus u;yag great, Ady. p;iyn and pteyciaa, as well as puyadXco. 227. An earlier form for adverbs ends in a: raXvs quick, Adv. raSX quickly, in Attic prose perhaps, ailta at the same time, ca'Xa very, ntouch. The Comp. of aihXd is tLaXXdv (for UakX-tov, 59) potius, the Sup. /dktlo-ra potissimum. —Ev well is used as the adverb of dayao'v good. 228. Adverbs are also formed in wu from comparatives and superlatives: 3EEfaLatoTp(Ow morefirmly, KaXAtokVos more Jinely. —--- But, generally, comparative and superlative adverbs are made by the accusative neuter of those degrees, used in the singular for the comparative, in the plural for the superlative: 8e/3atLrepoV, fKOXatov, /3ciatorTara, KcaXtXrTa. 229. Adverbs in Xo (such as a'vw above, Kdirc below, f'oco within, ~$wa without) make the Comp. and Sup. in co: advcorpco, KarcorEp. So also a7rorepcoe further from prep. dcrd from, 7repar-epco further from 7rrpa beyond, Eyysr near, E'yyvripco, Eyyvrarco (or Eyyvrepov, Eyyvrara), and a few others. PRONOUNS. 230. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. First Person. Second Person. Third Person. Sing. Nom. IyC I (ego) o6 thou (tu) Gen. tzov, loU 0o- vovo of him, her, it Dat.,'OI io'L OF, Ace. ME, iE o _._ Du. N. A. V. (viuL) vc- (of+id) o+jx (ofce) G. D. (vlow) vCV (ov;&v),L3V (Iocitv) Plur. Nom. 7/y.zei we'O/ti you o-qbF4 they (N. aoia) Gen. ~v' 6/v aqbsv Dat. allv uVLtyV o4)c Ace. to av v-aro iai (N. o4ea) The forms enclosed in () are not found in Attic prose. 227 D. Adverbs in a are -more frequent in Hm.: IcCp'ra valde (ICKDoaTs 223 D, 1), Ahya shrilly (Arytvs), adcpa clearly (aarus),' ica quickly (Wc's). For e6, Hm. has e', whenever the ii would be long by position:?'~- -yrobi v; so too in compound words: E'Cowos. But eu is sometimes found before a mute and liquid:?u7rAJieIcos or eireEicTos.-Hm. has:also a defective adj.'es or Jizs, A. S. i'v or itvu, also G. S. iios, and G. P. E'dw Neut. 229 D,;'icas far, Hm. bcaor'pw, tarw,-1 iAe or r-7Xoo far, Em. rqxoxdro0w, — 9?Xt or &yXoe near7, Hm. aa-ov- (for aylXov, 60) also aaoorE'dpw, &7Xlo-TaT fjXfYordTWC Hd.). The adj. &?yXTepos, ayX4,Taros, and LdyXtLros are post-Hom. 68 rPONOUNS. -PERSONAL.-1INTENSIVE. [231 231. The stems of the Sing. are E/pe (Lat. me), Gax (te), e (se). But the Nom. is differently formed: eiyco, ao; and in the third person is entirely wanting. The stems of the Dual are co (Lat. no-s), ooco, aoco. The stems of the Plural are r1e', V/E, abE': e is contracted with most of the endings; hence the circumflex accent (cf. 233 D). 232. The forms mentioned in the list of enclitics (105 a) lose their accent, when there is no emphasis upon the pronoun; and in the 1st person Sing., the shorter forms (you, io[, MD ) are then used. But if the pronoun is emphatic, it retains its accent, and the longer forms (4Lor, OEiol, /Ed) are used in the 1st person. So also, in general, after prepositions. Thus &OKEi F1o it seems to mne, ol oL aoL TOvrO apECpKEt this pleases me, not thee; 7rap' 4EOU from me, not 7rapa yuov, i&rl rolt upo thee, not (rL' o't: yet 7rpodr le to me frequently occurs. The Gen., Dat., and Ace. PI. of the 1st and 2d persons, when there is no emphasis upon them, sometimes throw the accent on the first syllable:'ov, vuov; the last syllable of the Dat. and Ace. is then usually shortened: iV/v, vLads. The last syllable is sometimes shortened, even when the pronoun is emphatic: we then write 4'dv, v,;uv. 233 D. Personal Pronouns in the Dialects. Htm. has the following forms: those not in ( ) are found also in Rd. S. N. eiy6, (i2Y4) 0f, (OvA) G. [ijio], f I ei, /V alo, aEV co, eU (4te^Eo, ~U~aep) (BE7o, obeye) (ETO, ~eY) D. EpLoi, ~of aof; Tol, (-'V) oC, (io?, 23 I) a) A. e4, I e, (41), I ulv Dual. (ya', vi,) (a-p'&, ab) (ab;e) (Yv&iY) (Ga-P&4) (aqa') P. N. ee?7s, (ADLOLes) /ets, (4qCes) apenis not in Rim. G. 2j5'euz, (iudfwL) V bUzc, (ij5lU1P) as', (ar) A. 7'l.,Eas (ajUj) vEUas, (vIAIe) pe'as, (aope~as), a-0 E-yc~h is used before vowels (79 D). 4eu'o cannot stand in the hexameter. -The datives aol and Tog are distinguished in the same way as EUofl and itoi (232).-For ufdv, the Dor. and Trag. have uyv: both are enclitic, both used in all genders, and vtv is sometimes plural.- In Rd. and Trag., a-pe is sometimes singular. —-In Rd. ~plfcr (not oaip) is reflexive: he has also the neut.. apect: but the forms Beees, ai5des`, aeCs in some editions of lId. are probably incorrect. The Dor. has N. S. 4e'yiv even before a cons.,'rT (tu) fop' aS, G. T'Er, T~es, TEovS, D. Tot for aolt; also EUlv, Trtv, 7 for flot, ao[, oa, A. i-', enclitic TV, for a-e. N. P. a&e/s, vltys, G. &tdtov, D. &iLv,, A., iUEd, and qe for aipe. O0 these Pind. has only TV','5OL, 1t'Y. 234. INTENSIVE PRONOUN. ATOS, a, a-T, a ro sedf (Lat. ipse), is inflected like ayca.os (207), except that the Neuter N. A. V. S. does not take v (cf. the neuter article'T, 119). 234 D. For Ionic crasis in iVr-ds (Hm.), wr-ds (Hd.), see 68 I). C38J REFLEXIVE.-RECIPRnOCAL.-'OSSESSII E. 69 Preceded by the article, o av-ro (avro, 68 c),. avr- (VTrS), r- avrT (ravrd, also rawrTov), it signifies tJhe same (Lat. idem). 235. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. These are formed from the stecns of the personal pronouns, compounded with arTo's. Singular Gen. M. N. F. Dat. 3. N. F. Ace. M. F. N. 1st person'- caavrov -S a -qn Ftav- VTOV -7v1 mnyserf. 2d person TEaVTro -1/ e a ErvT -, V - thyself or cavrov -r7s aTavrT -? cravrov -qv 3d person eavrov -17s envr) -7; eavrTO, -qv -d himself, heror avrov -qs. avrT -7 avrot -rv -u sef, itself In the plural, both stems are declined together: Plural Gen. M. F. N. Dat. M. N. F. Acc. M. F. 1st person tLz. v aUTny I,/?iv aVroLS -air a?as aurovs -as ourselves 2d person v avcov avrh-& -aLt.5jv, airovS - ao - yourselves 3d person -0,;&v, avqrv t iabltv avrots -as af4s v avrovs -as themselves Neut. a(ea avra Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form: EavTrv lavTroL -atS EavrovU -a -a or avrcov avrois -as arvrovs -ag -a236. MThe indefinite pronoun aXXos other (Lat. alius) is inflected like acr(To (234). 237. REcIPRocAL PRONOUN. This is formed from thle stem of DAXXor (236), compounded with itself, aXX-AXo (for aXA-aXXo). It is used only in the dual and plural. M. F. N. Du. G.. D. aXXrXoLtv, aXXXatv AXXrXotv A. a, XXXco UXXjX'a adXiXc0 Plur. G. XG. iXXv A,dXiXow daXXiXoowv D'. akXXkXot adXXkXat daXX iXotr A. dXXtiXovs, dXrTXXas'iXXqXa 238. PossEssIvE PRONOUNS. These are formed fiom the stems of the personal pronouns (231). todr,, 1ov my,. mine, from E/LF. EittrEpoV, a, ov our, ours, from /e. ads,, ov thy, thine, from ore. V;EreOr a yov ur; yours, from i/tr. O5, q, ov his, her, its, from i. Q-0ETFpor, a, oa their, theirs, from auqe. 235 D. Hm. always has the separate forms, even in the sing.: Z/e aSrdb, T auiw, not tavudrv, &avur.- For?tavroiD, etc., Rd. has E/zevuTroV, etc.; and in like manner ~aewvuro, eIourTO (11 D). 238 D. lHm. has also Treds (Doric, -= tuus), Eds;'atSt our (properly Dr.), PtI/4, o'ds; also (from the dual stems rw, ~rw) o'r'epos, ~oO'p~repos, belonging 70 PRONOUNS.-DEMONSTRATIVE. [238 REM. a. O'S is never used in Attic prose; {o-E'rEpor, only in reflexive sense, their owhn. The ending repos is the same with that of the Comparative (220). 239. DE.MONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. The two most important are OVTOs, avTr7, TOvrT this, that, 81.je E, 8, 8e this (this here). Ofe is formed from the article and the demonstrative ending 81 (enclitic): it is declined like the article, with a6 added to each form. ovlros follows the article in respect to the h or t at the beginning. It takes av in the penult, wherever the article has an A-sound (a, rq); but ov, where the article has an O-sound (o, co). S. N. 6,, TO O&E 1(E TE 01 T0S avT?) T VTO I SGN.TN. To 7 o TOe TrEF T&E T OTOV aT'r 7, o Trovo.. G. TovO rns rov rov8e rr s e rov&e ro'rov Tavrov orov D. TrO 7Tr rcTs raE -Tfie Te7 r T roVTC raTr7W1~ TOVTr A. T4v r7J rTo rTOVe rTqV.e ToE 7 Tror) raurqV rorO7 Dual Tr rC rTO rO) 78e rTCsd rTSo rorTco ra ra TrolrTo,Tro Tat? 7ToW TOW{VE TaWvaE ToW0E ToVrotoy Tavratvoj rootv P. N. oL ai Ta o06E a rde _Ta otroL -avrat Trara G. r o ov rTO rcT)o&e. TrvOe rTOae rrcoTv rTovrtov rourTco D. -oLD Trais TOLS Tro~Le ratlsc roiLse ToroUtOLS Tav'rat rorots A. rovs TS r(i TrovrS ras8e e raTe roVrovs rT(Lrav TaVra REM. a. The adverb of o6ae is 4o3e, that of ov'ros is ov'rTo or ovrco (80 c) in this manner, thus, so. 240. The demonstrative E'KEVOr,'t5,'q, EKEWVO that (that there or yonder) is declined like avJros (234). —For avrdo' used as a demonstrative, see 669 c. 241. Demonstratives qf Qucantity, QuaVitu, and Age. These were rro, os, Too% T7XCKoS, which occur often in poetry. In place of them, the Attic prose uses chiefly the strengthened forms: T70ooroS, ToOcraVT1 roo-ouTo(v) such (ipr quantity or number), TOLOVror, rotavLr1, rotoUrOo() such (mn -uality), T7rXKOVrOS, TXKKa6rlT, TXLtKOvrO(v) such (in age or size). to us (you) both.-'ajubs (also written'aiyds) is found in Aft. poetry for fins. --— s is sometimes used without reference to the 3d pereon, in the sense of own. i 239 D. In fHm., the article itself is usually a demonstrative, and has the following peculiar forms: G. S.,o-o, G. D. D. Tov, N. P. rot, Tat, G. Fern. Td&tOw, D. T7oL~T, 7JOt or.0Ts. For Trosle Hm. has ro7ssoe~a;: or -oisco't. The forms rof, Tat, are also Doric. When used as demonstrative, 6, o, o, ac are often written with an acear., 1,, o1', a't. Rd. has D. P. ~TO-?1, TF~10; also Toeltet, T~.7ote. 240 D. For hKce~OS the poets have rcevos: cf. 249 D. 244] R IELATIVE.-INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE. 71 These may be declined like o',rov, by putting ro-T-, TOL-% TrXLK- ill place of the initial h or t of or'Tos. But the Neut. N. A. S. has two forms, roo-o-ro and roco-orov, etc. Emphatic demonstratives of similar meaning, roo0T05, roo&e, rnqktK&o98e, are made by adding the enclitic 3e to the forms of ro-or, rotor, T-XLKOS, declined regularly (cf. o56e, 239). 242. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes rendered more emphatic by appending to the different forms a long accented i, before which the short vowels (a, e, o) are elided: oiros, avrLt,; nOVro, ravr[, 63[, rot;i, 243. IELATIVE PRONOUN. The relative os,;, o who, which, keeps the rough breathing throughout. S.N. o' rZ o' D.N.A. t a $ P.N. ol a; a, G. ov.7j ov G.D. oJv av o'v G. cov cov Cov D. c - o D. ma' atv oTL A. ivy?7V o A. ovs al a'REM. a.;O; is used as a demonstrative in the phrases Kalr O s cu and he said, 17 8' o' but he said. 244. INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. These are alike in all but accent: interrogative rn, v, who? which? what'? indefinite n, nr, enelitie, some, any. Interrogative. Indefinite. Sing. Nom. M{. F. r;s N. - M. F. rP N. rz Gen. n;voo (~rov) ntzv (roit) Dat. rioVt (r) rtMv (7j) Ace. -riva f T TLYVa Tt Du. N. A. V. VE lE. G. D. rLvotV rtVOL Plur. Nom. rives riva rtos rTtva Gen. - TLICOO TLOWO Dat. rlot rtLv Ace. t[svas rtnva r t V(d rtva REM. a. The acute accent of 7rlsn r interrog. never changes to the grave (see 101). 243 D. Hlm. has also 3 for's, ov for o os, f js for s: the nom. sing. and pi. he sometimes uses as demonstrative. Hd. has o's, i, o0, ai: for all other forms of the relative, he uses the article Tr, Tro-, ris, etc., except after certain prepositions: 7rap'., E, ou. This use of the article (n-forms) for the relative is often found in Him., and sometimes eren in Trag. 244 D. The Ion. (Hm. Hid.) has G. S. reo, T-v, D. re', G, P. T&aP, D. reoLt,. 72 INDEFINITE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [244 b. Tou, 7TX are often used for 7rivon, Trim, and (with enclitic accent) for TWLOr, TWL. They must not be confounded with ro-, r- of the article. C. arra (never enclitic, Hm. aqora) is sometimes used for the indefinite TLrV. 245. Another indefinite pronoun is 8eJva some one, such a one (Lat. quidam). This is sometimes used without inflection; sometimes it is inflected as follows, without distinction of gender: Sing. 6' 7Ti o etva Pltur. 8Ev'sE 83eFvoS 3dIraV 8ELva 3eeas 246. INDEFINITE RELATIVE PRONOUN. The indefinite relative OST3S, 7TIS, 0 Tt who, which (indef.), is formed by uniting the relative 0os with the indefinite tls, each being separately declined. Sing. N. O'S6E 7'raLS o rl Plur. oirlve cv ara G. otWOr.9 771rtvoV orTLvor )vrTLv&Ov OTLVaOV cvrOivco0.!). oLv yrltv OTv Or alTt LLVL''L OtUrt A. OTLv(?7)VTL va' o ortvas' asrtvas, atrva Du. N. A. cOrtvE riLYe ) rTve G. D. o.L.TLvov aLvrtvoQL oWLr'OLV For the way of writing o rt or 6o,7', see 113 a.' 7a~l,..;.:;, REM. a. The forms roD, i'd (= tLPr', rtve) are also found in connection with O'., but before these the stem 6 is used without inflection: Gen. rov,) Dat. rco. So alsO, but less often, Gen. P1. o0wov, Dat. oroto-L. These forms are masc. and neut., never fem. b. For iTrLva, there is another form inrra, not to be confounded with a(rra -= rtva (244 c). 247.. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. The following' pronouns, corresponding to each other both in form and meaning, are called correlative. 246 D.'Hm. has the following peculiar forms, in most of which the relative stem is undeclined, as it is in — 7ro~ors, 6-7rooss, etc. S. (O"t s)'N. (o' TrTr) P. N.'ciaa (for ArLa, 6Q) OTIEV (o'ri-EO, rTT'ev) O'EC'zV O'TEf (244 D) 6T'0olTL (t I'-) N. (S'ril) (ortvas) N.''ba The forms not in () occur also in tld. In the Nom. and Ace., Hm. has also the usual forms; so too in D. S. b'ro. 247-8 D. For'ra'os, aos'o, mrn. often has -d'r'os,'o'(aos (once 6o'oa'Tils). He often doubles or in the indef. relatives: 067rroZos,'r7rws (40 D). Hd. has K for Xr in the correlatives: c6-repos, KoOJsL, 6KGoos, aoC, OT',e' SKP etc. Cf. Lat. qu in quis, quot, gualis, etc. 248] CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADVERBS. 73 Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative, Indef. Rel. Simple Tr who rls O'E this (here), o O'TLC. which wat? some orog this, that who1 which iompar rrodrpos - 7rre-poV ETrepoe the one or Or6repo - ative which of twoo? one of twzo the other of twoo which of twoo I Quantity i7ro6os how 7roo-e of ($ro'o-o) i oo, ih' a.,ro'o-o of or much, many some quan. roo-6sae much, which quan., num., Number or numnber rouov-ros many (as much, many) as roioS of 7roLo of (roTos) suIch tos, 6iroieo Quality what sort? some sort roos8e of which sort, roto~roV (such) as Age 7rq7XLKOC. 2rTXlko (T7XiKo9) I SO old, qJXLKOC, 0rXLtKOC or how old? of some rrqXtKE 8's large of which age, size, Size how large? age, size rq1XtKo0ros (as old, large) as For the ending repos, see 220. The form rTXlKOv is never used il Attic prose; the forms'6o-ov and oiovS, seldom. 248. CORRELATIVE ADVERBS are also formed from the same pronoun-stems. - - Interrogative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Rel., Indef. Rel nrov no0ov ev2a, vcadSe, oav, &roy where? somewhere evran2a, there where P1 7 ~r6ev - rofgv froni eyv er, vX vSe, dvev~ ordSel wzohence? some place evre0rev, thence whence VOLi 7rot to fv;a, dv6d e, OL, 0&rno whither? some place Evradva, thither whither nOTre r rori some TOTE. O.rel rOTE when? time, ever Ithen when Time T rlIizKa at (rpdKK) at (rvV'Ka), i rqvLKa what time r7VLKi'8e that at which time...._________. ___ v__ rqvt_:vKavravn tizme WT ay whi zch w n? some way,; r7de, 7n-a {, dn07T _ wmay.? how?? somehow this way, thus which way, as Mlanner 7rws 7s nsw, hde, ov'rc(S) Se, 0n7rCS ho w? somehow thus, so as, that The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (105 b). 248 D. Poetic are wrda =- roP, 7roA = 7rod, o'li = o0; *'3, there, T'JaEk thence;- also jAlos, 77'rAos (Dor. aOSr,'Talos) = sre, TO'-e. -For Att. ['s. as long as, re'ws so long, Hm. has also'cos, ir-fas (and sometimes eros, Tre7os, though hot thus written in our texts). In the same sense, he has 6hppa,'d(ppa. Beside &, he has the form jnXi, but uses both only in the local meaning, which way, where: for ro,,'7roL, he always uses nrdoe, 0o7rrrdoe. - For eyvav'a, ey'Peie', in Hd. see 66 D. 74 CORRELATIVES. NUMERALS. [249.249. To the pronoun EKelVOT that (yonder), correspond the demonstrative adverbs of place, IaEK there, EKELEV thence, e'KELhe thither. 250. The demonstrative Cs does not occur in Attic prose, except in the phrases vKal S even thus, ov' &s (1u7b' cS) not even thus. —For rtvLKta, the Attic prose uses the strengthened forms in -cae and -avra. —— n Attic prose, Evsa and fvzev are chiefly relative, fv'a being used instead of oZ and ot, E'vyev instead of o'Zev. 251. The indefinite relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are made more indefinite by adding the particles orVv, 8', 8, vrore, 8r 0ror' ov': OgrtL O0v' who (zwhich, what) soever, O'TLt bOsj -te 5 s,OTre, OTLS Ac Tror' o'v: these are also written as single words, rTLtOVV, 6T~SlC,'S76te~ rore, 6rsbLsrorowv. With the same force, TIL is sometimes added to indefinite relatives: oroTo& 7ts and even loroi(e 7Lt orv of what sort soever. —— The same particles are sometimes used in the same way with the ordinary relatives, but hardly in the Attic writers. The enclitic:rip gives emphasis to relatives (definite and indefinite): oaot 7rep of which number precisely, 6esrep just as. oiv is sometimes added after it: ~serepoiv. 252. Observe also the negative pronouns and adverbs: OVTlrS, / /TIS no one (poet. for oi3els, /lq&'E, 255; in prose only o'vrt, bot not at all), oUvTrepoV, Mt;repoS neither of two, ovlatxoD, qy~3apoD nowhere, obapf.,;rpq8ap, in no woay, ov3aG&~s, grju8aop1 in no manner, with some others of similar formation. NUMERALS. 253. The words which express number are of various classes, the most important are given in the following table: 249 D. For eiei etc., the poets use IceZa, iKeaiv, ieEZe (240 D). 250 D. The dem. Us (distinguished by its accent from the rel. &s as, 112) is frequent in poetry: in the sense yet, it is sometimes written Us: Ical Cs and yet.. The poets have also Tres = ouwrcs. 253 D. For the first four cardinal numbers, see 255 D. Hm. has for 12, careca, vuc&eica, and UvocafteiKa; 40, eiKcoyL and re(Ko(rI; 30,'rpiIoCTa; 80,?ycisovyTa; 90, iv'ezrKovTa and vYICor0ovra; 200 and 300, t(qtcort, 0 rp7icQdroo; 9,000 and 10,000, vvedXcXAotr, BEKCdXAoI. He has also the ord. 3d, Trp[TaToS; 4th, TeTpaTos; 7th,,BdPOaTros; 8th, 3YdtcaTros; 9th, EY&aT-or; 12th, avwoecaTos,; 20th, IEoICo0-TrS; together with the Attic form of each. Hd. has duca&e1K (avceC'KaTos), - rprfov'Ta (TpnLco0~TOs), o3Y5861CoTa, ~LIan1tol (841KOIOT10 os), TP1K6oo10L: for EvaTOS he has eh'vaTos, and so etvi,'sd, ElVaRK1ro0, i alcix L Xirot. Dor. efica, for Froai. —AAeol. 7r'pre for KrET'E, cf. ord. 7rIE7rroS. 254] NUMERALS. 75 Cardinal Numbers. Ordinal. Num. Adverbs. ar, emia, e, one (6) r7pTroV (the)fir3t d7ra$ once 2 3' 6o tEvrEpos! as 3 7y rpeLr, rpTLa rpIror rpTL 4 TEro-apes, ToECfrapa, Teraprov rErpjaKls or frErapEs, -a 5 E' 7revrE 1 E7rMrosr rrevraTKs 6 ~ IEKTOs' E aKts' 7 crra CB8opo' &rraKt[ 8 0'o C(rc oh3 0 OKTaKCS'. 8 f,' KC oyit (Is' 9 /' ErvEa varos vvaos) a'KLo o (EVV:KtS) 10 t 8(EKa 3EKaros 83EKait v 11 la' E('vCKa EvacKarQos evae(KaKL's 12 3' a(12eKa (3U[Karos &0&eKadKi. 13 t7y rpts'Kai3eKa rptEKaXEKcarov 14 l reo-'oapeS'KatcAKa' eooapaoKat8EKaro' recroapaKaL8eKa 15 Le' rCeVTreKaLeKa 7revrTKat~eKaros j~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 16 t' KKaL83EKa EKKaL:eKaros 17 t E7traKaLeAa i7rTaKatUeKarov 18 U)' oKTrOKaLL3Eca oToKate0UKaTos' 19 Lr' EvVeaKal3eKa EreaKatCeKarOs 20 K' WEKOot(v) GLKoOTOs El KoTaKL s 30 x' TrptaKovTa rptaKor-Tos rptoaKorTaKl 40 p' rero-rapailora e-o-o'apaKorto rTcaooapaKovraKts 50 v r' rEVTrKvora 7 Tvr1EqKorrTs Tre'rVT0ovraKLt 60 &' Lq$1Kovra E 41'KoeqO e$?JKoVraKLa 70 o' ef30ot/tqo7Kra eaop3tIO1KcTros'. Ej30foKoVraKt, 80 r' oyao7o.Kovra oyaOrKOoTrOs oY7ao0qKovra'aKt E90 S eVKorra, evIeqKorTO', EVEVrKOVTraKtS 100 P EKaTro' EKaTocrt'o s EKaTovTaKLE 100 p' r& 200 a-' 8dKototl at, a (dKor-1o-rTs' 81dKO-la'KlS' 300 T''rpLt'Kotno0t at, a rptaKOa-tooo's400 v' rEptaKcrlotot at, a irerpaKoo-too-roo 500 revraKo'tot at, a 7revaKotrLoTrTO 400' TETpCKo tlot, at, a TETpaKOO-tO-T6S 700 Jr/rTdcKo'tot at, a E7rTaKooLtorTosR 800 CO' c'K-rdK0a0-o0t at, a OKraKoW-1o0-To. 900' [ aK- Lot at a evaKoTloarotoS 80 ErvtaKoatot, at, a epvaKoo-tooSr6' 1,000,a xXttot, at, a xtXtoo:.roTs' XtXtaKtl 2,000 j u3 (tXXtot, at, a tsXtXtlOa-TO'7 3)000 y rptgxktoto alt, a rptsXtXloo-rToJ 107000,t fkVptot, at, a ptvptoo'7~0,vPtta'KL 254. NOTATION. The letters of the alphabet are sometimes used in unbrqken succession to denote the series of numbers from 1 to 24. Thus v is used for 21, being the 21st letter of the alphabet. The books of the Iliad and Odyssey are numbered in this way. 76 NUMERALS. [254 But generally the letters are used as in the table. Those from a' to s' denote units 1-9, s-' (Stigma) being inserted after' for the number 6. Those from t' to' r' denote tens 10-80, q' (IKoppa) being added after 7r' for 90. Those from p' to co' denote hundreds 100-800, a' (Sac pi) being added for 900. For the thousands (1.000-900,000). the same characters are used again, but with the stroke under the letter. Thus f,3rix8' = 2344,,acov' = 1859. REM. a. Stigma (5 b) in this use takes the place of Digamma (23 D). Koppa and Sampi, like Digamma, were letters of the primitive Greek alphabet, which became obsolete except as numeral signs. -255. The cardinal numbers from 1 to 4 are declinable: 1. CE l5a Ev 2. N. A. N8o 3. 7pe7s N. ptla 4. wrrodoapes r;oEaapa vogs -'taS E&vdo G. D. Bvov'ptLw 7Efrcaapcov ECv / ta EVL TptOL TeEoapat Eva. uav Ev TpF' p7 7-pa TaEro-apas re-o-apa Like E49, are declined oV8Els, ov'8ela, ovE'v, and pybeltr no one: these are found also in the P1. They are sometimes divided by tmresis (cf. 477), av or a preposition being interposed: pt78' av TL,;ov86 7rap' o'~s.V Avo is sometimes used without inflection. A rare form for 8voTv is 8GvrEv (used only in the gen.). For -rOr in;rIEo-apte and all its forms, Tr is also used (41). For both, we have af/ora (Lat. ambo), G. D. aipotiv; also the plural word ad'Tqbepot, at) a, to which belongs the neut. sing. aplodrepov used adverbially (228). The cardinal numbers from 5 to 199 are indeclinable. 256. For 13 and 14, we often have separate forms, TrpeL KUa 8EKa, TEroCapeS Ka I 8;Ka. Separate forms are also found for the ordinals 13th - 19th: 7rplroS Kala 8EKaroS, etc. When the numbers 20, 30, etc., are connected with units by Kal and, either number may precede: E'LoKOC Kat 7rEvTE or rETre Kal LKOcTL; but if Kat is not used, the larger number must precede:'LKOLt 7reVTE 25. So also iKarw'5 &eKa 110, etc. The 21st is expressed by e 1 KaE dKoordo or rp&'rovs KaL CtKoTo' or ELKOarToS 7rpcoros; and in like manner, other ordinals of the same kind. The numbers 18, 19 are commonly expressed by vi5O (or 3vOeV) N;ovres Ct D.2 Traxrrov. 3 crraXlrowv P.2 ~rraX7re 3 o'raXrjoorav or -ra1Xvrcov fn. ___ _ _ ra__ _ __! _ _ r, ___ u_ re___S_ _ _ - -N. araXs l S'. Xrad oevol.:.i-raXk eoa rraXroopfv'?7 orrrakXEv taraXtcOLEvo v ~ G. oraXsvros o cT rakXo'oFsvovu ~0rralEL70r rraXrlo,Ev?7l 88 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. p279 279. ~ 7Lva-(o.Present System of to hionor. Contract Verbs in ao. ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). Present. Imperfect. Present. - Imperfect. S. rLtUA(&0)(9 -ril (aol.( (R>, T )(,OW)-/iat Evpt(a6)c@-I 2 rtFL(&iqL)' ErT./I(ass)as TI/(4c)a,(aEI)a rI/a(. ov) 3 Ti aF ) t/i a(ac)a L( e )a-ra- eT((LE),-TO <3 D 1. TI/u *i)a T-T v ErL(aE)a-Ti ov r71i(de)a-cO-ov ietyi( E)l-o-zov N 3 r1u(6\) -rov e ()d-T1V T( E)a-ofZov mtL (aaI)da-ro ipv P. 7-T4(ao)G6- e frPE(iaow-Cp u A - a6)-pE2Ela lErLt(a6)6 p.a 2 Tr/I (l-E)a-Te ETL/I(aF)a-re TL(ia6)a-o-2SE ETt/l(aE)a-u2E 3 TI/I (aOV)LO-Off I Tiir'(a)O)V ntr(d o)()-vTaC E'TII(ano)(o-)VTO?I._() I Present. Present. S. rtIL(aco)ce (dco)-pat f, 3 ro- t/Ian) a TO rT( a?)a-raoV P. 3 - TL/I(,co)a-rov TIM(ao)-o-Vov 3T IL(1,7)ii-IV Tvp(.)a-o-2o I/I arl)a-l f lun)a-z~ e 3 /t a, c rloFu(tao)o-vrat 2 rIt/aIot.9)56, qlI (aol)o-i7,'nt Iaot) -o F3 rtIA t3L ao)q TLI/ (ao)c-ro. D. v/(aot)4 -rov rtu(ao ic —lrov'TIIot)-i,-oTov 3 rqi(aoQ-T71v TLt(ao)i ariTv T/Lp ao.(Z P. r/A(Om) 6-/IeV r l (aoC-al) co-Ev T I/I2 Tv/(cot)sO-Te *TL/ aoQ&s)T -E TI(a-o)4-orE 3 rTCmaoC)4-fv Tty(aOI)c-JTO S. Tr (ae)a TI/L( lov)17. X 3 Tt/(ae)a-rT TI/I(aE)a-IToJca D D. TI/(aYF)a-aQ 7Q T/o(cI)a-oov 4 3 TItp(aE)-TcO-rv TI/I (aei — cSov P. tL/u e -a-ea a-eS 3 rt,(ae)a-Treo-av or TIr/( ae)a'i -Zcr o-av or._ I TI/I(a-)Ct-vTrcwv TL/(aE)a-4i-oTc Infin. TI/I(aELV)aV TL/(aE)a-c-OTaL lz N.. TI/l(a&Ov),Ov I/ (a6 co'-/evo tt/LI(aodv),&-oa TI/(aO) -/EvT) TI/I aI1)i r-vk TL4(a0)' co/-IpOJ. t Gj~. rT/(1tao)Io-vrovs TIL/(ao)a-edvov Ttll rtya~ Iou -o(rqs 1tA ESl,(ao)o-Ee/ 280] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 89 280. otxc,-O Present System of to love. Contract Verbs in Eo. ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). Present. I Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. LX\(lo,) o~- o (r ~i'X(fOe)OVp PtX(fo)oo-iat'Ec LX(fEO)O;~ V-p ~LX(({EE)E clS)(LXseret cJl\X(Ef,)yx (E/,(&l t (ZLX(eoV)oi flX(Eel)eL eX LA(eE) h /tX(ie)eZ-rat' e'c/uX(E'C)e-To kLX (6E)6 L-TOC e0t\XQ()ei-rov j Lx(EE)eL-o-go (ev X (t(4)e-ftjov cLX(;e)eL-roz. E. ~L(Ee)L-7r-7v /tX(EE)e(-cr6Sov e6fX oEs) -d.qoY q~X(;o lo~-t- o ~ L(X(o /oV- (Vo L(5o -~a. lX(tEo)oL-7-ev ifftX(eo)oL'-7eV 0tx(e6)oi,-Cf67 EqZLX(Eo')ov-,E - 0LX(E0V)Ov-0Tl itX(6EOV)OVV ctX(eo)oi-vraL e'LX(o)oi-vTro Present. Present. dkLX(E(O)(*)th o)&1a 0LtX(l, 0 U V qL.X(E?))-TC AlX(E7)?7-Tov 9L5(E7q)j -CO V' tX(;J)5-Tov )lX(Er)?rfo-O tX( tX(E'o)O L()Z- uE or ( ) ftA(EIO) -Cv -L - f(eot)&-rorc flX(EOL)OiZS qA(EOL)Ot- v - C/X(EOL)OL-0a fLX(eOL)OI V ftX(eo')oi-ir z - LX(eOC)oL-orzo * x(6,O1)OL-tq 0(() OL)OE-& T C/JX(EOV)O-1f) Oa(' t) iI-pev 0LX)f0L' cLX(EE)EL-E7 0AL(f'Ol)O07-CV 0Lx(EO) )0iZ-qa 4tX(Eot)eOZ-cJt o fLX(;OL)OL-(dE *L( fj)LX(EO)OL-COti f t\(c I)X(t-rE L\(O I~ ~ LX(EE0)Ol-E JL'X(EE),EL-TcocTav or o/ILX(cEE)EL-cTroo-av or 0tX(E.Ew)EL c/JLX(JE) EL-OJai 4tX('c) vC. ~tA(Eov)ov.-x.(EOd)&lV 0bsX(e)ov- evov jIlX(eoV)ov-vFor - LX\(o)OUeV-jIQ 0qbX(Esv)0~ou a I- vLX(EO)OV-0 eVO1 5otx('OV)0~~~p.0 ( o)ov —__ I.. 9PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [281. 281. 8kX'o-w to Present System of manifest. COntract Verbs in oe. | ACTIVE. M'IDDLE (PASSIVE). 1 Prieseint. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. S. 86rx(~~a)(X E8GX/0oon)o v a7X(odov-otiaL E'aX (00o);06-/v 2 aqX(o Eta)O;S fqX (oES)oVs' 8bpX(~)o;, (6EL)o; E;'X(0o'v)oi 3 7?X()o'd)oi E)X(oE)ov b8q7X(&)ov-rat fEX (oE)ov-To D. 8qX (o'e)o-rov Ef8X((6e)OD-TOe & aJXe de)6oi-uloz, E8l'X (O'e)O0-3Oe.c 3 a1X('e)ov-rov'qX(oe')oi-ovrq 7X(OE)0v-0rlol e8qX(oEo'v-o-qV a P. 8 x(doOv-jzEv f8qX(o'o)ov-pEv 87X(o6)o'-tLEa a t &X(o)o6-ytEa 2 aqX(o'e)oUo-rE Ef17)x(OE)ov-rE aJX (',e)ov —ce Ea1X(oE)ov-o-Ze 3 8r7X(o'ov) ov-ct E'arX(oov)ovv B X )(ooov-vmrat e'1X('o)ov-YTo Present. Present. 3 2 37X(6nySolorl o 3(o)o ot 3 ___ __ ___0_7 _ 8___ __ _)_-era t S. a ( G)-X(o ) X-roi, X(o d)o -zo > 3 A(o X(7))oo-r ov ( O Xooq ~ P. ~x (d d X()ob-,, -o bx, (oo)oi-.,e;a 3 ( ot7Xt o)a-cr e 3n(oo)Fo-vra. S qX(o0L)Ol-L or 8qX(ooi)oL'-Vr e(0)-v 2 N1)X (oots)o- 8 (0tOL,-X(0ot)oL-o-o z 3 ArX? olt)0oi 8qx(0oo)o1 — 7(7ol)OL-aO D. GqX(doL)ol-rov P. (0ol -,rjr0 bX o'Leol-tr. 3 807 & X(ooiool-r o aiX(ooa)ot-er7;v orX(ooOl)ol-ctav o nP. aX( oL)ol-'Ez o 8qX(oo') o- a'2 8N. X(0X0()L-Te )D')Ol-q76 Tool-e _3 8y1X(0ot)ol-ev o-oa X(oOz)o -Yr0te R D. BrlX(OteF)Ov 877\ X(6)o v-o o 83 q1X(or)ov-)o &1X(od)o&-1rxe G.?7iX(0of)ov-roE 8iX(oo)ov-pe'vov t 3 q3qX(o)ov-ro-av or X(oE)ov-co av or K. Ot8X(OO)0V-v7E V 8qx(OE)0l, —zwV N o#7X(o;)o;- 70ciav or 0rlX7Xtg-,trav.qx(dov)oU- 8?1X(oo)ov-,vsev7.n 85\/a(d)OUV aqx(0d)oV-16EVo G. 8,q(00)0v-^Tos otX(oo)ov-jevOV Qi o;)1X~oov)ov-o ff~s GX(oo)oU-,UEv77S 2833 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 91 282. 283. Future System of First Aorist System of to WsYo. Liquid Verbs. Liquid Verbs. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MSIDDLE. Future (contracted), 1 Aorist. O~~av~~o Eqbov-as E-c/I?7c-ara c75acltoa c75acsa-Joc q'-vc-arc s-a r0-a6'oqvcaveYL favco, avEL e'-0b7-avas o c-cav-o qavcy ] avylrat - -ey o f7Ya q-v-a)Y o OayoS6ra (e:av-luSov c-])Vdo'a -c0]v-aolzyr ~ayo~.70 y ~a~ooavcio;ov qvo& v E-C~lz'dvo Oavo6rrov,ayoyqo avEc'v-aT! q v-aZ qv caavo/Ifv 0avo/Ell Ja E-c/nv-aILEv E'c/?)-a/IEf a c/IaEE (aqceoJ E-/)v-arE e-c) -a (?J 0 avoute. f cE'- c/c-c0Va I favoval Ifavovrvrat fnv-av f n-v-avro qv0 Ojqvco7at on, V1 7 q'qrlvat 0iovr/rov 0 vlqr-zov f ~av-ol/, -olr/nv gbavolcr75 rlaciqF cvalqo-Z (av-oL/L, -0a7c /aolac rv 0(/Dalt /VlOyvatVl/p Oav-oas, -ol'at? (avo~o (ljVaL, (/lv c/nV casra 5 av-oirov, -otqlrov O avoatoov 0 rqvatsroy cnvactoa v 0av-oatrv, -otnr)v / avoL0aJ?)v ~0q)vaLTrnv c/jvalta2Jlv (av-oa7ecv -OLlryEVf IavoatMEca qvatlcuiev qjlvaaL/f Ea (/av-olre, -a'le qvaatui(re c/rVaL-e /)vaao-Ze (/IaV-aLFc, -0i?)(ZaV 0CVolvTO. (?VOLEV, (fr7vElaV cvatv ro 0/7vaT'co Oqvdcar-?0 qv7a-ov f vao-Zov 7 ra7re c/naase cnvaaTco-av or c/nvarTocZav or Oavetv c aveio-?at 0/ as c /rcaaas 4avcov. tavoasLevov cnvcas cacdMevos cavova cr avovaEvrv 0Hvjacrar 0ij7vapcva Ofavouv 4 avoavcFvov /rl/vav O x valevov <}(VOUV7.o'X- avovv vov OlVvavrog (rAvapEvov 0avov'r1v 1avovyrts If077vamrpv rpvayev77s 92 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. L28A 284. Perfect Middle and Pure Verbs, Liquid Verbs. with added L d Ves. MIDDLE rEXfXc (TrXE) crrTXXa (TreX) | alve (Oqiv) (PASSIVE). to complete to send to show S. 1 -rTEre-ar-/iac EoaXla aLrqeao'a&' 2 rTEXE-ora& aTraara c 7rEiavcrac 3 TerTXE-c-ratL oTrarXrat 7rwiavrat 4 D. 2 rre'EXe-r-ov cTraXhoY ITeavJov 3 rErTf'X-OOV -TraXov 7rSE avJov P. 1 rereXer —LeJa crTalIyE a 7req.acreJa 2 rercXe-o-.E EJcraXe 7rfave 3 reTeXe-o-FVot EIv TL eLTraXMEvol 7reL/acE'EVOt eto' S. 1 c-reTEA f' mrc'a7iuQY A E/ie a71v 3 1E-rETEvXe-o-7 -r0 E Xo'atro eravro.D 2 e-7rerEXe-r2-oov'araXkov I- rEavfov 3 E fT7X- a-TS1)v earaXT7vY &rec/av3?v b P. 1 rErXE'-o-pa-AEa ca-rTaXLE a ereo/aO7Ea 2 r-rerie-ao-e Ertrakee 7rfave 3 TreEXE-c-fE'VOL?7- aav E-cratLEvoL rT (ruav IrEc/aqevoL ri(rav Pef. Sub. ErTEXE-cr/lEYoQ $ |araXtiIvos C | 7rEre)ala-Yvov Peif. O;pt. TTerEXE 7leo E eL7vo V EE | ra)XEvo e'l?7v |Eredao-/levog tq1LV S. 2 TrerAe-a-o (raCXvo Ireqavc-o; 3 vreTEXE-a-rco Ccra-X0o 7refv4o D. 2 TerTEXe-o'-ov fTcraXov 7 (r/cavJov SF 3 TereXE-3CoPv acrTaXov Tre0aPvJoz P. 2.TrerTE e-'cE e'rvaTX e TrcElavJE 3 3 rreXEA-c-coaoav or EcraXSkCo)(av or 7re/aPv'corav or TETEXRa-aJ OW YE(YaX.J&W 7rEOf)a'VJCO P Perf. InJa rETE(XE-ta | F ETaX G |cECav&aL Perf. Par. TErEXE-ra —'vEvoE eio raTUllvo I re4baorYEvoS Ptlt. Peif. I' Ind. E-rEXEa-o'-rv ElaVrt7.v Sub. reXC-0 —ZO) (a/v)co A Opt'. VEX E-0 —?JEL??V javieL?)v fImv. TEXEX-'-3jTl qavS, T Inf. TEXE-C-! PO&at - avZJrivas' ParI. E-' qOav 1 Ftt. Ind.! TEXE-c-1o/ua _ I I qbavvlJaocoac 28 1] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 93 First Passive Systems of XMute V'erbs. ptMr~Tf (PO/) aAddow (aXXay) E'iyXco (Xe'yX) 7reoc (7rM) to throw to exchange to convict to persuade yptlilat iAXaylzal EXiXEyCtaL 7relrewcaL epptl+a&l Xa7 ata EA'X7XEyat 7re7iEL-aL e'pp'LrTa& jXXaKTraL lXkXeayKL 7re;reLoT'raL e/(L4JS OV?/AXaXJov eX? 7XeXov WEr7TLc3oV eppT2rr5o #7XXaX2;ov EXj7XEyXtov V7reLct2Ov epp/.e yea 71XXaytLEa XeX;ytr Ea 7rErFloLE(Fa ep9LL/e TXXaXtsE, X?)XEyXJE,, 7TEVLTS3e e'PtIL/gIVOl eLrtL XXayptE'vot o 1L XE 7YlIE(VOL ELOL VTE71rEtroltEVOL t(LoI Cp~L/rtlvs?7XX0ay/th v fXr;enyfIrv.? -... irTreC7tLv epptlrro' XXaKro X)XEEyKro Etrr TEELTro EppLgqtov?jXXcxLoT;X6X~yxKov E7TrE1rToTO e'pptcrlJV IXXaxt'ov EX?7XyX~tV E7TrEtrlv EPaptc 7X7aX.a;E EX7yXEYXZE E7rTE7TTrLT'?eppt/JIe-LeOE Ea q)XXaypEYaOL E) e X?V/)ey/t.Ya E E7TEL7ItYO L EcLa EppLt FO 5.j Y F XXaOc EX, Xy$OE 7rTEWLtEO'L[LIVO S 3 |b'Xayp`Vov 3 | eq\tylEVo0 3 | emfta-e~og 3b E'fiPPL+~ May'XX o *Anr)eyto?r E7rt y C 0J0?ft99 o # xsp''',+3'\,rxcr, 2? 0 Ertre'ptcO!' fiXXalX2W lEXqX EYXJOYV 7TELCTOV.4P'F S'XXXJov e'XsXEyXtov T7reLroJSov "dL0' JE ijXXaxe CX5xeyXEXe TElrFCtcTE AepL'cZav or'jXX'X(coo-av or EIX?)XlvxTor-av or mrrefLocouav or EPP1L'0WV qXXaX20V fEX5x-v E7fLcrf3wv'd 3aL 1 |j77XX'X2atL Xe'?)7XCy` taL 7treiu'at EppL/tfLVOs i| X Xay/tvwos EX?)XYLE!YOS 7Trf7rftFLEVoS {dPL+3QV 7jnndXX~t v i,. frIe tS.v tiPL+op aXXaxt fXeyi aELttc pLsa0Tl a'WX2;,STL.'E'XtrrL C6lox2rL pLc/J2Jvat, dXXaXZvat AeyXVXjvat 7VeLtT2?j!vat pLtcEALl aXXaXcE.L E'XEyX5qll 7rELtVa'r l 94 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. [285 285. Synopsis of rliac-co to honor. Pr. Impf. Active. Future Active. Aorist Active. Perf. Plup. Active. Ind. TrL/I. 7pLcroCo Tfrtlp?7Ka ETrlizCov iTrflcra Erefll7jKELC Sub. TL.u r ) L(O rrE71tIKO) Opt. TLLC L-LI, n3V TQ1(L? t ri/c7o-altLu 7Ertu1[qKolut. Imv. rTLAa Trl/,IUov rerTLi7LKe Inf.,/rla T' r7t/LCELV rt/ijocra rer7Lt?7KEV aL Par. r1itvy rLLCT)oo rt1tjoa TertLqKt)K' M. P. Middle. Middle. M. P. Ind. rTt/Ltotat Ttr7l/ooAaL rETrllL/AaL ertL.WlWY v Crlrt1a-tdlv ErErl/ir71)V Sub. Ttr/Icoat rtlti uo/1Lat; TreTLJul7/LEvoQ Opt. rttILptl tv rTL/XTOL!L)V rTt7tlqcaIjv rer76tETlteVOS ErlV Imv. r71tA) rlt? rat * rerlpe7To Inf. r7iulZatL rT'creaCrat t rpIta(raa l7'rertpctwr a& Par. rqLCO/IEVOs rp71LriTlevos rtliqaTdeoVo rerTL?,UqLEVOs Passive. Passive. Fut. Perf Ind. rtlvSt ol-uat ervtIJlsV rertAjOc-otpat Sub. A rtl-T Opt. p? rl1oTl)tE Vt TtfSllfl)Vt T7trlcroIJLV Imv. 2 r r Inf. p t g rt71? reor-a L rnpLy;at TerLz~]orecrSa& Par. vtptrl7(Toevo/ L S' T lt/A?7rE TElTtrItTO'eVO 286. 3r-pad-c to hunt. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. ~ Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. Ind..zjp, Zqpdoao Tf-eljpdKa, qpov q p ao a frErSlpaKeWv Sub. ljp& ripdaco rEpe3?paKco Opt. colpc!u, - ~tcv 3pdto'qL& gqpdoracqat rfEtrqpaKolt/ Im.v. ipa'i pacrov Test7paKe Inf. rlpav. qpduertv 2ripaCoat reqrlpaKe'va Par. trlp&v jqpcio-ov Srpcaorav terZpaKCc s M.P. M. M. M.P. Ind.,pfoiua IAa& qpoi-ai veJpataL S;pc!~V srlpa7aL'dTv?reErlpc1tv' Sub. rlp&f!at Zpdt-wpa L' e TrZpale'ivog d Opt. tsp/k7qV 51paa-olut7v Spacali/tAv TE3Eqpa/uEpvoS E-iLV Imv. p;qpi.qpatraL 7veparo Inf. 2;pau-rat Zrpa'eCaat L SZptiaoarat vE3Xipair-aL Par.?qpo,,eVog SqpaaordjeVoV 2qpacrdoajevos reepaLmYvos P. P. lud.. Srpatro!~oa&uaat irpkv Sub. Opt. 0 t pa'rororlvY Bqpa4Zl'V Imv. a Q'', ~pdarrS Inf. f E-a?7patl7reoTac'BrlpaQjvat Par. 2rfparo-7d6evo9 5jpaJe[t' 288] PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 287. fXC-O to love. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. M. P. MXOVM r1t. a cocE.P.XiKv,/,IXova,,,x,? oOa,, m 7r1EX?,7Ka rCxOtjip, LOllV +t3bLqU~~OqtL ~ /flcOTaL/is 7rEJLX?)KOL/ACL oQbXo~ - IXfoa rredlXqk~o bfl~elv +tLafljCvgV ~btXaac VTEc/flKevaU XE ~(at~ {lXjroa ELWtXio'rast,rE/lXK6'Sa M.LP. M. P. tx88 oM-tao txr oopat?a C' LXOV/ir CEeX 17ovv LMv ~sekol~!7q -o[W r Olxq- o ~fflr)v rrkgcrat~ rer~)Xiol77;Xeovt trX7oliat reXYLEVo LXEtvoSaL jLXA7rEaj t e C veXufaaoT-Jats r7-eOX 7 at.IJXotbLEVL" eX&kY'EI o rX?,caTOYOOs rTerleXe7/EbOr P. P. u. P. erf. txo77 a o-opCfoat +lt rre tjcXroopat.'X,' 4)l\7.JaolLqvEl7)V rrXcJS L~~lXtq(Totr/lfl r -e.-o!- ~rlX?7.1-ErS t r4tl jar at trt I reX )o 3Tac L, p7atOi~EVr rLXC7ELa rer)Lrd )e(TOI'o, 288. rEXE-&J to complete. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. AoristA. Perf. Plup. A. TreXi rEXCo (rXET)O, 374) TereXEKa EreXouv ErEXEra ETrerAXEKEW TACEO'Co TfTEXEKC#).rEXOdtlL -OLpV. TEXOLfL, -Olyt? 7~eXratiSp TIETIEX K0/i TeXEL Ta reXEo Ter4EX re~olv raelo61~ev o re /oa rfrexcia~vt TEXELVI TEXELV TEXEoL TETEXEKEZr'O IEXWjv TEXC` 7~TExc(rav TETfEXEKCIE M! P. ML. P. reXovfat - rEXoi/aIoL TrETXF c a`L TEX 0a) TfEXEocyat TEfTeXEcYO rO rTEXolJu2 TErXolJt7J.ca reXfralWtqlv rLreioETaXtE (T rEXOv'lo TeXOV/E ToEXEcraiL Tov rerXeo7LtEO P. P. b bb TEELT~?)LOl/I?)v TEElE LA ErXooT) oTL TrFXEColTjTETThCLf TEXELST7Vats TEEJ71C0'?7TOF01 TfEXE3ELS 96 PARADIG3MS OF VERBS. [289 289. &q7Xo-w to manifest. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. Ind. &8X& 8r/Xqc;.eSroXwKa Era5xovv E tjxoca E(E~XLKEW Sub. aqX& a&rXoC-, 3E&X\KO Opt. q)Xollt, -otlv aXwo'loL 8qX\o'atlL 8Eq7XOJqKoqrL Imv. MijXov 8jXo rov q6&eXoKE Inf. aqXoiv BaX(o-Ev Eri X~oat ae8qXroK:vat Par. aqXv FOX'couV 8qrXcloa' a 6E8qXCOK& M. P.. M. M. P. Ind. IjXovpaL 8X1co'oiat MeAXo/oaa c/8qXo6/Uql c3qXooo'dv;aeGiX&qv Sub. aXo)ia&a 8co'ooLpal 86ErLqxoqEvos x Opt. NX0otlq 8GqXcOtln-lv 8rqXCoa-aip 8 E8q)XcOlExvyO E4.v Imv. aqXoo,wXoo-aL ae3arxooo Inf. 8-qXoicatL 8qaX.o'reorra& 8Xr. oacrca L SeSrXcOjTa& Par. 3qXov6Evo, o? 8,)XCO'OreVOV qXocdtE'oE 8E1XzotMEPO I. P.. Fvt. Perf. Ind.~ a7iXordcyopaL f qhcoqv a IX; Co-o~laL Sub. CaAXoC Opt.' A aqwXo3ql-OtjiL qXCEtl'V XiocOE47VV Imv.,&3 qrL Inf. G Xca'ro eat;ac XojrSvat fXrccTaL Par. 8rioqodvoE VO 8qk7XcOEtl 8nxro'dCTO/rEvos 290 Tr&XXow (crrTX) to send. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. Perf. Plup. A. Ind. r-r-XX)o Tare7XZ o',raXKa E(TreXXok-, EOsrELXa erTa-XKELP Sub.:rAXX(A) rTElrXro) TaXK Opt. TEXXOL/tL TTEXoLILt, -oL'77v o-rELXal/t~ EcoratXKOLL Imv. ro-rXXe rrerXov o'rTaXKE IlTf. rAkXECv oTrEXEL1v o(rEXcaL ErraXKEvaL Par. r/TXXov crrreXY v o-'TELXav EcraXKtOs M.P. M. M. M.P. Ind. arTEXotlac acreXojlaL e'ra\uat SuTbEX.?V ~o-TErLXucOaLt E'o'raTeXlVO a1 -rrEXXdc ala oor-Xrarl &rrdX rv Sub. cT'r;EXXo)a o-reloalt;oraX;vo Opt. TEXXO- L/klV oTEXOljtrro7V orTELXaCLrJ?)V Co'aXuEPOE'vEl Imv. rrtEXXov (rrELXa& o'raXo'o Inf. or;WXXe,(ra o-r1EXEailat arelXacrta& c-rXdSaz Par. rTEXxOadEVOS arTEXo vo/ Lcv os rrTEXaEcvov ErraX1LEVOs 2 Future P. 2 Aorist P. Ind. TrraX1nro-laL o-rda)Xqv Sub. CA o-raXco Opt. t ~ T rraXt?1rolM-?v o YaXEtvp imv.. u r(aXq2;c Inf.' b Trakro' Eolal CraX7val -Par. crraXrodeEvor rTraXelS 292] PARADIGMS OF VER1DS. 97 291. /a&vo (0av) to show (in second tenses, to appear). Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. 1 Perf. Plup. A. 2 Perf. Plup. LA. /aUlvco qavco vrc]EayK'a [,, roqva jaivco (p7J irrf cayKco 7rECr/vo baLivotuI 4avl[ol, - Fol u 7vatelt. 1 EqayKotlutL 2 Tre P.VOtLL Oaive fupvov 7refayKE r7erftve falvatlv e avelV cMvaL 7re~ayKcevat 7TcTvYEva& ClVatvv /7avEwv daas S7EcaYKars TEc07VYC M. P. M. M. M. P. 2 Aorist P. Jaltvo lat avolatL,reaa-ac /ailzopuat q0rjVc/LaL 7rEfCauo7VOS J)rI j /awolupi -9avoil.qv v)qvals?)v /afdr~v Oaiovov 4vral rekavco [e'Ilv qcavq2; hal'veosac /aveZa-al t jvao-act 7rEq)avbaL t aviuvat CalvoeZs -Ja fvov/.Uevos (jVatievoyS 7rEcao7( EVosjc q/avetS 1 Future P. 1 Aorist P. 2 Future P. 0avjro-opatL Efiavzqv Oavq'o-opat hbIavacoilbshv CAVa3 zq LV cav'o7v h avZcoea-catL OavS qvat Javi7o-ccriat O avJo-L evov 0 av;les' avr co 292. XECwrw (XIir) to leave. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. 2 Aorist A. 2 Perf. Plup. A. Xf Ltro XE+co XeXolsa EF l'XOV;EXL7OV EXEXOLrELV Xdro X7rco XE X XO cO XeltOrlL XElVodLL XlTOLIl XEXOlG7TQLI Xe7re Xlre XEXotwre XL7rvf XElVv Xl7TFV XEXOL7E'vS. M.P. M. M.. ALP. XElToiia L'V A /cl~O(Lta XEXELILCL XlrpatbaL X&rcoaca XEXEL/AICEYOr (I lTrOL/VY XEral/ol/JAv XlTOl/77Y XEXEL/1/IYOS 4Lpt XElTO'S XL70o1JV XEXEal.O XEIrEOL Jetat Xt7rE'Zata XEXEL2ata XeFOYOS EL4OJYO5 Xt TO, IO XiEXEtqV 1 Future P. 1 Aorist.P. Fut. Perf. XCLv eLnItooIav AXdforzV XEXeItopLat'o o XbL~3r~~ CO O El+CSY XEXEL4OLCELy ~ XELY~tjYEITra& XEt/Y~jvat XEXEL4/E& t:t k XCh~J?,aOE XELC/pELV XeXEL4I0cJ/LYOSv 98 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. L293 293. Pc7rrc (~Pl) to throw. Pr. Impf. A. Future A. Aorist A. 2 Perf. Plup. A. Ind. pctrrc ol' EPPro7vtV Epptlxa lpttEcv Sub. pcrrco IpL+k Imv. pL7rTE Ai4[ov lWta,'k Infe pLrTEL. pLet4V aLta ptEva Par. SLUrrwOV pco/ Jc+as Eppt v M.P.. P. a. IPerf. Ind. pIL7rro4Lat p. +opat clac Aa i7rouIv. espp4ca ort E.PPL/7V ImP. PP Fut.Ft Per Sub. -wpat pS~oppf c Opt. q czOL'Atl pL+O' t pt a1'ji fPel1AjAi'QVq'ClI Imv.- etn7rV piWat W ptl Inf. aP bSr paL+~ codeal p4lXa& XvaL Wlxpat Par. tLrdXO-,c dro,.sPt pld LS, EPP#OEVOS Pr. mpf. A. Future A. Aorist A. ut Perf. u. A. Ind. pdXXdcop a dXXco q'XXalat fjXXaoo-ov fjX*Aata TXPaXcrE Sub. dXXdo'co dXakdc s'XX-7/,o Opt. Cao.a-oqtt a1xxotu daxxa~,qu rxxyaoq t Imv. La'X\aca a'X atov iftttaxe Inf. dXkadcrev aX4ELJ aXk'kata& O2' axEvao Par. dXXdracv dXXdeo-w daXckda~ hXXXsax 294. d oo dXXa a ro w (aXXy) to excXayge. 1Pr. I f. AP. Future A. Aorist. 2 Perf. Plup. A. n.. XXaooI0 qaXXoXa'ov 71)xxaytv Sub. a. aara aXXa'oFac 7XX&ayvo 3 Opt. a dXta(o-ooT ujv XaO 1 o pv aC^ai dXXvaiyp~t 7MXXaypvos L V Imv. a)Xkaovc a&,apEoJLp, cLXoEuaL or ILXEpEatal, c(rLeovuo or LpL;evo-L. But 6e? it is necessary and its Inf. MeTy are usually contracted. Instead of 2 Sing. Mid. cPisE'e-al, (ptxe-e-o, q(pxhe —o, we find forms with only one e, cLxEaL, FIALTS,? Lo Aeo; but these are of doubtful correctness. f. Verbs in oco are contracted as in Att., but sometimes have ev instead of ov: &IaX&o, 3nXoZ &7acovyal, aX/AfLi7v, arAXoVLL or a)X6e~l, i3sXou or i4?Xev. -Doric Contraction. g. The Dor. contracts a with a, ow (not in the ultima) to a instead of co: it contracts a with e,,,, to V, 7, instead of a, a:?rel,pyES (for 7rsyp,'ev), 7relvaYrL (for reLV5i~L), 0psTe (for opaTe), sp.P (for 6p), 7bppu (for 6pia). The Ion. contraction of so, eov to ev belongs also to the Dor. 371. Remarks on Contract Veer7bs. a. The connecting vowel of the Inf. Act. was originally e, not Es 352 d): hence for ac-etl, o-ey, the contract forms are not av, o',, but ar, ozv (as if from erv, 0e&). 372] FUTURE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 125 b. Stems of one syllable in e admit only the contraction into et. Wherever contraction would result in any other sound, the uncontracted form is used. Thus 7rX;-co to sail makes in the Pres. Ind. 7rX-co, rrXetr, 7rXEL, Du. rtheurov, P1. vrXi-oiev, rteilTe, rrX-ovo-t. Except Si-o0 to bind, which makes Tr boud (for Si-ov), 8oVSat (for Be-okaL), etc., and- is thus distinguished from de-o to wcant, require, which follows the rule, making SeE it is necessary, but rS 8d-or the requisite. c. A few stems in a take 1? instead of a in the contract forms: Ud-s to ive, X~ (not fs), (., GTe, r, v, etc. (cf. 370 D g). So also wretrL-co to hunger, Lt+aCriO to thirst, KvL-co to scratch, ra-co-w to wash, +ad-co to rub, and Xpa-o/aL to use. d. P'yo-ow to be cold has co and c in contract forms, instead of ov and or: Inf. Ptcycw, Opt. pjyqV. e. Xov-co to bathe sometimes drops v (39), and is then contracted as a verb in oo: AXov for Ao(v)-e, XoiEal for Xo(v)-o-/cao, etc. FUTURE SYSTEM, or FtFure Active and ]Jiddle. 372. The future active and middle adds or to the stem, and has the inflection of the present. (Paradigm, 271.) a. Mulute Verbs. A labial or palatal mute at the end of the stem unites with a, forming ~t or e: a lingual mute is dropped before a (47). KOWTC* (KOrr) to cut Ko'/cO racr-o- (ray) to arrange racco /3X7a'rco (/3Xa/3) to hurt 13Xacow opvao-o (opvx) to dig ipvpow ypac4-o to worite aypa4/o Aps'fw (OpaS) to tell /parco?rXkK-wO to twist rki-XoW arr;v8-Wo to pour awcrrelao (49) For rp q-co to nourish, ) p+rco, and the like, see 66 c. b. Pure Verbs. A short vowel at the end of the stem becomes long before a( (335). Ea-co to permit Eacao r otE-) to ma7ce ro71jrao rtMa-co to honor 7-q o-' NovX)o-co to enslave SovXr&co. For exceptions, see 419. 371 D. c. Hm. has 2 Sing. Mid. gipna with irreg. accent for?pd-e-ac. Before — vn of the 3 Du., Hm. contracts ae, cc, to 71:'rposau6IvIi- (irposauaawo to address), rvan~'4,- V (o'avsuancw to meet together), areIXT'7l-V (&7reitXec to threaten). So, before yeval in the Inf.: 7retvnyevat (7reivndw to hunger), rrenvhLeaCat (prevatw to 9mourn), iroaccenai (rrobiw to miss), Qophlzcata and more irregularly cpopnai (:popiE to bear). Hd. seldom, if ever, contracts ae, aet, to 77, 7y: XpiaoSat to use, not Xpialaato e. Hm. has Impf. Ads uncontracted for eAo(v)E; and, with e added to the stem, X4eov for eXo(v)e-o0. In the Aor. he has Exovaua and eXo'Eeo'a. 372 D. a. For Fut. in 5w from Pres. in ACo, frequent in Hm., see 328 D b. b. For lengthened forms of a, Dor. Tt/qao-w, Ion. oiaouat, reLptaro,uat, see.35 D. —— For a doubled in Hm. after a short vowel (v&noasw), see 344 D. 126 TENSE-SYSTEMIS. FUTURE ACT. AND MID. E372 c. Verbs of the second class have the lengthened stemn in the Fut. trdEcO (7ra3) to persuade, WrElco (not 7rarucr); 7rvico (7Trv) to breathe, 7rvweoe MLat (not 7rv-0roiaL). 373. Liquid Verbs take e instead of r- in the future (345); e is contracted with the connecting vowels, as in the Pres. of qbtXOW: aivow (cav) to show, sav&o, contracted Java. (Paradigm, 282.) Exc. KEXXC (KEX) to drive and KvpEC (Kvp) to fall in with make KEXTC,7 KVpfco,, with a-. Contract Future from Pure and lMute Verbs. 374. 1. Some pure verbs in eca drop a in the future, and contract: TrFX-co to complete, rTEXeto, TEXE-co, TEXb, 1 P. TeXo~Vfev, etc. The Fut. thus made has the same form as the Pres. 375. 2. Mute stems in 0h (Pres. anco) sometimes do the same: /t3CSa3 to cause to go, 33aio-c, t,3ai-c, a3l&. Similarly EXabvvo (eXa) to drive, Xca(o)(0,;XC, F;XA,;Xa, etc. 376. 3. Mute stems in ta (Pres. tLoL), after dropping o-, insert e and then contract: KOIL'C@O (KOLAB) to convey, KO[Litro, KOML-;-o@, K0oi, 1 P. KO/JLOV 1EV, etc., Fut. Mid.,KoCtoptcat. The name Attic Future has been given to this formation. 377. 4. Some verbs take a-E instead of a-, contracting e with the connecting vowel: rvae-co (7r-u, 7rvev) to breathe, nvrre5va-oliata,' vevro-vat (also frvev(roat3); 7rXE-co (rXeV, 7rAXv) to sail, 7rXev(-roala (also 7rXsvcoLaLt); 4nly-c (kay) toflee, Feveoviat (also q4EvopatL). This formation is found only in the future middle, and only when it has an active meaning. It is called the D)oric Future (377 D). 378. Future without tense-sign. A few verbs form their Put. without any tense-sign: X;o (Xv) to pour, Fut. Xico, Mid. XEofItL. So the irregular futures fedopat shall eat (450, 3), r-looat shall drink (435, 4). 379. Future Middbe used as passive or active. Beside its proper meaning, the Fut. Mid. has in many verbs a passive sense: in not a few, it has an active sense. The latter is found especially in many verbs which express an action or function of the body: alKoo to hear,.awe to 373 D. The Fut. in eco has in the dialects the same forms, contracted and uncontracted, as the Pres. in ecw (370 D b, e). For poetic Fut. in aw from other liquid verbs, see 345 D. 375 D. The Fut. in ace has in Hm. the same variety of forms as the Pres. in aw (370 D a): thus Iewc, ixeas, de'Ad. In Rd., it is contracted as in Att. 377 D. In Dor., the usual tense-sign of the Fut. Act. and Mid. is oe instead of a: e is contracted with the following vowel: xvow- (for Awv-a4-c), Avao-es, xvaeZ, vaoiove, v vavces/, Xvac-6re, A XuOveri'; Mid. AhvoevLal (for xv-ae-ouas), kV~7,, Av'e7rcT, etc., Avoe7o-aat, AuvoeEcevos. 378 D. Similarly, Hm. has Fut. detoplat or f]0opaL (39 a) shall live connected with,tdoL to live, 6ai shall find connected with 2 Aor. Pass. 4-Ma-r7v learned, iceC or icefw (39 a) shall lie from KEeal. — Hm. sometimes omits a of the Fut. tftcr.: ~Jpw6 Fut. of ionwc to draw. 382] FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 127 Ring, a7rrlvrT(i to meet, adroXaco to enjoy, f3a;ico (Fut. fa8t&oiat) to walk, /3odo to cry, yEXa& to laugh, oLturco to wail (-tyo, a and r-tooirdo) to be silent tovaiSo to be busy. FIRST AORIST SYSTE3, or Fi-vst Aorist Active and Jiiddle. 380. INFLECTION (Paradigm, 272). The connectingvowel is a throughout: for EXvae, Xvoov, Xvcrat (Inf. Act., and Imv. Mid.), see 349 a: for iAvaa, see 364. For the middle forms XUV-co, XVcrp, XVcato, see 363. For the optative forms etas, EtE, Etav, which are called Aeolic, but are more used than the regular forms, see 349 b. For the accent of certain forms, see 367 e. 381. FORMATION. The first aorist active and middle adds cr to the stem. The future and first aorist systems, when formed with a-, have the same tense-stem: hence the rules in 372 apply also to the I Aor. Ko7r-TCO EKoita r-aorco (ray) E'raa a-co( a-(Ta 3)Xarro f/3XaaCra Sp(aawc (apVX)`opvta rVP-co EruICaa ypad-co fypaE ra a pco)pa (pa ) jpaara 7roLE-cO) r7ro?7oC-a rrXiEK-co E7rXFea oarevB-c fo-ret-a aovXO-co Ao6vXcoo-a 7rpO-co EJpEa 7rElTf) (7lm) f7Traa 7rvEo (7rvv)`7rrvEvaa XEo to pour makes'Xlea (for eXevcra) corresponding to the Fut. XE' (378). Cf. the irregular cozra said (450, 8), fiveyKa (450, 6). For three aorists in Ka, ftrjKa from TL427tL (.e) to put, f&oKa from bIaoob, (8o) to give,'rKa from 1'rqul (/) to send, see 402. 382. Liquid Verbs. These reject a-in the first aorist, and lengthen the stem-vowel in compensation for it: cat'vo (Oacv), /'rlva (for cavcra); see 345. (Paradigm, 283.) REM. a. The verlbs a'/o) (ap) to raise and aXXouatL (AX) to leap make a9p and'a in the 1 A or., except in the Ind., which has q on account of the augment: erpa,,Xdairqv, but a'pas, aXatdevos. b. A few other verbs have a where the rule (335) requires r: Kepbalvco to gain, EKK;pSaLa; o3pyalvco to enrage, cOpyava;-or, on the contrary, have q after p, instead of a: rerpalaco to bo' e, del-Erpqva. 380 D. For 1 Aor. in rnm. with o and e, like the 2 Aor., see 349 D. 381 D. For a- doubled in Hm. after a short vowel (e'yeAa —a), see 344- D. For xiEaO-a=eAovua from xoow to bathe, see 371 D e. For [Xea, Hm. has commonly Xeuva. Similarly, Hm. makes 1 Aor. 6EKr-a'also written'eiea) Att. Eicaava from icatc (Kau) to burn, Ea-Geva from a-rvo (a-u) to drive, 71ixmEdfz and hXev d/zv from atXeofLca or aXE1oIaL to avoid, and the defective Aor. VeaTo seemed (connected perhaps with e'-Sd-bv learned). Hes. has BaTea'caaa from BarE'otcat to divide. 382 D. 1rm. has 1 Aor. in a-a from some liquid verbs (315 D), —Hmn. &ieXAAa for 6&perXa from obpAxco to increase (345 D). 128 TENSE-SYSTEMIS. SECOND AOMIST. 383 SECOND AORIST SYSTEMI, or Second Aorist Active and iJiddle. 383. The tense-stem of the second aorist active and middle is the same as the verb-stem. It has the inflection of the present system, the second aorist indicative being inflected like the imper. fect. (Paradigm, 276.) For the change of e to a in the 2 Aor., see 334 a. For the accent of the 2 Sing. Imv., the Inf. and Par., see 366-7 a. For the second aorist system without connecting vowels (Mt-form), see 399 if. 384. "Ay-co to lead has in the 2 Aor. a reduplicated stem (332): 7j'yayov, ayay-eiv. Syncopated stems (339) are seen in e'-7r-0dquv (-Eir-omta to ly), &-(X-OV (for E-oeX-ov, Pr. cXo to have), E-o-7r- 6pUv (for E —E7r-OL71v, Pr. E7roLaLt to follow), rkXov (for I'Xvv3-ov Hm., Pr.'pXOzaC to come), and some others: Y'veyKov (for qv-eveK-ov, Pr.;poa to bear) has both reduplication and syncope. —— For rpcoya to gnaw, 2 Aor. 7'-rpc.y-ov, see 334 d. PERFECT ACTIVE SYSTEMS, or Perfect and Plupverfect Active. 385. The two perfect active systems have the reduplication (318 if.) in common, and are alike in their inflection (Paradigms, 273, 277). For the augment of the Plup., see 311. For the connecting vowels of the Ind., see 350-1. For the older Attic V in the 1, 3 Sing. of the Plup., see 351 a. For oav in the 3 P1. Plup., see 356 c. For the forms XeXvKa and XEXVKe, see 361. For the accent of the Inf. and Par., see 367 c, d. 383 D. In im., a few stems which end in a mute after p, suffer transposi. tion as well as variation of vowel in the 2 Aor.: s'p i-o]uat to see, eSpicovr, 7rip'-w to destroy, E'rpiaov. For Ion. E'Ev instead of ev in 2 Aor. Inf., see 352 D. 384 D. In Hm., a considerable number of verbs have reduplicated stems in the 2 Aor.: e-7reppa-or (cppcdco to declare), r7reta-o, (7refaco to persuade), TeTaprEdPLx (ripir-c to delight), wrep-OErat (pEp8eo/at to spare), etc. -- pap-ov (st. ap, Pr. apapico to fit), &pop-ov (0'p-rvu, to rouse). Reduplicated and syncopated are?-tcEKs-cjUvY (Icex-ouatL to command), gxaXi.-ov (st. axec, Pr. &axBcE to wara off). Not used in the Pres. are 7r4pv-ov (st. qpEv) killed, T`TFt-Ov (st.'rcm) canme up to, Tela-y-6v (st. ray, Lat. tango) taking hold of.- Two verbs,?p6dc-w to draw, v`7-r-rwo to chide, reduplicate the final consonant of the stem, with a as a connective:?ipil'aic-ov, ivitr-i7r-ov (also EvE'Yi7r-ov). Of syncopated stems, Hm. has also leyp-g/rlv awoke, (found even in Att., from 1EyetLp st. eyep), &cyp-dteiort assembled (Inf. ayEp-eoaatr 367 D, Pr. &?LdpC), E-7rA-d6xMsvz (7rEX-ocat to be). 385 D. For Dor. co, Ecs, El, instead of a, as, e, in the Sing. of the Pf. Ind., see 350 D.-For Dor. etv instead of evat in the Pf. Inf., see 359 D.-For Ionic forms of the Plup. in HIm. and Hd., see 351 D. —For Ep. cA- instead of or in the Pf. Par.,-see 360 D. 387] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 129 For the second perfect system without connecting vowels (Itl-form) see 399 fl. The Sub., Opt., and Imv. have the inflection of the Pres. The Tmv is very rarely used, and only in perfects which have a present meaning In place of it, the Perf. Par. can be used with the Imv. of eltl to be: thus XeXVKw it'a,-~t EOTW, etc. Even the Sub. and Opt. are quite generally made in this way: thus XFXVKCbw h, XEXVK&C'S etv,) instead of XheXVKCo, XEXLKo0l4, which do not very often occur. 386. FIRST PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. The first perfect and pluperfect add K to the reduplicated stem. (Paradigm, 273.) a. This is the only form for pure verbs (but see 409). It is the prevailing form for liquid verbs, and for mute verbs with lingual stems: the lingual mute is dropped before K: KotIcao (Kopb8) to convey, KFKO~aKa. The pure verb aKov'o to hear has the 2 JPerf. aK/Koa (321), 2 Plup. jK77KEtv or aK77KECV (311),-the only instance of the kind in Attic prose. b. Pure verbs, and verbs of the second class, have the lengthened stem in the 1 Perf. Ea-co ELaKca rote-co Ve7olK7La 7reSco (7r!i) 7TreT7rKa Ttla-cO rertl7Ka b ovXo-CO 3E3ovXCOKa rrVECO (7TU) 7rT7rrevfKa c. Liquid stems of one syllable change e to a (334 a): orTeXXco (TreX) to send, la'-raXKa, beelpco (4bep) to destroy, /'?S0pKa. v is rejected in a few verbs': KpIVo (KPhl) to distinguish, KE'KpKlKa, retIVO (rev) to extend, Tr;raiKa, etc. (433). If not rejected, it must be changed to y nasal: balvco (avy), 7rwEayKa Several liquid stems suffer transposition (340), and thus become vowel-stems: /dXXao (3aX) to throwa, 3i-i3Xil-Ka, K/L-voo to be weary, K;KflT)-Ka. 387. SECOND PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. The tense-stem of the second perfect and pluperfect is the reduplicated verb-stem. (Paradigm, 277.) a. Vowel-Changes. e in the stem becomes o in the 2 Perf. (334 a): o-rpe'b-co to turn, l'o-rpooa, 1[tKTO (reK) to bring forth, r'roKa., Verbs of the second class have the lengthened stem, but change eL to ot (334 b): T7K-o (rdK) to melt,;erKa, Xetrr-co (Xtr) to leave, XiXotrwa, ev6y-cO (qIv) to flee, 7rgEevya. 386 D. In lTm., only vowel-stems (or such as become so by transposition) form a first perfect; and even these often have a second perfect form: rep~v-aa Att. 7re(prvcaor (p0-co to produce), KEKdte -o&s Att. KEKtxrtC66S (KCdX-'o to be weary), reT71r-&s troubled (defective, used only in this form and in Pf. Mid. TET[77lmi, Par. TET2rlyEVos troubled). 387 I). a. In llm., the Fem. Par. sometimes has a when other forms of the perfect have a (338 D). b. The aspiration of a smooth or middle mute in the perfect active ig unknown to Hm. 1 30 TENSE-SYSTEMS. PERFECT MIDILE. [387 In other verbs also, a is lengthened (338): Kpdaco (K.pdy) to Cry, KE. ppa/ya, aiy-vvlt to breakd, E'aya, XayXavco (XaX) to obtain by lot, e'altxa, /at'vlc (qayv), 7ru(7va. But the stem-vowel remains short,- 1. After the Attic reduplication (321): adXE;O) (aip) to anoint, adkXb/X a. 2. In some instances, before a rough mute: ypa&i-co to write, y;ypac/a, TaCo-o- (ray) to arrange, reTrxa. For EPPoya from PyvvzuL (Cay) to break, and E'Looa am accustomed from st. ES or iSt, see 334 d. b. Aspiration of Final Mute. Some verbs aspirate a labial or palatal mute at the end of the stem (341), changing 7r, /, to %, and K, 7,y to X: KXeI7rT (KXEIr) to steal, KE)KXooa, & ao-rcro ({akXy) to exchange, kXXaXa. A few verbs have two forms, aspirate and unaspirate: 7rpa(oO (7rpay) to do, 7rerrpaya intransitive, am doing (succeeding, well or ill), 7rEsrpaXa transitive, have done; av-oly-co to open, dalvEya intrans. am open, av pXa trans. have opened. PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM, or Pefect, PlTperfeet, Fut. Perf., eMiLddle (Passive). 388. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. The tense-stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle is the reduplicated verb-stem. The endings are applied directly to the stem, without connecting vowels. (IParadigm, 274.) For the accent of the Inf. and Par., see 367 b. 389. Vowel-Changes. The vowel-changes which occur in the I Perf. Act., are found also in the Perf. Mid. ea-co etat'al baovxd-co bEa6oXoeat 7arEXXco (o-rEX) e'frrahXuae TLria-co 1rfE7L/AyaL & rEL3CO (rtZ) r7irCTClaL C/EFlpO (/OEp) f9'5apjaL 7r.tE-o TEqfFat5HCa 7rXf'.O (7rXV) 7-E'rXEvo7Iat OAdXXO (baX) IeXqiat Further, the verbs 7rpE'-co to nourish, rpiEr-co to turn, and o-rp;c-o to turn, change e to a: r'EpapFtLaL (66 c: d), r-'rpajuat, ~ErTpatFiat. 390. Addition of a-. Many pure verbs add a before the endings of the perfect middle: IEXc-co to complete, 1-E-T(XE-o —JaL, iTE-TEcE-C —T-o. But the added a- falls away before endings that begin with cr (55): rE-rEXA-crat, &Ce-TXE-CE-9E. (Paradigm, 284.) This a is almost always added to the Perf. Mid. of pure verbs which retain a short stem-vowel (419) contrary to the rule in 335: Ef-r-7a-a-t1afl (not E-arr-tLaL) from a-rc-o to draw. Other pure verbs in which it occurs, are enumerated in 421; some have both forms, with and without a-: KXEL-c to close, KEKXetC-a& and KE;KXEiatL. 388 D. For Ionic forms such as ue4/Ev-at or uwEyp (IIm.), uL'ppe-o (IId.) se 363 D. 394] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE. 131 391. Liquicd Verbs and JlMute Verbs. The concurrence of, consonants in the stem and endings gives occasion to a number of euphonic changes. These are shown in the Paradigms, 284. They take place according to the rules of euphony in 44-7. a. Verbs which reject v in the Perf. Act. (386 c), reject it also in the Perf. AMid.: KeKpYal, derayaL. If not rejected, it becomes o- when the rnding begins with t (51): &alvco (4av), rue-a-craLt; but sometimes it becomes i: d$5v-o to sharpen, doJv/ziat. Before-other endings, it remains inchanged: rrw/avo'at (51), ii0vvrat. b. When f/i. or yy would be brought before t, the first consonant is rejected: 7r;-7r-co to send, 7rE-re/i-iat (for 7rE-7rrce-lz aL), EXEyX-0 to contict, E'X-7XEy-/LaL (for EX-1qXEyy-/LaL). c. oawva-co to pour makes EcrretLrt-aL (for eo-vrevq —at, for EorurevS-taL). 392. Third Person Plural of the Indicative. The endings vrat, vro can only stand after a vowel. When the tense-stem ends in a consonant, the 3 P1. Ind. is made by using the perfect participle, with the auxiliary verb dltEO they are for the perfect, and So-av they were for the pluperfect. See 284. REM. a. The Ionic endings drat, aro (before which, 7r, 13, K, y are aspirated) sometimes appear in Attic, after a consonant: rerdiXarat, rerTaXaro, for TrTEayjLeo L Eo',l) q/eav, from ra(o-co (ray) to arrange. 393. Perfect Subjunctive and Optative. The perfect subjunctive and optative are made by using the perfect participle with the Sub. and Opt. of Ec/eL to be. See 274, 284. REM. a. A few pure verbs form these modes directly from the stem: Kra-otal to acquire, Perf. KEKrq-t-La possess, Sub. KeKtCat, KEKT, KEKrTraL (contracted from KEKTr7-coaLt, etc.), Opt. KEKTp7V, KEK7cro KEKTGr7o (from KEKTr-oL/ty)v, etc.)o,or KEK KEK KEK O (from - etc., without connecting vowel). So tI1v7OVlKco 0(va) to remind, Perf. /;y r7-/a L remember. 394. FUTURE PERFECT. The future perfect adds cr to the tensestem of the perfect middle. It has the inflection of the future middle, 892 D. The use of arar, aro is much more common in lIm. -and Hd., see 355 D e. Hm. has -rETIE6X-arat, aro (1 S. &wvypat, Te6XcO to make) with ev for is, eilpie-aro (1 S. eplppe[oz77v, epeipco to support) with e for El,-the change of quantity in each case being required by the hexameter verse, cf. 28 D. Before these endings, he inserts a in a&c-nXe'.-a-rat (Par. a&c-17Xe'-1evos pained), EXJAxe'-6-aro (for ex-rla-a-aro, st. Eta, Pr. eXAavwo to drive). In PdSacarat (patvya to sprinkle), paW appears to be the primitive stem, cf. Aor. pdo-o-are. And 8 belongs to the stem in lId. 7rap-eIcieudv-a-tal (irapaacweudo to prepare), and like forms from verbs in Aw. In a&r-hic-arat, a'o (Hd.) = Att. a&pytuetvot Eital, GYav, c is not changed to X. 393 D. Him. has Sub. 1 P. perl~vc'Leat (Eld. etrjuvexecLa), Opt.'4tVr!/7y,, $ S. 4EU,'EiVLTo (ENa for 7lot, aol, 26); also Opt. 3 P.?ekNO'o (for AeAv-l-vro, 33). 132 TENSE-SYSTEMS. AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE. 1[394 from which tense it differs in form only by having a reduplication. (Paradigm, 274.) The Fut. Perf. is not used in liquid verbs, nor in verbs beginning with a vowel. Yet we have ie3FrXjo/at, eTETJE1.(roFLa from jfik-Xc to throw, r4Pz-vo to cut, with transposition of the liquid (386 c). REM. a. There are two cases of a Fut. Perf. with active endings: in both, the stem is formed by adding o- to the stem of the 1 Perf.:'t7o-, (ora) to set, 1 Perf. forpcK-a stand, Fut. Perf. orrb$-o shall stand; vqoKoK (3dv) to die, rT37vK-a am dead, 7rev/'o-o shall be dead. PASSIVE SYSTEMS, or Aorist and Future Pa8sive. 395. FORMATION. The tense-stem of the passive aorist is formed by adding a passive-sign to the verb-stem (343). The first aorist takes Ste, the second aorist E. These become B9y and yr before a single consonant.- The passive future annexes (r to the tensestem of the corresponding aorist (344). Thus the first future adds ~9go-, the second future no-, to the verb-stem. INFLECTION (Paradigms, 275, 278). Both passive systems have the same inflection. The Aor. Pass. takes the endings of the Act. without connecting vowels: and thus resembles the tLt-forins. For the contraction of e with the mode-signs of the Sub. and Opt., see 343. For o-av in the 3 Plur., see 356 c. For the mode-sign of the Opt., see 343. For the ending rT instead of zt in the 1 Aor. Imv., see 65 b. For the accent -of the Inf. and Par., see 367 c, d. The Fut. Pass. has the iniflection of the Fut. Mid. 396. Remarks on the First Passive System. a. In regard to owoel-changes, the 1 A.or. Pass. agrees with the Perf. Mid. (389). So also, in the rejection of v from liquid stems (391 a), and the addition of Co to vowel-stems (390). Ed-cO) ri1aLv TreGLo (7rt) rreO7Iv a3ciX-X)'X3 rtyL -Co Ertt~rl v - rX'co (rrXV) i7rXeVrlv {arrr-ao 0oer7rsirv 7troE-0o eirotljv EYO. (rev) irdCiS v reXC-co EreXZerOJ 8ovXd'-Co;ovXC3rzv Kpl/co (Kpiv) EKpiL3V UaKOv-C K0Vo027v 395 D. Him., for -av in 3 P. Aor. Ind., see 355 D c: the passive-sign e lengthened to El (or V7) in the uncontracted 2 Aor. Sub., see 343 D: the mode-vowels of the Sub. shortened in the Du. and Pi., see 347 D: —— uLva for vat in the Aor. Inf., see 359 D. In the Aor. Sub., Hd. contracts E) to 7, but leaves coC uncontracted: Auvew, Xv~)A, A;v7u, etc. In iHm., the 1 Fut. Pass. is never found; the 2 Fut. only in 6acaorouaL (2 Aor. Pass. EldNz learned), pyry7opaLa (Aiy-vuvu to mix). 396 D. Hm. adds P before ~ to some vowel-stems: ibpv-v-rar7 became seated (l3pd-eo), &c-7rcY-Y-,-y, revived (st. rv;U, ir'iwo to breathe). In paacvatc9 (pacivo ta shine, = spa[vw) he changes faaex to.aam (cf. 370 D a). 3991 VERBAL ADJECTIVES. MI-FORMS. 133 But crrp~io, rpE7rco, and rpeco (389) have e in the 1 Aor. Pass. This, however, is little used, the 2 Aor. Pass. of these verbs being much more common. b. MI2ute Stems. Before., a labial or palatal mute (7r, fi K, y) becomes rough (0, X): a lingual mute (r, 8, s) becomes a: see 44-5, and Paradigms, 284. For Speipriv, etc., see 66 d. For CdrCsr'v, ervq~v, see 65 c. 397. Remarks on the Second Passive System. a. The verb-stem is only modified by variation of E to a (383). or7X-Xco to send,;cTraX?7v. But rXr-ra-co (7rXay) to strike makes i7rXqwyqv; yet in composition with EK and Kara, it takes the form -e7rXdayrv. b. The second passive system is not formed from verbs which have a 2 Aor. Act. The only;exception is rpE'rco to turn, erpa~rov and irparipv. Some verbs have both passive systems in use: f3Xrrirco (3Xoa3) to injure, i?3Xadb,7v and?3Xa';37v. Verbcal Adjectives. 398. The verbal adjectives are analogous to passive participles. They are formed by annexing ro or rTE to the verb-stem. 1. X'v-ro —, A, &'-v loosed, looseable (solutus, solubilis). 2. Xv-TrEo-, a, o-v (requiring) to be loosed (solvendus). The verb-stem assumes the same form as in the 1 Aor. Pass., except that a mute before rod and rEos must be smooth (44). ad-to EarTo, rTov 7retco 7TEroro, rTo /3MXXco /3Xr07', ro'TO rtta-co rrlTroEs ro T rk 7XEW 7rXevro T' o TEO 7rXEho 7rXEKr, Tf;O TrEXf- reAXEOrTO, TEos rel-Co rcrTo, rToS rdrarmro ra(KTrd rsTE dJoV-eo.aocu~ros roo gplva~ gptros reos rpeOo Zpemrror, r'os aKOl-C0 KOV UOPTOE, TE KPiLVC KPLTSS., TEg TpE9) 1PEETOE7 TEO9 PRESENT, SECOND AORIST, AND SECOND PERFECT SYSTEMS, according to the,ue-forr. 399. Some verbs inflect the present system without connecting vowels. These are called Verbs in 1ttc (267). In like manner, but less often, the second aorist and second perfect systems are inflected without connecting vowels. These also are called Fct-forms, though belonging for the most part to verbs in w. (Paradigms, 297-305.) 397 D. Hm. has Tpa7r-etoloev gaudeamus (2 Aor. Sub. 1 Plur. for Tpa7r-cehv 343 D, from rep7r-co to delight, 2 Aor. Pass. -dp7nr-Yv) with transposition and variation of vowel as in 383 D. 398 D. Hm. 6pa-TJds, by transposition, for 5aprds, from tep-w to fay. 184 Bm-FORNMS. FURTHER PECULIARITIES. *-406 400. Further peculiarities of this formation. 1. In respect to the endings, a. tL and at are retained in the Ind.: fr-/l, l?7]-,L. b. lt is often retained in the Imv.: di-tL say. c. o(ra and ao usually retain a-: i'ra-oaat, CtlKJVoa-0. d. the 3 P1. of the histor. tenses has oarv:'ga-a-avr, E-a-al. e. the Inf. Act. has vat: Oq-vat, &o0-vat. f. the Par. Act. retains r in the Nom. Masc.: &a8o0v (not M8aLv). g. for the ending cra in the 2 Sing., see 356 a. 2. h. A connecting vowel a is inserted before (v)at in the Pres. Ind. 3 Pi.: rt;e-a —tL (for Tle-a-J t), lL 8d-oL-a-:-t his a is contracted with an a in the stem: ga-rac-t (for lara-a-vot); —and sometimes with e or o in the stem: rtZeolLt, 8VaoLt, rare forms for' te;arlt, 8'da -t. —— The same insertion appears also in the Perf. Ind.: We&-a-a-t they are afraid, ariao-t (for eor~a-a-voa). 3. i. A final a, F, o of the stem is contracted with the'mode-signs of the Sub. and Opt.: rt?&ipat (for rtLe-aopL), ao[tWv (=-aO-Lt-v). k. Hence these modes have the accent of contract forms. Compare the accent of the Sub. and Opt. in contract presents (279-81), and in the passive aorist (275, 278). 4. The stem-vowel in pt,-forms is generally short; but m. the Pres. and Impf. Act. make it long- in the Sing. of the Ind.:. Oq-dl,;'Or/, but Pa-i;v, eal;ev, Oca-vat. n. the 2 Aor. Act. makes it long before a single consonant: gEorq-s, Trr17 (for err-i-r)), arT-2tL or-T-vaL; but oratrlv, orTa-rvTco, -crdv (Neut. Par. for ara-vr). For the accent of the Inf. and Par. Act., see 367 c, d. 400 D. a. The Dor. has TI for a-t: p.a-rt for 4-a-t; and v-t for (v)'-i: pa-vIt for pa-t. See 355 D a. d. Hm. v for aav, often: E'pa-v for gqca-~av,'e-v for TE-aav (355 D c). e. Hm. Uevai or rpEv for vat: 4J-pleva or 8d-pE for ov-valt (359 D). g. The ending oaca is more freq. in Hm. than in Att.: -rita-aa, &3o7araa. For a'at, aTo used instead of vrTa,,TO (Hd.), see 355 D e. h. Hm. and Hd. always have ritSe^t, LBO~tl, p7YUvat, etc.; but two presents insert a, Ea-ti (or elti) they are, xae- they go. The forms 1iT-e —aa-, ~a-Teaat (in Hd.), for'ao'Ta-L, e~-Tao-, are doubtful. i. In Hm., the Sub. of the 2 Aor. Act. often remains uncontracted. The stem-vowel is then usually lengthened and the mode-vowel shortened: but in the Sing. and 3 P1. of the Act., the mode-vowel is always long: a6 —E'rov for (a-1Ta-r/7o) a-'T-Trov, aE'-.r or;s-.-s for (&E-.s) is, &S-pat for (ao-pr) 3i. Similarly we find dE.oLpCat for (aE-wpCat) &/Uxat in the 2 Aor. Mid. 77, lengthened.from ai, is sometimes changed to tL: a-1TE-o/Lev (instead of a~'r-obtev) for a~-TTCev. In Hd., only aco and eo of the Sub. remain uncontracted: aco he changes to EW: a-T0E-W/LeV for (~a-a-wulcEv) a-Tcvueiy. The same change is also found in Hm. m, n. In Hm., the stem-vowel is sometimes long in other forms: thus in the Pr. Inf. lrecLEvatl, LtoOvaL, &Jdvai to blow, Pr. Ind. Mid. 61Ctpat to see', Par. Mid. TI41lzvos. For the 2 Aor. Sub., see i above. 01] MI-FORMS. FURTHER PECULIARITIES. 135 401. Remarlks on the above peculiarities. b. In the Pres. Imv., Ad is commonly rejected, and the vowel before it lengthened: L'orry (not ord-a-Z), 7r3ELt, 813ov, ElKVVo. —JIn the 2 Aor. Imv., Bt after a short vowel loses l, and 2 is then changed to rs: 8;-s (not ao-2t), z;f. But m iremains unchanged after a long vowel: mrr-2t, 1-32-s (in compounds sometimes arra, Oa: thus 7rapa'dra, Katrdna, poetic). c. oat and co drop C- in the 2 Aor.; also in the Pres. Sub. and Opt.; and occasionally in other forms: t2ov (not EcE-(co), 2g (not rl-o-at), 8L3oo (not &?oL-cro); C-Teraeo and'o-irco. h. A connecting vowel is sometimes found in the Sing. of the Impf. Act.: E88VV;ovv, 3iaov V, iov (contracted from E&aO-Ov, -EF,-E) are almost always used for ac1oov, Cdt'Jot, i&ao. So also erasest, ErL'eE are more common than eT'rl7F, ri3,. The connecting vowel o takes the place of the stem-vowel F, in the Opt. 7tolf'/qv for (rtZE-tlt/q) rTLE3ilD7Jv. i. In the contraction of the Sub., ait, a,, oe give.r/,, q' (not a, a) oet 32, 34): lfar-rTat (for ir-ra-rlrat), -7rj (for a-Ta-yF), & (for &fo-r). k. The Sub. and Opt. Mid. are sometimes accented without reference to the contraction. This is always the case with the deponents, 3valpaL to be able, rral-'rata to understand, KpEaLaL to hang, together with the second aorists erpLadliv bought, dcvqr tv received profit: nvco/alt, ovatro (not avvo-eatL, ovaro). And it is sometimes the case with t'luL, TL3l/I, al 80/L: TL.Grclalt, &toLTO. 1. A close vowel (t, v) at the end of the stem, is not contracted with the mode-sign (33): the Opt. then takes a connecting vowel o:'-:o, etLKvn-V otat. In such verbs, the Sub. and Opt. are not distinguished from the or dinary formation. n. The 2 Aor. Act. of'qtf u, 737 8/,t aOultt, lengthens only the Inf.: la-vlat, e-vat, &o0-vaY; though in i7zut, the 2 Aor. Ind. is long (et-) by the augment (312): ea-av,'EteE'a. The poetic 2 Aor. Act. EKTra (K7ra) is also short. On the other hand, the 2 Aor. Mid. Caidn, v V (ova) follows the rule for the Act. 401 D. b. Hm. sometimes retains 5a in the Pr. Imv.: a[&5og and ataov give, gliviha, swear. He has Kcama-o~Ta for Ka,-ta17-7. Pind. 3aloL for Waouv. h. Hm. sometimes has a connecting vowel in the Sing. of the Pr. Act.: haio7s (cf. ~8AXozs for rlAX-eis) and Ms6o?~ha for taacos, 8so& (and lacw~c), TLteL (and Tla3l7ro-), i'els (with irreg. accent) for'V7s, i'e (and'irot). In Hd. let,'tZess, TLel, &137oS, 3ozs, Go, ae, are perhaps always used in place of the Attic forms. So. too, Hd. has Impf. 3 S.'aVra (-= iTa-e) for a-Trn. The connecting vowel o takes the place of the stem-vowel a, in zcapvofteba (Hm.) Pr. Opt. of ccdpvalcua to fight. lHd. has e-oflxv for (re-z'uv-) 4 e[!jv7 2 Aor. Opt. of T-Ulht. k. So in Hm. and Hd., the Pr. Sub. Act. ofi'l7lt: thus.Vatt (HIm.) for lIe. 1. Hm. contracts t, v of the stem with the mode-sign of the Opt. in Vr/l (tor av-nr) 2 Aor. Opt. of 86co, 6a='0vo (for 8awvv-aro) Pr. Opt. of 8acvv Uja to fjast, pratoT (for qplt —so) 2 Aor. Opt. of pat-vw to perish. n. With S'Irav compare Hm. oara wounded; with &vvpvv, Hm. VnXr-o approached. 136 VERBS IN MI OF THE EIGHTH CLASS. L402 402. Peculiar ]First Aorist in Ka. Three verbs in /e, t'11t, -TL/77,/t. 8,L'W t, have with the 2 Aor. a peculiar 1 Aor. in Ka (tense-sign K). But this is almost confined to the Ind. Act.: "'Ka, er'7Ka, fSoKa. Here it is very common in the Sing., of which number the 2 Aor. is not in use: thus iE&oKa, ecOKasr, E&OKE (never EacoV, e8cos, aco). It occurs also, but less often, in the Plur.: Ei3cbKaelEv, CoSUcare,'&OKtav (usually Efao/ev, eaore, f8ooea. ENUMERATION OF MI-FORMS. 403. Verbs in Lu belong to the first, fifth, and eighth classes (325, 329, 332). Those of the first and fifth classes have the tu-form only in the present and imperfect (for one exception, see 408, 9). We begin, therefore, with Verb8s i2, /uL of the _Eighth class.. -- 1. i'rt/3 (i 332) to send, inflected like ri7/lL C (297, 301, and 403, 2). Act. Pr. Ind.`'iL7L (3 P1. always lait, 400 h); Impf. irlv,'t7s, tl, etc. (also [7'ovv], tELts, te, 401 h; dteLEt-and - jllEL from d4-[/t,, cf. 314); Sub. iLgo, Opt. LEbt'v, Imv.'eL, Inf. Ivat, Par. LElS ([Evr). 2 Ao. Ind. (rKa, riCKaE, igKE, 402) TLroV, E7tv) E1LEv, eLE eEC-av; Sub. h, Opt. dr/v7, Imv.'s, - Inf. EvIat) Par. Es' ('vr). Mid. Pr.'i lat to hasten, strive; Impf. Ier]jv; S. lcFaet, 0. ltEt 71v, Imv. ltEo0 (or tov), Inf. btctl, P. LIEVlevo'. 2 Ao.?f etTO ELTO tOV,, ELOE eVTo; Sub. bat,, Opt. ei',rv, Imv. ov, Inf.?o-alt, Par. Ef'uvoq. Fu. C-co, 1 Ao.'Ka, Pf. ElKa, Pf. M. alat, Ao. P. eizqv, V. eros, erEOS. REM. a. The Pr. Opt. has also'ot/lt (otvS, tot, etc.) for iElylv, iotjllv f)r Let11jv; 2 Ao. Opt., o',b7Y forr ELEr/V: cf. 401 h. 2. rir1`Lvt (ze) to rput. For /t-forms, see Paradigms 297, 301. Fu. i'o-w, 1 Ao. iCstKa, Pf. reSgLKa, Pf M. EI. r,lZet, Ao. P. &'rSY (65 c), V. Sero't, Sereor. Cf. 402. 3. 8 nl8ru (8) to bind, rare form for 8;co (420, 1). 4. 82a80ot (80) to give. For jLt-forms, see Paradigms 298, 302. Fu. 8&o-co, 1 Ao. f'&Kea, Pf. SoEoWKa Pf. M. W88o/alL Ao. P. 0diqv, V. 8ord, 8aorior. Cf. 402. 5.'trrttL (c-ra 332) to set. For tL-forms, see Par. 299, 303, 305. Fu. ro-crio, 1 Ao.'o'rl.qra, Pf.'0rrlqKa, Pf. M. Er4ratat, Ao. P. rE'rcSriv, Plup. c-rT7KEtv or EorT1iKEtv, Fu. Pf. A. crn60, (394 a), M. Jor5oikaet, V. aordo, o-rarEors. For irregularity of meaning, see 416, 1. 403 D. 1. tm. Impf. 1 S. LEtv, 1 Ao. iacc and ei'ca (382): from &a'-m/t, he has a Fu. &dyeaw, Ao. aEoea.. Id. Pf. Ind. 3 P. aV-EmVTatL irreg. for 3&l-EtV7at, ind Pf. Par. e-uETr-L-uEPos very irreg. for J4E-eL-IE'vo s. 2. Hd. Impf. 1 S.?Teie-a with irreg. connecting vowel a (406 D a, 364-D). 4. HIIn. Fu. U6o'o, and with redupl. &asCow. 404] VERBS IN MI OF THE FIRST CLASS. 131 6. odvlvqp (ova 332) to benefit; Mid. olvaavda to receive benefit, Impf. C'0vatvtv, 2 Ao. wv qpL7 v, wcvr jro, ovroio, Opt. ovatl7jv (401 k), Inf. o0vaorfaL. Fu. ovrlwc, oivj0oa%, Ao. ovro'a, Ao. P. c v lwv. 7T. rr,'XrX7pt (7rXa) tofill, Impf. esrl Xrksv, Inf. rrnXLrX;ata; Mid. 7rrtlrXatrdaa to fill one's self, Impf. E rqls7rXCytv, Inf. 7rly/rXao-cat. Fu. rrXoroo, Ao. Ei7rXra, Pf. 7rTErXT7Ka, Pf. M. 7rs'rXi7iopat, Ao. P. X e7r~T/qv, V. 7rXor/r;os. A kindred form is 7rAXco to befull, Lat. pleo. REM. a. In this verb and the next, the redupl. is strengthened by the nasal,. This, however, falls away in the compounds, if the preposition hasg,: E'/-TrL'7TXlt, but Impf. 3 P. Ev-E7r/I7rXao-av. 8. 7rl7rpiyL (7rpa) to burn transitive, inflected like rL7Xp7rft. 9. KLXPryiL (Xpa) to lend, Mid. KtXpaydaL to borrow; Fu. Xp'-co, Ao. eXPo-a, Pf. KgeXPKa, Pf. M. Kg;XPfat: cf. 335 a. Verbs in bLL of the.First Class. 404. A. Stems in a. 1.,uc (cf. Lat. a-io) to say, used only in Pr. 1 S. 7ifL and Impf. 1, 8 S. rv, (rzv b' eyc said I, j 8' o's said he). 2. Orqyl (oa) to say, Ons, d qo-l, Oarov, OaarTd, aiir,"E, b arToE, ar, ao; Irnpf. t'/qv, gq'47r comm. gD/n o-Za, gOqb; cf darov, jecrhv, tgqapev, eOarE, Ecao-av. Pr. Sub. fr3, Opt. /alqv, Imv. ca0l or ba'4t, Inf. acivaL (Par. jair). Fu. ~qi"w- Ao. E'?qora, V. oLarTos, OarTEOv. REM. a. The forms of the Pr.' Ind. are all enclitic except the 2 Sing. (105 c). The Par. 0a is never used in Attic prose, which takes pdOaKOP instead:: cf. 444, 8. 3. XP7j (xpa, XPe) it behoves, Impf. EXP77v or XPqv; Pr. Sub. XPi, Opt. XpE', Inf. Xpnvat, P. XPErv (only neut., for Xpaov 26). Fu. Xp oetL(335 a). In composition, a7ro-xpq it. is enough, 8 P. (contract) a7roxpO-t, Impf. are'xpp; Pr. Inf. adroxprv (371 c), Par. adrop&ov, -,oca, -wv, both contract. Fu. a'roxpq (et, aaroxproVrc, Ao. a7TEXprce. 5. Em. 1 Ao. 3 P. r-~ra-oav as well as To7-noav. 6. Hm. 2 Ao. Imv. vraoo, Par. 6vyCervov. 7. Hm. Pres. Mid. also 7rtmrXAdvEaTL (329 a); 2 Ao. Mid. 3-S. 7rAXro, 3 P. 7rXlvTro, became full, and in comp. E/rAn7To, E7rXrlvro (in Aristoph. Opt. XnrAhCLu/, Imv. epurAXao, Par. e4/7rAXr evos). IIAhaw is chiefly poetic, 2 Pf. 7reI ErXo2a. 7 rqaa. 8. The form 7rp7w occurs only in?v-Erp7?aov Il. t 589. 10. 1Hm. Pr. Par. jitf3as, from st. 13a. common Pr. iacvwo to go (435, 1). 404 D. 2. Mliddle forms of -pn7A are rare in Att. (thus in Plato, Pf. Imv. 3 S. Jredpa'ow), but common in other dialects; yet, the Pr. Ind. Mid. is not used. Hm. has Impf. Ea'crv, epaTo or PdrTo, etc., Imv., do, etc., Inf. fda, Par. pa:etvos.. 3. Had. has Xp,, XpPwv, bput'aroxp (,caTaxpa~, iaeXpa)), a7roxpap, 138 VTEBS IN MI OF THE FIRST CLASS. [40:ig To which add the following deponent verbs: 4. afyd-/iat to admire, Impf. 7yoa/7,v. Fu. adyaciolat, Ao. P.?7ya62rv (413, rarely ll. 7'yaoadj1v), V. adyacro's. 5. Bvva-/zat to be able, vvao-atj (poet. U6vy), 8uvarat, etc..; Impf. 1e8vvyulv, bU8vso (401 c), (tS6varo, etc.; Pr. Sub. avc,/eaL (401 k) Opt. avvatlrlv (401 k), Imv. 3pvo (401 c), Inf. U;vaTo-at, P. 8vva/jEvos. Fu. 8vvro-o/al, Pf. 8e3av1qaaL Ao. P. e;vv vlti7v (413, seldom Evvado-1v), V. vvaro's able, possible. Augment often r (308 a); but never qvvao-rijv. 6. ErlCrd-Ftac to understand, nC7'orlraoat, ETrlo'raral, etc.; Impf. 7fL7rrTra1v, 71trOkrco (401 c), i7rTL-raTro, etc.; Sub. rrIo-,cWtLaL (401 k), Opt. 6rrto-1Ta-la7v (401 k), Imv. e7rLa-roT, Inf. Ertio-rao-at, P. rrtcrr4tevoe. Fu. 1erto-'ro'oCa-ot, Ao. P. r7tLO-rr1?7v, V. erltoT7rroE. 7. W'pa-ilat to love (poetic for pc-o-w 419, 3):. Ao. P.?j'pd.-l2(rv (413) V.;paaroS. 8. KPe'tia-tit to hang intrans. (cf. 439, 2), Impf. eKpeIanv; Sub. Kpe;!ActaL (401 l), Opt. KPqEaIspv (401 k). Fu. KpECoiooat.. 405. B. Stems in t. 1. JL (y, Lat. i-re) to go. Pr. Ind. el t) EL ELfl Utov) I-rovi tyeV LTE a m ll or 1 EL CLEV or EaV -EL'.,ELtY, - ELTOJ- 01 5TOZ' /ET 7T.~,~L ",~t~tv,,]trrv " T,'rv, elf1av.,, If, 1,,, Pr. Sub LLi7/,L7/, L/TovY, L70/TO UOzLEY7 Lt/TEp uqo-t; Opt. lolv, LoS, Lot, tOLTOv, LOLTV, t'OtLEVY; LOLTE, LOLEt; min. ll, LTCO LTOY LTOV OY trE LTCIa Or L6YTOrY Inf. Le;aL; Par. Icv, loo-ra, L'Ov, G. LdOros (Lat. euntis); Verbals. LTOIj lTEO (also. lTrlEOv one must go). 5. Hm. and Hd. have in Ao. P., only ESvvdaoa7Yv. Hm. has also Ao. M. d,6uYVnlb*77Y. 6. Hd. Pr. Ind. 2 S. 4e-elr1roeaL for 4ergL'Oracat. 9. St. apa, common -Pr. &pdotuat to prayj:Hm. -Pr. Act. Inf. &p' ievat only Od. X,-322. 10. St. iAa, common Pr. iXcacotouaL (444, 5) to pogopitiate, Ep.'YX~.al, rare; also in Act., Imv. xMrn HIm. (Yx6atL Theoc.) be propitious. Hm. has the following yi-verbs of the first class with stems in e: a.,jUtti (ae) to blow, 2 D. &qjTo,'; ImpEf 3S; 5v or 6i1t, Inf. &izai or &a.juYeat, Par. &des; Mid. Impf. 3 S. s0p-o, Par. 4&itevoos. b. St. iEt to makefiee (in Mid., also toflee), Impf. 3 P.?Ev-afeoav; Mid. Pr. 3 P. KEVTOat, Sub. iejAcCia, Opt. 3 S. WtoiLo (401 k)- Inf. 8eo-acra. See 409, 5. c. 8atLflvjLL (aLe) to seek, 2 S. S.lfarO, Par. aLJye/vos-; Fu. &~o-oyzat. d. St. ClXe (from ICLX, common Pr. KlXdvcC to come up to, 436,'), Impf. 2 S. elCyieLs, 3 D. lUXy7T'v, Sub. tICXELt Opt. KXXEtlvY, Inf.' IcXYvat or KIX'Pevat, Par. IcLXeds, Mid. ICtLX'IEtOS (400 D ml). 405 D. 1. I-Hm. Pr. Ind. 2 S. jos-a; Impf. {ra (406 D a, 364 D) or tijov (401 h), 3 S. i'je or ~E, 1 P. ~?ob~ev, 3 P. Oi'ov, lrioav,, or'jav. Hm. has also an Impf. with simple ~: 3 S. Ye, 3 D. Vrj7v, 1 P. SYeEv, 3 P. Yrav.- }Id. has in tmpf. 1 S. jra, 3 S.'Ye, 3 P. kocav. 406] VERBS IN MI OF T11 FIRST CLASS. 139 REM. a. The present has a future meaning, especially in the Ind. eL/t~ I am going, i. e. about to go. b. The Impf. has the inflection of a pluperfect. The initial, is formled from the lengthened stem EL by applying the augment. c. The Par. has the accent of the 2 Aor. (367 a). 2. Kxl7atc (KEL) to lie, to be laid or set. Pres. Ind. Impf. teyaul, KElooLe?,c EKEt' ~eo'o, exetKEL:a, KMLcaLt KOEL-OV) KJGl2t67' CKEl&OI EKEET EOKV EKEMC7TE, KELTrat Ke7L3OOV, KELvratCL; cKELro 70 eKELo7v, EKE o; Pr. Sub. 3 S. KEr7rat, 3 P. KEowLrat; Opt. 3 S. Keotto, 3 P. KEotLro (39 a); Imv. Kei0co, Ke-2C,,, KElo-JOV) KEltlCOV, KelTSE) KEl grooav or KELGCYv; Inf. KeieoSat; Par. KetiEvov. Fu. Kelo/laL. REM. a. -The Inf. KfELo-al retains its accent in compositionl: KaraKEo2aCl, contrary to 365. 406. C. Stems in s. 1. Efi/L (Er, Lat. es-sc) to be. Pr. Ind. Impf. Et/l, I?v or?/, r/17ev, ECL, EEr. O (rTEo cro3aE, rirov or 7/Tror7, re. or r-re. EOfl, E(TrOV, EC* 7V, tT7 /TV 7/*, aY Pr. Sub. Pr. Opt. COr'CI /1EV, ELi/V7 EI?//E or OEL/EV /C, 7/Irov, 7/rE, E1/V7 EUrTOv or eLroP, Etre ELrE 1' ~.. _L 17/ 7/TOY7 cOOLt E/, ETi/V Er L " ete; Hm. Sub. 2 S. Y, 3So-a, 3 S. Y7-i, 1 P. o/.Uv (1) or LCEV (t), Opt. 3 S. Yo, (once lE?), Inf. ibat, AeLrEal or'uEEV; Fu. E2'oOialt Ao. Eid/.L7Y, irreg. eELda77/Y.EYTra, Od. X, 304, sometimes regarded as Pr. Mid. of El/Il, should be written YEVTaL (403, 1). 2. Hm. Pr. Ind. 3 P. ceiTraL, ICEatleL (355 D e), KECaTaL (39 a); Impf. 3 P. "ewrYo- KoE&TO, KCCa, TO; Sub. 3 S. KCrTai; Iterative (410 D) 3 S. KcetiETro; Fu. eLwco or, e'w (378 D).-HEd. resolves et into eE, but only in cases where e might be used as a connecting vowel: ICIETcal, cCeTo, KceE'hOW, c~eOaL (not Iceegal, IceefpLEos). In the Ind. 3 P. he has iaeTarl, &carTo. Hm. has two or three Ip-verbs of the first class with stems in o and v: a. gvo-Iatc to find fault with, 2 S. Gvoorai, Opt. 3 S. GvOro (401 k); Fu. YiaitOatL, Ao. co-4a d/uv' (lid. Wvdoranv).- Hm. has also from st. or, Pr. 2 P. ovvbcre (24 D c): ad Ao. &W'r?7v. b. Eptopat (epd, etpv-24D -c) to gtard, preserve, Ion. and poet. The pi-forms are Pr. Ind.- 3 P. eipva'at, Impf 2'S. 2S. epioo, 3 S. ep iTro, erpv'o, 3 P. pYUv'ro, eipvaro, Inf. epvuo-aca, Efpvrcat. Fu. ipVCrOoyai, (344 D; -epaeo3yaL, 3078 D), s7elpv'O'pat, Ao. Epu(G)oamU7V, ELpv()~daCrv. - Cf. p: oto drimvaw (420 D,- 12). From kpoD/at (pt)= — pVoAcu come ptj-forms, Impf. 3 P. p4Saro, Inf. P50aa, Fu. pVJoOaL (Hd.), Ao. EppvoCd/iyv. c. St. ~TEU to stand to, uzder take, Pr. Impf. 3 S. ~'reval, o'rev'T (Aesch JTEPVTal). 140 VERBS IN MI OV THE FIRST CLASS. [406 Pr. Imv. IoTBL, EUT(t), CoTroy, EOT&)v EOT0E E(oTOrfCtv or Ecrll; Inf. EcLVa; Par. OSv, ovro-a, ov (ovr). Impf. Mid.'nrv (rare, and only in 1 Sing.). Fu. Mid.'croiat (3 S. Eo'orat), 0. Icro'torv, I. E'reo-Bat, P. ECo-'EVoq. REM. a. In the Pr. Ind., 1 S. EzltI is for co —t, ar being dropped and e lengthened: 2 S. el is for coa- (properly e-o-): 3 S. Er-rT retains the orig. ending TL: 3 P. Lo-L has arisen from e( —rt. In the Impf.,'v,'o-a, ivs are for 7(o-)-v, j(o-)-ro-a, j(o-r): in 7/C-a-v(r), a is a connecting vowel. The Sub. 3, is for fo (Ion.) from aco-: the Opt. E'iv is for,ET-r7-V. The 1mv. 3 P. oarwov is for e0-vrcov (a form oyrcov occurs only in P1. Leg. 879 b). The Inf. eJvat is for er-vaL: the Par. Wiv is for &'v (Ion.) from eo-cov. REM. b. The forms of the. Pr. Ind. are all enclitic, except the 2 S. el. After a paroxytone, they have an accent on the ultinima by 108. But the 3 Sing. takes the regular accent, TLrt,, 1. when it expresses existence or possibility: 2. when it stands at the beginning; of a sentence: 3. when it follows o0, tei, El, fE, Kat. Thus roro go C'rt that whitch exiists, e'r-L /Lol f3ovXotcvq? it is according to my wish, eL corvL OvUTcE it is so. REM. c. The Par. ax, ovo-a, etc., retains its accent in composition: raprv, 7rapo oc'a; so also the 3 S. Fu. fo-rat for &eraTl: 7rapo-Trat. The retention of the' accent in several other compound forms is not irreg.:.napiv (368 b), 7rap',, 7rapeicv (400 k), 7rapelvat (367 c). 406 D. 1. Hm. has many peculiar forms: Pr. Ind. 2 S. Zoa~i and res, 1 P. edcdUv, 3 P. (elm-, and) ea't not enclitic Impf. Ca, ea, eov, 2 S. (do'aa and) oPrlO;a, 3 S. (hv and) gev, Ez,,, ~{j5, 3 P. (o-ca and) Erar,; Iterative (410 D) orKcov (for ea-ocov); Sub. ew, eatw, 3 S. fE r, E a't, 3rt, 3 P. ewo-t (once lo't); Opt. (e&'Ov etc., also) eoLr, Eo'i; Imv. 2 S. a-o-o (middle ending); Inf. (eYvat and) eyu.Leai (for eo —.tc,at), epupev, also Neyovat, E.ey,; Par. &ey, EoiVa, e&, (eor). Fu. often with a-: iovo/lat; Fu. 3 S. (mic-ETal, o-ralt and) e-O"Eata, also aYo-e-ra (as in Dor.). Hd. Pr. Ind. 2 S. es, 1 P. elt'e4; Impf. at, 2 S. Eas, 2 P. eaTe; Iterative Eo~cov; Sub. Emo, ofec; Opt. once,v-eot; Par. c. Dor. Pr. Ind. 2 S. oort, 1 P. eidsr, 3 P. EvTI; Impf. 3 S. is, 1 P. Ruies; Inf. eEv jtLev; Par. dc'. Fu. Je'ooeuaA,., eZrat, etc. REM. a. Some of these forms have a connecting vowel: so eaoS for e(~)-a(v)ot, ha for 7(~)-a-(v) or.;eapu Lat. eram, cf. 3 P. Jo'-a-V( ) Lat. erant. In ma, earav, the augment is omitted:'iv is for 7(~-)-e-v: mr', f-v' come from Ji by doubling the E-sound: eor for e(a)-o-v omits the augment, and has the usual connecting vowel o: this appears also in the Opt. Eots, eot. —-- aTo Od. v, 106, sometimes regarded as Impf. Mid. of eiat, should be written (la-o (406 D, 2). 2. Hm. has Ind. 3 P. e'lar-a, elaTro (3.55 D e), with irregular change of 4, to et, rarely e'aTal, Ea'o, only once YzVo. Hd. always WaTa,, EaTo. From two other consonant-stems, UHm. has pt-forms, viz. 3. From CE-o (450, 3) to eat, Pr. Inf. e'-elevat; cf. Lat. estis for ed..tis, sse for ed-se. 4. From e'p-co (450, 6) to bear-, Pr. Imv. 2 P. PIp-Te; cf. Lat. fer-te. 408] SECOND AORISTS OF THE MI-FORm. 141 2. /adt (yo-) to sit retains r- only before r. Pr. Ind. Impf. rat, o, co cIr-LaL, St)Jov, 7)~at; )7JcT, adzOOv,?)VTO, 2rac, r~3~ov,. Tvrat; ]crro) V-'rZqv 7Evro; Pr. Imv. ~r i5ca'o,, trloov, 5r7o-aov, e, qru3ocav or,o-rZov; Inf. roaat; Par. 7'/Eyvos. For Tl/at, the Attic prose almost always uses the compound Kat,7IqtaL to sit down. Pr. Ind. KaC3flzaL) Kdato-at, K~7rlaqt, etc. Impf.. IEKaat7/77V, EKaS)qo, EKa&7Tro, etc. (314) or.KaZ'/tyv, Ka,,-0ao, KaSnJ7ro, etc. (368 b) Pr. Sub. KasjiaLt, Kas, KaSTrat, etc. (400 i) Opt. Kasoi[,Iqv, KaJoLo, KaoLTo, etc. (400 i) Imv. Ka'r7o'; RaZro-2co, etc. Inf. Kaaro-'at, Par. ka??'JLEVos. REM. a. Kao2~o'2at irregularly keeps the accent of o-ar'a: cf. earaKetao-at (405, 2 a). Verbs in /tu of the Fifth Class. 407. In these, the endings of the present and imperfect are applied, not to the verb-stem itself, but to the syllable vv or (after a vowel) vvv,. which is added to the stem: SEl'-vK-vi to show, Kepa-vVi-,/U to mix. The added v is short, except in the singular of the indicative active, according to the rule in 336 a. Paradigm, 300. REM. a. These verbs often take a connecting vowel, and thus conform to the ordinary inflection': 8eMKV&O, 8tELKVUErt, etc.; especially in the 3 P. Pr. Ind. Act.: &,KMvov.O C. In the Sub. and Opt., they are never distinguished from verbs in o (401 1). The enumeration of these verbs will be found in 439-43, under Special Formation, Fifth Class. Second Aorists of the ut-formn. 408. For the 2 Aor. of Verls in tc, tries, see 403, 1; r-3aq1, 403, 2; /BSow/, 403, 4; o'-rrqt/, 403, 5; OlvMvWt, 403, 6; r L/wrkm/, 403, 7. Stems in a. 1. 3Salvco (3a) to go (435, 1). 2 Ao.'3ev), Sc;, 3ab7v, 3tsL (401 b), 1vat,, /as3. 408 D. 1. Hm. Ind. 3 D. 3Tr7fv and I3arTv, 3 P.'fo-Cav, and o8av R K4 (400 D d), once Bia-av, Sub. f3eic (400 D i), 3 S. fip, 1 P. El'ooev (ild. E'wjaev), lnf.,8ivat and BjuevaL. 142 SECOND AORISTS OF THE MI-FORM. [408 2. y7pa —crKo to growz old (444, 1). 2 Ao. Inf. yrpavaL (poetic). 3. MLapdaKao (8pa) to run (444, 2), used only in compounds. 2 Ao. 98pavv, f'pat, E'Spa, etc.; 8p6o, bpas, 8pa, etc.; bpat/lv, f8p3 L7, pavath bpcas. 4. KTElvc (Krev, icra) to kill (433, 4). 2 Ao. (poetic) EKrdva, KTru), EKTa; Par. KraS) M. KrdLAevoO. 5. 7re;roLat (7rer, also 7rra) tofly (424, 19). 2 Ao. Act. (only poetic) f'irrjv, 7v-atqv, 7 v, rvat, 7rrca. Mid. (also in prose) ElrcTal',v, rraio-Sat, 7rTaiLevos. 6. St. 7Xa to endure, rare in Attic prose. o Ao.'Xrv, 7TXc, TXalpvV, rTX tl,'TX7vat, Trha. Fu. rTXqraojat, Pf. rETrXKa (409 D, 10), V. TAXiT-o. 7. aivcoa ((ja) to anticipate (435, 3). 2 Ao. 0e2raV, C/bc, c/l7aiv, 0ivat, OZa'. 8. St. 7rpta, used for Aor. of cv;oo/a to buy (450, 7). 2 Ao.'7rrpdluav,,rpicoCat, rptaFitLqv (401 k), nrpil, nrplar-alt, 7rpLatlEVov. Stemns in E. 9. orE;vvvpt (c3EF) toput out, extinguish (440, 3). 2 Ao. f'Vj37v zwent out (413, 5), Inf: ar3ivat. 10. rKECXoo (cKEN, UKXE) to dry trans. (432, 15). 2 Ao. Ei'-KX?.v became dry (416, 6), Inf. aKXivat. 11.'xco ((eX, arXE) to have, hold (424,. 11). 2 Ao. Imv. TX;E' (for aXE~Lt, 401 b). Stems in o. 12. aXto-KoFtat (dX, aXo) to be taken (447, 1). 2 Ao. adXcov or qXowv, Aci, CXooq'v, AdX&val; daXoiv (a only in Indic.). 13. /3td-co to live (423, 2) 2 Ao. EjLCOV,,L(C, SLlVv, fvat,,, /3oVS. 14. ytyvLC'oKo (yvo) to know (445, 4). 2 Ao. Eyvcov, yvk, yvohlv, yvTCot, yviva, yvo6S. Stems in t and v. 15. 7rlvco (7r) to drink (435, 4). 2 Ao. Imv. 7r;i! (poet. rEic). 2. Hm. Par. ypcs. 3. Ud. eSpnv, Inf. 6piivat, but Par. 6pds. 4. Hm. 3 P. Etc'Tav, Sub. KiTEWLe'Y (400 D i), Inf. t'dUevaez, Icrdicevy; Mid. 3 S. i'rcTaTro was killed, Inf. IKctrdoal. 5. The 2 Ao. Act. is not found in Um.; in Att. Trag. (chorus) it appeare as Dor. Wr-av. 6. Hm. 3 P. Eg-xaa. Hm. has also Fu. raxdacraw, Ao. cETXao''a (st. TaXa). 7. Hm. 3 P. cpd"v, Sub. 3 S. c(pap or cp.ro-L (once.rap-qpacr~lo), 1 P. (Pe-,uxEJV,.3 P. coEoWPL. 12. The form with e is not found in Hm. and Ud. Hm. has Sub. 3 S. cAxd (400 D i), Opt. 3 S. &aXot7 and I&xnc, Inf. &x&,aL and A&xcevwaz. 14. Hm. Sub. 3 S.?yr/6p and yvw,, Inf.?yv6,uevat and?vw&vat. Pind. Ind. 3 P. C'yvm, E7vov. 4~~i8j~] 8-ECOND AORISTS OF THIE 5H-FOR.M& 143 16. 6-uco to pass under, tanke on (423, 3). 2 Ao. iavv (304; 416, 4), av%, Uvt, buvaat, B.6. 17. b6-co to produce (423, 4). 2 Ao. fv vv (wasproduced, bo'n, 416, 3), OV)co, vvatn, Ova. 408 D. Thu followinrg second aorists of the ua-form are peculiar to the Epic dialect: 18. &-w to satiate, Pr. Ml. 3 S. da'raL (370 D a), Fu. g&eo, 1 Ao.'G-a; 2 A.o. 6ecame sated, Sub. 1 P. gWcoEY (400 D i, wrongly'Weyxev), Inf. 6aEvaL; V. a'To insatiate (for &zros); 19. /sr-avpd-w to take away, 2 Ao. Par..a&ropas (M. &.7roupdcxevos Hes.). 20../3dAAw (la%, x3Aa) to throw at (432, 4), 2 Ao. 3 D. 4vyl-A8Xns'Vy encouEntered, Inf. rv ukf3esaL; Mid. 3 S. BE3M'7o was hit, wounded, Sub. 3 S. /3AxE-at (400 D i), Opt. 2 S. 3X~Eo (for f3X-to), Inf. jBAao-aal, Par. B'lxUeEvoS. 21. obV7d-o to wound (423 D, 5), 2 Ao. 3 S. o~vk, Inf. obviTaUeal, obv'Tdev, Mid. Par. obvTdYros evounded. 22. rexA'w (OreXa$) to come near (428 D, 21). From cognate stem wra come 2 Ao. M. 3 S. WXir-o, rArXq'ro, 3 P. frX7'Vqro, ~rXievTo. 23.?7rz'o'w (wrTI') to crouch (428,'). From cognate stem 7rsa come 2 Ao. 3 Du. Ka:a-rT-rlv, Pf. Par. 7rewnDcsS, qrErTflqros.. 24. fltp&rc6aiK (jop, Bpo) to eat (445, 3), 2 Ao. E"3pwv. 25. rXc6-o. Ion. and poet. for 7rXeow (rXv) to sail (426, 3), 2 Ao. (in comp.).7rAXov, Par. 7rxAcs. 26. cTICw (IcT') to found. From cognate stem ic.r comes 2 Ao. M1. Par. 4i-c'TlrYeVos well-foundedl. 27. (pag-Vw to perish (435, 6), 2 Ao. M. lEip3u4jv, Sub. 3 S. (paETaq, 1 P. palo6Aebraaa, Opt. pli3ov (for pt3-L/cv,. 33), 3 S. qh7-,o, Inf. ata~o-at, Par. pteAVEos. 28. St. KAV (426 D, 8), 2 Ao.'icX&vov heard, Imv. ilat, 2 P. IcXVTe, also EticXv3a, ICiCXve7 (384 D). 29. AV;-w to loose (269), 2 Ao. 1f. Xd,%oV, 3 S. xAro and XvTO, 3 P. AVVTO. 30. 7rVe'w (rvUv) to breathe.(426, 4), 2 Ao. M. 3 S. j/-7rvz)ro recovered breath. 31. Erew (o.v) to drive (426 D, 9), 2 Ao. M. 3 S. oai-'o, Par. aoVAEvos (Trag.). 32. XEo' (xv) to pour (426, 6), 2 Ao. M. 3 S. Xjr'o, 3 P. XVS-o, Par. XZSevos. Also the following (all in the middle) from verbs with consonant-stems: 33. aiXXeoat (&X) to leap (432, 3), 2 Ao. 2, 3 S. aonoe, aAro (err-Ahro), Sub. 3S. &aXevat, a~xkrai, Par. Eir-d'Aevos (also Irs-dtutevos). 34. &papiapic (ap) to join (447 D, 15), 2 Ao. M. Par. pueveos fittintg. 35. St.?ev, only in 2 Ao. 3 S. 7e'vo he grasped. 36. V6i-obtai to receive, 2 Ao. E'y/rn'v, 3 S. eICro, Imv. 8Eo, Inf. VeX3at, Par. 8EyY'evos. 37. X'y?-w to speak, 2 Ao. Ex/yrv counted myself, 3 S. x-fEo counted (for himself). 38. St. AEX (no Pres.), 2 Ao. 3 S. eEtciro laid himself to rest, Imv. A4Eo (as to A4deo, see 349 D), Inf. iKara-EXaOcu;, Pai. CKara-Xyetje os. Fu. x7EZoUat, 1 Ao. EXedL7Ovy, and Act. EXea laid to rest. 39. pI'y-Yvv, to mix (442, 7), 2 Ao. 3 S. eAIUCTO, xuCTo. 40. ip-yvu, to rouse (442, 11), 2 Ao. 3 S. /pVTO, Imv. ipo-o (as to opaeo, see 849. D), Inf. i"p ae, Par. pblgevos. 16. Hm. 3 P. n'ilv and'3iaoaa, Sub. 3 S., O pt. pt. 3 S. (for 36vn-, 33), [ P. aU[ev (for.u-/Uev), Infi: Vlueva and Nvat; Iterative Uo'co11. 17. Him. 3 P. a'Pv. 144 SECOND PERFECTS OF TIIE Ti-FO0nM. [408 41. 7rs:y-vvur to fix (442, 12), 2 Ao. 3 S. Kicar-ETrCT stuck. 42.'rd\Awc (OraX) to shake (432 D, 26), 2 Ao. 3 S. rdXaeo dashed himself. 43. r'Ep`r-w to destroy, 2 Ao. Inf. 7rEpaza (for repa-o-aL) to be destroyed. Here belong also two adjectives, originally participles of the 2 Ao. Mid.: 44. 1aioeJOS well-pleased, glad (st. a&, Pr. av" dvo to please, 437, 1). 45. YeveYosfavorable (st. bic, Pr. icdc'a to come, 438 D, 2). Second Perfects of the [l-frrn. 409. In the indicative, the 1t-form appears only in the dual and plural; the singular always has a connecting vowel: see paradigm, 305. 1. m7orptl (-ra) to set, 1 Pf. CFOrT)ja (for r-e-o-r7Ka) stand (416, 1), with regular inflection; 2 Pf. Dua, E'&Tarov, etc. Paradigm, 305. 2. 3alvo (3a) to go (435, 1), 1 Pf.;/iqKa have gone, stand fast (416, 2), regular; 2 Pf. 3 P. Feao-tl, Sub. 3 P. 3e,3aort, Inf. I3ef3aic Par. f3E30s, f3e3io-'a,) G. E/3croE (contracted from Oc(acos). 3. yiyvopat (yev, also ya) to become (449, 1), 2 Pf. yeyova regular: 2 Pf. Par. yeycsV, yeycor-a, G. yey/ros (contracted from yeya&Z). 4. vco-i'cco (Cavy, 2va) to die (444, 4), 1 Pf. rTrvqKa am dead regular 2 Pf. P1. 7rTEzvaLEv, SreYtaio-, 2 Plup. 3 P. e'rS"vcvrav, Pf. Opt. reyValt'qv Imv. rEiva~tt, Inf. reJaYvat, Par. Trevelc, -c&oa, -o's, G. -coroS (26). 5. St. aL (BeL 30, 8ot 25), 1 Pf.;e0otKa, 2 Pf. 8e'&a, fear; 2 Pf. PI. K8bE&ev, eSlaLo-t, 2 Plup. 3 D. E8e8ELrTv, 3 P. EiScbo-av, Pf. Sub. 8eaio, Opt. eStdetiv7, Imv. be8;3t, Inf. 8e&tELat, Par. &8e&cs. Fu. ti;rroiaat (412 a), Ao. aSLeC-a. REM. a. Instead of the Mt-forms of this verb, forms with a connecting vowel are sometimes found: Be8lapEp, e~Bleocav. The following have stems ending in a consonant, and are subject, therefore, to various euphonic changes: 409 D. 1. Hm. Pf. 2 P. V'`-Tne,' Inf. eoT'cueval, EaoTd/er5, Par. teo'Tadcs, C'ra-'r0os.-Hd. Par.'-recs, 6o-Te a, etc., Ind. 3 P. er'aos (?). 2. Hm. Pf. 3-P. peSade(ti, Par. 3efacds, BeSavcua, G. B3eBa',os. 3. Hm. Pf. 3 P. yeyado-t, Plup. 3 D. yyeYct-7rv, Inf.?ye-yaLer', Par.?yeyaOcs, 7yeyavZa, G.?yEyaT'ros. 4. rHm. Imv. Teasaal}, TE4vCTW, Inf. TrEayuerat, reavdpEy, Par. G. Te'arVOT'os, also TeaYvqrdos (some write TEYEc;6TOSr, T'eaYe6ros), Fem. TraeVyvsivs; only once'TEVyec'l, as in Att. 5. Hm. has aer for the redupl., 8earta, aetaotca (once 3ae1aot), and doubles 8 after the augment, Eaa3era, as well as after a short vowel in comp., 7repiado-tas (once 67roe[CaTae). Probably the original stem was arF: hence Pf. ea6FLa, Ao. e8FeLEra, which, after F was lost, vere changed to aed3a, gaetoea, to preserve the long quantity of the first syllable. For EL'81a, Hm. has also ae[tW with present form, but only in the first person sing. He has also an Impf. ate, l[ov, feared, fled, always with -repi, though separated from it by tmesis (4r78' ef. 404 D b. 409] SECOND PERFECTS OF THE MI-FORMi. 145 6. St. ea (eLE 30, ota 25), 2 Ao. ed3ov saw, 2 Pf. ot(a ]~n..~ —-The second perfect system of this verb presents several forms of the stem. The original la (i. e. rt8, Lat. vid-eo) appears in the Pf. Ind. Du. an.d P1. and in the Imv.; the lengthened eLa, in the Pf. Par., and in the'Plup.. which changes it to laI for the augment. Eta becomes otl by variation of vowel in the Sing. of the Pf. IJd.: in the Sub., Opt., and Inf., it assumea F (331), giving etbe. The 3 P. Pf. Ind.'lo-ao- is wholly irregular. Pf. Ind. ol8-a, otl-2fa, oza-f, L'-rov, (Tr-rov7 LI-1eV, EL-rE,'-aTdL; Plup. p"ev or M77, yEtIeY 0'e U3o~-t' 8ylo-a,,r`/8eTcrovY or ]7OTOPY z]ELTE rftTe7 6El l(V) " fl7, llIEt17Y " b 77 V /leoaY " rlav Pf. Sub. el&l, el raS, Elai, FLl8rov, eL8rTOV, ELo/Ev, ELlrIE, etloo; Opt. eltEfLJV,, LElGE),7 EI8LEq,T) etc.; Imv.'-? _ t" i UT-OY Iv. L(- 27 cT-rt LO'-rVO 7 t (T-rCOV Lff-TE,) LT-r0o-av; Inf. d3le'-vae; Par.'EL s7, cai3va, Edi 6, G. ELIOTOS. Fu.'lco/Loai (412 a) shall knbw, V. l(o-rEov. IREM. a. The forms'3ELet and r7'3, are also used for'Itaecrta and ~'aorZa: oilaa for o'lfa is rare; still rarer, OLiLqLEYv, o'3are, ol'3ao-t, for'I0/LEV, etc.; rare and poetic,'.83F1e1v,,r3eTE, for'36EtLvE, 7eLTre. 7. St. tK (eCK, oCK), only in 2 Pf. C'otKa am like, appear, 2 Plup. EOKEiev; 2 Pf. 1. I P. eKaptEv, poetic Cfoeyev, 3 P. EolK[ac, irreg.!eao- (cf.'lTacr) Inf. oLKE;Yva and ECK;vaY, Par. AOtK Co and dEKS,V v7a, o6'.,Fu. e'tco rare. 8. Kpd(o0 (Kpay) to cry (428, 13), 2 Pf. EKpacipya as preseht; 2 Pf. [mv. KEKPaX2;L. 409 D. Add further for Homer, 9. geafo/uat (za, peLy, cf. ya, yev in 3 above) to reach after, seek for, 2 Pf. to press on, desire eagerly; 2 Pf. S. pebUoYa, as, e, D. eec'arov, P. 1e /Eau/evr, 4Ue'are, du o'at, Plup. 3 P. 1jsloav, Pf. Imv. 3 S. ISetLadIcW, Par. /eu/aciS, v7a, G. lUetI60TOS or petao'TOS. 10. Pf. re'X71qca (TXa) am patient (408, 6); 2 Pf. 1 P. Tre'rAa4eE, Opt. TETrxarLyv, Imv. 7E'TX~.5, Illf. TETXaEYr(ai), Par.'TErTXS, vZa, G. d0os. 11. 2 Pf. dyvwya, as, e (avwcy) command, 1 P. 6vypyvEyv, Imv. vYWXbal, 3 S. &vc6Xrao (with middle ending; so) 2 P.,vwXaXe: Sub. vcywco, Opt. aYc6vOL5Lm, rare Imv. yvwyE, Inf. avoewye'. Plup.'p7cyea, 3 S. Ycv&?yEL(vY) commonly avc ye~l. For irreg. Plup. Yvwyov (or vcwyov), 3 S. vYwye, 3 P.'Yv&yEVY, see 351 D. For Pf. 3 S. &vwye he commands, avcSeyE is sometimes used: 2 D. &YiYETOY for a&vo-'yaror. Fu. avc~t, Ao. jvcvWa. 12. yetipco (eyep) to wake (432, 5), 2 Pf. e'ypfryopa am awake, 3 P. E'ypcyTphaT wholly irreg., Inv. 2 P. Eyp'r-yopfre (middle ending), Inf. cip7op.aa (middle ending, but accent irreg.). Hence Pr. Par.?Wypqyopdowv. 6. Hm. has Pf. 1' P. l'uex (46 D), Plup. 2, 3 S..cr7aa, 7'77 or!ee, also very irreg. We&Es, EiE87 (perhaps fRA' eFe3r/s, eFe677); Plup. 3 P. Yav (for to-cav); Pf. Sub. ELsw (ieo.?), P. E'opev, edeTre, eiMau; Inf. Y6epYaL,'/LteY, Par. Fem. idvUa and 1vca (cf. 338 D); Fu.' e&'o'ar and eldqo'w. Hd. has Pf. 1 P. Y3pev, Plup. 1, 3 S.?3ea, 1ijee, 2 P }3l'avTe; Fu. Eia'cow. The Dor., with, o638a, has a peculiar Pres.'ao-jcm,'oa?7s,'TcTl, P. Y'aa/Ye,,'(av rt. 7. Hm. Impf. 3 S. elce, 2 Pf. 3 D. e'FITov, 2 Plup. 3 D. E'ICT7'V, 3 P. eoiceeTav, Plup. Mid. 3 S. ~'KCTO or'iK7o.- Hd. has Pf. oKca, Par. OlIc&ES. 146 DIALECTIC FORMATIONS. [409 13. EpXoQatL to come (450, 2), 2 Pf.;ix~;vaa, etc.; also ci;xAovaa, 1 P. Ai4ArovoerE (25 D). 14. -rd&cXa (7raa, area) to suffer (447, 13), 2 Pf. rErovaa, 2 P. *r&oao~e (better 7reraO~e, for 7rera-'Te), Par. Fern. I7re7raSva. 15. Frecw (irra) to persuade (295), 2 Pf. 7re7roLa trust, 2 Plup. 1 P.?7re'rt uev (Imv. 7rf7reLirL Aesch.). 16. B,Bpdc6waico (Ppo) to eat (445, 3), Pf. IEp`cxKa (Par. N. P. 13E3pcTes Soph.). 17. 7rL7roW (reT, 7rTe, WrTo) tofall (449, 4),' Pf. 7re7rTeiLca, Par. A. P. irer're&iras (ire7rmc-s, vrev7rTros, Soph.), cfi 408 D, 23. DIALECTIC FORMATIONS. Some formations, which are unknown in Attic prose, occur more or less frequently in other dialects. 410 D. ITERATIVE FORRMATION. The iterative imperfect represents a continued past action as repeated or usual: rde!rerce he was sending (repeatedly), used to be sending. The iterative aorist has the same force in reference to'indefinite past action, marking it as repeated or usual: AcXdaowce he drove (repeatedly), used to drive.- Both are confined to the Indic., Act. and Mid.;. and are generally found without the augment (in Hd. always so). They are formed from the tense-stem of the Impf. or Aor., by adding the iterative-sign aO, which takes the connecting vowels and endings of the Impf.: thus Act. -K-O-Y, -K-e-S, -w-e, etc., Mid. -cK-o-urjyz, -ow-e-o, -C-e-To, -etc. These terminations are united with the tense-stem by a connecting vowel, viz. e for the Impf. and 2 Aor., a for the 1 Aor.: /ub-e-s-oC (/ryo0w to remain), 4ny-e-o~ce (pEbVyW to flee), Eip-rTva-a-awe (?ptTVCo to restrain).-A very few iterative imperfects have a: KpvtrT-a-a-Kov (KprTCo to hide), pibrr-a-ctov (pLfrra to throw). -- In contract verbs, e either remains without contraction: KaXe-eKicov (KaXE'a to call); or is dropped: &aJE-CoK (&a6oE to push). Verbs in ad0 sometimes change as to aa: vaLerTdacKo (rale'rdw to irhabit), cf. aLeTrda.The connecting vowel is omitted, when the ordinary Impf. or 2 Aor. has the t-formn; Epa-oCKoY (&p1r said), fw-d-COY' (stvv stood),'-oKo. (~, was),) KE-oeTo (for ICKE,-KIETO, EKEt1cy lay), Ph7VU-0KOV (EiPPi4ysv)v was breaking). The iterative aorist is found only in poetry. 411 D. FORMATION IN a. Several verbs annex b to the tense-stem of the Impf. or 2 Aor.: a is usually connected with the stem by the vowels a or e. This formation does not modify the meaning: it is mostly poetic, occurring very seldom in Attic prose. It is found chiefly in the Impf. or Aor. Ind. The following are the most im portant of these forms: 8tKcc to purs u e 6tSw ei'caW to yield elcdad a&btroo to tward ofq &!xCdnc&o ecpyw to shut out Ep-yaoov or epcaa0or zetpw to lift up ~IEpEaovTat, ovr-o, loat(ed) in air cyeipw to assemble hlryepiEoval, o0To,p Ery7 to burns (pe7y'c pltvo to perish olvvaco fXcw to hold aXeea0o Inf. OXf'eeCEL KtclQ o went, Aor. Midaaov k153 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 147 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. The most important irregularities of meaning are caused by using one voice in the sense of another, or by mixing transitive and intransitive senses in the same voice. A. Forms of one voice in t/he sense of anotfher. 412. a. In many verbs which have an active voice, the future middle takles the place of a future active (379): pavravco to learn, tatr'ro-oiai (not /laSroco) shall learn. This is the case with a large proportion of the verbs which compose the fifth and sixth classes. b. In many verbs the future middle has the meaning of a future passive (379): Xelrco to leave, XkeiGoiaLt (= Xet3Zb-oriat) shall be left. 413. c. The deponent verbs are to be regarded as forms of the middle voice. Yet in the aori.st, not a few take the passibe form instead of the middle: f3ovXot/aL to wish, Fu. JovX&otaalt, but Ao'. i ovXOjoSv (not EfovX?uaalxpv) wished. These are called passive deponents; and- the rest, in distinction from them, are called middle deponents. Of passive deponents, the most important are the following: those which in the future have a passive form as well as a middle, are marked with an *: thus *3LaXiyotAa. to converse, Ao. ateXE;Xqv conversed, Fu. atakeXoiat and 8LaXE Xi77otat shcall converse.'ayaat to admire (419, 1) *O'b'otat to be pleased oaiBo/Iato to feel shame (448, 1); * /Evti'opat to consider dXAio/laL to wander 7rpo.v/e;oiat to be forward tXlciioexat to contend *8&aXeyotuaL to converse (424, 15) apvoziam to deny i7rt/AXo!ita to care for (422, 11)'*'XhOxait to be grieved (422, 1) FercalieXotat to regret OoviXoMau to wish (422, 3) adrovoEoliat -to despair &Eo/iaL to want (422, 4) *8cavoEotxat to meditate &3pKo/IaL to see (424 D, 31) Evvoiop1at to think7 on 6P'va.at. to be able (404, 5) wrpovo;otat to foresee, provide v/avrtooLat to oppose o'ooLtat to think (422, 15) irtloralaa to tunderstand (404, 6f) -cri3o~a to revere ElJXaf3Eo/taL to be cautious X0'orqlostaL to be ambitious REgM. (a). Some of these verbs, beside the aorist passive, have an aorist of the middle form: thus aiyauat, Ao. usually yydaSov, but also qyac-ajitv. 414. d. Several verbs have an aorist passive with middle meaning: Ebvpavco to mOcake glad, eqbpdavfpav made myself glad, rejoiced; crrpEco to turn, E;rpdcqV turned (myself); alvco- to shown, 6icivr showed myself, appeared, but iqdvrq1v qwas sh8own. 415. e. Several deponent verbs have a passive aorist and future with passive meaning: Zcio/eat to heal, aTarcrdl7v healed, tic aMqv was healed; &BXouac to reeeive, E d) EEL T v reeeiLed, iXIqv was received -- In some, tho ltS IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. [415 middle forms of the prcsent or perfect systems may have both an active and a passive meaning: tluteoxat to imitate, eqxiEt,uaC have imitated or have been imitated. B. lixture of transitive and intransitive senses. 416. In some verbs, the forms of the active voice are divided between a transitive and an intransitive sense. The future and first aorist are then transitive; the second aorist and the perfect are intransitive. The most important cases are the following,: 1.'OrqltL (ora) to set, place, M.'oraatL to set one's self Trans., Fu. o-rro-co shall set, 1 Ao.'rrlco-a set; Intrans., 2 AQ. cTToJV (set myself) stood, Pf. E'Tr7Ka (have set myself) am standing, ioTrKEWt Vwas standing, Fu. Pf. Eirr7&co shall stand.: a. The same important distinction prevails in the numerous cornpounds of this verb: — dqLTrqgI to set off, cause to revolt, arfTT7rT)r stood of, revolted, doarfKa am distant, am in revolt, —-— qglor to set over; Er;acrT7V set myself over, E' CrqTKa am set over, --- Ka-LaorT7L to set down, establish, Kario(r7v7 established myself, became established, KaZEcr0rpia am established. The Aor. Mid. has,a different meaning: KaTrEoTrl(raro estab lishedfor hinself. 2. f3aivco (3a) to go (in poetry also cause to go); (Trans., Fu. PjiCoa shall cause to go, 1 Ao. ef3,rhoa; Ion. and poet.) Intrans., 2 Ao. f/qv w0ent, Pf. 3piPKa have gone, stand fast. 3. ov-co to bring forth, produce; so bVioo!, g'oco-a; intrans.,'ev' was produced, came into being, rerqfcKa am by nature. 4. N-co to pass under, take on; Karalvo. to submerge trans.; so av(oo, iOvca, but eZv; dived, set, evfiS6v put on, 8divov put off. 5. oT/- tvvvyU to put out, extinguish; 2 A'o. Efq-rv zwent out, Pf. 6'2KJ am extinguished. 6. KEhXXco (0-KEX) to dry trans.; intrans., 2 Ao. EO-KXT7V became dry, Fu. rrKXo'oozat, Pf. Eo'KXCKa. 7. rtvco (7rL) to drink, 2 Ao. Errnov drank; 1 Ao. Eafcra (Pr. lruicoKo) caused to drink. 8. yegvoiat (yev, cf. 449, 1) to be born, poetic; I Ao. eEyevcrLLjv begot, brmtghtforth. 417. In several verbs, the second peafect is the only active form whic-h has an intransitive sense. ayVV1Lt to break 2 Pf. e'aya am broken Ey7Ep(o to toake trans. eyp~iyopa am awake o'XXtq, to destroy 3XcoXa am ruined (okXeKa have ruined) -relCo5 to persuade rE7rwota trust (7re'oZlat comply) 7ryvvUat to fixrerr7ya am fixed pllyVv/2 to break pijpcoya am broken aO71r to rot trans. u-pira am rotten T71iK to melt trans.'rE7nKa am melted (/avio to showo,rEqva have shown mysel, appearea (/0alvocat to appear) For the difference between alleeoya and d4PeXa, 7r/Erpya and 7re7rpdXa, see 387 b. 419] SPECIAL FORrMATION. FIRST CLASS. 149 -SPECIAL FORMATION. 418. NOTE. The following lists exhibit the Attic inflection (tensesystems) of the verbs included in them. But other forms are introduced to some extent. Those marked late (1.), or enclosed in [ ], belong to the period of the Common dialect (3 e); for the most part, they are not met with before the conquest of Greece by the Romans (146 B. C.). Other abbreviations used to show the character of the forms are fr. (frequent), r. (rare), r. A. (rare in Attic), n. A. (not found in Attic), n. A. pr. (not in Attic prose). Verbal Adjectives in T(r, 7ro0S. These are seldom noticed in the following lists, when the verb has a first passive system, as they are easily inferred from that. FIRST CLASS (Stem- Class, 325). 419. The stem appears without change in the present. This is much the most numerous of all the classes. We notice here only those verbs of it which, have peculiarities of formation. I. Verbs i~n 1a of the first class, see 404-6. II. Vowel-stems in which theXnal vowel remcaimn short (contrary to 335). a. The following retain the short vowel in all the forms: I. alya!at (404, 4) to admire, Ao. P.'jydarr7v (Ao. M. I]yacr-/afv r. A. pr.), V. dyaoro's. Pind. ayad'opal. 2. lyeXado to laugh, —Fu. yeXao-o/aLt, Ao. EyEXaroa, Ao. P. yecXdao-2~v. (Hm. also yEXolto.) 3. epaco to love,.Ao. P. rpcoaqriv as act. (Ao. M. jpaacrcliqv Hm.): also Pr. E"paqaL (404, 7) poetic. 4. 5ciaco to crush,- Fu. Xadro-c Ao. g, Xao'a (Pf. M. rTEao7Iac, Ao. P. SiXdao-lv, n. A.): also WXdia with same meaning and inflection. 5. KX&a to breakc — Fu. KXaicco Ao. EKXaoTa, Pf.. KM. KXkacaL, Ao. P. KX. r to drw, u. Ao. ra Pf. a Pf.. 6. wcic'o to draw,. Pu.- c7rao'o, Ao.coirwaoa, Pf. o-lraKal, Pf. M.'oao/LaL, Ao. P. Ero-7rdarv. 7. xaXaco to loosen,F — u. xaXdaoo, Ao. exacXaora (Pf. Kexa'XaKa, Pf. M. KEXaXaWt/aL, n. A.), Ao. P. eXaX6do-Zv. 8. daKeofat to heal, Fu. adicro-oat, Ao. 7jKEd/ay7v [AO. P. 0K0(icti v]. 9. dXEco to grind, FPu. dXcioo (dXCi, 374), Ao. j'Xo-a, Pf. adX2XEKca, Pf. M. adXXEo-aut. 419 D. a. For tense-sign a doubled in -Im. after the short vowel (.yt7eaoa, dvto-,cv), see 344 D. 1. Beside &y74alm to admire, lm. has a&ydoita and &yacol!ua to envy, Fu. iydaovat, Ao.,yao-d/ov, V. &yoyrds. t50 SPECIAL FORMATION. maST CLASS. [419 10. apKEco to szffice, —Fu. apKeco, Ao. rypKEca [Ao. P. 7pKECcr Iv]. 11. eLeo to vomit, — Fu. i;Er-co (4',cI, E'iyovat, 374), Ao. lypEr(a. 12. Cco to bol,- Fu, oco, Ao. f'eo-a, V. ascros. 13. 6&co to scrape,- Fu. $co-ro, Ao. feo-ra, V. $eoroe. 14. reXEo to complete, — see Paradigm 288. 15. rpco to tremble, — Fu. rp;o-o, Ao. TrpEo-a, Vo. -rpeo-roS; r. A. pr. 16. dpoo to plough,- Fu. ap6cro, Ao. ilpora, (Perf. M.'dpipoatc Irmn.,) Ao. P.,jpo',Tv. 17. dvco to achieve,- Fu arv c roo, Ao. ivuo-a, PE. IvvKa, Pf. M.'rvuvo'atxa Ao. P.;zv'7v, V. awvvcros7, but a'v-1'VTrov. Att. Pres. also advroT or avvrco (327). 18. dp6v to draow water, — Fu. dpvao, Ao. i'pvora, V. apvcrEor. Att. Pres. adprco (327). 19. gX~Kco to draw, Fu.'EXeo. Other tenses from st. EXKv, Ao. FtXKVCoa, P. E'XKVKa, Pf. M. E'XKvo-al), Ao. P. eRXtco-S 1v, V. EXKcr;oS and EXKVcr;e(. The forms iEXK&&o,;XKV(O,) LXta, EcXXy?1v are late. 20. Trrv'o to spit, -Fu. 7rrv(rco, Ao. E'rrvTav V. rrrvoTr-. 420. b. The following retain the short vowel in apart of the forms. The first three make it long before a-. 1. NCO to bind, --— Fu. 8ro-co, Ao.'tao-a, Pf. 8;'ERa, Pf. M. 8;8iqat, AO. P. E8s77&v, Pu. Pf. &8eao'lat. 2. Srco to offer,- Fu.'o-w, Ao.'aco-a, Pf. rTEO~a, Pf. C. ZrSvpac, Ao. P. ETVSV (65 c), V. tT7;fOS. 3. XvoC to loose, see Paradigm 270-5, and compare 268 b. 4. at'ieL to praise,- Fu. aivfio, Ao. rE'vo~a, Pf. ivecKa, Ao. P.,vev;jv;, only in Pf. M..',V~,at: in Att. prose used mostly in comp. 5. KaXEow to call,-Fu. KaX;oco (KakXc, 374), Ao. EiKdXEca; but r in Pf. K;EKXIca, Pf. M. K. eKXrat, Fu. Pf. KEKXKjco/,aL, Ao. P. eXSrlsv, all from syncopated stem KXe. 6, pnro to shut the mouth or ey, —— Fu. pVrow, Ao. E'lo-a, but Pf. /i;LLOKC am, shut. 17. rHm. Impf. 3 S. {vTiO), as if from Pr. &vutL (Theoc.). Also poetic &vc, only Pr. Impf. 19. I-Im. also EiXcKE (331), Fu. xx~o'tow, Ao. iXCrlca, Ao. Pi. xcKa,71v. 21. Ion. and poet. vELCaE to quarrel, upbraid, Fu. ver cro, Ao.'ev'iCeca. 420 ID 3. Hm. 2 4o. M. X4-ru', etc. (408 D, 29) 4. Hm. Fu. aviio', Ao.'vt~ar; Pr. also at',vozYat (in Ues. acvyzc). 5. Hm. also 7rpo-IcaxifolztL, poet. itLcX~c cl. 6. 10. Hm. ac&o (aa) to harm, mislead, Pr. M. 3 S. &al-al, Ao. &6ra, &aacnU7v4, contracted aca,. aacdYlv, Ao. P. &oaniv. The first a may become a by augment. V. &-da-ory. 11. Hm. 1CorTE (also tcowresa% ) to be angry, Ao. Ec'TeTa, Pf. Par. KEoICoTOCJ (386 D) angry. 12. Ion. and poet. epvc (5) to draw, Fu. ieplo'c (Hm. also?pcw, 378 D), Ao. cspiCra, Pf. EtpFLar (Ka-retpurLat). Hes. Pr. Inf. (yr-form) Eip6vtepc (28 D). Hm. has ELpV only as result of augm. or redupl. (312 D). Different are?p6oyuai, pio-.a', to preserve (405 D b). 421' - STEAMS WITICI RETAIN A FINAL SHORT VOWEL. 151 7. bvc, to pass tunder, put on, —.Ao. P. eu3'irv, V. 35r&s, reos; elsewhere v, see 423, 3. 8, 9. 7ro2sol to miss, and rov4&o to toil, sffer, are inflected regularly with r/, but have e occasionally in the future and first aorist systems. III. Vowzel-stees with adcded a-. 421. The forms in which o- is added to the stem (342) are the perfect middle and first passive systems, with the verbal.s. Here belong the stems under 419, so far as they are used in these forms (only &p&o to plough has Ao. P. p'3-yv). Further, the following in which the stem-vowel is either long, or, if short, is lengthened according to the rule in 335: 1. 3pcaco to do, —— Fu. 8pa-ioo, Ao. f3pacra, Pf. 8;E3paKa, Pf...'3dpattat (r. baBpao-paL), Ao. P. pio-rl/v. 2. KVdia to scratch (371 c), Fu. K V/Ow, Ao. E'KvTra, Pf. M. KEKVqJyrojat Ao. P. EKVYc?0?qV. 3. Xpaco to give oracle, — Fu. XpOo, Ao. fXprTa,, Pf. KE;Xp1Ka, Pf. M. KEXp1o-aLat, Ao. P. EXP1o',3?17. 4. 4dco to rub (371 c), —— u. T-co, Ao.'irqtaa (Pf. MI.'rncrgtalt or et',+ at, both late, Att. fEP7fYaL from Pr. +?Xno, Fu. 4/$o~): chiefly used in composition. 5. v;o to he ap up, Fu. viloao, Ao. ir7icaa, Pf M. vM. vcrLat and vqvitat [Ao. P. v..o-yv and dvrl2v], V. vqrro. 6. KvIto to roll,- Fu. KvXtlro, Ao. EKV6Xtoa, Pf. M. KEfKVXLO-/Lat Ao. P. EKVXcTaq7V. Pr. also KVXkl'va and KVXLV3c0. 7. Vrpico to saw,- F. wrptro', A.'rpcora, Pf. M. rE'7rpr/latl, A. P. E1rpLo-Sq7v. 8. Xpit to anoint, — Fu. xpio-, Ao. expcra, Pf. MI. KEXPLtoyaL (and KeXplutL), Ao. P.'Xpcr-i7v. 9. X0, to heap up, —-Fu. Xo)ro, Ao. E'XCOra, Pf. KE;XcKa, Pf. M. KE;XO grtat, Ao. P. eXc∨7v. Late Pr. X&c0vviv or Xcovvco cl. 5. 10. $vico to polish, -. (vo-o, A. 6'L o-a, Pf. MM. 1vo'uiaL, A. P. Iou'o77rv. 11. vo (v) to rain, —-- u. io-o, Ao. vcra, Pf. M. vngal, Ao. P. v:erov. 12. Kvalco to scratch, —— Fu. KravtLro, Ao. EKvaocra, Pf. M. KE;KvatLrocal AO. P. EKvaltr 5v. 13. iratco to strile,- Fu. wrat-co (and vratl/o-o, 331), Ao.'ratcra, Pf. Vr'o 7ratKa (Pf. A. 7rE7ratoloa7 late, Ao. P.,E'7ralo-wv poet. —usu. rE7rk7y/caz, &XI7yr77v, from rXvo-o-c 428, 5). 14. raXkaho to vwrestle, ---- Fu. raXalaco Ao. srdXaicra Ao. P.?traXalro-3l poetic. 15, KXElto to shut, -PFu. KX)ewro, Ao. EKXELa, Pf. KeKXeLKa, Pf. MI. KXELfOratu and K[KXetLata, Ao. P. EKXEtL-771v. 16. KXNo Att. for KXELo, inflected in the same way, but in Perf. Mid. only KeKX[Miat. 421 D. 15. Ion. tcXt'ow, Ao. eIcxrij a, Pf. M. KeKXAi')(a) aL, Ao. P. &ic~x.') rj', V. KCx-ri~Js. Dor. also Fu. icXa~&, Ao. $tcXaca. 24. Poet. pakcw to shatter, Fu. pafco, Ao. P. EpPlov~v. 152 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIRST CLASS. [421 17. aehoA to shake, Fu. TelOCo, Ao. feto-a, Pf. oe;OLKa, Pf. MI. I;OECeaq Ao. P. eTEO'tGJV. 18. Zpavoo to break, — Fu. Zpavmco, Ao.'Zpavcra, Pf. M. rc-pavliat and TrZSpavoy'at, Ao. P. eSpavaqcvY. 19. -rauo to make cease, Mid. to cease, Fu. 7ravo-w, Ao.'7ravoa, Pf. 7r[EravKa, Pf. M. 7ri7rav/iat Ao. P. ErraiVorZ7v (Ion. and old Att. 17raSr/,v) V. 7ravcrTEoS. 20. KEXe&o to order, —-Fu. KEXE1VcO, Ao. KEUCXvo-a, Pf. KEKE;XVKa, Pf. M KeKEXEvo'IauL, AO. P. EKEX1EV''7?V. 21. Xevco to stone, Fu. XeVcCo, Ao. Xtevo-a, Ao. P. fXevrao-Zv. 22. aKov(o to hear, see 423, 1, — [Pf. M. i'Kovo-mIat], Ao. P. 7KOTJV9y. 23. KpoUoC to beat, Fu. KpOVco, Ao. EKpovoa, Pf. KiKpOVKa, Pf. M. KEKpou /laL (but KEKpovo-ra), Ao. P. CKpo;VrO]v. IV. Stems which assume e in somne of the forms (331). Future. Aorist. Perfect. Passive. 422. 1. a'XtolLaL to be displeased. ax2faoiiaL (413) zXTJ9/ (41) 2. a30'o-Ko to feed trans., Mid. intrans. %ocTKqo)C [;o-o-.1a] [IOK30o-,qiv] a. The primitive stem Po appears in V. fOTJS (also BoccrrEKos). 3. 3oovXo/at to wish. Augment, see 308 a. fovXiqo-oyaL j3e/3ovXnpiat )j3oviXitjv (413) 4. 3;co to need, Mid. to want, entreat. 0e6);l qaE7o-a 8EUe? Ka, 8E'eqflat L ErE92t7V (413) a. Impersonal MeI it is necessary (only once in IHm.), Impf. EEPt, Fu. &eSTes, Ao; e5e-aSe. 5.'fponlat to ask, see 424, 9; Fu. i;p5o-oxat. 6. "rj'c to go (to harm). fppc0c0 Uppa )ppjKa 7. ev'Sc to sleep, usually in comp. Ka3,ev.aco. Augment, 314. Kau2EVt7-co V. KaaJev8qrTEdV 8. +'tco to boil: also i;ico cl. 7, rare. e417 (.()'5+ Lo-'+a q7at V. jtqb (for E4+-roS) and E4+retoE. 9. E~EXco and 1IXo\ to wish: Impf. 2'3eXov (never eZeXov). (E)i)\rXET-o iZteXco-a?',X77Ka [reZcE\Xqa] a. The Attic poets in the iambic trimeter have Aeco (not,dxco); but E'Acow is the usual form in Attic prose, and the only one in Hm. and 422 D. 3. Hm. Pr. Inf. Bdxeo'-aL, 2 Pf. 7rpo-BE'ovAa. 4. Hm. has in Act. alfre and Jee0xe, each once; in Mid. always aeo/aoyr Cf. 39. 4231 STEMS WHICH ASSUME E. 153 Pind. The augmented forms in Att. always have O: thus Ao. ibk?7aa, but Sub. &Ekaiow or (reAX. (?). 3. Hm. Pr. M. 3 S. 3XcdBeTar. 160 SPECIAL FORMATION. THIRD CLASS. [427 4. yv7ari-co (yvajir) to bend. yz4aLl c''yval/Ia syvdR143?v 5. vTarro (rao, 66 c) to bury. 24auo f[a'a Tr7aplalaL Ecra)7,lv, V. Ja7rTEoC 6. Zp vrrro (rpvc, 66 c) to break down, zweaken. zplv'Lo EtZpvfa rcTpvppLtat;tfpvJr 7. KaXvTrrco (KaXv/3) to cover. KaX;vlo cKav'lvAa KfKaQXvt aL fKaXv'/)2qv 8. Kamrrco (Kaw7r) to bend. iaupt+co E;Ka/l+a KeKa/Lat (391 b) s'KaL44JV+ 9. KX7rrro (KXemr) to steal. KXIJ6) EcKX Ea KEKXO()a (334 a) iKXa'rrv KeKXtepuaL eKXe9)?7v n. A. pr. 10. g7rrTo (KOrr) to cut. Kdltc EKo/a EKec~a, KEKO-q-aC EKO7TJV. KoITTOS 11. Kpv;rrTo (Kpv3 or KpVO) to hide. Kp+(tO) EKpv+a K. EKpVttaL fKpVt3V a. 2 Ao. P. tecpi,3rn', eicp(pnv are hardly used in Attic: Erpvpoo, EKpVIov c4pvl3xrzy occur only in late writers. 12. KV7rTc7 (Kv7r) to stoop. KVII EKV+a KeKvdpa 13. parrco (jaO) to sew. paZo Eppay/a EppariatLc v. pna7rro' 14. ptTrrc (jtt) to throw, see Paradigm 293. 15. crKaTrco (orKaq5) to dig. cKalNO EoC-a eKaa EKaa, ETK'a/L n eKaC7)V 16. (rKerTrooLat (VuKErr) to View. OKE 40/tat E aTK plIt5)v UETKE/t/tctt EYK/ a. Instead of o-IcT'rol.at, the Attic writers almost always use the kindred 0rKo'rEW in the Pr. Impf.; but the other tenses of acovwr, are found on, ly in late writers. 17. o-iKrrrar (cKq7r-) -toprop. OK'+t)/ EcrK?71/a [EOK?5t0a] EtTKqht/tat EtKq)rv3 18. EKco)7rro (Koa7r) to jeer. aTKCO/Iat E(cKw/+a [crKcolliat] EUcK043s7V 5. Hm. Pf. M. 3 P. Teadqoara (392 D), Ao. P. cd1pr and Erdt(pv. 10. Hm. 2 Pf. Par. KEKO7rTOs. 6. Hm. 2 Ao. P. e'Tpv'(pv. 20. Hm. elf7rTC (Evm7r) to chide, also Etvora cl. 4 (429 D, 3), 2 Ao. l'trtroi and evEznroz, (384 D). 21. Poet. tcdpr'orw (papr) to sesze, Fu. pdpJa, Ao. E'/capta. In ies. 2 Ao. tAliapirov (384 D), ODt. tEtld.roevY, Inf. juareetv, 2 Pf. pttcapra. 428] f'OURTH CLASS. VERBS IN rro-w AND ow. 1.61 19. TV7rrco (rorV also rv7rre, 331) to strike. rvrrqo-ci (E'rvira, ervov Teprv/Ipat ETrvt7v) a.?T6 wrTa is found in Aristotle; TeTl7rT7Ica, TErv7rT71=ra,, ETv7rTiraW are late. The aorist, perfect, and passive systems are unknown to Attic prose, the aorist system being supplied from lradGraecv (7raray), the perfect and passive systems from 7ryAtao'w (428, 5). FOURTII CLASS (Iota- Class, 328). The stem assumes t in the present, always with euphonic changes. The verbs of this class are very numerous. We notice only those which have peculiarities of formation, especially all those which form second tenses. I. Verbs in oo-o and eo% which formn second tenses. 428. 1. akXXaCooco (aXXay) to exchange, see Paradigm 294. 2. KqpvO-o(r- (KlpVK) to proclaim. v.,pvteo Zrpvda fe: pvXa, -ypat;~:qpv KInpV~ K ipvea KEKJPVXn1," -YI t EKlp'X2? 3. a'c-cco (jLay) to knead. lbaZ Eiauf/la l4AqaXa, Iay/iaL t ba', cy X tq 4. 3pvcr-o. (opvx) to dig. Opvco~ oJpvI a OpCpvXa, -y/at copv'Xr1v a. Pf. M. &pvwy/a (for opcpvpu/ua) late, 2 Ao. P. &ptgX,' doubtful. 5. 7rX'o —co (rXqry) to strike. (&iK7rX7,yvvat cl. 5, Thuc.) RXtr] tG3 >rXQa Te~rXr7/ya irErXyWVI 7rfXr7,TY aLr E7r aXX7zv less freq. a. ercXrAoe-c, icara7rXoeAo4 make -eorrtd7?V (397). Attic writers use the simple verb only in the perfect and passive systems, the other active tenses being supplied from wracrdoeo (7raray), which in Att. is confined to the active. 6. rrpacr'co (Orpdy) to do. Urp o'rpata 7r'wrpdaXa, rr7rpCya (387 b) rE'7rpay/uat crpaXzqx 7. ~rrrCao (rr7'K) to cower: also rrcoo-co Ilon. and poet. 7rTi W E7rT?7qXa 8. rapaaoco (r7dpaX) to disturb: also 2Spa'o-o-o (rpax) mostly poet. rapdco: rapaa'revapafltat ErapapX'r &~papa (66 c) r'fTp~Xa am trou led (f3paX2Sv. r.) 9. rarcco (ray) to arrange. racco Erada rE'Traa, rEraayac artXdiiv (r. e'aaY V) 428 D. 5. Hm. 2 A o. (E)re'rAE ryov (384 D), 2 Ao. P. ec-rXiyn7r, KaTr-e67rmA'l; 7. Hm. has from kindred st. 7r'ra, 2 Ao. 3 D. cKara-TrrTrnYr (408 D, 23) and Pf. Par. re7rorTcs, -C'orS (386 D, 860 D). 8 162 SPECIAL FORMATION. FOURTII CLASS. L428 10. CpLtIoTo (dpLK) to be rough. frpL~o) E'qplta 7riEp!Ka am roztgh 11. 0vXdac0w (bXtVaK) to guard, Mid. to guard (one's self) against. dvxaico EbvXaaa 7TEOV'XaXaX -yl a -aaL 4vXaXdv 12. KXadco (KXayy, 328 b) to make a loud noise. KXaSy&co EKXay/a KEKXayya as pres., Fu. Pf. KeKXayOoLLat 13. Kp co (Kpay) to cry; Pr. Impf. rare.'KpayoV KiEKpaya as pres., Fu. Pf. KeKpU4o/Lag a. xpdcow, Eicpata, late. Pf. Imv. dctpaXSL, see 409, 8. 14. plE'co (Aey) to do, Ion. and poet.: also E'p8co (for Epco, st. epy). peco fpEta, EppEa a,p X E'pGo -Epfa Eopya, ecopyELY (322 D) a. Hd. has a Pr. Impf. E'psc instead of gpaw. 15. ro-qcac (orady) to slay, in Attic prose usu. oeirrow.,+atsw ewuqata Otcayjiat Eor-d'y7v, r. E4a-XSt P 16. TrpiCo (rpty) to sgueatk, Ion. and poet. 2 Pf. r5rptya as pres. 17. /paCco (Opa8) to declare. padoco E -pacoa praeopaaa, STepaor/aL Et pccrv 18. X a' (Xab) to make retire, Mid. to retire; chiefly poetic. 19. X;Eo (XEc) alvum exonero. XEco-o~vcal (37) E~ETa (7XE-ov7) ( ) xoa (pass.,EXE'oal, KEXC07LEPvo0) II. Verbs in owco and ~co with other peculiarities. 429. a. Labial stems (328 a, b). 1. 7rfo-cr, (7rer) to cook' also 7rLET-i later. TEntCi) EorwEa ErvE7E/L/aL - 7re43v 2. jv' o (Lvt,) to was7 hands or feet: also hvlTTQ not Att. mlod cvt@a vLVtLtaL Evl+zv 10. Pind. Pf. Par. srecplpicovras, see 360 D. 12. Poet. 2 Ao. icmdyov. Hrm. 2 Pf. Par. ice~cxvrycts, G. -ovTos (360 D). 17. Hm. 2 Ao. erZp~bov (384 D). Hes. Pf. M. Par. wreeppaAxe'os. 18. Hm. 2 Ao. M. irreg. KceicaU77rv (384 D) retired, but Act. idca3ovI de. prived, Fu. KeicaB&oo shall deprive. Cf 422 D, 20. 20. Poet. CKp(wo to creak; 2 Ao. 3 S. tcptce (or icplye) TIm., 2 Pf. IcEcKpy7a Aristoph. 21. Poet. reX&dCw (reXaa,'reXa,,rXa) to bring near, Mid. to come nzear, Fu.'Eaxdoe, reAxi (375), Ao. e7reiXoa, Pf. M. srerXmNuac, Ao. P..IreXdSrr, and Trag, iarXdarv', 2 Ao. M. 3 S.,rAxJo, 3 P. A vrX'r]no (408 D, 22). Pr. also ri.Adw, Ep, WiXAvJA or orXAVaCW cl. 5 (443 D, 6), Trag. sreAd&aw, rA&Xdco (411). 429 D. 3. Hmr. Vi'ooC (,ErVt)=,i'tr~cs cl. 3, to chide (427 D, 20). 4. Hm. o'crropctr (owr) toforesee, only Pr. Impf.; cf. 450, 4. 431] VERBS IN -crw AND 5W. 163 430. b. Lingual stems which make ro-w (Trr), 328 a. 1. apCuLOrr tofit together: also aipltoc not Att. uipli&to Ipbtoo'a;7p/AOO',/auat Vp/;o'v 2. /3XTTrco to take the honey (geXt, tf'Xtr-ov, 53 D). Ao. j3Xlcra. 3. 3parcco to boil [Ao. Ef3paoa, Pf. M. i/;3paurIl]. 4. Ipo-aW to row. Ao. Ij'p a. 5. 7rriaco to sprinkle. frro0o E7rad oa [7r rao'tal] f 7raotl'v 6. rXdcraco tofornm. 7rX m frrXtraa rra rrkaar.rat a'srXa 7. rrrloaco to pound. TrTlaCo' rTLoa f7rtlor7aL ErTTlor3Y 431. c. Stems of variable form. 1. apiradoo (aprraS, also Aprray not Att.) to ssize. cip7rdaoc (-opat) rlp7TrCa rpraKa, 7praorac 7tp7rac2s (a/:7raco t1piraea ijprayuaL ipsrXdx3yv) a. 2 Ao. P. p7rdyrlv late. Verbal &p7raorrds (ap7raIc'ds n. A.). 2. 3ao.raoC (3atrras, la'te faa-ray) to carry, poet. (late in prose). 3aaoradc. /3oahraaa [-$a] [PE acorayzal] [ii3acTaXr3]p 3. vaicr-co (vay and vaS) to press close. va o cvaea vivaO('at 4. rraLCoa (rar8 and rraty) to sport. rrateoDaat (377)'srato'a ri7ratclatl V. 7rato'rEos a. tirait~,'ratrxa, rf'raty/laL, erratCx~a are late: so also Fu. vraqopuait and 7ra[to. 5. arc'Cco (-cr, aooe) to save. oa-Urc f-eo-a ToC'Ka, c(reoC'aat &roSwrv aO'-co/atL V. OWO'TOg 5. Hm. AdCtoua (xaS) = Xat3Acvw cl. 5, to take (437:, 4). Attic poets have 430 D. 8. Hd. &pdaco = &qpdw to feel, Ao. Sza-ba. 9. Hm. 1IAdoao to lash, Fu. izacaw, Ao. Y'ccaca; cf. (ldrs lash, G. ildsrm'-os. 10. Poet. icop6-o (icopv) to equip, Ao. M. K0opuacdevo s, Pf. M. KceKopVu efEVOS (46 D). 11. Poet. (rare in prose) MA-ouatr (At7T) to pray, also XlrotuaT el. 1. Hm. Ao. Xrod-ciuJlv (308 D), 2 Ao. Inf. Arr'araat. 12. Poet. vtf'arouai to go, Fu. vuou-oat. Also Pr. vbopuat, usu. with future meaning. The orig. stem was perhaps Pv, whence yve (326) or s'7i (327); vioptai for vEtoLpa (39 a). 431 D. 5. Hm. Pr. aociw and oc'ce (shortened in Sub. d47.s, rdp., oraool), Fu. -actrcaw, Ao. ia-cdwa, Ao. P. eaacarYnv. The orig. stem was'Tao ((f. 210), from which comes also a 2 Ao. (/t-form) adao he saved and save thou. 164 SPECIAL FORMIATION. FOURTH CLASS. [43 i 6. [fr (t,, 331) to sit, seat, Mid.'OotUt, also E'o/atL (38), to sit: found chiefly in comp. with Karta. Hence KaLcto, Impf. eK2timov (314): also If (lvC, Ka lt)co, cl. 5.,X(tLc (376) iEKL1toTa and Ka-c(ra KaBtCo'lCOaL f KaLtoa'pLtv Ka'~Eobuat, Impf. EKaSEO/rilJv and Ka3ECojlV. Kae8ovbLtat (for Kace;&co/tal, 331, 374) [;Kar[o'-lv] a. Pr. Ind.;Fo/uat, icKaaeotuat, is rare in classic Greek. The Pr. Inf. and Par. and the Impf. have usually an aorist meaning, and seem to lhave been originally aorists from the stem oae (Lat. sed-eo) with Epic re. duplication (384 D): i/mqv.y for io8ol-qv (56) for oae-(e)a)-ot77y (63, 38), cf. iKcEX6/.v (424 D, 34) from,c~-oel~A. From the same stein was form ed 7'W = io&or = r —a(e)-o-w (332, 339), cf. 7rtir'ro (449, 4) = -rt-7r(e)T-o. 7. iv'uo (!uvy, tLvZe) to suck: later /ivNio, puvaOo. vU;cjOam IiVCo-a 8. o fo (oa, ore) to smell. 0oj(~'70Coa (o&acowa as pres., IIm.) III. I;quid stems wldich foorn second tenses. 432. i. dyelpco (ayep) to gather. dyepci 7'yelpa ayqyepKa, -IbaL a71[pS 2. a'lpco (ap) to take up, bear away; contracted from cdlpco (aep). ap'Z (a) jpa (382 a)'pcKa, mptiac 77tp3rv 3. af/Xo/at (ad) to leap. ciXoutaL nmXCa/Yv (382 a. 2 Ao. 77XOum7' doubtful in Att., cf. 408 D, 33) 4. /(dXXco (f3aX, f3Xa, 340) to throw. f3aXoi E3aXov f3EfX71Ka, Of3X7rjat iI3xt rqv. 6. Him. Ao. eJ-a (= e-oe-o-a, e-E-oa) seated, Imv. ereov (better E'ooov), Intf. e'oaa., Par. [a'as (a&v'as), Hld. ci'aas; Mid. trans. 3 S. E'ora-aro (e'-aro Eur.,'o-avaro Pind.), Par. Eao —devos, Hd. elo-dezos; Fu. vo-olaat (= -ea —roeatm). In comp. Ao. Kaae47oa and Koal-aa. e'otats as Pr. is unknown to Hm.: for es'ea Od. K, 378, read e'eo 2 Ao. 9. I1m. &pVdo —w (arpuy, a(pv6) to draw out, Fu. apmo6w, Ao. qp0o-aa. Also once Pr. a&pvw. 432 D. 1. Hm. Pr. Impf. 3 P. lyep6Eow'rat, -ovro (411), 2 Ao. 3 P. a&-epoY' o, Inf. ayE'pEaa, (367 D), Par. a&yp4uevo's (384 D). 2. Hm. has only Ao. M. 7pdu77mv, 2 Ao. &p'o71v (a), apovrnv, apbo-al, Ao. P. Par. a&paels. He comm. uses Ion. aad poet. a&efp (aep), A'o. {etpa, Ao. P. aepbqv, Plup. 3 S. &twpro (for 70opTo): Pr. Impf. 3 P. Oepe4ovvatL -o0TO (411).The stem aep has the sense of E, (Frp, Pr. Ypco to join, 312 D) in Ao. -vv-getpe I1. c, 499, Ao. M. Sub. avvaZdpeTaL I1. o, 680. 4. Hm. Pf. 2 S. IBB3xAviaa (363 D), 3 P. feBPXiaarat, -a-o (355 D e), also BefBo. A~ao, Par. eqloA;7yeVEos; 2 Ao. M. 3 S. B3x7qTo, etc. (408 D, 20); Fu. once -viJ' 6A1~o-ecai. 432] LIQUID STE[MS WHICH FORM SECOND TENSES. 165 5. iyElpco (cy7p) to rouse, wake trans., Mid. to wake intrans. yepy j'yetpa iypiyopa (321, 417) ]y/'p rv sWypOdrnV (339) EY17/iyEpu(L a. The Inf. 2 Ao. M. has the accent of a present: T'ypeoE'am. A poetic Pr. e'ypco, eypoxuaL is also found. 6. ad'XXo (2aX) toflourish. 2 Pf r-,qXu. 7, Kalvwo (Kav) to kill. 2 Ao. C'Kavov: other tenses doubtful. In prose only as compound, K(MraKalvo. 8. LtpO (Kep) to shear. tfp~ >Kelpa [Ke'KapKa] KEKap!LaL K p' v, V. KaprTO 9. KXtvo (KXiV) to make incline, see 433, 1. 10. KErlvoA (KrEV) to kill, see 433, 4. 11. aalvoplat (pav) to be mad: poet.,alvo to madden, Ao. eflrlva. iavofaL u4l~rlva am mad f/vrk v 12. &/e'Xo to be obliged. 2 Ao. ceXAov. From OcELXE (331) come 0oeX71oc coe XL7ca cofEtXK o )ELXJ1qJV 13. rrdEpo (7rep) to pierce. 7repa eiretpa 7rE7raptat (334 a) c7raprv 14. a(rnap (cap) to sweep. capSc Eo-qpa co-?lrpa pa grin 15. aK;AXXo) (cKeX, aKX,, 340) to dry (416, 6). o'KXrjlroyat e''KXt] (408, 10) E'TKXtKa 16. 7TreLpco (oarep) to sow. v. v. 7rapror ~c7rep E o'reLpa E-TnrapAlat (334 a) Ecrarpqv 17. oT'rLXco (o(reX) to send, see Paradigm 290. 18. cfrbiXXco (0c aX) to make fall. oraXa [E'* a [E' AKa] e'o-aX/lat * e cr'A\y 19. /alvvo (adv) to show, see Paradigm 291. 20. /Zei'po (4Sep) to corlrupt, destroy. ) ep& E/ci'etpa Ef'apKa, Nq)SapLa E i(caprqv (Eqb' opa poet.) v. 02?aprTo 6. Hm. Pf. Par. Fern. TeaXvt7a (338 D), 2 Ao. 3 S. acd.e. Urm. Pr. h&AE'W, Fu. jqx4&wo, Pr. Par. ~aXE'orw (411), rlnAeaedCv. 8. Hm. Ao. Ecepota.(345 D). 11. Hm. Ao. itr'o7/p, Theoc. Pf. M. peudvYjiat (331). 12. Hm. in Pr. Impf. almost always 3pe'AXw (different from q3E'Axwo to increase, Ao. Opt. hpieXXee, 345 D). 15. Hm. I Ao. irreg. i'EKtoAa made dry. 19. Hm. 2 Ao. Act. iter. pdcve-KE appeared. From older st..Pa he has Impf. pcde (morn) appeared, Fu. Pf. 7recphaerau will appear. For rpadvw, Ao. P. ipadyt!~-,, see 396 D. For intensive 7raju5a[vwr,, 7raipcavdwi, see 472 k. 20. UHm. Fu. 8a-rppro o:(345 D), 2 Pf. is-EpXropc am ruined (in Att. poets trans. and intr.). lid. Fu. M. 8ra-cpapeoltac intr. 166 SPECIAL FORMATION. FOURTH CLASS. [432 21. xalpo (Xap, also XapE, Xatpe, 331) to rejoice. Xatp,}oc [EXalprloa] KEXaiprCa, M. KEXap- EXap pv as act. [Xaprrotall] 1lLat or KExaplat V. Xaproe IV. Ziquid stemns which reject v. 433. A few liquid verbs reject their final v in the perfect and passive systems. They are 1. Xtvco (KXTv) to make incline. KXc)I fiEKXlVa [KgIcKXKa] EKXlY and KEKXi/Cat Kar-EKXV7qv 2. KpMvAo (Kp'V) to judge. KptVX0 fKpiva KeKp!Ka, KEKpLaLL E KpL2qV 3. rXivco (rXOvv) to wash clothes. 7rXUv~vi'rXvva 7rErVXiat (&trXiVlv n. A.) 4. KrETv' (Krev) to kill: also adro-KTrvvvLL, -&O, cl. 5. KrEV)& EKTrEva aTr-eKrova (later (EKra'Sqv Hm.) EKravov poet. eKTrayKa, fK7raKa) a. For 2 Ao. poet. gcrav, see 408, 4. arr-eKrdvat and &ro-KtavivaL Inf. Pf. and 1 Ao. Pass. are late. For these tenses the Attic uses T''Vn~Ka and Qravov from avnnocco (444, 4). 5. relvcJ (rev) to extend. TeV& rTEtva TrETraX rertat fTrteraY NOTE. The stems of these verbs ended originally with a vowel, to which v was afterwards added: KpI, Kpbv; 7rXV, 7rXfv; Kra, Krdv, KTre (334 a); 21. Hm. Ao. M.?X71pd/.ov, 2 Ao. tCEXapl.t4?qY (384 D), Fu. KeXapjacw, -opa=, Pf. Par. KEXapflC6S (386 D). 22. Hm. elAw (ef, FeX) to press, Ao. (g)e~Xoa, Pf. M.,EeXuai, 2 Ao. P. IdAXv, Inf. &xiya t. Pind. has 2 Plup. 3 S. ideAe. In Pr. Impf. Act., Hm. has only exoew (331). Even Attic writers have Pr. Impf. eiAew or exAec6, also ef'AAo:'xAwo is old and poetic. 23. Poet. vafCpw (evap) to slay, 2 Ao. vYapov, Ao. M. 3 S. by4paTo. 24. Poet. aeivw (Zev) to smite, Fu. acvi,, Ao. EcEtva, 2 Ao. (Ind. not used) a2wr, cves, eve1v, aevesv. 25. Hm.,etipotar (uCp) to receive as one's part, 2 Pf. 3 S. re1quope (319 D), Pf. M. 3 S. elY/apTac (319 e) it is fated used even in Att. prose, Par. ecuapp1exos. In later poets, ctuzpylce, ulcJp7qlrat, Iue6lopfrllEvos. 26. Poet. rdcAXc (7rx) to shake, Ao. &rqAxa; Hm. 2 Ao. Par. & -7reraAc (384 D), 2 Ao. M. 3 S. 7rdxTo (408 D, 42). 433 D. 1. HIm. Ao. P.?cXfvar77n (396 D) and Athar7,, Pf. M. 3 P. ICIEXKAaTae'392 D) 2. Hm. Ao. P. gplvanv (so Ed.) and Kptyltv. 4. Hm. Fu. -TEVECo and micavew. 5. From st. Ta, Hm. makes also Pr. ravo (once with uit-form, Pr. M. 3 S. T'dvru'ar), Fu. Tavvo-w, Ao.?-dvioao, Pf. M..redvvrvouat, Ao. P. E'av6oqav. Also Pr. -ria[VCw, Ao. e'-i'va. The form Tr in Km. is perhaps an Imv. of st. ra (T a = aC-e), reach, take thou. 435] FIFTrH CLASS. STEMS WHICHI ASSUME v. 167 ra, -ray, rev. They might therefore be referred to the fifth class. But as the added v has extended beyond the present to the future and aorist systems, they are here included in the fourth class. In imitation of these verbs, the v of other liquid stems is sometimes dropped by late writers before K of the 1 Pf.: re7;piaKa for r-EEp/tayKa from?ep/uaavo to warm. But one verb belongs more properly to this series, viz. 6. KfJpa lvoa (KEpMav, KEpaa) to gain. fepaevc& EKEplava (382) KEKp'IKcLa Y. Vowel-stenms of the fourthl class. 434. 1. Kale) (Kav) to burn; Att. K&o uncontracted. Kayrao EKavoa KEKcavKa EKalv V. Kavcros' Kavro' VrfKlav/lac (EKdapv Hm.) 2. KXatiC (KXav) to weep; Att. KXdao uncontracted..A1 IV. Stemns which assume vv (cVfter ca vowel vvv). See 407. 439. Stems in a. 1. KfpavvvV1t (Kepa, Kpa, 339) to mix. Kepacco EKEpaCo-a KEKpaKa, Kf'Kpa/aL CKptni9v or V. KpaTe;o [LeKEpaatxaL] EKepadOq 2. KpE/paVYVLvt (Kpeta) to' hang trans.: (also Kpelaxdo late.) KpfLc F(-ca'ov 375) pe'iEaa [IcEKp4IaoKat] iKpE/AaOcrqV (342) a. For Mid. icpEuapxa to hang intrans., Fu. KpeaJaouaa, see 404, 8. 3. vrerdPvvt (irera) to expand: (also lreTra late.) reri, (-doco 375) 7reTrad a 7rE'rrdalat (339) c7rEraro-3V/ (342) a. rE7reTaKa late, rrelreTaataL not Att. 4. OcIe8a61?Vj (Or-Kca) to scatter: also L'8rlvq1t rare in prose. rOKEOa (-aC(r 375) ErdE8aio'a IoKe'acyate (342) EZo'KE&ao-rV 440. Stems in E. 1. E,,vevt (E, orig. Fec, Lat. ves-tio) to clothe: simple verb poetic. dlaf~u (-e-co 374)?7pla/Lca (314) rjiKlc-LEOta aluaPLEo-oat (ErfrL'aoacaL Inf.) 439 D. 1. Em. also Pr. KEepdW, Kepaco, Ao. Inf. irn-Kpxi~aa: Pr. Sub. 3 P. KpwcvrTa is accented like the ui-forms in 401 k. For iKpYrtu, see 443 D, 2. 4. Hm. Ao. also without a, etce'aaoaa, edCabr'v; cf. i[tvn'yi 443 D, 8. 5. Hm. yavv/uaL (?ya) to be glad, Fu. 7av'aaouat, late Pf.?yeydvi.alt. Cf. vca[ el. 4, only in Pr. Par..yacoCr. 440 D. 1. Em. Impf. caTa-evVoV (= FE —vvov), cfd. hr-dtvvo* a-, FU. eaoaoW, Ao. ioaoa, Ao. M. 3 S. E'(a)a-ao or 4EaarTo, Pf. M. eJtcal (= Feo —/uaL), i'oaoat, o'a'ar (eral?), Plup. 2, 3 S.'aao,'a*ro or'e'r1To, 3 D.'anVr, 3 P.'lEaTo (= FEcr-aTo), Par. eqi1cros. 172 SPECIAL FORMATION. FIFTH CLASS. L440 2. KopEvvvLu (KOpe) to satiate. KOpeaCo ZEKopecra KeKOCpeo-'laL (342) EKopPE(TYv 3. ar3vevvvu (o-i3e) to extinguish (416, 5). o13earo Ecr3era ef3qKa o0-fo-o iAaL eo-3qv (408, 9)'aof3co-1at (342) Cej3%rV7v 4. aropPE'vvvUL (a-rope) to spread out: also c-rpWvvgpj (or-rpvv~t). aTopCo (-EG-co 374) Eo-T6pe-a [icT-npeoualt] [EUropoEV3-Il, 441. Stems in o. 1. CAjvvvtl (co) to gird. TCco a'',oa [f'WCKa] EG)T0L [ec;c2rlj] 2. P'vvv1A (tco) to strengthen. pocro, e'ppwo-a Eppoltat anm strong E'PPc3rtv (342) 3. aTrp coviVt (o-rpo) to spread out = cTropE'vvILt (and TrodpyvtU). cTrrpcoSao ecarpocr aa ea-rpcolLat ETpCorv 4. XpcrYvvvL (XPeo) to color = Xpco6 cl. 4. XpG0ra-o e'Xpcoa-a KEXPoo-LaL EXP c -2?v 442. Stems ending in a consonant. 1. aiyvVtLL (ay, orig. Fay) to break. iico;e'a~a (312) Eaya (41'7) [eaytatl] Ea2yrv (a) 2. atpvvpya (ap) to woin, chiefly poet.; only Pr. Impf. For 2.0o. 7tp(o;Yq see a'ipo) (432, 2). 3. BEIKVVbtL (SeLK) to ShOW. eL'eco EMetea 8E3ELOxa, &Se.elyXat'eE'X27v 4. e'tpyvv/t (eipy) to shut in: (also d'pyco late.) tpkco Jp, r.pa epyaatPX 2. Hm. Fu.,cope4 (374), Pf. Par. icelcopnc~,s (386 D), Pf. AI. icecJpa, (also Hd.), V. &-icdprTos. Add the following with stems in t: 5. Poet. cti, Vpat (ici) to move intrans., 2 Ao. icor, went, Par. Kice (Trag. Klels rare). For ic[alaoy, see 411. From iK is derived also cve'c, to move trans., inflected regularly. 6. Hm. acvii.at (at) to take away, in comp. a7roacfvvuatL and a&rafvvtxat. 7. Ion. and poet. 8al'vvlt (Sat) tofeast trans., Mid. intr., Opt. 3 S. 8alvtra (401 D 1), 3 P. arv6aT'o: Fu.'aacow, Ao. aaa-aoa. 442 D. 1. Um. Ao. &aca, rare,ja (les. Opt. 2 S. Kcavdcais, = KaaFFatasicara-Fatais,'73 D). Hd. Pf. 6Eyc1a. 3. Hd. has st. eW in ~8o, M ESa, e et 7ai,?i5' xa7. Um. Pf. M. Me6,eyuat greet (for aeaery/Lac), 3 P. 8e,8XaTaat, -aTro (392 D). In the same sense of greeting, he has Pr. Par. &eKtvSpUevos, as also Pr. ecKavcdoaL, and 6e6tao'copja. (- e-4eKc-a6-cogai, cf. 447, 9). 4. Hm. has only forms with smooth breathing, even in the sense of shutting in. As stem, he has epy or eepy instead of eLp-y. For EpXCa-at, (E)epXaTo. see 318 D. For poet. e'pyaaov, Em. (e)Ep-yaaoo,, see 411. 442] STEMS WIIICH ASSUME vv. 173 a. The forms of eYpoyw to shut out are distinguished from these by their smooth breathing. 5. ~E6yvVitL (Cvy, Cvy, 326) to join. vcc$O'eEv a E'ieVYMatL EYy77V, CEVX2r7V r. A. 6. d9ro-KrtwvLV (KTEV, 334 c) to kill, = Krtvw) (433, 4). 7. IliyvvL (uly) to mix: also ldoyo cl. 6, less freq. in Att. tEl Co fita [1AE'j1 Xa]'4lix2qvl and /IeuILy/Ic E/Lty7'V 8. b'XXv.v (for oXvvu, st. oX, oXE, 331) to destroy, lose (417). Xf, ( E' 3'74) oAeXo-a XcXEKa (321) oXov/iat ()XdOj7v oXcoXa -> 9. Ot;VLt (op, obuo, 331) to swear. olpov/uaL C/toora oLL(OKa (321) oqv and (= o0u-e-ooalt) IA coorat and ci6o-Zqv [OkO'6O, -oat]a] ocioo-rral (342) v. ca7r-co4LoToS 10. Oc6pyV/vI (OiopY) to woipe off 0'popl4at GotuopCa tL'dPX7rlv 11. ipVVpUL (OP) poetic, to rouse, AMid. to r ouse one's self, rise..OpcrO cpo-ra, cpopov opcopa intrans. OpoitacL opd!oprv opcopeqat (331) 12. 7r5jyvvpc (7ray, 7rqy, 326) tofx,fasten: (also 7rio-o-co cl. 4, late.) rico f7rra 7r7rrqya (417) e7rayqlv V. 7rKTO' a. Pf M.. rerx7uai late; 1 Ao. P. Erax1azv n. A. pr. 13. 7rrapvvyalt (arrap) to sneeze, 2 Ao. E'7rrapov: (also 7rral[pco l. 4, Ao.'rcrrapa, 2 Ao. P. vrrdapqv, n. A.) 14. "yvvtL (aidy, Iqy 326, coy 334 d) to break. P1c foIPP71a 1'EPPcoya (417),ppayqv a. Pf. MI. EPDp)/yUar Hm., 1 Ao. P. EPP/%XaV n. A. 7. Hm. and Hd. have only j-yco[ in Pr. Impf.: Hm. once lydyouat. — 2 Ao. M. 3 S. /LLKCTO, lm-TO (408 D, 39). 2 Fu. P. uyqaoouai (395 D). 8. Irm. also Pr. oXEcco (formed from 1 Pf.); 2 Ao. M. Par. oubXdevos (28 D). 11. Ao. cpya (345 D), less often &popov (384 D), 2 Pf. opwpa (321 D), Plup. 3 S.'popei and cpwpdec (311 D), Pf. M. Sub. 3 S. bpcpy7qrai, Ao. M. dpTro (oftener than &peTo), OpYo paL, p p, pevos (408 D, 40). For po'eo, see 349 D. Connected with opvv/ut are opvipc to rouse, Ao. &piva, Ao. P. &Cptvrlv; and opou'w to rush, Ao. &povuoa. 12. Hm. 2 Ao. M. 3 S. icaT-e7r'olCT0 (408 D, 41). 16. Hm. &XY6v1a, (aX) to be pained (rare &Xo/Wat, a&iaX([oear); 2 Ao. ircad4U,7V (384 D), Pf. aKcdXv7,at (321 D, 331), 3 P. aK1xoxaTatc (392 D), Plup. 3 P. cKaXefdao (for aKaXraTJo), Inf. &aicXm-cat, Par. &acaX'Juevos, atc71XEIEYvOS (367 D b).-Act. aicaXtSw to pain, Ao. jKaxoV and aicdX7o-a. Pr. Par. intrans. aXECWO, aXIEWJv. 17. Poet. catvftxat (for tca-rvulat) to surpass, Pf. tceKacruat, Par. ite o/rdvos (Pind. CEKCaCu'vos). 174 SPECIAL FORMATION. SIXTIi CLASS. [442 15. Jpa/yvv/Lt (/pay) rare form of Opaor-o- cl. 4, to enclose. dPapoo'cjpana 7rripaypzc aPpdXtt7 [EaPdayqv SIXTH CLASS (Intceptive Class, 330). 444. The stem assumes aK in the present, sometimes with a connecting c. Several verbs which belong here, prefix a redu. plication. Only a few show an inceptive meaning. Stems in a and c. 1. 7YpdCKCo = -?yp-co to grow old. 2 Ao. Inf. yyqpavac (408, 2). ypdolco, -opat i-ypaaoa cyeypaKa 2. pac(roKW (apa) to run, used only in composition. dpoooat fllpa~v (408, 3) aehpaKa 3. OjPoiKo ('3a) to come to puberty:' iaco~ to be at puberty. tiIaciC jca 7),f3Ka 4. v.l/r-Ko (trv, rva, 340) to die; used also as pass. of KTIvo to 7ci i. Bavovyat& iaoov TrE'?rJKa am dead (409, 4) a. Fu. Pf. Teav5gw (TreavoLac late), see 394 a. For Fu. aavojouat, 2 Ao. Ecuavov, the Att. prose always uses &aro~avovuar, a7reaov (never found in Trag.), but in the Pf. TrE'vl~ca, not a7ro-E4VjqKa.; 18. Hm. 3p4y-Pv,xt (opety), = opeyc' cl. 1, to reach, Pf. M. 3 P. popwcpXaTa (321 D, 392 D). 443 D. In the Epic language, several stems, which for the most part show a final a in other forms, assume ra instead of it in the present. This is accompanied in most instances by a change of vowel, and by inflection according to the /ul-form. 1. dpu4'pLL or 8atvdw (Safp, asLa, 331) to overcome, Fu. caud0c (cf. 375), A.o. 4iSdanoa, Pf. eduflKa- (340), Pf. M. 86Euqluat, Fu. Pf. We,4aoouat, Ao. P. Sakpdarlv (342) or 46sr/l, more freq. 2 Ao. 5dopg77v. Pr. also Maydaw. The forms eSajuaod.u&7v, and 46alcXdaor are even found in Att. prose. —The same Perf. Mid.'48pllat belongs also to the Ion. and poet. iAwo (Att. oiKooopcEW) to build, Ao. Eezy/a. 2. cfpvY71L or KLPprdo (Kepa), = cEpCvvJ/VLt to mix (439, 1). 3. iKpzYavjat (Kpequa), = KP-Ej uat to hang (404, 8; cf. 439, 2). Active Kp4Iw779tu very rare. 4. udppyaat (puapa) to fight, Opt. 1 P. joapvoauexa (401 D h). 5. 7repvtLL (Orepa), = irrpaccoCW to sell (444, 7), Fu. wrepa'w (cf. 375), Ao. rewpao-a, Pf. M. Par. 7reorept!e',os. 6. 7rAuXVutL or rtLXVhdC (OreRa), -= -rreXd to bring near, Mid. to come near (428 D, 21).'7.'risrTvlt or 7rirsa',t (retra), = 7re'iaVuvtL to expand (439, 3). 8. aKfC8,vyZL (aKesa), = — ce dvvvju to scatter (439, 4): also without a, sts-,ptpo (K4Ea). 444 D. 2. Ed. 6Wsp4Ka,, 6p7ao/uat, E6pn; (24 D a). 145] VOWEL-STEMS. 175. IXdicrto/aL (IXa) to propitiate. iXacroxoat iXdc-!rTv iXdo-ar/v (342) 6. ltUVjO-KCo (uva) to remind, Mid. to remember, mention. 1wi1co E4ivqo(t a'jcinuaL(319 b, 393 a) v'o-qSf'v (342) a. The Fu. and Ao. Mid. are poetic; the Fuf. and Ao. Pass. take their place. The Pf. M. peA',/.vat is present in meaning, = Lat. memini. Fu. Pf. xuAl5S ouar will bear in mind. 7. L7rrpdaKco (irpa) to sell; wanting in Fu. and Ao. Act. (daro&co-opat) (rse0T'Y7v) 7rgerpaca, r7rfrpad/aa lrpatqv 8. (bacoKo (ba) = qb/it (404, 2) to say. The Pr. Ind. is scarcely used. Hm. has only the Impf. In Attic prose, the Par. is frequent (instead of Osa, not used, 404, 2), but other forms are rare. 9. XaaKWO (xa) to gape. From st. Xav (329 a, Pr. xalvo late), come xavovza&L EXdyvov KEXy7va 10. dpE(rK o (ape) to please. ap;roo I'peo-a [ap'peKa] (qjpEaor-v n. A. pr.) 445. Stems in o. 1. ava-StoCKo/Lat (lto) trans. to re-aninate, intr. to revive. Ao. dveEjicov (408, 13) intrans., avFe3tforMdr17v trans. Cf. Ofto (423, 2). 2. fX;cbKoC (yLoX, tLXo, /Xo 53 D) to go, poet. Pr. Impf. only in comp. tzoXoiA4aL faoXov PE't3XcKa (340, 53 D) 3. [,p$C0KC (3po) to eat. [3pcdo-oyal] [ER3pcoca] /3e'3pwKa, 3l3ppcouat (Ffpc0Zv n. A.) a. The defective parts are supplied by forms of eo-,w cl. 9 (450, 3). 4. V7yvC"'K"o (yvo) to know: also y7tVcoKC less freq. in Att. yvYoo/at E"yVoDv (408, 14) gEyvCoKa, gyvooryat fayvc;o'qv (342) 5. Sprc$~o (Zop, Spo, 340) to leap, chiefly poet.: also ZOpvv/icu cl. 5 Sopoviat Zzopov 6. rTrpCa0cK (rpo) to wound. vpjo'Tco'erpco oa'rETpwoLat Erp&qv 5. Hm. also i;oaruat ('Axauat), Imv.'lhrt (Theoc.'hait), see 404 D, 10; Pf. xA7tcca. 6. Hm. Pf. M. 2 S.'uALv7aL, Me'A (Imv. n uweo Hd.), see 363 D; Sub. 1 P. xe/LV tALEa (Hd. e/uvArveosejAa), Opt. e/EUYzrveY, 3 S.,efe~YE7W0o see 393 D. 7. Poet. sreipvnt (Orepa), see 443 D, 5. 11. Hm. Bdacow (da) = 0atv o to go (435, 1), chiefly in Imv. 3cdiic' 2t haste; qo; once E7rtLaatolxe to cause to go upon. 12. Poet. KLtcKaKWx (Ksi) = Kcax&E cl. 1, to call (420, 5). 445 D. 3. UTm. e6,8poawo. Ep. 2 Ao. E'EpwvY (not in Hm.). Soph. 2 Pf. Par, Be,9p&7Tes (409 D, 16). 4. Hd. 1 Ao. &veYovwaa. Poet. V.?YoW'sd (for'YVWoJdS). 6. Hm. -TpSc. 176 SPErCIAL FORMATION. SIXTH CLASS. [446 446. Sterns in c and v. 1. 7url[TlKcO (frt) to give to drink, Ion. and poet. Cf. nrLvo (435, 4). 7TL, L0C) eVfa7a 2. KvL'oK6) (Kv) to impregnate, Ao.'Kvo-a. a. Mid. i'itotcojsaL to become pregnant; but tictV, cuerl cl. 7, to be pregnant 3. jIelCTKc)Ko (o ezv) to intoxicate. LEJUZVc' E.itLeo-a [pejqEIvo7IaL] CA 3EZ 6fv a. Mid. te5ob-copaL to become intoxicated; but ueawo (only Pr. Impf.) ta be intoxicated. 447. Stems ending in a consonant. 1. atX'Kooat (Aci, aXo, 331) to be taken, used as pass. to apE'C cl. 9.'coorozual eaCXcov or eacoKa or v. aXcOror qXcov (408, 12) 7'7X,.Ka 2. udv-iAX[cGo (arv-aX, av-aXo) to expend: also dvaXo'o. avaXcoo-co ara-'cXcra avaXCoKa, ava),oyIaL aVdXc0j'r arpXcoo-a avrXcoKa, a/ijoXaat drXcarl' a. Rare forms, vd'Acwncra,'7vdoX'Awuc (314). 3. ac3hXlKaco) (aap3X, a1f3Xo, 331) to miscarry: also e'~-aj3X'co. da/X3coaco -')fi3Xoooa 3ffXcoKa,'zi/Xw/at 4. ad/7rIXaLKoKC)O (amTrXaK) to mniss, err, poetic. d/IzrXaKiro'p7/rXaKov nIrXaKlra & 5. sr-avpto'-Koxat (ewr-avp) to enjoy: also E1ravplorow, c'7ravpE'c cl. 7. e7ravpq0o/aL fiir1vpov, idr"vpotvP a. The word is Ion. and poetic; in Att. prose, only 2 Ao. Inf. hravpe'oar. 6. eVptKo (eVlp) tofind. spqrow (331) e7pov E0vpKa, Evp,7ypac EflpEap7y a. For 2 Ao. Imv. epe, see 366. 1 Ao. M. ecpaAzqv late. 7. a-reploKco (arep) -rTepeO cl. 7, to deprive. crepr0co E0repyro?-a EOTrEpKKa,?/L ETepr3J71 a. Pass. oT'ep[otcoiLa and TrepoDva/ to be deprived; but -re'poxaLt cl. 1, ta be in a state of privation. 8. adXIo (for aXeK-rKo, st. aXFK) to ward off; Act. rare in prose. aUxer0LaoL 1t X E7ta1rv a. A Fu. axeouat is also found. 9. dX~cogo (for aXvK-0-Kco, st. aXvK) to avoid, poet.; Pr. Impf. rare. adXvco iXvta (connected with UdXfouaL, st. aXv, 426 D, 7) 446 D. 4. mrn. 7rwadoicow (qav) to show, declare. Akin to this is Hd. ltc @paoticw or -p&iocco to shine, dawn. 447 D. 7. Hm. Ao. Inf. o-TepErai. Eur. 2 Ao. P. Par. 0TepeIs. 8. Hm. Fu. &Xeao'w, Ao. xe'hV7aa, 2 Ao. gxaXKcov (384 D, 339). 9.U Hm. has also a&Avricdaw cl. 4 and aAvcadvw cl. 5. 148] CONSONANT-STEMS. SEVENTII CLASS. 177 10. L&a1oKo (for 8LtaX-TKo-, st. WL3aX) to teach. hiasco Cl88claa ae&SiaXa, -y7pat;eaaXSTq 11. XaoKco (for XaK-c-Kco, St. XaK) to speak, poetic. aK:oopaoaL hXAK?7c'a (331) X;X;7Ka or'XdKov XEXadKa (338) 12. l.yo-o (for lpty-o-Ko, st. ypy) to mix, = /tLyvvLt cl. 5 (442, ]). 13. 7raioXo (for 7ras-o-co, st. 7raS, 7revy? 329, 3314a) to suffer. rtl~oopaL (49) Elre&ov 7re;rovra v. 7raSrqrTo a. For-the two forms of the stem, compare'b 7ra'aos and wrr~2aos suffering SEVENTH CLASS (Epsilon-GClass, 331). 448. The stem assumes E in the present. Here belong 1. aG/olaLa (at8) tofeel shame: also alkoiat poetic. aL5E-Olalt I7dE(rEyOv? aE7L'ELa (342) 8sEcrZv (413) a. 8e~dc71mv, in Att. prose, pardoned; in poetry, felt shame, = }Salyv, 2. /yapaco (yap) to marry (Act. uxorem duco, Mid. nubo). -ya& &'yrpa t'yclKa,a -tlac V. yaplerT1 a. Late forms 7ya/7o'w, E'ycdxrla, esya/xe'n Theoc. 3. yr7iE;o (y2S/) to rejoice, poetic; in prose only 2 Pf. y7qti~rrtC fyiZ a y;iy7ra am glad 4. 8OKEO (8OK) to seem, think.,~d8to gXoba G83oy/Lao (e;od3xqv r. A.) a. 8OKtho'Co, ESdcl'aa, 8eo lttICa, aeadeitqa c, EI8OKhK7Y, are poetic or late. 5. Kvpeco (KVp) to hit utpon, happen, Ion. and poet.: also Kvpoo rare. KVpG-CO,) KUpOC EKvpc-a, EKvpfra 10. Ep. Ao. chlo'araa (331, not in Hm.). The orig. stem was oa, Him. Fu. ~Bw shall find. (378 D), 2 Ao. 68oao, (384 D, also Aaov) taugyht, 2 Ao. M. Inf. Aeodao'gal (for WeSaeoJaaL), Pf. &eSnlca (331) have learned, 2 Pf. Par. 8eoacs, Pf. M. Par. eoal7ne'vos, 2 Ao. P. SLd7z' learned, Fu. P. aa4aouaa (395 D). 11. Hm. A7lKE'w, 2 Pf. Par. Fem. XexaKtva (338 D). 13. Him. 2 Pf. 2 P. 7rhroo-e (409 D, 14), Par. Fem. Wrrr vuZa (cf. 338 D). 14. Hm. airaqpaicw (ap) to deceive, 2 Ao. lfrapov (384 D), rare 1 Ao. 7rd070a (331). 15. Poet. apapitcw (ap) to join, fit, trans., 1 Ao. ipoa (345 D), usu. 2 Ao. 6papov (384 D) twice intrans., 2 Pf. pafpa am joined, fitted (found even in Xen.), ion. &pqlpa, Hm. Par. Fem. &papvza (338 D), Ao. P. 3 P. pacev (395 D), 2 Ao. M. Par. dp/4evos (408 D, 34). 16. Hm. Yb'Oow (=F-K-oKW) and Ei'-Kw (23 D a) to make like, consider like, cf. 2 Pf. Zo IKa (409, 7). 17. Hm. L-td5GcoUatL (= TL-TvK —~rco/uat) to prepare (cf. rehXko el. 2, 425, 15), to aim (cf. rvyXdvoW cl. 5, 437, 8). 448 D. 2. 2 m. Fm. F Mid. 3 Sing. yapeta-'EraT will cause (a woman) to marry, doubtful. 178 SPECIAL FORMATION, SEVENTH CLASS. [448 6. aprvp;e (paprvp) to bear witness, inflected reg., but *iapTrpofiac cl. 4, to call witnesses, Ao. ejIapTvpa/Lv. 7 $vpico (4vp) to shave, Ao. t~Upoaa, Mid. $vpEo4at, but also t (UpOpLaL cl. 4, Ao. e'vpalqv, Pf. p66pqlzal. 8. 7rarEolpaL (0rar, orig. 7ra) to eat, Ion. and poet. 7re ooyao a 7ra-a/r)v 7rewraotjLaL V. a-7rao-ros 9. 7r EKTE; (TrEK, rEKrT 327) to comb, shear. (Hm. rTeIK0 for 7EKco.) (7r(of n, A. E`7TEa n. A.). eEX.tv 10.'lurrow ('to, lt7r) to throw, = pl-rro (427, 14), only Pr. Impf. 11. d co (3o) topush; Impf. f3&ovv (312). wcr0, w2ro,) ewoaa [E'uKa] EGworiat o a. 5l4o'w is not found in Att. prose. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Attic. EIGHTH CLASS (Reduplicating Class, 332). 449. The stem assumes a reduplication in the present. For FL-verbs of this class, see 403. There remain 12. Poet. 8ov7r4e to sound heavily, Ao. 46odrno'a (even in Xen.),?yoU. rrrloa (cf. epfyouros loud-thundering), 2 Pf. e8'ovnra. 1.3. Poet. KieXaow to roar, Fu. iceXa84how, Hm. Pr. Par. tCEXcioWv. 14. Ion. and poet. cerre'W to trick, Fu. KEYTi0c, etc., reg.; but Hm. Ao. Inf. Kevo'a (=-Ke'T-aLo), V. KEO'dS ( =KeT-TTOS). 15. Poet. KCrnr4E to crash, clatter, rare in prose, 2 Ao. ecrKv7rov, also in Trag. I Ao. ctdlrflaa. 16. Poet. rye'w to shudder, Fu. fqly1ow, Ao. 3PPLMyfoa, 2 Pf. EPS/'ya used as a present. Different is Pijydw to be cold (371 d). 17. Ion. and poet. ouyTcov to dread, hate, Fu. aoTryaouar, Ao. e~rv'yraa, etc., reg. Hm. has 1 Ao. EfTvTa made dreadful, 2 Ao. E'-rv'yov dreaded. 18. Pr. IzE'W to love, inflected reg. as a verb of el. 1, see Paradigm 287; but Hm. Ao. M. 4lAXduv (st. l0A). 19. Hm. (XpaLuErw to help, ward off, Pr. Impf. not used) Fu. Xpalt~ewco, Ao. JXpato-'.tloa, 2'Ao. EXpai'ozuoY. Add the following, which annex a in the present (331): 20. Pr. BpvXdopaa to roar, Ao.,8BpvXno'aupv. In Hm., only 2 Pf. Bfp6UXa ased as a present. 21. Poet.?yocow to bewail, Fu.?yo7aovoat, Hm. 2 Ao. Eyoov. 22. Hm. 87pidoluar to quarrel (Fu. 8rVpiooua Theoc.), Ao. StnplodtU7v, Ao. P. Ernprtvav (396 D). Pind. plopfolat, 8Lpdow. 23. Poet. XXIdC, -oj1at, to lick, Fu. lxu-ooaxt, 2 Perf. Par. irregular AEXeXYU'TES Hes. 24. Hm.,u7AndoCLat (daxc, I7nzc, 326) to bleat, 2 Ao. Par. puaicv, 2 Pf. Par.up1Kcs, Fern. eyvaUcuta (338 D), Plup. iueg cov (351 D). 25. ]Tm. ulrLdw, -opuat, to planz, Fu. tqT'ofo/uaL, Ao. TUla'd4nCsv. Pind. 0zoD'[otzal. 26. Pr. Pr. vxdoatL (fuyc) to low (used in Att. prose). Poet. Ao. cvvc7?adU1m. mrn. 2 Ao.,icov, 2 Pf. tdbAwja used as a present. 450] EIGHTH CLASS. NINTH CLASS. 179 1. ylyvolaL (yev) to become: also ~yivotat less freq. in Att. yEVqrot/xatL'yevoiTlv y-yova (409, 3) have become, have been ycyerlvyat (iyevi5atv 1.) 2. to-Xco (-eFX) to hold, another form of fXOo (424, 11). 3.,tvwco (yev) to remain, poetic form of ezco (422, 13). 4. rL[rrTCo (irer, rpro, 339, 331) tofall: cf. 7rrvr-vo cl. 5 (438, 4) poet. reo-oaaL (377) E7rETrov 7rE7rTCOKa a. fire~oy is for orig. and Dor. -reTor (62 a). 5. TL'KrT (for TLrK), st. rEK) to bring forth, beget. rYotaL ETEKOYV TEroKa (334 a) t'co less fr.'reta rare (TTrey 7a, n. A.) (irTxY n: A.) a. Mid. TrLKTOac rare and poetic. 6. Ttrpaco (rpa) to bore: also Trerpalvo (329 a, 328 d). TrprJco (335 a) c'rp~7-a rErp?7pac V.'rprTO rerpav& rETEprVa (later -ava) [freTpCdprvv] For reduplicating verbs of the sixth (inceptive), class, see 444-6. INTHII CLASS (Mixed Class, 333). 450. Different parts of the verb may be derived from stems essentially different: compare Eng. go, went. Here belong 1. altpgo to ta7ce, Mid. to choose; st. alpe, iX (312). alpqo'Co EAXOv (AXC etc.)'pKa,,ap7ylaL ZIpE7V a. Fu. eAhC n. A. Ao. dEhct,v late. 2. pxoIat to go, come; st. epX, EXv3. e5vhoroal TXZov (339) sXiXOBa (321) a. For 2 Ao. Imv. WxA, see 366. For?Xesaouai (326), the Attic prose generally has eJ/u (405, 1 a). 3.'ocloa to eat; st. cat, 4e, I ay. OoUL, (3'8) oadyov 8/i8oKa (331) (qaF'o-Zv n. A.). 8q88eor-Lat (331, 342) v. SeaUTos, r7eos a. f46rot comes from eow (328), and that from fa,, (411 D): all these forms of the -Pr. are found in Hm. 449 D. 1. 2 Ao. 3 Sing.'yevTo Dor. (and Rles.), different from ye'rTo seized (408 D, 35). From st. yev comes also poet. 7yevoelat cl. 4, to be born, Ao. i'yel-,vdt]v trans. begot, bore (ol yedviLEvor the parents, also in prose). 2. Poet. also oaXdvo (329 b), ZlXavdco (331). 4. Hm. 2 Pf. Par. vreIrrTeTas, Soph. 7renrT&6s, -,ros (409 D, 17). 7. Hm. laco (av, ave 331, ae 39) to sleep, Ao. ecaa (i, but by augm. a), once contr. &acauev. 450 D. 1. Hld. Pf. apatpnica (321 D). 2. Poet. 2 Ao. {Xaiov with v (but only in Ind., 1, 2, 3 S. and 3 P.), Dor. (not Pind.),4Zov,, jhA~ov. Hm. 2 Pf. e.x1Aovua, 1 P. cs*X.Xovayev (409 D, 13). 8. Hm. Pr. Inf. etaEvat (406 D, 3), 2 Pf. Par. 48c/s, Pf. M. louai. 180- SPECIAL FORMATION. NINTH CLASS. [450 4. odpcd to see, Impf. eicpov (312); st. Opa, l3~ or. 0+iaoL Eoft8 (iLt'a etc. ecopdKa, Jcospa-aL pj rlqv, v. oparod, Imv. IBe 366) o7rcorra (321), olLcatL on7ros, TEoV a. The Comic poets have Pf.;patca: 6l7rwlra is chiefly Ion. and poet.: f&pdrg'v is late. Ao. M. coadyv, is rare; ESu'5Jv, (for eiaov) is generally poetic (in Att. prose only in comp.), Imv. 11oiV, but as exclamation 1io' lol Poetic is also Pr. Mid. E13oIuam to appear, appear like, Ao. ELg?a/, v. 5. rpeXco to run; st. TpeX, 8peiz (334 a). 3pajtokl at E'pdaov Elapa/I?]Ka (331) v. SperKTEov (66 c) a. rpe'{ojuai, *epeta (66 c), and 6e'popa are found in poetry; 86epaL'jLAa. occurs in composition. 6. Fs'pco to bear; st. frp, ot, eveK. OLOWc' eTyKov(384) EvYvoxa (321, 334 a) tJex^v OLO/Aat (as jVEYKca (381) clEVql/(yL EVE)Xzot-O/lacl mid. and pass.) v7y6yKa/u77 v V. oLcrdos,'os oLT3o'roltaL 7. NvCoaLat to buy, Impf. sovoiv v; st. cove, 7rpta. covq-ofiat c7rpLdaAv (408, 8);cvyaL eovrrl a. Ewcovc7aJLo v is late. The syllabic augment is rarely omitted in Att. Ecv7sjuai may have,?wcrva77Y always has, a passive meaning (415). 8. ELIrOV I said; st. Erl, Ep, pE (340). Fc0 C(t7rov E'pl)Ka (319 e) cppJv, v. pqros EL7ra ELpq77at (ePPe i3V n. A.) (Imv. elre 366) etp,o/cat P,3ro-,at a. The Pr. Impf. are supplied by XA7coW, qpv1A, and (especially in comp.) by ayopeiw to discourse, as &7rayopevw to forbid, Ao. &vre7ro,. The form elro, comes from e-e7r-or, orig. FE-Fear-ov, a reduplicated 2 Ao. like t7rarLov (384 D): cf. E7ros, orig. Fe7ros, word. The stem of ep&c was orig. FEp (cf. Lat. verbum); hence Erp1KLa for Fe-Fpa7-ica, ippWa for EFp?7a1Tv, p27Tds for FplT0oS. 4. Hm. Fu. garidto!qat shall choose, but 74ro4oluai shall look on. Aeol. Pr. Upp4L Theoc. For goiawoua (oar), see 429 D, 4. 5. Dor. Tpacxo. 6. Hm. Pr. Imv. epep-e (406 D, 4), Ao. fjzeZca (rarely iElCKOV), M.,VEICdtuve; Ao. Imv. ohoe (349 D), Inf. ohideaeY(a,), V. pepr'ds. Hd. has Ao. %etlKa, Pf. M. &llVerLlYuat, Ao. P. jveliXbav. 8. Hm. Pr. Epwc rare, Fu. ~pe'w, Ao. ei7rov and in Ind. (with augm.)'e7arov = E-FEFe7roY). From st. e7r, 7r (63), comes E'-E7rcw or Evyy'7rc 2 Ao. E-0-a7ro (339), Imv. &L-oare or e'Lra7es (2 P. oiare-re for ev-aoa-re), Fu. Eidio (=er —o7ar-o]W) or i&r-otraow (331). lId. makes Ao. usu. eira, Ao. P. dEp74rv and e'p ialv as well asa fplPav. 451] INDEX OF VERBS. 181 ALPHABETICAL LIST of Verbs described in the foregoing Sections. 451. In the following alphabetical list, the verbs before described are not 3only referred to by the present; but one or more forms are generally added, to exhibit the stem and its changes, or to show the most important peculiarities of formation. In using this index, as well as in looking out verbs in the lexicon, the student should bear in mind especially the following points: I. At the beginning of verb-forms, a. e before a consonant (sometimes even before vowels) may be the aug. nent or reduplication (308, 312, 319, 322). b. EL may arise by augment or reduplication from e (312, 322). c. V may arise by augment or reduplication from a. or e (309). d. ow may arise by augment or reduplication from o (309). e. Ei in.a few words takes the place of Ae, le, pe, as redupl. (319 e). f. A consonant with e may be the reduplication, when followed by the same consonant, or when a smooth mute with e is followed by the cognate rough mute (319). g. A vowel and consonant may be the Attic reduplication, if the same vowel and consonant follow; but the initial stem-vowel is usually lengthened after it (321). h. When prepositions are prefixed, there is danger of mistaking an initial stem-vowel for the final vowel of the prep. Thus iKaaveow = JKaT-avcw not Ica-rawc, IroXewas- =&r-oXe'as not areo-Aesar, sraiovaa may be either i7r-soi0ra (Pr. aq'-opaw) or 47ri-6ovxa (Pr. 7rL-Sgo6uwL). II. In the middle of verb-forms, i. a or o may arise from e in the stem and present (334). So oc may arise from %c, and co rarely from 7. j. qj may arise from a final a or e of the stem, and co from a final o (335). In the first aorist system of liquid verbs, XV may arise from a and Ei from e (337). In the second perfect system, X may arise from a (338). k. The relations of the consonants are shown in the following table, where any termination of the other tenses may correspond to any form of the present given on the same line: Fut. 1 Aor. 2 Pf. Perfect Middle. 1 Ao. P. Present. -e'.6..a -haa - yat, -ai, -",at, -,ov -' -'rw, -,W,, -qPo, -7rT-cw -'a -Xa -T/uat, -4ac, - r'ai, -X4ov -XeJv -IWo, -3yw, -ow, -a, -C W, -6Co W -oW' -0eW, -eo -OW -1ba -0/al, -oat, -0oal, -Oaq-fo -a' o, I,' -w, eew, -o, -Wd, -w AM-co (daoa, o'a, &acraaav) 420 D, 10. a8o'& eLE, &aSccvs, 318 D. 9ya-uatL (rydoa&rv, hiyaifadu-qv) 419, 1; ae (iaco, &aeoa) 449 D, 7. &ya-ocaL, c&yaloeLaL, D. &epw (aep, 3aepe'rovT'at, ewp'-o) 432 D, 2, &Ayepco (ayep, ayy7eptca) 432, 1; Ov-{jetpe, ouvaetpe-rat, ib. ilyepEo0Yat, &aypo'evos, D. &e-w, = avao, adeavo, 436, 3. ly-vvUU (EaSa, e'aya) 442, 1. IJyL, (ae) 404 D, a. ryp (a&ydpc, a&yp4dEvos) 432 D, 1. ai-eo/,ual (.o3eronv), ai'-ouaL, 448, 1. iy-oW (?ya-yov, -4Xa, &y?7oXa) 424, 1; alhe-w (.iveor,,?Sv'rVac) 420, 4; &'ryiV, -VdE, &6ETe, D. avlioltat, aYve7it, D.. jo (&'Sdvrw,'aiov, evasov) 437, 1. a'l-vuua, a&r(o)aatvvlat, 440 D, 6. 182 INDEX OF VERBS. [451 CalpE-O (ETNov, XevXp, ajperl) 450, 1; &p-ap-lio-cco (ipra, fpapov, &plpa, apaCpp7Ka D. tpppevos) 447 D, 15. acpw, (%pa, $jpan,,) 432, 2; ap-,oJv D. apet —aco (%pEoa, ipeornv,) 444, 10. aco.a-dvocua (r.jba77v,.? lAal), apMIeEos 318 D. aYYar-ojLat, 436, 1. apEc'-w ({pmweoa) 419, 10. l'-co (9i'ov, e7r-O'ac) 309. ap/dSTTC (pyiooaa), a&pudw, 430, 1. aK-aX from aX, 442 D, 16. 321 D. a&pe-oual (Ipyiaiy'v) 413. aKcE-oplal (K/Erod71pv) 419, 8. &p-vuuaL 442, 2. WzOUC-w (&K4Koa, KoVorav) 423, 1; &pd-w (1poo'a, Ipodnv) 419, 16. &aKOuvdO.LaL Hm. &p7r'dAo (&p7ra5, apnra?) 431, 1. icpod-oyat ('1cpoaac7n~v) 335 a. a&p6- ({pioia) 419, 18; apvrw ib. ah (eDAw, iEhXv) 432 D, 22. px'-wo ({pXa, 2pyuaL) 424, 2. hda-olai (&AtdhxtA7l) 321 D. 367 D. 413. raa 408 D, 18. 420 D, 10. 449 D, 7. &a -dw, -ahlw, -awKw, 436 D, 12. giauo'vos (A&, Avcvw) 408 D, 44. aAeipw (cTh.cAmpa) 425, 5. ac4-dvcw, avi-wr (77vjKa) 436, 3. axc'ao (i7xeaprv, &ieli&ooIat) 447, 8; avp (E1r-avp-iococuat, -eow) 447, 5. A.aAicov D.. avupa (&ar-avpcd-w, &' ropas) 408 D, 19. Ae'o/AaL or &axteo/aL (aXv,?AXe[v]d4qv) &cpdow.6 (fOaca) 430 D, 8. 426 D, 7; &AxeeLvo' ib. &c~p'o-ow (acpvy, avpu) 431 D, 9. aXE'-W (jXEo'a, alAXeo'LuaL) 419, 9. IXa-ouatL (Xaeo-a'^l) 422, 1. x.a-ojuat (&Axaojpat) 422 D, 19. 6X-,vvbat (iKcaXXA7v, &KIcdXrlIpa, a&ictXc 4X-rIoouao (edxwv, xwYoV) 447, 1. puaL), &KcaXlw, aXe'wv, &XeoWv,, &zXr-avco (-Apevos, AL;Tov) 436 D, 13. 442 D, 16. 1C: (&ae'wc, &Xakicov) 447 D, 8. &-w (ao'a, &/.evat, asraL) 408 D, 18. bAd'oow (axx?.7y', AxMaXa) 294. oWpro for 1op'ro (aEfpw) 432 D, 2. aA-AXouat 432, 3; *aXTo 408 D, 33. a&XvcdcSw (a&aXa'T-rt ug0) 321 D. Balvw (/3a, grn@v,'13n71oa) 435, 1; aA60,cco, (jxvta) 447, 9; 6d'aoKW, ifL3Cs, fi3W)', D. aXvaoc-d4cw, -avc, D. /3ax-Aco (13aXov, 1E43AXwta) 432, 4; &XA-dvc, (~i2pov) 436 D, 14. BeoxS aro, C.rxa' ro, X6e.r o, oD. a,uapr-&d, o (,uapTov, 7fl/dpT7cKa) 3d7rrw (E'8&plnv) 427, 2. 436, 2; {jupo'rov D. Bd-oco = -3"ahcw, 444 D, 11. &/jAX-toicw (jjfioAwaa) 447, 3. 3aordafrco (iaao,,ra,,Bacmay) 431, 2. a,/mXX-o/paL (ulhXiA/a7v) 413. Befogat, 6fioLuat (,3tJw) 423 D, 2. a&lzr'o'Xeolat (al qecw, / o7rLaXov) 438, 5. Bi3ai'w (fitSdaow, /B31) 375. rXa7rAaic-Lto'K (-oaw, {ju7rxaKov) 447, 4. fi,8lds (13a) 403 D, 10;,B3L3iv 435 D, 1. a/,v-w (vuvva), &avvdao, 411 D. fi3Lp&c6oKo 445, 3; 3efip&Sw, pfpwov, D. av-aAX-[ow, &,-aXd-w, 447, 2. Blt-w (E13o(v) 423, 2; BEiolAatL,,3E'o1al, 1 &vadvco ('a&ov, i&o'w) 437, 1; dva-/3icaocouat (,Slo, dvflwcov) 445, 1. Evsavov, ovy, Evaoov,, eaa, D. 3x.a (,daX-Xwc, 1i3X77ltca) 432, 4. av-EX-o,,ua, ('vel4cX j7v) 314. BAXi-rw (EAxdar'v,, f43eAaca) 427, 3; a&iJvoe 321 D. BAXdbeTraL D. av-oLy-w (aY avef'ya, avepXa) G3aao-c-vw (3AXCairovT, [ lca/1Xda'olca) 424, 16; av-oy-vvpt ib. 436, 4; SXaao'r'w ib. &a-op4-wo (vcppawaa, -wpal) 314. B3X'r-c (,63e',3xcpa) 424, 3. avv-w (3Svvza, {vvolaL) 419,17; ATTr'rw (3XLoaa) 430, 2. avv&rc, &VTw, ib.; tivW D. iXcAo~Kw (eUoXov, E'f13Awca) 445, 2. &vwoy-a (&vcwX~a', vwyov) 409 D, 11. 3oAX (IdG.X-Aw, BeBoXqa'ro) 432 D, 4. &4r-aop-icw (frac-ov, -4oa) 447 D, 14. BJ6olcwa (ro, $oanc, $iooaidrw) 422, 2. a&ro-Xp?7 404, 3; a7roXpi D. fovtX-oiatL (i13ovXa,4~, or ijB.) 422, 8; &rz'rw (a&p) 427, 1; &p0rn D. d3xo'eal, -Pf/3ovAa, ID. ap (aYpw) 432, 2. 3pdoaw (E[f3paoa) 430, 3. ipd-oac, (apuEval) 404 D, 9. fipeX-w (EppdXr,) 424, 4. 451] INDEX OF VERBS. 183.61paXe, -pdJELe, -f3poXEIS, 424D, 4. iIbacKo (atoaX) 447, 10; aq., 73'BaoY, 3Bpia-o (Bi3'I3pira) 424, 5. Ea&id7la, E'6rdl,, D. j1po (Bflpc-Sowo) 445, 3. 8r8yut -= 68-wo, 403, 3. IBpvx-do/tat (Ile'JapDxa) 448 D, 20. &l-apd —cow (eapav) 444, 2. fiu-p'o, (3'pvaa, [3eIvaOlta,) 438, 1. 5at&ur, (8o, EaoWKa, a84ioaCL) 403, 4. 8ie (,ieorav,, tolpwat) 404 D b. ra (yyvouat, yeyac6s) 409,. 3. t iir1al (&le) 404 D c.?ya/x-ew (,Ey7/ua) 447, 2. a,,d-, (On1*f, aloa'ow) 371 C. 7yd-YvpIaL, yacwv, 439 D, 5. aIcsK-W, LIcadaWo, 411 D. y-oi-ywv-a, yEywv-Lo. Io,, 424 D, 30. 8o (5il,,u) 403, 4. 7yEvo/aL (yev,?yevtylpv) 449 D, 1. oicK-E'o (~lota) 448, 4.?yeA.-w (yAxioaaoa, &ycXdo'arv) 419, 2. aov'r-oE' (ylou6rlora) 448 D, 12.?yev (ycyvoAal, aye lxyv) 449, 1. apa (csapdaowo, eipay) 444, 2. Z7y-Tro 408 D, 35; 9-?yev-To 449 D, 1. lpaK (a'pic-opal, [spascov) 424 D, 31.?yi-e'ow (?ylYaa) 448, 3. pad-w (ieapauaw, elporl, ) 421, 1. 7Ypd-owKw, ypd-co, 444, 1. apqe ('rpEXco, fppaxovy, 8apojua) 450, b.,yt(y),vo1ai (eygjv4-uqv,?ye'yova, yEyerl- Bva-Aar& (Uovvirnv', -dra7r,) 404, 5. gat) 449, 1;?yE[voLacL D. 86-w (eaiv, i'8 n'v), aivw, 423, 3. yl(7)yvcKcc (e'y-vwv, Eyvwo-cai) 445, 4. yvdpr-rwc 427, 4.'E (i'7bcc) 403, 1; ('Yvvut) 440, 1. yvo (?yyvc&oKacc) 445, 4. Ed-w (EWov, EaciKa) 312. qyo:daw (-y/oov) 448 D, 21. eyeipw (e7p9Yopa, eY4iyep/Aal, iYP4'Yv) ~ypcdp-wo ( Eypcdpv) 424, 6. 432, 5; eypw, -octat, ib. ywv (,ye'ywca) 424 D, 30. E4, a-o, ~ e-e-o (oafw) 450, 3. E'OuLal (aB) 431, 6. ha (&adw) 434 D, 3; (c6ado.a, ) 434 D, 4; fE.A-w (XnEcraa), fXw, 422, 9 (8'ai-v, ~6ow) 447 D, 10.',iow (e.,roaa, eiaca) 296. 312. Cat-vu;pc ($icaMa) 440 D, 7. E13ov (tc, apdw) 450, 4. Salocuac (dao'cn7vy, 6auo'a-Ta), dl&6S (is, o78a, 5ev,) 409, 6. Ba'reouat, 434 D, 4. eKccdW, (eicaaa,.caaa) 310. acaw (8anca, Siarlra,) 434 D, 3. eYc-w (Eda), elca1w,, 411 D. d3ac-vY (eaLco'Y, Bihocual) 435, 7. ClIKCSs (c, eoKcaC) 409, 7. UA-vYt/, -vdW (4d/Crn,'Bacd'c&0aYV, EfAw (xAbaa, 4EfECAaC, Edxrnv, MALE), eLA44 4ap1aV,), 8ap.L4do, 443 D, 1. eiXEw, efAXw, iAXw, 432 D, 22. 5apa-cvco ('Eaprov, eiadpaoica) 436, 4; ef/tat, eYaTro (f'YvvcU,) 440 D, 1. elipaaov D. EtLb (es, &y$, V,) 406, 1. 8awreoLuat (iacrdaoT4at) 434 D, 4. idup (,,?elv) 405, 1; r'e, j C,,'oav,;E-a.TO 381 D. (~)eco'dpy, ID. aEf-&l-a (8elaow), Mewlca, 409 D, 5. 7vUvoy (;evvv1L) 440 D, 1. a6,ic-,,,U (a&,E'xa) 442, 3; aEc-, aeIay- er. — o, (fpiX, dp7icca, &ppfv) 450, 8; Lat, aLeIKavdo/uat, aeitTo'KoojuaL, D. EpCo, iv(v)4-7rw, I'rroyv, oyvSw,, D.,t/I.-o ([Eaica, 5Emifa7uaz) 443 D, 1. e'lp'y-Yvuu ("pCaCs), e'py-w, 442, 4; idplc-ocac (EipaKov, 5a8opica) 424 D, 31. Ep7, Eep7, pxo, Fp'ao, D. 8Ep-w (Ecdprnv), adpw, aelpw, 424, 7. EYp-oOuac (= fpoual) 424 D, 9. eaX-Opal (aepy~urm, 86eKTo) 408 D, 36. Epv, 405 D b. 420 D, 12. a-wco (,awroa, aeEicKa) 420, 1. eYpo (e'pEw) 450 D, 8. d-wo, (Eci, f8i~oe) 422, 4; aet-o Ca, D. eYpw (zdpsa, eEpluat) 312 D. anlpl-docua, (Ea,7ptlva, v) 448 D, 22. efTra (;o''at, e'ras, Yow) 431 D, 6. 861, aElE 801 (8&aoL0a, BZELa, Ei'Ea-a) Et'o'sc, YoKsc, 447 D, 16. 409, 5; EidLa, aeaw, a[E, D. i''w.,-a (7) 322; ego,-a D. aalTd-co (eaLp-T71Kca) 314. Ex (apEco, erlov) 450, 1. BaaKtovE-w (aeoal7dv-rca) 314. EXauvcw (e4Xx.aica), eMcl-w, 435, 2. G6a-A'y-opaL (&aeXtcXrYv) 413. eXeyx-w (EM.kXey7al) 321 - 184 INDEX OF VERBS. [451 eAx for EvXa (epxo-la', JXaov) 450, 2. eoiLdc-W (EroTinoa, -Ka) 312. ioa'oco, (e'tkCia) 312. ev6-w (e68cro,) 422, 7. Ec-wco (elXcvioca, ELAlcvoLat) 419, 19; evXa$-E'-ouat (ebXa/341av) 413. EXiAEc D. Eep-rlKow (eupoY, Ev'plca) 447, 6. egXr-o (eoA7ra, EoSX7retv) 424 D, 32. EvpfpaPc,, (E~bppvxJ) 414. EhAvJ, EXEVar (epXO.tat) 450, 2. awJ.7-ea-c'oual (-r7xU6vyv, -hX ^ 7-kal) e'-wo ({Ieoa) 419, 11. 436, 6; eXatw, -opat, ib. evaipco (i',apor, OpaT-o) 432 D, 23. ix-o (eCxoz,, fow, o xov, -x,,oc,) 424, 11 eavY'TL-o.al. (1qYvaVrtc6a&7v) 413. gxwica,- 7r-6Xacro, eo'XEaov,, D. eveic (pe'pW, eevyca, eyico,, ivoX, - 4i-w (14ozaa) 422, 8. evv,,yEal) 450, 6; /reKca, -ov, D. ecoWev (&-w) 408 D, 18. E7r-evyvoae 321 D. eivp/E-o/paL (&,eegvUpg~ rn) 413. Zd- (!, gE, No'o,), Ion. {'dw, 371 c. eV7r-,rW (hpIvra7rov, E' l47rov) 427 D, 20. (6 ) 442 5 3viOO~c' Yi7-TW) _E-W (~Eo-a, CEo-Ts) 419, 12. EvYoaw ( —=?r —w) 429 D, 3., E-' PeeLa, (EaS) 419, 12 E-vvuL (oppfteoa) 440, 1; vvov, a, ( ) 44 El/all, Eoral, ela'To, D.'H3Gd-oKcW, /3Bd-w, 444, 3. Eoxxe-,o (,oXXvAqaa, -ca) 314. q&-ouai (aOalyv, ka0oojuoal) 413. eocKa (iCceyv, eiccas) 409, 7. 7,Aai ('s) 406, 2; E'laTal, eaa, D. 5op'rdA' (cSp0wafov) 312 b. jL ( ) 404, 1 ev(v)-e'-wo (,v,,o —rov, ivqco) 450 D, 8. 71,u-,-w (,vwuvca) 321 D. 7rrl/hEo/.aL( (ereXhueXalv) 413. &1rIo'a-/uaL (i7rw-r1rTlv) 404, 6. a~dX-Xw (ErlqXa) 432, 6; er-ouaL (eOtro7v, io-r4-v) 424, 8; arXe ae,,,71-eaw,, D. e'r-w, o nrov,, onre0o, D.,aa (3yK{cw, av2rov,) 444, 4. ep (el7rov, Epo) 450, 8; er'pw )D. anr (rEr-7Lra, ra(pcS,) 425 D, 17. Epai-0o (!pd or'G v), Epa-/atc, 419, 3. tda'r-wrO ((/7Qpiv,) 427, 5. EpfyaobUal (EYpyaoual) 312. YE (71-ll) 403,.2. epy (EpYW o, pycW, e'lp'yvpvl) 442, 4. aetlvw (aeC, 4Ev"w) 432 D, 24. Ep6wo (epy, Eopcya, Mcdpyev) 428, 14. ax-&, (aeXico,) - =?EX-, 422, 9. iepeI-o-w (?prpetoac) 392 D. aE'p-o/tal 424, 12; ap0o'oaL, aeped,, D. EpefICCo (pcLKO,, pvptyhal) 425 D, 19. aE'w (vu, ae6c0oo/al) 426, 1. Epebrco (ljpirov,?p pn7ra) 425, 6. ZtyydYo (*eSyov) 437, 2. eo)EEToW (ljpeoa) 430, 4. Aad-w (EiAhdoa, 4gXdo',rv) 419, 4. pevyo/las (5pivyov), epvyydow,, 425, 12. aAtj3-w (TrSEAxlpa,?Atr~1,v) 424, 13 EpEvaow, Epva-afvoluat, 425 D, 20. rohKicw (E~'avo,, revic,1a) 444, 4. epLS-aiv'w, (-~oao'aal), -havb,,, 436 D, 15. aop (apcaocw, 0o'pvvtat)) 445, 5. i'p-ouaL (Eplao'o/aL, ipp4'yv) 424, 9;, apdcow (Eapa\a, Te'rp7Xa) 428, 8. erpoat, E'pe'-w, -0o/aL, -eyow, ID. rpa'-w (T7epav[a]/,aL) 421, 18. 7p'r-w, -vwo (elp7roz,, g'dplrvoa) 312. r.pe'c ('rpEX-W, Eapeta) 450, 5. SPP-Wo (~PPo-aa) 422, 6. ~pe7r ('rpEp-W, EpeJ/a) 424, 26. &aro'-ep-oa 345 D. apv7r-oT (Trpvo) 427, 6. epvic-co (ipvcKacov) 424, 10; ropcccaKo (4&opov),,rpvuvuat, 445, 5. epvcdvw, -avdow, D. a-v-w, av-veow (= 4&-w) 435 D, 10. pvo/hat (epv, elpv), Apvo1uai, 405 D b. v-Vr (r5p-w, TE'SV/-uaL) 424, 28. ep6-co (epipvya, eipvi/aL) 420 D, 12. av-co (eaiona, TrEca, erT5t) 420, 2. epX-o/Uai (0Xaov, EAhXvaa, CXEfV'o0uaL) 450, 2; Avaov, Jilvov, D,.'I (ei, ) 405, 1. ES (edp[u, 4EJ') 406, 1. - ic-opal (iao-dyv,, Idayv) 415. eirc'w (e6oluaa, Ecpayov, J{oKca, ia'ow (&ecra, 4oiatuev) 449 D, 7. A8{aeo'al), &2rw, oeo, 450, 3. iMX-w, IaX-E'w, 424 D, 33.'o'-o'a, gi —Tra ('vvvu/L) 440 D, 1. Lr (6pdw, aov),) 450, 4; a,,'aoaL (YO' ) 431 D, 6.. (o6oa, eals, faELV) 409, 6. 4511 INDEX OF VERBS. 185 iap5-W (W3pVrnV,'pv6rv) 396 D. KeXd-w (IeXcaoa, &6cXdoa' v) 419, 5. Ywo (ta, ZfS), igdrW, 431, 6. KXe (IcaXewC, KICExCCa, KiKXo-Kicw) 420, 5. Y?7/lu (e, Ka, eika) 403, 1. cAEL-oc (KEKXeL[o] ja, ) 421, 15; tic (eolca) 409, 7; (-to-cctKo) 447 D, 16.,xot-co, Eitaxa, D. imc-rolat, iIc-d'vw, 438, 2;'ZY-aw D. CXE1Cc, cxeoCuat (KtXv), 426 D, 8. cAa-,cat (q'Aorjt,'(.aut) 404 D, 10. KAe7r-Tw (Ecxdi7r7v, IcetcXopa) 427, 9. Axa-oVco=at 444, 5; iAX-o/a D. KX.-W (ice'cX7pat, eKeXjnoarv) 421, 16.'AXwo 432 D, 22. 1cXWico (IKAL.C, cEICtLAat)l 433, 1. idoo'co ('fcaaa) 430 D, 9. Iev (eiXvo,, ceXEW, cXEEopaa) 426 D, 8.'r7rTa,uaL = 7reToyat, 424, 19. qcya (cdcu-vY, IrcEKc7Ka) 435, 8.'oaczc 409 D, 6. Kvat-o (tceK4atoaupa) 421, 12. YoCta (iC), EI"cw, 447 D, 16. Kcv —w (Icv/, cKEKcv7ryaL) 421, 2. t'7Go'-, (r-Ta, or'tIca, eoi-TCs) 403, 5. K7r-Trw (KceKoqa) 427, 10. Yxwc (o-eX)=,ew, 449, 2;,copE-vvpt, (KeKoperCoac) 440, 2; ioxdYw, La'xavwdw, D. tceicopr6cs, emEicpluCati, D. icop'o'ow (KEKopvu3rYos) 430 D, 10. Kaa (iceca6-or, -4ow) 428 D, 18. tcoTre-W (?6eKdreoa, KEICoTrlaocSs) 420 D, 11.,caaECoiua, (eKaeaaoCai) 431, 6. cpa (eCpdrzujt, KCe paca) 439, 1. rtdBr5lat 406, 2. icpdOW (Kdcpaya, IcdEcpaxkat) 428, 13.;caa[t~o (rcart&) 431, 6; mKa&eTZa D. KpElca-AaL (mcpejc oocuai) 404, 8. icatvvtual (rcaS, KccEcaouat) 442 D, 17. KCpefLd-vyyvc (eiCpeado'7bJv) 439, 2.'cavw (iEcavov) 432, 7. KpxY&vaLat = KpE/la-yal, 443 D, 3. cafcw, acdo (Kcao'w.) 434, 1; ICpfCw (KcpKee, edcKcptCya) 428 D, 20. KefCa (,CetEa), iceas, D. IcpYVw (KptYC, IcEKPLKuca) 433, 2. taaXd-w (EKidXeoa, Kt6CX7tCa) 420, 5; cpo — W (cKE'OpovuCat, iCpoVSar7rv) 421, 23..rpo-caXtloCatc, ICIKXioKw, D. tp6'Irw (Kcpv or Kpvp) 427, 11.,caAV7rrxr (KaXAv,,) 427, 7. c'-Cd-oua, (Ic4I'ciCuai) 319 b. 393 a.,KCc-.co (E"caCo,,, KICefC1Ka) 435, 8. fCTEfVCO (re7-,EV, EC-rao,,'-KcTa-., CdcrTr-TW (KefCaCutat) 427, 8. a7r-eC'rova), 7ro-CT'vvvl., 433, 4. fCed-,vvrUIt, caivrut, 439 D, 4. c-TiCW (ei)-IcT[-,uevos) 408 D, 26. IE EZ-aCLL (KcEowcA) 405, 2. a&rO-ICTIrVJ'Vu (KICTev) 442, 6. KEtPW (ieCp6, eicdprv,) 432, 8.. IKCTvr-E (e'-CTVu or,) 448 D, 15. KeAxa-e` (KEAXdv) 448 D, 13. Kcv-'tKow (eicvoa), vw,, KVE%, 446, 2 KeNeco (, e&aEXvo-ual) 421, 20. IcvXt-w (CEKCtxso-al) 421, 6;,ceX-Xco (Ice.Cow', eVceXaa) 345 D. KuXttVbA>, iKvxvSW, ib. e'A-onat (iceKcAx4j7v) 424 D, 34. -ve'o (ecvo,) 438 3. cEVrT-EWC (cKE'oat) 448 D, 14. KVcr-row (IeCEuvpa) 427, 12. cepd-yvVUlt (,ctcpatea) 439, 1; Icup-Ew (eicvpoa), itCp-w, 448, 5. cepdct, eepacdw, D. tcepai'o (cepavu,,, KceoEpn7cca) 433, 6. layXavw (xcEaXov, EA77Xac, AE'xo0xa) tKe6r3 425, 13; KIevIbdco, iKcre D. 437, 3; AXco/ua ID. teId-cW (KerKcaco-oUaL) 422 D, 20. Xdfo/LaL = Xca$Advcw, 429 D, 5. cvp6ova'o (ipvUc, mcEKeipvXa) 428, 2.. xac3dzvw (exac3ov, eYXl-pa) 437, 4; KIt7ry/t L = lcead-vvvpi, 443 D, 8. xdu/ouat, XeAXdBKa, D. KLKcIOeC-W (eXE) -= Kacxwo, 444 D, 12. xap7r-w (XeXacAora) 424, 14. Kd-vvtuat (6i'tov, EiKtairov) 440 D, 5. xavrdwo (exaaovy, xAe71aa) 437, 5 Kipvt1It, -yrdw, = Icepd-yVUvI,u 443 D, 2. XSrow, -.X7bdvw, D. mCX-dVW (tilXov, KiX'YooIat) 436, 7. xdotcw (AaK, MOKc, Aame) 447, 11; LtXpp71,l (xpa, E'Xpoa) 403, 9. Ax7K6ea D. cXA (ieX.-ocuat, iKe-Kc-dtU7V) 424 D, 34. Ae.-o. (iAE'yArLV, XEK.Tro) 408 D, 37. icxdAc (itecxayya) 428, 12; Xe'y-wo (efxoXa, eAevyuai) 424, 15. EKcXayov, Kceick'7ycs, D. Xebrco (Aix7trov,, XEXo7ra) 292; tAaco, iKAadc (tcavoovual) 434, 2. Aturdvyw 425, 7. 186 INDEX OF VERBS. [451 evo-w (EXe5Evo-mv) 421, 21. E-Co ('EoCa, erJs) 419, 13..EX (E.EICTro, E`eEa) 408 D, 38. uVp-ew, t6p-oLai, 448, 7. kaxco = Xavavco, 425, 1. ~t-w (e'vUoat) 421, 10. Xlo'GoOtal, X-r-o/Lal, 430 D, 11. AXlX-dwc (.eXELXd&res) 448 D, 23. Ovs (wudvrc/L,, 0oc6avo1-aL) 321 D. xov-wo (exov, AoOEac, AXE) 371 e.'ow (oa, oRE, bO`aa) 431, 8. Av-c, 269; Ah6pmv 408 D, 29. o, (ce'po, oYaw) 450, 6. oey-w (`i'ta), OyvvyUo L, 424 D, 16., o78~ IO'oa ( ~aai E s,?3eE) 409, 6. MavooptaL (EJdAv/7',,.eojrla) 432, 11.) 409, G., ol-c, (oa 8 aroc), oilSw, 436, 8.,paiotxat (~yova a,uev -de~'!1e ESs), talflo (Lal, 434 ID, 5 ( ibS). OVOXOAL)W (,o'oxotEL) 312 D. 7a,~&,, 44 D, 5; AC,,EVoS lb.'/ a'' * o4-o~,a,, od/a, ( a'jarv), 422, 15; jam-c6, (rlcdouaW) 448 D, 24. O, oa I 422 15; Iot-,, vt-J, atrt o- -ofwa, (.w'ta rl an D. cavw}dvw (Eczao,,,ua(roua,) 437, 6. lW o, O i a'X-oLar (ox'o/ual,) 422, 16; dp}uapta, (Jxapa) 443 D, 4., oLXEW, rap-dXrlca, O'LXWCa, I)D. udp7r-rw (jepda'roiev) 427 D, 21. oA (e E o'e) 432 D, 22. jAapTvp-ew,!apTvpo/JaL, 448, 6. ~,',,,' * o~xa-dyc, (-fo, W,&,1oo) 436, 9. ~ctoa-vo (?y}',y uE4axa) 428, 3.-YW (-w, o) 436, /Ad-,Ua (EX, d'qV,,,udXmas) oX-AvuL (cWrW 7v, o'XwXa, oc6XEica) 422CG L O ~LaX y D.L l ~ 442, 8; &e'Icw, ov,'XAeVos, D. 422, 10; 1AaXE-opa1 D. 422,~at (-~bo~uar), 10;' i uax, 42'- oi.o'r \(I reorw, ooA7ra, Ech.7reiw) 424 D, 32.,,Eo-o/a, (-aooaz),.IAoaua, 422 D, 21. A LEOU-tA ( t S nVVJ) /EOC, 446, [3. ( I, ]r v) 442, 9. 1A ('' E( L),, 4324ID, 25.) o/,topy-,vUu (&t~opOa) 442, 10. SEtpoat, (e`CLxope, el0 ap'ra) 432 D, 25.,'xx E E o,,,22 OVIV,/pt (ova, &vhxp') 403, 6. dEx -w (OAxAN77oa or'.) 422 12.`,X \* ov4 b'o-pai (nvoo'c4dp,, &'voarv) 405 D a. gE4X-w (CCdhr a) 422, 11o ro- (o6p,, oIouat,, o',7rwa, &parn') 450, 4 /PE/r/7Ja, dLE/JLfkXEal,, D.,xseyrlh~a, C erart, y.rmo. (a6ovaow) 434 D, 7.,LE (uaiotLai, AELova) 434 D, s., co) 4, ~'-w (/zE~/zVc a) 42 2, 13; /ze4cw lb. opm-co (b.pwv-o oouai, 0For7ra4 1ao,, IMEP) 450, 4. ETa/qatEXopat (-ETEj /JENar7v) 413. tf ~~ou l(E~ILhlSIY 1. opt (EAp6co, Eop-ya, ebpyEv) 428, 14. vU]K-dopatL (aicc}'), /LErp7Jccs) 448 D, 24. y p EL?7TL-dW, ILf7TIOAU a, 448 ID, 25. op-atY o (topyva}a) 382 b.'r1Tl-aco, p7lopat 448 D 25. 1..... 1.dy-vvf &, p ryw, 442, ~7;!~ICTO ID. opE'y-w/LL, opcy-w, 442 D, 18. LjuvyL-OvCvO liae-umu 44215. op-,vp o. (po-a, 4popov,, 8pwpa, o3pe peat) git E o/zai (txeai[A/uai) 415. 5 / I fLP-Z1AiIoW (Awa, A' P77Iuat) 444, 6. 1 442, 11; ip'ro, OpiPtw Opo6WL D. 4c*uva (~ubd),~uvz,-, 4149,3. o pvrow (3oppvXa) 428, 4.:UAiyoo (Aqp}dl o)- = tAxY-eo, 449, 3. /4OI7 (Owy) /doPU/J4, 44, 12. 6o'ool[a (o=r)'429 D, 4..tio"yC (/tgY) = uiyYUvUI, 447, 12. (p ~,cw,' ) 4o4, 6 oapp-afvoAai (o'ppo'ovat) 436, 10. i/ox ($XceoIcW, Eoxov) 445, 2. opE-W (Eov5pn, -?o1ca) 312.,6Lw (.h KWy, X~EI ) s431,; 2 c.. lb obrd-co.(oura), ovrTdCw, 423 D, 5. uLLC-O (txLyL (yCv) 431, 7; jVCEICC4 IcD,, lb. 3pi co (&eAov,, o3q)ew ocw) 432, 12; xvI:-doma (epayov}, t. tdE, a) 448 D, 26.,,.'w D. /v-co (E[pvaa, ptEuta) 420, 6. p I o' X-iLcc dvco, (&(pXov, 3qo/Xow) 436, 11. oX (Exw, lxwica, &eTXaTo) 424 D, 11. NaLerd-w (vaerdaooa) 434 D, 6. a'ctc., (Evaooa, YdragYv) 4'34 D, 6. na (r v, 7rc7r,.AaL) 335 D. vdCo'rrW (vaa, vYa) 431, 3. zra3 (rdoXaaw, Eraoov) 447, 13. VYKELIe- (etEKceOCaa) 419 D, 21. 7racdco (rar, 7ray) 431, 4. VEo-W (veVy~,Aica) 422, 14. rat-co (,racoo, eirato.a-v) 421, 13. Vo/.aL 430 D, 12. 7raaL/-w (eraXa[or;rnz) 421, 14. eoW (Uv, EevUaa) 426, 2;,XWco D. rdXA-Xco (lerXAa, -rveraAXc) 432 D, 26. vP.,o (e'y,[oj]gat) 421, 5. r'apqaiYwcy, radavodwv, 472 k. viLw (vyr) 429, 2; rTrwCO ib. sapavopl-co (raprvlu'Y oa) 315. vLaovotat (y,-) 430 D, 12. rapowYe-c (rerappvnicca) 315. Qio-, 6ta-, Y1-, 7rpo-,oedoUat, 413. dradcro ('raoa) 430, 5. 51]. INDEX OF VERBS. 187 Irdacox (cirrac9oz, lre[o[a, grirnov5) n-rpa (7ru7irprnu, wrp'a3w) 403, 8; 447, 13; rEn'roo'E D. (D-Lrpdo'cw) 444, 7. 7raT-r-o/a (eroaa',uv, rioraoat) 448, 8. 7rpaa (rEpaw, E'rparov) 424 D, 36. *rav-co (e7rravual, e7rav[o]aiv) 421, 19. rpda-o-w (ir'pawya, 7rrpaxa) 428, 6. 7reiow (7rsa, 7rE7rolaa) 295; ir6riaovz, rpa (E7rpLrIv) 408, 8. Vre 7r&a-rcW, raloqw, 425 D, 8. 7rp[-w (rd6rprocuat) 421, 7. *reva-w (7re-7,,, rq,4~oo) 371 c. 7rpo (enropov, rE7-rpw-rai) 424 D, 37. 7rElpo (*7rEp, *rdprn,) 432, 13. wpoauE'-ou/a, (wrpovavu arn',) 413. 7rec-wE (frVeyv), 7reik'icw, 448, 9. Ta- (7rEdpvvU1Lt, 7rErW-auaL) 439, 3; 7rEXa',w (-rEXra, 7rEXa, 7rXa, w7rXfo), (re'rouaL, E'7irTlv) 424, 19. 7reraw, 7r(e)Xdwac, 7riXv?7t, 428 D, 21.'rdp-zvuai, 7r'rapw, 442, 13. rE'-o/aL (e'dr/rlv), ir6Aw, 424 D, 35. rrrzo-Ow (e&7rrqXa), 7rmrcoo,, 428, 7; 7rEdr-w (7rE7roqpa, 7rere/4uyal) 424, 17. -7rm'T7WV',,TEwITc,6s, D. wrevg (7rei'oa-o e, r7rovaC) 447, 13.''rTiaorco (eirTlroa) 430, 7. 7rEpS-o/.ai (,rap3, wrapSe, 7rop8) 424, 18. 7rT0o (7rir7rw, Erwircca) 449, 4. 7rep-w (erp,0op&y) 424 D; 36; 7rop~a ib. 7rzvm-w ('r To6a, 7r'vo-'s) 419, 20. 7rEpzJ7lUL (repa)= ir-ipcKcnw, 443 D, 5. 7rvv'vo~L ua (e'7rva0v7Y, 7revoo/uaa) 7r-Ea-o (7re-r) 429, 1; r-ETrwc' ib. 437, 7;'rEVot0aL ib. Wr'Ei, WrES (7rL7rT'w, ire-'OZ,) 449, 4. rETa-VvvuL (7rE7rTraja,) 439, 3.'Pa,,co (eppaScaa pcoa-a —e) 392 D. 7reTr-oalai (7r[e]r aouoai, eirT7v,) 424, 19; pal-w (P)pafcoa7rv) 421 D, 24. Tir'rapal, i7rE'auat, 7roTdolat, ib. pda7rwc (Edpapv) 427, 13. 7revEoJaoja (= irvvdvoi aL) 425, 14. PE (EdprpKa, ePP357a epp, Wa7v) 450, 8. -7riy-vuL (Ei7ra'yV) 442, 12; -E1r-icK-o D. PEiC (Pe-Y, Epe~a) 428, 14. iriXv7lt, -vdwo, = 7reAd-Cw, 443 D, 6. p&o (c3 6rnv,;EpSpcla, eevaoa) 426, 5. 7ricrXpyAt (WAa), xrA4bw, 403, 7. Pr7-UL'v ('ppaiC'yv, ePPwya) 442, 14. ir/tcurp7/pL (7rpa), irpaw, 403, 8. /p1y-e4 (E/P'ya) 448 D, 16. wrvi-f-coK 426 D, 4. ry6d-W ( PPlc-, jPiyqdnv) 371 d. 7TI-(Vi (IrfyacLac, irE7M0v, irairwca) 435, 4. pSrrrTE, = Ptr'w (pp), 448, 10.,7rl~;~KC (,rl, Eroa) 446, 1. phrTW ( tppb71W) 293. wr-irpdalC, (irpa) 444, 7. p.-ocul (pja-oi, PSat) 40. D b. ir7rn-co (7reCr, Eireaoz, wre-rTwica) 449, 4. v7ro,-w (Piepv7rwu-Y os) 319 D.,rlTvEW (nreT, ErlTrYO) 438, 4. pw -J'VyU (Eppcoarn'v) 441, 2. 7Fr/TV),Ul, -yvo, = reTad-Zvpu, 443 D, 7. irtcavoeco (cpav) 446 D, 4.:aWpw (rap&S, aEro7pa) 432, 14.?rA for reA (nr'Xouatl, d7rX6rtLv) 424 D, 35. aaX7r[iw (e'adxrcya) 328 b.,rXa (rrfaXcn. t, mrX;aw) 403, 7; a-ad-co (ra'woa) 431 D, 5. (nereXcd, Vr'X,'o) 428 D, 21. o6-yy'Vvubt (E' G1n3, go-t,EaL) 440, 3. 7rXdCw (eriXaya,7,4nAX&YxgV) 328 b. oaY-opai (EoEparv, ) 413. rxaowco (er'Aaoa) 430, 6. a'-E-co (o'~etoaca) 421, 17. irXeIc-co (7rAnXcr,, 7re'nrXoxa) 424, 20. aeSc, ('ov/tucll, -v7T0) 426 D, 9. 7rXEow (7rAv, irXevroa) 426, 3; mrc.tw D. rircow (dEao7rrY,) 425, 2. 7rx/oaw (mrA,7yrnv', -ea7Xy7-r') 428, 5. aricdt'rw (E'-cdirpv) 427, 15. 7rX;vvw (n7rxvv, irer'Xv/at) 433, 3. a-ceia-'vvvup (eaodESacCaCt) 439, 4. 7r-X-w, = nrXEw, 426 D, 3. vcA.-XAw (aEKAv) 432, 15; Ve~cwXa D. 7rv'co (7rvv, ervevorr-a) 426, 4; ocei7r-roptat, oKoire'-w, 427, 16. nrE7yvvuaL), rnvtVIcw, D. o {7*r-rw 427, 17. rV'[7y-w (nrtvL'?7Y) 424, 21. o-IVIIltl = aIce3d-vYYUIt, 443 D, 8. ro (n7r-vw, wnnrwca) 435, 4. o'ccnr-Tw 427, 18. nroaE-w and irov'-wc 420, 8, 9. a7ud-a (-.p, fa'po'Aaa), o'uX., 371 c. nronrv6-cw 472 k. o0-?S, a1?r, owoat, 431 D, 5. ro ('op (nopo,, 7r7rpcoTra) 424 D, 37. anr for aen-r (e'7rouailt, Eiordt7Y ) 424, 8;,voaopp-w 472 k. IfrL-iovV EVairET 450 D, 7. 188 INDEX OF VERBS. [451 ord-w (EorwJ oa, Eorao'ai) 419, 6. TXa, EXrqz. 408, 6; Tqe'rXKca 409 D, 10. 17reipw ((rrep&, eo7rcip-qv) 432, 16. TUE (TEYco, TE&plca) 435, 9. orao-wco ("Eo'reloa, -ojJua) 381. 391 c.'-&ryw (E'rayov) 425 D, 18. oTra ('orlptU) 403, 5.'pa (T'rpdWc, E'pTo a) 449, 6. OaTE'oW (o'r'3, Zo'rTI3rbLa,) 425, 9.'pa'-dotoev (Tep7rpo) 424 D, 24. OTELXW (EoTxopY) 425, 10. rpax (pdafo, T'r&pvxa) 428, 8.'reX-Xw (erErLao, o&Ta7xr) 290. 7rp&-o (Eparov, rerpopa) 424, 25; oTEPY-W (Er'rop'ya) 424, 22. rpdcro,,rpa7reo, T.posrewc, D. r iep-[o'Io, o'Tepe, -) poUat, 447, 7. rp pp-w (e"peta, &r pepV,'r pa!a, o're-rCat, iTeD-'ro, 405 D c.'repoqpa) 424, 26;,rpdpw D. oTope-YvvPvLU, oTdp-VUyI, 440, 4.'pex-co (Ea'peta-E'3pacqoz, &E~SpCoiLca) OTp4Ee-W (Er'rpdpq, e'rpoa) 424, 23. 450, 5; Trpdxw D. o-pc6-pvvvu 441, 3. rpd-co (g&peoa, &ppeoTros) 419, 15. o'TV7-edW (E'r'rTyov) 448 D, 17.,rpI0-W (E'rpif371, T'rTpipa) 424, 27. o-fa, or qdrcoTW (E)kd;yV) 428, 15. rpicw (TE'Tpt'ya) 428, 16. o-rpdX-,o (o(pVr77Xa, e&'pdxnv) 432, 18. Tpuvp (pv7Trro) 427, 6. oX for aEX (EXoW, Eoxov, aox4ow) 424, 11. TrpcoYw (Prpayov) 425, 4. cS'w (aw, o'WA) 431, 5.'pcoW,i = TlTP6dKocW, 445 D, 6. rv for uv (;6ce, Er6v/5) 420, 2. Ta (.refvw, TE'aKa, ravecw) 433, 5. rv'yJdvcW (ervXovP, Tre6opaL, rETv'Xqica) ray, TreTay&cv 384 D; rdaoo'o 428, 9. 437, 8; E'rTevxa D. ~raha, d$.aoaoa 408 D, 6. TVIC (,reVXw, T'rvKov, TrTVrKOcw) 425 D, 15. rav 6-w (e'-du~oa, TET'dvvoUUaL) 433 D, 5. Tv'7r-T (rv7rr'oow,,Erv4a, Ervrrov) 427, 19.,apdaw, ('ie'ipa:a), 3apd'oew, 428, 8. r6cp-CW (E-rv,1Pn, -re',vcuai) 424, 28. -raoac' (7iyrl'v, TrETaXa) 428, 9. -rap (adCrrw, rdq(pn,) 427, 5.'Trrxve'ouatL ( vreEoXd7y, — /uat) 438, 6. Tra4-dv, E4-nqra, 425 D, 17. v-cO (vouaL) 421, 11. re for ~e (r93 tiu, ee-'a7Y) 403, 2. T~Erve (TevS, TErTaKa) 433, 5; cIa, (pakLvc, 432 D, 19; pmtS, 404, 2; -ravow, T'Ta'vlo, D. 7renpauaL 433 D, 7. TEKc (T'KTo, gEreov,'re'oica) 449, 5., pay (Eoatfw,,pEayov) 450, 3. TreXE'-w (ereAtoya, TrezTE'Eo'aL) 288. (patvow (eq'dvqv, 7re74va) 291; ($E, 7rerTEC, Tre7%Tov 384 D. poeTrai, cpaetc, adv,padava v, 432 D, 19 TrSE-vow (e'TayoV, T &r6qpica) 435, 9; apd-oKw, -=- 0p7tA, 444, 8. Tauvw, T'rEw,'ju,1ycw, D. 8ia-pa6aKcw, -,c-dKo, 446 D, 4.'ep7r-w 424, 24;'reT'ap~7r4d.r D. peaoocuai 425, 11; res,8-4xvp, -4o'oiat, I) repo'-ofata, Trepoavow, 424 D, 38. pev(, pa (,'mrncjov, wepa/ual) 433 D, 7. TreTpatiCv (E7&&pna) 449, 6., pep-w (o'lo;,eyrov,, rveyrca, eyPoXa, TeVXO (e'rTvUyUCai) 425, 15; v4Ivepyjuat) 450, 6; jveLKa D. TrervCoV, rIrTSvIcw, D. (PEv'yw (qpvyovy) 425, 16; *pvyyrco ib. T'f (for Ta-e?) 433 D, 5. irepv'ioEs ID. lccoK (E'iTKrnV) 425, 3. u7ulu ((pa) 404, 2. TrXecdWv (aaX-Xco) 432 D, 6. pad-yco (Zpaaoa, Epr'7Y) 435, 3. TIE, T.ETLCS, TETI).r /Lai, 386 D. petpw (tptepw,,ctdp,,p) 432, 20; T'[ari tl (,e, qlttca, Tr Geiuca ELaL, i-EePat opa D. eE'-nYv) 403, 2. a.-vo'o (,,Ea a) 435, 6; TICrTW (E'TeICov, re'Toxca) 449, 5. Ep5a4iVv, tpLvyao, D. rI-vow (E&u'a),'rtvvuL, 435, 5. c(pLA-de (Napixdcr7v) 448 D, 18. TrLTaZv' (-av) 433 D, 5. cPIXoTr1,e-ouaz (e'zIXorzlyju4P) 413. rirp-ac. (Tpa, ep?17o-a) 449, 6. pxa-co, = Aha-cw, 419, 4. TrTpdo'rKC ('po) 445, 6;'pc&w D. PA'-w (ePXNv late), pAey4, 411 D. -zTv&rioyal ('I-'vitc) 447 D. 17. pY for pEv (re'pvov) 433 D, 7. i- ig-o rioaa) 435 D, 5. cppdy-vuu, eppdooaW, 442, 15. 454] FORMATION OF WORDS. 189 cpdSCc (~paa) 428, 17; ze'pparo1 D. xxaA (,ceXXAa-cis, -oVros) 360 D. pio-aco (-reppuca) 428, 10. Xd-w (KcdXworai) 421, 9; xcJbvvtu ib. ~vXAao'vo (~pvxaK, 7re6viAaXa) 428, 11. xpa (ictxpevL) 403, 9. V2p-G (p'pow, 7r'puvpyat) 345 D. X-XpataoU-o, ZXpafto-'nroa, 448 D1, 1D. pV-w (p6vs, rpvoa) 423, 4. Xpa(-olua (K='p7iac) 335 a. 3E1 c. Xpa-cW (KtEXpoa'buaL) 421, 3. Xdf, (Xa,) 428, 18; KEICa-or, -4~W, D. Xpi (xpa, Xpe, E'xp7v) 404, 3. xapwc (Exadp-q, Xaiphfrw) 432, 21; Xpt-W (tc'xpt[k],aL) 421, 8.,ceXapJdirv, KEXaP7?fs, D. Xp'C-Vvvvl (deXpwaou'ac), XpOco, 441, 4. XaX-o (Xd'Xa a,'Xaxdoanv) 419, 7. Xaz'acvc (eXCaop, XElQrooal) 437 D, 9. t-wco (41i, c4'n[oalLu), 4'%-x-w, 421, 4. X.-iKwO (exavo,o KeXvr'a) 444, 9. *vx-w (E'VX-y, 4V,'yv,) 424, 29. XECCO (XeaoPatL KEXoSa) 428, 19. xec (ExCa, KEixVKa) 426, 6; Ia-Eco (ewcsaa, ea'ccu) 448, 11. XEtw, EEVa,1 D3. Cwve-otuat (ewvo6oO7v, ~ErpitaolYv) 450, 7. PART THIRD. FORMATION OF WORDS. 452. SIMPLE AND COMPOUND WORDS. A word is either simple, i. e. formed from a single stem: Xdy-o-g speech (st. Xey), ypai-co to write (st. ypap); — or compound, i. e. formed from two or more stems: Xoyoypdj0o-v soriter of speeches. A. FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 453. VEEBALS AND DENOMINATIVES. Words formed immediately from a verb-stem are called verbals: dpX-? beginning, from the stem of'px-co to begin.-Those formed immediately from a noun-stem are called denominatives: dpXa-io-s of the beginning, original, from the stem of dpXq (apXa) bleginning. 454. SUFFIXES. Nouns (substantive or adjective), whether derived from a verb-stem or a noun-stem, are formed by means of added endings: these are called formative-endings, or sufixes. Thus Xoy-o-s is formed from the verb-stem Xey by means of the suffix o; apXa-io-r, from the noun-stem apXa by means of the suffix Lo. REM. a. The suffixes limit the general idea of the stem, by assigning particular relations, under which it exists or manifests itself. Thus the verb-stem 7roLe (7roL-w) has the general sense of making or comp sing: from this are formed by various suffixes, 7rowrr-T-s person composing, poet, 7ro(7-ct-s act or art of comnpcsing poetry, 7rot77-pua (roi-,uar) thing composed, poem. From the 190 FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. La4o verb-stem ypao (Wypdp-a to write) come ypac-,E-s writer,'ypacp —s (?ypap-i8) writ. ing-instrument, 7p&d/-pta (for ypap-,uaT') written letter or document, 7papL-.CJ written stroke or line. Similarly, noun-stem 61ica, Nom. L'Ict/ right, &Gca-io-s righteous, just, 8bLaLeo-iv5q1 justice; noun-stem BaoLREv, Nom. fa0LxEd-s king, Baol[te-la queen, jiacLce-LEl- kingdom, BaOLX-L~K0-s kingly. REMI. b. A few verbal nouns are formed without any suffix: (pvxcdoo-c ((ptXaic) to watch, pvAa, (pvAaxc) watchman. Such words change e of the verb-stem to o (cf. 25): pAX7-w to burn, pAdtJ (pAoy)flamne. 455. EUPHONIC CHANGES. The union of stems and suffixes gives occasion to many euphonic chances: a. FVowels, when they come together, are often contracted: &pXaos for apXa-io-s, Saao-Leta for la1Y-Xe(v)-ta, a&Axaeia truth for aAXqaE(o)-ia (64) from A;rl&ss (aXl7aes) true, ai6o7os venerable for arlo(o)-Lo-s from aibss shame, reverence. b. But a final vowel is often elided before a vowel in the suffix: obpdY-io-s heavenly from obpav4-s heaven, iEo7rp-so-s belonging to evening from Eo'rEpa, evening. Even a diphthong may be elided: Bamoa-cio-s from paoXe6-s-. c. Again, vowels are interchanged, e with o, EL with oi: cf. 25. This occurs chiefly in verbals formed by the suffixes o and a (457):'-p7r-o-s turning, manner, from -rpexr-o to turn, Aoi7r-6-s remaining from XeL7r-w to leave, crop=n — sending, escort, from 7reir-co to send, aXorup-l ointment from &Aelp-w to anoint. Also &pcoy-d-s helpful from apiy-wc to help. d. Further, vowels are sometimes lengthened: Ata-v7 forgetfulness from Aaacdvwc (XAdd) mid. to forget.- Especially, vowel-stems lengthen their final vowel before a consonant: -roig-ata, 7roel07 —s- 7, ro-T4i-s, from 7roteE-o;-or annex: before /u or -: KEXEVor-/Aa command, IceAevo'-7T-s commander, from IcexeN-Co to command. In these changes they follow the formation of the Perf. Mid.: cf. 7re-'rofl-epLat, -'ati, -Tat, tcE-KtceEVo —UaL, -'at; and, on the other hand, 8d-/ua gift, 8d-at-s giving, 8o-Trp giver, from 8i8o&,t to give, Perf. Mid. 8e-8o-uate, -oat, -Tart. e. Lastly, consonants, when they come together, are subject to euphonic changes.: ypadJ-ua for 7paeP-ya(T), XEhrs speaking for XEy-or-s, b8Kao-a-T-s judge for cKac-ic- -s from aLwc4w to judge, etc. 456. ACCENT. AS a general rule, neuter substantives take the accent as far as possible from the end (recessive accent): Xvrpov ransom, VrXjKTpov instrument for striking the lyre, i'porpov plough, 7raLAptovz, little boy or girl, ypactzLa writing, 7rveri~a breath, 7roi77La poem. This is true without exception in words of the 3d decl.: for exceptions in the 2d decl., see 463 b, 465 a. Many masculine and feminine suffixes are regularly accompanied by recessive accent. Those which are not so will be specially noticed in the following enumeration. I. FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. PRINCIPAL SUFFIXES. 457. A. Many verbals are formed, especially from primitive verbs, by adding to the stem the suffixes, o, Nom. o-s, masculine: Xky-o-s speech from X;y-co to speaE. a, Nom. i or 77, feminine: udjX-rjlight from aciX-oyac tofight. For change of vowel, see 455 c. a. These words are properly abstracts, expressing the action of the verb; but actually they have a wide range of meaning: oaie-AXw to equip, send, r/T-x-o-s a sending, expedition; hence that which is sent, an army or navy, 460)] FOR]MATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 191 o',-ox- that with which one is equipped, clothing, dress; — vAado'aw (ePuXaK) to guard, rfPXaic-h act of guarding; but also place of guarding, watch-station; time of guarding, swatch of the night; party guarding, garrison. b. Adjectives also are formed by the same suffixes: Xoar-r-s, -i, -4*- remaining, from Xeslr-wc to leave. c. Accent. Adjectives in os thus formed are oxytone: XAorr-6-s. So too.substantives in os, when they denote an agent: &y-J-s leader. So also most in a or v7; especially those which have the change of vowel (455 c): rogur-i; or come from stems of more tharl one syllable: cpvXaic-'. 458. B. The AGENT is expressed by the following suffixes: in verbals, they denote the person who performs some action; in denosnincatives, the person who has to do with some object. 1. ev, Nom. evS) masculine; always oxytone. Examples of verbals in E's. 7pacp-e6-s writer from ypc(p-co to zorite 7yo-e&-s parent yiyzo/atl (yev) to be born Kcovp-eV-s barber CEL[pw (ICep) to shave Denominatives in evs. rwr-ev-s horseman, r'ider from 1'7rro-s lhorse irop3$-ev-s ferryman, rop~ld'-s ferry a. Several masculines in ets have corresponding feminines in eta (proparox.): 3WaLnXEvsS (of uncertain derivation) king, fem. 3CaoiXELC queen (late? fBaotiAXo'oa). 459. 2. i7-p, Nom. 7-p retpaJ Nom. rectp ] Top, -rop,masc.; Tfp, rp fe i-ce~p, i-q-c -rpta, irpc-c raa, 7?- riL, rt-S J Verbals. To-7T-p savior from st. o, Pr..cr&Aw (431, 5) avc-Teipa fem. 4.-w6Dp (-Top) orator st. ie, Fu.?pi (450, 8) iCpL-,T-S (-aC) jucgye st. lp,, Pr.,cpLvcs Wom —T'-S (-Ta) poet rot-co to comose roLi-Tpla ceM fern. avbX -T-s (-Ta) flute player } 4(x-~n-s (-T rute-pgr avbU-co to play the flute cdA.-~tp-s (-~pLa) fem. Denominatives. 7roXi-7Tl-s (-Ta) citizen from r4tA-s city oIe —27-s (-'Ta) house-servant oco-s house oiCE-TL-s (-*T1) fem.c-s huse a. Accent. Verbals in T71p and Tpzs are always oxytone: so also most of those in 7"1S, especially when the penult is long by nature or position. Yerbals in,Thp, Tetpa,'ptai, and all denominatives, have recessive accent. 460. C. The ACTION is expressed by the following suffixes: a. rt, Nom. rtL-s,al, oaL-c feminine. 0-tB, a-Ln These belong to verbals only: oac is for Tt by 62, cf. Lat. ti-o. wso-rT-sfaittR from wre[ao (mirc), 2 Pf..trust .192 FORMA''ION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 460o al-r7-aL-s imitation from ptu'-ouai to imitate noKcE'i-s consideration rcE7r-opaolt to view, consider Irpatt-s action w'pdioWco (7rpa'y) to act?yEve-ot-s origin yiLyvo/ua (-ye, yEvE) to become oic.ipa-o-fa examination o0ClyCd'a (0ocqlA.v) to examine b. p0o, Nom. pvd-s, masc. and oxytone, belongs only to verbals. 36vp-ju-s wailing from OBbp-opua to wail Aotyl —po'-s calculation AoiCoplat (xoyiL) to calculate crra-o-udJ-s spasm aIrd-o to draw Sv-a-o'-s (movement) rhytAm pe'& (pv) to flow c. From verbs in edv are formed substantives in eta (for ev-ta) which express the action; they are all fern. and parox.: 7ratlela education, from rrataero to educate; 3aalrtXAa kingship, kingdom, from 3aoLiXEvco to Z king (cf. 458 a). 461. D. The nESULT of an action is expressed by the suffixes, a. ipar, Nom. pa, neuter; only in verbals. Wrpty-pca (-txa') thing done, affair from 7rpdcace (7rpEY) to do (almost the same as Tb 7rewrpayty'Eov, Lat. factum) pit-ya (pStuar) word from st. pe, Fu. ipto (cf. i-b Edpv?7etov, Lat. dictum)?r/ui-pla (glwja'r) section from vI/rco (Te/U, ~Ape) to cut (cf. Trb T'retruL4e'o piece cut of') b. es, Nom. os, neuter. AcdX-os (AaXes) lot from xayXdvcw (.kaX) to get by lot gb-os (eaes) custom st. ea, e'lwaa am accustomed.6lc-os (reices) child'rhsw (TeC) to bring forth In denominatives, the same suffix expresses QUALITY: Bci&-os (3acaes) depth from Ba~5-s deep,8dp-os (,Sapes) weight Bcapt-s heavy ptKc-os (1xplces) length pcac-pd-s long 462. E. The INSTRUMENT or MEANS of an action is expressed by rpo, Nom. rpo-v, neuter; ef. Lat. trum. gpo-Ipo-v plo ugh (aratrum) from &pod-o to plough VA —po-v ransom XA-co to loose liaicK-~po-, teacher's hire acidoecow (tbraX) to teach. REM. a. The kindred feminine suffix rppa is less definite: 46-o-Tpa flesh scraper from 5v-w to scrape, pXq-a-'pa place of dancing from px4-oplat to dance, WraXac-a-7pa wrestling-ground from rraxa-co- to wrestl,. 463. F. The PLACE is expressed by a. rrprto, NTom. r7ptlo-v, neuter; only in verbals. &cKpoa-.{-pto- Lat. audi-toriutm -from &acJod-ojtua to hear Ctao'-r7#pLo-Pr court of justice tca'dCo (tiacaa) to judge b. Eco, Nom. eto-v, neut.; properisp., contrary to 456; in denom, Aoy-eyo-v speaking-place from Xdyo-s speech icovp-e6O-v barber's shop icKOVpE-s barber Movo-e6io-r seat of the fl'uses Ma~oa Afuse 466] FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 193 c. Wov, Nom. cov, masc. and oxytone; only in denominatives. This denotes a place where something abounds: &u-,rex-i vineyard from &,ureno-s vine, &vap-,v nzen's apartment from ai'p G. W&Sp-ds man, olv-&v wine. cellar from ohio-s wine. 464. G. Substantives expressing QUALITY are formed from adjectivestems by the following suffixes: a. qrr, Nom. rsr, feminine (Lat. tdt, tUt, Nom. tas, tus). raxT-75r (-Tr7r) thickness from 7raXv-s thick WvE-T5Vs (-T'rT) youth Yeo-s young I9d-r's (-rMT) equality'ao-s equal b. avya, Nom. crvrvq, feminine. 8Lcalo-0o677V justice from Kcaio-s just o'woopo-o-6v, discreetness ac6oppw (aoepov) discreet c. La, Nom. ta, feminine. ao —fa, wisdom from o-oqd-s wise eVa zowv-ta happiness uotai/msvW (evUaLuov) happy aAxae-ma truth &aXkas (an1aes) true eCo-LI good-will evYOvs (evYoo) well-ldisposed d. es, Nom. or, neuter; see 461 b. 465. H. DIMINUTIVES are formed from substantive-stems by the following suffixes: a. to, Nom. to-v, neuter. 7ra6S-fo-v little child from 7rals (sract) child mcr7r-fo-v little garden iciro-s garden aec&'r-o-,- javelin cKWV (aIcoVr) lance Those of three syllables are parox., if the first syllable is long by nature or position: 7raSolov. Other forms connected with to are t&o: ollc-faio-v little house from oTKo-s house apLo:;racL-cpto-v little child eraTs (7raa) child vapto: 1ueX-dvpio-' little song cEXdos (teAfes, Ice&e) so2ng b. Masc. 1K0,o Fem. tor-,, Nom. lOrKO-S, LOK7K, parox. yearv-olio-s Lat. adolescentulus from reaeia-s young n tan 7raclcti-ct young girl Ci reas (7rca) girl ~oe-TqaV-icKo-s little wreath eeT'qxavo-s wreath 466. I. PATRONYMICS (substantives which express descent from a father or ancestor) are formed from proper names of persons by adding the suffixes, 8a, Nom. 8aq-s, masculine, paroxytone; and 8, Nom. s, feminine, oxytone. These suffixes are applied directly to stems of the first declension: Masc. Bop~e&-'s-s, -Fem. Bopea-s, from Bop6.-s AC)vEIa-8r s t Alveta-s Stems of the second declension in to chanfe this to ta: Mase. OewLtL-rl-s, Fem. 0e-r T-s, from Oeo-'ro-s MEv0rToLI-&l-S MeYoiCto-s 194 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. [466 All other stemns take i as a connecting vowel, before which o of the 2d dect is dropped. Those in Eu lose v by 39. Mase. Keicpo'7r —rl-s, Fem. KEKcpor-i-S, from Kicpoq ]II-hq-4-6g-s. MIrE&-s (Hm. has also a form nfl71X-t&i-6-s, cf. 189 D.) lA71o-i-877-S from A1rTC (Afr/o) and from stems of the 2d declension: Masc. Tay'rax-[-67-s, Fem. TaVuraA-[-s, from TdvrTaXo-s Kpoy-f-rqI-s Kpopvo-s a. A rarer suffix for patronymics is tov, Nom. cwv: Kpov-ico (Kpov-oz,) sots of KpJvo-s. The poets allow themselves many liberties for the sake of the metre. 467. J. GENTILES (substantives which designate a person as belonging to some people or country) have the following suffixes: a. ev, Nom. ev,-s, oxytone: cf. 458. MEYap-eui-s a $Megarian from Me'-yapa (2d. decl. plur.)'Eperpt-ev5-s an Eretrianz'EpeTpL'a (1st decl.) b. ra, Nom. T-rS, paroxytone: cf. 459. TEYed-r7l-s from TeyEa, A'y-Y'V-TrJ-s from AtvyT;ca,'H7repc6-Tr —s from'H'reipo-s, t4ceXXc16-7'-s from ZKtceAa. c. The corresponding feminine stems end in 8, Nom. s: Mqeyapls (MEyapt8) a Megarian wloman, TyeEirtrv (-r8), KMEXtOCLrts (-LB). The accent falls on the same syllable as in the corresponding masculine. II. FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. PRINCIPAL SUFFIXES. 468. 1. lo, Nom. io-r, expresses THAT wnICH PERTAINS in any way to the substantive from which the adjective is formed: obpdv-io-s heavenly from o'pavo-s heaven irAo5/-io-s wealthy (for,rXovr-to-s) rAXovr'o-s wealth oliceio-s domestic (for otce-io-s) ohtco-s house ayopaeo-s forensis (for a7opa-so-s) &yopd forum rEpewo-s of the summer (for aepea-io-s) 1e'pos (aepes) slsummer aloo-s. venerable (for aisoa-lo-s) alS&s (atios) shame,BaoeXso-s kingly (for l,3aoXev-io-s) BsaaoXE-s king a. This suffix is also used in connection with adjective-stems: iAevSep-io-s liberalis, from 6e\Asepo-s liber. b. It often serves to form adjectives denoting country or people (gentiles), which may be used also as substantives: McX4r-io-s (for MlAX7T-~o-s) Aiilesian from MlAqro-s,'AnvYao-s.Attvenian from'AnCvaC Athens. c. Adjectives in aco-s, olo-s are generally properispomena (aos, ozos). 469. 2. KO, Nom. KOd-S, always oxytone, generally applied to the stem with a connecting vowel:. a. In verbals, it expresses rBILITY or FITNESS: apX-i-.c-s capable of gov. erning, Typacp-t-id-s fitted for writing or painting. Many verbals insert, before this ending, the syllable i-, which denotes the action (460 a): air'l-l-Ti-ics-s eapable offeeling,'rpalc-Tr-ucd-s suitedfor action. b. Denominatives in co'-s express that which pertains to the noun from which they are derived: kairA-t-ncd-s vinglj, qcv-i-icKd-s natural. 472] DENOMINATVE VERBS. 195 470. 3. ivo, Nom. tvo-s, and 4. co, Nom. co-I, contracted ov-e (145 c). These denote the MATERIAL: Xia-IVo-s of stone from xAto-s, SxA-ivo-s wooden from,5Ao-v, (Xpvd-eo-s) Xpvu-oe-s goldenz from Xpvad-s.-But wvo, Nom. Isd-s, oxytone, forms adjectives denoting TIME: Xyao-iv-s belonging to yesterday hesternus, VcTcep-WYd-s nocturnus,?ap-lYe-s vernus. 5. ev'r, Nom. M. eL-s, F. Ecota, N. eV, denotes FULNESS or ABUNDANCE: Xap-El-s graceful from Xdpi-s, v6 X-e-s swoodt from SAX1. These are mostly poetic. 471. 6. Adjective-suffixes of less definite meaning are vd-s, oxytone, mostly passive: bet-e-s fearful (to be feared), ~et-rV-s (if3E-oJUaC) to be revered.,J'-s, mostly oxytone and active: Me-XAo-s fearful (timid), n7rar-q-Xo-s deceptive. od-s, mostly oxytone and active: Xaur-p4-s shining, po,&E-po-s frightful (alarming), also pass. afraid. ao-s, active: 1JgX-L-l.o-s warlike; or passive: Woib-i-po-s to be sung of. And akin to this, 0LtQo-s (r — rL, 460 a): Xp~-~oiLo-s useful, fptLpo-s (='pvy —re- o-s) avoidable or able to avoid. es, Nom.'s, Neut. es, oxytone, chiefly in compounds, see 4"75. III. DENOMINATIVE VTERBS. 472. Denominative verbs are formed from noun-stems in many ways. The most important endings are the following; they are given as seen in the present. In their effect upon the meaning, they are not clearly distinguished from each other. I. o-W Itd-o-w to let for hire from /tJtrI s hire Xpuvao-w to gild Xpvcds gold ul7td-o to punish nt1dca penalty b. a-Co Tq-L4-o to honor rtLU/ honor airTl-opLaL to accuse a-ila fault.yo,-o to lament ydos lamentation c. E-Wo apluLE-co to number eapiLuds number eTUvXE-Wo to be fortunate eVivx's fortunate Lurvop-co to know by inquiry Ys'-rcwp knowing d, ev- 3BaLe-co-w to be king aaG-AXeS-s king 6ovXeS-co to take counsel iBovX counsel aX;a~edco to speak truth?aXqa.s true e. a-wo EX7rtLC-w to hope EX7ris hope EAXh7v'L-o to speak Greek'"EXX.l, Greek pXLa7r7rrl-o to favor Philip 1Axnrsros f. aC-co LKcd-co to judge blcv justice Eip-yad-opaL to work fp7yov work tLdC-oucaL to use force fIa force g. aiv-wc sslcafa-co to signify Gictca sign XevicaiC-o to whiten XevIo's white XaXetratv-o to be angry XaXerrds hard, angry h. cU-wco ilv-cow to sweetert idvs sweet Aatqrpvc-Wo to brighten Xazy7rpo's bright aiXv Y-o o xaL to be ashamed aorXos.shame 196 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. L472 REI. i. It happens occasionally, that from the same noun are iormed several verbs with different endings and different meanings: thus from bo0Xo-q slave, 8ovxo-co to enslave, 8ovXev-co to be a slave; from r4AXe2uo-s war, roXe/e'-,C and 7roXe[ad-ce to wage war, rroxeF4-wo to make hostile. REM. j. Verbs expressing desire (DESIDERATIVES) are formed from verbs and nouns; most frequently with the ending aeora: -yeAao-efw to desire to laugh, paceSwo to have a mind to do; also in ac, awco: pdoyw to be eager for murder, C3avardCW to be disposed to weep.- Some verbs in aw, taw express an AFFECTION OF THE BODY: &Xplado to be afected with pallor, 3pqaaxud'co to have sore eyes. RE1. k. A few INTENSIVES (almost entirely poetic) are formed from primio tive verbs, by a more or less complete repetition of the stem, generally with some change of vowel: Ialdace-w to reach after, long for, from talopatm (tia) id., rroppSp-w to be agitated (of the sea) from qtSp-ac to mix up together,'rovtr~i-w to puff with exertion from rrve' (7rvv) to breathe. Here belongs Ep. 7raqoadovwo (once Sub. 3 Sing. wrappa[yovpa), also 7rauspavowv, shining brightly, firom palvt& (wrai-pavy for 0ay-(pav, 65 a, 48). B. COMPOSITION OF WORDS. I. FORM OF COMPOUND WoRDS. 473. When a noun stands as the first part of a compound word, only its stem is used: vav-pLaXia (vansr, aCxi]) ship-fght, Xopo-daoKnaXoS (XporS Gaao3KaXos) chorus-teacher. a. Stems of the 1st decl. change s. to o, appearing thus like stems of the 2d decl.: Xwcpo-ypapo-s (Xc6pa, ypadpw) 6;nd-describer. Stems of both these declensions drop their final vowel, when a vowel follows: Xop-ryods (Xdpos, oyo) chorus-leader. It is retained, however, when the second part of the compound began originally with digamma: I-Im. LAetAo-ep-yd-s artisan, Att. 67yuyovpysr. Stems of the 3d decl. commonly assume o as a connecting vowel before a consonant: a&Y3plav-o-7ro1d-s imay/e-maker, 7raTrp-o-cT-rdo-s parricide, 4vot —oAyo-s natural philosopher, iXav-o-pdayo-s f7sh-eatiyg. b. But the exceptions to these rules are quite numerous. Thus, the stems in s are often found in a shortened form: &p-o-~Td6ros (Shppos, st. Ljpes) slaying with the sword,'ezx-o-,uaXLa (st. TeiXes) battle at the wall.-Stems of the lst. decl. sometimes retain the final a (as a or V): aperE —X&yos prater about virtue, Xoe,-cpdpos bearing libations for the dead.- Sometimes an inflected case is found instead of the stem: yeaSs-oucos ship-house, vavot-iropos traversed by ships. 474. When a noun stands as the last part of a compound, its final syllable is often changed. This is the case especially in compound adjectives: 4cPXl-TLrE-s (TrIuS) honor. loving, 7roXv-7rpatywv, (wrpa'yla) busy.-So too in compound substantives, when the last part is an abstract word: Xrao-loAxa (,BoX4) throwing of stones, vav-IaXta (uadXsl) ship-fight, eb-7rpatfa (7rpa~is) good success. Only after a pr-. vosition can the abstract word remain unchanged: 7rpo-,3ovA- forethought. 475. A very frequent ending of compound adjectives, though seldom seen in simple words, is Ur masc. and feln., es neut.: it is found a. in many adjectives formed directly from the verb-stem: &-BxAaB3 AdtrTrw, st. BSxa) unharmed, abr-cpic-s (apxcdw) self-suffgcing, independent. 480] FORM OF COMPOUND WORDS. 197 b. in adjectives of which the last part is a substantive in es (Nona. os): 6EKa-eTrS (eios) of ten years, icao-e'lQ s (fjdros) ill-disposed. 476. Compounds in which the frst part is made directly from a,verbstem, are nearly confined to poetry. They are formed in two ways: a. The verb-stem appears without addition, except a connecting vowel (e, t, or o) used before a consonant: wreif-apXos obedient to command, kaic-Eavuos (dlac-vo to bite) heart-corroding, apX-t-reKC- rtw master-builder, Ala-o'-yvros woman-hater. b. The verb-stem has aor added to it: this expresses action (cf. 460 a, 469), and becomes C before a vowel: Av-at-7rovos releasing from toil, epv-a-dpea' rEs, -as (nom. ace. plur., Hm.) chariot-drawing, 7rAxj-Trros (7rXaoaaw, st. wrAyXy) horse-driving, arpe*i-uKcos (a'pEoQ-w) perverter of justice. 477. COMPOUND VEREBS are formed directly or indirectly. They are formed DIRECTLY by prefixing a preposition to a simple verb. Originally the prefix was a mere adverb, qualifying the verb. Hence the augment was applied to the latter, not to the preposition (313). Hence also in the early language, as in Homer, the preposition was often separated from the verb by intermediate words, and even placed after the verb: in the last case prepositions of two syllables suffer anastrophe of accent (102 D b). This separation of the preposition from the verb is called TAESIS (Tq-4'aS cutting from'TE'cVW to ceut). 478. All other compound verbs are formed INDIRECTLY, being denominatives made from compound nouns: Thus from MAtos and Bd'Atw comes the compound noun Atao-3bJAos stonethrowing, and from this the compound verb AirolomEoW to throw stopnes; from,ais and,dXoupa comes vav-xidXos jfighting in ships, and from this vavcuaecXw to fight in ships; from Ev and st. epy comes evepy-ETsjS benefactor, and from this EVepYe'YEO to benefit. 479. ACCENT. Compounds of the first and third declensions are accented like simple words with the same endings. But many compounds in,o/ (3d decl., 471, 475) are paroxytone instead of oxytone. Compounds of the second declension are generally proparoxytone. But those formed from compound verbs, by adding suffixes, are commonly accented like simple words with the same suffixes:r ovXXoy/c-/.'-sq from crvkXoyigolat to infer, adrobo-TEo-s from drro8hl8tL to give back. a. Objective compounds (480) of the second decl., when the last part is an intransitive verbal, follow the above rule: Xrd-f3oAos thrown at with stones, /?JTpdO-K'TOOS slain by a mother. But when the last part is transitive, and made by adding o (Nom. or) to a verb-stem, they accent the penult if it is short;if long, the ultima: xtAo-f38Aos throwing stones, ILr'po —KrdTOs matricide; a-TpaTyos army-leader, general, xoyo-wroids story-maker, v/Xo-7roA7urJs conductor of souls. But compounds of aXct and cpXco, with some others, follow the general rule:'vsioxos (rein-holder) charioteer, a6co0Xos (contr. from Gacd-oXos) torch-holder, lrzrapxos commander of horse. II. MEANING OF COaIrPOUND WoRDs. 480. As regards their meaning, compound nouns (substantive and adjective) may be divided into three principal classes. The division re-;ates properly to direct compounds, as vcavw7rvyo ship-builder, from vavi t98 MEANING OF COMIPOUND WOEDS. [480 and 7rT'yvvut; not to indirect compounds (derived from nouns already ~ompounded), as av7wiryla ship-building, vavqTt:77Ecs belonging to shipbuilding, derived from the compound vavurr]yo's. 1. OBJECTIVE COMPOUNDS. In these, one part is related to the other as a grammatical object; so that, when the two are expressed as separate words, one must be put in an oblique case, depending, either immediately or by means of prepositions, on the other: XAoo-7yp 0o-s speech-writer = Adyovs 7yp$dpov &tL-XAoyo-s worthy of mention = lios tAo'you Lct-La-ooi/aaffearing the divinities = aE6&ts orbs 6acdovss Xeupo —roir'r0-s made with hands = Xepai& rOlr?7Td aeo-XAaB43s harmed by the god =,Vrb ToO gIEOn G3eB3XaaLEvos obco-YE~Ys born in the hou6se = ev ot'ict. 7eYVlevYOs 481. 2. POSSESSIvE COMPovNDs. In these, the first part qualifies the second like an adjective or adverb, while the whole is understood as belonging to something; so that, when the compound is expressed by separate words, a participle of E'xo to have, or some verb of similar meaning, must be added: =coaKpo-Xelp long-handed = Laipaps XelpEas eXO, &p7Yvp'-TOtO-S with silver bow = &p vpo,'rzov, eXwv, olU-Trpowro-s of like character = -— oov' rpd7roo eXowv yXavcc-ac7rLs bright-eyed = 7yavrcobs of axAobs eXwco 7riLcpd-7ya/uo-s having a (bitter) unhappy marriage 6EICa-E'r4S (having) lasting ten years a. Here belong the numerous adjectives in -cv71s (-o-eL8hs): 7cYacoCbaVr = yvvauco-eisr having the appearance or character of woman, woman-like. 482. 3. DETERMINATIVE COMPOUNDS. In these also, the first part qualifies (or determines) the second, but without the added idea of possession; so that the compound may be expressed by two words, the first of which is an adjective or adverb: a.Kpd-7roXt-s (summit-city) citadel = icpa rodAts uear-?7JUptpa mid-day = aOe'7 fl7 epa esvao-Kicpvz false herald ='-evubs KcpV ouJd-&ovxo-s fellow-servant = 6OMoO 6ovAevcvw,E7yaXo-7rpe7rhs (grand-appearing) magjnficent 4ti-?yovo-s late-born = — E 7YerdUEvos This is the least numerous of the three classes. REM. Prelpositions may be connected with substantives in each of the above-described relations: a. OBJECTIVE:?YXo6PLos native = 6',r.7 XcTp, (wv) Epir7rLos belonging to a horse = e+''l7rr, (yv) b. POSSESSIVE: ehSeos having a god in him, inspired, = e' ('av'r,) aebv'EXWo &5pLKCW, having pillars round it = icdyas &a,ump' (abTbv) gEXov C. DETERMINATIVE: &ipqta&r-pov amphithetre -= a surrounding or circular theatre'&Tehe0epos freed-man, = free from (the gift of) another, = 6 &~rd Twvos tIE'rps 484 1 MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS, 199 483. ALPHA PRIIVATIVE. The prefix dv- (cf. IveV wOithout, Lat. in-, Eng. un-), before consonants a-, is called on account of its meaning Alpha privative. Compounds formed with it are determinative, when the second part comes from a verb or adjective; when it comes from a substantive, they are mostly possessive: 6&-ypacpo-s unwritten = ov 7EpyEpaypEvos a'-EXevAsEpo-s unfree = obUcK EXe6~epos &a-atahs shameless = alla& olNc EXwog &-lrats childless = 7raoas obtc EXWco a. Determinative compounds formed with this prefix from substantives, are rare and poetic: sTo7xp a7P rcp aan unmotherly mother =,urrnp ov ytxr)p ouo'a. b. Words, which began originally with digamnma, have a-, not ay-: -E'-cwv, tCcoWY, eunwillingt, &a-Ecis, alcs, unseemly (st. sic, Eouca). 484. The inseparable prefix &vs- ill is the opposite of e6 well, and expresses something bad, unfortsenate, or difilcult: avs[3ovXos ill-advised (possessive) =;caKc&s 13ovA&ir'XOV, avsdpeWT-os (determinative) ill-pleasecl, aUSACXWoT0 hard to be caught. Here too, determinative compounds formed from substantives are very rare: Hm. Avdsraptr wretched Paris. 200 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. OBJECT. [485 PART FOURTH. SYNTAX. DEFINITIONS. 485. SYNTAX (oVTa$tS arrangizng together) shows how wordz are combined in sentences. A SENTENCE iS SIMPLE, when the essential parts of a sentence are found in it only once. (For compound sentences, see 724.) The essential parts of a sentence are the SUBJECT, of which something is said, and the PREDICATE, which is said of the subject. The subject of a sentence is a substantive (or substantive pronoun) in the nominative case. The predicate of a sentence is afinite verb in the same number and person as the subject. a. The only nominatives of the first person are syc6, Y6&, i1e'is; of the second person, ad, apc, biters; all other nominatives are of the third person. b. These are sometimes called the grammatical, in distinction from the logical, subject and predicate. The latter include, beside the nominative and finite verb, all other words in the sentence which belong to these respectively. Thus in the sentence Evptwv EZvaV/rTldTW ij JuvX% 7e/Iel yuSv our soul isffull oJ numberless contraclictions, 1uvXi and ye'LEL are the grammatical subject and predicate, j AuvX% IUCv and,Lpupiow E'Var7LwtCdrV?'yEL the logical. c. The infinitive mode, though it is not the predicate of a sentence, has its subject. The subject of the infinitive is a substantive in the accusative case. 486. OBJECT. The verb, beside its subject, may have an object on which its action is exerted. The object of a verb is a substantive in an oblique case (accusative, genitive, or dative). The object is direct or indirect, according as it is related immediately or remotely to the action of the verb. The verb is transitive, when its action passes over to a direct object: otherwvise, it is intransitive. a. The remote relations of an object to a verb are expressed to a great extent by means of prepositions. b. The infinzitive and participle may have objects, both direct and mdirect, like the finite verbs to which they belong. 490] VERBS OF INCOMPLETE PREDICATION. 201 ATTRIBUTIVE, APPOSITIVE, AND PREDICATE-NOUN. 487. A substantive may be qualified a. by an adjective in the same case, number, and gender. b. by a substantive in the same case. 488. The adjective is called a. an ATTRIBUTIVE, when its connection with the substantive is taken for granted in the sentence, not brought about by it: o aya&oS Jv&jp &aIcrEG a v &KaLovrvrv the good man practises justice b. a PREDICATE-ADJECTIVE, when it is brought by the sentence into connection with the substantive: ob &vrp Jyaco' &er — (7-yyveTra, oatvcrac, KaEacLtat, vobfterat) the man is (becomes, appears, is called, is considered as) good. REA. c. The adjective in the former case is purely adnominal, belonging exclusively to its substantive: in the latter case, it is generally adverbial, being connected also with the verb.-Thus the Greek often uses a predicate-adjective, where other languages use an adverb, or a preposition with its ease: Tp'rTaoeL &arXkaov they went away on the third day, Aatcata,uo'Ytoi vO'1TpOL &4iicorvo the Lacedaemonians arrived afJterward, O'pktds oot xiyw I speak to you under oath. In some such cases, the adverb, used in Greek, would give a different meaning: Irpc)ros Mv6Sty.7 7rposf3aXe he first (before any one else) attacked Methymna; -rpqdT-p MrTLzp 7rposi4fael he attacked Miethymnna first (before any other place); but with the adverb, 7rp&~roy Mav',Yp rposeL3aXe.first (before doing any thing else) he attacked Methymna. 489. In the same two cases (488 a, b), the qualifying substantive is called a. an APPOSITIVE: SavpaMgo MtLXkrtarV Trv or-rpa-r7y&6v IJadmire liltiades the general. b. a PREDICATE-SUBSTANTIVE: 7roLo0V-t (KaXovrto,,ca.tLo-ro-t, vog[oVrLt) MATLXrtrV o-rpaoTyov they mnake (call, appoint, consider) Mfiltiades a general. REM. c. The substantive qualified is called the SUBJECT of the attributive, appositive, or predicate-noul. This must not be confounded with the subject of a sentence (485). d. The attributive stands in the closest relation to its subject, forming with it one complex idea, like the parts of a compound word. The appositive, in general, is less closely related to its subject, being added to it as an explanation or description. (But see 500 a.) The predicate-noun (adjective or substantive) is still less closely related to its subject, being brought into connection with it by the sentence. e. The predicate-noun is sometimes called simply a predicate. It is occasionally preceded by'rs as, expressing comparison: r-o7s irreoav'Ws UhoAor s XPyVal they treat the weaker as slaves. VERBS OF INCOMPLETE PREDICATION. 490. Many verbs, from the nature of their meaning, are commnonly connected with a predicate-noun. Such are verbs which 202 EQUIVALENTS OF SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. L490 signify to be, become, appear, be called, chosen, considered, and the like. W~ith these, a predicate-noun is put in the nominative case, agreeing with the subject of the verb:: o avr'p yaoa i-TrrT (yLyvETat, alverTat, KaXEITaL, vo/J4E1Tat); see 540. a. The verb Ecdl to be, when thus used, is called the copula, since it does little more than couple the subject and the predicate-noun. For the frequent omission of the copula, see 508 a. b. Yet all these verbs, even aELL to be. are often used without a predicate-noun, as complete predicates. c. Transitive verbs, which correspond in sense to the foregoing: take a predicate-noun in the accusative case, agreeing with the object of the verb. Such are verbs which signify to nmake, call, appoint, consider, and the like: 7rotod0- (K(XO0-t, KaLtoTractl, vo/tlSovot) MtXT6ta8iv 7rpaT7yodr; see 556. d. The infinitives and participles of the same verbs are also connected with predicate-nouns belonging to their subject or object. PRONOUNS OF REFERENCE. 491. a. RELATIVE PRONOUN. A substantive may be qualified by a sentence: 9v-p or 7rdVreS 4tAovgcrt a man whom all love = avl.p rrar-t aiXos a manz beloved by all. The sentence is then introduced by a relative pronoun, in the same number and gender as the substantive. The latter, as it commonly goes before the relative, is called its ANTECEDENT. b. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN OF REFERENCE. A substantive, once used, may be recalled or referred to by a demonstrative pronoun, in the same number and gender as the substantive or antecedent. 492. EQUIVALENTS OF THIE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. The functions of the substantive and adjective, described in the foregoing sections, may be sustained by other parts of speech or forms of expression. The principal equivalents of the ADJECTIVE are a. the article: ol a"vzpcoroL the men. b. the adjective pronoun: rl VES AvZpoo7rot what men? c. the participle: avIo0vTreEs avpco7roc dispirited men. d. The article is used only as an attributive. So too the adjective and participle are always attributive, when placed directly after the article. In like manner, other forms of expression, when they follow the article, have the force of attributives: especially e. a substantive in the genitive: ol e'Ts 7rdoAows W'pworoi the men of the city. f. an adverb: ol yv YvapcTOro the men now (living). g. a preposition with its case: ot Ev ~f 6rdXeL &vrpworoi the men in the city. h. Even without an article preceding it, the genitive is often used as an.ttribu;ive: 4ruaua appy5pou coins of silver - silver coin; also as a predicate 494J INDETERMINATE SUBJECT OR OBJECT. 203 noun: Tdl vtrxoysa &py pov oeal the coin is of silver. A similar use of the adverb, and of the preposition with its case, is comparatively rare: )'oora oub XAXo AT qe'peL ) v'T.lpvs 0ovXeaav defeat brings nothing else than utter servitude, eV'oVrt, T', TpJ7rep ijoa' oL dEEX7Aves the Greeks were in this condition. For the use of a sentence (relative sentence) as equivalent to the adjective, see 491 a. 493. The principal equivalents of the SUBSTANTIVE are a. the adjective, or any of its equivalents, when used without a substantive: 7rivrev EyrnvEorav all approved, oliv y 7rr cO e'xa XraLwov those in the city were angry. b. the substantive pronoun (personal or reflexive): 1E7lE 6/~oXovyoDzeV twe assent. c. the infinitive, with or without the neuter article: B8o&ev ad7reeELV it was thought best to depart. d. a sentence, used as the subject or object of another sentence: Xeyea'at o ravTaa fyEVEro it is said that these things took place. e. any word or phrase viewed merely as a thing: sb yvbJL orvea(rTo Kal Trb ocPVpoeEt ivo ra7rdv the " know thyself" and the " be wise" are the same thing. The forms c, d, e, are equivalent to substantives of the neuter gender. f. A preposition with a numeral may take the place of a substantive: &7reravo anvr'v creptl E[3Souicovn'a there died of them about seventy, 6EraeLpav es octaicotfovs they destroyed to the number of eight hundred. So also the phrases, ur! wroX6 a wide extent, el jItIUya a great part, cKay' ICdTovs oor Ca' (ie'a) ei'car-ro, each by himself, and a few others: at viies eril -roXb Tr5s daAooadrs?reZXos, the ships covered a wide extent of the sea. g. All these forms are said to be used substantively, or used as substantives. INDETERMINATE'SUBJECT OR OBJECT. 494. The subject of a sentence may be thought of in a manner wholly vague and general, merely as that to which the predicate applies. This is called the indeterminate subject, and is not expressed in words: oBf eJv it was late, 7ie'pa?e1YeTo it became day, icaXAs EXEL it is well, 6eI,ttaXs (it needs a battle) there is need of a battle, rxAoZ (there is something that makes clear) it is clear, 7raprEKeI (there is something that allows) it is allowed. -The same construction is seen in passive verbs, especially in the perfect and pluperfect: rapeomKcedarcaf ot (things have been prepared) preparation has been made by me. But it occurs most frequently when the verbal in e`oon (or Ta) is used with eriJto be (expressed or understood): obic &alK)T1Eor eGat (not any thing is to be unjustly done) injustice must not be done, T s,4Ptu irerO'ie O (or revoea)-obedience must be rendered to the law. a. These verbs which have the indeterminate subject, are most properly called IMPERSONAL verbs. That name, however, is applied also to the more frequent cases, in which the subject of a verb is not a nominative, but an infinitive or a sentence: E$eTrlv ebatltoveiv it is possible to be happy,,)Xov rv oTr;iyyvs 7rov 6 /3a-ctXeb 71y it was plain that the king was somewhere near. 204 GENERAL, RULES OF AGREEMENT. [4!) 495. The object of a verb may be similarly indeterminate: poet. o'Tar 6 ba[cov Eb 8acp,,' anE? ifAwvx whenever the divinity mnay giv abundantly, what need of friends? Transitive verbs may thus appear as intransitive: 6?o'yos KCaTEXEL the story (holds) prevails. 496. The subject of an attributive is very often indeterminate. The attributive then is neuter, and mnay be either singular or plural. The indeterminate subject may be expressed by such words as thing, caffcir, condition, quality, space, time, and many more:'yaad (good things) goods, rb xEyoEuEvov (the thing said) the common saying,'r& XpaolFua (the useful things) that which is ueseful, Ta' ris,rd cxes the (effairs) of the city, Trb Tvpavvrcv the (condition or character) of tyrant, Tb icaXo& the (quality) beautiful, &erl'rox6 (over much space or time) to a great extent or for a long time, E'oI d'aw, (in the midst) in public, &' ou (from what time) since, Tb a&rb T'oVe (the time from this time) henaceforth, Tob varucdv the (naval force) navy, ob 6apBaplc&,v the (barbarian world) barbarians, Tob colvv the commonwealth, Ta AoioviaLa the (festival) of Dionysus; cf. 563 b. a. Neuter pronouns are very often thus used with indeterminate subject: other attributives, in this use, are generally preceded by the neuter article. GENERAL RULES OF AGREEMENT. FINITE VERB AND SUBJECT-NOM1NATIVE. 497. a. A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative is number and person. But b. With a neuter plural nominative, the verb is singular Cf. 514 e. E:XA3MPLES. a. e aui 7rd-r'a el7res, ical pErvyoauey t7Eies thou saidst all thing, well, and we approved.- b. T v7rpd/lcuara TaVTa &eyvd e'TL these circumstances are fearful. For exceptions in NUMBER, see 511-17. For OMISSION of the subject or the predicate, see 504, 508. ADJECTIVE AND SU`BSTANTIVYE. 498. An adjective agrees with its substantive in case, lumber, and gender: avip etdMTrTlos eaE'Xet alo'Xpcov icEpav a'&rEEo'at a man fond of honor is disposed to abstain from dishonorable gains.- This rule applies both to the attributive and the predicate-adjective. Similar rules may be given for the ARTICLE, ADJECTIVE-PRONOUN, and PARTICIPLE. For exceptions in NUMBER and GENDER, see 511-23. For OMISSION of the subject, see 509. APPOSITIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 499. The appositive agrees in case with its subject:.bes IIEXras rdXJA, olcovsiY, to Peltae, an iznhabited city.-A similar rule may be given for the PREDICATE-SUBSTANTIVE. 602J APPOSITION. 205 500. Apposition is of several kinds: a. ATTRIBUTIVE APPOSITION: the appositive has the force of anl attributive v7roza06vxaKes XoXayof rear-guard captains. In this way, words denoting station or condition are connected with ahvp manw or &,?pnoros person (the former often implying respect, the latter contempt): tYivpeS LKacoTat judges (juror-men, cf. Eng. gentlemen of the jury), AEETOIKOS porpwwros a foreign-resident. Names of nations in attributive apposition assume the character of adjectives: *EAXkWes 7reXataTa[ Grecian targeteers. Here belong also-the cases in which an appositive is placed between the article and its substantive (534 a): 6 EbopdTns 7rorcauos the river -Euphrates, 6 MErayelTVLI'or bUV the month ffietageitnion. b. PARTITIVE APPOSITION: the appositive is related to its subject as the part to the whole: 6 ~'rpa'bs, Ii7rreTs ical redo~ the army, cavalry and infantr y, A7lral at t.Y PXp7o-'rat C elai, al K caicai pains are, some good, others evil, at TEXvat rb auTrs EKcT7' Epp'OY o Epy7deIat the arts work each one its own work, o 1oa xAAos axxa xAeyEt these say, one one thing, another another. To words denoting person, in the accusative or dative, the poets often add an appositive denoting the part (head, hand, heart, mind, shield, etc.) which is specially affected by the action: A~'orfT'IVY ob'areEv xYov he wounded _Dezopotes (in) the shoulder, K&86' Xos oLE X0 LTO Vp[OY o/)aaXu/oo',v excessive grief overspread (him the eyes) his eyes, Iroov' he e&7rOr qpyEV ePKOs 05&,yVwVY what manner of saying has escaped the fence of thy teeth? ads'ET itY'ce'I-o avl'; and satiety came to his spir it, o'ol yap TIe Idx.-cd'ye Xabs'AXaltYp'relo'o vTal /&vaotoL for thy words most of all will the people of the Achaeans obey. c. DESCRIPTIVE APPOSITION: the subject gives the name of something, which is then described by the appositive: fj iweTIpa 7rJXi, rs aorlj KaTrauvwy T'Gr'EXXvwv our city, the common refuge of the Greeks, Sdipcos ial p4/3os, OQppove vefiuovXAo boldness and fear, inconsiderate counsellors,'AA4av'pos o z-..rr7rov (sc. vlos) Alexander the son of Philip. d. DEFINITIVE APPOSITION: the subject vaguely indicates something, which is then definitely expressed by the appositive: O arvaTos TvyXavel &,v avop, 7rpayAd'roLv a8dxvoaLs,'ruS /vcXs Kad'TOO oYCaqros death happens to be a separation of two things, the soul and the body, oto-d ye av'dr, l ebCovXC[a this very thing, good counsel, 8ooei rb P'a-ov rrOE-V, 7rMttLzaP 70Cs XXtols I seem to be doing the easiest thing, censuring the others. - In Hm., the demonstrative 6 5b, used at the beginning of a sentence, is often explained at the close by adding as an appositive the object referred to: or 8' a-Vto1 fXe' 6eipav Tpies but they in opposition r'aised their spears, the Trojans, Tb 8' b7rFp'arTa -o XdXceov eYXOS but it flew over him, the brazen spear. With 6 e'v, this is much less often the case. 501. When a WORD and a SENTENCE are in apposition, the word may stand either in the nominative or the accusative: poet. KE'ICalt Creo'd'Tes, 7rl'rTlS Ob (YJuKcp& 7rdAEl they are fallen, no snmall ground of con fidence to the city, poet. evSateovots, Atibt v 7o' - 8'lTov X 6ycov mtay you be happy, a reward for the sweetest words.- The word is put in the nominative, as not depending in construction upon any other word (542). When, however, it is put in the accusative, it is brought into a kind of dependence on the verb of the sentence, as if in apposition with a cognate-accusative (547) supplied after the verb: ebvaluovoti-s (ebvayuovlav)!l~abv, etc. 502. a. When the word is neuter, it is not certain from the form, which of the two cases is used. If, however, it stands in apposition with a dependent sentence, it must be regarded as an accusative. 206 AGREEMENT. OMITTED SUBJECT. [502 b. Neuter words often used in apposition with a sentence, are a7ye7ov sign,'reic,~ptLoY evidence, KerpdAcaov chief point; also attributives with the neuter article, ob pU7E'YTOV the greatest thing, f'b 4vavTLon the contrary, T'b'ris rapoILpas the expression of the proverb; and neuter pronouns, as av'Tb To7'o this very thing, Trav'Tb'o9To this same thing, avoZy tlTCepov one of two things, &l'L-epOpV or uip4repa both, etc. c. The sentence is sometimes introduced by?ydp for, especially after os0ftE7oJ and r-cnppLors, which may then be regarded as sentences themselves: ob"a r ro'T'voV,'icevoL O27/SEmor a'i o' y&p hp Seip' icov &s peyas they had no confidence; but proof (of this is here, follows); for they would not (otherwise) have come to us. PRONOUN OF REFERENCE WITH ITS ANTECEDENT. 503. The relative agrees with its antecedent in number and gender: e'raava iv Iphv 7, eI' AXE7?E'JaL Mapoa'as Trbv a~rTvpo, S7jpea'rat here was a spring, by which Mlarsyas is said to have caught the Satyr, irapdceLaos alphcto 7rAhpr~s, & Kvpos E'ipeve a park full of wild beasts, which Cyrus used to hunt. — A similar rule may be given for the DEMONSTRATIVE OF REFERENCE. a. If the relative is subject of a sentence, its verb takes the person of the antecedent: cLES oi ~TOoro XEkyoe Ie we who say this. For exceptions, see 511-23. For attraction, incoeroration, and other peculiarities of relative sentences, see 807-23. OMITTED SUBJECT, PREDICATE, AND OBJECT. 504. The SUBJECT of a FINITE VERB iS often omitted; a. when it is a pronoun of the first or second person. It is then sufficiently expressed by the personal ending of the verb: AiEyed I speak, aicovoaze hear ye. But the pronoun is not omitted, if there is an emphasis upon it: & an leysB AeeyW, veiZs acovo'a-re whatever I may say, do youe hear. Compare 667. b. when it is a pronoun of the third person, referring to a word in the context: Kipos,&s Vaus eTe'Are'r ea'Tro, wrcos 07rXtras ahroatdoee, ical! i3aoaaYeo1'-robs 7roXelouvs 7rape4Xolez,, eL ePvdrXd'oteYV Cyrus sent for the ships, that he (Cyrus) might land heavy-armed men, and they (the army of Cyrus) having overpowerea the enemy might effect a passage, if they (the enemy) should be keeping guard. The subject may be only impliedin the context; as the subject of 7rapEXAoiep in the example just given: vauv'cah 4epTv''ETo i'EAXas, ical T s aa;dosor &7VTriXOYTVO (sc. o "E'EXXAres) Greece was fitting out navies, and they (the Greeks) Lcre applying themselves to the sea. c. when it is a general idea of person (('iWvpcorros). Thus in plurals such as ea[t, Xeyova', they (men, people) say. Less often in the singular: ZodA'razye the trumpet sounded, lit. (one) sounded the trumpet. A subject of this kind is very often omitted, when it is the antecedent of a re. 508] OMITTEI) SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 207 lative pronoun; the relative sentence then takes the place of a sllbject (810): b& of reo! (plXool iv a7roavotceL vEos (one) twhom the gods love dies young. Here belong, at least in their original use, such verbs as dfeL it rains, viLper it snows, a&opd7rreL it lightens, OelrE (it shakes) there is an earthquake, etc.; these operations of nature being regarded by the Greeks as actions of a divine person, ZeWs or reo's (which are sometimes expressed with these verbs). In later use, the idea of personal agency seems to have been lost, so that the subject became wholly indeterminate; see d. d. when it is the indeterminate, subject (494): Ws be abi, oV TrpooVXcSpe but when (things did not advance for him) he had no success. Here also a relative sentence may take the place of a subject: poet. e/c 7T0o phLoarove7v 77L'Ery' cv UEXEL c KpaT'e7v frone love of toil are produced (things) which you wish to possess. 505. The OBJECT of a VERB may be omitted in the same cases (the first, of course, excepted): thus b. when it is a pronoun, referring to a word expressed or implied in the context:?,7rLrx4s &7razio-wv TqvY yvc765 &7lTrrer/tre (se. ai'Tofs, referring to i&rdvCoyv)filling the mind of all he sent (them) away. c. when it is a general idea of person: -rPXOT'SrLa 7rapoyveL (sc. avYpc&Irovs) IcvorvheveLIv irep ea3otias Te ical'raTrpihos emulation incites (men) to incur danger for fame and country, poet. S7X.c &av8p&v Zs a&tcvvuvov Bifov,nerepaae I envy among men (one) who has passed a life without danger. d. when it is indeterminate: 8iacqipet rduroXv iCab&iv yiA lzad-vTos one who has learned (things learnable, i. e. truth, knowledge) differs entirely from one who has not learned, ol aeol o'Y EdUEaa aTtaE'e~ceVdl'ca'cL the gods have provided (the thingys) which we require. 506. The subject of an appositive or prediocate-noun may be omitted, when it is the same with the omitted subject or object of a verb: thus, of an APPOSITIVE: OeyzT'oicAris ~icw rap& oe (1) Themistocles am come to thee;-of a PREDICATE-NOUN: p`TropEis eo-TE (ye) are orators, tv olf aEo (piXoc'tv a7rov{7oweto ves (one) whom the gods love dies young, -& craicws'rpcpovTa Xcop' &aSpeLous 7roLes (se. a&vrpcsrovs) the places that furnish a poor support make (mnen) manly. 507. The PREDICATE-NOUN is seldom omitted: a-i 84 iearL Tou'o, TrEpl ou avlT's Lort0,-T wv ecrly o6 afo(wTjs, ical Tbm yaIaarTrv (sc. r1mo'T/oyYva) irote? what, now, is this, with which the sophist is both acquainted himself, and makes his pulpil acquainted),? 508. The VERB itself is sometimes omitted: thus a. the verb Elit to be, when used as a copula (490 a). The forms ea-tI and eoar are very often omitted: &ayaabs 6 &avhp the mna (is) good, aLcv 7L'a,urs /ue7y~arf the power of the gods (is) greatest, Tlr'rovo what (is) this? what of it?'rcTva!xEv ove. 8 oi'rTcs I say, then, these things (are) so, ohX boDa caaEVELv (it is) not time to be sleeping, o0 &aLcol ob, 7rpd&TTrE, xE"T' a&\xixwv ostiore the unjust (are) able to accomplish nothing with one another, ihrrias e7re/4eV lpoevTas OTL iv 68j?5h771?rdvTes he sent horsemen to say that (they are) now ll on the way:-especially with verbals in TEop or TE'a (494): AT, vd,ucp reto-fop (rELrTE'da) the late must be obeyed, lit. (something is, or things are) to be lone in obedience to the law. The omission of the copula in other forms is 208 VERB OMITTED. [508 comparatively rare: (poALoos iyo wye{4c. eidel) Ifor my j art (am) fond of hear ing, fows (sc. Ea-I) ET' ev a~Gaaxk, JvAd,~aaae whrile (you are) yet in safety, beware, Yb, (sc. vP) iv,, Ca! rap/etVoq ~ a boTepafcS night intervened, and we werd present on the next day. b. some common verbs of being, doing, saying, going, cominzg, bringing. This omission is nearly confined to brief and pointed expression, especially in questions and commands. Thus, XxAo Ti ~ or XXao TI (sc. EGTt, is) any thAi9 else (true, than what follows?, see 829 a).-T'a ri (sc.?ygEn/al) to what end? lit. that what (thing may come to pass?, see 826 b). — ypLwTrepovs av'obas &arrlpY77v, icai a'ra (sc. Eiroaio'ev) ells au'roz he rendered thenm wilder, and that (he did, viz. rendered them wilder) toward himself; ical av'Ta is especially used with concessive participles (789 f): boice-s ltot ou Irpos~Exeiv, ical'raca aoqpbs &i you seem to me not to observe, and that (you do) though you are wise.- T l AXXo oTo01 (sc. -rofioa-av) ~ -7ireaovXeva-av what else (did) these men than plot against (us)? obr, XV2' i) av/xaovXoeovart /7Uyv (they do) nothing else than advise us, Ti Xpb T'0b eEIT`piOJ 7roaXi7r,; & i&avToO 7rmEpaa-Iat ~Weev what should the mnoderate citizen (do)? endeavor to preserve his own, ev ye, y'r7'v "'Hpav, oiI opaoZs'bwv zraT'.pa (thou dost) well, by Hera, that thou art upholding tly father. — IcKalot Cal TOOTO (sc. xAEeY or XECe) thouGgh this also (I say, or will say), &XXW oairw 7repl ToVr6'oo but not yet concerning these things (will I speak), iErEl acK'iEvo (sc. AeXce'ov a-'~i) since that too (must be mentioned), jiux /uo0 tupiovs Eloavs (sc. X-YETE, tell) me not of ten thousand mercenaries. —— & cpxe a7pe, 7roa? &1 (sc. el), tKal ro'-ev (sc. 5tcES) dear Phaedrus, whither, Ipray (are you going), and whence (are you come)? es IecopaKas (sc. eppie, go) to destruction, lit. to the crows, as their prey, OVba es Itcpaa-as (sc. Eppj'oets) -wo'nt you go to destruction??- oop, v{'cop (se. EpePEE), EYEz[soves (bring) water, water, ye neighbors. For ouiX -rI,,Ij otr, see 848 c. c. any verb may be omitted, where it is readily supplied from a verb in the context; Td E y&p "EXXvN EJ, eKal p/Ae7s (sc. iAel'EXXpjves) for both yoe are a Creek, aFnd we (are Greeks), Tb aoceps obods aS ov'E ToT (sc. EtIXZI) ovUr vOV EXetL El'7reL the certain fact no one either then (was able) or nzow is able to state. Such onlissions are especially frequent in connection with conditional and relative sentences, cf.'754, 819. The infinitive and participle may be omitted in the same way: o0irE rdc'Xoares aICCtK obav, oVTE IAXaho'Tes (sc. wrcaXewv) neither suffering any evil, nZor being likely to (suffer any), &veXc&pqaav Kal oal'A5?vYaot, ireiSa a-al Tobs AaKceaqaoviaovs cE8sov (sc. amvaXcpovrTas) the Athenians (also, 856 b) retired, when they saw the Laceclaemonians also (retiring).-For oav!t 5 &xxd, see 848 e. 509. The SUBJECT of an ATTRIBUTIVE is very often omitted; a. when it is expressed or implied in some word of the context: El TW 1/VPL0U' ix-iriaewv /da TIS (sC. iAXirs) v Zo' ~Ti if of ten thousand hopes you have any one (hope of being saved), Tis &v at~XaivY et'n cavsjs (sc. 860vrs) 64ca what reputatoio could be more shameful than this?- Tov-To oiXtyas,EraLoe (se. s7rX-yyds) he struck this one afew (blows), c6s aaby? icKOL4aSS (SC. Worr/o) how deep (a sleep) you slept, es Lt'av fovXeveElv (sc. 3ovAiV) to join in one resolve. b. when it is a word in common use, and readily understood from,he meaning of the attributive or the connection of the sentence. The words most commonly omitted are aci'vp or p2ipworov9 man, y/vu'r mooman. 510] SUBJECT OF ATTRIBUTIVE OMITTED. 209 Other words omitted are masc. KdoXr^- pulf ovos c wine; and a number of feminines, such as'Itxpa day, ye lacnd,'Xrpa country, ds08 way, XeLo hand,'rxyxq7 art, and some others. 6 o'oqds the wise (man), 6 adpp3apos the barbarian, fj caX the beautiful (woman), ox 7roXXot the many, common people, of ~r7/3a7oL the Thebans, of iery7yv/EYvo, the (men) of after times, 6ircAcXoadlovo-at (women) in popular assembly.6'Idnois the Ionian (gulf, = Adriatic sea), 65 Scp5aos sunmixed (wine), i7 7rporepata the (day) before, 7i eIrioa the coming (day), i atpzov the morrow, i &vSopos the desert (land without water), ~ elFavT-oO my own (country), /B3dJ e T'i1r eNvesav walk the straight (way),; rye Trv &erl Me"yapa he was leading on the (way) toward 4Megara, 4' BeLSd the right (hand), j a&p'aTepd the left (hand), PtTOplKIC rhetoric (oratorical art), tcan&-'revJ e411z (SC. yvc6,U7 v) according to my (judgment),'iphpu (sc. I'7,wa) ca'I-yopo%-t they bring as plaintiffs a deserted (suit, the defendant not appearing), elicoo'T (plepts) a twentieth (part), j7 re7rpWep1,VE (Izo?pa) the allotted (portion), destiny. (a) Feminine adjectives without a subject are often used to express di. rection, manner, or condition. These uses may have grown out of an original omission of 65ds way: et i'vaV'fras from an opposite directiona, in front, UcaGcpd a long way off, es lawcpcdi at a long remove (in time), /jce?-V -aXt'-71v he sent (the quickest way) most quickly, A?7-~6edeL &vdycj'ij mrpor-p' it is necessary to plunder (as the first course) at first,'Tj 6AXXws &aoXeoa-X I am prating to no purpose (the way that leads otherwise, to no proper end),'j'X7j Ical 6,uota the equal and uniform (way of government), condition of civil equality. (/i) With an attributive genitive, vids son is often omitted:'AXavr3po.o'LAur7rov (sc. vids) Alexander the (son) of Philip, 6 ~ozqportoKou the (son) of Sophroniscus, i. e. Socrates. So okios house, or a word of similar meaning, in phrases such as els Itldrervos to Plato's (house), Ev "Amrou in (the abode of) Hades, iv Awora-ou in (the temple) of JDionysus, eas rros 8rao' dAov to what teacher's (school)? Rem. The omitted subjects mentioned under this head have been all mase. or fem. In like manner, neuter substantives might sometimes be supplied with attributives of neuter gender; but almost all cases of the kind are better referred to the following head. c. when it is indeterminate: the attributive is then neuter, and may be singular or plural. For examples, see 496. In cases b and c, the adjective is said to be used as a substantive: it may thus have another adjective joined with it as an attributive: 7rXeio-rot 7roXfiloe very many enemies, dvayKaiTo KaKtov a necessary evil. 510. The ANTECEDENT of a RELATIVE pronoun (if the relative sentence has the force of an attributive) may be omitted in the same three cases, 509 a, b, c; cf. 810: thus, a. when it is expressed or implied in some word of the context: vavuamXa 7raXamaTTr7 (so. Trv rav/zaXltr) TVry Yla6er a sea-fight the most ancient (of the sea5ghts) that we know of. b. when it is a word like &apwco7ros, a&r/p,?yuvi, etc.: EXoixev Kcal,?y irorAXv inal o'l'rIeS Ta'rlOY E'ipydaovTra we have both much land and (men) who will work et, obvetIa urdpea'vr &s sKeiv iCXpvr there is no one present (of the women),who ought to have come. c. when it is indeterminatce: ~ijetXeNs vr Be? &irlLE-eXeZLOa you neglect (things) t!.tich yOst ought to care for. 10 81O0 AGREEqMENT WITII TWO OR MOIRE SUBJECTS. r[1i PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBEII AND GENDER. AGREEIMENT WITH TWO O1R LMORE SUBJECTS. 511. Two or more subjects connected by AND may have a predicate-word (verb or adjective) in comnmon. For this case, we have the following rules. With two or mnore subjects connected by AND, a. the finite verb (or predicate-adjective) is in the pluzra:~ b. with two singular subjects, the dual may be used: With subjects of different persons, c. the verb is in thefirst, if that is found among the subjects: d. otherwise, it is in the second person. With subjects of different genders, e. the predicate-adjective is masculine, if they denote persons: f. it is neuter, if they denote things: g. if they denote persons and things together, it takes the gender of the persons. Often, however, h. the predicate-word agrees with one of the subjects (the nearest, or the most important), being understood with the rest. Especially so, when the predicate stands before all the subjects, or directly after the first of them. a. Xr~r3 Ical vsoALta calt 1tcaLa ESd TS aL'v &dleOau 47rfL7rrovo-L forgetfulness and peevishness and madness get into the mind. b. -lovy ical Xh7r7 E'Y Tfl q'dxet /,ao-LXeV'eG'zo V pleasur;e and pain will bear sway in the city. c. aeuvol cal o0pjol E'yc Tre tcal ab ijLev both I and thou were skilfull and wise.-d. ical ob Kal ol aexc2o! vrapo're both thou and thy brothers were present.-e. Kal 9 7vvJ Kad 6 aYlp &yaeOil e'lot both the woman and the man are good.- f. rdXe/Jor tcal ~Tdats Xo ipia'adrs irdeo'lv Eo-Tt war and faction are fatal to cities. —g. 7l Tvr-Xv tae I;IAtrsros au'av'-Y EpyloV KtpltoL fortune and Philip had control over the actions. --— h. ayaeXv's Icea ol abv avr'c dsTi'I7rbre el s ~b ~parta7rEaov the king and those with him break into the camp,'A5Y'v9a L oL 7re'i71jeS IaCl o 37OS'rXEEOeiXeL at Athens the poor and the common people have superior power, Erejlu4 tje'ApLaZos Ical'Apd0oCos, 7lOT0o orvtes Kpcp ticael 7va Evvol, ital KEXeovit rpvAAdr'reo-at Ariaeus and Artaozus sent me, being faithful to Cyrus and well-disposed toward you, and bid you be on your guard, E'yb;tyc yeal t eed 7rs'ra avb'T I and Seuthes say the same things. REM. i. When there is a predicate-acdjective in the neuter plural, the verb is regularly in the singular: ov-re'caTsar3 tedXAos tcal 01Xbs betAXp tvvoLICoGVTa w7rpErovra pah'vera- nor do beazty and strength of body, when dwelling with a coward, appear suitable.-/The predicate-adjective may be in the neuter plural, when the subjects (denoting things) are all masc. or all fem. (522): ebye'velid e Pcta Sv'vacsts tcal'TIsal 6qAd o'lTItv a&yaa& loYa high birth and pow'er and honor are manifest as being good things. It may also be in the neuter plural, when the subjects (or part of them) are persons, these being viewved merely as things: KaAXXto'rT IroOXTreL'a Kal o KatdXxtlros &zvp;XorT& &v'yjlk ei'[ aieAFeT- the nzoblest solity and the nzoblest,man wovuld be left for uts to consider. 514] AGREEMENT WiTH A PREDICATE-NOUN. 211 612. a. A plural predicate is rarely used, when singular subjects are con. nected by ~ or, oV7E nor: E/SEXXOP aS7roXAoyhaaT oai ACeWXCapSS 3) A1cawlo=E sLeochdres or.Dicaeogfnes were about to make a defence; rarely, also, when a singular subject is followed by the preposition wzith: A7Laooe-aE'`/s UeT-r& -'v urcer-pa7?7yrv' o0rerovTat MaviTveDuo.Desmosthenes with his associate-generals make a treaty with the AMantineans. b. The ATTRIBUTIVE regularly agrees with the nearest subject: 7rarvr Kcal Xys Kaal uin2xavfa by every sword and means. c. For the APPOSITIVE and PREDICATE-SUBSTANTIVE, rules may be given similar to those of 511 a, b: aPPos Kcal (pdBos, &cpove tvSuovcoXw daring and tsrror, unintelligent advisers,'HpacXris ecal Orr1ebs s7rep T'oD BfoV Tr&v rvapco7rrov &,9X-ral carTo'aV-aP Heracles and Theseus became champions for the life of men. d. For the PRONOUN OF REFERENCE, the same rules may be given as for the predicate-adjective above (511): thus a and f, 7repl?roXEJov ical Elpxrvs, & eXEl' etyiS-rTpy aUlaIPY ev y cIT,iT -'V &cr,SpcrrcvX concerning war and peace, which have the greatest power in the life of snen; so h, &7raXXaTyE'VTes roXEYcov cal cIcvd3iCV Kail TrapaX-s, eds %v'iY 7rpbs &iAXXXous carE-'Tr/Ler delivered from wars and dangerses andl trouble, in wehich we have nouw become involved with one another. AGIZEEM3ENT WITH A PREIDICAT:E-NOUN.. 513. a. A verb of incomplete predication (490) may agree with the predicate-noun, when this stands nearer than the subject, or is viewed as more important at Xopqy[ac iccarbv evba/usoveias orrl,,ueJiv eOr the dramatic expeznditures are a s"e/cient sign of prosperity, rb Xwpiov pr-pd-TCpov'Ervia 6bol Elcaxoa -c'o the place was before called Niine WtIays. So, also, participles of such verbs: r7rete',evro -as avya'alpas srail[a oyhva they conveyed away their daughters being children. b. A relative pronoun, used as a subject, instead of agreeing with its antecedent, may agree with its predicate-noun. i7 ov pe)Ccaros r? yrlnY'o i'JLepov Zebs w'vJAaa-e the founztain of that stream which Zeus named Desire. The relative may even agree with a predicate-noun belonging to the antecedent: oUberOT' &, E'rl 7' 571ToptIcIC 9tCOy'srpay/a, o V' &al rrEp1 aicalorvJls T'os Xdyous 7roLte-at rheton;ic could never be an usnjust affair, since at least it.(rhetoric) is always making its discourses about justice. c. A pronoun of reference, which would properly be neuter, as referring to an indeterminate subject, or to an infinitive or a sentence, may be masc. or, fem. to agree with a predicate-noun: ~-oviOT Etrv &yota this (view or conduct) is folly, but often aYC'r7, iE'l yotla; so i~8e &py~ Xrs 6uo0Xoyias, Epiou-ar -las aVb'roVs this is a beginning of agreement, (viz.) to question one another, rY7rep icaXovmye, l.ScLY-r, ayda'vlrSs ear-c (that) v hich we call learning, is recollecti.ng. SINGULAR AND PLURAL UNITED. 514. COLLECTIVE SUBJECT. The singular is sometimes used in a collective sense, expressing more than one: &So9- clothing (clothes), 7rXLv3os brick ( — bricks), [7nrros the horse (cavalry), r3 aorsi the hearvy-armed. 212 AGiEEMENT WITH COLLECTIVE SUBJECT. [514 a. A collective subject denoting persons, may have a pre. dicate-word (verb or noun) in the plural:'Azl'a7wv'b 7rXJaros o5OYvTa'"I7rlrapXOV Tv'pavJo'bVTa a7roaaveZ the multitude of the Athenians believe that I[ipparchus was tyrant (of Athens) when he died, t-b 6Opd&revta E7ropiETo -o -,O KCrT0oFMes'robs BoSs cal O'eovs the army provided itself food by slaughtering the oxen and asses. b. Such words as e'ca-'os each, Tls any one, rias TIS every one, obve's nt one, may have the construction of collectives, on account of the plural which they imply: ica&' o'-ov bl/avTal - tca o'ros as far as each one is able, ovbels eicotu -1bS, Tobos aroXowoTas 71ree r oV'res no one wuent to sleep, (all) lamenting the lost. c. A pronoun of reference, referring to a collective, may be in the plural: srapEorat wrp'eeta, o' TcVre cpeI[,o'-ovs c'i (assistance, i. e.) an auxiliary force will be present, who are more efective than these, MEeNxL'w C-oL TOg w7rkafovs, ical KeXap~lroos ab'-os &pXe be careful of the multitude, and govern in a way acceptable to them, Ov'yicaXAEoas ra q'b o'- pa-PC criwLbe, gxete rpbs abVros Tolazde having called together the entire soldiery, he spoke to them as follows, s'b'ApcMa&rcbv 0rXt-'ucKbe, ey {pXe KAEdavOp the Arcadian heavy-armedforce, whom (VAznor led, wras Trs i/evvoe, ors o etxcooe TvUYXdcvo every body swears, whom I.e&ppen to owe, izj cSKIceV TIsr's7rLXetp.7,'Crois Kvpos wroXheCos gr'val if any one attempt to do is iustice, to these Cyrus will be an enemy. d. Any singular antecedent, though denoting an individual, may suggest the idea of other like individuals, and may thus have a pronoun of reference in the plural: boavpoa rop bs &ep, oets o ical E' 7ratve'irb 7rAxiaos a money-making man, just (those) whom the multitude even praise. Conversely, when the antecedent is plural, the pronoun of reference is sometimes singular, referring to an individual of the number: ao'7rdCEraL wdrCTas, q ax lrepLTvTXcdyi he embraces all men, whatsoever one he may fall in with. e. When the collective subject denotes THINGS (not persons), the predicate is regularly singular. The neuter plural subject was regarded by the Greeks in this way, as a collection of things, and was accordingly connected with a singular verb. But if the neuter plural subject denote persons, then, like the collective, it may have a verb in the plural. Hence the following rules: 515. NEUTER PLURAL SUBJECT. A neuter plural nominative has the finite verb in the singular: see 497 b. But Exc. a. A neuter plural subject, denoting PERSONS, may have a verb in the plural: Hi rE'Xrl X vre'XoTo the authorities promised, -oaod6e J/ETa'Aar7aYacoe *r'-Tpd'evo, so many nations were combating on the side of the Athenians. b. Other exceptions to this rule, though rare in Attic, are frequent in the other dialects: thus Hm. ardapTa IAEvvJPa' the cables are loosed. 516. In a few instances, a plural subject, masculine or feminine, has a verb in the singular. This can hardly occur, except when the verb stands first, the subject being then thought of indeterminately, but afterwards specified by the nominative: 8otcotyrL &Kcati, eleat y['yeTaI &7rb Tqs 8dVl4rSs 3pXat s'i scal yaeoL to (a man) reputed to be just, there comes, in consequence of his reputation, both offices and nupztials. So with the dual: ec -t T-o7V-W 3T1 — & -k B there are these two di ferent ways of living. For ea-t o' OT (o'-teEs), see 8i2. 520J PECULIARITIES OF NUMIBER. 213 517. DUAL AND PLURAL UNITED. In speaking of TwVO, the dual is used, if the specific number is prominently thought of; if not, the plural. Hence, The, dual and plural are fieely united or interchanged in the same construction: srposeTpexov 86o eacuio-icw two young men were running up, YXeAa"odT'7V t/LUW A4'davTes's e Xs &xhxovs they both laughed out on looking at one another, Mdteo~E $,' aVp, XapeEo let me go now, fare ye well. 518. PLURAL FOR SINGULAR. The Greek sometimes uses the plural, where English idiom prefers the singular: thus, a. in impersonal constructions (494 a), a PREDICATE-ADJECTIVE may stand in the neuter plural: thus, with indeterminate subject, 7roXel'7TEa Jvy it was zecessary to make war (things were to be done in war), 7rXoAuciTrepa EyyE'eTo navigation became more advanced (things became more favorable to navigation). So too, with an infinitive as subject: &zv'VardC Ei'Tvl &aroouwyez'v it is impossible to escape. b. a NEUTER PRONOUN may be plural, when referring to an infinitive or sentence, which is then viewed as something complex: 6 &avo'7os dtevpioros T-dx' &V oed2eifl ~'aVTa, (pEVTEoI, eiaL Carob ToO 6e~ard'rov a man without sense wouldperhaps think this, that it was necessary toflee from his master, Kca-drv e' opTrs ijco/oev, ial v'YrepoiOezv;'TOCoTv, acTlos XaipepLCv, are we arrived after the feast, and too late for it? for this is Chaerephon to blame. c. in ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES, to express repeated instances of the quality: 4Elol al al e'Tvuxiat obv apEICrovau to nie thy (often repeated) good fortune is not agreeable. lim. often uses the plural of abstract words to express the various ways in which a quality is manifested: ivrroovrps E'IC6r ao'o he uwas distinguished in (the arts of) horsemanship, &PpaShyoS',dJoo in foolishness (foolish operations) of mind. Even in CONCRETE words, the poets sometimes use the plural for the singular: XdXa'oICEce6 eld'cJWS )vpUovluEvoIS forgive a parentjustly indignant (as all such have a claim to indulgence). d. in the FIRST PERSON, especially when an author is speaking of himself: ToDUro 7reLpaMo4lefaa tI Lt1ly'aaoa this I (we) swill endeavor to explain. The plural here is preferred as seeming less egotistical. This construction is much more often found in poetry, sometimes with abrupt change of number: favor apap'wE/oG'a, 8piCoV' & apav oG Boko1AaL Icall the sun to witness, while doing what Idb not wish to do. The predicate-adjective, when plural, is masculine, even though a woman is speaking (520): 7reao/xe;Y', L XP), WIarp/l LxoUWpovsesoi I(Electra) will fall, if need be, in assisting my father. 519. SINGULAR FOR PLURAL. a. In. dramatic poetry, a cnoRus is commonly treated as an individual, the Coryphaeus being regarded as speaking and acting for the whole body; so that the singular is often used in reference to it. b. A NATION is sometimes designated by the singular with O: o MaccrSy, fIIepcrls, for the Macedonians, the Persians; hut this is nearly confined to monarchical states, where everything centres in the sovereign: seldom O "EXArvi for the Greeks. 520. MASCULINE FOR PERSON IN GENERAL. The masculine is used in speaking of persons, if sex is not thought of: 214 PECULIARITIES OF GENDER. [52C Trv EV'TVXoDVT-w 7r' wmT'E elia!vrTyeErS all (persons) are kinsfolk oj the pros perous. Further- a. The masculine is used, when sex is thought of, if the saume expression is applied to both sexes: 0rdTrepos d i e3EATroLwY, ey' 65 W&p, E'[7''yvvi, ovros tea 7rAeo XEO epEpE tov ro &yaaoD whichever of the two may be the better, whether the man or the woman, that one also receives more of the good. 521. MASCULINE DUAL FOR FEMININE. The masculine form is often used for the feminine in the dual of pronouns; not often, in the dual of adjectives and participles. For Tra,'a0ira, the forms mcy, Tor-oc are almost always used: -oiVco'T-3 7Exva these two arts, -ov'To1Y'r-os7 ImlV-Go'oV of these two motions,-a-ao AXeireoaov ulvow j?7Xavd only two means are left,'lpJov Ev eK ore'', bVo'iv-e ea-ov iy Bea pXovre cal &'YOTi-e in each of us there are twoo ideas ruling and leading us. 522. NEFUTER FOR MASCULINE OR FEMININE. A predicateadjective is often neuter, when the subject is masculine or femninine. In this case the adjective is used as a substantive (509 c); it expresses, not an accidental peculiarity of the subject, but its essential nature: vp0aXeprb iyeyilBv k pa-ds a daring leader is dangerous (prop., a dangerous thing, with indeterm. subject), caxbvr i &XaZeza teal uyrpzlov beautiful is truth, and abiding, bELtvb o roAXot, as'av KIraI Kovpt ois eXWCrL rpoar'i-as formidable are the many, whenever they have villains for leaders,'rapaXal Kal r-'Td'ets OXE14pa'raTs rdearo'e disturbances and factions are ruinzous to cities. So too, a PRONOUN OF REFERENCE may be neuter, when the antecedent is masc. or fem.:'rupaavvia,a-par', b Xphao-a v'MceaCCteea to pursue despotic power, (a thing) which is taken by means of money, bors E7rLavUe1, Kal T'oTo ECijXWoeC he longs for glory, and has made this his aim. 523. CONSTRIUCTIO AD SENSUM (Kara o'1crvVeLv). A word in agreement often conforms to the real gender or number of the subject, instead of the grammatical. Thus, a PREDICATE-ADJECTIVE (participle):'r toX5vp&a avaperta rev'l 7rlvctlwv'aCpa'eTEs Efa-o the miserable wretches are without control over their appetites, ravT' eEyEv 7/1 lczlapa aW'rV teeqbaX, eX'ExurvacLsS these things spake this abomninLable person (head), having come out. So, in poetry, an ATTRIBUTIVE: d'repzaObV'-lrJaels'&rivov 0 greatly honored child; or a PRONOUN OF REFERENCEE; jT'cvo aav4 iwv E7&oY rye'vvatov, ov's iro-T'A6parTos f7yaye seven noble children having fallen, whom once Adrastus led. a. To this head belong also the constructions with COLLECTIVE subjects, see 514. b. An adjective may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun of reference, agreeing with a substantive implied in it:'Aarvados &n, 7rJdXees T's peiy7-rlTs beiny (an Athenian) a man of Athens, a city the greatest, otli'a c1 X eeTrEpo, ot Xpr.ie (your house) the house of you, who use, etc. c. A word denoting place may be followed by an appositive, or a pronoun of reference, belonging to the inhabitants of that place: ap'tioY'To els KoT0-opa, YcoJw&rc'v &7rohcovs they came to Coty6ra, colonists of the Sinopeans, Oetio'roi.cAs @E,'yEL is K'pluvpai, &uv av'Tci ebepyE&Tls Themistocles flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor of (them) the Corcyreans. 52 J] TIIE ARTICLE. DEMONSTRATIVE USE. 215 THE ARTICLE.'0 in, the -Dialects. 524. The word 6 oj -g (like Eng. the) was at first a DEMfONSTRA1IVE pronouln,.which afterwards, by gradual weakening of its force, became an article. In Homer, it is usually a demonstrative; and, though in many cases approaching nearly to its later use as an article (especially when placed before an attributive with omitted subject: ol g'XAot the others,'ra e-iro jEa the things about to be,,b rpi formerly), yet in all such cases its use was allowed merely, not required, by Epic idiom. In the Attic, on the other hand, the word is commonly an article, the demonstrative use being comparatively unimportant. a. The language of Herodotus differs little in this respect from Attic prose. The lyric poets approach nearer to the Epic use; so too the Attic drama in its lyric parts. Even in the tragic dialogue, the article is more sparingly used than in Attic prose. For 6' -t as a RELATIVE pronoun, in Homer, IHerodotus, and Attic Tragedy, see 243 D.'0 as ca Demonstrative. 525. Even in Attic prose, the word sometimes retains its primitive power as a demonstrative. Thus, a. in connection with /utv and &d; and usually in CONTRASTED expression, 6 ItaE... 6 i this... that, the one... the other:'robs /IEtv or larpol (icOpeXo'L-), Srobs 8b ol o"ruco'o these (sick persons) the physicians aid, those (persons in a law-suit) the advocates. Oftener, with INDEFINITE meaning, 6 iv... 6 be one... another, some... some, part... part, in which use rls may be.added: e'XEyOo'ro. Kvpov, 6 ei eTrs Tr, 0o(piolav, 06 b E' T7 Kaprepfay, 6 b'r7'O 7rpa d'WTla, 6 b TIS teal Tb xcdXXos they were speakiny, one of Cyrus's wisdom, another of his fortitude, another of his mnillness, yet another of his beaeuty. Often a different expression takes the place, either of 6 /uEV, or o6 be ol /Eh 4XovYro, KXEapXos Eb 7repiefEYve they went, but Clearchus remained, elsqipepel E'XCevov (SC. y/, ydv), ol a' obv aeV Ev f'asaa I was urging a iwar-tax, but others said there was no need of it. As adverbs, ib,e-,V..'i- be3d,'-r /iLe.. r.'s, e(also with rl, thus T'r uxF rt,) mean on the one hand... on the other, partly... partly (in which sense we find also TovTro yEv.... roTo be). (a) After a preposition, the order is usually changed: E'L pE'i-oIs, El'S bb'd. (,3) In later writers (even in Demosthenes), the relative pronoun is sometimes used in the same way, but only in oblique cases: 7rdAErs, As xeb' &va~apws, els &s'~'obs cuvisdas rcayrdyW, destroyirng some cities, into others bringing back their exiles. (y) Very often 6 be' (without preceding 6 /1.E) means but he, but this; when thus used in the nominative by Attic writers, it refers almost always to a diiferent subject from that of the preceding sentence:'Iu'dpcs'Arqalovs torv ye'-'VETO - os 8' hAXo~,y Inros called in the Athenians; and they came. Similarly, in Attic poetry we have 6. 7yp for he, for this. b. in eal Tdr, ical Tis, before an infinitive: real'rb-v'7rorcpizs'a.cSal h.AyeTr and it is said that he answered. (In the nom., we have al''s and he, ical?,. \sa! o'l: eaal) oel'pwr-wv and they were asking. Cf. J i' b's, i 6', i, said he, sit.) 216 RESTRICTIVE ARTICLE. [52 5 Likew;se in rbV ical Torr,'b Kal'd,'r& Mtal'rd, a'h s'id: eaE'yap APb Tcal T'b roti o'al, ail'rb u1a 7rroi5at- for this and that swe ought to have clone, and thzs not to have done. The nom. bs tccl's occurs in Hd. c. rarely before a relative: ZpeyTat TroO g o' -'Trit OZov he aims at that which is equal, 7rposIcsE uxLo'EV TG'obsS oeTsSrep o'ros it is propfer to hate those of a character such as this one. But here O may be regarded as a proper article, the relative sentence being equivalent to an attributive with omitted subject:'ro YLOov,'obvs'OtOVTOUS. d. in 7rpb Toil (also written WrporoO) before this (time). Also in a few other cases of very rare occurrence. For &' T-eos with the superlative, see 627.'O acs an Article. 526. The article, as a weakened demonstrative, directs special attention to its substantive, marking it either a. as a particular object, distinguished from others of its class (restrictive article), or b. as a whole clctss, distinguished from other classes of ob jects (generic article). Thus propwrros a man, one of the species (&vapcoros d? thou art a man): but o igEiS-poros, a. the (particular) man, distinguished from other men (6 viapw7ros b'Y 7rayTrEs /ALrooV0L the man whom all hate); or, b. man as such, comprehending every one of the species (6 vYappw7ros rznlrJs dl- iZ man is mortal).- With an ATTRIBUTIVE, &'yaol Wvspes good men, some of that character: ol ayaaol &bvpes-, a. the (particular) good men, distinguished from others of like character, or b. good men as a class, distinguished from men of different character. —— So with ABSTRACT nouns, &1cazoo~-vv justice in any form or relation: X &510aroaovq, a.yustice in the particular relation, distinguished from other relations (3 8&tcaLov-W T'-oO AEaO the justice of the divinity); or b. justice in the sum of all its relations, as distinguished from other qualities (i &6cKao-rvnl apEThr Ea-rr justice is true manliness). 527. A. RESTRICTIVE ARTICLE. The particular object is distinguished fiom others of its class, a. as BEFORE MENTIONED, or as WELL KNOWN: aopcviov {vcouve, Ka'l pero'is 6 ZppviBos eil. he heard a noise, and asked what the noise was, o' Tp&es Tra ecKa'r? &a'rTeXov the Trojans held out duerisg the ten years (the well known duration of the siege). b. as LIMITED BY WORDS CONNECTED WITH IT: Trb Ms6ias'ezXos the wall oj il~edia, iw ordxrs,v'roXlopKcovoley the city which we are besieging, Es'raZs bcEuacls'ards 6rsp rTOD wrFiov f'o'rapah bv KerTpSi'r'v wrorausv in the villages (which are) above the plain (which is) along the river Centrites. In many such cases, we might regard the limiting expression (attributive) as uniting with the one limited (subject) to form one complex idea: in this view, the article would have its generic use. C. aS SPECIALLY CONNECTED WITH TIIi CIRCUMISTANCES of the case: ~irape Toc. ct21ou drink of the wine (here before you), a&crtoa'rov xlEAovs I have heard the song (just sung), i3ovXe'ro'r~V /dX471v iroro'at he desired to engage in the (expected) battle: —particularly, as NATURAL, USUAL, PROPER, NECESSvRY, etc., under the circumstances: al TrL/a1R /etdAaCI, i'U &7roicreirv Tis'pavvov if one kill 530] GENERIC ARTICLE. ARTICLE OMITTED. 217 a tyrant, the honors (usually resulting) are great, 7EyOL'4 o01L'ras XdPJTas 7ro. 0ovva' sravpt be it mine to return the (proper) thanks to a father, rob /epos Tsri *ocpcov ob AeaDv a're &r4 e T&s 7rrEvTaKoo-ias paXlcds not having received the (required) fraction of the votes (regularly cast), he paid the (prescribed) 500 drachmae. d. as SPECIALLY BELONGING TO AN OBJECT mentioned IN THE CONTEXT. The Greek generally uses this form for an unemphatic POSSESSIVE pronoun: Kvpos Kcaa7rfho'as &arb'ro ap'pla'ros ~by [c&patca E'EvU Cyrus leaped down from his chariot, and put on his breastplate, oTlos E6', 7-r[i5p obic eoxst there is no swine in the (wine-) cask. e. as a SPECIMEN OF ITS CLASS, selected at pleasure. In this use, the article is often equivalent to an unemphatic EACH: e8tlolcce rpLa y[LsapELIcaK ro IxrlAvs'r'~paC'TL'.p he gave three half-darics a month to each soldier (lit. the month to the soldier). This use approaches very closely to the generic article. 528. A NUMERAL may have the article, when distinguished as a part from the whole number (expressed or understood) to which it belongs: rTirr]~a rcv AjXwv, eK'Ca tryo', a'rpees of the companies, being ten (in nuember), there were absent (the part) three, rai o-o ee4pql two thirds (two parts out of three).- So too, an approximate round nusnber, as distinguished from the (unstated) precise number: 3&7r4avov l cppl'obs lAvpfovs there fell about ten thousand.-A number as such (without reference to any thing numbered) may have the article: 1u. epeZs 0'"C r& 8&oeKd, eoat a8s e`~ will you say that (the) twelve is twice six? a. So too, the article is used with adjectives of number, as ol XrAei'r0ol the most numerous part, the largest number (in a given total), oi rkdovres (the more numerous part) the majority, and with much the same meaning or 7roAAho (the numerous part) the larger number, often used for the democratic mass, cf. ol OA70yol the oligarchs. Also, sb -roA the great part. 01 ETepot the one or other of two parties; ol d&moL the rest, but xxAoi others. 529. B. GENERIC ARTICLE. This must often be left untranslated in English: o &vapoS7ros'YPv7TdS eoa't man is mortal, 8is 7ra8ies o e ypov'res old mnen are twice boys; and generally so, when applied to ABSTRACT nouns: / aicamo'4,rl justice,'?yewpya husbandry, X p'r/op~uci rhetoric, &XX' ol 7rV60oL rICCovorL'vr Ev~oetav but toils beget good reputation. a. To this head belong the cases in which a single object forms a class by itself: s. 7y the earth, 6 LeavJs -the ocean, 6 iXios the sun, ij o-EAiv7 the moon, 6 fopeas the szorth weind, 6 V,'orS the south wind, etc. These, however, often omit the article, like proper names. 530. ARTICLE OMITTED. In many cases where the article could have been used with propriety, it was omitted, either because the definiteness of the subject was not thought of, or because it seemed unnecessary to express it. This was most frequently true of the generic article, and especially with abstract nouns, when used to express a mere idea: dvpconrov Tvx 70to9 ~etov gerEXEL the soul of man partakes of the divine, qdfos o vor y,7T7v EK7~rXYTOLf fear drives out 9recollection: for the divinity (in general) 2co's is used, but o6 oEs' the (particular) god. a. Proper names of PERSONS and PLACES, being individual in their nature, are usually without the article; yet they often take it, to mark them as before mentioned or well known (52'7 a), and sometimes for other reasons: iTL'obs'rpaTrslcras aV'TfV 7rap& KNEapXo &sareyo,'ras eta Kvpos Tru' KAeapXov exeLv be 218 ARTICLE WITH ATTRIBUTIVES. [53L cause their soldiers, who had gone to Clearchus, Cyrus allowed (the said) Clo. archus to retain; o IIcd4c, the celebrated Plato, in plur. with generic article o' Il-AoTveY the Plato's, philosophers like Plato. —-Plural proper names of NATIONS or FAMILIES more often have the (generic) article; yet are frequently without it: brnv ir' Xeojy T'EV rieXoroow ConY cal'At'bvalceov the war of the Peloponnesians and Athenians (the article is here omitted with the second genitive, on account of the close connection, cf. oL rrpa-yoiY01 Kcal XoXa-yo the generals and captains). —-+BarlcXESr, used almost as a proper name for the king of Persia, may omit the article )cf. rpvTvUceGS the prytdnes (officers in Athens). b. Similarly, the article is omitted in many common designations of PLACE and TIME, made by such words as a~ov, wtrSis, city, &tcpdroxAs citadel, &7yopd forum, TeXos wall, ~~paTdrrer0o camp, sr7elo, plain, &ypos country, 7y land, Ucixaar-a sea, —aeid, a&pir-epd, right, lef t (hand), BeStd6v, bcivvyLov (depas), right, left (wing), iLEo'or centre, —/ilpa day, vt,5 night, eoos morn, iopapos day-break, eL'X7 afternoon, iererpa evening, tap spring, —and the like, —especially after prepositions or adverbs: dEir lrv to town, cKaT' yj,' by land, e7rn bdpv to the (spear-side) right, &rap' a~oria to the (shield-side) left, ebc~vrvuov eJXov they held the left wing, leau -71lEp, at day-break, cUCrods by night, vcp' &'o just before day-light.-These should perhaps be regarded as relics of earlier usage, which remained unaffected by the developed use of the article. c. The omission of the article may have emphatic force, attention being given wholly to the proper meaning of the word, instead of its particular relations; especially in'copulative forms, as'yvraZces ical lra?6es women and children, /vXyi cal aclua soul and body, o-r-e 7rarpbs o'-re frUtpbs pEL[3ETatL he spares neither father nor mother (more forcible than his father, his mother). 531. ARTIcOLE WITH ATTuIBUTIVES. When a substantive, qualified by an attributive, requires the article, this is always placed before the attributive. This remark applies not only to adjectives, but also to a participle, an adverb, and (usually) a preposition with its case, when used as attributives; but much less constantly, to the attributive genitive: thus i' To WraTpbs oicda and' oiCia l'0To Drarpcps the father's house, yet often 77 olicda roi raT'pds (but rarely 2; e7rcovkXh nrb rss 7rVaucds the plotting by the woman, for 7i {n.''5rb etc.). 532. A. Usually, the attributive stands between the article and substantive. Tr /uatcp& Te[IXr the long walls,'j rpo'epa kxiyapX[a the earlier oligarchy (followed by another oligarchy), fi 7rpJTrepoV boXyapXia the earlier oligarchy (followed by a different form of government), In /caw' pepav Tpo9~p the daily food. a. When an attributive participle has other words depending on it, either these words or the participle may follow the substantive: at ven' Ai~Xivov 3XaocQpcLta ec prlyEVaL the. slanders uttered by Aeschines, 6 tcareltXq7ks ciVUvios T17r4Aev the danger which has overtaken the city.- When the attributive parti. ciple has a predicate-word connected with it, this is commonly put before it: 6 o'~Cparqy7K bs VOULLtlUeVos lW1p the man considered as fit for a general, Trb KOrdkaloe icakot1eovoY opos the mountain called Cotylaeum, or a'oTel O31:;71c'f'Es those eUho have themselves done wroncg. b. When two attributives precede the substantive, the article is not usually repeated with the second: ol &AXXot -roXAol et/,uuaXot the other numeraw allies, ol ea'r1 TOP 4/aaror 2rap' insJ AXdyot the speeches before you on the bema,yet also 7''ATKc w raXata ep Ywv the ancient Attic speech. 6536] ARTICLE WITHI PREDICATE-NOUNS. 2 1 533. B. Less often, the substantive stands first, followed by the article and attributive: (6) dvamp o6 ayaTro. The latter is then less closely connected with its subject, and has the general nature of an appositive. The substantive itself may appear either with or zwithout the article, viz. a. WITH the article, when this would be required,, even if the attributive were dropped: oL XZoL Tb TEXOS *rerepteAoY Tb icalyvo the Chians threw dowsz (the) their wall, the new one. b. WITHOUT the article, when this would not be required, if the attributive were dropped: i ~tamEpept.vppwn7ros aKpa-Ts arlplov Tol &cpaTrea-douv how does a violent man difer from the most violent wild beast (but without the attributive, " fr.oml a wild beast")? 534. a. In general, any word or group of words standing between the article and its substantive, has the force of an attributive (492 d). Except, however, the particles pyv, 8E ye, ye, yadp, 8': rbv.e.v [avpa, rrv 8e yvvuKao, —but with a preposition, lp3E TO a v a[repa or 7rp's r7biv avpa 8E:(7rpos rob' bi ivapa, rare in prose):-also, in Ionic, rs': r&Cv r-s Iepuccso onze of the PersianC, b. In most instances, where an attributive is used as a substantive (the subject, especially the indeterminate subject, being omitted), the article is found before the attributive, see 496 a. 535. ARTICLE WITH PREDICATEi-NOOUNS. a. The predicate-noun, in general, rejects the article: aIvponror eL thou art a mann. Hence we may distinguish subject and predicate in sentences such as 7rpo8brsTcs ivy 6 orpa-,ryps the general was a traitor. The reason is, that, in ordinary predication, the subject is said to be (or not to be) AN individual of the class denoted by the predicate. But if the subject is said to be THE individual or THE class, distinguished from others, the predicate-noun may have the article: -Trb A iErsrov &vacaXoiv^'es Trbv 7rpod'f77lv calling Dex'ippus the (notorious) traitor, oL' TLae eZoC TOLvs VU0ovs oF &oaeveis tzVpworol EYiol Kca ol iroXXol the enactors of the laws are the weak men and the multitude (as a class). b. The predicate-adjective (or participle), if connected with a substantive which requires the article, cannot stand between the article and substantive (534), but must precede or follow both of them: dyaZbr o acvh'p or 6 Caivqp adya6O'S the man is good. Tb 0arlpa V7'rbv i7ravYesr eopev we all ]lave our body mortal (the body, which we all have, is mortal), avCb's &yabSbr, nbnv ayaao0s TOlS *rap' ieoti good myself, with the meln about me good (while my attendants are good), ilia mTa gJpL apXoftdEV at the beginning of the spring (when it was beginning), ol'A7vYa?or,rap' iEIdoVT W TV V/UyXY OWa TiV oE7ElIOYlav Xealov the Athenians received the leadership from their allies acting willingly (these were willing to confer it),,rdaov 4-ye Tb fnpioevUea hose large is he leading the armey (the army, which he leads, is how large)? Ev 06roir nr yTI as MpvrTEv'e ola I know in what kind of soil one mnust plant (of what kind the soil is, in which one must plant). 536. ARTICLzE NWITIi ADJECTIVES or PLACE. Some adjectives of place, used in the predicate position, refer to a part of the subject:!Eo- j Xc6pa or 41 Xdcpa tEfrJ the mniddle of the country, but' /efma7 Xc6pa the middle counetry (between other countries); EaXarov Tob Opos or Tb 0opos e'EXaT'oU?te extremity of the moeuntain, but Tb C'OXa70o b'pos the extreme mountain (oi 220 ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS. [53a several mountains); &Icpa' Xe[p or I Xelp dKpa the point of the hand. —In like manner, /uro-us 6 Bios or6 Boos #45uavs half of the life. 537. ARTICLE WITH 7ras AND I'aos. The adjective wras (strengthened abras, a6-/ras) all has usually the predicate position, but sometimes the attributive, with little difference of meaning: 7rdvTEs oE roeXrt all the citizens, ol zroeA7al hrdrEs the citizens all; less often ol 7rdvres vroAsatL the whole body of citizens (cf. ol 7rdVtES with numerals, Ecarbv o0 zrdVres a hundred as the whole number, a hundred in all). Without the article, lrdaveS 7roXs7aL all citizens; and in the sing., 7ras 7roXI7-s every citizen. Yet the sing. may mean ALL: 7raoav V,5ZtV T'*r a&7e'lav ep6t I will tell you all the truth; so even without the article: ordo? 7rpoavdrSa with all zeal, els arwaosav pavXd4TqTra to (all) utter meanness. Similarly,,Akos whole: b'X-l'7 vro'Xts or 71 7rodXs o'AiX the city as a whole, 0? b'Ax7 wrdiAs the whole city, j 7rdXls X bX'l the city the whole of it; without article, b'xirdXis a whole city. 538. ARTICLE VITH PRONbUNS. a. Substantives with o6e, o*rTOS, KELroE, require the article, and the pronoun takes the. predicate position:'e 6 &ip this man, r srpc'ypa~ra rav'ra these affairs (the subst., if used without the article, is a predicate: Ev' nepoats vduos iorTlv o'vTos among the Persians this is a law). The same is true of d/uqpw, atJcprpepos, both, eKIdrepOS each (of two).'EKa~o'-0 each (of several) has the same position, if its substantive takes the article: edo'Tr / 7 i PX each magistracy:- and this is likewise true of the genitives of PERSONAL pronouns (,oOv, yoD, abiroD,'ItcA, etc.) when connected with a substantive which has the article (while the REFLEXIVE genitives} eleavToD, etc., have the attributive position): j yi.coo'd -e ou thy tongue, Ie'TE7rE/Aaso'A~'vcayrJs ~rTv EavTeov avyaTEfpa ical Tbi,ra?&a abvrTs Astyciges sent for his daughter and her boy. Yet if the article is followed by an attributive, most of the above pronouns may stand between the attributive and its subject: (17T/Eo'Vr T1V /Slav lcE?7 7roIALefav we must seek for that one polity, i craixAai ilpfv (cp6rs our old nature. b. The pronoun abrro, in the predicate position, means IPSE; in the attributive, IDEM: avrTos 6 advqp or 6 daop aVro'd the man himself; but 6 6arbs a6vip the same man, rarely (6) advip o acrdo. c. The POSSESSIVE pronouns take the article, only when a particular object is referred to: Cu/s qlXor acyfriend of mine, 6;fcuis h Xos mnyfriend (the particular one). d. An INTMRROGATIVE pronoun may take the article, when it relates to an object before mentioned: IrdoXELt 8 t[auyao~dv *~ fro ni; A. He suffers something wJonderful. B. (The what) What is it? So, even a personal pronoun: 8e6po aX evbb Ax"v * Grap& rcvas cabs tixas; A. Come hither straight to us. B. (To the you being whom) TVho are you, that I must come to? e. "ETepOS (Lat. alter) one or other of two; 6'repos the one, the other; oa -ETepOL the one, the other (of two parties), may mean the enemy. - AXXos (Lat. alins) another, 6 xyAos the other, the rest: 7rcpT7'v C,,e Cal rv' AXX71r'EAXacBa Sparta, and the rest of Greece; often used for all except a part mentioned AFTERWARD: Tip uL'e 9XX a-TpasTq iviXatCev, EKabv Be veXra'n as 7rpolurwe with the rest of the army he kept quiet, but sends forward a hundred peltasts. — These pronouns have sometimes an APPOSITIVE relation to their substantives: ol roXTa ic Kal o dAXXol E'ol the citizens and (the others, being foreigners) the foreigners beside, ye'pzu XWopes /e6' re'pou veavzov an old man conies with (a second person, a young man) a young man beside. 54441 NOMINATIVE. VOCATIVE. 221 THE CASES. A. NOMINATIVE. 539. SUBJECT-NOOMINATIV:E. The subject of a finite verb is put in the nominative. (For the rule of agreement, see 497.) 5i40. PREDICATE-NOMINATIVE. The predicate-noun, when it belongs to the subject of a finite verb, is put in the nominative. This occurs with verbs which mean to be, become, appear, be made, chosen, called, considered, and the like (cf. 490): Kta[o1a'ral fBaoa'evs he becomes (established as) king,'AXeavSpos aEbs cvYoCd4'seo Alexander was named a god, iIKcLS /oL ~aoor'p thou art come for mesas a savior.- To these verbs belongs aKOvco to hear, in the sense of being called: os es'AaSvars ptXi7rir'Co/eEs dcXaKces iCal PEOlS eXpol icovov those in Athens, who favored Philip, were called filatterers and enemies of the gods. 541. NOMINATIVE FOR VOCATIVE. The nominative is often used for the vocative in address, especially in connection with odros: o'AwroXXd8oapos oVros, oV rreptlEvete you A]pollodorus there, will you not stay? — -- also in exclamations: vrrCoE fool! 542. NOMINATIVE INDEPENDENT. The nominative is used for names and titles, which form no part of a sentence: Kvpov'Auvaa~rs -Expedition of Cyrus, B/3Aov rIpWTrov Book First; and sometimes so, even when they become part of a sentence: ipose[Arlpe r' TV ~Sr'iopevh7p' ICo'lJo i7reoUvJUtai, ObVICOcd'rTlS he obtained the common appellation of the vile, " sycophant," wrapeTyya 6 Kipos Vz'r7/ca, Zevs ~t/u~/aXos Kal'y7se/c, Cyrus gave out, as pass-word, "Zeus, our ally and leader." B. VOCATIVE. 543. The person (or thing) addressed is put in the vocative. a. In Attic prose, A is usually prefixed; but in animated address, it is sometimes wanting: AX /opveie) & b 6vpes'Avvaloato make no noise, 0 men 0o Athens, a&coders, A~X'aI.,n hearest thou, Aeschines? b. The vocative, like the interjections, forms no part of a sentence, and is therefore enclosed in commas. C. ACCUSATIVE. 544. The accusative properly denotes the OBJECT of an action, that to, on, or over which an action is directed; thus The DIimRECT OBJECT of a transitive verb is put in the accusa tive: 6 raES Canl 2uas elz icrtv'ots the god preserves us in dangers.- For onission of the object, see 505: for omission of the verb, see 508. 222 ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJEC'r. [544 a. Many Greek verbs are transitive and followed by an object4 accusative, when the verbs commonly used to render them in English are intransitive and followed by a preposition: ou'vraL'eobs beovs to swear by the gods, ev (Ica1ccos) rOLET T'obS VrapCTrovs to do good (ill) to men, JEpVELV TYcl to wait for one, peVdyeIv'dTW to flee from one, Mas'd'eLEu Trvl to escape the ntotice of one, (pvXcA'reo'}a Trva to guard (himself) against one (act. UpvXd''eLY TrVo to guard one), aeteo-iair, alo'ixSvveao'aac bv 7raTEpae to feel shanme before his father, apjeT, TIMva to ~rely on one, aappe Ta'hs,tdxas to have no fear of the battles,'rXerTe rV' T dXa~Xoa, to sail over the sea, Pyucav Ixdrl (Kio3q, ycb1rSv) to be victorious in a battle (a law-suit, a resolution). b. Conversely, many Greek verbs are intransitive and followed by a genitive or dative, when the verbs commonly used for them in English are transitive: &pXeiv aYSppclsrco to rule men, Tour E'raa s T c~ p07'qs to touch the hay, aKotEo6i aopilov to hear a noise, 7reXaleaW Tr eEs,SI to approach the entrance, &piyyeVo T0os piAois to aid his friends, gov~eI E'oiTs rAovaloors to envy the rich. c. In many cases, the Greek itself varies, using the same verb at different times as transitive and intransitive: aiocade~oaaLc Tr or'Tvos to perceive something, E'v eZircaf rvos, rL to consider something, evoxkxev'rTv, rTlv to trouble one, rWrro'pa'eve1v r vTd, TvM' to war against one (so too, other compounds of er[), ei poft Tivos I have need of something, poet. We? (Xpi) iE TIMos. Especially in poetry, verbs usually intransitive sometimes take a direct object: 7rpo3BaLveY Trbv wrgsa to advance the foot, o-arL or adooeLv (cerraaL, rrsrvsi)'r'70ro' T1V, to sit (lie, leap) in a place, Xopee, Ev T'b, frev to celebrate the god by choral dance, -robs eboef3es leol r9-orcovaS oel %alpovoc the gods rejoice not in the death of the pious. d: Many intransitive verbs become transitive from being compounded with a preposition: rLaaal'vev Ebv 7ro'raudv to cross the river, Zicf3alfvev'i7yv 37'liav to pass out of the age, 7rapafagvcrev Trobs v4/ovs to transgress the laws, a&ro3epadc'es wrar'pars havizng run away from their fathers. e. In rare cases, an intransitive verb in connection with a verbal noun, forms a transitive phrase with an object-accusative: erto''7ri4oveEs oaavw, 7T& rposrtKorTa they were acquainted with their dsuties, o'T-L Ta cETE&pa cppoto~r'Ts he is a student of things above the earth, crapVoY eCTYat TV 8'Lac'aV to reject the settlesment, eaVavaC Tc $cpJST'robs Ov[3,alovs to be mnortally afraid oy the Thebans, oE p5L4Iuos (E~o't) is able to escape thee;-so, in poetry, E e p'' &cl AJdyoi tiipxes if youe always thus begun your addresses to me, Seosrdav'doLs XcaT'dptc 1 will begin with lamentations for my master. 545. ADVERBS OF SWEARING. N{ and ptu are followed by the accusative (perhaps on account of oJ'rvv/i understood): v4 is always affirmative; /A, unless vaC precedes it, is always connected with a negative, expressed or implied: rj A/la by Zeus, vaIl pi Ala yea, by Zeus, ov /Az Ala no, by Zeus,'a rov-ov ov'ye not yoht, by-(the name of the god suppressed with ulmorous effect): rarely is pta omitted after the negative as in ov,'~ro' OXvpsroV no, by this Olyrmpus. The accusative is sometimes found in other exclamations: o'rosr, O Tr ot ycu there, ho! youa, I mean. 5 48] COGNATE-ACCUSATIVE. 223 546. ACCUSATIVE OF EFFECT. Many transitive verbs have, as direct object, the thing effected or produced by their action: 7ypa/sEt T-'v? T rtrToX'V he writes the letter. But many verbs, not properly transitive, take an accusative of the effect, denoting that which is made to exist or appear by their action: 7rpeaSaeevev elplj7P to negotiate a peace (form a peace by acting as embassador), ipICLa T eLevELfoedusferire (hostiam feriendo foedus efficere), Xopvnov'Y a rraol ALoviOLa celebrating the Dionysia by furnishizg a chorus of boys, poet. f3e (sl &vapXga) Trporbs icaappayyvVt this (anarchy, breaks defeats) cauzses defeats by breakinzg ranks. Closely connected with this use is the following: 547. COGNATE-Accus ATIVE. This repeats the meaning of the verb in the form of a noun. It might be called the inplied object, as being already contained in the verb.. It is used with many intransitive verbs, and commonly has an attributive connectecl with it. Here belong a. ACCUSATIVE OF KINDRED FORMATION:,baXVrY EIJXXoro they wsere fighting a battle, wrori=r~v 7rnrerv to cosnduct a procession, Xalcga'Tr-v ovAefav l32eovAee he became subject to a most wretched servitude, bs v, &ptfi'rr $ovkX'lv [3ovEvAeuoV zwhoever may (counsel) give the best counsel, rQ-v EVaV'Tar'av VdooV veoreo/eV we are (sick) suf ering under the opposite disease, iE/sycad rTL- lpiLsGv cpiveETa he is undergoing a great trial. b. AccUSATIvE OF KINDRED MEANING: CrEls NBov, Icpr'Torov you will lead the best life, ryAV TUvwTeraTL 3apvrad'rlv he is struck a very heavy blow, rda'as va-eovs KcduveL he is sick with all diseases, 7r;Ae/xov eoTPdaTevraMV T'b, iepbv KcaXovi/Eyoe they engaged in the so-called Sacred war, ypa(qpv tcbiceiv to prosecute ans impeachmlent, iertav yd'ovU to (entertain) give a wedding-feast. In many cases, the meaning of the verb is not actually repeated as a noun, but must be understood in connection with the accusative of an adjective or qualifying substantive. Hence two more forms of the cognateaccusative: C. NEUTER ADJECTIVE. For the indeterminate subject, we may supply the repeated meaning of the verb: /1tya eveTaLt(= - E'tya eg60ors 4evlbeTal) he utters a great falsehood, 7rdV'ra wre-ooyat I shall obey in all things (render all acts of obedience),'avTa v Xwroucat ial Tab'Ta XapcOw os TroheXoTs I have the same pains and the same pleasures with the multitude, lruzucpdv'tr &irop I am in some little perplexity, t - Xpeo-uat'or,r what use shall Inzake of this? poet. etuvbv BXesrets you look grave. d. QUALIFYING SUBSTANTIVE. This may be regarded as standing in definitive apposition, its subject (understood) being the idea of the verb,repeated as a noun: W&yovov'TaL,rdXfv they contend in (a contest, &y&cva, viz.) wrestling, TQUoTO/ TbV Tpp7rOV rpcdas having acted in this manner (of action), Hm. wrip 0qpaxyfoeZt aeoptcc6s looking (a look of) fire with their eyes, Hm. y/vea E rY'EorVTes'AXatot the Achaeans breathitng courage. Cf. 501-2, though the substantive there is less closely related to the verb of the sentence. 548. The cognate-accusative is also used in connection with adjectives laicbs 7raav Kcaictav bad with all badness, &Tya7,bs Dracy &apET7V good with all ex 224 ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. OF EXTENT. [546 celience; — especially the accusative of neuter adjectives (54:7 c): 6 7rdcTYa oorpbs wrotn-s the poet wise in all things, &yabs'roiTro good in this particular (of goodness), Xig 7'riLS i Vz' ovioi3 61ola'yeyoVeV ErIEtLo'S our city is not at all like them, 0o-a zOL Xp7rtuof eoTre oklac I know for how many things (uses) ye are tuseful to me. Yet these constructions might be referred to the following head. 549. AccUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. The accusative is loosely connected with predicate-words (verb, adjective, substantive), to specify the part, property, or circumstance, to which they apply. It is also, but less often, used with attributives. The accusative specifies a. a part of the subject.: Kcduvw V tceqaX5v, I have pain in my head, et tXOIer ra& CraCCra we are well in our bodies, poet. Tv)/Xbs 7Td Tr' &ra rTV Tse PoOP T'd' itUUa-' E you are blind in your ears, your mind, and your eyes. b. a property of the subject (nature, form, size, name, number, etc.): VrXfUdS T1 T'yI (po'V Eo'r'sIy j rrdlxts the city is in its nature a multitude, 7apbreos IaWd v'b seT os a maid beautiful in her form, ro0'albs, K6vvos Iovoua, eupos 3o0 7rraipwc a river, Cydnus by name, of two plethra in breadth, 7retpol Tb 7rXrajos iqfinite in their number, bicatos -Tbv p4iwrov just inq his character. c. a circumstance *not belonging to the subject:'b eI'KeLov uAI ebv'vXeZs Luepos thou art happy, So far as he is concerned (as to his part), Kcal & &Ulcpa reipoIa a7rb aeC&ov o6plo'aat even in little things, I endeavor to begin with the gods, q 7roiXNs eIp'Ilvs a' 7 rrepl 7jv XCpcav &75e the city enjoys peace in things relating to its territory, -b KaT' eye ob, iXXiELAeE on my side there shall be no failure. 550. AccusATiviE OF EXTENT (Time and Space). The extent of time and space is put in the accusative. *a. TIME: &vy'alva Kdpos Etuuvev iyiapas re'-7E there Cyrus remained five days, al' arocal E'LavV'Tbv eoov'rai the truce will be for a year, 0ovXevovolL sbv AoLrbv B/ov they.are slaves all the rest of their life. b. SPAcE: Kvpos 4,eXavcveri &ta r~sAviCs a o'aaobs T'pE7s, 7rapacudnas e'rYtoao eKal 60 Cyrus advances through Lydia three days' marches, twenty-two parasangs, Melyapa a&rEXEi Bvpatcovo-ir ob're rAovv 7roXbvY oV'e 6BdyO Megara is not far distant from Syracuse, either by sea or by land (no long voyage or journey). REIM. C. The accusative singular is used With an ordinal numeral, to show the number of days (months, years) since a particular event, including the day (month, year) of the event itself: EBi/'J7n /peiLpa iV rravyLT'q7p abv-T, iveTeXevTj'CeI his daughter had died the seventh day (i. e. six days) before. The pronoun ouToo-i is often added: XSaoULr f-ETos T-ovT! -rpivTov es HdaYCKTOy we went out two yeas-s ago (this, as third year) to Panactum. 551.,OBJECT Or MOTION. The poets often use the accusative without a preposition, to denote the object towards which motion is directed: Tb toiAoX evApv/os Ids havisyg gone to the hollow (low-lying) Arqos, Toi rXoeos obpabv'ice hAis fame has reached to heaven, tuva'ovijpas aqiPKEvo she came to the suitors,`rh TA' ijXvXae ir-ay ICPdTOS this whole power has come to thee. 552. ADVERBIAt AccUrSATIvE. The accusative is used in many words and phrases, with the force of an adverb. 554] ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE. TWO ACCUSATIVES. 225 This use may be explained, in most cases, by the principles already given (547-50, cf. 501-2). Thus -dTIe (T-oOroY) TrbV TpO'Jrov in this manner (547 d), rdvraa Trpd7rov in every manner, b, TrpdJrov in which manne);, etc. Compare phrases in which O61v way is perhaps to be supplied (509 a): T/V TaXrXaorq-v T. ociiaTL- Xap[Eo'Eal to gratify the body in the quickest way. So (Tr'io) &apXi, always with a negative: &pXl' 6e spa, oVb 7rpE7re, Tray1Xava it is not proper to chase impossibilities at all (not to make even a beginning of it); —-- xv &LEJBaivov they were just passing across (the acme of their crossing); — and, in like manner, (Tb) -'EXos at last (as the end),?rpoeKca and cwppev gratis (as a free gift). Xdpi for the sake of (in favor of) takes a genitive, as also bcfrn' like (in the fashion of): iayye1ov [tlcsp 7rerA7svpobeaa to be filled like a pail, ToD AX&you Xdcpl for the sake of the discussion, l/y"v XdpLP for mty sake. a. Many neuter adjectives are used in this way: Ye'Tya, ueya'Xa, greatly, iroxA, 7roAXd, much, Tb roax, &a wroxXd, for the most part, vrpdrepOv before, Tb 7rptr-epoP the former time, xrpror (at) first, Trb 7rpTroV the first time, Tb Xo1rndv for the rest, for the future (but T'o XoL7rov at some time in the future), rvXhv perhaps, T0oooSUro so snuch, goov as far as, T1 somewhat (eyys'- poretty near), Ti why (-tI icXaets why are you weeping?), rovro, q'aSDa, therefore (aSTr TavDTa Ovv i~KoloefJbr these very reasons are we now come). Cf. adverbs of the compar. and superl. degrees (228), and the cases of apposition in 602. For accusative as subject of the infinitive, see 773. For accusative absolute with a participle, see 792. Two Acctsatives with One Verb. 553. DOUBLE OBJECT. Many transitive verbs may have a double object, usually, a person and a thing, both in the accusa. tive. Thus verbs of asking, teaching, clothing, ]hiding, de2jrivinzg, and others. Thus al'Tc to request (Kvpov srXoa vessels of Cyrus), EpwTco to inquire (-robs avroydAXovs y 7repl i-uTV 7roXE[cuov of the deserters as to the news from the enemy), rdaccow to teach (ib-'irala TirV couo'WtCvC the boy music) r'eEaco to persuade (xas. Ti-&avT'a you of the contrary), Ev~rov or a&zUei'vvutL to clothe ('iAv Tbv XtW'~va oneo in the tunic), ~Icawo to unclothe, strip. (ieye iT-' ao'G'Ta me of the dress), Kpv'rceo to hide (uIe T-o-u from me this thing), &a3alpoluat or ar7roo'repw to deprive (-robs EXXAA7ras'iv y7v the Greeks of their land), aviuX to despoil, 7rpdTrTroca1, also 7rpcdi'c or eLs7rpdT'Tw to exact (robs vyrrc'iTas it54coPra TrdXav-ra of the islanders sixty talents), &Yauoliycrwt to remind. a. The passive of these verbs retains the accusative of the thing: Wao3aKoIpat T71V 0ov'LKjV l7nam taught music, ea/ prTrat TrV i'xrrov he has been dceprived of the horse. Several of these cases, and of those in 555, might be explained by the prin ciple, that 554. CAUSATIVE VERBns, with the accusative of the person, take the case which belongs to the included verb. Thus a&vawiUvrw 6ijas Qrobvsc,35br I will cause you to remember the dangers. So, to ask is to make one give an answer; to teach is to make one learn, etc. To the included verb may belong a genitiv)e: yeVEIy'tIa Tl/xUS to snake one taste of honor, gi. pI' &,airPuops cKaKic, remind onw not of evils. 226 TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB. [553 555. OBJECT AND COGNATE-ACCUSATIVE. Many transitive verbs may have, beside the object, a cognate-accusative: pICe(rra.x' 7ros TspasrzCras Tobs /leyL[arovs OpKicovs they made the soldiers swear the greatest oaths, MXAl'os?yp6a4'-,e /rj 1ypacpy' Tavl*l Melitus brought this inpeachment against me, mrn. 8b Zebs (plXe? ravTo07Z'V (PLXr'T7ra for whom Zeus feels all manner of love: Eyt 6 7ra'~rp TrV T7V,ra[lces' E'TpepEv my father rearedl me with the trainincg of the boys, Aio-Xl7Vs Kr/7G'LPcyvra'ypaq(SP WrapaV4u'wyr iIwtceK Aeschivnes prosecuted Ctesiphon on charge of an illegal resolution; eY'-is T1L &-yaWv C3 K 2v axbroroL'ELEY abi-tir if one should do him any good or evil, 7roAxx& Y TLs GxoE WK pdT'Y a eralyoCe one would be able to bestow many praises on Socrates, ricsa4 ev, -o'rooY obviY we did this one no wrong. a. Such verbs in the passive may retain the cognate-accusative: KpLt7vaCt daL-0OTEpeL ras KP1Le6tS to undergo both the trials, TvTTreO3L trEVrTjcorra rrXyadr to be struckfifty blows, ov0 AX tovrate [ta Xo(yov (547 c) they will not szffer injuries worth mnentioning. 556. OBJECT AND PrPEDIC&TE-ACCUSATIVr. A predicate-noun, when it belongs to the object of a transitive verb, is put in the accusative. Thls occurs with verbs which mean to mnake, show, choose, call, consider, and the like (cf. 490 c). SrotoVtLaf ~Ta pl[ov I make one my friend, acpeora' Trlva arpar77yv to choose one as general, 7rape'xw iuLaru-br ebsreul I show myself ready to obey, ol ctXAaces'AAX4avopov aebv dvYdua~ov his.flatterers named Alexander a god, ob TOV'S rhXE0oaa Xovrmas eb8atloeoa'rcTovs!ro/CLw not those who have most, do Iconsider as happiest, fAaee -roero TiOpop he took this as a gift (but'TOTO Tb' 7pOV this gift). -Tle predicate-accusative may be an interrogative pronoun: T-L T-oVTo roies (as what are you doing this) what is this you are doing? Trivas TrovsS' eisopac who are these I behold? iroa TavTa eS' yeEs of what nature are these things which you.art saying? cf. 826 a. a. The predicate-accusative is often distinguished from the object by the absence of the article (535): r' 7repTrih Xp7ELara srpaylarTa eXovo-v they hczve their suypefluous woealth for a vexation. b. In the passive construction, both of these accusatives become nominatives (540):'AXE'arSpos aebs vwotzDoCero Alexander twas namned a god. D. GENITIVE. 557. The genitive properly denotes, (a) that TO which something BELONGS; also, (b) that FrmOM which something is SEPAr - ATED. In the latter use, it corresponds to the Latin ABLATIrE. Genitive with SubsltCntives. 558. One substantive may have another depending on it in the genitive. 559] GENITIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES. 227 The two things, denoted by the substantive and the depend ent genitive, may have a great variety of relations (expressed generally by English OF). Thus the former may belong to the latter, a. as a part of it: Genitive of the Whole, or G. Pcartitive. b. as composed of it: Genitive of lMateriaL c. as more definitely expressed by it: G. of Designation. (In a, b, c, the two things are more or less the same; in the following, they are distinct:) d. as possessed by it: CGenitive of Possession. e. as connected with it and pertaining to it, though not strictly in possession: Genitive of Connection. (The following may be regarded as special varieties of e:) f. as an action or attribute of which it is the subject: Genitive Su'bjective. g. as an action of which it is the object: Gen. Objective. h. as produced or accounted for by it: Genitive of Cause. i. as measured by it in extent, duration, or value: Genitive of ]MJeasure..REM. j. It is not intended here to. give an exact analysis of the relations expressed by the genitive with substantives; but only to specify relations which the student may notice with advantage. It should always be remembered that the genitive does not express these relations distinctly, but only the general idea of belonging which is common to all of them. Hence the same construction may sometimes be referred to different heads, the two things having more than one relation to each other: thus in wrJaos ToO &7rocav.vr'os regret for the dead, Troi &7rouavoJv'os may be regarded either as the cause of regret, or as the object regretted. 559. GENITIVE PARTITIVE. a. The part is most commonly expressed by a word of number or a superlative, the whole by a genitive plural: VroXNol ~TJv AbavafCwv many of the Athenialns, 7rTdepOS Tvc a&3exqpwv which of the two brothers, raVrT'wy pLo'ros best of all mnen, ol aorovaclol Tm'v VroXLT'ov the excellent among the citizens, TlvEs W' P'lTTpwv some of the orators, h!uxov av&p a man of the people, itLCph/bi Srvov a little (portion of) sleep, HIm. 3aa iedwv divine among goddesses, 3v!ue'o'ov ijepas it was the middle of the day, —,x'iATzo-os EavTov in his best estate (lit. best of himself; the superlative referring to the man in one condition, the genitive to tthe man in the sum of all his conditions). b. The genitive partitive is used (with the article) to denote the district or region to which a place belongs: ~Oi8al Trs Bowv-tas Thebes in Boeotia,'rTs Xepoovwoov eV'EXa1ovTrL ina Elaeus of the Chersonesus. c. The genitive partitive with neuter adjectives (496) often denotes degres: eArl teEya avvdAEwws E XWpS'av they advanced to a great (degree) of power, EIS T'ovT-o &voLacs ]xaov to this (extent) of folly did they come, EL Trotrw Trrs rapas vEteveis 1s'av in this (state) of preparation were they, iv EravTi icaicov in extremnity of evil. d. If the word expressing part has the article, the genitive takes the position of a predicate-adjective (535 b): O6 reT-apTos c v rratiov the fourth among the children,'AaYlvalcov 6 Ai8gos the people of the Athenians (i. e. the democratic mass, opposed to the aristocracy; but 6'Aaqvaoowv 5jg/os the whole people). 228 GENITIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES. [559 e. Adjectives which have a partitive genitive, usually conform to it in gender, so as often to appear in the masc. or fem., where we might expect the neut.: o6,oLUvs (6 ol7rls, 6 7r'rXEsTos) TroO XP'YOV the half (rest, most part) of th6 time,'roxA' rJ1s Xpas (also 7roXi Tris Xcpas) much of the country. 560. GENITIVE OF MATERIAL: z4taLora ap47ipov coin of silver, tcp cv 71iEos vfaTos a spring of sweet water, S3oy, dyeAs a herd of cattle, -rXjaoos kvapc7rcoY a multitude of nzen, a`tacaet L-'TOV wagons (wagon-loads) of corn, Tplaldcla TdacavTa 4pdpov three hundred talents of tribeute, 6Vo coTrSuaL o',ov a pint of wine. 561. GENITIVE OF DESIGNATION: Tb opos Tr's'Iz'6T'rVs tlhe mountain ofl stone, ue'ya Xptea'ovo's a (great affair) monster of a wild boar. This construction is chiefly poetic: Tpohlms 7r'roAXe9apo city of Y;'oy, ravyarov Treos end of (life, i. e.) death. 562. GENITIVE OF POSSESSION: obdca rarpds a father's house, ot c?^nroe.for,aaotAewos the gardens of the king, -ka:veo;,i'os 3aolXetEa the palace of Syennesis, rb 1epbv QoO'ArordAXwoos the temple of Apollo. For the omission of a word in phrases such as Es &t6aadciXov to the teacher's (house, school), E',"Aetov in (the abode of) Hades, i'A7ro'XXcovosfromn Apollo's (temple), see 509 B. 563. GENITIVE OF CONNECTION: tcvuta~ra Tri-s ai a',Yacrs waves of the sea,'i,cpprl7s TroO T'eIXovs the foundation of the woall, i T-oO -refme'v rixe'v the art of persuading, iSpa akpio'ov time for breakfast. It is used especially with words which imply a. Connection in Family, Society, State, Army, etc.: o6 Ts acw't&Xe1os yvvatfbs k&exRo's the brother of the king's swife, ol;cin1s A-qtoo-rvovs a servant of Demosthenes, &Eapos Kiuwvos a compasion of Cimon, /3aoLXEs MaiceaotIas king. of Macedonia, ogl epxol ('roXcEtuo,) Kvpov the friends (enemies) of Cyrus, oW KAEJpXov arTpa'CT3rac the soldiers of Clearchus. For the frequent omission of vgds in phrases like'AXAEavcapos (6) lxiAfSrrov Alexander (the) son of Philip, see 509 B. b. The genitive after the neuter article (with indeterminate subject, 496) is usually to be regarded as a genitive of connection, though sometimes denoting possession: -a'S 7Jrd6AEWc the (affairs) of the city, -b i-Ss T'Xv'1S the (business) of the art, Tr-b Trs oxryapXtas the (constitution) of the oligarchy, TA ~'&, Vvpa1Koo'ov the (resources) of the Syracusans, &glXca'- Tis WoN e' w e ncertain are the (issues) of war, ae7 cpepeIY Q'a'rTCv SeIy we must bear the (ordering) of the gods. In some such cases, the neuter article has little force: rTai Ts vUyjs (the soul with all that belongs to it) nearly the same as' uvXh. 564. GENITIVE SUBJECTIVE: o6 dBpos T'-Y' roXewtcY the fear of the enemy (which they feel), 6o Eraivos TY 7irpeo'`B'ip,'P Y praise of older persons (which they give), 71 opela -oO /3ao'ecces the march of the king, 7i X az7rpd'is'-o o-'ipaTEV[uaTOS the brilliancy of the army, a- EUpos Tov VrorraZov the breadth of the river. 565. GENITIVE OBJECTIVE: 6 10Bos'ir0wv tOAXe[dctY the fear of the enemy (which is felt toward them), feranVos T&s, qrpeo'3Urivpc o l praise of older persons which is given to them), E'E-Tcao-i'-Y'Exxov;, a review of the Greeks, 6 0Aeapos Twv o~-paTro'Ii-, the destruction of the soldiers. Other prepositions are often to be used in translating: rev eVXac prayers to the gods, / Tr&e Kpeowrosou, uovXdea servitude to the stronger, a&coplZ Vp'ywv ocrasion for actions, eSSoLa TY iAcw, affection for one's friends, rei'ep[ta'cir- wroheZUYc6, experience in the affairs of war, 4yicpdT-e1a ijbovis moderation in pleasure, k6vos aavdrov release from, death, &rdo'~raaos TrC-'Aaryalfry revolt from the Athliz 572] GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 229 ians, cp'Tos T~s &aXado'o~6s power over the sea, d7raoro'BlS 7s'yTs a descent upon the land, [,k T'cov 7roAtr&i, (with violence toward the citizens) in spite of the citizen2s. 566. GENITIVE OF CAUSE: ypa~1 icXo7rrls an impeachment for theft, -EyoWceiros'AvdfayLs Xenophon's Anabhasis (by Xen. as author), poet. NO'rou KVcu4ara waves raised by the south wind. 667. GENITIVE OF MEASURE (Extent, Duration, Value): 7rorayb s eOpoY 7rXEapou a river of one plethrum in breadth, -rpluv'LApEPv& 066os three days' journey, pULObS TETrdpcov PrLv~v four months' pay, plcCKOY'ra TaaXdvroo ovboIa a propesrty of thirty talents, XiArx'y apaXpAWv 1ic a suit for a thousand drachsmae. 568. The GENITIVE OF CHARACTERISTIC SO frequent in Latin (vir summae pr-.2 dentiae) is rare in Greek prose, and scarcely found except as a predicate-genitive (572): Co'eT rov'Trou o'ro p7rov, 71'S aS'rTs yvcIS&S, ~rcr avb'oW' XdyTwv he is of this character, of the same opinion, he uses the same language, poet. o6 Trs'avXlas 8fo'ros a life of quiet = a quiet life, poet. ToXh nls'rppscovoo a front of audacity = an audacious front. 569. Two GENITIVES WITH ONE SUBSTANTIVE. The same substantive may have two genitives depending on it, usually in different relations: T~V &vappcvrwov Vos'rov aavacrov (f and g) men's fear of death, rL& Tr Trov &veuovu &I7rooav'rcv vavayloov (f and g) because the wuind drove the wrecks out to sea, n7rirov ppo~Los lpdpas (f and i) a day's run for a horse, Aiovva'ov 7rpeOrvTcv Xdpos (d and b) a.Dionysiac chorus of old men, 1EYOqVFPTos K'Pou'AYad3Bacz (h and f) Xenophon's Expedition of Cyrus. Genilive wit7 Verbs. 570. The genitive sometimes appears to be connected with a verb. when it really belongs (as genitive of connection) to a neuter pronoun or a dependent sentence: orT-o tPcv Ly axricTa Savxdyouev for this we most admire you (lit. this of you we most admire), T BE 7brrwrv OYEL but of horses, what think you'? I& 8LclteL Alo'. xImlnS ToDg qrqio[Taaos. TagT`'?~o the points which Aeschines impeaches in the decree, are these (lit. which points of the decree), &,yvoovlev &aXXiohX 8 or- AE"yotxEZ we misunderstand each other's language, TO oiCKcd8E 7rXAov rec'7rovo v 9gr7 KOW - o~-bo'rOral touching their homeward voyage, they were considering (this question) by what course they should return. 571. GENITIVE AS SUBJECT. The genitive (used partitively) is sometimes found as the subject of an intransitive verb: ob 7rposicEL /oA0 T-S PXS 1 have no part in the government (lit. to me belongs not of the government), ey'ALyaPX[.a 7reeztow ob juE`Teo'q oV'vTlyyvY us in an oligarchy, poor men have no share of indulgence; obt &ar4aavov ab'rTJv 7rX(7v eY TIS v7rob TE7EeaT'c- there were not slain (any) of them except some one (slain) by the.egreans, eirqsutyvvam E`qarav, arc'ov srpbs Kapao 5Xovs they said that (some) of their uember had intercourse with the Carduchians. In such cases the genitive might oe regarded as depending on an omitted form of rIs. 572. GENITIVE AS PREDICATE. With verbs of incomplete predication. (490), the genitive is often used in place of a pre(l-. 230 GENITIVE WITH VERBS. [572 cate-noun. The subject (or object) of the verb is thus brought into various relations with the genitive,-relations which correspond to those in 558. Thus we have the PREDICATE-GENITIVM a. PARTITIVE: oi OE(OYoI TaXo'v'EXXvr.yw Joma the Thessalians (were of) belonged to the ITellenes, 5vy EbCpdaret TrCV TpLdloCrVa yeVE'Oat it was in the power of Eucrates to become (one) of the thirty, E~r-tv ) IIAXor TrjM MEo[71YI&6 VroTE oviabs yir Pylus belongs to what was once the Messenian land. b. OF MATERIAL: TO reXos Aflov rewro'-rata the wall is made of stone. c. OF POSSESSION: f7 ociLca ToV o'TppaT'rlyov 6EyEETO the house became the gen. ei-al's (property), EawUoT eivaL (yyYfveo' aL) to be (become) one's own man - one's own paster. d. OF CONNECTION: T'r 7roXa& cawroXwcXaevat T eTpras eep as.eeLas KY'TIS' eL b&catcws that many things are lost, one might justly regard as (the fruit) of our neglect, Tb saVTIcby TE'XVrS earl the navy is (a thing) of art. The predicate-genitive of connection is especially used to denote birth or origin: Aapelov ical IIaplpvo'dr-or?7Y7ocyaL rraces 8o6 of I)Darius and Parysatis are born tswo sons, OoveCr ta'ms o0licas (wrdxecs) aeyadX2)s iy'l [ucydides was of a great house (city). -e. SUBJECTIVE: 6 NtXyoS Al7,UOO'elr'ovS E40Tt the speech belongs to Demosthenes. The genitive in this use is often connected with an infinitive, and denotes one whose nature, habit, or duty, it is to do something: IroXhlou a'yaaoD voU[,ETMI salPeT' it is consider.ed (as the part) of a good citizen to be courageous, bh 7T al'oXp& eci0'Ta EbXa$eoaal o'oqwo se T a Ko ocppovos apive to know and shun what is shameful, he judged (to be the part) of a wise and discreet man. f. OBJECTIVE: Ob TQWZ Kaiaco6p7wo oiTos, &aX& ajAs 61rIes compassion is not for the evil-doers, but for justice. g. OF CAUSE: 7?ypaqA IcXo7r~rs Xv the impeachment was for theft. h. OF MEASURE (Extent, Duration, Value): Er- r'bv EbeppdTrmv iroTadJv, gYTa Tb etos TETTdpcov JrX2eApw to the river Euphrates, being (of) four plethra in breadth, iiiv &Ca c's'rpdtcovra he was (of) about thirty years old, To T1i'r1vAd eia IL Tb 7Ts Xclpas ETacLtsXlAxoWY TraXdrTcv the rateable property of the country is (of) six thoutsand talents. For the predicate-genitive of CHARACTERISTIC, see 568. GENITIVE AS OBJECT. 573. Many verbs, which in Latin or English would take the accusative, have the genitive in Greek, because the action is regarded as belonging to. the object, rather than as falling directly upon it. Many verbs vary in their construction, see 544 c. The relations, expressed by the genitive with verbs, correspond, for the most part, to those of the genitive with substantives. 574. The genitive is used with verbs whose- action affects the object only IN PART (compare Genitive Partitive). Such are verbs of sharing (having, giving, or taking, part of something), touching (which affects only the surface), aiming (seeking to touch), enjoying (more or less of something), etc. Here then belong a. VERBS OF SHARING: avapC7rou *4Xi11 toO aeI0ov IETEXEL man s soul ha8 cart inr the divine (being); so LETaXca/LaBvw to receive pa?'t,,etEacbOiwLt to gine palt (7 us XEsas ET1z of the booty to some one), icovcvui,. to participate, and the like. 576] GENlTIVE WT-IT VERBS. 231 b1. VERBS OF TOUCHING, TAKING HOLD OF, BEGINNING: rvupbs eo'qL kLy7rvTa ph ev'bs iCaatEoal it is possible that one touching fire should not be burned immediately; so aIrTroual, acEOw, to touch, eXo/uat to hold on to, be close to (ris 7rAec0ws the city), avrTXoEcat, r7LXrea3cBvoat, to take hold of, gpXoeral to begin (-rs nrat&ecas the education). The same verb may have an accusative of the person, and a genitive of the part, touched: EAanBv T~is (Viohs TbY'OpTyvVr, they took hold of Orontes by the girdle. So too, with verbs in which touching is only implied: &yIEL T'rls pYIas'br'isrrov he leads the horse by the bridle. The genitive of the part touched is seen also in IcaeaTyErat (mU'rpilffat) Ti's tceqmaMXs to have one's head broken (bruised). C. VERBS OF AIMING, REACIIING, ATTAINING: oToxad4o/ aL to aim at ('oov co7rov the mark), bpi'yo/at to reach after (rc7h &xXorpfoe the property of others), le(icp-)irKo/uai to arrive at, attaine ('rc-V icaxca what is honorable), TUY'XdkcO to hit upon, obtain (T7,y i &XACy the p2rizes), xAayXciv to get by allotment, and in- poetry Icupew to light upon. d. VERBS OF ENJOYING: i7lrokXaia to enjoy (ry f/LETy'cTeY &a'yaacao the greatest advantages), ebVwXovD'ToO Xoyov feast on the discosurse, Eibs a&vpbs eS ppoveI1OaWTos 7roxAhol,v roa5Xad5oera fromn one man vwho has thought well, many might receive profit. e. Other Verbs, when their action affects the object only IN PART: TCaV vsere'pwov Eiol rodvar to give me (some) of your property, a,3FpTES'res $o,f3apcapKo.TpaTo' having taken (part) of the barbarian arcmy, a&(L77'l T-ov aiX/UaXci-wr he releases (some) of the prisoners, Tr-s?yis -eeuor they ravaged (part) of the land, Iriselv OTop, to drink wine, but wrivEt oi'ov to drink sonme wisne. 575. The genitive is used with verbs which signify fut lness or the contrary (compare Genitive of MAaterial), i. e. with VERBS OF PLENTY AND WANT: qrtvr.ArX]/t, 7rXflpdw, to fill, rrAXhaw,'y'/w, to be /full, Eoeo-at (EZ o5,0) to want, A-h iTa EvE7rxraav a/usovlas aopifas they filled their ears with divine wisdom,,l'zxr7ros Xpvudrwv ebrtpet Philip had abundance of treasure, ov Xpvay'ov irXovr'eV, a&XXA -wis a'/yaars to be rich, ssot in gold, but in a good life, reOayeT}Yos 7rxo'aovu rVy Vuxyv having his soul glutted with wealth; -. 7roXXr eAdEL aVab~'.r he lacked much (provision), o' Tr'pavvo, EIraivov ou'rore arag[e'sre you tyrants never have a scarcity of praise. Here belong expressions such as izeave1 ToD YERKTaPOS he became intoxicated with the nectar,?i'rr7-y' Pe? xAa /vXpoD D{iaros the spring runs with very cold water. a. The active Vlw, as a personal verb, is found only with genitives of quantity, sroAXAov much, oAltyov, /1 poo, little, -oo'oGrov (also Tro'oOro) so much: Too'oTov Vw Ca-aa/spoveWv I am so far from despising; also impersonally, sroXAAoO &7 oeu'Ts Eb'aL it wants much of being so. With omitted &e?, ox'yov and mzuCpoe have the force of adverbs, meaning almost:'rTWXeobs 6p, s 3ALyuov rdcvTas thou seest that nearly all are beggars. After a negative sentence, ovb' bxMtyov Me has the meaning, (nor does it want little)far from it; so ovb& sroX.Aoi ae (nor does it want much, but rather every thing). For participle VesW' in designations of number, see 256. 576. The genitive is used with many verbs which signify an action of the senses or the mind (compare Genitive of Connection) i. e. with VERBS OF SENSATION AND MENTAL ACTION: Icoiv, ampoeaowat, to hear, 7'yeotLuL to taste (act. to cause to taste), Boqpalvoual to sme1ll (for verbs of toucl-hin 232 GENITIVE WITH VERBS. [57; see 5'74 b), aadvro/,lU to perceive, /,urhvrco/a, to remnember (act. to reinad), er. L Navactvoual to forget, /LEAEL Aot TV'OS I am concernedfor something, ETraLeAXEL MoL rIvos I repent of something, Ei7rqsuEXo=l to take care of, Eirpeol'7ra to regard, a&ex4ow to neglect, 5olywpEw to think little of, e'ptco to love, ir7vLAE'oW to desire, reivdco to hunger (Xprt7c rcwv for yproperty), &Lc/o to thirst (E'XevaepiasfJor freedonm), Wretpdo/sal to make trial of, 7rvr;scvopua to be informed of (by inquiry) more comm. with the accusative. a. Many of these verbs vary in construction: atovic and acpodouai to hear usually have the thing heard in the ace., the person heard in the gen. (perhaps gen. of source, 582): &covELV rbY o' X&yo to hear the discourse, but a&o0ELY Toi alraao'c~aov to hear the teacher. 577. The genitive of cause (566) is used with a. VERBS OF EMrOTION: Sav/Asdw owe Trs awoqpooiy7Y s I admire thee for thy discretion, ovYyXacpw?Tces fYEYEY'UevYY I share the joy for the things which hav occurred, ToerTOvs oSICTEIpW T'rs iyav Xaxeirqs vo'iov I pity these for their very severe sickness, v i'yc6 J OL Oi erOYj4ow (for which things I shall not envy you) which I shall not grudge you, HIm. Xwo'Eros 7YvyaLcds angry on account of a woman. -- ere belong also elsravi'AX6Eavopo, T.r es r Iv ETapov rioTeors 1 praise 4lexander fjbor his confidence iss his friend&oi8' hys oebEele irbtccs tIA aLo'6 fov0or this no one could justly bla7ne me, eoa/ruovt'serv iivA'ye &'yaacr- to congratulate one on his advantages, orv7yL7;6o-CeC5Lv acuros Xpb's's iEriavpas it is'igqht to forgive them for the desire. b. VERBS OF JUDICIAL ACTION: IcXowris 7ypacpeeai ao'cXpJd to be impeached for theft is disgraceful, opbvov bi&cetv to prosecute for smurder, (peiyei wrapavo'cWov he is indicted for an illegal resolution, a&re'pvys KCca?1oplas he was acquitted of slander, Eadwcav wrpoaoo-fas they were convicted of treason, U8pwcv ubXeTi to incur a charge of bribery, iroeXX'v ol 7raT'e'pes M'otrr;07J &Vaorarov KcaE-zTyVwav our fathers passed sentence of death against many persdns for favoring the Persians.' eOaVarov, used with such verbs, is a genitive of value, giving a measure of the judicial action: ot lEEpopoI -Vb Yo5poaV bvrwfyov atvcdrTov the -Ephori imgpeached Sphodrias on a"capital charge. REr. c. To these, add VERBS OF CLAIMING or DISPUvIsG: uera7roioivr'at apeT'S they make pretensions to virtue, ocec &Vrrtroiosse eata BPao'F7s'pXs we do snot contend for the sovereignty against the king, EgvocXWros i~,etrB1'OTier'EpexSeE T7s 7rJXewrs Eumolpus disputed with Erechtheus the possession of the city. 578. The genitive of value (567) is used with a. VERBS OF VALUING, BUYING, SELLING: o ooX0Aos 7r'r-ve?Vwr' C-iyai-aL the slave is valued at five minae, wroxxoD WYrea^al to buy at a great price, Trad'rou &iroa~4iai to sell for a talent, otida, Mr', iuv 57rocceLeUr'l a house mcetgaged for 44 minae. b. Sometimes with other verbs: Xp7clc-arwv'ErIcOVpeLv to. hel2 for J ooney, on'rSpavvoc jrMAao qwnXatcas eXovoL the tyrants have guards for pay, 7rk'ov Mzd'caet for how much does he teach? wrpom7rerorat'*irs wrapavrctica XapL'Ts'a Ti7s'r4X'AeW 7rpd7yAa7'a the interests of the city have been sacrificed for immediate populc ity, T'r 7rapav'bcCa EX7rila ovibrbs a'&XX'r'regaaL to exchange the hope of the moment for nothing. REM. c. The thing valued is rarely put in the gen. (of cause)::op&WCi-qCs oirElva'ri's (rUovotas apy1'por 1l IErp'ETo (553) Socrates for his society demandec mloney of no o0e. 582] GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 233 579. The genitive is further used (as an acblctive case) to aenote a. that YFROM which something is separated: b. that F:ROI which something is distinzguished: c. that F:ROM: which something proceeds. It is used, therefore, with 580. 1. VERBS OF SEPARATION, i. e. verbs which imply removing, restraining, releasing, ceasing, failing; also sparing (refraining from), yielding (receding from), and many others: / ryifos ou 7roX7 &~exel T-v7 7lrEt'pOv the island is not far distant from the mainland, ei 4aXdc~rI efp7oy LoTO if they should be excludes from the sea, EXEL TOUs 7roXAEfovs ~Ts els T irp'gaevr 7rapO&Iou he keeps the enemy from advancing further, XpEwv iXevbepwae he freed (men) from debt,,Bo5Xo, auapT~l/udT'wr icaapDelvE wish to be clear from faults, el Ica'iaXV6e 7reLpdaeore'TOV-'TO TSJS &pXyS if ye shall try to put this man out of his command, Xwq,'T's o'vIvFs cKal nyEy? ae it rests from its pain and rejoices, lEVErGa-5 Tqs EXmrlios he was disappointed of his expectation, TtVO o-IC/drTWY a&E6?Coa7TreS EGorTo4Yav Tpo'Trata having beenz lnsparing of their bodies, they set up trophies, TSs obpys YYavres resigning their anger, T'r) T~ov'E.XXOvwv lXe0vepeas 7rc1)raXwp1oX'al b1Xtmr7rc to surrender the freedo7m of the Greeks to Philip. a. Verbs of depriving sometimes take a gen. of separation (instead of the ace., 553): Tr &xxwcov rpatlpovyxevoi Xpfl5ara taking azway property fromn the rest, 7red~ov a&rre(TEepvare; ouxb'I',ic'as; ob nWAxas; of how many things have you been bereft? of the Phocians, have you not? of Thernzopylae? 581. 2. VERBS OF DISTINCTION,. SUPERIORITY AND INFERIORITY: &8aqpeptE 7rau7roAbX [ua3&v pdj yaaJmros one who has learned dif'ers altogether from one who has not,'EpoiCpdarns 4vmeoEvl obbevmbs' e'hrETo Hermocraites was (left away from) second to no one in understanding (in j &peTZ'ToOv 7rAhaovs 7rep-'TFyve~TaL couzrage gets the better of numbers, el' TIS &Ee'pou 7rpoqppeLt &ro-T7r./ if one is mzore advancea than another in knowledge, the gen. is probably owing to the preposition in the compound verbs). This construction is frequent with verbs d;rived from comnparative adjectives: Tqi/ats TOV'TO i7rAeoVEICTe'TE in honors you had the advantage over these mene (but irXeovecTe7v Tlcv TixUye to have more of the honors, gen. part.), v0ept0LovoTL Tre rpay,4dTeCoV they are (later than) too late for their affairs,'r7iT3aa Triv?Xap& (also b7rb riv eiXp&v or To0s iXapoTs) to be worsted by their enemies; vz'tca~at to be vanquished has the same constructions as'TTaz&C ll. -Add further a. VERBS OF RULING AND LEADING: ae7OY Tb iECAvT4vYWV 9pXELV it is divine to i/overn willing men,'Epws'roScy oebr fao'iXeeCi Love is king of the gods, rIoxvcpdTIrS OUV eiTvpdayei Polycraites was tyrant of Samos, AaxXs lr7nrrewv.eoTpaT4?yEs Laches was, general of cavalry, MIvUs Ti's aaXcdto'-s &ipdT7irm'e JMinos became master of the sea, Xeiptotoqos 7rYEC70 TOV o'parpelXaTos Chirisophus led the army. The gen. with these verbs is perhaps more properly explained by 563, 573. 582. 3. Other Verbs, to denote the SOURCE: ravOTa e' oaeov TVXdTES but ob. taining these things of you,,de e' you ov eal Tde but learn of mnze also these things, lErvvdvovoro ol'ApcdRes TdrP. c&/lp! ServoocvTca, Tr 7T& rrvpA ra'TaoB3EOetiav the Arca. dians sosught to lea/infronm those with Xenophon, why they extinguished the fires. In the above cases, the gen might be regarded as depending, not on the verb, but on the ace. or sentence which forms its direct object (570); in other cases, it might be taken as gen. absolute with a following participle (593): ei yiyvc1eis ELoV cpaeTyodrEovo if,you tundcerstand from. my statement. 11 M34 GENITIVE WITII VERBS. WVIT1H ADJECTIVES. [5 82 a. In poetry, the genitive of the source is sometines used with passive participles and verbals, to denote the agent: va(Pyels AiyTrrSov slain by Aegis. thus, WpSorbs'7raTrYd'rl1 deceived by a husband, IEeim'rs LcaKrT6 taught by her, qLxoNWJ &icXavmros unswept by friends. 583. COMzPOUND VERBs. iMany verbs compounded with a preposition take the genitive, when the preposition, used by itself in the same sense, would have that case: IrpcKELTarL 7S'ATTIK'ucs OP71 eydhtXa in front of Attica lie great mountains t7rLB3dvTes'ToOv'eIXOvS having mounted the wall, vrepeqpoavjcaav'oO Xd0pov they ap peared over the ridge, v7rep EL''roi3 AXoyov to plead for the principle. — Especially many compounds of KaTd, which have the sense of feeling or acting AGAINST: XAP 1xu ica-rabpovepv T'oO wXraovs wte should not contemn the mult;tude, rIs oc h Ka-rcaTayeAXdo-eme, bz r whoi would sot deride you? x' eXIpa,,rtaVa4TaiE6o,rat yuov through enmity they attack me with falsehood, AcwnEp"rT-s ICaTEyvcI6ce av'ro 7rppoesocE'Vai rj'v rarp[ta.Leocrates had convicted himself of havizng betrayed his couentry,'ra cuV'rptadCorTa ia/apT'uxaT'a eAov,a'r-rytpo0v they chargea on me the ofences of the thirty, sfmw' eigeav 6 uas &cp'rwwv dvaTroV Ica'ra*r/porao'am they persuaded you to pass sentence of death on some persons without trial. Genitive wit/ Adjectives and Adverbs. 584. The genitive is used with adjectives which correspond, in derivation or meaning, to verbs that take the genitive; especially with adjectives a. OF SHARING: tx0'oXoS ocpfaes partakincg isn eisdom, lOJ/OLtpOS C 7Y rarpowv having anl equal _part of the patrimnony. b. OF PLENTY OR WANT: tEEoT'bs ~cacKoc( full of evils, wrXodo'ios cppo4aoews rich in good sense, 7Er'vs Xpnrtdrwm poor in property, KEYbS eiIT L77~ s void oJ knowledge. So the adverb atXis enough. Many compounzds of alpha privative take a genitive of the thing wanted: 9&ras &a1Pe''w'v irae6wv childless as to male children, dowpos Xpl &d'rwv taking no bribes of money. C. OF SENSATION OR MENTAL ACTION. Thus compounds of aicovw, erVKoos AOdywv icax&y listeninzg to excellent discourses, vr-5coos'w, yoY'coo' obedient to one's parents.-T-'v5qbs ToO; teAXomrTos blind to the future, poet. &yevoa-os Kacc&a without taste of/evils, a&lvmycwv Tr m icmsm'LobY unmindful of the dangers, irileEXbs o/sicKPr' attentive to little things, &reupos'ypa/uudrTrmz unskilled in letters, Vasepos TW' &7rm'o/Dc enamored of things absent. d. OF ACCOUNTABILITY:. a'ros'Tovr5'co accountable for these things, e'oxos betMtas liable to a charge of cowardice, b7sr'Los epy'ov subject to a trial for murder,'reiavvos Tr's apXcs bound tab give account of his qoice, 6iro'erEXs qppov subject to payment of tribute. e. OF VALUE: &tios I-'a[yov worthy of praise, c&d=mos T-s rdXews unmvorthy of the city, c&v'ir-Ts Xp7r/cmovT to be purchased for money. f. OF SEPARATION: opmpavbs a&mvp&, bereft of men, EXheVSepos a'Sois free forn shame, icaaapbs rdYmT-wY T-y icaKct& clear from all things evil, Yuyvmbs ToO ncUaTOS stripped of the body. Some of these might be referred to b. g. OF DISTINCTION: i otpopos,r&' EXAAw, different from the rest, AXXa TrCES La~dwv t~hngs other than the just, e"-epomV T-b b 7' V &-yaaov the pleasant is dif fereantfrom the good. Here belong Adjectives 587] GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 235 585. h. OF THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. The compar'ltive deglee takes the genitive: eoit',A roT 4e3EqcpEo greater than his brother, u'doepoL alq)oOrTo'T71 /XuaIXs they came (later than) too late for the battle (similarly F bo-'repaI(a Trs u.dXy7s onz the day after the battle), 7TouT' &ao'eG/ua TEar'r'ov viSo E 7?e0Oe (as less than what, do you consider this impiety) what do you consider as a greater impiety than this? oue'bsS 8er7epos second to no one, 8oKce eial AevgorTpa Tov oIvTos, ri7s qp5Vo-s she appears to be fairer than (reality, nature) her real, natural complexion, icaTa3eseo'r'pav'dV 4dav vis?mrAr[os teAaBe the reputation he obtained came short of his expectation,; 38a KpeL'TroW Tcy e90 orovyoTwv a reputation (greater than the envious) seuperior to envy, iraporclotrs ercavavvo'TEpa E'ipopwv a proximity mz6ore dangerous than (the proximity of) other men for ~rs ETipwv 7rapoLKceowS. i. 3Multiplicatives (in -7rdo-ros and -7rxovs) have the same construction: hAxos nroAxa7rArialots Vuv E'woire/4o'-a,uev we engaged in war with others many times more numerous than you. 586. a. When r' than follows the comparative, both objects compared are usually in the same case: xpL4aura 7rep srnXelovos 7rote-Tat -i tI)XovV to consider money as of more value than friends;-yet not always: ~dvpobs ovvaTrcorEpov t ey/&) viLOv son of a maCn mnore powefule than I (am). For s7 between two comparatives, see 660 b. b. The genitive is freely used in cases where 5, if inserted, would be followed by a nom. or ace.; much less freely, where j would be followed by some other case or by a preposition: a&ALc6TEp4. e'irT /Ax 57YLoVs LruarSos (= 3) /ux,YILe?7 c&lUa=T') xA 6&yze tJvx.ui vvooceTv it is more wretched to live with a diseased soul than (with) a diseased body, 3AXiEre, elS zT'V, lE/reIpiav/ uaAAov ~TS appeTSs (_ V3 fs Trj a'pEThV) to look at skill s7ore than (at) courage. c. The superlative sometimes takes a genitive of distinction, like the comparative: UE7yf TOs T-S, oAAw (greatest in distinction from the others, =- e/wP.rTr iAwoz, greater than the others), more properly IEyT~LTOs rrcrorw greatest of all. Similarly puvos'7'& 9itXv = - dros 7rdvr'wv alone of all. 587. The genitive is also used a. with adjectives of TRANSITIVE ACTION, where the corresponding verbs would have the accusative: 4,cxuaas Trjs ai3Ldas late in learning injustice (/ear~dVetIV T7'' aMiOav), KaKoupTos YTir ~&'Aeo doing evil to the others (Kaxovpe7Zv Tobs iiXXovs), piXavaXTra&'r&r aXoTopi'v ready to sperd the property of others, ~v-. 7/146s ~o Tovfov' oT v4Y/ov associated with thee in voting for this lawt: especially b. with adjectives of CAPACITY in LKS: 7rapaotcevao~rTis' ~Tv Els Tbv wdrieAov qualijed to provide the (requisites) for the war, MOa~KaA1tKbs 7patuaacaTKs fitted to teach grammar. c. with adjectives of PossEssION, to denote the possessor (562): itobs'-.j rptCUv belonging in common'to the three,'lsos (oiKe7os)?Uov belonging to me alone, ep4bs TOO'ArrhXtwvos sacred to Apollo. d. with some adjectives of CONNECTION (563): VUYerF'r TOO KSpov akin to Cyrus, &K6Aovaa a&XAIXAw consistent with one another, 6,cevauoos;eacspderovs a namesake of Socrates. e. with some adjectives -DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES, where the genitive may be regarded as depending on the included substantive: epala'ydeuou ripe for marriage (wpa y7auov age for marriage), reisEos rTjs apeTris perfect in virtue (TiXos &pe~Ts perfection of virtue), poet. oAdCoUTWV V'7rd-E'yo, (= bv7rb o'r?'yr awdAcrwo) under cover of houses. 236 GENITIVE WITH ADVEI3BS. 1587 f. with some adjectives of PLACE (589); but seldom in Attic prose: Hnm.'vav~LoL fo'rav'ABXativ they stood opposite to the Greeks, Hd. iretLpotas ron ThVTov at right angles to the Polntus. GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS. 588. Adverbs derived from the foregoing adjectives, mlay have the genitive': vatos Trjes 7roXEwo in a manner unworthy ol the city, &a0ep'vron r-nv ahXXwv av93prwov differently from the rest of men. 589. The genitive is also used with other adverbs, especially those of place. It is generally to be explained from the uses in 590, 591, 559; but sometimes from the ablative use of this case (579). — roO ys where on earth? of IrpOEXkAvUeYV &'Ekyelas iVrp7pw7ros to what a pitch of profligacy the man has come, evrlbS (iE'drs)'WV poWy e Etvee he remained inside (outside) of the boundaries, EYtro (aEoe) oO TEIXXovS XAorv they came within (without) the wall,'rAlqoov (47yyzs, poet. /yXm) trov 8eouwTrprtov near the prison, rpdo'eEY, e'7rpoo-aev (0'i7raeC)'roD o-rpaorre'3ou us front (rear) of the camp, cuore'rpcobEev (ilcar'poweIv, E'Ev ical Eev) T'rS 6o30 on both sides (each side, this side and that) of the way, &vw 7uroTrapY up streanm, Evaib Ts 4,aa-ktjos straight towards Phaselis, E'Xp aeDpo 0roD X&dyou to this point of the discussion, 7rd3pp5w o-oopas if5eL he is far advanced in wisdom,7rqyvlpCa TiS'Ude'par at what time of the day? O'/e'r7s T Spas late in the hour,TCrs S EXeS Trrs 7coyC17oS in what state of mind are you? azcoXacoriav EVCTE'oP (s EXEL srosrv heca'oos i71uio we must flee fronm license, as fast as we can, each one of us (according to that condition of feet in which he is), bicavcs E7rLOryx4s EL he will be well enough of for knowledge, — Xpls ToD -c6xuaos apart from the body, ieXv'aepos oUregrs oE'ar: WrAv Aios no one is free except Zeus, icpvp;ca Trcr'Abrnalva, (in concealment from) without knowledge of the Athenians. Genitive in Looser Reldations. 590. GENITIVE OF PLACE. The genitive is used in poetry to denote the place a. TO which an action BELONGS. The action is regarded, not as covering the whole extent of space, but as occupying more or less of it: vepos obr pa[VeTro rdorl-s yaL7ajs no cloud appeared over (any part of) the whole land, Yie Tolxou ToO iTEpoio he was sitting by the other wall, Ji ovc'Ap7yEos i]Er'AXaiLCov was he not (any where) in Achaean Argos?e leE rtEloo010 to run on the plain. In prose, this construction appears only in the adverbs of place which end in ov: mroD where, etc. (248), ab'ro9 there, 6/uoi (in the same place) together; and in a few phrases: dIreTXWvoZ, Ajs 6soD they were hurrying them on the way, EiropevovTo TOO 7rpdoo they were proceeding forward. b.'FRom. which something is SEPARATED: Y'oTaoaa ld~apwu stand offfrom 1.14 steps, vsrTcyeLv A-s 6ToM to withdrawfrom the way. 591. GENITIVE OF TIM:E. The genitive is used-to denote the time to which an action belongs. The action is regarded, not as covering the whole extent of time, but as occupying more or less of it: s;jAEpas by day (at some time in the course of tile 595] GENITIVE IN LOOSER RELATIONS. 237 day), rVKTCrS by niqht, T'oi acviro XELtvos the same winter, lIupam ob'X Qovwo B4tca erTon the Persians will not come (any time in) for ten years, oV'e Tes iEvos &necTaLt Xpo'vov ovxvou nor has any stranger come within a long time,'rpa q1'tBapeiKca T'oT p-zv.s three half-darics each nonith (527 e), bcd'arov E'Tovs a.nnueally, sot) AoT7roD (at any time) in the future, but o'b AXorS7 fjor the future (for all future time)..592. GENITIVE OF CAUSE. The gen. of cause is used a. in EXCLAMArTIONS (with or without interjections), to show the cause of the feeling: pe v ToO a&vpos alas for the man! l yaaic pLot oqa'is aavpuaurTrJs do'ews 0O happy you for your wonderful nature! o Ilidaoetao, Eel&v xdywa 0 Poseidon, what fearfel words I ~Sls ETivXs my (evil)fortune! b. in the INFINITIVE with neuter article'ov, to show the purpose of an action: Mivws Tb h1 o''cb 1caS.pet ic'Ts Aakdoro'ls, TO Ta)'s 7rposo'dovs IakIAoZ fvrat a~w. Milizos was sweeping piracy from the sea, for the better coming in to him of his revenues. See 781 a. 593. GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. The genitive is used with a participle to denote time, mzeans, cause, condition., or concession. For examples, see 790. E. DATIVE. 594. The dative is used to denote a. that TO which something is done (not the direct object): Dative of lnfluence. b'. that FOR which something is, or is done: Dative of Interest. c. that WITII which something is, or is done: Dative of Association and Likeness. d. that BY which something is, or is done: Dative of Instrument, ieeans, lManner, Cause. e, that IN which something is, or is done: Dative of Place and Time. The dative thus, beside its proper use, to denote the indirect object, has the uses of an instrumental and a locative case, which in Latin belong mostly to the ablative.- The dative of the indirect object is most commonly a pesson, or a thing regarded as a person. Dative of Iztuence. 595. The dative is used to denote that TO which something, is done (nQt the direct object, 544): thus a. -with TRANSITIVE VERBS. The direct object etands at the same time in the accusative. But if the passive is used, the direct object of the action becomes the subject of the verb, while the dative remains unchanged. 238 DATIVE OF INFLUENCE. [595 Amllnbv MLavz6ac (u7rLazXvEzyaaL, Ta'rrrEw) Tro's oTpaTLIWTals to give ( promise, ap. point) pay to the soldiers, c pavu'e'ev Xp/,oara'ros 7roxL'Tars to distribute treasure to the citizens, &rcpAEmpaV 7rapexerv To7s pl'Nois to afford safety to one's friends, erLTpe'rre Ta 7rpa'y/ara t'o7s e'lxretpora'rois to entrust the caairs to the most experienced, Xpl'arTa 7roAXos obfeiXEv to owe money to many (persons), OoIJeEar 7re/l7reLv BOLWTroS to send aid to the Boeotians, AXEyeLr (?nyeZbaLat, ayy7e'AAeL, Ove~La'ew) y, T 3aaLAea 7'r E 7TrErpa'y/eU a to tell (relate, announce, cast up as d reproach) to the king what had been done. With the passive: Po$iaeia i7r ip4)a Boc'WToZs aid was sent to the Boeotians, a 7rterpayuEYra T, BacrTLeXE &ayyeAAX rag what had been done is announced to the king. (a) In some instances, the indirect object of the action becomes the subject of the passive verb, while the accusative remains unchanged: of Eirrerpap/HErOL 7IT 4pVAa1viC those entrusted with the guard (for eiKEicY o esm Err'lepa7rTaL a7 pvAalca), XXAo Tr- Aeeov e7rTlaaxs-aeoae ye will have some other greater command imposed on you (for XNxo xr1 UFeSoZ 7rlmaX o'ETraL). b. with INTRANSITIVE VERBS. Many of these express actions which in English are viewed as transitive and connected with a direct object (544 b). EvXEabat'os aEOes to pray to the gods, eY'ileWv rois cpETrToTo to -yield to the more powerful, 6ovUeemEtI ibova~s to be a slave to pleasure,?rer9aeoLat Tro0s 6PXovol to obey those who rule, o0beEr T0-o7s ptIxots to render aid to one's friends, 7rpE7rel (7rPosjbIec) po0 Ae"'eIv it becomes (belongs to) me to speak, apEr-cev, (a7rap'EKeov) Tois EXAois to please (displease) the others, ror'eveiE (a'rmo-r1eT) qrots Xd'yoLs to trust (distrust) the words. Especially with verbs denoting disposition toward an object: XaXreraiveLv (opyiCe(rraam, av/loJoual) 7. rd4XEL to be angry toward the city, a Wovoev r'o7s wrnXovviOLs to envy the rich, ebvoLE vri t eoi7r0'p to be well-affected toward his maste? c. with many ADJECTIVES, especially those denoting disposition toward an object: WvroXos sTOs Enots subject to the gods,'arperis a'pan7yw unbecoming to a general,'vavlos Tro7s v4txots in opposition to the laws, pX[Aos ad7 &ay,.$w a friend to.the good man, 8vseVe'ro'ar7os T71 TdxAe most hostile to the city, XeaE7rbs TO7s trtLoiJrO severe toward wrong-doers, ierdulvvv'os rano- dangerous to ca, iccarbs Trois o-c6poo sufficient to the wise. d. sometimes with SUBSTANTLVES expressing ACTION: a-&,rap' lIlvy Mopa,ToIs heoZs the gifts from us to the gods, i7 jx ~',cp ate, 65rpeofa my service to the divinity. The same substantive may have also a genitive, denoting either the subject or the direct object of the action: Er'avdaraoas /EpouVS TASb Ts O. b'A, dJs ApvXys an insurerection of some part of the soul against the whole, cKaTaaodxAcoas rca''EXhASo.v To7s'ASraloios subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians. D)ative of Jitterest. 596. The dative is used to denote that FOR which something is, or is done. It is connected, in this use, with verbs and ad. jectives; sometimes even with substantives. A thing or action may be regarded as subsisting for a person, a. when it tends to his advantage or disadvantage. b. when it belongs to him in possession. 60 1J DATIVE OF INTEREST. 239 C. when he merelyfeels an interest in it (ethical interest). d. when it is the result of his agencsy. e. when his interest is less definite than the foregoing. 597. 1. DATIVE OF ADVANTAGE OR DISADVANTAGE (dativus commodi, incommodi):'ca-vos?yE7yEFaL r~. 7rarTpl~t each one is born for his country,:oVxce'Aarnvalots rFUovs *J7tce Solon made laws for the Athenians, o-T'epavov9rat T -r, rgee to be crowned in honor of the god, pesydXto, xrpaypdTwv I-catpo0 lrpoetram 7T 7TetEt opportunities for great affairs ihve been thrown away for (to the detrimeant of) the city,- al T'otS 8e7rdrTats &7roKELUEIat a PdAavot the dates reserved for the masters, aoopbs Ei'avs- wise for himself, Xproi~LAos arapo6SroLs tuseful for men, /BAa,3epbs Tip aboUaiL hurtful for the body, — ia- E- lXrL,Tp0fvS'o0:, sroXAoA s they were in want of p ovision for the most, lAriXa EXEL GooT71pLaS TJ. s-Xet he has ho e of safetyfor the city. 598. 2. DATIVE OF TIIE POSSESSoR. This is used with el'u, yfyoalxat, and similar verbs: oUfC e-rtr XppuaTta /yp7 we have szo treasure,?rpoy6cov /lvprtces KcdaoTt'yE-yoyaa(r every man has had mnyriads of ancestors, vi7rdPXEl T'os wrapovtL ra, i- ady &re'wy the possessions of the absent belong to those swho are present.. The vcb may be omitted: 7. wra-rp IIvpiXd7rrs lvoaL(a (sc. Ea-ilf, the father has Pyrilampes as his name) the father's nzame is Pyrilampes. a. The possessor is more properly -expressed by the genitive (562, 572 c): the dative denotes rather one who has something for his use and service. b. The dative, in this use, is sometimes found in connection with substantives: HId. o a-(pi 1BJes their cattle, ol' &vYpwcoroi v Tizv KT7c rtwv TO Tos SeoaTs ia-I,een are osze of the possessions belongisg to the gods. 599. 3. ETIICAL DATIVE. The personal pronouns are thus used in the dative: T7o1rvT 7rdrv ot1 irposEXETE Tb, VOUrV to this attend carefully (for me) Ipray yosu, i a-oa /paa-aoo/ai (what shall I learn for you) what would you have me learn? a/sova-0Tepo1 7EYaoVTCa I1t aa y 0B1 o'0o the yousg wtill become ruder for yoo (you will find them becoming so). 600. 4. DATIVE OF THE AGENT. With passive verbs, the agent is sometimes expressed by the dative (usually by avr1 with the gen.). In Attic prose, the only passive tenses often used with a dat. of the agent, are the perfect and pluperfect: -a aol 7re7rpaypeva the things done by thee, iuretr 7rape-KceUao'ro roaTs Koptalors when p.reparation had been made by the Corinthians, poet. Tac&IOxNs a&-.p667raor0v ObX ebpi'taKEra the trusth is not found by men. With verbals in e'os, the agent is regularly expressed by the dative, see 805. 601. 5. DATIVE OF INTEREST IN LoOSER RELATIONS:.C0Kpd7-S Ei3Kce K TIn's &tLos elvar rfj irdXet Socrates seemed to be worthy qf honor (in relation to) frone the city, Ea'qFBIX' i/i?' 7rdXai is he long dead for yout? Him. -soiav &dav7r (for them) amosng them he rose eup. Thus the dative may denote one in whose case something is true:'r e-oxaplrdvet, BE? Te 7'oio r, b't eSils aT z i the case o] such a man, one must suppose that he is simplet;-or one in whose view something is true: poet. 6 ia-xbs ebyeFvs Eoa''y' a&vp in Ctmy view, the good man is zoble. a. In these constructions, a PARTICIPLE in the dative is frequently used, and often with onmitted subject:'gfpa iiw -7r r'vn e7irrrXAoV0a-'rT7s'ASnvarois it was the fifth day for the Athenians Wmaking their expedition, oa-veX0iris (or [Cs VVreX4&TS) EdrTE? to say it brie~fly (lit. for one to say it, having brought tlhe miatter to a point). The participle may denote the condition under which something manifests itself.: aIa1'W itv 7 roratbv - rovb.area-e'par i3ds the route towvard 240 DATIVE Or ASSOCIATION AND LIKENESS. [601 the west (as it presents itself to one) after having crossed the river;-or the feeling with which something is regarded: 7yLe-IrTal'rovro /eLoL B0vXo0exv,' this takes place according to my wish,'eravyeXroeYu, e'Y tot iotYT &erv i let us go back, i] it is your pleasure to do so. Dative of Associatimc and Lickenes3Y. 6(02. The dative is used to denote that WITH which something is, or is done: thus 1. with WORDS OF ASSOCIATION OR OPPOSITION: 6,lXe2v Tros Kaicois to associate with the evil, CKaT'aXXdTTElY 7rX rltv'rAet to reconcile city with city, KOtVowveiv &AxoLs rtovwv to participate with others in toils, 615oAoyTeY &AX'xois to agree with one another, 7rXo77iat eSlv rt 4wndrq to approach the place, ireoaaral'r,- 775vl~wr to follow the guide, a&iravarry Tr, evo/&z't to mneet with Xenophon,?rTvy XadVei To7s 7roXeilo0s to fall in with the enemy, &aAe3"Ey ial arp ataocaAd.,w to converse with the teacher, icepctra T'rlv cpvnYV oi'vq to mingle the spring with owine,-a-icAouaos T-iJ p0o-EL consistent with nature, icotvwvYa Tro7s &yaaoes participation with the good,-' tdxeacr v'rSX. to fight with fortune, pi$CeLv (ic3ap,/3W'eiv, &ra7TcovlEaL) aAXjAols to quarrel (dispute, contend) wzith bne asnother, &aqppEo'&aat'ros'rovv7pols to be at variance with the bad. a. So with PIIRASES:'Af3r/vafots &ha roXRteuov rE'a to carry on war with the Athenians, el's A'~?ovs (XEipas) fepXEogalf Trv to come to words (blows) with any one. b. Here belong the ADVERBS //a at the same time,!oDo together, &cpevs ne.xt isn order':,ua?'.s?iEpar at cday-breakc, T-b v'8wp ir'vero 65oio,TW' 7rjXA the suater Cwas drunk along with the 9esud, sa'rolToIS ifgitrs Aij T AiK'eao we must say what cosnes snext to these things. 603. 2. with woRDS OF LIKENESS OR UNaLIENvESS. These are chiefly adjectives, or words derived from adjectives: oi 7rozvnpol &XXrlXAos fluotot the bad are like one aMnother, ao beZ YovY'robs caltcos roTs &-yaors o ElX the evil msust not have equality with the good, crurA/ouqviot fiav TosS aCbr'oZs Kvpqs 97rhXots they were armed with the same seeapons as tyrus, ToOro 7rapaw-ro-trv ei't'r,'As-UvdvacKrt, Kcal E'ozlcey'EXhhAXacots TcraDra'ra ivcua'ra this (name) is similar to Astyasnax, alnd these resemble Greek namnes, 6 wrdrrors'e Ieal 6utCyUVos E iLo my grandfather, avnd of the same ziame with sne, avoyuqos jy/Y JE you0 are votiszg with us,'b 5/otolvv Eavrbv hAAXcp tCuyez7arag Eo'T to make one's self like to another is to imitate, a&ocuOtOws &X, hois in a manner sunlike one another. a.' In such cases, the form of expression is often abridged (881): fl.olav rats oavhras EiXe'rv'7 lo-'a (for 6LiCOa' T'r T&v sovXy io-a'7T) she had her dress like (the dress of ) the female slaves. 604. 3. with other words, as DATIVEu oF ACCOMPANIMENTs: igtes ical'l7r7ros zross Uva'Trord'ots- al cai vptol 7ropevUmtei a let us go-wsith horses the most powefulel and with men, oi AaIceiattlvtot Tr,'re icar& 7i v'rparcwp rposEl3ah ov q'c' eLX jaU'r Kal Trahs VavOrlv a"la the Lacedaenzonsians attacked the fortification with their landarmy and their s/ips at the same tieme. This occurs chiefly in military expressions. The intensive avbds is often used with this dative: o'Isrmr'as 7rev'ratcotLnvs 7r7reas E&Aaev ab'rois roT7s srXots Hijppias took 500 horsemenv with their arms Ithe arms themselves, arms and all). 605. DATIVE tVITII CO3MPOUND VERBS. Many verbs co-n. pounded with a preposition take a dative, depending, either o n 609] DATIVE OF INSTRUMENT, MEANS, MANNER, ETC. 241 the separate force of the preposition, or on the general meaning of the compound; especially verbs compounded with Ev, cr-v, Esr, —less often with rrpo&, 7rap, 7rept, vrow: E7rLI-~/xrLy'7roLeZv mry *vrXo to produce knowledge in the soul, ovyycror fios forgive me (lit. judge with me, in my favor), ErCeKEIVT'o ots iroXelfoLs they pressed hard upon the enemy, &AXXoLs e7rLT/c/ev that which we bring against others as (ground of) censure, 7rposdevac Td 8,- u w to come before the people, 7rapiao'aarac (rapeTwal)',r avppt to stand by (be present with) the man, srepitri'IrreLv To7S tKaIcos to (fall about) be involved in evils, rrotceZo9aL r, &pXOVTL to be subject to the ruler. a. Many of these verbs take also the accusative (544 c); or use a preposition (often the same preposition repeated) before the object. Dative of JIstr-ument, ]Jeans, Jfannqqer, Catse. 606. The dative is used to denote that BY which something is, or is done. Hence the mneans or instrument by (use of') which, the manner by (way of) which, the cause by (reason of) which, something is, or is done, are put in the dative. 607. DATIVE OF MEANS OR INSTRUMENT: obvelS ELratYvov lovra7s ecT~OarTo ~1.o one has gained praise by pleasures, r& t/eAXovTa KcpIoLxev ToSs 7rpoYeY7tyFEVIois we judge of the future by the past, EyvfohaJ'av Tf7 atceVU T'V`T7rAov the/y were recognized by the fashions of their arms, qpapy icop &rEhave.he died by poison, Cvxto&chat uavdrTCP to be puniSshec by death, ieXovTro ave'ors 7Tf r4Xet they received them (by) in the city, BdA;xetv Trv& Altos to throw at one with stones, Op&CLev TOIS oqbpaXytoTs we see with our eyes, Hm. Trlaorv Aavaol e/a' iKcpva oozqc B$EAeovv msay the Greeks by thy arrows (be made to) atone for my tears. a. Hence the dative is found with XpaolUat to use (i. e. to serve one's self-) as in Lat. the ablative with utor. A predicate-noun is often added in the same case: TOV'oTv Talso puXauiv?XPTO he used some of them as guards. 608. DATIVE OF MANNERt: 6p4pplT 7-re[yovTo they hastened (by running) on a run, nwav-ra Tp47rc, 7retpa~Lebaa vwe will try (by) in every way, TVXP nya. Kca trapXeTW let him begin with good fortune, zroXX ic Kpavyj ieriaot they advance with loud outcry, &aeXe e7y VKcp T & ~-vEO aY they retired with their victory incomplete. So t3ca by force, forcibly, L7Y?7 silently, or7rovu1 hastily, earnestly, y7ve"E'EAXvy a Greek by descenit, (pvre KaiKs evil by nature, OcaaKcos sodblaTr 2Yl.apsacus by name;-and many forms with omitted subject (509 a): Tavr(l (eKECit,?7, 7rp) in this (that, cwhich, what) zoay or manner, 1ia (6r7looia, cozvYi) by individual (public, common) action or expense. Often with the idea of ACCORDING TO: T7. dUt. YY7Vjl accordiny to my judgment,,rou6'rp Tl dy7p according to this statement, T7r &a.rLdE in truth, T7 o'riT in reality, EPTyT in act, in fact, Adysp i;t soo}rd, in profession, 7rpopo-ser in pretence. 609. DATIVE OF RESPECT. The dative of manner is used to show in what particular point or respect something is true: &apcEpeuv (7rpoIxctv, AeLreraan) X'a,9-e (AEy&'2el, Xp~L~aa i, ppoovraer) to be distinguished (supe rir, infe ior) i? nunsber (size, pr-operty, sense),.IoXvev T'.rw z@ oaTL to be strong in body,; rass T vuXars bppWOlveEaTepot firmer in their spirit, Trb wrpdrorwv TOv AiyenV io0'epov by.r.d5,Et 7rp4TEpoY TfJ vU5dLEL eOtl action, thouge after epeech in order, is before it in power. 242 DATIVE OF CAUSE, PLACE, TIMIE. [610 610. DATIVE OF DEGREE OF DIFFERENCE. The dative of manner is used (chiefly with the comparative) to show the degree by which one thing differs from another: re-Taplr, lYavs E'aaTTov less by four minae, r-. icedpaXp peteoov (greater by the head) a head taller,,roXAAs 7yevEeas V'-TepoYv'C Tpi Tpcicv many generations later than the Trojan war, eIca'eTo-I 7rpb rT~s i.v aXaayvI pdXn7s ten years before the battle at Salamis. So, very often; the dative of neuter adjectives: wroxxAc by much, teaicKpw by far, WAtcp by little, etc., qroxx, Xe(pwv (also 7roxb XeIpwv, 552) much worse, -, 7ram'l cplrfTT-wV (better by all odds) infinitely better, 7rdo' yaakhAo; v, tlroye how much more would you be hated? Toao5VUT ~i~sov ii Y'p 7rAEielC ICe'IcTr/Uai I live more pleasantly (by that degree, by which) in proportion as 1 possess more: and with the superlative, caKupq. &plaros best by far. REM. a. In many instances, the same dative may be regarded indifferently as expressing, either the manner of an action, or the means of its performance: lrapeAaeTv oVKc iv if4 it was not possible to get past in a violent manner, or bj means of violence. 611. DATIVE OF CAUSE: roAXdicts ayvotf.4apapTdvoyo ev ewe often err by reasonl of ignorance, p4tG &ariibAaov they departed through fear, obdels obv3rv reV't, ~pci d-EL on account of poverty no one will do anythizg. a. Many VERBS OF FEELING take a dative of the cause: obvevl or-ce XagpeIS vs p[iAOis &TyaaoLs you delight in nothing so much as in good friends, o6 aebs E'poIs To7s acKators i3eTaL the divinity is pleased with just actions, &Xaeo0aelr'r ava6oX9 vexed at the delay, -Po'EtcaTeoU6 xaXe7lrae[o0'ere TotS Elp77/LEVots azngry with lccatonymus for what he said, atiXvro'uar'rats 7rporTpoV a/uaplalr laam ashamed of the formzer errors, 7'yadrCweo Tr Oroe'Tpi, they were contented with their saferty, XaAe7rcs pipw T0os Wrapov0-c 7rpdyuaai I am distressed at the present affairs. -Dative of Place and Timne. 612. DATIVE or PLACE. In poetry, the dative is often used without t preposition, to denote the place IN which something is, or is done:'EAXci6 racsoov dwelling in Hellas, TIuv[otro rvaloe dwelling (in) among the Pylians, -,e T' 0opeo-'&eoICT0oeS auapEs E&EaCqov which builders felled on the monectains, eiBe IyXCt KtA10i7S he was sleeping in the recess of the tent, T'Jd' &ioi,,Ol EXcav having the bow on his shoulders, &?pOs07L I-JTV7XdEi lie happens (to be) in the country, aosos on the way. a. Seldom thus in prose (mostly in reference to Attic demes): MeAIT1p at Afelite, T'a'po7rala Td Tre Mapaacore tcal 4atapue'i ical lIAaraiams the trophies at lllarathon, Scalamis, and Plataea. 613. DATIVE OF TIME. The dative is used to denote the time in (at) which something is, or is done. This applies to words for DAY, NIGHIT, iMONTH, YEAR: T'. auT?'. i7u/pca the same day, T56e Tp YUKcT to-night, T-y'6ETrepala on the following day,,e'7rbd3'vr luvl in the comting month, -TETapTC, E'-EL (e'vavwr, ) in the fourth year;-also to 6p,: xeLumwos (pa in time of winter;-further to FESTIVAL times: To7s'OAvXu rtios at ths: Olympic games. To other words, ev is usually added: ev -o-cr- Tc-, Xpd'py (kcaip) at this time (occasion), EV TW racpdo'VTI at the present time, ev Tip d&e at that time. When time is designated by words denoting circumstance or event, bv is rarely omitted: -iJ irpoTrpE eK&bcX7o'a- (for e'v T- etc.) at the time of the former assembly/: cf. poet. XeLyepT1 r&dqT at the time of the wcintry south-wind. 6181 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 243 F. PREPOSITIONS WITH THEIR CASES. 614. The prepositions have a twofold use: — a. In composition with verbs, they define the action of the verb, in respect to its direction.b. As separate words, connected with particular cases, they show the relations of words in a sentence, more distinctly than the cases alcne could do it. The name preposition (7rpo3EcEts) is derived from the former use. Such words, therefore, as Iiuev witout, rAikv except, EZJeKa on account of, etc., which have the latter use only, not being compounded with verbs, may be called improper prepositions. They all take the genitive (cf. 589), except os, which takes the accusative. 615. All the prepositions were originally -adverbs. Many of them are still,used as such in poetry, especially in Hm.: 7repf round about, and, with anastrophe, 7rf4p exceedingly; oi' ve and therewith. Hd. has e'rl b3 and thereucpon, Be' and next, &v e' or iv se 83 and among the number; also 7rpbs 6E, KaI Vrp4s, and besides, which occur even in Attic prose. a. The preposition, in its adverbial use, may belong to a verb understood, and may thus stand for a compound verb: so, even in Attic prose, mL for trear it is possible; in Attic poetry, rdipa for 7rdapcti to be present. Hm. has also:egrl, jLEra, for ereVTit, /LLeT'ELTq etc.: similar is the imperative &va up! (-= avd07rq1aL). For retraction of the accent (anastrophe) in this case, see 102 a. 616. On account of this origin, the prepositions in Hm. are very free as regards their position, being often separated from the verbs (tmesis, 477) or substantives to which they belong:'v 8' aT'brs e6baoETo smposra XaXco'v and he himself put on the shining brass, a/qs! bE Xarat &juots aetooT-aztoL and round their.shoulders wave the manes. In Attic prose, the preposition is separated from its substantive only by words that qualify the substantive (487, 492): but particles such as /e, E b', 7e, T' 7yp, op., may be interposed after the preposition; other words, very rarely: Trap&'yp oETact'rovrs rJ^ovs for contrary, I suppose, to the laws. For anastrophe when the preposition follows the word it belongs to, see 102 D b. In prose, tlfis is confined to irept with the genitive. Use of d~ierent cases'with the prepositions. General Rem'arks. 617. The accusative is used with prepositions, to denote the object to'wards which motion is directed (551); or, in general, the object to, o9n, or over which an action extends (544). The genitive is used to denote the object from which an action pro-.ceeds (579), in expressions of departure, separation, or distinction: also, to denote the object to which an action belongs (compare genitive with adverbs, 589; and see 573). The dative is used to denote the object in, by, or'with which an action takes place. 618. The dative is properly used with prepositions, to express being, or remaining, IN a particular situation; for coining TO the situation, tho accusative is used; for passing FROM it, the genitive:;'vLet 7rapa re3 [3aortWei he remains (by the side of) in the presence of the king,'7KEL rap' azrJT ke is come to his presence, OI'Xerfu rqap' ae-Tro he is gane fr'om his pr9esenea 244 PIEPOSITIONS AND CASES. [618 a. Verbs of motion sometimes have a preposition with the dative, to de. ncte a state of rest following the action of the verb: i' 7wTrp roraJtx' rea-ov they fell (into, and were) in the river. So too, in place of a dative denoting rest, we sometimes have an accusative or genitive, in reference to a following or preceding state of motion: or-'Tcs e'S 0'-ov (lit. standing into the midst) coming into the midst and standing there,'ro7 iEs nI Xov Alcp>aeZo to those taken (in, and brought) from Pylus, oi ieK T7s ayopas KaTaXars'TES Ta- &Yva pvy7ov those in the market left their goods andfled (from it). Generalc View of the Prepositions. 619. Prepositions used with only ONE case, viz. I. the Accusative: Etd, (o. II. the Genitive: vrt', a7ro, El, rpo,.- - also avev, aXpL, I/zeXPA, cEvEKa, 7rX7v (614). III. the Dative: Ev, crv'v. Prepositions used with Two cases, viz. IV. the Accusative and Genitive: 8&dc car&, r rep. V. the Accusative and Dative: ava. Prepositions used with THREE cases, viz. VI. the Accusative, Genitive, and Dative: aipL, wE, E, era, rapa, 7repI, rp6g, SrV7rO. 1. Prepositions wuitl the Acctusative only. 620. 1. elS (also Je) into, to; properly to a position in something (- Lat. in with the acc.), opposed to iE' out of. It is used a. of PLACE: ~CfeXo i'I'Taxas St/soaiav ESS'tsIEXiaY the Sicdli passed over from Italy into Sicily, El's 6imauo'rpiov elsteYai to (enter into) come before a court (of dicasts or jurors), AhXovs 7rero-EaaL E's T'bY I~ovY to make an address to the people, els alvspas yEypdcpei' to enrol among men (write into the list of men). b. of TIMIE: El'S vv'ra (to) till night, els 5/Aes to our time, es Ti (to what time) hows long? El's eYiavT'Vd (to the end of a year) for a whole year, poet. E'Tos Eis EToSf'enom year to year. An action may be thought of as taking place when a certain time is come to; hence els is also used for the time WHEN (613): E8dtice yap Eds T75Y' v'0TEpalaY, JeVY 3aNsXea for it was thoug ht that on the next day the king woueld arrive, el's tcatp' in good time, E's Te-osfinally. c. of MEASuRE and NUMBER: Els 8aS oaC ovs to the number of 200, about 200, e's r'eTTapas to (the depth of) four men, four deep, els Ni'vauv to (the extent of one's) power, accordinzg to one's power. d. of AIM or PURPOSE: XpoYio, els'bV 7rdErtyov., usefutl (toward) for the war, els'oS3e ftIco[tev (to this end)for this are we comle. In COIPOSITION: into, in, to. NOTE. In Attic prose, els is the common form: only Thucydides (like IId.) has is almost always. The poets use either form at pleasure. 621. 2. cos (cf. 614) to, only with persons: Hm. aiel TbV yoAuor ayet aebs &vsi TbY,uoor a god azcways b rings like to likea -625] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 245 II, Withz the Genitive only. 622. 1. vrri (compare Ep. ('Zvra, afr" v; also dCTLKp1V), as a separate preposition, lost its original meaning over against, opposite to (cf. 6v-avri-os); but this gave the idea of counterpart, substitute, and hence the common meaning, instead of, for: rHm. avvl tcaoltyL7-Tov reT/s' I'77rS TIE Te'TvCTal in place of a brother (equal. ly esteemed and aided). is a stranger and suppliant, a&T-'7o7T0o o'cuaclos &aada'rop 6av a &xxdaoraaL for a mortal body, to gain in exchange immortal glory. In cOMPOsITION: against, in opposition, in return. 623. 2. adrr (Lat. ab, a, Eng. off) from, offfrom, away fromn; properlyfrrom a position on something: a. of PLACE: Hm. a&b''i'rrwv X'ro Xalxale from the (horses) car he sprang to the ground, &3' irrwov &daXeO-ar to fight (from a horse) on horseback. b. of TIME: a7r' iKcetrds'r5s -hEpcas (from) since that day. c. of CAUSE: arrdtvo/os anrb's espivns independent (from) in consequence of the peace, alrb 5Uvar aeros "lCEL he is come by agreement. PHRASES: a&rb eKowro away from the mark, without aim, a&rb TavbToed'ror (from self-moved action) without occasion, of itself, arrb ~Td$acros X'yelv to speak (from mouth, not from a thinking mind) by rote, ol &airb owKcYrvs (those who act from the stage) the players. In COMPOSITION: from, away. 624. 3. e' (before consonants fiE: Lat. ex, e) from, out of; properly from a position in something (627): a. of PLACE: ieK 7rCdpqrs peveye he is banished from Sparta. b. of TIME: ie vra/o6wv (from children, Lat. a pueris) since childhood. Hence of immediate succession: XAoyov ie AXdyov X'ewev to make one speech after another, Hm. catbv E'K ilcatcoo evil after evil. c. of ORIGIN: i/e raTpbs Xp7o'Trov'yevtero he came of a worthy father. Hence with passive verbs (instead of v7r with the gen.).: Ttuarrcar EIC'IrVOS to be honored by some one: the agent is then viewed as the source of the action; this construction is rare in Att., but frequent in other dialects. d. of INFERENCE: e'K T,- 7rap'T'cey (judging from) according to the present circumstances, eC i-v 6uooeYoevpee'Vv?tof te iea aoo according to the truths admitted both by me and by thee. PHRASES: iec BetLas on the right hand, 4'2&oov (from equal ground) on, an equality, 6r]alt (icpejdo-al) T-I ieC r'VoS to bind (hang) one thing on another. In COMPOSITION: out of, from, away. 625. 4. irpo' (Lat. pro) before: a. of PLACE: 7rpb avp3Yv before the door. b. of TIME:'rpb Ti-s uXarls before the battle. c. of PREFERENCE: i7rpb,ToV'W Treavd rac FiaXXo av eAoLto before these things he would rather choose death. d. of PROTECTION (for one's safety, interest), a less frequent use: -rpb eradWser iecxeoart to fightfor one's children (prop. in front of them). PHRASES:'rpb wroXXeoD roter7-aL (to esteem in preference to much) to conr #ider as valuable,:important, Hm. wrpb 6MoOfurthcr on the way. In COMPOSITION: before, forcard, forth. 246 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. j626 626. IMPROPEUr PREPOSITIONS (614). 5. a'vev (poetic airep) without, Lat. sine. 6. 7rX'v except; often used as a conjunction, see Rem. r. 7. XpI, t;Xp until; often used as conjunctions (877, 8). 8. E'VeKa (also e'cEKev, e'LeKLa, poet. o{'veKa) has two meanings: a. on account of, for the sake of (with gen. of the motive, Lat. causd): rus vy teias EhveCa Xpyleaa Tri IZa'p for the sake of health, we employ the physi. tian (cf. ldC with ace., 630 b). hb. as regards: a&(paxws Si7,'eVyIcKCd yE Tv ovrocpav'v Ihe lived in safety, so far as the sycophants were concerned (without danger from them). REM. r. The adverbs ALETaS5 between, $8Xa and Xwphs apart (from), are often used as improper prepositions. On the other hand, 7rAjv except is often used without a genitive, as a conjunction: poet. ovc &p''AXato'Ts Wvpes ELa- 7WrAXv 8CsE (with the same meaning as X41s TvoM3e) have the Achaeans no men but this one? III. WithA the Dative only. 627. 1. Cv (JIm. vl, e) in, =- Lat. in with the ablative: a. of PLr.ACE: lv ~7raps7 in Sparta: with a word implying number, it has the sense of amoang: ev'rovaows among these, Cv 67ip/ A'yetrv to speak (among) before the people. b. of TIME: ev'rOVT7 TP etrE in this year. c. of OTHER RELATIONS: ev'Tac rEi T'b Tr'1s cydXss'vXos (in the power of) with God is the issue of the battle, Cv vrapaoce. deant to be in (a course or state of) preparation. PHIRAsEs: Iv 7rxots elvat to be (in) under arms, e'v CaUii IXELVY TtLvd (to hold one in blame) to blamse one, eIv 3p. iXEtV'tvA to be angry with one, sretpdotat Ev KcaLtpP Tot eart I will try to be (in good time) useful to you, ev srposhlacs!eApeu ins the (part) character of an addition, as an addition:- also iv To7s, rarely used to strengthen the superlative: ev To0s 7rpi'-os,aehae he came first of all (i. e. iv'o7Zs iAXaoVa among those who came), cf. 665 a. For iv with verbs of motion (iv XEPoi Trl'vart to put in one's hands), see 618 a. In COMPOSITION: in, O2. NOTE. Rare poetic forms are ely, eVI. 628. 2. ov r (also $6v, = Lat. cusn) oith, i. e. in company with, in connection with (cf. feTra with the gen., 644): iratReves'ro b-vv Tr &c3EXA p he was educated with his brother, o-bv'AsrXewvi EvIKraE he gained the victory with (the help of) Apollo, a-bv v Ty (in conformity) with law (opposed to?rapd with ace., 648 e). In COMPOSITION: with, together. IV. With, the Accusative and Genitive. 629. 1. 8ta through (connected with U6o two, 8t-xa in tzoo, apart, Lat. di-, dis-, asunder: prop. through the space which separates two objects). 5id with the GENITIVE:.a. of PLACE: Hmn. &a&;&Ev a-rSifos jAgSe Ofaetvs,8pQov E'PyXos through ths phining shield passed the stout spear. 633] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 247 b. of TIME: at Yv'crois through the night, rA 7ravsTbs'roO Biov xu717XaieiV te be without resource through his whole life. c. of MEANS: Blat Q'T O'r(paX~ayv pwyev we see (through) by means of the eyes, bi' epju7lzWoos hd,'eiv to speak by an interpreter. d. of a STATE of action or feeling: avTroSs La 7roXE/eov ZEval to proceed (in the way of war) in a hostile manner toward-them, aL pco yiv wylreo'a to come to be in a state of alarnm. PHRASES: btl o'-lTaTRos 1fXeL to have in one's mouth (passing through the mouth), aLa Xeipcop ieXeL, to have in hand, bL&'raXE'co (by quick ways) quickly, aL& TE'Xovs completely.- AL with the gen. often denotes, not the space or time of the action itself, but that which separates it from something else: 81a uatcpov after a long interval, Meav'7r' a&la're'rpatcoa[lw E7f' UE'XXovlt KaTOLIC'oEL, they are about to occuepy Mfessene after (an exile of) 400 years, aa iroAXXsy, ~eowvr 6oD at a distance of many days' journey, r& bGEca i7rdxIevrro 7rdrpyot aeav at inter'vals of ten battlements, there were towers. 630. cid with the ACCUSATIVE: a. throeugh, durinzg, mostly poetic: Hm. &A Wotxa-a through the halls, L&A vecTa dsuring the night. b. regularly, on accounvt of (with accus. of the efficient cause, cf. E'veta, 626 a): A& r pY vo-oey XSpcexaa TcL Ia'Tp. on account of the sickness, wue enmploy the physician. PIIRAES: abrbs 8? EavTrdv by cand for himself, bai Ti why, wherefore? In COMPOSITION: through, also apart (Lat. di-, dis-): bapipoa =- differo. 631. 2. KaTr (cf. adv. Kacrw belozo) originally downz (opposed tos cav;). cKard with the GENITIVE: a. down from: Hm. 8i kE lCaT' OVbXURIroLo icapvwro he went down fr'om the heights of Olymspus,'T Ka'cT 7'ys that which is (down from) 2nder grouncld. b. dozen towuards, doun. upon: Hm. tar' O3SaaX/Av KCEXvT"' iXXvs a mist settled down upon his eyes, plpe tcara Xetpbs vo wp bring water (to pour) on the hands. Hence towards: iraivos Kata'IVos praise (directed) towuards one; but usually in a hostile sense, against: *eub6reaai (cacaE Xe'yelr, bPT'vpas 7rapiXEe'aI) IcaTa T L'OS to lie (speak evil, produce witnesses) against one. PHRASES: 7rdALp KaT' Icpas iXe,'E to take a city completely (from its highest point down), ctar YSTVo in the rear (of an army). 632. KaET with the ACCUSATIVE, douwn aloong; passing over, through, or unto; pertainieng to, according to: a. of PLACE: caraT poy down streamlt, KaT& yv ICal cdxAao'avY (over) by land and by sea, Hm. Zebs Eil ) aTa barTa Zeus camse down to the feast. b. of TIME: /caT' ieCeThYOY Tb XpoJYv at that tine, caTra T1Jy elpPv~rW during the peace, o KicaW' ilas our contemporaries. c. of OTHER REI.ATIONS: carea ToVr TOO Yrb,'pd7row' (according to) in this mnanner, Kar ircivdra in all respects, KaT'& 8i6acrv according to ability, cKas&'ros Sdtxovs according to the laws, KaT' Eted as regards me, KaTa' Iuvapov, &pio-ror Veop according to Pindar, water is best (of all things). d. in DISTRIBUTIVE expressions: Hm. Kcama' cpxa according to clans, each clan by itself, cKar/a pes by threes, three by three, Ka'?'e'pac day by day, daily,. In COMPOSITION: down, against. Often it serves only to strengthen the meaning of the simple velb, and in many such cases it cannot be translated. 633. 3. vrerp (Hm. also Vbretp) over = Lat. super. Wreo with the GENITIVE: 248 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [633 a. of PLACE: 6 iXios verAp itxIy PropEiETat the sun journeys above us. b. in derived sense, for, in behalf of: idXear ai V7rE'p Tlvos t.o fight for one (orig. over him, standing over to defend), 6 vir~p'iS irarpoIos tcl3vL'vyos the (peril) struggle for the fatherland;- also in place of:?yh? v7rep rov &7ro&Kptvoiltat I will answer in thy stead; and on account of: ivrep'rijs ikevaepgas vbyas e vatovytcr, I congratulate you on account of your freedom.- 7rep in the sense of srept concerning is rarely found before Demosthenes: -/ry v7rEp TOV'Toe'ov tyu 7rrPy'o0aCT77TV eXEw to have such an opinion concerning the war. 634. irnEp with the ACCUSATIVE, over, beyond, of place and measure: Hm. urep ob'v Br fi, ETro he passed over the threshold, v7r'p bya/utv beyond one's ability. In COMPOSITION: over, beyond, exceedingly, in behalf of. V. 1VitA the Accuscative and. Dative. 635. dva, (cf.,adv. dv. o above) originally tup (opposed to Kara). ayd with the DATIVE, only in Epic and lyric poetry, up on: AvY rapv-dpq ~Kcpe on the summit of Gargarus, XpvouE'r avA aKcTprp C upon a golden sceptre. 6:36. ayd with the ACCUSATIVE, Up along; passing over, through, or unto (cf. KaTd with ace., 632): a. of PLACE: &ar& PoVY Up stream, ava r-aoav a Ta'Y yUr over the whole land, IIt1. ava r-rpa'dv through the camp. b. Of TIME: a& wa rraraY T-y 7uLCpav (over) througqh the entire day. c. in DISTRIBUTIVE expressions: a&A EzTTapas by fours. PHRASES:,Ac Icpd'roS (up to his power) with all his might, h&a Xdyov (up to) according to proportion, ava rrdL4,a eXEtv to have in one's mozuth, to talk about (cf. 6Ld, 629). In COMIPOSITION: Up, back, again. VI. Wit7 thle Accuscative, Genitive, and Dative. REM. The proper meaning of the preposition is, in general, most clearly seen with the dative. 637. 1. acudl( (Lat. acmb-) connected with ciqbfO both: properly 0o2 both sides of; hence about (cf. rept, 649). a&opi with the DATIVE, only Ionic and poetic, about, and hence concerning, on; account of: Hm. spc6re0t 1TEXac/l&y a&pl aTr aEOrL- the sh:;eld-strap will sweat about his breast, ld. au/bl &a7rt{y ~T.vr ir relooyae Tot concernincg my departure, I will obey youz, poet. a/~qpl (p46o on accoiunt offear. 638. a(ti with the GENITIVE, about, concernling: Hd. a&,ul TaVTrs r7s i7r'Asos (about) in the neighborhood of this city, 6ia0Epereat a&pti TL'os to quarrel about somethiisg. 639. ayFpt with the ACCUSATIVE, about, of place, timc, measure, occupation: T&,apqQ opia (about) close to the boundaries, &aupl TOuroV Tby Xpo'yov aboutt this time, aurpl Ta& ico7Vra about sixty (Lat. circiter sexaginta), &jul Erryvov 7roveTv to be busy about the supper. PHRASES: ofl aylif T-va a person with those about himn, his friends, folloivers, oldisrs, etc.; hence even of auol rIAdrrowa Plato, as head of a philosophic school, In COMPOSITION: about, on both sides. 645] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 249 640. 2. trl on, uponz. enrd with tiTe DATIVE: a. of PLACE Hm. ril Em. Xaonl e-oY "OMTes eating bread utpon the earth, 67r' ri. rraAXaro?. oZlbcEY to live (close upon) by the sea. b. of TIME: 47rl T'roi-oLS after these things, thereupon. c. in OTHER RELATIONS: TrAl'07is qrpyidaacv eivaC to be (over) at the head of affairs, Earl.ors 7roXeuioLs ehlan to be (dependent upon) in the power of the encemy, Er71 T'L XaGpeLy to rejoice (on the ground of) on account of something; —— especially of the AIM, on which an action proceeds: er!'raael[,.'TOVro e'states in order to an education hast thou learned this;- and the CONDITION, on which an action depends: &irl TK'ols aavelery to lend on interest, dl TeorTP on this condition. 641. fir[ with the GENITIVE: a. of srACE,-to denote the place where: Kvpos 7rpoiv)a[erTo ep' alpliaTos Cyrsus appeared upon a chariot, ril T'ov eboviyAov (sc. tce'pOs) on the left (wing), eArl papT'Spcvr in the presence of witnesses; — or the place whither: 7rl dA>you 7rAe7Y to sail (upon) toward Sanzos. b. of TIME: 7rl KPOLaOUv 6pXo'nTOS whi'e Croesus reigned, e(p''ctvcY in our time, ril Kc'IrUov in time of danger. c. in OTHER RELATIONS: rid nr} S aPXIs eIIye'VE to remain in the qffice, hAeyet irE Tervos to speak (upon) with reference to some one, p+' av'roa oabce7v to live by himself (apart from others), er' OlAwy Ce -ETa7yiYOL drawn up with little depth (few men in depth). 642. lir[ with the ACCUSATIVE, to (a position) upon, zunto: cvafcaLervr /?''ldr7rov to mount on horseback, eArl re id toward the right. PHRASES: erl 7roxva to a great distance,'Ws 7r T' 7rXroz for the most part, Tb w' d/ye so far as I am concerned. In COMPOSITION: upon, over, after, toward, sunto. Often it only marks the action as going forth upon the object, and in many such cases cannot well be translated. 643. 3. terda (akin to /c'-ror medius) a-mid, among.!LeTd with the DATIVE, poetic, chiefly Epic: Hm. "Eic'opa 5r rebs EiOe YiET' arspdct Hector who was a god among men.' 644. tre-d with the GENITIVE, with, implying participation (cf. ov', 628): ue'A T'nr Sv/ALdXaoyr IctvavUreve to meet the dangers of battle (in common) with the allies, UET- 6atcpvoiw with (amid) tears,'yipas pYET&'reVYas old age along with poverty. 645. /erla' with the ACCUSATIVE: a. to (a position) among or along with, poetic: rHm. ry fierT EreVOs e'a1p'Cs going among the multitude of his friends, Hm. sby 0ovpl er"T' A'VTOEfsOPTa P3eB,6ICe he went with his spear after (in pursuit of) Automedon. b. after (so as to be with something, and obtain or secure it), poetic: Him.,38jar tETah D raTrpbs akovry to go after (in quest of) tidings of a father, Hm. 7rdxetpoa tE'na 4cWpoar'novro they were arming for war. c. after, in TIME or ORDER: terT &'bY erIE oaroYY]lalbcy ror'Xefor after the Peloponnesian war, LEnT aeoabs /vix ~E'TdaTeoyar (after) next to the gods, the soul is (a thing) most divine. PHRASES: /ye'n XeipaS 9Xelv to have in hand (prop. to take between the hands and hold there), p/xe' i71,upar by day (after day comes, begins). 250 PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. [641 In COMPOSITION: with (of sharing), among, between, after, from one place ts another (tLeraTrobaL to put in a new place). 646. 4.'rTppd (Hm. also Wrap, 7rapal) alongside of, by, near. Grapd with the DATIVE: lm. 7rap& vrvual icopwtoV-il uIIyAdELv to remainz by (the side of) the curved ships, ial 7rap' EUoI TI's ew7relpa er7i with me too (as it were, at my side) is some experience. 647. irapd with the GENITIVE, front beside, from, with verbs of MOTION aIld those which imply RECEIVING (outwardly or inwardly): HIm. airopvoa-e7v?rap&,Czv' to return from the ships (from a position by ornear them), AapqYfdv3ci (1/a, - ad4epr, aicodev) rapid r',os to take (learn, hear) from some one. Very rarely, and only in poetry, without the meaning " from ": rvaLETcV, rap''Io uyrovu PegapwY dwelling by the currents of Ismenus. 648. Brapd with the ACCUSATIVE, to (a position) beside, unto; also along by: a. of PLACE: Hm. Tk 8b' auri's Ki-1Y Trapa YPas but they two went again to the ships (to be by or near them), Hm.,i3 b' &XE'wv 7rapa D7iva kavXdi$-os he went sorrowing along the sea-shore. b. of TIIE: Trap' bXoor T'b-L Pgov (along by) during his whole life. c. of COMPARISON: eZ T'as vrpcdets srap' &aXXiXas TLrEPal we must put the actions beside each other, compare them, ues^1dv TI 7rap& TOUTO somewhat larger i9n comparison with this. d. of CAUSE: 7rap& irv iLeeepav & IXeLay'l'Xvr7iros a'ETrat on account of our neglect Philip is becoming great (prop. by it, in connection with it). C. of EXCEPTION or OPPOSITION: nEXo0eY Tr 7rap& TsaTa kXXo AX'yeir beside this we have another thing to say, 7rap& Tby -wuov contrary to the law (prop. passing by or beyond it, trans-gressing it) the opposite of CKarad with ace. (632 c). PHRASES: 7rapp zCtcpo6 by little, within a little, 7raps rtucp'ov jaXov &a7roaaveiV [ came near dying, 7rap 7sroxA PucKa to be (victorious by much) completely victorious, srap' ovbl 7roieO aaIL to esteem as naught. In COMPOSITION: beside, along by or past, aside, amiss. 649. 5. vrept around (on all sides, cf. alyoI 637). rept with the DATIVE, not frequent in Attic prose: a. of PLACE: Hm1. eby3ue srepl fov'eai XLTWYa he put the mail-coat around his breast, Hm. srepl flCpL (about the heart) at heart, heartily. b. of CAUSE: IIm. srepl o0Tl juaXeL4,eraes ircTecdre-oa-i fighting (about) in defence of lhs possessions, iBeioav, repl ~T, Xowpi'c they became alarmed for the place. 650. 7rept with the GENITIVE: a. chiefly in derived sense, about, concerning (Lat. de): f9ovXAedo'ra 7repl ro' Ero;xovu they are taking counsel about the war, Tziva 8boav ElXeIs srepl TOV'Tc'P what opinion hast thou concerning these things? b. in Itm. (surrounding, and hence) surpassing, more than: srepl 7rdiVTCV, nyEat / AAXwv to be superior to all others. IIence, in prose, such phrases as'repl sroxXo9 sro eibmaal to consider as (more than much) very important, desirable, repl oabEv6es i7yeratL to esteem (just above nothing)-very low, think little of. 651. rept with the ACCUSATIVE, nearly the safie ais a:if-' eAvin7rroy about Egypt, in the region of Egypt; and in derived sense, srepl uxoa-oqapa; rrudvbcie, to be busily engaged about philosophy. In COMPOSITION: around, (remaining) over, surpassing (with adjectives bat. per in permagnus). For Hfm. r'ep as adverb eceedingly, see 615. 656] PREPOSITIONS AND CASES. 251 652. 6. xrpio (Hm. also 7rpoTrl, rroT) at or by,the front of, ef. trapS, 646), akin to 7rpo. 7rp&s with the DATIVE: a. at: 6 Kvpos ir, 7rpbs BavvXh&zr Cyrus was at Babylon. Also with verbs of motion (618 a): Hm. qroTl B o' 0cr'-pov p3dXe 7yalp but he threw the staff on the ground (so as to be, lie, there); -and in derived sense: Tbo rvO' 7rpOSEXerT 7rpbs TrovrTo apply your mind to this. b. in addition to: 7rpbs r06TOlS in addition to these things, furthermore, Trps'ToS ihXxols beside all the rest. 653. 7rpcs with the GENITIVE: a. in front of, looking towards: 7rps Op dbcqs Iceo'aa&i to be situated over against Thrace, rb s7rpbs o'r Epas'rEsXos the westward wall, cf.'rpJs with ace.; -- similarly in swearing:'rpbs aeciV before the gods, by the gods. So rpbs 7rarpos (tu7rpds) on the father's (mother's) side, 7rpbs Ifpwora-ypov eaL to be on the side of Protagoras, 7rps'wros NAe'eYv to speak on one's side, in one's favor, Him. 7rpbs'yap Amrs etlCo SeTvoi for strangers are (on the side of ) under the care of Zeus. Often, to express what is natural or appropriate on the part of some one: 7rpbs aTrpou e0taT it is the way of a physician, obUK Y'yrpbs T'o Kvpov'rprwov it was not according to the character of Cyrus. b. from (prop. from before, cf. 7rapd, 647): AjSos 7rpbs tS&cv prosperity from the gods;-sometimes used with passive verbs (instead of lJrd, 656 b): rpU s TWOS pItXeOal to be loved by some one (cf. 6Ec, 624 c). 654. 7rpos with the ACCUSATIVE: a. to (prop. to the front of): EpxoIrat 7rpbsr Btas 7 rpEoxets embassadors come to us, 7rpbs Tbo 3i~yo &cyopeveYv to speak to (before) the people. b. towards: vrpbs Bol5avY towards the north;- especially of DISPOSITION or RELATION toward some one: 7rtoT~0s 3claicsE7Sat 7rpds TrIMa to be faithfully disposed towar'ds one,'rpbs 3caomA'a aorovaas roiteto6at to make a truce with the king, 8ucdco~rat 7rpds'rl'a to carry on a laue-suit against one. c. with a viesw to, in reference to: crpbs rb eav'rT o(vwqEpo, in order to his own advantage, 7rpbos [ E TrarT'?pwrcor (to what end) for what do you ask me this? 7rpbs Taura (in view of these things) therefore, 8tzacp'eiw rpbs &pErTY to. di'er in respect to virtue,'Ta 7rpbs TbW 7rdJAxqov the things pertaining to the war, rpbs'rb &p7ypsot Tv' EvSaalLovrac Kipyieit to judge of happinzess (by reference to) according to money. PHRASES: 7rpbs {iovz4{, Xdprv with a view to please, gratify (one's self or another),,rpbrs lay by (resortrto) force, forcibly, irpbs bp'y7i' in anger, angrily, ovbSv 7rpbos HE it is nothing to me. In COMPOSITION: to, towards, in addition. 655. 7. vro' (Hm. also vraL) under = Lat. sub. vlrd with the DATIVE: Vorb'rT obpavw, under the heavens, v6rb'r, oipei at the foot of the mountain, Vr7''Alqvacors eivat to be under (the power of) the Athenians, poetic in Hm. Xepolv v+' 7luETepp.Yt &Xov-ra (Troy) conquered (under) by Our hznds. 656. vrod with the GENITIVE: a. of PLACE:' Tnrb'ys under the earth;-hence in some expressions of DEPENDENCE: VSr' av'rr7TCe XOPeVeEL to dance under (the lead of) flute-players. But much oftener, under the working of a cause or agent: hence b. of AGENCY, with PaSSIVE VERBS or those of passive meaning: rqca~aoat Jorb Grov r-oXrcT' to be honored by the citizens, X 7JrAxs edAw o 6rb TRv'EkXkvsoov the 252 ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE. [656 city was taken by the Greeks, iroXXol &ard'avov b7r'b cOv fapG3dpwv many died (were slain) by the barbarians. c. of CAUSE: brb yiipces &ao-evirs iv he was weak by reason of old age. 657. bTrd with the ACCUSATIVE: a. of PLACE, prop. to (a position) under: Hm. v57rb I7rV'ToV Soer'o KcvaLCroP''a he dived under the surging sea; used also in expressions denoting rest (618 a):,v7rb Tb $pos r'?tL'oTvzo they were passing the night'at the foot of the mountain. Hence, in derived sense, of subjection: 7rdAets'e Kail E'7 bqp''aviobs 7roierTh&a to bring cities and nations under their power. b. of TIME (under a time either impending or in progress): vrb vlAcTa just before night (Lat. sub noctem); v7rb'T- vvt'ra dchring the night. In COMPOSITION: under, secretly, slightly, gradually. It is sometimes used where the idea under is foreign to our conceptions, and in many such cases can hardly be translated. ADJECTIVES. 658. For attributive and predicate-adjective see 488. For agreement of adjective and substantive, see 498. For omitted subject, and use of adjective as substantive, see 509. For peculiarities in number and gender, see 511-23. For use of adjective as adverb, see 226, 228. For neuter adjective used as cognate-accusative see 547 c. Degree8s qf CornpCarison. 659. POSITIVE FOR COMPARATIVE. The positive may express a quality as disproportioned to the circumstances of the case, and may thus have a comparative force: 1 Xopa alICp& 8 t4 icapYS frTaz the territory, from being sufficient, will become small (i. e. too small, smaller than its inhabitants require). In most cases of the kind, an INFINITIVE follows, usually with &s or tisTe: OgMtyoL Eo'/exV &s 6yicpaTres erat aiVr&v we are toofew to have possession of them. 660. CO1rPATATIVE. The comparative degree may be followed by a genitive, or by l than (see 585-6). a. The genitive is always used, when the comparative is followed by a reflexive pronoun: o'Tav v TrLvL tKLVV tvfil, & iroaXX? XeTpov EavUTcv X4yovat whenever they are in any danger, they speak much worse (than themselves, i. e. than they do under other circumstances) than they usually do. Compare 13eXT1trTos eav,roD (best of himself, better than in any other state) in his best estate (559 a). b. { is always used, when the two objects of comparison are adjectives: both of these are then put in the comparative: 0o'pa-Tryo 01 7raEorYES ) 3eX'rore:' generals more numerous than good, oUV'rVo/Ci-epOr oapE'oT-epov 8aaNEXr PaL to discourse more briefly than clearly. c. 1 is used after the comparative, when the quality is represented as disproportioned to something: thus X icaT'r with the acc., ~ or X's or X is'e with the infin.: vro;/oLE'`s JeEXT'W-rle KarT' v~pwxoro a lawgiver better (than according to man) than consists with manzs nature, exi'Cw } icaT& dicrpi:7re7rd4vaca they 664] COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 253 have szcfered things too great for tears, EXh'Aiovs ve5rb &pwve orapaTpErewr aL too good to be seduced by gifts, EALdr'W UvCascLY Exe1 X &sTe T'obs cjdAovs w&qweAv he has too little power to serve his friends. d. / is sometimes irregularly omitted, when i7rXov (irXe'v) more or a-AaTTo, (,ue7ov) less is followed by a numeral not in the genitive: &7rocKTe tvovt'&iv cau apCVs oub UeoV're'VTarcoaiovs they kill not less (than) 500 of the men. The same adverbs, with or without i, may be used for any case or number of the adjective: thus in the last example, peo- = pUeeowas; *a7re'avcor oVbK eGXaov (= EAdrroves) -&ev eYcooK there fell not less than 20, i'v rAEov (= -'rXeoorv) m 6arcoools.e-li in more than 200 years. 661. Instead of the genitive or the particle j', other forms are sometimes used with the comparative: a1peTc6TepJs eo''i 6 icas ah daTosos lae rovT aro xpov o pov a noble death is more to be desired than (lit, instead of) a shameful life, ygyEv'rep} rXaeovos iroloV irpb TOO &iKadou consider nothing as of more account than ({it. before) justice, Xe&y.v Auideiw -rapa'-V t rcareo-'xcviav &pay a cold more severe than (lit. in comparison with) the ordinary season, 7rpbs wav'raTs robs WXXovs ol tvpac4otoi irXe[w eiroptoav-'o the Syracusans provided more than (lit. in relation to) all the rest, 6 ir4Aeueos obvX i7rAXv b rrXeov 5AAX& 6ardvis war is not a thing of arms so much as of expense (lit. not of arms more, but of expense). 662. The comparative is often used ABSOLUTELY, i. e. without any object depending on-it. Such an object may then be understood from the connection: aipe'rd'&epov Tb ab'rapKe'repov the more independent position is more desirable (than another less independent),'ui vei eo7FpOY arayy7eAXis do you report anything newer (than we know already)? /uwervdrv iarT uvrb lefov cal qpovPi[ov @pXeialt it is better to be governed by a divine and intelligent being.- Thus the comparative may signify MORE THAN OTHERS, MORE THAN IS USUAL or PROPER, and may be rendered sometimes by the positive with TOO, QUITE, VERY: of co-,poStepoL the wiser, menw of superior wisdom, el Kia 7eXoirLoepov eierz. though it is rather a funny thing to say. 663. SUPERLATIVE. The superlative represents a quality as belonging to its subject in a higher degree than to any other individual of the same class. This class is most commonly designated by a genitive partitive (559 a), which may often be understood where there is none expressed. But the superlative is also used without definite reference to a class, to represent a quality as belonging to its subject in a very high degree: Cvq7p aoq-Corarog a very wise man. 664. Strengthened Forms. The superlative is strengthened by various additions, especially by a prefixed coe or r5Tt, less often, (in poetry also 7eS): &s eXaX's-cTwV aMsat to have the very smallest wants, t'1 AIdXlOrTa as much as possible, TI-r iv BpaXvTdTP in the shortest possible space, j,aor-a in the easiest manner. Sometimes'cs and oi-' are used together: eJe &cs bl P3XL-oTOV yevEoali that I should become as good as may be. The adj. pron. oJot has a similar use: bp&j'r& arpdcyua'ra obX o~a 3eATlo-'a ov'Ta I see that our affairs are not in thd very best condition, v-ios 7rdcyou dlou aeao1'droV there being a frost of extreme severity. 254 PRONOUNS, PERSONAL, INTENSIVE. [664 a. These forms of expression appear to have arisen by incorporation and attraction (810-11): o'rWEs GerSaLX, &s ~icLXc Oct aorTL to want (things) in that way, in which they (the things wanted) are least, Erv -oi-oCo a'L 3pabXVTaT6V iE'TL in that space which is shortest, eyu &s ToJT-o E $E X -Loh'O- iarL yezVaeatL that 1 should become as that which is best, 7rdyov OLOVTroV ofos 3aELaTBTS ia eal a frost o1 that sort which is most severe. b. In such expressions, words denoting POSSIBILITY are sometimes found (but not with orT): &7?o/oyaL &ts &v o iyOWIal Oa& $paXVdrooWY I will state in the briefest terms lam able, oi AFaIceap.y4roL aorFt'. &vuo'aoy perpceWrTaTqy'rpEPpouva the Lacedaemonians support life with an amount of bread as moderate as possible, 2YE orpaTr&, bro-7'rxE'v 7 rTivy CVaTro he led as large an army as he could. 665. a. The superlative is also strengthened by'$ annexed: pe'ytaros T the very greatest. For ev''ro7s with superl., see 627. — A negative form of expression may be used with emphasis: obie?XdXa'-Tos not least = very great (an example of litotes).-The superlative may receive emphasis from the numeral eTs: 7rXerizoa Eis &ap avz'yevYos kpexe7vz being able to render most aid (as one man, i. e.) beyond any other one man. b. Sometimes 1Adk~a1a is added to the superlative: ala TO's rni0ovs ptaXmoara feyzLroT eo're through the laws ye are most of all greatest. So sapxXoov is sometimes found with the comparative: alo'XXVYr1prepo TEPOS YaAXO TOO Eo'Vos bashfeul more than he ought to be. 666. The PARTICIPLES never form a comparative and superlative, but take tiiXXov, gikXLcrra instead. This is the case also with many verbals in ros, and with some other adjectives. It is sometimes the'case even with adjectives which usually.form the comparative and superlative. PRONOUJN S. 667. The PEnSONAL PRONOUNS, when they stand in the nominative, are emphatic; -otherwise they would be omitted (504 a): ical ob o4eL avdrv thou also wilt see him (thou as well as others). Yet they have little emphasis in some phrases, such as k&s ep'y &KO00 (7rvvadoyat, oauaL) as I hear (learn, think). 668. The pronoun o', oT, etc., of the third person, is in Attic always reflexive (671 a); instead of it, ar'o' is used as a personal pronoun: this also, when it stands in the nom., is emphatic: 4cov air/T' I scat her, avrTO i'qrq (ipse dixit) he himself (the master) said it. 669. INTENSIVE PRONOUN. a. Avros, in agreement with a substantive, is intensive or emphatic (= Lat. ipse): ~ advrp avro' or arr5o 6 avr-p the man himself (538 b). So with various shades of meaning: err~-rTurIv avib' knowledge in itself (in its own nature); ~ yecop'ya 7roAA& Ksca avb'i Ba3do'-el agriculture itself also (as well as other pursuits) affords much instruction;?-yovuaa x*p1 774/eTepaV WrAhIv vir7rv 7roxAb icKpetow deat I believe our city by itself (alone) to be much superior in strength; aV'rol OpyzmJIeOIeo ol o'rparml Ta the soldiers being angry of themselvcs 671 ] REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 255 (aside from the influence of others); Ier' ab'roTs ro7s aZIytaAozos on the coasts them. selves (just upon, close upon, the coasts);'r'Erapas yacs enAaov abvrois &vapdo they took four ships, crews and all (604). It is used, by a peculiar idiom, with ORDINAL numerals: E'opcpaTrJeL' Nidas R'p'ros aVTo's Nicias was general with two associates (being himself third and chief). b. It is often emphatic when it stands by itself (in agreement with a word understood); in the. nom. it is always so (668), and sometimes in the oblique cases: Bpaoui-as T.- OeooraAXv'yf. tal au'roLs (sc. rons Oeanr.) ptxos jv Brasdcas was a friend to the country of the Thessalians and to (the people) themselves, ~rXevo'rTov (sc. REeV) El'S is s pIpeLw abros ei14ioaB (you) must sail, having yourselves gone on board of the triremes, obX oMvYre lU ehX aU'Ar 0o'Ta (sc. r'wd) &Ahovs 7roLEy i wsAXhEcs it is impossible (for one) who is careless himself to make others careful. c. But usually, when standing by itself in an oblique case, it serves as a personal pronoun (668), or a weak demonstrative, referring to a person or thing previously mentioned (491 b): Kptp 7rapro'av a't lc nexAoroovvirov Yves, teal.Er' ab'rars r Ivaaypas the ships from Peloponnesus joined Cyrus, and Pythagoras in comm anazd of them, ovs Be!xd eV'pltoie, IEYo'd7C LOC, abro7s 4Eroi1faV such as they did not find, they made a cenotaph for them. For o avbrs the same, see 538 b. 670. The R][3FmLEXIVE PRONOUNs refer to the subject of the sentence: ra. apto-ra fovXEv&EO3E ~?v ac'roZt take the best counsel for yourselves. a. When connected with a dependent verb (finite. infinitive, or participle), they refer to the subject, not of the dependent, but of the principal verb; and are then said to be INDIRECT iEFLEXIVES:'r&'avuyaa, toaa irpbps Tr9 eav'rcV (yn7) JVz, &aVheoVro they took up the wrecks, as many as were close to their own (land), o'rpavvos'ObI[EL Trobs 7roAt'raS v'?7peTre7V EavuwP the tyrant thinks that the citizens are servants to him (lit. to himself), ToV0'corWy pE Kvpos obX EavrT bstoyoXTyACTT oV VTaV cyrus became ruler of these, though they were not of the same tongue with him. b. Sometimes, however, the reflexive pronouns refer, not to the principal subject, but to a dependent word: arwb osavlrov 0e &dcoo fwom yourself I will instruct you, lXova're'obs Itt7?es6 tcalc& oqitaiv aub'onIs vurE8LoraS emulate those who are conscious (with themselves) in their own minds of no evil, 7Tv icoed!pXrV,.iXeTo Eveyoa y &'7you srp4s Tobs eav'rova oKbe'Tas Xenophon went conducting the governor of the village to his own people (the governor's, not Xenophon's). 671; The personal pronouns are sometimes used instead of the reflexive: 80oie yot obeK arsapcdricevos ceiat I(seem to myself to be) think that' lam not without preparation;-especially for the indirect reflexives: oVbX etElv g wry ypaOeoES avuT, PoyoL1EL he thinks that you will not know what to do with him. a. The personal pronouns of the third person ( oa, of, etc.) are in Attic always used as indirect reflexives; but oa and e' are rare in Attic prose, and of is seldom emphatic:'yteXKa7a'a irotlovro,'osrws op(lY o'07 t 4Seyo'r/l rp4dpatos E$IJ rov 7roAewlev they were bringing charges, that they miight have the greatest pos. 256 POMSESSIVE PRONOUNS. [071 sible color for making war, X'Eyeral'A7rdAXXAOv icSepal Mapa'vav Epi['ovTd oL 0 epl Taocpas Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas, when contending with him (Apollo) in respect to skill. b. In Hm., oi, oz, etc., are freely used as personal pronouns (= Att. ab'rov, -7r, etc.): aid'r4eaTros E' of ~xjae MevLEaos but MBenelaus of his own accord came to him; —— yet they are often reflexive: yaar-'p EIceevoue Co tUYzCao,/&at a&vd-ytc the stomach requires one perforce to think of it. 672. a. The reflexive pronoun of the third person is sometimes used for that of the first and second: Met /as &wepae'prCaL Eav'rois wee must question ourselves. - In HIm., the possessive pronoun's (eds) has a similar use: ob y&p E'ywye's (for Ed!xs) yalrs SvvaluaL?yXvepc&repov XAAo 181o-al for I can look on nothing sweeter than (mine) owne land. b. The reflexive pronoun, in the plural forms, is often used for tile reciprocal (&iAXXwz,, &AXX4ots, etc.): rteXAeyd6eaa ipV ahros we were conversing (with ourselves) with one another. 673. The forms iE/E avro'v, aCTrod Ie, o- aTrov, aro'v ore, and the like, are emp2hatic only, not reflexive:'obs iraZ7as'robs 1Eobs KcarT!aXvre Kical 1E1 airda he insulted my children and me myself, poet. avbTCO- av'a7d Do- 8iw1tx to thee thyself do I give these things. Instead of e aVrcv', etc., in the third person, av'r6v alone is used: AaAlxdvovo'n avTbv ial yvvaacea they take the man himself and his wife. In the plural,?/UCcvV ac'r&v, etc., may be either reflexive or emphatic; ab'riv iccT, etc., emphatic only: but -(piev avbrTv is only reflexive, and aV'r&Ty orp'Y is never used. a. But in Hm., to whom the compound reflexives are unknown (235 D), such forms as E avrTdv, o'abV'r., gol abrT., etc., are sometimes reflexive and some times emphatic. 674. The reflexive pronoun umay be made to receive emphasis by prefixing avro'S to it: aVrcs in this use agrees, not with the reflexive itself, but with the subject to which it refers: avcTbs acnrbv a&~rICT'ewE he (himself) killed himself, rb'v toopbv a'Tb;Y ac'r4 ldXorca BeZ o'oqbv evatc the wise man must be wise especially for hinmself. The two pronouns are separated by a preposition: & esv, aber* 8V' abTis 2 v~X VI rOlco7re? some things the soul surveys by itself; but not, usually, by the article: ar'aXEdXvice Trpv ab'bs auTro 8vvaoaqelfay he has overthrown his own dominion. 675. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. The article is often used instead of an (unemphatic) possessive pronoun (527 d). (For the article with a possessive pronoun, see 538 c.) a. The geniitive of the personal pronoun is very commonly used instead of the possessive: o-o 6O viLO or 6 vhic o-ov (for the position, see 538 a). For the 3d person, the Attic prose always has arroi, -rs- his, her, its (instead of Os); and aVrG>v their (instead of o;0'repos). -r qSrepoS in Attic prose is always. reflexive: os or Eco' is only poetic. b. The possessive, being thus nearly equivalent to the genitive of a personal pronoun, may have an adjective or appositive connected with it in the genitive (cf. 523 b): j leE'epa'Tv' aropsorc73'V TE'Xv?7 rste'4ce the art of youthe sophists has advanced, poet. T'aiuA vor''Yovu ticatcc the ills of me, unhappy-one, Hm. 6VxErepos 8' el [tt' rvbs aV eS VZei'e'Eat aVbrTCs if your' (own) mind is ofended. 680] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 257 676. The possessive pronouns often have a reflexive use: T') XPPL7d'TCV, aOL 7r& itv C, KdXp?7L/ I lend to thee of my own property: as to OLfETepos, see 675 a. In this use,?I7eUiepos, elE'Tepos commonly take avr'isv (675 b): ipeTepa avT-Cv pyEya ob XE'yopev our own actions we do not speak; for -qiETEpos a'TrcZ, the genitive eavri,' is frequent: Ta npET'epa abvT'& (or Ta& eau TWOv) E3 Ttaeo-aLa to manage well their own affairs. The forms Rubs a-roo (-ris) abs acoTO (-rs) are poetic: the genitives lueavTrov (-is), aeavVrov (-us) are used in stead; and in the third person, CavTro (-us). 677. A possessive pronoun is sometimes equivalent to an objective genitive: Eivola h e'ui good-will to me (not my good-will to another); so Halv XdpW (as a favor to thee) for thy sake. -- 678. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. The ordinary demonstrative is ov-ro this, that. "08e this (here) is used of something ecar or present; EKELVOs that (yonder), of something remote. a. These pronouns, and especially 0Be, are sometimes used alhnost as adverbs of place: acrLos XalpeOPV oV e C phaerephon here is to blame for it, poet. Opc TrV-' KC ao'wv o-rTe[tXovaav a'IoccdaT7V, I see Jocaste coming hither from the house, 1r7reZs OUiTOL rroXeAOL 4paCylO'OaL there are seen horsemen of the enemy (" those horsemen" would be expressed by o'nrgrens o'Urol), AeEs eEY'at 7rn7r-XEovuya yonder are ships sailing towards us. — 6,79. In referring to an object already mentioned, ovros is generally used; but 8Oe, in reference to an object yet to be mentioned: Aev Tav rara they said these things (before stated),'AXcav rabe they said these things (which follow). The same distinction exists also between,rotodror such, o0rro0ros so much, many, -rrqXKovro0 so old, large,-and the corresponding forms in ae TOLOdS, Tro 7e roCoseXE rrlcKO'e. a. Yet oUTos is sometimes used-especially the neuter rovuro-in reference to a word or sentence following in apposition: ob TOrTo lz&,OV E, vooucat, Tr 7rEitori-aL they think not of this alone, what they shall suffer. More rarely, b`3e is used in reference to something before mentioned. b.'EKievos is also used in referring to an object before mentioned, even when mentioned immediately before, if the object is thought of as remote, or is otherwise especially distinguished: Kvpos icaaop. I I3ar e'a,cal Tb aFuP' &fIEvov'Tiqos Cyrus observes the king and the band around him (some way off, as leader of the opposite army).'Eicervos may even refer to a word or sentence following in apposition: 7rap& &cetrwov, oTpat, wrap& Tw'v lJ6E Trore,oXehvP from those, I think, (viz.) from such as never were hostile. 680. Oviror sometimes repeats the subject or object of a sentence with emphatic force: o sob Orep5pa 7rapao-XoCr, OETorS TW' pv'owrv acr-LtoS the one who furnished the seed, he is responsible for what grew from it. So ahbr's, but without emphasis: 7reLpdcroar LT rTo 7r7arr, KP'Taros t v irs7revs, Ov'l uaXe7, aVrco to my grandclfather, Iwill try, being afirst-rate horseman, to act as an ally to him. For ical TDraa and that with omitted verb, see 508 b. a. Ouros is sometimes used in addressing a person: oUTOS, OTL i- oeS you there, what are you doing (678 a). 12 258 PRONOUNS9 RELATIVE, INTERROG., INDEFINITE. [681 681. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. For agreement of relative and antecedent, see 503. For peculiarities of relative sentences, see 807-23. a. The ordinary relatives (o', iio-oS, )os%, etc.) are often used where the antecedent is indefinite: r-eitovr-at (Vs aV (- oVTrLvas a'v) cyajrat feX rTorTov9 E'tva they obey (those, any) whom' they may think to be best. b. But the indefinite relatives (o6rls, wdTro0os, 07roosr, etc.) are not used where the antecedent is definite or particular. Where the antecedent is apparently of this nature, an indefinite idea is really connected with it: lid. EI71-E e E I7o- 1oXVKpa'rec canroVocrat. 8t' vrlva ct aKK i'KovVOe he desired to destroy Polycr'tes, (as being a person) on whose account he was ill spoken of Yet in late writers, Sosrts, etc., are sometimes used without any indefinite idea. For indefinite relatives used as (dependent) interrogatives, see 682, 825: as indefinites, see 816 a. 682. INTERROGATIVES. A question may be 1. one which the speaker himself asks (direct question): rt 3ovXEo-3e wqhat do you want? or- 2. one which he describes as being asked (indirect or dependent question): 7ipcira rt L f3oXolyro he asked wohat they owanted. The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs, 247-8) are used in both kinds of questions. But in dependent questions, the indefinite relatives are more common:?jpcora o' rt 3oXoLTro; in direct questions, they are never found. For peculiarities of interrogative sentences, see 824-31. 683. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. The pronoun r-r, r', may express indefiniteness, not in respect to the particular object, but in regard to its nature or qualit y: 6 o-oqto'~S rs'7riEavaLt TECs Apropos the sophist has been shown to be (not some one who trades, but one who pursues some trade) a sort of trader. In this sense, it is often connected with adjectives: j OBAd~ TIrs ical iXAfalos izVw/al lest I should come to be a sort of dull and simple fellow (not some one who is dull, but one who has some dullness): so roravlT' aTTa (not some things of that kind, but) things of some such kind, I1?yas'rTI of some magnitude, Ev jBpaXE~ rTvi Xpdow in a pretty short time, rptidtcovrd Tr'vas Ctir cTeivav they killed (some thirty) about thirty, Estyoi TvEs some few. a. So Tl with adverbs: crXEol' TI pretty near, L71&d, Trs Trdiu bLI&Ceoip'Eo scarcely pursued at all (lit. ea sort of none at all). b. rlas TIs, etCaat'ds L'T, denote every one, each one, taken at pleasure. Tls is sometimes used in the sing., when several must be thought of: Xp- ei7rveZv oi TIS e'rr et whatever one (and another) has, he (they) must make a supper of it. c. Tis is sometimes used with an implied notion of importance: poet. lXetX ls TIS elat iyou pretended to be somebody (of consequence), AIEWLv rT to say wimething (worth while): so obsiEv X4sev to say nothing (worth while) 688] VOICES, ACTIVE, IIDDLE 259 THE VOICES. A. ACTIVE. 684. The active voice represents the subject as acting. It is transitive when the action passes over to a direct object, other. wise intransitive. a. The active voice of some verbs has both a transitive and an inl transitive meanino' CAavlnSyv tr. to drive, intr. to ride, march; TrpdrreLv tr. to do, intr. ev (raKc&s)?rpdTre, to (do, i. e.) succeed well (ill); EXElv tr. to have, hold, intr. eXe ah (hold) stop flow, OX' Pppial, SoavX.y (hold) keep still, icKaXs EXet Lat. bene se habet, it is well. —In English, this is still more common, as in the verbs to move, turn, break, melt, increase, etc. In some verbs, the two meanings belong to different tenses, see 416-7. 685. Some transitive verbs have an intransitive meaning only when compounded with a preposition: 9dXXaewL to throw, eu'radcXXeiv (to throw from one place to another) to change tr. and intr., eisdhxeLv and EBIdXAXeiv to make an invasion, also (of rivers) to empty; &l&vcat to give, 4v&i64ZaL to give in, surrender tr. and intr., &ersr&vaL to advance, im2prove; K4Ir-ewv to cut, Trpod7rTEv to make progress; es'peir to bear, iacepELr- to diger. For intransitive verbs which become transitive in composition, see 544 d. 686. A subject is often described by the active as doing what it only causes another to do (causative use): 6 Kvpor KarEKavoe ra f3ao-rlgXeta Cyrus burnt the palace, i. e. caused it;o be burnt. B. MIDDLE. 687. The middle voice represents the subject as acting on itself, that is, as affected by its own action., It is, therefore,'reflexive in meaning, the action, as it were, turning back upon the agent. Like the active, it is transitive when it takes a direct object: rrpaTreo-raL Xpqlsara to get one's self 9noney; otherwise, intransitive: dsrixeo-2at (to hold one's self away) to abstain. The subject may be variously affected by the action. Hence we distinguish the following uses of the middle: G88. 1. The DIRECT MIDDLEJ, - in which the subject of the action is at the same time its direct object: xoveEar-a to wash (one's self), phEreo-2a to turn (one's self), E7r16eItcvuVraa to show onze's self,'[l-Traat to set one's self, IcaXivrreoEatL to cover one's self. In. stead of the reflexive form, ani intransitive verb is often to be used in Eng.:,raCtel to make cease, Erave-rrat (to make one's self cease) to cease; Oa'eilv to show, 0paiyeSoaw (to show one's self) to appear; irEetuL to persuade (cause to believe), 7re[ieoara (to make one's self believe) to trust, comply. 260 MIDDLE VOICE. [688 a. The direct middle is much less frequent than the indirect: instead of it, the active voice is generally used with a reflexive pronoun. Even with the middle voice a reflexive pronoun is sometimes used for the sake of clearness or emphasis: 4paio'vraL KIcaco'C&L'/tas ~ mpas abeTois S3ea13aLaoSaaaa they will get the start either in harrming us or in securing themselves. 689. 2. The INDIRECT MIDDLE, - in which the subject'of the action is at the same time its indirect object, most commonly as dative of interest, FOR one's self: rop[reLv to procure, ropiSCeoat (Xpi/ua~ra) to procure (money) for one's self, ~oraoam'l db tfpos to draw (for one's self) one's own sword, &iyeo-kra yvvaacca to take a wife (to one's own house), txe'rawrelrojuai'ntva I send after one (that he may come to me), Hm. avTob epeXI'CeTat Ervpa o48-pos the iron itself draws the mnan to it. Thus too, 6 vooarTr 77S TS[a7L VC/4ovs the lawgiver makes laws (for others), but 6 Alouos'rhewraL voyous the people makes laws for itself. a. It may be for the interest of the subject that something should be removed FROM it: &ly'exo-ea Kri'vurov to ward otf danger (for one's self, i. e.) from onze's self, rpewrueaa TOVS 7roXeyLfovs we turn the enemy from ourselves, put them io flight, a&ro4a&Sat ctav to sell a ship (prop. to give it from and for one's self, for value received). b. In some verbs, the indirect middle has a causative use (686): LaMOICO,/al Tbrv v'dv Iprocure instruction for my son (make others teach him for me), wrapaTfa-eya aemrveov I have a meal served up to me (make others serve it for me); cave'eo wI lend, aave[eoiaL (I make one lend to me) I borrow; 1u.xsr}ow I let for hire,,u}ooviual (I make one let to me) I hire; rccdiw Igive judgment, Kcd(ojsal (I make one give judgment for me, in my case) I maintain a suit at law. 690. 3. The SUBJECTIVE MIDDLE, in which the subject is thought of as acting in his own sphere, with his own means and powers:'7rapXeEv to fuenish in any way, 7rapjxeoe'ar to affordfrom one's own property; 7roe?, srdXeAEov, to make war simply, 7roLeibaL IrdXeAov to make war with one's own resources; Xaq3rdVrenv Tr to take something, XAayudveasa[a rlvos to take hold of something with one's own hand; mcoireiv to view, aRroresodal to take one's own view, consider in his mind. a. Hence some intransitive verbs form a middle, which gives special prominence to the subject, as acting in his own sphere: 3ovXev6ev to take counsel, 3ovXeEeaaL to take one's own counsel, form his own plan; wromXe6eIv to be a citizen, act as such, 7roXTeVeeo-aca to perform one's civic duties (espec. public duties), to conduct public affairs; srpeoq3evelv to be an embassador, negotiator, 7rpe1,B3edeo-aL (used of the state) to conduct its negotiations (by sending embassadors). 691. The following verbs may be added to those already given, as showing various and important differences of meaning between active and middle: aCpelr to take, adpe~7ral to choose; ar7'reWv to fasten, iawrT'eOal (to fasten one's self to) to touch; e3etyr to hold, xeeal to hold on to, hence to be close to;'TsoipeiV T'IV to act as avenger or helper to a person, i1qcopeo'-kaC i'-ra to avenge one's self on a person; pXw I begine (in advance of others, opposed to v'rept am behind), oXDouat I begin (my own work, without reference to others, opposed to 7raVouca 694] PASSIVE VOICE. 261 I cease); J 4TWCp ypdapeLl nV/or the orator (writes) proposes a law, icraT'iryopos ypdE1T'aL rbv a' a-K'eav-Ta the plaintiff brings his suit (indictment) against the offender. a. The same verb may have different uses of the middle voice: thus &8do'oco/oai indirect middle with causative meaning (689 b); but also as direct middle, I teach myself, learn. 692. DEPONENT VERBS show the same uses of the middle voice, and differ from the verbs already given only in having no active: thus, Direct Middle, v7riLOXZETr0aaL (to hold one's self under) to undertake, promise; Indirect, eXXEao'aL to receive (to one's self), IcT-oaat to acquire (for one's self), &va[3cc6ao'-aat causative, to (make live again) re-animate; Subjective, a&7ow[JEfoaL to contend (with one's own powers), o'eo'cat to think (in one's own mind).-For passive deponents, see 413. For future middle used in passive sense, see 412 b. C. PASSIVE. 693. The passive voice represents the subject as acted on, rr suffering an action. Hence the object of the active verb becomes the subject of the passive. The subject of the active verb (the agent) is variously expressed with the passive; sometimes by the dative (600): usually by v7ro with the genitive; rarely by other prepositions (624 c, 653 b). 694. The passive is used in Greek more freely than in Latin, especially in these particulars: a. Many verbs form a passive voice, which in the active take their object in the genitive or dative (not in the accusative): Ka-raqpovco Tvos Idespise some one, KaTaeppoveTai ris v7r' /.o0S; rLo'TE'voUO' trw I3aatrLe they trust the king, 6,BaoTXEvs bzrrdE'Era1 vUr' avTwrv. b. Neuter passive participles are formed from verbs wholly intransitive: r& o'apaTrUqev /eea the things done in making war, military operations, ra& ol 7re-.7rOALTrEvlya thy political course or conduct. c. Deponent verbs (though properly middle, 413) are sometimes used with passive meaning: in this use, the aorist and future take the passive form: BCeoEaa to do violence, Aor. 9Ld'aoxbatL; but also pass. to suffer violence, Aor. B3aorbmati (cf. 415). So too in other verbs, a passive meaning may arise from that of the middle: aipeZS to take; Mid. apeZobaat, Aor. XEah at, to choose; Pass. aipeso~aL, Aor. aipeiiYrat, to be taken, also to be chosen. REM. d. On the other hand, the Latin impersonal passive from intransitive verbs (curritur, ventunm est, etc.) is unknown to the Greek. For Aor. Pass, with middle sense, see 414. 262 TENSES OF TIIE INDICATIVE. 1695 THE TENSES. 695. The tenses of the verb distinguish the action -1. in relation to its own progress:- 2. in relation to the time of speaking. Hence 1. The tenses represent the ACTION as continued, completed, or indefinite. a. In the indefinite tenses, the action is viewed at the OUTSET of its progress, as introduced into being, brought to pass, without reference to continuanlce or completion. In the. continued tenses, it is viewed in the COURSE of its progress, as going on, without reference to introduction or completion. In the complete tenses, it is viewed at the CLOS9 of its progress, as concluded, without reference to introduction or continuance. 696. 2. The tenses of the incdicative also express TIME: present, past, and futzre. Thus Action. Time. Tense.. Example. continued at the present time Present ypdqao am writing c" at a past " Imperfect e'ypajov woas writing bro't to pass at a past Aorist fypata wrote at a future " Future ypca'i+ shall write completed at the present " Perfect yEypafa have written r" at a past " Pluperfect;7yEpdahEtL had written at a future " Fut. Perf. yEypadoLat shall have [been written a. It will be observed that the above scheme has no form for action brought to pass at the present time, or action continued at a future time. But these deficiencies are usually supplied by the present and the future: thus ypatho I am writing, but also I write; ypa'iro I shall write, also shall be writing. b. The other modes of the present, perfect, and aorist represent the action as continued, completed, or indefinite, without reference to the time of speaking. But as regards the optative, infinitive, and participle, of the aorist, see 717: for the same modes of the future, see 718. I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. A. PRESENT. 697. UNIVERSAL TRUTHS. A proposition which is cclways true, is generally expressed by the present, as being true ~nowu e'trL E5ds there is a god, X d.VTea lrLKpaTe? 2rdTcow truth prevails over all things. But sometimes it is expressed by the PERFECT or the FUTURE, as that which has been or will be true: rro;Aol Ban 6dav a e-ydAa icaKs 7renrSJgao' many on account of glory have suffered great evils, &rlp rLtewKS vroxaoas'T ibs-Ta oYOeL a reasonable man, when he has lost anything, will bear it very easily. Fonr a similar use of the AORIST, see 707. 702] rRESENT AND IMPERFECT. 263 698. PRESENT:FOR PERFECT. The present of some verbs may be used to express an action which belongs to the past, but has results that continue in the present: it&cow I hear, also I (have heard and so) am informed; z'acdw I conquer, or (have conquered) am victorious; pet-yw If ee, or (have fled) am in exile; ahrseco I do wrong, or (have done wrong) am a wrong-doer. The presents'Kw 1 am come, oeXolual I a?r gone, are only used in this way. 699. PRESENT FOR PAST OR FUTURE. In vivid narration, a past event is often thought of and expressed as present. The terse in this use of it is called HISTORICAL PRESENT; it is freely interchanged with the historical tenses (263): Aapeiov cal Hiapvo'drTSos 6rates 7L'yrvorTai 6o of Darius and Parysatis are born two sons, wrEl 7'1ye'ZTo Apx[taltos 4Grl robs 7roXeulovd, 7'vraaa oU'ot obC e'Eayvro, &AX' eycXtovovt when Archidamus voas leading against the enemy, these did not abide the attack, but turn toffee. a. Even a FruTURE event, when thought of as immediate or certain, may be expressed by the present:!usIpA& Eir&rV %53 Ktara,aBatvs after having said a little, I am already coming down. This is the general use of eJo I (am going, i. e.) ant about to go (405 a). /00. PAST FOR PRESENT. Sometimes (especially in letters) a writer puts'himself in the position of the reader, and views the moment of writing as a past time: 7rpaore IeT'`'Apr-al ov, 3z oot reznuea negotiate with Artabazius, whom I (sent) send to thee. a. A past tense is sometimes used, where a present fact or truth is thought of as perceived (or not perceived) at a past time: ob ToUT' Xv EVbatL/o0Va KcaicoD 7rraXXaay this-deliverance from evil —is not happiness.(as we before supposed it to be). The future also may be used in a similar way. B.; IMPERFECT. 701. The imperfect is used especially where different past actions are conceived as going on at the same time. It is used also in reference to past actions frequently repeated, and in reference to past states or conditions: Hm. 6oppa pEh?ji; s i ical ce &ereo Iejephbv vap, T4cppa JudA' a3LUp0TEpWi 3E'XE' iirvreTo, 7rlr'rE Xaoa's as long as it was morning and the sacred day was increasing, so long were the weapoIns of both parties clashing, and the people were falling, oviroie /eEo a7repTparTO7rE6evoVTo ol I3dpapot TrV'EAX&vso ethICovTa Taalcov the barbarians never e2ncamped (in their repeated encampments) at a less distance,fromn the Greeks than sixty stades, so'os 47rtnptcovs cal a&[rcovs c&s eb'XrAtuvEovs qo/esZo the peiJured and unjust he was afraid of as (thinking them) well armed. 702. IMPERFECT OF ATTEMIPTED ACTION. The impeyfect often represents an action as attempted merely, not accormplishedl: KhEaPXOS TOMbS rTpUT1CtTMS eGitaETro LEaL on 3e abv'bV "EaIAoM, iErve {ptamrs rpoi',vat Clearchus (was forcing) attenypted to force his solcder.s to mnarch; but they were throwing-stones at hdim, wohen he began to yo fordard. As this use grows out of the idea of continued action, it is sometilaosfound in the PRESENT: thus [wcoyt I am (proposing to give) offeriny, HmA-lpronres r'vitcvws a&JcaXpE. s'ov 0o'L T rUiy.c T.ep7rero eendeavori,#g to _mu7se (Achilles) in his grievous afglo.,iom,' but Ae seas by no oneayvs amused ali spirit. 2G4 TENSES OP THE INDICATIVE. [703 703. Verbs of OBLIGATION are used in the imperfect, to express that which ought to be, but is not: eEL T-obs XEyOVITaS 57TE 7rpbs VEXSpaV 7roEoaaL Tbv A470yoV /57E 7rpos XdpPl, the speakers ought not to make their discourse with any reference either to enmity or to favor (i. e. they do speak with partiality, but were under prior obligation not to do so). Thus also Xpiv it were proper, ELKcs ]v it were fitting. 704. The imperfect is sometimes used with (Iv, to express a customary past action (action which took place, if occasion served, at various past times): avaAa1eAdSCOv acs5rTOv Ta 7ro/crua-a 1rpCTcoV &vY Tif A'7OLEZ taking up thezr poems, i (would be asking) was often asking them (the authors) what they meant.The AORIST INDICATIVE with &/ has a similar use, but without the idea of continued action which belongs to the Impf.: EAxtEY aY he (would say) was aceustomed to say. C. AORIST.'705. The aorist is used in narrating past actions, when thought of merely as events or single facts) without reference to the time they occupied, or to other actions going on at the same time: ToIttc1V ical tarpLcv ical atlavrcv,'AIroAXao &avrepe Apollo invented archery and medicine and divination, Hm. Tni &E' iroxb rrp6ros Mie TnXA'uaXos aeoeiL~3, 8' ia's rplvpovo, rEeMeaoes o' er' uvyx Seror oinca rippowv ie asy4ev, ly7yV L beras XEp' eXE oe7trepv^ Kcalc- e'EacTO XdXoceov EYXOS but long before others, fodlike Telemachus saw her, and went straight toward the dcoor-way, and was vexed in his spirit that a strainger shoutld stand long at the door, anzd standing near he took her right hand and received the brazen spear.'706. AoRIST FOr, PERFECT OR PLUPErRFECT. The aorist indicative is often used in Greek where the perfect or pluperfect might be used with more exactness:.rce ot'IKETCr ou;Eva Ka LTeP7,2re, aA' V7ravTas re7rpaice of his servants he (left) has left no one, but has sold them all, Aapeios Kvpov JuETar7rE'rre'atL (699) iarlb Trs &pXis -'s aurobv o'arpda'rr-v E'ro7are Dlarius sends for Cyrus from the government of zwhich he (made) had made him satrap. The aorist is thus used with the temporal conjunctions, ired,'s, ore, when, as in Latin the perfect with postquam, ubi, ut: c&s o Kvpos.7i'aero q'rs tcpavyj7s, ave7rs.r7erv id rl sbv h'r7roY when Cyrus (had) pereeived the outcry, he leaped upon his horse. 707. G-NOmIC AoRIST. General facts, established by experi. ence, are often expressed by the aorist indicative, referring to past instances in which the fact appeared. The aorist, in this use, is freely interchanged with the present; and the English present indefinite is naturally used in rendering it: T$ XpL&,qTL 61 LIv ird'ces xgbA' a7roTioaLErVl with time justice always (came) comes inflicting retribution, TrAs T',r (padAwv ouvvovoas bXoryos Xptvos 8E'Xvo'e the associations of the bad a little time (is wont to) dissolve. It is called gnomic aorist, as being especially frequent in proverbs or maxims (?yrYua). By Hm. it is often used in similes or comparisons. 7111 AORIST AND FUTURE. 265 708. INCEPTIVE AOrIST. In many verbs, the present of which denotes a continued state, the aorist expresses the inception of that state (695 a): gpXety to exercise dominion, &plat- to attain dominion; 4I3af6COEve he was icing, EBao-iXevo'I he became king; itoXdEtv to be strong, lO-XUar to grow strong; ayav to be silent, Lry o'aL to become silent; EXel, to hold, possess, O'XE? to take hold of, get possession of; patreloaaL to appear, be evident, pavlYaL to become evident; KLvsvetelv to be in danger, KtzovvYevOaL to incur danger; voysErv to be sick, voaoiwai to be taken sick. This use is found in all the modes of the aorist..'709. The aorist is sometimes used, especially in the 1 Sing., to denote an action which began to be, just before the moment of speaking:?yeEXaaoa I can't help laughing (was made to laugh by something just seen or heard), poet. Ei7rCVe' e'pyoV Kcal 7rpJvoiay,v -ovU Ipraise the work, and the forethought which you exercised. For the aorist indicative with &v, see 704. D. FUTURE. 710. a. The second person of the future is used as a softened form of command (Future for Imnperative): OVTrws ouv rolo'e'Te Kal 7rmrde'a5 flOL (thus then ye will do) do thus and obey me. With negatives, it expresses prohibition: obiK nrioplc?0eis thou (wilt) shalt not swear falsely. But in negative questions, it forms a lively expression for urgent demand: ob 7repL4eveZs wilt thou not wait? o0 pX;aXajaezs, aAx' aiKoovaonezs Slot (won't you not talk) don't talk, butfollow me. b. With the future indicative, &Y (11m. KEv) is sometimes used to mark the future event as contingent: e6 o~Ta o'rl &olYevos &s 7rpbs 6vzpa o'os ob d d&raAXay7oerEal I know well that he will gladly be reconciled (should opportunity be given) to a man such as thou art, Hm. 6 8E eC, KEP KXoacSa'eTa,'v Kev:'icwua but fLe will be angry, to whom Imay come (= if I come to any one, he will be angry). c. In relative sentences, the future indicative is often used to express purpose: oh yarp E'Xosev rTOV sitrov ov(JdtoiULEa for we have nothing with wohich (we shall buy) to buy corn. For orcos with Fut. Ind. used in this way, see 756. 7 11. PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE. To represent a future action as immediately expected or intended, the verb /EXXo) is used with the infinitive of the present or future, or (more rarely) the aorist: NWe'xo bias?ye4i (&e~r, atyayeTv) l's'Aoatas (in Asiam vos ducturus sum) 1 amn about to lead you into Asia. Other tenses of /EAxXwcoare used in a similar way: 7rxrqaloo JI Y j' 6o Ta~] A&oS,'Ena ueAtXo, KicraXvioePL the station was near, where they were about to stop for the night. Cf. Lat. ducturus eram, ero, etc. -The phrase irws (Ti) ova eAXXw-; has a peculiar meaning, how (why) should Inot-? iris 0a3! kXXeL Tb aoo pcSzepov IdAXIaov alveara e why should not that which is wiser appear nobler? 266 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. [712 E. PERFECT. 712. PERFECT WITH PRESENT MEANING. Several perfects express a continued state, the result of a completed action, and thus have a present meaning: tufe4v' cat (from yLuv4Icbw: I have recalled to mind, and hence) I rnemember, Lat. imemini; KEKCXrluam (from Kaxe'0: I have received a name and still bear it) I am called; KEIC7itzaL (from IcrdouaL: I have acquired) I possess;?pepleuat (from &'xQr+vjvr: I have dressed myself) I am dressed; reroiLa I (have put confince) have confiden ce in; re(pvica I(have been produced) am by naturs;.'nycKa I (have set myself) stand; 84'3,nca I (have stepped) stand fast, also 1 am gone; loAwXa I (have suffered destruction) am ruined. Here belong also the perfects olTa know, Eolca am like, Xtdowa am accustomed, e'4ouca am afraid, KEKpaya (Pres. cKpdoa rare) cry, and several others: though it may be doubted whether some of these ever expressed completed action. a. In these verbs, the pluperfect has the meaning of an imperfect: fKEKT?7/L7V Io was in possession of rr-T7KefV I was standing; and the future perfect has the.meaning of a simple future: ter]ivro-o/Lat I shall 1remember. For the aorist used instead of the perfect or pluperfect, see 706. F. FUTURE PERFECT. 713. This tense is formed only in the middle voice (264 b), though usually with passive meaning. In the active, its place is supplied by using the perfect participle with the future of dqa to be;: Av ravUT' E3lBlev, 7th K8ovra EcoLEula Eiyvoicodree if wfe 7know these things, we shall have r ecognized our obligations. II. TENSES IN OTHER MODES. 714. PRESENT. The other modes of the present represent the action as CONTINUED) whether in present, past, or future time: satrvdjueaa 7rrC'TEs, 074rav Op7L'yLCiSxa we are all insane, as often as we are angry, eXE7o' Ti EEvuAcy, o'TiL rdrTIes eroLyot eer tua4adveic they said to'uthydemus that they were all ready to learn, oi-7Wo croftW arcws v ab KceXe?67S I will act as you may command (be commanding) Lat. sic again ut tu me agere jubebis, olce rE4XovoL (/SaeXov,'eEXaoovo't) luyxeroat they are not (were not, will not be) willing to fight, E'vXov ev Tr7 &aopi Icarevb6oyTes they happened to be sleeping in the market-place. 715. PERFECT. The other modes of the perfect represent the action as COMPLETED, whether in present, past, or future time: cpa[voxat (ev'l,77V paavcIo,uaat) ovoe' KadJv ye 0rErotrlcsr I appear (appeared, shall appear) to have done thee no wrong, or,Bovuxeveaar Opa, &Axa e6BovXevr~aar it is time, not to be consulting, but to have consulted (finished and decided), dprs'&s 6lrdCe7ro TrbY'EAXXA'irrovrov E'aXVaat, 7rpo2eyv eK Ts'V ~dp6eWio when Xerxes learned that the Hellespont was bridged over (already, T-Lr E'EvIcTo), he led forward from Sardis,'JKEv &yyeXos XiyLcv oa T Vt vveY s EtL AeXoar&s eY4'a- &cpa there came a messenger saying that Syennesis had left the heights, obseila lrapacveOLS icavobs rroveTv 7rot'oeL, ht I~ 7~rpJa ev'it7Id'cres dtL no exhortation will make (menz) able to endure toil, unless they have had previous exercise. 718] TENSES IN OTHER MODES. 267 716. AORIST. The other modes of the aorist lepresent the action a0 BROUGHT TO PASS, whether in present, past, or future time: a65!IOL ardcpuajL do thou answer me, lAl aav/Itud)r1e, Ek' rvCapd&ooV, eTWrO TL be:ot amazed, if I say something surprising, ola TpLacovYa 7rpose7a5avy 7rya'TyEs Aiov-a,'c' 37roavyoL the thirty gave orders to lead away Leon, that he might be put to death, eirtavl7zE (e7re6 jue,?ragvu/brE) eAiXXtypos'yereda-ct he desires (des8i'd, will desire) to becomefamous. a. It is often difficult to express the difference between these modes as -ised in the present and in the aorist. In general, the present is used when conltinuance is naturally thought of; otherwise, the aorist, especially in reference to single or transient actions: xaXE7rbv sb 7roleZrV, rb le KEXETa' Pat oLoY it is dificult to.execute (in continued action), to command (a single, transient act) 5s easy; ES 71p EXElS aSYTL\eEyrCV, VTLXEYE E cas' evea'6at 7reoXh cis XheYWV Tov abbvy AX4yot, if thou hast any answer to make, answer (in continued discourse); but if not, cease (at once) re2eating the same statement.-Yet the briefest action may be viewed as going on, and thus expressed by the present; while the longest action may be viewed without reference to its length, simply as brought to pass, and thus expressed by the aorist. For the aorist used (in all modes) to express an incipient state, see 708. 717. The AORIST PARTICIPLE, however, represents the action as prior to that of the principal verb in the same sentence: Kpovos "AXovv tag&s /ycd;,' &pXip Kc, caTaXdAe.t Croesus having crossed the dCalys will destroy a great empire, arau Iv' Vs Te YrVtLs?YVCO (707) by (previous) usuff'ering even afool becomes wise. a. Properly, the Aor. Part. represents the action -only as introduced (brought to pass) before that of the principal verb; in its continuance, the former may coincide with the latter: Hm. &etars 5' 6c, &pdov a'xho ical taXe and (having become afraid) in fear he sprang from his throne and cried. Thus the Aor. Part., when joined to a principal verb in the aorist, may denote the means or manner: eb -ye i7rnofrlacs &ava/ aas pte thou didst well in reminding me. b. The aorist oPTATIxE and INFINITIVE, used in dependent assertions (734), may represent the action as prior to that of the principal verb with which they are connected: oa'Izv8o' EXe av OTL Wr'4jee axis 6o'Izy'y Sao'sXeuS (Indic. NO-L *7rse//E) the Indians said that the king of the Indians had sent them, KScwerEs E7yos-at e's iKEXiA, oticecsL the Cyclopes are said to have lived in Sicily. 718. FUTURE. The future optative, infinitive, and participle represent -the action as posterior to that of the' principal verb with which they are connected:: -. 5'-L BI vro'srsoi, ob 86EsO'VIre but what he would do, he did not indicate, &6h-'ac'a 7rpd5Ecv V7rlr5XoXTral they promise (that they will perform) to perform impossible things, vueacavw 3ovvXEvo'L4IEvo they came together for consultation (about to consult, cf. 789 d). a. The FUTURE PERFECT in the same modes has a similar use, representing the completed action as posterior to that of the principal verb. 268 FINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. [719 TI-IHE MODES. A. FINITE MODES IN, SIMPLE SENTENCES. 719. The INDICATIVE represents the action of the verb as real; the SUBJUNCTIvE and OPTATIVE, as possible; the IMPERIATIVE, as willed by the speaker. The INDICATIVE expresses that which is, was, or will be. It is used when the reality of the action is affirmed, denied, or questioned: "He went; he did not stay; will he return? " REM. a. Reality must be distinguished from certainty. Thus the sentence, " perhaps he will not return," asserts a future reality, " he will not return," but expresses it as uncertain. For the indicative in hypothetical sentences (with or without al,), see 745-6; in expressions of wishing, see 721 b. For the Ind. (Impf. or Aor.) with a'v to denote customary action, see 704. 720. The SUBJUNCTIVE expresses that which may be. It re. presents the action as possible, with some present expectation of its being realized. Htence it is used a. to express something demanded or requested: this use is nearly confined to the first person:'coev.- (eamus) let us go, qbpe 3 q, rae ltapTVoltas vli drayvi come now, let me read you the testimonies.. — b. with /ye, to express something prohibited or deprecated (723 a): u' 7ouro wrotL.1oE (ne hoc feceris) do not do this. c. in questions as to what may be done with propvriety or advantacog (SUBJUNCTIVE OF DELIBERATION). Thus chiefly in the first person: Tr ~pi what shall I say? (not " what am I going to say " as a future fact, but " what: had I best say:'), e'~E4,e u/aras, arowuev, will you receive us, or shall we go away? Him. WrCrs rs ToL 7rpoppeov reyav rEdrhTatL'AXativ how shall any one of the Achaeans willingly obey thy words? d. with uh, in expressions of anxiety or apprehension: u@ &ypoLIc7-epoY T, TOb'a&Xr7Es edrEv 1 am afraid it may be too rude to say what is true. (In strictness, the sentence here expresses something desired, —— may it not be too rude, I hope it may not be, though I fear it is.) If the object of apprehension is negative,,uj ob is used: Hm. IA y5V TOL o0 XpaioaL (Io7rnpbZ eal o qe'la reo0?o (there is danger) indeed that the staff and wreath of the god may nzot avail thee. e. In Him,, the subjunctive is sometimes used to denote future events, nearly like the future indicative: ob?ydp roo Trotovs r60o &vepas, obir Mwrcat- for never yet saw I such men, nor (may I hereafter) shall I see them. To the Subj. in this use, {v is sometimes added: ovwc &v To Xypatoqp Ucp''Appo8[T7's the gifts of Aphrodite (may probably) ewill avail thee nothing. Cf. 710 b. 721. The OPTATIVE expresses that which nmight be. It re. presents the action as possible, but without present expectation of its being realized. Thus 723] PFINITE MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. 269 1. OPTATIVE OF WISHING. The optative is used without dv, to express a wish (that something might be): or ~eo! irozralYvTo may the gods requite (would that they might do so). From this use comes the name optative. a. Particles which serve to introduce a wish are ed (Hm. al), ek'e (llm. EaLe), El ydp, fs: Ei'e or cpXhos fy7UV?yEVOLO 0 that thou wouldst become afriend to us (i. e. "if thou wouldst do so", I should rejoice), Hm. &rs Ep~S a7rA$Xono would that strife might perish (lit. how might it perish, 0 for a way in which it might perish). b. WIsH VIEWED AS INATTAINABLE. When a wish is recognized as inconsistent with a known reality, -it is expressed by a past tense of the indicative with EIe, Et yap (746). The imperfect, aorist, or pluperfect is used, according as. the contrary reality would be expressed by a present, an aorist, or apeifect: Ii yap Trooa'VTr7q Utvautv eTXop 0 that I had so much power (but I do not have it), ek'e oon onT-e ovweyeryEju7qv 0 that I had been with thee then (as I was not) Such wishes are expressed also by 6J0exov (ought) with the present or aorist infinitive: 6&~EXe uLv Kiipos ijv 0 that Cyrus were living:-the particles of wishing may be prefixed, elY ≤Xor, ei yap 6ep~eor. 722. 2. POTENTIAL OPTATIVE. The optative is used with QIv in assertions and questions: ~9oVT0o 7YEI'OLT' g this might take place, iroAAas B& eb'poLs AxVXavas thou couldst find many contrivances, obic Yv apvlaetriv I would not deny it, trod &Tr' &v eTv ol DEYOL where, Ipray, might the strangers be? a. This use of the potential optative is not essentially different from that in the conclusion of a conditional sentence (748). In the cases here described, the condition on which the event depends is left indeterminate, not being expressed, nor indeed distinctly thought of. Thus'this might take place" (if circumstances should favor), " you could find" (should you wish), "I would not deny it" (if I could), "where might the strangers be" (i. e. be founid, if one should seek them). b. The potential optative is often used, where the indicative might stand, A known reality is modestly or cautiously expressed as something possible. Thus ob icv Xe yoqt u Iwould not say (non dixerim, for "I will not say."), govuofnrw liz I should like (velim, for "I wish "), Spa &e; avoleuvdfeog-az efs it m7ight be (for " it probably is ") time to pack up for starting. Sometimes it approaches the imperative, expressing a command as a permission: Aeyols tv cWs TaXzO-a (you might speak)' speak at once. c. In poetry, the potential optative is also used without gy: Hm. ez rea ats y' EiCor',cal C'rl-A4e/ b&rspa oaforatc a divinity willing (to do so) could easily bri5'g a mtan in safety evenfrom far. This is rarely the case in prose. 723. The IMrPEERATIVE expresses that which musthbe (by the will of the speaker). It represents the action as commaycclecl, or, with negative words, as prohibitecl. a. For the second person, there are only two ways of expressing prohibition:-by 57 with the present im ercative, if the action is thought; 270 COMPOUND SENTENCES, PRINCIPAL, DEPENDENT. [723 of as continued: lx? XaXE`atwe do not be offended;-otherwise, by,u with the aorist subjunctive: tt' XcXE7r'v.s do not take offence (720 b), ravTa IIOL 7rpaoov, TEKVoV, K(11 C) P pdaYVE, J6' EI~LVq)Oa EvL Tpolas do this fos' me, child, and don't be lingering, nor mention Tr'oy any nore. b. For the third person, Az can be used also with the aorist imperative: &~X&'yap Ud ~piv6d zs Tor -oov -br X&4yoY voAtodTrw but let not any one regard this discourse as being a lamentation. For the infinitive instead of an imperative, see 784. For the imperative in the conclusion of a hypothetical sentence, see 745, 747: for imperative used in expressing the condition, 751. B. FINITE MODES IN COMPOUND SENTENCES.'724. SUBORDINATION. A sentence may enter as a subordinate part into another sentence. The whole is then called a compound sentence: it consists of a principal, and a dependent or subordinate, sentence: ol i &rEKp[vavro (principal sentence) TrL obcK &vTavea ef (dependent sentence) but they answered that he was not there; TbV KcaKbv &7 K oXdCeLv (principal), It' &e3Iv wv (dependent) we must punish the bad man, that he may be better; eC iEOl t -pwifLV al~aXp6v (dependent), o -ih e lvs eo' (principal) f gods'do any thing shameful, they are not gods. a. Co-oRDINATIOcN. On the other hand, connected sentences are said to be co-ordinate, when they are mutually independent: KOv ) 7 T*VX7, ical Tb Ae'AXoP &4dparov fortune is fickle, and the future is unseen, TO'To?ycT oSvT' eFYPOKa outie AeJoqut &v this I neither have said nor would say.-For different conjunctions used with co-ordinate and subordinate sentences, see 853 a. b. The same thought may often be expressed either by two co-ordinate sentences or by one compound sentence: r7saerl o'0vpopU0 e[Is.Vrts, IoJK1 yp -7 tvX71 reproach no one with misfortune, for fortune is fickle; or i7rel 7 TvdX7 Iowti o-tI, rPt evl oUpopw or0eLPto. s sinsce fortune is fickle, reproach no one with misfortune.-The co-ordinate arrangement prevails especially in the.Homeric language. 725. A dependent sentence may have another sentence depending on it, to which it stands as principal. Thus in the compound sentence 7i7p~71/,'Atpol3ov'eY -res lrap7o'av i' i7reAdx/Barve'iiV rpoaca I asked Aphobus whether any persons were present when he recsived the dowry, gT' &ireAXd/ave vTV'rpomtca depends on e' TirESs rapircav, and this again depends on'po1yv'AopoI3ov. So too an infinitive or participlesmay have a sentence depending on it: oo'oYat actvbv EpEV s is tiCcvpoYv ETrlTb O+(r'LOa Iszeppose he will say that the decree is without force, ocz'OUiVes wi &aoapere~ev t Aetr7inrrc XNeyovua fearing that they might be deprived (of them) they speak to Dexippus. 726. A substantive which properly belongs to the dependent sentence, is often transferred (usually with change of case) to the principal sentence. The object is to give it a more emphatic position. When the substantiv. 729] UsE OF MODES IN DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 271 is thus brought in before its proper place, the arrangement is called PRoLEPSIS (7rpdhrtJrL anticipation). Thus KaI pILOL bn VIY Ev IT7, El' Pes Ada7IIcE rv, rXV71W (= Kai /oL EL7rE` El 6 vlbs L/FdriIKIE Tjr r-eXVysr) and tell me whether my son has learned his art, Hm. TvbetlY b' OVK Cy &YO S-P' 7rOTepOiOL fETE[ you could not distinguish to which party Tyclides belonged, Kcal T'i BapcdpcoW'7reuxeXeZ7o Ps rooXeueTy iccavol efroav he took care also that the barbarians shoeuld be in condition to make war. On the other hand, a substantive may be transferred from a principal to a dependent sentence: Hm. peT& b' Owe'-aL Y ~v'rT' arvbpwsY iKOVpqv Bpiow'os and among them shall be the daughter of Briseus, whom I then took away. Cf. 809. GENERAL USE OF THE M6DES IN DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 727. 1. The INDICATIVE in dependent sentences expresses a reality as conceived or assumed, not asserted, by the speaker. Thus in the sentences, g'yyEa7d~ ont Me'Tapa aceorllEce it was announced that Jlfegara was in revolt, eli reol edotv, E'iTl cal Ep-ya beam if there are gods, there are also works of gods, Tav.'a iroiovv IEjueXpl ao'tCos 7YE'VET these things they were doing until darkness came on, —the (reported) " revolt of Megara," and the (supposed) "existence of gods" are not asserted, nor is it clear that they are believed, to be real: even the "coming on of darkness," though clearly believed, is not asserted by the sentence. Indeed it is sometimes implied that the reality which the speaker would assert is directly contrary to that which ne assumes-: Yfaws cev w rcawov, el pj'r'v'pdcldovTa &apx' Ka'reXh3v I should perhaps have been put to death, if the government of the thirty had not been overthrown (but it was overthrown, and I was not. put to death). 728. 2. The SUBJUNCTIVE expresses possibility with present expectation-that which may be realized in present or future time. Thus in FINAL sentences: wrapakaXe? TaTrpons, 0'res!Aj &woadvp he calls in physicians, that he may not die; in CONDITIONAL sentences: eav XeXCw'ey Xpw/pa;', eto/ev piXouvs if we have property, we shall have friends;-in RELATIVE sentences: arT T 6(OL e padvl7Tract 13EXTL'ra,'ra3r'a 7'TEXeL whatever things may appear to thee best, these execute:-also Subjunctive of Deliberation in DEPENDENT QUESTIONS: a7ropc ToO (244)?rp&rorv Ep;o'a I am, in doubt what 1 should mention first. 729. 3. The OPTATIVE often expresses possibility with past expectation-that which could be looked for, as a thing that might be realized, at some past time. In this use, it corresponds to the subjunctive in dependent sentences: the subjunctive being used, if the principal verb denotes present or future time; the optative, if it denotes past time. Thus in FINAL sentences: rapeIcdXeOer taIpoVs, o'7rws 1X a7roaavotl he called in physicians, that he might not die;-in RELATIVE sentences: IT'a he'A'rTtTa agol'oTo,'raVra e'IreTEXEL whatever things might appear best, these he was executing;-Optative for Subj. of.Delib. in DEPENDENT QUESTIONS: 7r lpovY 70o rov, /,lfuvlOYet I was in doubt that I should mentionfirst. 272 USE OF MODES IN DEPENDENT SENTENCES, [729 a. Very often, however, past expectation is expressed by the eubjunctive, the past time being lost sight of: /3~ouXeovTo EL IKaTaKal~GoL'robs Wspas they were consulting whether thel (shall) should burn the men,'liv'o 0;orL'TV 1K16atY TV'XWoeL, T'h V'eJep' av'aut aV7fXLCETcE that the others (may) might obtain their just rights, you expended your own resources. b. In conditional and relative sentences, the optative is much used lo express indefinite frequency of past action; that which occurred often being thought of as liable to occur-as something to be expected-at any time: E''Is PrT7E'ro1, Ebrs TE4 eICE if any one opposed (as happened from time to time), he was immediately put to death, Prepaxre TravTa oTs JrrEls 7rXoN he was sending (occasionally) those things with which he happened to be pleased, keretsl TI 4Ee.d'yoLie, &a'r,['aYV o ical iropevoYTo as soon as they had eaten something (one company after another), they got tup and continued the march. 730. 4. The OPTATIVE is often used to express merepossibility without expectation,-that which might be realized in present or future time. This is the prevailing use of the optative in CONDITIONAL sentences: - t&v feXOLs E7reY, EL' bOL e X'Teiv whact would you have to say, if it should be necessary for youe to speak? It occurs likewise in HYPOTHETICAL RELATIVE sentences, see 7 60 d. And here belongs the potential optative with is (722), when it stands in an INDIRECT sentence: &irecplrvaTo KXedcoWp Ob"ri rpaey yEv &V aroa4doi'ey' b'rXa 7rapa8oZev Cleanor answered that they would sooner die than surrender their arms (direct'rpio}e k rv & 7roactvoLuev, etc.).'731. 5. The OPTATIVE is often used in place of the indicative in repeating past conceptions or expressions (oratio obliqua, 734): Sd're E7ycia 7r oT 0o fBdpBapol Trbv &vappo7ror vrorre'Uiaies then it was understood that the barbarians had sent the man, azVpomr-o Os'iTs EY they inquired who he was, oi'AT7Ivaol IIEpKIXIa Kcdlstols, bti- aorpa~rjtybs &y obic i7reTdSyot Eirl Trobs iroXeAidovs the Athenians swere speaking ill of Pericles, because (as they said), though a general, he did not lead out against the enemy, e''Is rJXis earl xrt, o'rpacEVevot, eI'ra ar1T71' EvEP7 IeVat he said that if any city should make war against (another) city, he would go against it. a. In all such cases, the indicative may also be used: bu~t the optalive shows more distinctly that the speaker is not responsible for the thought which he repeats, since he gives it only as what might be. b. The subjunctive has no analogous use in reference to the present or future: /F /z' dvip,p p-is EtLt (never rt's ) do not ask sne who lam, Lat. lie me interroges quis sire. 732. PRPOTASIS, APonosIs. These are grammatical terms corresponaing to each other: protdsis, applied to the dependent sentence, final, conditional, or relative (but not to the indirect); apodosis, to the principt,4 sentence on which it depends. 785] MODES IN INDIRECT SENTENCES. 275 I. lifodes in In 2direct Seqtences. 733. Indirect assertions are introduced by'TtL or Ws that: indirect questions, by Ec whether, ozrepov... wether..... or, and other interrogatives (682). The indirect sentence is the object of the principal verb; or, if that is passive or intransitive, its subject. 734. ORATIO OBLIQUA. When the words or thoughts of another are stated in a dependent form, they are said to stand in oratio obliqua (indirect discourse): in distinction fiom this, the original, independent form is called oratio recta (direct discourse). Thus or. obI. ol'r airecp[va'ro irc obic EdleseV but they answered that they did not know, or. recta obvK oy-ue, we do not know; or. obl. obirK lvoE? ri 7 reO'ET'a he does not consider what he shall suler, or. recta'r sreofa'oua what shall I stfer? a. A speaker may state his own words or thoughts, like those of another, in the oratio obliqua: 4ip4n,'Acpov op EY S r 7verapor-av I asked Aphobus whether there mwere any present, or. recta dpa wrapcav TLrves were any present? -ovTro yrv&oaKcw, oir T-oXuyp rLcaif ical aebs oavxAacBdcvei this I perceive, that with righteosus daring a divinity also co-operates. b. In many cases, the forms proper to the oratio obliqua do not differ from those of the oratio recta: thus in the example last given, the direct sentence would read rTdX[ty. hKala KaOL eo's o-vXXkayicvet. But often, where the proper forms would be different, we find those of the oratio recta used in dependent sentences, instead of those proper to the obliqua: of 6' e7roy or''Icawol Eo~,ev but they said (that) "we are able," instead of fiaVol edTev or Eii they were able. Sometimes the two are found together in the same connection: LETa To~o t{o7ov XXos a&VE''Trl E7reLcvbr s cEtv7aes el (or. obl.),7yeAtxga arTerv 7rap&a'ro60ou AvucatvLYiJeaa (or. recta) rYV 7rpat~v after him another rose, showing that it was a foolish thing to ask a guide from this man (Cyrus), for.whom weare ruining his enterprise. c. An INFINITIVE or PARTICIPLE is often used in the oratio obliqua. instead of a dependent sentence: epacrayV'obVs E,',Uaprnlceeat, a ab'rel 36 aICr'Iobs zu/ovs they said that those indeed had transgressed, but they themselves were upholding the lazws, or. recta ol CvE, ijyaapiicalt, av'rol 6e o'-oo/ler, etc.; T'a-aocpepvns Kipov?rLo-Tpare'ovra wrpcoTos??yeLeX Tissaphernes wsas the first to announce that Cyrus was carrying on iuar, or. recta Kipos erisa-rpa'evErt. 735. USE OF MoDEs. In general, indirect sentences have the same modes that would be used in the direct. This is regularly the case, when the principal verb denotes present or future time; and often so, when it denotespast time. Thus a. INDICATIVE. When the Ind. is used, the tense is generally the same as would be found in the direct sentence: XyEt Ws obs 8Ev Eo —Tv a&3ct6'-Epov (Phirns he says that nothinqg is more unjust than fame, Olt "AfoBos -aQcus oTL'eeAcYX. 274 MIODES IN INDIRECT SENTENCES. [735 &s5oETca Aphobus knew clearly that he (will be) would be convicted, Kce, a'??yEAxw rls &s'EAXaeLa caT'eiXTrraL there came some one announcing that Elatea (has been) had been taken, 7roXbi XpJ'vo. i7rJpovv Tl 7ro0E hIEyet 6 aeJsfor a long time I was in doubt what the god (means) meant. But when the principal'verb refers to past time, the indirect sentence may take the imperfect, in place of a present in the direct: e7reLoaVTro 7T KXedpXr, 6pr'Tes or'L 4ovYos e(PpJ&ei oLa Me r v @pXovTa (the soldiers) obeyed Clearchus, seeing that he alone had the mind which a commander ought to have (direct pu&vos cppove he alone has the mind). b. SUBJUNCTIVE (of deliberation,'720 c): 3ovAevo,uat 7rcs as naropi3 1 am considering how I shall escape from you, oec eXo 3 TI'Y EVWs7T-at they knew not what (they should become) would become of them. c. OPTATIVE (potential opt. with &v, 722): obtc o07' og TI &' T'T Xpoaal'To rTpa~TLTatrs o'Tos s fibS EXovaO' I know not what any one could do with soldiers in this state of discouragement, ES7rev Ori 6 &v'Yp' &Xa'Acluos r el he said that the man would be easy to capture. 736. But if the principal verb denotes past time, the indirect sentence may take the optative, in place of an indicative or a subjunctive in the direct: thus 1. the OPTATIVE is often used in place of the INDICATIVE (731): yrwayav oal 7oTpa71'Tat T OtIC KevoS o cpJ3ios c f the soldiers perceived that their fear was groundless (direct ceybs 6 c(prI3os E'i-), Tio'aapWprvs G8aBdXAEi (699) rbP Kvpov prpbs rob 3eAcEdf,, CtS E7trl3ovkAevo abi.p Tissaphernes (accuses) accused Cyrus to his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against him, Kvpos'Xe'yev o'ri l 3bs eSoceo 7rpbs,BaatX6ea Cyrus said that their march would be against the king (direct, 6kbs eGara), 7p&crcv ItoXAvucXe el a&svarAxh6oerey EXwv &p7ydpiov I asked Polycles whether he had sailed away with mzoney (direct apa &&r&Xevoas;), eXEyO0v o'r Kpeos pE' TrE 41cev (735),'Aptados a' re(pevyks eiY7 they said that Cyrus was dead and that Ariaeus hadfled. a. The hypothetical indicative (746 b) never changes to an optative in the indirect sentence: obvc ~, o' L- SY roieii-e ILd'oo there swas nothing which you could do (by yourselves) alone. 737. 2. the OPTATIVE is generally used in place of the SUBJUNCTIVE (729): EjiovxevJ,ir' 7rwes ae a&ro~pag'7Y I was considering how I shoul.ld escape from you (direct 1rcrs'7roopc how shall lesca pe? Subj. of Delib.), o0'Eirsdpuvrol Tv' Erb l, ErpOVTO ei r 7apa4oTE Kopai'o'S T'TY 7r6Al the Epidamnians inquired of the goa whether they should give up their city to the Corinthians (direct 7rapapuery shall we give up?). a. It must be observed that the form?'yJdovv o6' O" Irooev (nescicbant quid facerent) may mean, according to the connection, either they knesw not what they were doing, or they knew not what they shoueld do. 738. When two or more connected sentences stand in the oratio obliqua, depending on the same principal verb, these uses of the optative (736-7) are not confined to the first (or leading one) of the connected sentences, but may appear in any of them. The same is true when an infinitive is used in place of the leading sentence (734 c). Thus feXSov 7roXkol, T ~7r ravTs 9&ta Xe'ye ('735), XEL(&UY 7yp sej (direct oTri) many said, that he says things worthy of all (heed), for it was winter, iSca &tyEL rob a'pdTevua KarA 1E`door G'-Cr T r'OXEU[W,'`ri eKeE fjaliX6vs Ek he cried ouet that Ae should lead th armny against the centre of the enemy, because the king was 743] MODES IN FINAL SENTENCES. 275 there, XAO 1t/OTo &S, El pA lpdXotLro, &Tro'otavTo al rdJnes (direct A&v AX.,aXcSpLEa, &aroTaovtrTaL) they considered that, if they should not fight, the cities would revolt,'Avalt,3os &7reCKptvao r't Lov j9 oroto rrepl w/v oTpactlcrcv oS AT &rvaLTo a&ya-.4Y (direct 3o0vAeoIrla' ao' Tv & hVoCat) Anaxibius said that he would provide for the soldiers whatever advantage he might be able. II..Modes in, -Final Sentences. 739. Sentences expressing aim or purpose are introduced by the conjunctions Zva, usr, &os (and HIm. o'pa), that, in order that, — /ot, or o7ros (us, va) /1, that not. Present or future purpose is expressed by the subjunctive; past purpose, by the optative (728-9): -o rzpa'vos 7roXEorouKs KLees'i'' 7v Xpef[ {,yepd'or 6 y lpos-.d the tyrant stirs up vars, that the people may be in want of a leader, $cavoeZrat r@ 1 4yeqpvpav XVat, &c su 8taLc43rTE he intends to destroy the bridge, that you may not cross,-KcaaelAIKOV Trs TpL~peLS, &sS 6z Ca6TatLs or0&OlVTO they were launching the triremes, that in these they might save themselves, cdKeL a&rletaL, i Z7r1tEarrrs y'oY'0o I'roTs T KaraAeA:xce!ueotrs it was thought best to return, lest an attack should be made on those left behind.- In some elliptical expressions, the principal sentence is omitted: rva ayvriu' to be brief (sc. I say only this);'it''c,ro0rTWv dpLuatL to begin with chese things. 740. a. But the subjunctive is often used in reference to a past purpose (729 a): nIepacticas' frpacovero, orbs 7rJAeuos'yerT1atc Perdiccas was exerting himself, ihat a war (may be) might be brought about,'ABpoKdcaars i 7rAooa KaTetcavcoe,, Ira.Au, Kvpors ltafi Abrocomas burned the vessels, that Cyrus (may not) might not cross. In such cases, the time is lost sight of, while the idea of aim or expectation is made prominent. b. The optative is rarely used of present purpose, to represent the attainment as a mere possibility (73q0):'Ovroir~o rba'prozr EXGL o Yo',os,?'a ilzA' 7raaTrqaVYat e'YOLTO the law stands thus, that no deception might occur. The optative may be used with the same force, when the principal verb is an optative of mere possibility: ed p/ ab ye firhueXoo'o7rws e&wae'v art elsdpepoLro unless you should take care that something should be brought in from without. 741. With'cs or Srows, the particle Sy (lm. KE) is sometimes used, to mark the attainment of the purpose as contingent: &s o lzdt1s, KiovUov hear, that you may learsn (as you will, if you hear). 742. UNATTAINABLE PURPosE. A purpose which could only be attained in an imagined case, contrary to reality, is expressed by a past tense of the indicative (746): vrct 8'arE (703) /3o7eFLv rvrav, o rrosr 8tKaLdorara t' they ought all to have aided him wohile living, that he might. have lived mnost justly (as he could have done, if they had all aided him). For'rcor with the future indicative, see 756. For the result expressed with;rTre, see 770-71. 743. FEARING implies aim or purpose that the apprehended event may not be realized. Hence 276 MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [743 After expressions of fearing, a dependent sentence is introduced by 1tj lest, that; or, if it is negative, by /I7 o0. The modes are used as above. present apprehension is expressed by the subjunctive; past apprehension by the optative, yet very often by the subjunctive: Veaoiaca jux i7rxa~ro/eaa ris oebcdae M6ov I am afraid we may forget the ihome ward road, iOEeT-o AjX ob h'Ya-lO he feared that he might not be able, qiAXrsros E, cqP/w JV /i4 ElcVYO1 Ta 7 rpd'yulara Philip was in alarm lest his objects might escape him, ol'A7,va7ol TObs outLtUdXouS?eUeol'ay /x &a7roaT~a ('729 a) the Althenians were afraid that their allies (may) might revolt. Other words of fearing are ppoyrrtlo to think anxiously, pVAdr:Touatl to beware, v7ro7rTeVw to suspect, upcdw to see to it,'oco-re to consider, etc. a. After expressions of fearing, /uz and 0'7rws /d are occasionally followed by the indicative, the object of apprehension being thought of as a reality: po3oota: Auo nsov's E&p'oruev o a'ayrtas I fear that we shall find opposite pleasures; —especially when the fear relates to something already past: cpo/3oS,xerca uLdl cUtq7borpwY'yPzap7'rap.ee we are afraid that we have failed of both. b. After such words. as 6pdwc and amorrce, jxu often introduces something suspected as probable, i. e. conjectured (rather than feared): Zrape:r y oh'oOTo sob cayaa,4 take heed lest this may not be the (genuine) good. The indicative is then used in regard to something conceived as a reality: 0pa iz, vrafio XevExye (look to it lest he spoke in jest) see whether: he did not speak in jest. III. Jfo-deps'in Ceoncditaioznal Sesuptences. 744. In the dependent sentence (protasis) something is supposed or assumed as a CONDITION, from which the principal sentence (capodosis) follows as a CONcLuSION. The former is introduced by the conjunctioi Fr, Greek EL, or e'dv (for cil al, cf. lM. m. KE) contracted' I'', a'v (a). The latter often takes alv (a) to mark it as contingent (i. e. as only conditionally true). The whole compound sentence is called a -HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. There are four leading forms of the hypothetical period, corresponding to four varieties of supposition. 745. 1. SIMPLE SUPPOSITION. The condition is assumed as real, but without implying any judgment as to its reality (727). We have then, in the condition, ae with the indicative; in the conclusion, the indic. without 4v, or the imperative. Thus EL TroO'o 7rcErovtxicasr, ircaYeer~aC ailos E if thou hast done this, thou art 2ort0hy to be praised, eY TI 7reo'oyVTra M7iot, es IElpocas s'b etEIbV' 5e if the Medes (shall) suffer anything, the danger will comze to the Persians, aol et r'ir xxAp o?,oei, XEyE Kial t1'aiCe if to thee it appears otherwise, speak and instruct me. a. The past tenses of the indicative may also be used in this'kind of supposition; and care must then be taken not to confound this form with the following (746): e'iry oo inrL'vaL eK T is 7rdXecrs, Er d j S1peedrv qot oLE vIuol you were at liberty to depart from the city, if the laws did not please you (in the present cE(Car-, ci El' apCoe-COUcr); E' FL Tr7 ceo'7Wc es'ilrpdian7, TbY' capov obic He (cpprzw a'I-oV 7EEYEVY',atL if any of the necessary (measures) was carried out, he says that the occasion has been the cause (of it, and) not I. If dY is used with the past. tense in the conclusion, the supposition is always of the second kind; if &, is not used, it is generally of the first (but see 746 b). 747] MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 277 746. 2. SUPPOSITION CONTRARY TO REALITY. The condition is assumed as real, but with an implied judgment that it is con. tracry to reality. We have then, in the condition, dc with a past tense of the indicative; in the conclusion, a past tense of the indicative with sv. Both the condition and the conclusion imply a contrary reality; and in each, the imperfect, aorist, or- pluperfect is used, according as the contrary reality would be expressed by a _present, an aorist, or a peefect. Thus I'rbv I[Xt7r7rov ra& icKaca 7rpdTTr0Vra Ucpwv, o'rqJpa &V aCavParTrlbv'ryOvpnt' abvro6 if I saw Philip doing what was just, I should regard him as very admirable (but I do not see-, and do not regard him thus), obv v i rotrlyev'A'yaltas TavTIa, ei tz~ 8?yb ablTbvi eceAeva Agasias would not have done these things, if I had not ordered him (but I ordered him, and he did them), ei 7repl,caivob TrWvos Vrpdcy/aros 7rpowV'e'To XeyeuL,?7rEoXov Av if it were proposed to speak on any new matter, Ishould have waited (but this is not proposed, and I did not wait), EL Pl bP~eds jXaere, 7ropEvosuea yv irpbs g3aaiXea if you had not come, we should be marching against the king (but you came, and we are not marching), Ec abvTrdpi7'& p ir/plcua'a'v, P'Xlir7iros oveK bh N3plK 6e T'roo'irov Xpovov. if your decrees were sufficient, Philip would not have insulted you so long (but they are insufficient, and he has insulted you). a. Buit the imperfect is sometimes used where the contrary reality would be expressed by an imperfect:'Aycad'wOsv obK. Vr T', z' o'oKPa ecpdei Ecls'P ti vavTiKbv eTXe Agamemnon would not have been master of the islands, if he had not been possessor of a naval.force (but he was possessor of a navy, and was master of the islands).-And, less often, the aorist is used when the contrary reality would be expressed by a present (indefinite, 696 a): of Tls rE Jpe'o,'rT & &arecptsWco. if any body asked you, what would you ansu'er? (but no one asks, and you answer nothing). b. The indicative, thus used in the conclusion, is called the nEYPOTHETICAL INDICATIVE; the accompanying particle al' is sometimes omitted: X0vvoLV, EL Vr rr r reXov El e OVTOS gro? o TOrarZqiv I should be ashamed, if I had been deceiied by one who was an enemy. 747. 3. SUPPOSITION WITH PROBABILITY. The condition is assumed as possible and with some present expectation that it nay be realized. -We have then, in the condition, &av with the subjunctive; in the conclusion, the indicative (principal tenses), or the imperative. Thus rdvrT' erorTi'v EEpeip, e&v h Tbry 7rdvov evTyp'ISS it is possible to find out all things, if. one shun not the toil, hv TiS &v'z7T1'Tai, 7rTepao4/xeaa Xeupovtrag if one resist, we shall try to subdue him, eAaf,3ov"'as ia3oAaexs, ic'v *Eveve's loi avoid calumnies, even if they be false. a.' The aorist subjunctive in conditional sentences is often nearly equivalent to the Latin future perfect: sE'os fhv rovaes,'yipas Eits evaXes (si juvenis laboraveris,'senectutem habebis jucundam) if you toil (shall have toiled) while young, you will have a thriving old age. b. Hm. sometimes uses ed alone, instead of dvy (el &v,e icKe), with the subj. In Attic, this is very rare: Soph. W&vpac, Iced TIS.' ro(pas, rb /IaveYdelJ 7rgtAA' aioXpbyl obve for a iman, even if he be wise, to learn mauch (more) is no disgrace. 278 MIODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [748 748. 4. SUPPOSITION WITH 1MERE POSSIBILITY. The condition is assumed as possible, but wholly uncertain, without expectation, of its being realized. We have then, in the condition, ed with the optative; in the conclusion, the optative with drv.. Thus ed TIS KErCTJ/YeVOS EY7 rorAOUTO,, XP.To e' ac'ir.p!, ap' v EbaaLpuovool if a tman should possess wealth, but (should) make no use of it, would he be happy? L d7ravTEs FL/7otaepEcaa'ryv Aatce7anoLotowy zrXEOveSLay, a'rayces fir &arokAo[UEaa ij we should all imitate the riapacity of the Lacedaemonians, we should all perish. -In Hm., &s (tee) is sometimes inserted in the condition, and. sometimes omitted in the conclusion. The former occurs also, though rarely, in Attic writers. The optative thus used with &v in the conclusion, is called the POTENTIAL OPTATIVE; cf.'22 a. 749. There is a very different use of the optative with J, in which it denotes a past ezpectatioln (729), or a past conception (731). This occurs. chiefly when the conclusion is itself dependent on a verb of past time: i1ropEv4uodhp, Yva, EM TIt 8oI1oo, C&OpeAXov7 aSrsJv I was going, in order that I might aid him, if he should have any need of it (present 7roopeo`uat,'lIa, dv TI 87-ati, &cVewhX).- In the oratio obliqua, after verbs of past time, the optative is often used with ci, where the oratio recta would have the indicative or the subjunctive (i. e. with supposition of the first or third kind): KXeavSpos eireV o'tL AetLr7ro ov oC t7ralco[t7, ei ravcra wre7roIic&s ey27/ Cleander said that he did not praise D]exippus, if he had done these things (or. recta oluc'7ralvr, en re7rotw~cE); iEXwoe Kvpos Trc eToibUs earL (735) dsXe~oraa, eY TS Ie~EPXOrLo Cyrus showed that he was ready to fight, if any one should come out (or. recta 6eoJoio's eiu, e'v 1Is ete'pX1TaL). Cf.'738. A, The optative with eL is also used to express indefinite frequency of past action (729 b), usually with an indicative in the conclusion: Ei' 7rov e$EXavvot'Aorvaiy7s7, ciq' 7rrov XpveroXa.Lvov Treptrye rT'ov Kipov as often as Astyages rode out, he tooke Cyrus abouiit on a horse with golden bridle. 750. MIXED FORMS. The form of the conclusion does not'always correspond to that of the condition. Thus, very frequently, when the con~dition has the first or third form, the conclusion takes the fourth, being represented as a mere possibility: el ToOvo XnEE1S, a/caP~TroIS 9, if you mean this, you might be in error, (in QeXE~r'e'1T''E w'rp&EIV amws y Yb,, a'VYW aCOS Vfi a.fYC TI KcT~o'ao-le ASyana if you will consent to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you could perhaps gain some great good. —-- condition of the second form is rarely connected with a conclusion of the.fourth: Hm. icai yev eV, y,' &rAXotro,'i EJ' i p' 4bb vdo'erle'Apot'T97 and now would he perish there (his destruction being vividly conceived as an undecided possibility), if Aphrodite had not keenly observed him. 751. OTHER WAYS of expressing the condition or conclusion. The most frequent is by a participle (789 e), or an in2lnitive (783). The condition may be implied in other forms of expression:?' bilas abrioi s 7rdxai fi &roXceeXv-e by yourselves (i. e. if you had been left to yourselves) ye!vould have perished long ago. It may be implied even in a co-ordinate sentence: bwic Ea[lovUoL wXe[w 4 avy at L pepELY, rap`anyeseE 7&p vY they eat no more than they can bear, for (if they should eat more) they -uould burst. The imperative 754] MODES IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 279 is sometimes equivalent to a condition of the third form: sraZi'e yesev''cocavw. 4ppor'r6WV &.r F1 draa WrAla let children be born (= if they are born), all thilgs now arefull of cares. 752. CONDITION OMITTED. This occurs especially in the second and fourth varieties of supposition. Thus ~'ovXol',uv d'v Ishould wish (el E'Bvvd-,t7yv if I had the power, as I have not), f3ovXol'ryv ltv I should wish (el Ovvraltliv if I should have the power, as possibly I might have). The potential opt. with alv, in simple sentences, may be explained in this way (722). 753. CONCLUSION OMITTED. This occurs when El, et Fl yCap are used in expressions of wishing with the optative or indicative (721 a, b). a. When two opposite suppositions are expressed, the second bj Ei 6/ zA (754 b), the conclusion of the first is sometimes omitted altogether, as sufficiently obvious: el pLLE ov'v?y7 b!as izavcs M&z'ob ~ El'i a Bpf, KaCl 7rap& r' 7lrpoyE7yevP7evwoz /AavavYETE if then I instruct you well enough (aAxss EXeI it is well, or ou'Tw &awdoceaf e be instructed thus); but if not, learn from the men of former times.-For aposiopesis, see 883. 754. VERB OMITTED IN CONDITION OR CONCLUSION. This may occur in the cases 508 a, b, c: Xapileotaf o ot foXo ual * teal yap v Kal laitroi.ry,, EL tUx (SC. flovAOr,0v) ] wish to gratify you; for indeed Ishould be even insane, if I did not wish it, po-,Bovyelos, is7rep zv de Irars, Tb Teu'EreSCatl fearing, like a boy, to be cut (prop. ais7rep & c(poo30So, El wrass Ela) as he might fear, if he were a boy). a. Especially. where the same verb belongs at once to the condition and conclusion, -it is often omitted with one of them: etY riS al AXxor &vap, teal Kvpos 6ri's loe'r &avpudreaoat if any other man (is worthy to be admired), Cyrus also is worthy (856 b), brdeKovaoor, EY7rep 7rcror' aiz.pcn7rwov Tr, (se. vbrf7,covcas) obey, if ever yet (you obeyed) any man, oviovv paSr'ye pdaAAXEI, &xx' eEirep e' (for eYhrep'TA opdaAAXEL, o-cfdxxez'4e) us then it does not deceive, but, if (any one), thee, EL ah Td 0oe&CTEpos tpatria eliat, TOT,CP &V (sc. CPaIr7Y, etc.) if in any respect I should say that I was wiser, in this (I should say it). Hence eE IUX gets the meaning of except: ob'yap bpOeev, E1 p1 oAx-'yovs.ToovUS for we see not (any, if we do not see these few) except these few. But El ui aid except for must be explained by supplying an idea of hindrance: Eo'cKOvY &M 7rad'Va icaTraCaAe?, El A alit T'V, EKEI'ov E2aAl7oi, it appeared that they would have taken all things, (if not prevented by) except for his delay. b. A supposition directly contrary to something just before supposed, asserted, or demanded, is expressed by e l 8Ea: a7r?.]eL.r& XphlxTaTra~ El K pt, 7roXE0o'Aetyv Acpv aburois he bade them restore the property; but if not (if they should not restore it, Ei!) &arobobev), he said he would make war upon them. El 6E /AX is sometimes found where ehz 6' pi would be more regular: az' les' 7uY oct K AXyetlv AXq4A's, vvoyuoXoyhoaTre. el E!{, a'TlTEiVeTe f I fseem to youe to speak truth, agree with me; but if not. oppose. ~ It is often used after negative sentences, where we might expect El Vb: si oUTW EoYE ET'EL' 1 ), ob j app3oVYTd pE f4eis do not speak thus; but (if not, it otherwise) if you speak thus, you will not find me confident. So too Ei'e is sometimes used where we might expect el k6 p0): fEl /.Lr' fovAeTai-, ekieo I. e, I,- to4AET'fl, ToTo 7roIEdTco if he wishes, let him boil nme; but if (he Iwishes something else), let him do what he wishes. 280 MODES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. [7&5 IV. MLodes in Relaztive Sentenes. 755. Relative sentences are introduced by relative pronouns or ad verbs. They show, in general, the same uses of the modes as occur in simple sentences. Thus SUBJUNCTIVE OF DELIB. (ill indirect questions, 735 b), obuc e'XW g Ti 7rp'c Toy ACcfo I (have not) know not what I should first take; OPTATIVE OF WISHING (721), opc o'e trOcoYVra'V Otj TV'XoLS I see thee pursuing what (Ipray) thou mayst not obtain; POTENTIAL OPTATIVE (722), uEs ea ioe 7rap' y cv & Kc&aXurI-a T'onTO udco you are of thosefrom whom one might best learn this; HYPOTHETICAL INDICATIVE (746 b, 752), obic 1aeXoa XAeyEiv 7rpbs ViaSr TroLavi-a on' &Vy /vy J Lo'r"' Jr aKcotlv I did not wish to say such things to you as would be most agreeable for you to hear (i. e. EL e'Xeyov if I said them). Even the imnperative may stand in a relative sentence: e? rrewrc-Eval ToTr ep'yots, bVy VLCEs eo'aE'raToy eh.EyXo y r-oi aXhsogs VoUlfaTCe you must believe the actions, which (I bid you) consider as the surest test of the truth, poet. okao' b apaoov; knoszst thou what thou art to do?-or the subjunctive with imperative meaning: ElCaae'o A,'AVVTO9 as,,~ fIETace/lEV T~E S s rTo'ews Anyttus has set down here, to whom let us give a part in the investigation. 756. The FUTURE INDICATIVE iS often used in relative sentences to express PURPOSE, see 710 c. Thus, in particular, &Ireov how, that, in order that, is very often used with the future indicative, after verbs which express attention, care, or effort: KoTreL 07rces Tr& 7rpdysaT-a roowgaoeTai see to it that the state be preserved (lit. how the state shall be preserved), cppd-rTre 7rcws 6EvY &vdctozov'rls B3aoiXetars 7roneertEs consider anxiously that you may do nothincg eunworthy of the royal office. For`rcows with subjunctive of purpose, see 739. a. Before 0i7ros with the future, in earnest commands and warnings, the principal verb is often omitted: o"ros vrapoEle eis r eo iT7reIpav (sc. olCdCreL look to it) that thou be present at the evening, 5lrws rEpl TroO 7roX'eov u sjth' -peis (sc. pvXAd'rov take heed) that thou say nothing concerning the war. 757. A relative sentence is indeyfinite, when the relative word refers to an uncertain (unldetermined) subject or objedt. A sentence of this kind may have a hypothetical force, implying that if the event (conceived as possible) takes place, with'whatever subject or object, the principal sentence then holds good. This is called a HYPOTHETICAL RELATIVE'SENTENCE. It takes the subj. with av, in a case ofpresenzt uncertainty (728); the opt. without av, in a case of past uncertainty (729). The principal sentence commonly has the indicative (without av), or the imperative. Thus g Lr &Y,eAtxxpSr epeiw, TrpdTEpo liortcluret Tn?yY4pt,7 whatever you may be going to say, first consider it in your mind (i. e. if you are going to say any thing, whatever it may be, consider it), Hm. by 8' as j/,uov T' &'apa o0, Bodoow0ri-' peeopoL, Tby o'crrpc iXdoayoce. but whatever man of the people he (might see) saw, and found him bawling, him he struck with his sceptre (= if he saw ally one bawling, he struck him), os aV T0o6oorv'T 6p&, Tead'ow whoever rhay do any of these things, let him die LieSeVovmzY (699)'.II EVTYUzXaroleV Aj QPe67'ye they ~61] MODES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 281 entreat whomsoever they might fall in with not to fee, tpaaa, ipeZY, 6oroia &v 6V. vYvTaL KcpdaTL'TSa (729 a) they declared that they would say such things as they best (can) could, 7rdvrfas, oaovys AxdoleY y'. Tr araAXdaop, tl.b0aetol, they were destroy ing all, as many as they mnight take on the sea. 758. Hypothetical relative sentences of time, place, andl mcanner, are introduced by relative words denoting time, place, and manner. They show the same uses of the modes. Thus 7repe tevolAev icdoTroare'Cos avoixaeI'rb yEaxucoripiovs' ireLX J a~ oatXetE1v,,et/Ee'trpbS br,:ZWeIodrlT we waited each time until the prison should be opened; but when it was opened, we went to Socrates (if it was opened at any time, we waited till then, and went then), oe? TiobS y7Eoue'ovs, le'XPL &v zi, 7rowve-? those who are born must toil as long as they live (if they live for any length of time, they must toil so long), 7freeae`irp 7z, -rs'r7T,7Ta follow where any one may lead you (if one lead you anywhere), c&s 6Y'ri XpiCnat'TOS -Irpadesaawo, b'Usws avdylcj Ical Ab rIEXos eLcatvelv in whatever way one imay conduct his ajfairs; in the same way must the end also turn out. For conjuenctions of time, place, and manner, see 875-9. For irpft with the infinitive, see 769. 759. The paiticle (iv, which belongs to the subjunctive, is placed in immediate connection with the relative word: it even unites with some relative adverbs, giving compound forms, —iorav, 7roTrav, i-rav or Er;7v (lid. freav), 6r.tEciv, from ore6, trOTfe, lT-el, ier~E.- But a'v is sometimes omitted, even by Attic writers, where the rule requires it: tEreLtcTrat, I["XpL ov erraviX2coortv o; rrpr/l3ets a truce las been nade, until the embassadors shall have come back. Still more rarely is alv found with the optatice. 760. a. The acorist subjunctive with aly is often nearly equivalent to the Latin future perfeet (747 a): 7re8aLW nr-Tra aKovOrTqre, lit'arte ohen you (shall) have heard all, then judge. b. The subjunctive with s'v is sometimes found in cases of past uncertainty (729 a): 7roAXeLxea oV7rrW iEtcet 5v=aTbY eJiat, wrphl'v ierrreas tea7i-areUCoaLT it dia not as yet seem to be possible to carry on war, before they should send for cavalry. c. The olptative, used in hypothetical relative sentences, implies \past expectation, and very often with the idea of indefinitefrequency (729 b): 7radre ol "EXX77veh s ro'i 7roXEL- otLE ErrLOLEv, eaioos da7rirevyov as often as the Greeks might attach the enemy; these escaped with ease. d. But sometimes it is used, espec. in poetry, to express a mere possibility (730): poet. ba' j 7rdXAs'OTxeE, Tro0e XpI lCx6ELV if the city should instal any one as rutler, him it is necessary to obey. This is regularly the case, when the principal verb is an opt. of mere possibility: Ebcc,&Y e pef/alts (or ei 7yIp eXots) th'3pa srts er EAoVt rep TOcetz' roas &&LcoOazds ae you would gladly support (or, O that you might have) a man who would be willing to keep off those that inj'ure you. 761. A hypothetical relative sentence takes the indicative, when it expresses an event assumed as real (cf. 745): oev )n' elVptcagOV, Ke'ora5&Cozf oiros &I7roIo-av (-= e'i rtvqS C ep u ) ) f they failed of finding any, they made a cenotaph for them. Such sentences, though very common, have nothing peculiar in the use of the mode. But, if negative, they take / uot ou: see 835. 13 282 DEPENDENCE oF THE INFINITIVE. [762 C. INFINITIVE. 762. The infinitive and participle are verbal nouns, ——,a substantive and adjective derived from the stem of the verb (261 b). But they are unlike other verbals, being much more nearly related, both in form and in construction, to the finite verb. Thus, in particular, a. They are made from all verbs, and with different forms for the different voices and tenses. b. Words expressing t~ae object are connected with them in the same manner as with the finite verb (486 b). Dependence of the Infitive. 763. The infinitive may stand as the subject or the object ol a verb:' as a SUBJECT, chiefly with INTRANSITIVE or PASSIVE verbs: 7racLPY &er XahXemrv (se. Ea-rn, 508 a) to please all is diylcult, ek7,v LePELev it was possible to remain, eo~e irpoie'Pat it seemed best to proceed, obX vi7v 7rpos~tceL (vrpereL) TOVS'ouVS epoErSaWL it does not become you to be afraid of these, XE7eT'aL i Tv Kipov YLuciaat it is said that Cyrus conquered. The infinitive may also stand as the predicate: ToDso uavdyELrv icakeiTa this is called learning. 764. as an OBJECT, a. with verbs of THINKING, PERCEIVING, SAYING, SHOWING (verba sentiendi ct declarandi): ol'eraL cvm he thinks it is necessary, &tco6o 7rdm as 7rape7vat Ihear that all are present, zwcuoticcaTe G~aLIrEv ye have sworn to give judgment, icveoaa T& rarvITa aroqpa.v~oevos mnaintaining that all things are in motion. b. with verbs which imply POWER or FITNESS, PEELING Or PURPOE, EFFORT or INFLUENCE,-tO produce (or prevent) an action: b86av-Ta &areXaeir they can go away, I4e4,C T' eo eCre7,iE I have something greater to say (can say it), ob rF'cpvkas oVhEAvelv thou art not formed to be a slave, rrXovTre7r le'Aet he wishes to be rich, rpol3ouItaL X7eLv I am afraid to speak, Eyoaz'v -aP, ro'razbAy, SaBSYaL they determined to cross the river, i'rs abiTv ibcc WAet TL po [a3CeL who will hinder him from marching hither?,ucei av/8ouXe5ve 7yvxvaw Vlas avTgouVs Iadvise you to know yourselves, arTovrar rsobs s eob LJva they ask the gods to give.- So with the impersonal &et it is necessary, XPh it behoves (strictly, something requires, urges, 494): Bae (Xp1) /' 6AXae7 I must (should) come. c. sometimes with other verbs: X jroxis bci3i)v3evo-e vriaa 1aaq.aplvaL the city was in danger of being wholly destroyed. 765. The infinitive is often used (as an indirect object) to de. note the PURPOSE of an action: e'GV(op/V r'b,uIO uV TO)o ~opaTe'evca7os cKarTEA7rE (UVXC'rret r1b r'rpa'Treo,, X.enophon left half the army to guard the camp,'rapE'xcow-e laV-b'TrI lc'Tpy r'lUYrVEL ical va[ewv I yield myself up to the physician to cut and cauterize, nLe7r Si3vaz nrvl to give one (something) to drink. 766. The infinitive may stand in apposition with the subject or object: auVrT,1ovq 1E rl KaKb 7rpatis, 6E7TrtElJr urep~IZvat this alone is evil ~ortune to be derivecd ofknowoledge (500 d). 771] DEPENDENCE OF TIIE INFINITIVE 283 767. The infinitive may depend upon a SUBSITANTIVE or ADJECTIVE: obX ipa caZEvz'6v it is not a time to be sleeping, asdyvyK7 E1rlxAEE~I-?aL it is necessary to take care, 7jxudciav exovorL 7raLrevEebra they have the proper age for receiving instruction, oKYOS X V aY[ft(raoaL there swas an unwillingness'o rise up, obrels cpd'vos Ae'eLv there is no (grudge) objection to speaking, — woda vyos (E'ro7/os) civowOV LyEel eager (ready) to abide danger, fiavbs (eLvo4s, 7rLaav's) A/yewv able (skilful, persuasive) in speaking, 9yios rAx?7rys XaBev worthy to receive blows, Xake7rbY ebpeav hard to find, olKda io'qT7l T vLalTaG-oal a house very pleasant to live in, Ao'yoL XpIl~qIuaToL aKOV oas words most useful to hear, AA' 6 ~povos BpaXts eo-il 81qyreao'al Tar 7wrpaXea'sVa but the time is (too) short to re-,ate what was done (659). For o'os, oN sTe, 0o'os, with the infinitive, see 814. a. The infinitive with substantives may be compared to the genitive of connection (563), or the genitive objective (565): with adjectives, it may sometimes be compared to the genitive in 584-7, but oftener to the dative of manner (608) or of respect (609).- The infinitive used as a dative of respect is sometimes found with substantives: raavia Kal a&coi-ai a wonder even to hear of. - The active is generally employed in these constructions, even where we might expect the passive: &tLos aavud&ewv worthy of admiration (that one should admire him) = - oios eaval eo'aa. -worthy to be admired. 768. The infinitive is used with 7j' than after comparative words: poet. vdot LEuea'eoV ) cv eppetv a disease (greater than that one should bear it) too great to be borne, obvev &AXo. 6oKev owpbo, eJati nothing else than appearing to be wise. - sS-re is usually added with the infinitive:.aioy'ro'EMC1KoY E, AdT-.rc ~adiu/s EXovi-a i is-re -robs LpXovs chpfEee _ they perceived that Ecdicus had too small a force to assist his friends. Cf. 659. For infinitive with roi after comparatives, see 781. 769. After 7rptv (prius) before, r' is generally omitted (in Attic prose almost always so): s-rplv criby 4pXi opaws wovroeaL, uci-raiov ryolJuat 7repl Trs TEAEVTh~ ANEyeL before laying down the commincement properly, I think it vain to speak about the end. Hm. uses srdpos in a similar way: Xdpos Td6e ep'ya yEVE'-aaL before these works were brought to pass. Instead of 7rpL alone, we often find 7rprTepoV.. rpv, or rpdo'ae,.. rpve (and in Hm. 7rpy..... rpiv, or wadpo6s.. srpiv): oV'TW TIVES ev7reLaei'S oew, srE 7rp sh eievat'sb 7rposTaTr4rxevo, 7rpT1epo s-E7r'daoYrasome are so obedient, that they obey before knowing the order. 770. The infinitive is used with 6irs-e to denote the RESULT:,rots 7XCLclatLS 0zYEKeKppaCo,'STE abselw' s &a'E7K6aiat he had mingled with those of his own age, so as to be on familiar terms with them. The infin. with (isTe may also denote the PrRPosE (as a result to be attained): 7rae, rroIovtJ', wsTe B'imWv tA &Mtzvat they do every thing, in order not to suffer punishment;_ or the CONDITION (to be attained, in order that something else may be):'r~v T0S 7rpoyvois p pXEiL r&y'EAXhAvvw, 5sTE ab-robs V7raCovee -[3aeteiX it was in the vower of your ancestors to be leaders of the Greeks, on condition of being thlemtelves subject to the (Persian) king. For ff' A're with the infinitive, see 813. 771. Both srple and (5sTe are followed by a finite mode, when the action of the verb is to be expressed as something real, probable, or possible: eis 7 r 284 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE WITII INFINITIVE. [771'repalav obvX hce,, f's, E o"'EAXves ye(ppoz/rTo o0t the next d(ay he did not come, so that the G(reeks were anxious, ov Xp4 7' E'Yr &w7rekAEv? srplh' &v SCo oabcrv J must not go hence befobre I have su tered punishment (7 60 a).'72. INFINITIVE IN LOOSE CONSTRUCTION. The infinitive (with or without the particle &cs) is used in several phrases with loose construction, somewhat like the adverbial accusative (552): c&s ed7reZr or c&s e'-ros esrew so to speak, to use this (rather strong) exp6ression, (ks) ovvre;-vr e;hrer (sc. v,/, cf. 601 a) to speak concisely, lxol cOKeirv as it seems to me, in my view, b4iyov (uiLcpoe) MEI so as to want little of it, alrmost, Tsb vv eiatr for the present, IaMeT ToOTo eiac in this relation, and the like. For cicbv ehvai, see 775 a. Subject anld Predicate with/ t/e Infiiztive. 773. The subject of the infinitive stands in the accusative case (485 c). A predicate-noun, belonging to the subject of the infinitive, stands in the same case.?TyyeiXav rbr KvpoYv vKtco'a they reported that Cyr us had conquered, avuvdt MIairva rWV G-TpaTlyywT 7rapeyaL it chanced that no one of the generals was present, - T-bv Ki' ov i apa qYiul AL rov etia, I assert that the unjust man is msiserable, Kca o0 eiv,' EXOV'To &cs oaXovs OrTas kXiqgaatL and some desired that they should be taken as being treacherous. a. The subject of the infinitive may be another infinitive: iaw7rerpayueros 1iicei 7rap& JaIoAews 8o5'vaa.o7 aCE'Clv'roVs "EXAArYas he is come having obtaisned fr/om the king that it should be granted him to rescue the Greeks, where a-cSeiv is the subject of oar'vat. b. A sentence, when stated in oratio obliqua, is often expressed by the infinitive (usually with subject-accusative); see 734 c. When two or more connected sentences are stated in oratio obliqua, the infinitive may be used, not orlly for the leading sentence, but for any of those connected with it: ToLaV-' &Tra oqas E7O2 &aXEXaES'Vas lE'va' erel e 7yevYEat s-a 1 4r71 OTKlxi, &avewY[LyEv' ica ~Taaa,8$dYEv Tjy aS'pay "after such conversation," he said, "they went away: but when they came to the house, they found the door open." 774. OMITTED SUBJECT. The subject of the infinitive is frequently omitted:: thus 1. very often when it is an indefnite word: sra-orv &Mev XaXerzdv (sc. rv'd for any one) to please all is difilcult, obX lpa lca6ree6iv it is srot a time (for one) to be sleeping, A;yoL Xpr-i&c6 saeos a&covea words most useful (for me) to hear. A predicate-noun, connected with the infin. and belonging to the indefinite subject, is put in the accusative: s-a roLavsTa ~eQoE-T (sc.'Ivd) xesrpo-ravq-a ical a&psA~xo-aco etevat such things (a mas) may know by measurinzg anzd counting. 775. 2. when it is the same as the subject of the principal verb: 63otuwdicaMee,3cdoa'ev ye have sworn to give judgment (that you will give), (Po-povuai AXeyev I am, afraid to speak, srav rooo0ovrv 6ss-e abhc-v tJr 136r'va they do every thing in order not to suffer psunishnent (that they may not suffer). —A predicate-nousn with the infinitive. is then put in the nominative case: 5'AA1SavEpos aCpa-lcer eYraL Albs vJds Alexander declared that he was son of Zeus, i'y? obX 777] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE WITII INFINITIVE. 285 j1toAoy7asco XicXyros ~i7ce,, &XX' b7rn oVo KeicKheV1,os I s hall not admit'hat I have some unbidden, but bidden by thee, ol oicoso~,es 7rdvTovW, GouqCraoral esai those who seem to be wisest of all. a. From ecev sWillin g, connected as pred.-adj. with the inf. eTya used in loose construction (772), comes the phrase ek&sv deLt (so as to be willing) willingly: TO'To Ebcx eda ob 7ror o-coX I shall not do this of my own will; b. But sometimes, for the sake of emphasis or contrast, the subject of the principal verb is also expressed with the infinitive; it may then stand either in the nominative or the accusative: Hd. of AiYthV'rtort l4extoS vWTowVs irpc0rovs 7yeEroa aL a&vapcw7rwv the Egyptians believed that they themselves were created first among men, edl oieoie XaXiAte'as l Meyapas M r~ -'EAA:da oaioet, vbe~s'' s reo6pdorearoaa Tr&'rpdytara, obic bopas o'eo-e f you think that the Chalcidians or nMegarians will save Greece, buit that you will escape the trouble, you are mistaken. 776. 3. when it is the same as the object of the principal verb: ris avbV' KWAVcet aeVpo SBaSliEtv who will hinder him from coming hither? -t uta.rv icarerAtre qpvXi'TreuT -ib r o-par'reao he left half to guard the camp, viitV,ov1uovAeVcoo?yvsvat bpxbs ab-rovs I advise you to know yourselves. — A predicateqwoun with the infinitive takes the case of the preceding object: Kvpov?5fov-ro As irpoav1u/LO d'rov 7eyEv'eSa they besought Cyrus to show himself as favorable as possible, 7ravTrl @pXovi rpos-ICEL lpoVtOp4 etvai it becomes every ruler to be prudent; - but sometimes it stands in the accusative,;when the object is a genitive or dative: oavlbepet a-.rols eix'ovs e vat latX.Aov X -roXeladovs it is advantageous for theno to be friends rather than enemies. 777. PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION FOR IMPERSONAL. Instead of using an impersonal verb (494a) with the accusative and infinitive, the Greek often puts the subject of the infinitive in the nominative case, and joins it as a subject with the principal verb. This occurs with 8oKe? it appears, Eotec it seems, Ae'-yerat it is said, &y77'Ae-at it is reported, 6FoXoyeiZrat it is agreed, and the like; with avuLBaavet it happens; and with 8Ltcatd' forTt it is just, araytca7T' Eoart it is necessary, E7rrTElIJ'd e'rt it is fitting, and some similar phrases: 6 Kvpos -,yyerhX7 vclKoalt (Cyrus was.reported to have conquered) = -— yyeXA? rbv' Kipoz vuciriaa it was reported that Cyrus had conquered, avbTs oxto oKii EvOde carKatauvevE7 it seems to me that Imyself shall remain here, oGfatos Ei Aiyeri &avapcnrovs (thou art just to lead men) it is jusst that thou shouldst lead men, ert'otot delaO rb av'r b 7retao-eraaa (they are probable to suffer) it is probable that they will suffer the same.- Yet the impersonal construction is also admissible: iryyex77 irbv Kbpov vtcraat, a o'Katuls eorTT liyet, &a3apcs7rovs, etc. a. The personal construction here may be explained by prolepsis ("726): thus, proper form 1?yyeaXr7 o-t 6 Kipos ei'vic7re, by prolepsis?7fyyEiAa7 o Kbpos'rt ev'Kbc7e, and, with aKcio-atl in place of -re iev't7cae (734 c), ry'yT 0rx 6 Kipos b. The ordinary construction of tno acc. with the inf. (773) may be explained by a similar prolepsis, when the principal verb is transitive: thus, proper form 3fyyultav ift 6 Kbpos ivrd`oe, by prolepsis j'yyetXav s'b K- pov iOtr ie'rK71ae, and with the infin.'yyeatav Trbv Kbpov ViKcoata. The construction was perhaps first established in connection with transitive verbs, and thence extended to vases where the principal verb was intransitive or passive. 286 INFINITIVE WITH NEUTER ART1CLE. [778 Inzitive with Neuter Article. 778. The neuter article, prefixed to the infinitive, gives it more dis. tinctly the character of a substantive. Each case receives a form of its own, and may be made to depend on any word which would take the same case of a substantive. But as to words which depend on the infinitive (its subject, predicate, and object), they are expressed in the same way, whether it has or has not the article. Hence the rules in 773-6 and 762 b are applicable here. 779. The infinitive with the neuter article prefixed may stand as a substantive in any case: thus NOMINATIVE: T'b ppoYELY eVbaaloiOPaS rpc)-Tov, 67rdpXEL to be wise is the first (condition) of happiness, Tob caqapTrdvEv (sc. ab'Tovs) a&vpcSirovs obTaS v.aav-,aT'TvS, (sc. ia-1) it is no wonder that being men they should err.'780. ACCUSATIVE: 7reLpCO caTepydaaacJaL &ss /cAdXLaTa Tb eMoEar (sc. TavTa) & OV1XEL 7rpdrTTel endeavor to secure, as far as possible, the understanding of those things which you wish to pursue: Especially with the prepositions e's or Kard in reference to, aci by reason of, E'rl or 7rpJd in order to, 7rapd in comparison with: 61a adb i-Eos ETal ovc &V oi eL &6CaK7arg ivaL do you think you would not be in. iuered on account of being a foreigner? ripbs tb yeA'pto ev aeoaL Kai cs sremrarsevExyVos well trained to having only moderate wants. a. The infinitive with To' is sometimes found in loose construction, analogous to the accusative of specification (549): &vYX7rrrot eals irb E's Try y1V''/sJAv isdxaez'v they are without hope as regards the invasion of our land, Tris M WovY ao &a7reetXE'PS1r Lb to oL a-o &coAo vaeV what onle of the Medes remained away front you, so as szot to follow you (as to the not following)? Sometimes it resembles the adverbial accusative,.see 772.'81. GENITIVE: E7rilau.a'roV 7reiv, desire of drinking, j Tov) 7rErelv PTXr the art of persuading, a&ras oT tica'racovesV'rroTs munaccustomed to obeying any one, Eilol oVOEy wrpea3'rTepo, TOV 07T /3e'iSXT'TOv Iee evrat to me there is nothing more important than to become as good as possible, rL/LeAeSrat Tov &sr OppoMvzuCraTos devas he is careful (of being) to be as wise as possible. So with many prepositions, as i5 from, in consequence of, srpo' before, prior to, 7rept concerning, e'veca on2 account of, iarep for the sake of, oLd by means of, Nbvev without, aside from; and with some adverbs, as`cw ei/aL ToO KaK&s rdcaXeiv to be out of reach Of injury. a. The infinitive with Tro is often used, without a preposition, to denote the PURPOSE (especially a negative purpose): oi 8E a aLacpe6Ye,'Y Tbv Aa'ybv ie Ti'v sI1cTovWS, ato7roVbs-tcaS'aTCquev that the hare may not escape out of the nets, wze set swatchers. 782. DATIVE: Ta'Ta outC Sy i4tsaro tY T'oi Tobs woOKe'as ac'&Searaa these things were no bar to the preservation of the Phocians. Especially as dative of means, cause, or manner: celcpaT'rlce T. 7'rp'iepos Irpbs'robs 7roXAe/lovs e'LVac he has tri. umphed by marching first against the enemy, at kaA&s 7roALtevuteva al 8ieocpa'Tlat 7rpoEXovtaL T? 8t1ca4Td'epal evat well conducted democracies are superior in being more just. Also with prepositions, as?z in, i7ri on the ground of or on co0ndition that, 7rpds in addition to:'z'.iry'ecaa~oT' asialtcs 6PXeT' 7 roXAIC'ea aci'SEas when each administers his oqice justly, the order of the state is preserved (in and through the just administration). 786] ATTRIIBU'rIVE PARTICIPLE. 287 A ifn itive with cav. 783. The infinitive takes'v, where a finite verb, standing in. dependently, would take it. Thus the inf. with "v corresponds a. to the POTENTIAL OPTATIVE with r,(722): ydeo'ra ouxat Ay oo 7rv'svSeaaz (independent construction ua.Aor-Ta &a 7r'vroIouv) I think that I should learn best fromt you;: and' with expressed condition (748): 5ocerw4 s oa (777);roXv BeAxTov'v &repl'roev iroxov 3ovAEenotaoa (indep. B3eXrov B,,BovXevlaEaLOE), ed TbV r-7rov'ris X&pas 4vv?.-fle-qre it appears to me that you would take much better oounsel concerning the war, if you should consider the situation of the country. b. to the HYPOTHETICAL INDICATIVE with 9& (746): Kvpos ed 0wtoeor, &ptlo-os & 8oKE &PX6OV 7EyVEo'eatl (indep. &Kp~oTs &v ey7Ero) it seems probable that 6Cyrus, if he had lived, would have proved a most excellent ruler. So with implied condition (751): robs TaV'a &7Y ooUvYTas ZoKpdcrsls &vpa7ro350ees B& KIkEIcAraatL 7yE7ro (indep. eY Irres Ta-T'a ~ygovv, avSpawro&Sdees b& iElcKiXV'ro) Socrates thought that persons ignoarnt f these things (if such there were) would be called slavish. REM. c. The particle &y, though belonging to the infinitive, may be attached to the principal verb, or to other emphatic words in the sentence: see the foregoing examples. Jzifinitive for the Ienperative. 784. This occurs in the second (seldom in the third) person. It is rarely found in Attic prose. In this use of the inf., its subject, if expressed, is put in the nom.; a predicate-noun belonging to the subject is put in the same case: tIm.,rada a' Oxol?Aual T'e ptXr'1, 9a 7T &7reya UXeoeam release to swe my dear child, and accept the ransom, Hm. sapercr POP, AL4&aEse, iErl TpCeGoEo ladXaeoa&a with courage now, Diomzedes, fight against the Trojans, oD, KAeapiaa, T'es 7rvtAas av'o[tas 6,Ere1ca do thosu, Cilearidas, having opened the gates, hastenq out against (the enemy). D. PARTICIPLE. For the nature of the participle, as a verbal adjective, but different from other vmerbal adjectives, see 762. For the agreement of the participle with its substantive or.subject, see 498. Attributive Participle. 785. The participle, like the adjective (488 a), may express an attribute of its substantive or subject (493): XAl$s ebpeias.yu &-as eXouora (='OrThS ebpUavyva Hm., or wIrtAs q eupetaT a'vtas XeEL) a city having broad streets, al aXot/,erya Aio'Xou veaaoo the so-called islands of Ae6lus, o'anp& ecaLpo&s the present oocasion.- The participle is always attributive, when it follows the article (492 d). 786.. The attributive participle is often found, with omitted subject, used as a substantive (509).: 288 CIRCUSMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE. [786 o rrap4,VES the (persons) present, 6'rvXwv whoever happens, 7rap& Tos ap[Toro1s aolcooul ErvaL with those who appear to be best, AXo/eUEV Ern vroXAhs rags iceic'di vovs we are sailing against (me'n) who possess many ships.- Such participles are often to be translated by substantives: 6 5pdoaas the doer, of' XEYOrTes the speakers, IrposKcoTres'uves sorse relatives, ir4ALs 7roxequo'rwzY a city of belligerents, nr& o'oYVa the dutties, 7rpbs'b TreXeu-ra-iov Ecf3ar E=ao'Tor T7' Irplyr brapd~CT'v Kptpirerat by the final issue is each one of the previous measures judged of. a. Participles thus used sometimes tale a genitive, like substantives, especially in poetry: T-& crv/upeIpovTa riis irxecwsu (563) the advantages'of the state, Tb &o4dcov r TS uVxis (559) the thinking (part) of the soul, poet. 6 KEIOUV TeICKC (563 a) his parent. b. The participle with the neuter article is rarely used in an abstract sense, like the infinitive:'-b /U xeACeTrcr the not-exercising, failure to exercise ( — b /x uheT~av). In prose, this is nearly confined to Thucydides. - Pr~edicate-Participvle. 787. The predicate-participle, like the predicate-acIjective (488 b), is brought into connection with its subject by the sentence. It is called CIRCUMSTANTIAL, when it is loosely related to the principal verb, adding a circumstance connected with the action: and SUPPLEMENTARY, when it is closely related to the principal verb, su2geplying an essential part of the predicate. a. These subdivisions of the predicate-pat;iciple are not in all cases clearly distinguished, but run into each other. Circutmstantial P2articiple. 788., The circumstance, denoted by the participle, may be reIated in various ways to the action of the principal verb. Thus there is always a relation of a. TInM (for the tenses of the participle, see 714-18): TaviTa brror, i7rrkrez;, after saying these things, he went away, yexiv, E7rs he spoke layhing (at the same time), 7rposxer-Ie -Tou-ToIS &ra'vayyvrooouo rrlS -b royr give yousr attention to these things, while they are being read,'AAKmBcrdyqs es 7r rris y iEaav/dae~'o Alcibiades, while yet a boy, was admnired (in such cases &y cannot be omitted), e&r?'ApXv'Ta pbopeUOrTOs Aiouavrpos El's'Ecpea-ov pIceriETo while Archytas was ephor, Lysander came to Ephesus. Sometimes the participle may be rendered by an adverbial expression: &pXJUEvros at first, TeXevUcY at last, raXir&-bY Xp~vor after an interval of timne, eV (KaXe) uiroCYr with ri ght. Similarly roxx irEXrV Xp'.,evos with much art, Tas vars &ar'rezXavr eXora'AXcKLfar they desspatChedAlcldas with the ships. Observe also such forms as cpXvap~es Xoevr thou art tr fiing (holding on to it) continually, aroiye a5vvas open with despatch, KeG ce Ka-ic (pEp 6cera the evils are come with a rush (lit. borne on, with haste and violene). 789. But the participle may denote also b. MEANS: A-qi'(4evros ~&d they live by plundering, obuc Eir-tv &~colvura 61vat;rv (Eaav taVr KcfawaaL it is 2not posible (for any one) by wrong-doing to gain firmn power. 790] PARTICIPLE WrITH CASE ABSOLUTE. 289 C. CAUSE: TOCqTouV T'V ICEpOY, a7relfovO o aL6'oXp& Vo0lJovTES eYvaC from thesd gains they abstained, because they considered them to be shameful. —— Thus 7ra6obv having suffered what? and TrI,ua~av having learned what? are used in asking, with surprise or severity, the reason of some fact: ri'y&p JUaardv-es.'robes a0vs eobs pIe' for with what idea did yoau insult the gods? d. END. The future participle often denotes psurpose: wrapeXXAvaa o'v,38ov. Xedoav 6i5rv I have comeforward to advise you, T'bv haKco vra vrapa cobs &lcaoa-s yyeLv 8ME KCIxV &bo-'oVTa it is iecessary to bring the evil-doer before the judges, in order that he may sul'zer punishment (lit. give justice). e. CONDITION:'TO0s'Aa7vagois 7rokXetovorv i/zsEvov o'i-at it wuill be better for the Athenians, if they make war. Even an attributive participle may imply a condition on which the verb depends: 6 /x 8apels vapepo7ros ob 7raL3Ev'Tat the man who is not whipped is not educated (if not whipped, he is not educated). The conditional participle with /ux can'often be rendered by withoutt: oblc o'071v 6PXEWv Aju tid6v4a /UeAd- it is not possible to commandwoithout giving pay (774). f. CONCESSION (Cf. 874): T'b v6wp ebwsvudaT'ov &plu'rov o', water is the cheapest (of all things), thosugh it is the best, V/Le7S vcpopcSEvoo TaT wre7rpaTy/va ica UvsXEpat'vovres'YET'E T'Tv ElpmTyv /JWces you, though you were suspicious as to what had been done, and were dissatisfied, continued to obser've the peace notwithstanding. RErM. g. It must be remembered that the Greek participle, while it stands in all these relations, does not express them definitely and distinctly. Hence the different uses run into each other, and cases occur in which more than one might be assigned: thus -TOs ptXouisS evei'Pe-ETOOT-es KalI ro'os EX&poVS avYjeo-e Kcoxadlv by benefiting yoeur friends (means), or if you benefit your friends (conditgon), you will be able also to chastise yosur enenmies. Partliciple with CcUse Absolutme. 790. The circumstantial participle may be connected in its various uses (788-9) with a genitive (less often an accuisctive) absolute, i. c. not imnmediately dependent on any word in the sentence. GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. The participle with genitive absolute may denote a. TIME: rIepltcEAovS rT'yo0vlov, 7roAXX Katl Kaica epyxpya a7re3E'arTo of'A1slvasoi while Pericles was their leader, the Athenians accomplis/hed many nzoble works, To'T-ov NXEEv'Tcv, a&vEaT'Soav KCal a7rsXaov after these things were said, they rose sup and went away. b. IEANS: T'red o'otoCeTrV o' XvvoEzvVW,, teal atC 4vxal appe'iwoqT'Tepa1'Yi7vov'Ta (the body being enfeebled) by the enfeebling of the body, the spirit also isstacde. weaker. c. CAUSE: ob''rY T7i' EdETtVWfl 7roltoVvrovW 5I/Vy, ICfaiCS EXEt T'n 7rpd-ypeaTa because you are not doing any of your duties, your acfairs are in bad condition. d. CONDITION: OblC a& sA~.oY'e&po, luC'V?~ KIcevaevv'rooWv (E= E/ 5jl bit.es $te\eva'7eE) I should not have come here, if yosu had not conmmanded it, poet. 7'yvoc-' t,,.avy, eoO TeXYvEitvov (-= El aebs TEXVTO) everly thinzg would come to pass, should a divinity contrive. e. CONCESSION: 7oAhX'v ICaTia'1V Sal aa'dA"rTav sJpi'v OVTOV, TOUTO /EYIp'Jdv Eio thouzgh there are masy swild animals on la d and sea, this one is tha greatest. 290 PARTICIPLE WITH CASE ABSOLUTE. [791 791. The Greek construction of the genitive absolute differs from the Latin-ablative absolute in several respects: a. The subject of the participle is often omitted, when it is easily under. stood from the context or from the meaning of the participle: ElrTEegEv rpod'Y~rwv, cipaveTro fXvla i7rcowv as they (the army of Cyrus) were proceeding from thence, there appeared tracks of horses, ov'Tor (Zeus raining, cf. 504 c) while it was razning. The subject is omitted, also, when it is indeterminate, see 792 b. b. The participle of eliq to be cannot be omitted, where the sense requires it, as in aov 7ratbis bros (but Lat. te puero) when thou wert a boy. Except in connection with the adjectives,KcSY and &cwv, which closely resemble participles:?/lo9 iEcv'rTos with my consent,?,oUv cKOVTro against my will. c. The Greek, as it has perfect and aorist participles in the active voice, uses the construction of the case absolute much less often than the Latin: o KIpos Tbv KpoZo'or vlIcoas KCaTreopE4'aco'robs AvUovs, Lat. Cyrus, Croeso victo, Lydos sibi subjecit. d. The genitive absolute is sometimes used, even where the subject of the participle is at the same time dependent on other words in the sentence: TraT'r EnrPrv'os abrov, eo e'r XE'ErLv,t'Ao'TUvdyEL (= -raUr' E7r&iv EobE) when he had said these things, he appeared to Astyages to say something (important), 1aG3e71iCIrors rIepuKcieOUS, Ty}YeX' air- (a = B&aEBErrcr flepuich e? ijyC ye6X ) when Pericles had crossed over, word was brought to-him. 79'2. ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE. Instead of the genitive absolute, the accusative is used when the participle is impersonal (494 a), i. e. a. when the SUBJECT of the participle is an INFINITIVE: obeirS, 4ebIv edpiYy &yeLw, wrikcyov aipae'rar no one, (it being permitted him) when he is permitted to keep peace, will choose war, rpos'aXrEv roL Miyeora &yyeur eis'EXiXs'rovror, WXo'/I7V b&a TrdXous (it being commanded) when a command was given me to convey Menon to the Hellespont, I went in haste, Kpavyn? obvK oAyp iEpXVro, arbivaTo, be lv eY CKT, XXCAho Trd o'7xCaL they made no little outcry, (it being impossible) as it was impossible in the night to give signals by any other means. The infinitive is sometimes understood: obMels Trb ueAE7ov afp'Or`Eatl, bv rb'cAaerTroy (sc. aipeE1s-aw) no one will choose the greater (of two evils), when it is permitted (to choose) the less. b. when the SUBJECT is INDETERMINATE: T0'roTr o0e' O'I'ETaeri, 8Eoir sTrdyrov!dhA-ra yiy7,eoaai none of these things takes place, though it is above all neces sary (something requires) that they should take place. - Yet in this case the participle is commonly put in the genitive, if the corresponding verb is not ordinarily impersonal: ov-rwos $eXoeros or xr r eoXlr (it being thus, things being thus) in this state of things. So, also, when the subject is a dependent sentence: Oarsleavee'vr,, T.'AoTrvd7yEL'Tr roXeotUOf EL'lv P r./ Xc6p, when it was reported to Astyages that enemies were in the land (for the plural, cf. 518 a, b). 793. After csr (795 e) and WLcsrep, the accusative absolute is sometimes found, even when the participle is not impersonal: robns vees or 7raTE'pes e'py-ovortv &Ab TCv 7romep&', &rS Triv' orTcor', OSuLti'a cardxucvr oboaa, apEr-ss fathers keep their sons away from etil men, thinking that their society is the destruction qf virt2ue, rowar Lb3 Ei'r7ovv, 5s7rep rovro srpos're7ac'ytuieo at'roTs they were supping in silence, just as if this was eqjoinzed upon them. —-- Rarely so, without preceding cs or iosirep: srposKoyv abreTw,roi T cX1poV IFepos since, part of the inheritance belonged to him, d4a;'Ta 8E'raOra but these things havinj been resolved on (also 6eaXt'ra7VTa, where perhaps -rowev should be supplied). 795] ADJUNCTS OF'THE PARTICI'L.- 2 91 794. A participle with case absolute is often connected by conjunctions to a circumstantial participle in construction with the sentence: iSXNaouE, r'Y E bS b 7rJSXE/, EfXo'TEs pLpt1pets rer'paicto'iaS 6rapX'oIrP X XPw gdrtce 7roXXc~v we entered into the war, having fowe' hundred triremes, and (with) many resources belonging to us, r, TELrXEl 7rpose',3aXo v AoEvE al a r&vpcircewv oVKe drvyTwy they attacked the wall, because it was weak, and there were sio men on it. Adj'uncls of tke Pacirticiple. 795. The relations of the circumstantial participle, in its various uses (788-90), to the action of the principal verb, are rendered more distinct by adding certain particles, which may be called adjuncts of the participle. Thus, a.'Trre, elrCa, ErEELra, oi'ws represent the action of the principal verb as.SUCCEEDING that of the participle. They are placed after the participle, and, as it were, repeat its meaning: tearaXtr&r cppovpav oucos e7r' o'[lov &eXc&p-loe he left a garrison, and thus (after doing this) marched home again. b. ebivs (placed before the participle) represents the succession as IMMEDIATE: Tip &e, pt KepP evr'as a&ro6e]1odrt irEKELvTo they fell upon- the right wing zemmediately after its landing. c. fala at the same tinme and Ite'aeS5 between represent the two actions as CONTEMPORANEOUS: OL "ENMv.es eIdPXOVTO a/gea r'opevdLEYOL the Greeks were fighting while upon the martih, XEyov-TOs rOU, xeraEta' tLot 77Yove f owev,- even while thou wert speaking, the voice.came to me. They are commonly placed before the participle. d.,re (also o'ls, oTa) with the participle gives a CAUsAL meaning: Ka'reeapoe vrtru 7roAX, "Tre aIaKcpwV Tev,'wvVYIc oboC'v he slept a great deal, because the nights were long. It denotes something actual (OBJECTIVE), and differs thus from the following. e. &s with the participle represents its meaning as SUBJECTIVE, that is, as,thought, felt, or uttered, by some person: wolpd$-vn 7Iroowiv's &ceXtl1oci'aTeroV, evTa 7rpbs &peTris 67rL/EXeiav they regret Socrates, because (as they think) he was most useful for the cultivation of virtue, aaveludCOvTaL &os oepoI TIE ral ebv'vXZs &v8pers Ye'yevjxlue'zL they are admired as having been (in the view of their admirers) both wuise and fortunate men, Xe'yeL'os 1csaKov ovo'r1s 7rS apETrJS he speaks in the belief that virtue is a thing that can be taught, poet. eo`'-Ec cpwveTvL, crs?/UoD /Ivs sr.'xae (sc. ov'7sr, omitted contrary to 791 b) you are at liberty to speak aloud, assured that I alone ant near,'va 7rpbs. 7'v e KXct'o'iae fcetE, ro r 81 4Vry'yevees 6 Vtes TrCv a'roXwoXA.eTz that they might come into the assembly, pretending that they were kinsmen of those who had perished, are[3;tE/aTe'e irpbs &XXXovs, W's aT'os Lev e'leaeTOS ovb wrolo-Vu -b deavr,'bV 6E 7rX7o'ov 7rrpdfoV'Ta (793) ye looked to one another, expecting each that he himself would not. do what was resolved on, but that his neighbor would accomplish it. f. etabrep (less often Kai) with the participle gives a CONCESSIVE meaning and is rendered though: icatrep o['TWo fo'bs &,, BIEXTV VM bY 7eoo10 though thou art so wise, thou couldst become better. In Hm., the tKai and 7riEp are often separated (cf. 477): ol 6e Kae a'Xnv%/eoe'rep er' abT4in Mb ye'eaoaeyv but they, although troubled, laughed pleasantly at him; or'rep alone is used in the same sense: aXvvytevot'rep. —'- -'Ols yet with the principal verb, expresses the same meaning: Hld.'r'repov TrmLKLevoL'rS 3os iVTJ m8XOS [AeIporVo,'coes ae+rjaeobkae'-obs MYlovs though they came too late for the enyagement, they yet desired to lool,4pon the Medes. 292 SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. [7 9 St.plemt entary Participle. 796. The supplementary participle supplies all essential part of the predicate. It may belong either to the subject or to the object of the principal verb: a. to the SUBJECT: savE0coEE a' E rsp' Trv aVTov 3ovXevo/yEvot cease consulting forever on the same matters, Y' t Xv7rqpoE iCv know that you are offensive. b. to the OBJECT: 6 7TroXeios E7ravcrev r/las atel nEpl rcov av'Cov T3/ovXEvop;vovE the'war compelled us to cease consulting foreve.r on the same mcatters, oraa avrTO Xv7r7pbv gvToraL I know that he is offensive. 797. The action of the supplementary participle is represented, through its connection with the principal verb, 1. as BEING or APPEARING TO BE. So with es/id to be, 7rdpXco to be (orig. to begin to be), EXw (to hold one's self, and hence) to be, —parvo/at to appear (802), (qacvpds (&XAo.s) e/it to be manifest, eoLKa I seem. So with verbs of SHOWING (causing to appear): &ebcvuztu (xjdcw, &aropaivo) to show, 7roieo to represent, eteAXyXw to convict, a&y7E/XX to announce, 6poAo'yEw to acknowledge. Thus El To7S 7rX4oo'ipv apeiovre's E'e iE Ef we are acceptable to the majority, (s7rep 7rposKot'v e'-L or s-rep 7rpostKov as it is proper. For the participle used with EZli to supply certain parts of the verb, see 385, 392-3, 713. — ictspas jCew I have proclaimed (lit. having proclaimed I hold myself thus): this is chiefly poetic. Constructions like cvoipEvor &ov6Xovs EXovuo they purchase slaves and hold them, belong to 788. &xro(pa[vovar T'os (pevyovqTas crdXaL rovsrpois VTaars they show that the exiles were long ago bad,,'XALr7rros 7rdPvra rca a avro 7roLCrv ltexVA/e-KTca Philip has been convicted of doing all things for himself. 798. 2. as BEGINNING, CONTINUING, or CEASING, to be. So with pXopual to begin (691), &RlaeX'Aeo (&tiyco) to continue, 7ravcu to make sne cease, wracvouau (X715wr, roxow) to cease, 61a- (Erin-) Xicrow to leave off, intermit; also &aracyopemow to give over, eAXetsrw to fail.- Thus ra7E'eX Evvoilav EuXwy 7raat Vul~v I continue to bear good-will to you all, Errrxcaes bp7tol4EYvoS cease to be angry,'A.?61X'aos ov7c are-tre tce7dXAvY Iael caAcx lqi e evoS Agesilcaus did not give p,inming at great and hoizorable things. 799. 3. as an object of PERCEPTION, rNOWLEI)GE1 REMEMBRANCE, and the contrary. So with a-rYvotxart to perceive, rou'Coo to consider, 6pdco to see, Wrepaopio to (overlook) allow, a&coavo to hear, Ieavaavva to learn (802), ruvvPavo/laL to learn by inquiry, ebpigatcwo to find, XAa/ca'vco to (catclh) detect, &aola-KOtaL (qoWpdoJai) to be detected, oTba (Er[iaralpat,?ytyvcaco) to know (802), &'yvoice to be ignorant, /Euvv-q/Fal I remnember (802), srtxavadvo ata to forget. Thus EioV T-obs IroXe/Ltovs 7reAd(o'vas they saw the enemy approaching, 7i-ECos acKOUVW:owcpd-rovs BlaXeTyoXEvov I gladly hear Socrates discoursing, Ov irer1ove3vuAvw WaGnTzac t if he should be detected in layzng plots, eurjrjas iao-rv o0sTI's ~&yvoe7 TV EicEaev (cf. 618 a) 7rd4Aefov &Spo tOVTYa foolish is (any one) weho does not know that the war subsisting there will come' hither. a. ovv/oio 0LOt may take the participle either in the nominative or in the dative: EavrT, vv 8etv ovboev leritou4evos or rtLer'Tauc/ hlie was conscious that he $03] PARTICIPLE WITH av. 293 cnmew nothing. When it means to know by privity with another, it may have an object and participle in the accusative. 800. 4. as an object of ENDURANCE or.EMOTION. So with (peOpw to bear, avEXotaiL to support, iKapTrepe to enzdre, Xafpwo (%ioyat, rep7ro/uat) to be pleased, h&yaorad to be content, yavalc'race' (6Xaoluat, XaAesr&s peppw) to be vexed, displeased, ipyL[o/uaL to be angry, aZrXvh/o/Aai to be ashamed (802),,eTEalXeAouaL (A/era/exet ypo) to repent: also Kcda/uo to be weary. -Thus ivC-aTaL AoLaopolVyEvos (pepELi he is able to bear being reviled, XaIpel Ewratrvoueos ihe delights in being praised, AETaeux'AE avbr, t4EvE-aluev he reepents of having lied, tuav~cdowv x ICdIPaue bbe not weary in learning. a. The participle with verbs of emotion might be regarded as the circunzm. stantial used to express means or cause. 801. 5. as taking place in some general MANNER indicated by the principal verb. So, as taking place WELL or ILL, indicated by ev (icaic&s) 7ro&ce; WIONGLY, by aLI/CE'w, c,UaIpTdYVW; WITH SUPERIORITY or INFERIORITY, by dLK&Ic, JTTao/aL; BY CHANCE, by Tv-xdoV0, poet. ivpieo; WITHOUT NOTICE, by xNavdvw; BEFORE the action of another, by (padvoc; etc.-Thus &aoceToe roVXov pXOYTEs ical 7rovaa&s XVOYVES ye do wrong in commencing war and breaking truce, -vXOv 0o7rXLTaL ev TF7 ayop, tKaaevboovTEs heavy-armed mnen, as it chanced, were sleeping in the market-place, egaae -ov, Kvpov e 7zreXcv he departed without the knowledge o0 Cyrus, e`Aazov biaepaapeaP'eS (sc. Eavrro0s unnoticed by themselves) they were ruinzed unaswares, 1pdPveL TOirS pt'Xovs evIEpTe1'V he anticipates his friends in conferring benefits. a. With TvryXadw, the participle may be omitted where it is readily supplied from the connection: wrepe p'exov 7ry TvXOL4,ui (sc. 7replTpeXOy') I was runZ ning about wherever Imight chance. 802. GENERAL REMARK. With many of these verbs, an infinitive may be used in the same sense; but often there is a difference of meaning. Thus (atveTat 7rAXovVc li he appears. to be rich (is rich and appears so), but ptaevTar L IrAoVTEi, he has the appearance (perhaps deceptive) of being rich; alXv'vobuar XEywvo I speak with shame, but aioXreouai?eElrl I am ashamed to speak (and therefore do not speak); ol3e (savad ve, ) vticcl' he knows (learns) that he is victorious, but o0be (txa'dyveL),aucaz he knows (learns) how tc be victorious; tElxyIvLat eSs dCY'Uvvov Ac6&sY Iremember that Icame into danzger, but gydttVpyaL Tby Icl',voV,,:peV7eLY I am mindful to shuin the danger. Participle witl c'v. 803. The participle takes lav, where a finite verb, standing independently, would take it (783). Thus the participle with av corresponds a. to the POTENTIAL OPTATIVE with d& (722): TAs ~XXas 7rdXErs birepecOpwv, Ws ovic h'~ 6vuageras 8orlCiara-i (indep. obcK'V 5vatr'o) the other cities they overlooked, supposing that they would not be able to give aid;-also with expressed condition (748):?y7 eL tULv 7vI'iEws e&v 4eiyTXPE'T0W, EY T1 L't axE's Xe"yw (750), i713`os' &V EAeyeTdlTwvo, eY Trs /1A aMrqe's XAeot (indep. o'e, ekXEYXeeI, e'Xey eiavl') I am one of those who would gladly be confuted, if I say anything uentrue, but would gladly confute another, if he shouldd say anything. untrue. 2 94 VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN iToq. [80O b. to the IlYPOTIIETICAL INDICATIVE with 9v (746): C/Ainrros 1noTrizav EAxp val 6vvrSEls hy avrbs eXELw,~ EL lE ovXi,'OXv0 4otIs TrapaooKe (indep. E'rvvan,) Philip, when he had taken Potidaea, and would have been able to keep it himself, ~f he lhad wished, gave it up to the Olynthians. VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN Te09. For the meaning of the verbal adjectives in r7ds and r;os, see 398. 804. The verbal adjective in riob, when used as a predicate with Etll, has a twofold construction, personal and impersonal. The latter gives prominence to the necessary action expressed by the verbal; the former, to the object of that necessary action. The copula edli is very often omitted, see 508 a. a. In the PERSONAL construction, the object of the action is put in the nominative (693), and the verbal agrees with it: ob 7rpJ?ye Tres vdaefr as'r7.T'EOS &Y'p a man is not to be honored before the truth, 4 IrJts s TiS roxr[Tas 7c'eXrlEa e orT the state must be aided by the citizens. - With the infinitive or participle of ESl/, the object and the verbal may be put in other cases: & 0ro7s EAev~UapoLs 27OVV7Vo 6eva'irpaKe-a things wEhich they thought were to be done byfreemen, xroAXXs E'TL U/O1 XEKT.Er oSyVwv there being many things yet to be said by me. b. In the IMPERSONALT construction, the verbal stands in the neuter (rEOV or -Ta, cf. 518 a), and the object is put in an oblique case, the same which the verb itself would take: tr-I EtpV 7ro' c o' ie-r' it is necessary to observe the peace, &a7rr'Eo' i7Tx -'oi roXol ov iwe must take hold of the war, ous oub 7rapa6oreEa o-'i who must not be sturrendered. 805. The verbal in rbOs takes the AGxENT (or doer of the action) in the DATIVE, cf. 600. For examples, see the sentences given above. With the impersonal construction, the agent is sometimes put in the accusative (perhaps because the verbal was thought of as equivalent to aeS with the infinitive): cKara,8aTeov e, (A peE Ecao'i-o each one must descend in turn, obSeVt Tpo6r7i E&cdv'Tas a&rfC-Eov by no means should (men) willingly do ijustice. 806. a. The verbal in iSeos may also have an incdirect object, like the verb from which it comes: ous ob 7racpaoorea Tross'Aa7rYaiotis e'-ri who must not be surrendered to the Athenians. b. The verbal in reosr sometimes shows the meaning of the middle voice: -retoeoi, one must obey (re[iaw to persuade, mid. obey), 4pvXacTEov one must guara against (cpvucoo-w to watch, mid. guard against), an7r-ov one must take hold ol lr7r-o tofasten, mid. touch). 810J ATTRACTION. INCORPORATION. 29.5 PECULIARITIES IN THIE CONSTRUCTION OF1 tELATIVE SENTENCES. Attraction. Incorporation. 807. A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in number and gender (503), but stands in any case required by the construction of its own sentence. Yet there is often an irregular agreement in case (attraction), as well as a peculiar arrangement (incorporation), which bring the relative sentence into closer connection with its antecedent. They occur only when there is a close connection in sense, the relative sentence qualifying its antecedent like an attributive. 808. I. ATTRACTION. The relative often varies from the case Xrequired by its own sentence, being attractecl, or drawn into the case of its antecedent. Thus the relative may be attracted -1. from the ACCUSATIVE to the GENITIVE: /ev1r7O21E ToO OpKOV oi.r OL&OOClKaLTEF (instead of ov 1L3.) remember the oath which ye have swo.rn. —2. from the ACCUSATIVE to the DATIVE: rToir aatnols ols EfXO/ev aXXa KrT7odtpEa (for a Exo/sev) by means o fthe advantages which we have, toe will acquire others. a. The relative is seldom attracted FRao any case but the accusative (the object of a verb), or TO any case but the genitive or dative. But when incorporation occurs, other varieties of attraction are sometimes found with it: co' E'rvyaxdvw Ad4Aaw'ra &yaaat a/a (for -oV-wr ohs) of those whom I meet vwith, I admire thee most, e'l atOL eoce? elEYPetLY O's 6prL IEote 7?alta (for o'To01TS ) if it seems to you best to adhere to those things which seemed best to us just now. Cf. 810. 809. II. INCORPORATION. The antecedent is often incor2porated, or taken up, into the relative sentence.. The relative and antecedent must then agree in case. Hence —-1. The antecedent may conform to the case of the relative El'T rTva Op(p KarafaKEv6aovra 7r a'pXot Xopar (for r7lv Xdopavr wp aopXO) f he saw any one improving the district of which he was governor. -2. The relative may conform to the case of the antecedent (attraction): 7rphs ahS 7rapa AvorCvapov EXaf3e vavo-l (for ratrs avo-i ar vXafde) in addition to the ships which he receivedfrom Lysander. - 3. When both regularly stand in the same case, no change occurs: z7) aQ4;XkOE V/E&V ae v vov rrX(at KE;KT?7023E &diav KaXjv do not take away from yourlselves the honorable reputation which you long possess. a. If the antecedent in its ordinary position would take an article, this usually disappears in the relative sentence. See the examples just given. 810. ANTECEDENT OMITTED. When the antecedent is omitted (510), it is virtually contained in, and supplied by, the relative sentence. Constructions of this kind are regarded, therefore, 296 RELATIVE SENTENCES. [810 as instances of incorporation. The relative sentence may then be compared to an attributive with omitted subject (509): it has the use and construction of a substantive in the different cases: Thus NOMINATIVE: 7y? ical ki' EyB ipa rc& T/'erovuEY (for ouToI Wv) land (thosu:) whuom Icommand will stay.- ACCUSATIVE: T'is tML-eY aVyatr"' &V 6vA' ob eI~elMr &yaabs yo~i6o'evos (for,ro-ov v'q ou) who could hate (the man) by whom he knew that he was considered as good? GENITIVE: f/ IrS'Ats'ipc3v w' ElAa/3e rrao-L e-'e 3Wfe (for To'0Tc V/) our city gave to all a share of (those things which) what she took. — DATIVE: ebcvXo a-O'b oIs FdX.a-a'Ta LPXesS (for T'oVtoTs ot's) feast with (those) whom you most love. a. In explaining this construction, it is usual, as in the examples just given, to supply a demonstrative as antecedent. It must be observed, however, that the Greek idiom makes a distinction between av'v oaTs MdXu''i-Ta pNlXe7s with those whom you most love (your best friends, without other distinction), and oa-L T'oroIS als odAs iac-ra (pNXeT with these (particular persons, mentioned before, or otherwise distinguished) whom you most love. We have also a-lv oas dXLoa-~a c1XE7s a'u' O'ro-rtas euBwXOO (the demonstrative introduced after the relative sentence): this has the same meaning as the form first given, but with an emphatic repetition (680): with those whom you most love, with TIIE (I say)feast. 811. O-nIE RELATIVES. These peculiarities of construction (attraction and incorporation) are not confined to o's, but apply also to the other relatives, O(JOSr, OorS, X KOr, O'Ser, etc.: 8oLo1ceVi Ts 7rdiAes OLOVt'o01s heaYv oi'ots Ebaydpas EiXe (for ola) to govern the cities with such manners as Evagoras had, eispepe'-e p p' oawcv hcararos EXez (for &7rb raoo'Tcov o a-a) contribucte front that amount of property which each one has. The use of indefinite relatives as dependent interrogatives rests upon incorporation (825 b). a. The same peculiarities eitend to RELATIVE ADVERBS: Co buJas E''&aa Tb 7rpa-y/a EYEi'eTo (for &ceae-E Eaa) Iwill take you to the place where the affair occurred, ToUis ooAovs a'7rocXeLovaUav *es' E, TL Aa3tev. (for KceZre, OIre) they exclude the slaves from places whence it may be possible to take any thing. Often we may supply a pronoun as the antecedent:/ ~a-icei IrIare, d4tes qppoveE (for ToJ'o B5rdoaev) practise that from which you will appear to be wvise. An instance of attraction is seen in a&ECOIU/yia0TO eVbiaS oarev 67retearEVTo 7ra-?as cal yv;,a7tcas (for iceielt oa) they imnmediately brought over their chlildren and women from the places to which they had withdrawn, them. 8L2. "Eo-rLv oL. Here belongs the frequent construction of eritv ot'l less often cfluav o't, there are (those) who, that is some (= rT.Luc', but more emphatic): in like manner E'Ocrt orLVeSr, used in questions. (For the singular E' —1Y, see 516.) Thus: &,aXa3&,v tr, 1'7r7re4Y MAas at'rrv V's having taken sonme squadrons of the cavalry, v7rrotrao?7Yov'o - u, Ea-TI oIl Ihey came to be suspected in some things, earTv ou'sTrvas aupprSw-v w eTatuxaccas Ir- a-oaqp hast thou admired any among men on account of wisdom / jeaav ol'also ]Yv ol) ical 7rgp 7rposepepov some too were bringing/ire. (Compare the rord ElIOt some, made up of e' + o'l, where Eiv is for Teer —L or s'ela-, 615 a.) Similar. expressions are E'o-Tv b-re (Eiaore) sometimes, G'izv a' ov or i7rou somnewhere, E'r-t, OSrcos somehow, etc., in which the omitted antecedent is an idea of time, place, manner, etc. 816] ATTRACTION. INCORPORATION. 297 813. NEUTER RELATIVE. In some cases of omitted antecedent, the neuter relative has a free construction with the force of OTt or sTre: frpos5Kel XdpLv avd'os EX'lv oe'?iacoav vi+' 6iAtvV (Xv = TOVTov o'T, 518 b) it becomes them to be gratefulfor this, that they were saved by you. So ah'' /n int return for (this) that, Wt hv in consequence of (this) that (cf. o'vEtKca, aouvecKa, 869, 3). So also E'p' a, ei' ae (= i7r Trovr.CP Is'e) on condition that, often used with the infinitive: on TpLdKOY1Ta'?piE'gnav?f''iTe oV7YP7pdeaL VdlUovs the thirty were chosenz on the condition that they should draw up laws. Hd. has i'rl T-ov7- i7r''re with the same meaning. a. The neuter relative is used with prepositions in several expressions oi time and place: eit ob (= icK Tro-royU is' from that point of time at which) since, A&' ou since, iv { while, Els o (- Els -ovrTo ei c) till, /CEXPL (bXP,) o~ until, also to where (to that point of space at which). So with other relatives: et, oTov since, jieXpL oaaov as far as where. HId. sometimes uses u~eXpt ob, like xEiXpL, with a genitive. For special uses of sentences which begin with neuter relatives, see 823. Other constructions which require particular notice are the following: 814. OLor (full form TOLO1rTOS oLos) is often used with the irfinitive, and means of such sort as to, proper for. And so OLOsrT inz such condition as to, able to; o'~os of such amsount as to, enough to. Thus olbK {v Spa oia Ep6e6v trb 7reriov it was not a proper season to water the plain, o'X ooiL'E Toa-av or-naeaatl they were not able to render assistance, EXXoblEv oa-ov aroCsv we have enough to live. 815. OAos and oaos are sometimes used where, in supplying the antecedent, we must supply with it an idea of "thinking," "considering": &7reicAGaoav'Iv eiauarov TrXdvx, o'ov a&'opbps i'ECapouv Eos'EprU os eYrW' (sc. Aob'y4,6vos oL10Toov V apa o'ovu considering the kind of man of whom, etc.) I bewailed my owz fortunz in that I had been deprived of such a man as a companion, Hm. asuaTos ecs -cyaoio, oL' ayopetvrs (sc. rIvl Ao1otyCt4sPY'roTaua oha in the view of one who considers, etc.) thou art of good blood, to judge front such things as thou arb saying. Similarly ebVSa/iwv Aot av&p E'patL'vEo, cs &bes ical'yeVatWcos e'TAETa the man appeared to me happy (considering the way in which) in that he died so fearlessly and nobly. a. The same relatives, olos, go-os, and Cos, are used in EXCLAMATIONS, where we should employ interrogatives: h rrdsrrc, oara'rpd7salra fXets eS d, bct? erv 0 gramndfather, how much trouble you have in your sutpper (oh! the amount of trouble which you have), &s jbbvs EJ how pleasant you are (oh! the way in which you are pleasant). 816. When oros (seldom &a-os, XlKCos) would properly stand in the nominative, as a predicate with elu[, the copula cutd is often dropped, and the relative with its subject is attracted into the case of its antecedent: 7i8 ea —rT XapiCoaaar o'tp aot &a'pi (for T'oo10Tp Oaos ab el) itis pleasant to gratify a man such as thou art. To this construction the article may be prefixed: -o7s o0'oas 77/xls to such as we are. Yet sometimes the subject of the relative remains in the nominative: TOVS oiovs viysEts lae-Z -vo(pad'-ras he hates- sycoiphants such as you are. The form Tobs oLos o-ios a&vpc&-rous is also found. a. By a similar attraction os-TLs gets the meaning of any whatsoever; and the same idiom extends to other indefinite relatives. This is always the case'when -ova is added: ovbc Ea'cOiT- 8calov &vspbs fBAd7rsTEv ov'TVouv aapcSprw (for T-SA TsT'sov ea'Tir any one whoever he is) it is not the part of a just man to inzjure 298 RELATIVE SENTENCES. [816 any person whatsoever. So too bs'rs (or o's) govAxEL, like Lat. quivis, is used for,rls'vy 3doXet: 7rEpI HoXv7vYcTov i3) 9AXov oTOv To/J3AeL concerning Polygnotus ov any other whomn you please. b. A peculiar incorporation is seen in the phrases, b'0or oixves (as if'rooavIa ls b'o''rYES ELOL as mlany times as there are months) monthly, Soaat Iyepad (also oa7repai) daily, etc. 817. INVERSE ATTRACTION. The antecedent, without being incorporated into the relative sentence, is sometimes attracted to the case of the relative. In most instances of this kind, the relative sentence comes between the antecedent and the word on which it depends: ~-v oi[icav ty KavT7XLrey ov 7rAedovos &~[a iy (for 4) obama 4y) the property which he left was of no more value, poet. ras8 &Isrrep clsops 4cov-t 7rps ae' (for a'd6e Ias) these (maidens) whom thou seest, are come to thee. So with adverbs: Kal tbAXXoe bVOror Yav qIKp 3Tyaroovel o'e (for A/Xoit) and in other places, wherever you may go, they will love you. a. In this way, ob&eis is attracted by a following b'sT'r oi': ou: yl o'Tq otc droKcplTat (for oi'efls io'rsv o"y ooc Iar. there is no one whom he does not answer) lhe answers every one. b. By a somewhat similar change, aavuao-T6v lersv'~os, boaov, etc., passes into auyvao'rbs bo'os, aavuao~rov Soaov, etc.; and in like manner, aavuao-~syv e'~Tv &cs, into aavxaorTs&s csr. A few other adjectives show the same idiom. Thus,avtlaO')sv bo —qy Yrepl o' 7rpoavluufay s EXE he has a wondefiul degree of devotion for oou, Unrepcvps cs XaLppw I am prodigiously pleased. Other Peauldiarities. 818. ONE RELATIVE WITH TWO OR MORE VERBS. The same relative may depend at once on two different verbs, even when these in their regular use require different cases. a. The two verbs may stand in the same sentence, the one being a finite rerb, the other an infinitive or participle: KaTaxagt,3dYovoaL T'eXOS' TetEXLtO-deYOI 7rore'AicapsYaes coteLy. oiKa-~lrpip ieXpC'ro (prop.,~ EXpyVTo) they take a fortress which the Acarnanians, having once fortified (it), w.ere using as a common plac, of judgment. b. The two verbs may stand in different sentences, one of them ssubordinai to the other: acpovtxeuaa av-rolXdovus os-, 7Vrays 7ri VXefova OElabv ao' c, At e EKEIfVW &~KoXoVakr-oVoL (prop. ol aKcoXova.) we choose (as guides) deserters, whe, when any one may offer them larger pay, will follow those (who offer it). c. The two verbs may stand in co-ordinate sentences:'Apiaos, oy JLJeAE 7i)aeXoJEy 3aoXE'ta Ceairao'dsyai, cal SCKeatEy KCal xadl3oteY qrtnrrCd (prop., iEcKa yLe, M&' ov eA4CtoleVy) Ariaeus, whom we wished to make king, and (to whom) w, gave, and (from whom) we received pledges, Hm. yoWXaL oe' s84'yaI4ueESat Trq OTre, Te wraT4p KIeXETal, Kca avSdSei avT.p (prop. osI s avSavyei) bid her marry thai one whom her father commands, and (who) is pleasing to herself. REm. d. In the last case (c), the Greek hardly ever repeats the relative, but t often uses a personal pronoun (commonly aivuTds) instead: oL wrpdyovot, ofs oao sxapflov7' ol X-yoYses-, oiaS' EqitXovv aV'ToVs our ancestors, whoam the speakers di, not try to please, and were not caressing them, Hm. a&riTeoY HoXd4r/ovY, boov cpd -sos ~0o~-!ILE7yL~Tov ra-iv KvUcXcV6reYos, ~Ooa 6e' zysv Te'e v6smpn7 the godlike Pold phemus, whose power is greatest among all the Cyclopes, and the snymph Thooso bare him. 823] OTHER PECULIARITIES. 299 819. VERB OMITTED. Where the same verb belongs to both sentences, antecedent and relative, it is sometimes omitted in one of them, especially in the relative sentence: poet. rp[rovs,opu'ovo' ou'sarep &, srgars aOev (sc. sooL'p eplxovs) considering as friends those whom your husband (nay consider so), a&?y&p &AXa go'alrep fcal Wueis i7roLreE (sc. enrobie) for all other things (he did) as many as you also wert doing, oLoov LEOu/ol aocooV 7re7rovE'atL, oio; eCY TrS d oi7repwzv ea77 orT Kapr'v KicaTrapPEiv they seem to me to have ssu'ered the same thing as (one would suffer) if, while sowing well, he should let the crop perish. After relative adverbs, the omission is much more frequent: eo'rTLrv, 6ssrep'H'yeXoXos (sc. eeXe7TE), i77vL, Ae-yel, it is permitted.us to speak, as iegelochus (spoke), c&s?ioi iO'YTOS n'mrp &, vets (sc. YTre) oB-TW'7z, VycyimjV EX'ETE as if I were going wherever you also (may go), so make tip your mind, EIreLb& oub'-re (sc. 8eeLEas), ahA&a vv &e7ToY since thou didst not then (show), now at least show. 820. PREPOSITION OMITTED. When the antecedent stands before the relative, a-preposition belonging to both appears only with the first: is rplol Kal EcKa obrX o'ots &'ealv oLs i7rLaroAceL (for sv ois) in not quite thirteen years, in which he is uppermost, o Arsv Ier' 4ovuaots 07ro-ars,3oVXovoro &ErpaTToY (for Ef' 6ro'~s) they were acting with as much license as they pleased. 821. TRANSFER TO RELATIVE SENTENCE. Designations which belong most properly to the antecedent, are sometimes taken into the relative sentence: els'AppeItav gae,,'s'Op&vsras JpXe 7roXkxss cal e'bagoaovos (for'roXA~v cal ebSa[lpova) they would come to 4Armenia, of which Orontas was governor, an extensive and prosperous country, o-otL, 6riel eUrECs o?Ya9o,'ro Trb 7rpaylaC, a7reX&pP7oav (for eba'Cos e7re') these immediately, when they understood the matter, withdrew. So erel (&s, 7re) trdXto-a for rdXlo'~a E&re (&ss,'re): 7reLpaco/eBa rwapeiar e'Tav dXLo''a sasrpoa~t5ieaa we shall endeavor to be present (most quickly when) as soon as we have accomplished. In like manner:?ya-yo 607rovras 7rXE'Olrovs eIvvsdAxI have brought (the largest number which) as many as I could. For the use of relative words to strengthen the superlative, see 664. 822. RELATIVE PRONOUN FOR CONJUNCTION. A relative pronoun is sometimes used, where we should expect a conjunction, oTn or 65sre (cf. 813): -avixao~bv rotess, b's 7zSsv ob6sv &iaws you are acting strangely, (who give) in that you give us nothing, trs ovb'cs ea-rl vsrVXS osil s racrpia rpoeeaat Jov3OVX0aETa who is so wretched that he will be willing to betray his country? &irJpwov a'TrlP orL'vers e'eAovot?n' I&ropdas 7rpdTTre,'T it belongs to men without resource, that they wish to pursue any object by means of perjury. For the relative used with the fut. ind. to express purpose, see 710 c. 823. LoosE CONSTRUCTION. A sentence commencing with a neuter relative, is sometimes loosely prefixed to another sentence, either-(a) to suggest the matter to which it pertains: & 8' edrev, W&s eoy5 Et' oosL 0 el rros e Tie-a'daAAkEoat, KaTavoCioa7e but what he said, that I am such a one as to be always changing, (sc. srepl ToT6TCor XVeyw concerning this I say) consider, etc.; or (b) with appositive force:'b SpTL eAXeyov,'Tl77TE'oV' Trives ptL~roT q)vXaKEs (what) as I just said, we must inzquire who are the best guards. In this case, the principal sentence is sometimes irregularly introduced by o8t or ydp (cf. 502): b p1E' 7rdrTwOV 5avucYaTO'TaToV a&covfrat, rT es: Ei'KaaTo'Y T sy i7rpIYo'atre? e 7ro'AkvoL R'vy T vxvy what is most wonderful of all, (that) each one of the things which we approved ruins the soul. In like manner, after phrases such as u&s xAeovuO as they say, us eolce as it appears, etc., the principal sentence is sometimes expressed as dependent. Ws 7yap ~Ijovad TLYOS, OTL KAeavspos Eic BvaPyRTov,ge' AAEI',El for as I heard from 300 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [823 some one, (that) Cleander is about to come from nByzantium,'d7e ye LvS,'WS o0 {sat, ava-ycatlTaror edai (for eiair) Eyerv this, however, as I think, it is most ne cessary to say. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 824. The question expressed by an interrogative sentence may relate, either a. to the EXISTENCE of an act or state denoted by the verl of the sentence; or b. to something connected with that act or state, as its sur JECT, OBJECT, TISME, PLACE, or MANNER. QUESTIONS AS TO SUBJECT, OBJECT, ETC. 825. These are expressed by means of pronouns or adverbs, -by interrogatives, if the question is direct,-by interrogatives or indefinite relatives, if it is indirect (682). a. The pronouns represent an uncertain person or thing, quantity or qua lity, to be determined by the answer: the adverbs, an uncertain time, place, oi manner, to be determined in the same way.'Thus Tis X'yeL who is speakingz. -i (&a Tri, 7rkeav, 7rocT, wr-re, 7rov, 7r5s) XA'EL what (on what accouent, lhow many things, what sort of things, when, where, how) does he speak? 5pJ/U1V TI's (TI, iroa, nros, also *OrTLs, o T1, 07roza, 0'rws) A4yoL I asked who (what, what sort of things, hows, he) spoke. b. Strictly speaking, the indefinite relatives have no interrogative force: they are proper relatives, and have for antecedents the uncertain person, thing, time, place, etc., to be determined: it is the connection only which gives the idea of a question. Hence the simple relatives are occasionally used in the same way: Oee/toToKcXjs eMo'aes lppcdLc,rt PavtckXpp,.STLS E'i, Ktal 86' & epeyei Themistocles in his fear makes known to the shipmaster, who he is, and on account of what he isfleeing. 826. The interrogative word often depends, not on the principal verb of the interrogative sentence, but on a participle or other dependent word: ~rsvos eiretr'lwUv A7yeis as acquainted swith what, are you speaking? rbV, iec 7roias riAEwos TT'paT777Ybv rposo60ic T'aTa wrpdaeLv (the general fiom lwhat sort of city do I expect) from what sort of city must the general be, whom I expect to do these things? Ti rbS KplTrrovAu lrov'Trotoy Taa ta a'TaeyvcwKas avTov (having seen C. doing what, have you brought) what have you seen Cr'itobalus do, that you have brought these charges against him? o0,7rdXa'Aag3va0oL o0b LeXoIy[oawT'o sre'p oea (825 b) 7re7roe1ttcTwsv av'pc7erwv,cvwvYevdovo- (for men having done what sort of things) the ancient Athenians did not consider swhat sort of things the mncn fad done, in whose behalf they were to incur danger, iwretXiv otc eira6eTro, teal T1 caKcbn ob 7rapExwv lie did not cease threatening, and (what evil not causing?) causing every evil. For TIC ra.Srv and T/ lan2r,cv, see 789 c. a. The interroga.tive may stand as predicate-adjective with a demonstrafive pronoun, not only in the nominative, but in an obliquee case: rls 8' o'Tos 829] INTElIlIOGATlVE SENTENCES. 301 EPXETat (being who, does that one come) who is that coming?'yP yeXiav Rpsw,apeta,. Tir'a TaVTv7/ (sc. Tr &y'yEXla[a cpepels) I bring heavy tidings: (being what, do you bring these) what are they? poet. Ti qT'Y. aas what (is) this (which) thou art speaking? Hm. iro7ov ~Tb JuLo' oetElres of what kind (is) this saying (which) thou saidst? b. So in a compound interrogative sentence, the interrogative word is sometimes connected with the verb of the dependent sentence: rdTre & Xpl IrrpdaETE; 7reLa'y Tir 7yE'VTraL (sc. WpACerTe) when will you do what you ought? after ewhat shall have occurred (i. e. after what event, will you do your duty)? i'va TL y/EVTaL (that what may come to pass) to what end? also'Iva Tf (508 b). 827. DOUBLE QUESTION. Two interrogative words are sometimes found in the same sentence: nTLva O' XpI icaXEiW, &Os TrI'os Enoa''7rxora Te'v7qs what must one call you, as being acquainted with what art? 7roela 07roiou Iiov U /UxluaTa, obic Xw he yEyE what kinds (of numbers) are imitations of what sort of life, I cannot say, Hm. TIS, 74rdev des &av3pCv nho (and) from whom among men art thou? For interrogative pronouns with the article, see 538 d. QUESTIONS AS TO THEi EXISTENCE OF AN ACT OR STATE. 828. DIRECT questions of this kind are expressed with and without interrogative words: a. without interrogative words:'EXXk7ve"s oavres pnS(poit aovXevoLev being Greeks, shall we become slaves to barbarians?. These are shown to be questions only by the connection in which they stand, though in speaking they may have been marked by a peculiar tone. b. by means of interrogative particles; these cannot usually be rendered by corresponding words. The most important are apa and i: ap eLLtL dtavrtLE am I a prophet? 77 ovrot TroXutol eio-l are these enemies? REM. C. Neither apa and %, nor ob and jl (829), had originally the nature of interrogatives. The proper meaning of apa was accordingly (cf. &pa, 865, 1, from which apa was made by dwelling on the first sound), marking a question as naturally arising from, and suggested by, preceding circumstances or conceptions. The proper meaning of 15 was really, truly (852, 10), marking a question as directed to the real truth. —Both apa and 1 are often connected with other particles: apc' ye,?ydp, 1 7rov, etc.- HIm. never uses apa, but has 5 pa with much the same force. 829. TApa and 5 in general imply no expectation as to the nature of the answer, whether affirmative or negative. In this they differ from ob and /u, employed as interrogative particles; ob (also ape oh) implying that an answer is expected in the AFFIRMATIVE: /xu (also apa 1Ah, and ece for aX oUv), in theC NEGATIVE: thus apa (.1) pofe7i are you afraid (ay or no)? ob (apa oh) fpoBe? are you not afraid (i. e. you are afraid, are you not)? SIE (apa pA1, IcAv) poGBe? you are not afraid, are youz? a. An interrogative expression which very clearly shows the nature of the expected answer, is iXXo rTi (for aXXo Ti Er'Lyv 1) is any thing else true than = is it not certainly true that?-also, with S omitted, 6XXo Tl, in the same sense: AXXho T1 ~ &acKOVjtEy are vie not certainly in the wrong? NXXo TI ov 7rdrTa Ta'Tea &v edq piea arCao'mT1x woould not then all these things be (biot) one science? '302 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. [83C 830. INDIREC T questions of this kind are introduced by et whether (sometimes iEv with the subjunctive); also by apa, and, ill Homer, - (x): ~co7rE'ITEe El 8KcalfWS Xp~oolbat T X&.dy observe whether Ishall conduct the discourse rightly, Hm. PXETo IrevOrd4E/oS /LET& b7 ic KXtos, 4 Prov sr' e'his he went to inquire after news of thee, whether perchance thou wert yet alive. This use of El and hdv is closely connected with their use as conditional conjunctions: thus the first example may be rendered, " observe (so that) if I shall conduct aright (you may know it)." Indeed, it is often necessary to supply an idea like ehodiceros in order to know, before et and idv (HmE. eY ice, al ice) used as dependent interrogatives: Urm. Aal?yoi0wv, aY Ie rcs irc Epw v piiSaL embrace his knees, (that you mayfind) whether in any way he may be willing to assist. 831. DISJUNCTIVE questions of this kind are introduced by 7rorepov (OrOTepa)...'; these are used both in direct and indirect questions. But indirect disjunctive questions are introduced also by ETre.. E.'Te. 7ro'repoV e8'pacev ) oe; -7rJTepov &CWV i3) ieccV,; has he done it or, not? unwuillingly or willingly? a7ropovyes enire iKwv X iiEc pCE we pa are we are in doubt whethes he has done it'u3willingly or willingly.-For the use of eTire (el f+d), cf. 861. For the interrogative rnd'repos, see 247: -rdorepov e'spaKcer I) o0 may be rendered, " which of the two (statements is true), he has done it, or (he has) not (done it)?" a. For disjunctive questions, especially when these are indirect, lEm. has also X (hZ)... if (he): AeEivaT' erl xXpbvor, o(ppa 8acAeyv; iErenv KdXXas LuavTteUETa ije ical oKbi wait for a time, that we may know whether Calchas prophesies truly or even not so. For the use of the modes in indirect questions, see 735-8. For the subject of the indirect question drawn into the principal sentence (prolepsis), see 726. itNEGATIVE SENTENCES. 832. There are two simple particles, o' and jug, used to ex. press the negation (nor:-existence) of a state or action. O expresses non-existence merely; p/; expresses it as willed, assumed, or aimed at. The same difference appears in their compounds, as OvTfre, oI-E; OV ElS, V8 EI; oSafsg, Iocl8atLxJ3; and many others. Hence 833. Myj is used with the SUBJUNCTIVE and IMPERATIVE in all sentences, whether dependent or independent: rue r-eX' TIb XN jyo' ica'akfrevcY let us not leave the discussion suei/lnished, -j4el.s o0iiCw!ue roTr'o Aleyewv let no one suppose that I say this, A'yere, ELsto o ts saJy, shall Igo in or not? fdi ars Kduv.p, rapawcareTs ia'rpdv, rwes jet Ia &roa d ~f one is sick, you call in a physician, that he may not die, oaapo'Sv IarL ~ 40-ce ras 5o o &y txJ M1calwys 1 re7rpa'y/e`uoY rotten by nature is every thing ov/wich hat:ot been wroughtv with justice. But the subjunctive in its epic use for the fut. ind. (720 e) has ob. 837] NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 303 834. Independent sentences with the INDICATIVE and OrTATIVE have /xN in expressions of wishing (721); but otherwise, ov, ~c5p1TEV,'WS /IV7rOT' &epeXe (sc. a&'LapieGv) he missed, as I would he had never done, EyemA " 7riLBovXe6earLut let me plot against no one,-i[XLt7rros ovbc Syci Eipmnlv Philip does not maintain peace, eLi itx XP.,-o To7s 7rapovJv, otc &y evb3auoVoi if he should not use what he has, he could not be happy. For ob and u/x as interrogative particles, see 829. 835. Dependent sentences with the INDICATIVE and OPTATIVE have /x- when they express a purpose or a condcition; but otherwise, or: Hence pt is used in FINAL, CONDITIONAL, and HYPOTHETICAL RELATIVE, Sentences: eTrev 07TL &a7rLMval 3ovXoLro, AXd 6 trarTp &XaovLo he said that he wished to depart, lest his father should be displeased, ei ~'ut icwVetie, ieaeXA ab'ros LaXEXaar if nothing hinders, I wish to confer with them, 6r'rTe r tL TL eoeLav, o01 LvVeacav when they had no fear of any thing, they did not come together. So in hypothetical relative sentences with the INDICATIVE (761): & AX oiaa obae oyoaxa ci3 at what I do not know (-= L dx ola if I am if I a gnorant of any thing) I do not even suppose that I know. a. So too, AX is used with the future indicative in expressions which imply PURPOSE (710 c): r0p[oaCrre v ToLaOra et -c v y r1E. rore dv T c tiebrctaeXreL vote such things that in consequence of them you will never have repentance, opa 07rcus,nx roL &7roarToveaL, see to it that they do not revolt from you. For j/U in expressions of FEARING, see 743. 836. Dependent sentences in the orctio obliqua take the same negatives that they would have in the recta: ET7rEv b-n o'Sev alv'- l EyeXot L-o T jOjeT'epov 4opv6ou (direct o'vorV Aoi PAELae) he said that he cared nothing for our disturbance. But after el in dependent questions, either ob or )un can be used at pleasure:?pCOrTa Ei obic aioXv~,olzai (direct o'vg acdXoYvp;) he asks whether I am not ashamed, jpr(r-cw Ei -8i i8 O porISEL (direct ap' o"obVy ppoVtietis) they asked himt whether he had no concern, ricowr&ePv ie 7rpeiret It ob' let us consider whether it is proper or not, -rov-r' avrb &l.YoEis, el XapetLS ~ d7 XPacpeis you are ignorant of this very thing, whether you are pleased or not pleased. 837. The INFINITIVE commonly has jtu (as expressing some. thing merely assumed or aimed at), especially when connected ~with the neuter article: TrauTa vbaLs AX &ayz'osie7v,SovXu/Y I wished you not to be ignorant of these things, i'Xcyov anoTo7s Ld1 a&uLKEz7 they told them not to commit injustice, eLcbs a-opb. arSpa A A'XpEZv it is fit that a wise man should not talk idly, aool,ru I rtLa: xoinrbv ijv it remained for thee not to become silent, ai ZeLpvyes O&rpc6rous cKae'rXov, iSTEe!J &areYaL ha*' rrabTIs the Sirens detained men, so that they could not get away from them. a. Some exceptions are merely apparent: v51as &itovtyv o3 vjunLaXcv a\XX& evvarKe.7v they demand that youe should be, not allies with them, but partners in wrong-doing, where or belongs properly to atov'rtv. Similarly ocezvbs &aapT'er Ktcadzs ioxrT it is not just that he shouldfail of any th.ing. b. Btut oU may be used with the infinitive in the oratio obliqua (734 c): bohoWYi o'7 MaTa TroV'Tovs civaC pfrwp I confess that lam not an orator after thli 304 NEGATIVE SENTENCES. [837 sort, Els AaOeEaIcoi'a &l[Xevev lervaL ou?yp E?/aL Ic:plos al'(ds he commanded theml to go to Lacedaemon; for (he said) that he himself had not the authority. 838. In connection with verbs of NEGATIVE meaning, such as hindclering, forbidding, denying, refusing, and the like, the infinitive usually takes j'u, to express the negative result aimed at in the action of the verb' KWccexuv/Era ~ /uaae? s we are hindered from learning (so as not to learn), &7rEiroP'ro7s ooAotIs UtL yUET'e'ew TW'v vvuvaoc-[v they forbade the slaves fr'on slaring zn the gymnasia (requiring them not to share), 7IpvoVroo y ire'7rwici'cvai theyf denied that they hadfallen (asserting that they had not fallen), &rEoXov-o 5d1 iel TiV ECarlprWy'Yi' ~rpareuvao they refrained from making war Upon the land of either (so as not to make War). 839. The PARTICIPLE has krj when it expresses a concnitionz (789 e); otherwise, ov: i-s &v rrdhxs bs7rb utx 7reLol:uevov a'Xoei what city could be taken by disobedient?zen (by men, if not obedient), eov i &o'rvTos, oveEiv laXve'rdvos uznless a god bestow, toil avails nothing, — Kpos Eavl3 IrlE Ta' Up-q, o3ebs icwxovoros Gyrus swent up on the mountains, (no one opposing) without opposition, 6iopveiT'e, hs ob srorio'oVTes Tra'Ta you were clamorosus, as not intending to do these things. The participle with /y, after the article, may be expressed by a hypothetical relative sentence: of / esdT-es (= oA v i, el EiSeo') all or any who nsay not know (if such there are): but Xe7w eiV'-os o5ic EriNda the particular persons among whom I speak, do not know. 840. 1Me is also used with ADJECTIVES AVERBas, and even with' sUBSTANTIVES, to express a hypothetical sense: ro l) arlyajoov (-= o6 v n71: aya5,\v?) the not-good = whcatever is not good,.1 tj iarpdo the non-physician, whoever is not a physician. 841. M7 roFR ov. M' is often used instead of ov with participles or other words, through an influence of the verbs on which they depend, when these verbs either have ut, or would have it, if negative; ~ Xcap','A'pedir/, Kte/eE'L Tos Ios tcaxoZs rejoice not, Atrides, in dishonorable tgains, 67reo'XE70o elp 4vlv wroiotreiv, tuxTE dlUpa 0ovsS, I5TE'&h'TEXn tKaaeAhy (tx& on account of 7roi4oerv, 837) he promised that he would make peace, without either giving securities, or demolishinq the walls, edav -T aTi'o- aavJTre'bV tbi El oTa (tt, on account of Eav i'tay7, 835) if you perceive yourself to be ignorant of any thing. 842. 0u Fon 1t*. 03 is sometimes used for /u, when it has a frequent and special connection with a particular word, as in ov' cPrqiU to deny, oUcK ei to forhid, ou roxXoi few, oui 7~oror mnore, and the like: in such expressions, ou is occasionally retained, when the above rules require lu4: rdroTWS ovzirws Xei1, Ea''e ovi iTEe cdv TE p7re it is so in any case, whether you deny it or affrm it. Two OR MIoRE N:EGATIVES IN ONE SENTENCE. 843. When a negative is followed by a covmpound negative of the same kind, the negation is repeated and strengthened. In English, only one negative can be used: the others may be repdered by indefinite expressions: poet. obic Eri-Tv oUb'v ecpiE'o'ov VJUOL srudXei there is (not any thing) nothing betterfor a state than laws, wYfv'TOirov oVbelS eC oVbEv obrevh 848] NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 305 vy I/tcuYv o Se7rore YE'ioiTo AiLos without this none of us could ever become of and worth for any thing. 844. When a negative is followed by a simple negative of the same kind, the two balance each other and make an affirmative: o'v iea dvzp-. rrowv aBLKv TlcV OpK'o8 robEcL no man that does injustice will not pay the penalty, i. e. every one will pay. 845. od gt. 0 followed by p/i is used with the subjunctive or future indicative in emphatic negation. This use may be explained by supplying after ob an omitted expression of anxiety or apprehension: ov tx 7wroLnaow (= oLb cpo$r7Teov H ij 7roiLw it is not to be feared that I shall do it, no danger of my doing it, i. e.) I certainly shall not do it, obaEls u7roTre'ebpiret rTb iar' uyE oiG'EY hXXELJgevr no one shall everfind that any thing, so far as depends on mne, is neglected, ob trorT-e Eaepvos ye wUCat never surely shall I deny it. 846. Mq) ov. M/) followed by oa is used in different ways. 1. After expressions of fearing, where yip is rendered lest, that (743), uAd o5 is rendered lest not, that not (Lat. ne non): 8 olKa g o' agte/brw. I am afraid that it may not be lawful: or, without the verb of fearing, s t obr eJE/ULOb x7, the construction described in 120 d, which implies anxiety, but does not distinctly express it. 847. 2. The infinitive takes ti' oa instead of t, (837), when the word on which it depends has a negative: o8bels o~sTsTe Akxws A'ywv wux o' KtraT7ae'Aa~os ebvat no one speaking in any other way (is able not to be) can avoid being ridiculous. The or here only repeats the negation which belongs to the principal word (cf. 843). a. Hence verbs of hindering, forbidding, denying, etc. (838), when they have a negative, are followed by /xA ob with the infinitive: ob KceXAvJxeaa ax1 oA!,ae7P we are not hinderedfrom learning. In such cases, the neuter article is sometimes added to the infinitive: poet.,/z /raps'rb 1~ ob cppdact do not forbear to make it known.' b. Ml7 or is used in the same way, when the principal verb stands in a question which implies a negative: r[va oCet &7rapvo'ieoaaat tA obvxl I7ro'ra~aat ~e S~cata who, think you, will deny (= no one will deny) that he unEderstands what is just? SOME N]EGATIVE EXPRESSIONS. 848. For ovTEe,/ YTe, ovbe, tj6JE, see 858-9. a. ovoiz5,,/xv, and orTL, utTr, are often used (like Lat. nihil) as emphatic negatives in the sense oT not at all (552). b. obVKETI, xyider't, no longer, must not be confounded with o7rw, _4ir-w, not yet: obirrt oT0o16w, ofirw 7reroirca. C. obx'8rT, ju oiTL (probably for o0 XE'ye o Tt, /P Ae;YE 8TL, (I) do not say that, it is not enough to say that, and hence) not only, usually followed by &xa Kiafc but also, or a&x' ovE but neither: odX O'TL 6 KpLr-cw i, e~vXq.a gas, &Axt& teal ol pixho avboi newt only was Crito quiet, but also his friends. OvX i7rwos, Aft orwos, are used,.and may be explained, in the same way: /u/ ib7rws (sc. obic e'8 vaoe) opXeo-atar eo prvelrpo, &xx' oas' o3povioaat aivvao'e not only (were ye not able) to dance in measure, but ye swere not able even to stind erect. 14 306 INTENSIVE PARTICLES. L848 d. Jxovp o o, gIvAor UXI[, only not, hence all but, almost; and, in reference to time, iloov ob (tantumr non) almost: cKa-ayeA 67r' a'Spi ots oab iveay ob irposivvYE? you are ridiculed by men whom you all but worship, gao- obic aulrica (only so much as not immediately) almost imrnnediately. e. ob g71 axxdAc, oS Dv'EaToi &xaci, nevertheless, notwithstanding. They are to be explained by supplying before &XXd some idea drawn from the preceding context: o'hr7ros sLIcpoD (575 a) ECEWvoY erEpaX'Aliev *. ob!jvn (sc. ieETpaXAaXlaeJ) aAXa i47reTeuvev 6 Kvpos the horse almost threw him over its head; (yet it did not throw him, but) nevertheless Cyruls kept his seat. PARTICLES. 849. PRAxPOSITIVE AND POSTPOSITIVE. A particle is said to be praepositive, when it is always put first in its own sentence; postpositive, when it is always put after one or more words of the sentence. I. INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES. See 824-31. II. NEGATIVE PARTICLES. See 832-48. 850. III. INTENSIVE PARTICLES. These add emphasis to particular words, or give additional force to the whole sentence. 1. y; (postpos. and enclitic) even, at least, Lat. quidem, adds emphasis to the preceding word: Hm. e&rep ycdp o- "Ec-rEp 7e icacvy ica}l vdciLacl&a 4Po-e, jae' o' 7rera'ovJaL TpTes for though even Hector (himself) shall call thee base and unwarlike, still the Trojans will not believe it, ical 7roAXous'sy &eoraar Xe7Ayov ToiGs eAaooEX0VTas and they said there would be many ever who would wish it, fim. aAxa -6, eti 8anaaf 7ye, rep'Xeao 7raad6s but do thou, if only thou art able, protect thy son, wrXIrei 7ye ovX vrepf3aXoze' &vr T'obs 7roXetdous in numbers at least we-should not surpass the enemy, -b'yp ni' y7e izWY EOtKaCs 3bamxbs erlac for now at least thou seemest to be our king. -t is added with especial frequency to pronouns: rycye Ifor my part, Lat. equidem, o'ye in HIm. even he, O'sye Lat. qui quidem, Eim. 0Sbs -rotavsLd ye peao whoever should do such things (even such). a. re', when it belongs to a word which has the article, is usually put after the article: 4 -ye avY&pw7r'svr aoqbra humans wisdom at least. So too after a preposition, if the word depends on one: oabels icovUeE D ye,at e payepw no one heard, in public at least. 2. youv (postpositive) at least, Lat. certe, contracted from ye ov (sometimes written separately), and hence stronger than ye. It is used especially after a general statement, to mark some particular case, or limited extent, in which that statement is certainly true: ob srhaao —q''jv cptixat 7rapeiXovTo'eXAo,5aoti yovev 7o avr.n o'veyoe1-rja they ojered no pretended friendship; at least, they willingly joined him in giving aid. 3. vr;p (postpos. and enclitic) very, just, even, shortened from the adverb 7re'pi very mnuch. In Attic, it is used to strengthen relatives:'0srep just who, the one who, isrep even as; also in eflrep (ECC7rep, vjrYep) even if, Kcatrep though. In Hm., its use is very extensive: eyb a' xevewi-. qEps Prep bsut I am mnuch more to be pitied, 7rp6*d& Prep for the very first time, 852] INTENSIVE PARTICLES. 307 Td'TE vToyefOvL arsEO s7rep which even the gods detest; and especially with parts. ciples, in the sense of Kalcrep (795 f): aXv,uerool rep thouseh grieved, KpaTrep4s rep eiz' (or Kparepds 7rep without &v) though he is mighty. 851. 4. 68 (postpositive) now, indeed, in, particsZular marks the idea of a word or sentence, as being immediately present and obvious to the mind. It is commonly put after-thle emphatic word, and admits a great variety of rendering: wroXXol /8 (obviously many) a great many,,/Jos &h all alone, g8Xa 5h it is quite plain, Vzyela Kal KdAAos Sra 7rxovTos ~ health, ana beauty, and particularly wealth. It adds urgency to IMPERATIVE expressions: yvoets'e 8 consider, I pray you, &ye h come now, iA 8i iIelCElv, Tn iAr8'I e'7raitpcIeAea let us by no means be elated with that hope. It strengthens the SUPERLATIVE: lUE"yo'rTos 8M the very greatest; and gives definiteness to DEMONSTRATIVES and RELATIVES: b's & the (particular) one who, 57roos 64 of whichever (particular) kind, obSr7s 6 (in this particular way) just so. So with other pronouns and particles: Tri a' what now? what precisely? grog UX just where?? TI's some certain person, s5.de'epov 6 fp'yov osur own work (belonging to us only), dl 83 if indeed, if really. For tcal 3/ Katf, see 857. a. It is often used with something which is now present to the mind, as being MENTIONED, or at least SUGGESTEDr BEFOREO: obrX OUiiTwS XE; fXEL a is it not so? it is indeed (as you say), rs,iv ppovp.? iolyev, Kai ob ae? 5 eavwTbv eK TabvTrs Aveiv we are as if (set) on gcard, and indeed (the obvious conclusion) one must not release himself from this. Especially so with demonstratives and relatives: ei cIv 8 from which'things now (already mentioned), ov'TW 8h thus then (as previously described): and hence often in the apodosis (732), as oTe... sor-e 6 when... then, I say; or with resumptive force, taking up a subject again after a digression. Hence, too, b. It sometimes approaches the meaning of l3r/, Lat. jam: Kal BroXxa 6t AXXa AXas e7,re and when now (already) he had spoken many things, he said, vvv 6h even now, HIm. a b]i rvO, 7rcTa TeAhETra all these things are now already receiving fulflmnent. c. The Epic 1 7ycap, and poetic 83 TJIde, may stand at the beginning of a sentence. 852. 5. 87rrov (or 81 nrov indeed, I suppose) _probably, methinks, often used, with slight irony, in cases which admit no doubt: 7pE'I(aII N' avX TrlV; jLaYdaO'i 84s7rov with what is the spirit nourished? with learning, doubtless.-A stronger form is'PrrouVer. 6. /~/ra (a stronger 3//) surely, in truth, nearly confined to the Attic: ob Ar'a surely not, VrZS U3T'a hosw in truth? oIcTrEpe 6i Ta do really pity. 7. 8jrev truly,forsooth, mostly in reference to a seeming or pretended truth. 8. aai (an Attic form of 34), used only in questions, and chiefly in i - ati; 7rc&s Wal; tehat now? how now I with surprise or passion. 9. Epic,s7v (postpos. and enclit.) znethinks, Lat. opinor, has nearly the same meaning as a87rov, which last occurs but once in Hm. 10. 4 (praepositive) ereally, truly, (not to be confounded with { interroy-., 828 b, and { or, than, 860) adds force to an assertion. ~)v7~ (lim. ~ /&ev) is used especially in declarations undei 308 CONJUNCTIONS. [852 oath: eoo-av'pKlcovs i xjtv UT bvwlclKca K,eLv they swore oaths that in very truth they would not (remember wrongs) bear resentment. 11. rol (postpos. and enclit.) surely, doubtless, may often be rendered you know, you must know, be assured, and the like: T0roL surely not.-For /E'Vrol, see 864, 6: for -orUwv, Toiyctap,'rosyapoih, T-or ydprot0, see 867. 12.'Tot (q + tol) verily, only Epic,. naive expression of assurance: -TOL 8?y' &S ELSr&v KaCT' &p' e'Ero (in sooth) when he had spoken thus, he sat down. For the disjunctive ToL... l either... or see 860 a. 13. /u'v (postpositive) in truth, Lat. vero, Ion. /e4', Dor. F/ed; Hm. has Ae&v,,uel, and AnLr: le ya&p eEplea, tal Au'r T'E-e Xeowvxov eaoTat for thus will I speak out, and in truth it will be fulfilled. Even the Attic uses,ts, for uv, in uehv oUv, tue' 63. The word has also an adversative use, yet, however; and this is always the meaning of E-rTot (864, 6). 14. vat yes, surely,-:-o and,a' surely, used in oaths and followed by the accusative (545). Conjultions.s. 853. The conjunctions are particles used to connect one sentence with another.. They are divided into classes, according to their meaning: though in some instances the same conjunction has various meanings which bring it into different classes. a. The first four classes of conjunctions (copulative, disjiunctive, adrersative, and inferential) connect co-ordinate sentences (724): so too the causal ydp. The other classes stand with subordinate sentences, and connect them with the principal sentences on which they depend. b. A sentence introduced by a relative (or indefinite relative) is always subordinate; and all indeclinable relatives are reckoned among the conjunctions. The inferential s6ore, being a relative, belongs to a subordinate sentence. The adversative J'lov is generally attached to a principal sentence, to mark its connection with the subordinate. 854. In continued discourse, every sentence has, in general, a conjunction, or some other expression, which marks it as connected with what goes before. Occasionally, however, a sentence appears without any such connective. This form of construction is called ASYNDETON (dcovvberov not bound together): it is most common in explanatory sentences (which only bring out what is signified in the preceding sentence). Sometimes it is preferred as a livelier and more striking mode of expression. 855. IV. COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. The principal copulatives are Kat, re, and. T; is postpositive and enclitic: it corresponds in general to Lat. que, as 39. Ahhos 59. 236; w. art..524. fippo 255. 637; w. art. iotrirs 186 D. 528 a. 538 e; appos. 538 538 a. a&tcjovros w. gen. 587 d; e; w. gen. 584 g; &hAos av 5th class 329 b. 436-7. w. dat. 602. AAXo 500 b; ye"l?-Tos av- priv. 483. [D. &aKovdSoyat 423, 1. (ydvos) Trcjv AXXwv 586 -av from -d'wv gen. pl. 128 aKo4cW 423,1.311.321. 379. c; d Trs;AAoT 754 a; &v for avcd 73 D. 386 a. 421, 22; w. gen.;AXkos { 860 b; &XAo T- y, (a) 873; w. cond. sent. 544 b. 576; in comp. (~j) 508 b. 829 a; Iri AAo 744ff; w. pot. opt. 722. 584 c; w. part. 799; am 5, oev AXXA' j, 508 b. 748; w. hyp. ind. 746 b; called 540; pres. 698. XAAoaoe 204. w. fut. ind. 710b; w. &KpaTros compar. 221 d. &Avhco 73D. [-re Kac 857. subj. for fut. 720e; w. aipodoLam 335 a; w. gen. lhXAAC, /V, iX. 509 a; ixA. final &s, rwsco, 741; w. 576. [530 b.. &;adXev 203 D. subj. in rel. sent. 757 if; a&cp4roXLs 482; wt. art. aXs 74 d. 172 a. w. inf. 783; w. part. 803, tKcpos w. art. 536. aAXro, Xro, 408 D, 33. vie (a) for ide 744ff. 872. a&lTis (V) 153 m. aAvT7-da(o (a&aXdKVrt1Ta1) aiv for & dy 68 b. [635-6. &iKew, 32 D e. 483 b; gen. 321 D. avd 102 D b. 112; w. case abs. 791 b. Wa&docoo (-dawo, -day) 447, 9. lva 102 D b. 112. 615 a. ah (edcw, EdxA,-q) 432 D, 22. apatdwo 436 D, 14. 9va voc. of gva5 158 D c. axdoyat 321 D. 367 D. 413. &XAcdrr7 164. &yaBvacKlto/uaL 445. 692. aA-ahAe (&Xec) 384 D. aXeAs 199. avaya ryvioow 445 D, 4. &Xaard', 328 D. a'/a 70 c. 227; w. dat. 602 a'vayta7os pers. constr. 777. aXmetvs compar. 223, 8.. a; w. part. 795 c. &eayse W. inf. 767..ASXvYw, -alvw, -iro0w, 436 &,aa (9txata) 65 D. &Evakroo, &,aXdw, 447, 2. D, 12. &txayraTs 139 c. [801. &yvauylwho'la O w. two obj. &AAeeVco 426 D, 7. a&apTrdvw 436, 2; w. part. 553-4. 334 GREEK INDEX. iva5 23 D. 158 D c. a; to EOV 370 D d. &pdecow 223, 1. [595 b:atdlos w. gen. 584 e. cir- for daro- 73 D. apeo'O 444, 10; w. dat avao'wo 23 D. darayopevo 450, 8 a; w. &p4-y 25; w. dat. 544 b. a8avw 437, 1. 23 D. 312. part. 798. a&p7,uevos 318 D. avSpd'roov, 199 D. dcraYvupat 440 D, 6. "Apr7s 88 D. 202, 1. vev w. gen. 626. 781. &7rats 218; w. gen. 584b. -aptoy neut. 465 a. AYeuae(y) 79 D. d7rav'rdo 379; w. dat. 602. &pITTrepdc wt. art. 530 b. cavEXopat 314; w. part. 800. arapero'KW w. dat. 595 b. a&pLtreVs 189 D. av&'o~re 321 D. caras w. art. 537. aplao-os (ayaeads) 223, 1. a&,p 173. 53; om'd 509 b; dnrdorwp 217 c. &pidW 419, 10. vapes lcKaao'-a 500 a; dcravpdw 408 D, 19. a&pxd'r-w, A&p/dUw, 430, 1. &hp 68 C. caraplocw 447 D, 14. apY (&pvYJs, &pES,) 202, 2. &i'rppwTros 118; om'd 504 c. d7e&lAiCe 371 D e. a&p,'dotat 413. 505 c. 506. 509 b; d/. &irelpos w. gen. 584 c. dpYvtuag 442, 2. pe'otKcos 500 a. eXdreX OI.oaL 436, 6. &pdw 419, 16. 370 D c. aWL77Lt 403 D; w. gen. 580. dlr'z-Te'w w. dat. 595 b. a&pa7rdc 431, 1. aof.w,, -Yuyvt, 424, 16. 312. &rXhJos 208. 207 a. 258 b. apnra5 218. 322. 387 b. adrd 623; compar. 229. &po',?v, JAPPrv, 217 b. aopolors w. dat. 603. UdroalYvxyat 440 D, 6. "ApTEL-S 158 d. a&op aod 314. dvaroatgwt 444, 7; w. gen. a&po, &p0qw, 419, 18.,wra 622. 578 a; mid. 689 a. apXa7os 455 a. av.rdw 370 D a. adroaapdo'KW 444, 2; w. a&px; (Tv) apXhv 552. -YTe for e'a're 861. ace. 544 a. 6pXw 424, 2; w. gen. 544 aure'xo.uat w. gen. 574 b. da'rep'a 345 D. b. 581 a; aor. 708;&vr'T'W 622. a'roav-,CKw 444, 4. [d. &pXocar mid. 691; w. _aI- 102 D b; w. case 622; &7roXava, 379; w. gen. 574 gen. 574b; w. part. after compar. 661.'Aro'AAcov 175 c. 172 b. 798; T'' gptwuoaL 739; avrTdvetEpa 218 D. a&rovoEolaL 413. a&px4e1'os 788. aPTLIKPd, &VTIKPVs, 80 D. &a7ropexo TI 547 c. apwoys 25. 455 c. 492 h. 622. a&roo'-epE'w w. two acc. 553; as stems in, 152 c. 181 if. advT7roiLoyat w. gen.577 c.n. en. 580 a. -as nom. from st. in ar 168. aPUTo4s w. superl. 664 b. a&rodpas 408 D, 19. -as nouns of number 258 d. cva, (d,-rw, &,vuw) 419, &a'vopavw w. part. 797. -as ace. pl. 154. 195 i. 17. 344 D; dpto'as 788. &a'roped'yw w. gen. 577 b. aia 408 D, 18. 420 D, 10. vo adv. 229. 635; w. ax'rdXp 404,3. 449 D, 7. gen. 589. ~a7rgrrptek~ 73 D. t&roevos 221 d. 408 D, 44. aoa verb 419 D, 17. &7rpe7rrs w. dat. 595 c. aortfs coil. 514; ir' (rap') &wya 409 D, 11. 318 D. a7rrow 427, 1; mid. 691; &oarlia 530b. 351 D. w. gen. 544 b. 574 b; &oaa 244 c; aowa 246 D. dac6,yEow 146. A&rrov, 806 b. aoPo-o, 229 D. 224 D. avrtvupos 27. [767 a. ar7rcTpw 229. aO'TpP 173. 6~tos w. gel. 584 e; w. inf. ap stems in, 152 b; nom.l &'r'pdrorw subj. om. 504 c. ao, ew, interbch. 26. 136 D in, from st. in a', 167. la-Tv 23 D. 185-6; wt. art. b. 147. 370 D d. ap (aYpw) 432, 2; (&apap[o- 530 b. ao to w 32. 136 D b; to ow icw) 447 D, 15. a&oIveTov 854. 370 D a; to a 32 D h./ p for dpa 73 D. 865. a' stems in, 152 a. 165 ff. 134 D. 370ID g; to eo &pa 865. 112. -aTrat, -a'o, 355 D e. 392. 370 D a,d. apa 828 ff. 112. aTdp 864, 4. -.o for -ov gen. 136 D b. &pauts 23 D. araplrds 57 D. 139 c ao' to ep 34. apdop/at 404 D, 9. &d1e 876, 5; w. part. 795 d. cdoLt7 32 D e. apapoKWla 447 D, 15. 321 D.'rep w. gen. 626. &op 153 D. 338 D. 384 D. 408 D, 34. "rTepos 68 c.:ov to w 34; to owk 370 D'Apyeiot 1 D.'At-gis 40 b. 83 b. GREEK INDEX. 335 IiTxLo~W 27. -dwv gen. pl. 128. Oaacor-Ew 436, 4. -a'o for -yvo 3 pl., see -aTat. aopTro 432 D, 2. B3Ae7o 408 D, 20. arparo's 57 D.,EA.Ireo 424, 3; w. acc. 547. aTped/a(s) 80 D. B, 19 ff; bef. T-mute 44,; 3,hxXwv 153 m. &''a 244 c; &arTa 246 b. bef. /u 46; bef. o 47. SAIT-co 430, 2. av diphth. 11 ff. B for pC 53 D; in l(f3)p 53; Xckr'co, 445, 2. 53 D. ac 864, 3. to p in pf. 341. 387 b. fodow 32 D e. 379. avals 65 D. 392 a. &ov-c&o w. dat. 595 b. abudvw, avciw, 436, 3. 3aS1Cw 379. foXe (/3aAxw) 432 D, 4. avp (E7ravptoico/.) 447, 5. 5$aSs 212 D. 222 D. b34xeo'at 422 D, 3. aupa (47rauvpdw) 408 D, 19. $Balw 435, 1. 349 D. 408, 1. Bopfas 136 d. avptoov;' aiip. 509 b. 409, 2. 416, 2; perf. 712. 8g4oco 422, 2. avrTdp 864, 4. BdKXOs 40 b. 83 b. fr pus 153 i. 185. [690 a. avrcdpicns 179. /3dXXco 432, 4. 355 D e. 386 I3ovXedco w. acc. 547 i mid. avTe 864, 3. b. 394. 408 D, 20; w., ouvX. 139 d. av~&i 13 a. dat. 607; in comp. 685.| oSXAolat 422, 3. 308 a. avTrls 65 D. $Bd7r'w 427, 2. 363 a. 413; col OovhXoav'Ts 234. 668-9. 671. 3cpaLo'Tos (,3pacvs) 222 D. UcEvP 601 a;,jovXotIn/v 673-6. 680; w. dat. of gap's 90. &zi, e6ovX o'JY i', 752. accomp. 604; avb's 6 doavo'os 139 a. ov6s 189. Wv&p and o &vip av6's $aroiXEia 130 c. 455 a. 460c. Ppacds compar. 222 D. 5S8 b; ol abrol "85Kctpc- fcao'XeLa 130 c. 455 a.458 a. pdco'ow 430, 3. Trs 532 a; avr TroT'ro 3aoi.XELtos 468. fpaX 424 D, 4. 502b; avTa& avO-a 552 (aot0XEV.s 189; compar. Ipaxes compar. 222 D. a; —6 avr4s 538 b; w. 224 D; wt. art. 530 a. peras 182D. dat. 603; Tra7o'b'oT0o 13aOalXEvC w. gen. 581 a; BpxEw 424,4. 502 b. [590 a. aor. 708. 3paSew 424, 5. avT'ov gen. 538 a; adv. faiotXMJs 455 b. $ipo (fjS,BpcKw) 445, 3. av'ro- =:avrov 235. acrporaoa 458 a.,SpOros 53 D. arpatpEw w. obj. 553. 580 a. Sda-cw 444 D, 11. BpoX 424 D, 4. c4pap compar. 224 D. GaorTdlco 431, 2. B3pvXcaoau 448 D, 20. apdo-o-'c 430 D, 8. E,3Bxcat 86 D. 3vvEow 438, 1. LevoPs 201 D b. I3pc56-ow 445 D, 3. i/3s 189 D. a(peclwo w. gen. 580. [e. [e. iouaL, 3EocUal, 378 D. jclojoaL 32 D e. &ppiLl 403, 1; w. gen. 574 fXeIEpos, -'ac'os, 223 D, 1. 6wTLC'reLpa 218 D. aoptIcreoua 392 D.,eX'rTwv, -tLCros, 223, 1. adPv7 137; ~&pvis 137. t3i to C429. r, 16. 18. 19ff; bef. 7-mute apovo-w 431 D, 9. Bia dat. 608. 610a; w. gen. 44; bef. a 47; to X in'AXato7 1 D. 565; irpbs Siaav 654; 89- pf. 341. 387 b. 392 a. dxap~s compar. 221 D. njpi 206 D a. ya (ytyyouac) 409, 3. a&Xewr dXEaWV, 442 D, 16. Siopl.uac pass. 694c. -yaZa 132 D. &tXro/Aac 422, 1. 413; w. 38Bdclw 375. [435 D, 1. ycdXa 153 r. 166. dat. 611 a; w. part. 800. 1B3tBas 403 D, 10; BtjB6v ya/wv, 439 D, 5.'AXlA(X))es 40 D. [392 D. f1/36xos 139 e. [409 D, 16. yaXocos 146 D. &iXvxaci 442 D, 16. 367 D b. 8i3pcr1occK 445, 3. 408 D, 24. yactxE4o 447, 2. 4Xpi(s) 70 b. 80 D. 877, 8; 0B4De 423, 2. 378 D. 408, 13. ycvvavcca 439 D, 5. w. gen. 626. [370Dd. dvca-,Bc-rloocopia 445, 1. 7ydp 870; co-ord. 853 a; aw, ew, interch. 26. 128 D. 3BA redupl. 319 c. after art. 534 a; after aw to co 32; to ow 370 D a; $Xa (,claXXw) 432, 4. prep. 616; after rel. to a 32 D h. 128 D. 38Xdle'rac 427 D, 3. sent. 823; o 7cyp 525 y dwo denom. verbs 472 b; xdclr'cw 427, 3. 397 b; w. e yp 721 a. contract 370; fuit. 375. cogn. ace. 555 a. 7yaaTp 153 n. 173. dw. 408 D, 18. BXaOarv'w 436, 4. 319 c. 77 40 a: stems in, 328 b. 336 GREEK INDEX.?4 850, 1. 70 a. 105 d; af- 577 b; w. two ace. 555; M1OSr wt. art. 530 b. ter art. 534a; after mid. 691. 6etATs 471. prep. 616. 7ypi/Ps, yp7ivs, 11 b. 189 D. Me7,va 245. yeyw'va, -Ew, -fecow, 424 D,?v/4vsm5 218. ELvd's 47 1. 30. 351 D. yvxtvo's w. gen. 584 f. etovs (oe'os) 178 D.,yeyc&s 409, 3. -yvv 202, 4. 158 d; o e. eL7rve'c 351 D.'yetvo/xat 449 D, 1. 416, 8. 509 b; wt. art. 530 c. e(fpco 424, 7. yreaoyero'w 472j. yv4os 139 a. teic (ebKv/uu) 442 D, 3. syedco 419, 2. 344 D. 370D?ycw (yEyowva) 424 D, 30. 6ucaT'rs 475 b. 481. a. 379; aor. 709. 8Ecds 258 d. yEXAoOdwa 419, 2. A, 19 if; bef. -arat, -aro, aecXtAhoL 253 D. y'.os 169 D. 392 D; in Yv()p 53; too' lFbeo/xat 65 D. y4Eco w. gen. 575. 45-6; dropped 47. 49. &E'Aeap 165. y7E (Yl-yvojat) 449, 1.'5. 386 a. EXAq6s, -Is, 156 a. ~yei/os dat. 608. [449 D, 1. 8 stems in, 152f. 169 iff. 8dxas 201 D b. oYE'zio 408 D, 35; tyerTo oa (8a[w) 434 D, 3; (8aio- 8' co 443 D, 1. yepalts compar. 221 b. puat) 434 D, 4; (Edci-q) V&',3po, 199. 202 D, 23.,yppas 182 D. 447 D, 10. 395 D. &ESt4s 221 D; &Ehtd, &e6l&t, ye6w w. two obj. 554;?yE6- 8ahp 172 D. wt. art. 530 b. o/lat w. gen. 576. Wa& 852, 8; 8at' 201 D b. &EtLTepds 221 D. y1 132; om. 509 b; wt. 6atcwo 328 D. &Eo/uat w. gen. 575. art. 530 b. ~ 8afyvv/ 440 D, 7. 401 D, 1. V'os 178 D. Ty7alw 448, 3. 8acoptat 434 D, 4. 355 D e. e'ras 182 D.?yjpas 182-3. [2. aCpwo 424,'. 1p77 125 d. yl7pdaoow, -dcw, 444, 1. 408, Wafs 153 r. - epico/xat 424 D, 31. 383 D. -y to aao 60. 328a; to C 8a[o 434 D, 3. 413;w. cogn. ace. 547 d. 61. 328 b. acgvro 435, 7. epco 424, 7. 398 D.?y(?y)YoLtat 449, 1. 31. 332. adcpv, 8dCpvoov, 199. eoEds 199 D. 200. 355 D e. 409, 3; incomp. &aajdccw 443 D, 1. 6EoirorwJs 135 a. 197 D. pred. 490; impers. 494; *d.tap 170. Evoutatc 422 D, 4. om. 508 b; w. pred. gen. UIpW,vl/t, -vdco, 443 D, 1;. 3Epo w. gen. 589. 572; w. dat. poss. 598. 343 D. 347 D. 359 D. et,.Craros 224 D. [585.?vc'cYrx w 445, 4. 319 c. Aavao[ 1 D. 8ET'EpoS 253. 257; w. gen. 408, 14; w. gen. 582; &ad'oeECw mid. 689 b. &EXhjpEpos 72. w. part. 799. Sap (84pw) 424, 7. &6XO/ta, 65 D. 318 D. 408 yA redupl. 319 c. bapdw 436, 4. D, 36. 415; mid. 692.?Aavtcc7'nrs 171 D. 481. SarEoxat 434 D, 4, 381 D. VEWo to bind 420, 1. 371 b. yAvicvs 212. 220. 222 D. -6& local 203; enclit. 105 403, 3. yAhwXLs 153 m. d. 110. 239. 6ow to want 422, 4. 370 D?y redupl. 319 c. E 862. 70 a; after art. e. 371 b. 413; w. gen. Ycvados 139 b. 534 a; after prep. 616; 575 a. —EZ w. gen. 494.?yvdLr'rw 427, 4. -re.. 3 855 b; ical.. V 575 a; w. ace. 575 a; w. 7yo (7tyvc6oWo) 445, 4. 856 b. two cases 544 c; w. inf.?6dtx1 707; om. 509b; Varo 381 D. 764b; e~t 703; MPv gen. 568; dat. 608. aEL (g86Eira) 409, 5. 87 D; 772;'ov, ace. abs. 792;?yodw 448 D, 21. pf. 712; w. /~ 743. As (uvoTv) 8E'eovres 256. 7yo, stems in, 152g. &E7, see /eoC. /I 851; after art. 534a; ydvv 202, 3. 6El3Ey`atL 319 D. w. superl. 665 a; ZXE e Tyog 850, 2. aet3ta, aE&iw, 409 D, 5. 684 a; *tal b3 iat[ 857. 7yov,?ouwar, 202 ID, 3. ie u8ioouati 442 D, 3.'aevy 852, 7. ypaclcx 139 d. 6eLKavldouat 442 D, 3. ri'wco 370 D e. ypaps 189. ehKvUtxU 442, 3. 300. 3819 D. 8nc (dtcicsw) 435, 7..yedopw 424, 6. 338; w. gen. 400-01; w. part. 797. Aovroi'tL 868 a. GREEK INDEX. 337 XjAho w. part.'797; 8A.a &Le (5[fwat) 404 D b. aproos 139 c. a4 851; *G Xo, o-r 868 a. &tdXwo w. 580. 6pvudsr 200 D. BnXdA, 281. 289. 335; w. fG/xatc 404D c. 400 D m. aVGvauat 404,5. 308 a. 353 part. 797. Vtclirotot 253 D. D e. 401 k. 413; w. su. Anrv4np 173. atLKd'w mid. 689 b. perl. 664 b. Y7zfLovp'yJs 473 a. agKalos pers. constr. 777. av6Iauts dat. 609. 8/gos 559 d. 61zc orm. 509 b; *ahr/ w. bvds 258 d. 8Vpoo'f, 608. gen. 552. Vyc' 423, 3. 6ir 87 D. 5tL4s 258 D. N0o 253. 255. 629. 5Trore 251. Atoy6vra 201 a. avoKaiaect 253 D. 87r'ov, aBr'ovrerv, 852, 5.?1os, 87a, 207 D. avs- 484. 316. v77pido[lai 448 D, 22. - 8t'rt 869, 3. 868, 2. avsa7wv, 28 D. -6/;s patronym. 466. atzrn'Ados 258 b. avsapeo-rEW 316. 8r1'a 852, 6. &t'.,o-taos 258 D. Udsepws 96; w. gen. 584 0 52oo 378 D. 1trA.dos 258 b. &vs~,ev~s w. dat. 595 c. 6t to C 61. 328 b. 8i7rovs 217 c. A6s7rapts 484. 6t, 8et, rot, 409, 5. 308 D. &to'-os 258 b. 6vs'vXE'Cw 316. 319 D. 400 h. aik[o7y7o t 11. [626 r. Vaw 423, 83. 304. 349 D. 401 At (Zetvs, AtLs) 202, 6. 3tXa 258 c. 629; w. gen. *D 1. 408, 16. 416. 420, 7. 8at 102 D b; w. case 629- 1iXn 258 c. o8w, -Cop, -o7i,% 255 D. 30; w. inf. 780-81. aLX~d6 258 D. M6 for a&/a 201 D b. a7a 207 D. aJciw 371 c; w. gen. 576. M8Aog for baoxos 24 D d. ataBafvwo w. ace. 544 d. 8awocdcjw 411 D. wopet' 552. aitdw w. part. 798. LC6ICWT w. cogn. acc. 547 b; Mopov w. dat. 595 d. ia7cyCvroyoat w. dat. 602. w. two acc. 555; w. 3[at'ra 125 d. gen. 570. 577 b. E, vow. 7 if; interch. w. a, tardwra 314. o/Aa (64'uvl) 443 D, 1. o, see a; w. I, 27. 334 c.,atKovEW 314. a8e (6tdew) 443 D, 1. e for a 349 D; for 7 34'7 ~ataxEyooai 319 e. 413. 424, 8a6s 160 c. ID; for digamma 23 a. 15a; w. dat. 602. o0 (8otwgt) 403,4. e to a 334a. 383. 386 c. 8taAe-hre w. part. 798; at- aot (86otuKa) 409, 5. 389. 397. aXt.rw,' 788. got6, aotoI, 255 D. e to 7 28. 156. 189 D. 309. &XdEK'ros 3 e. 139 e. aotico 448, 4; w. inf. 763; 335-6. 343. 400 m, n. atdeqpepos 139 d. pers. constr. 777; (&s) e to eL 24 D c. 31. 312. 370 BtavodoAat 413. 4ClO aOKEV' 772; ~aV,'ra D b. 337. 343 D. 400 D 3~ao-codrE, w. gen. 570. (A., ) TraT'ra 793. i. 401 n. a8aTxeAey w. part. 798. aoKiOs 139 e. e to o 177. 334 a. 387 a. 61aapEpw prep. 630; intrans. b/AovPye 203 D. 454 b. 455 c; to co 334 d. 685; w. gen. 581; mid. ao, stems in, 152 g. e contr.- by syniz. 37 D; w. dat. 602. a8pv 202, 5; erl ao'pv 530 b. inserted 376; dropped taqaeifpo 432 D, 20. aovxAevw, oTovXw, 472 i. 173. 370 D b, e. 384. rtdapopos w. gen. 584 g; w. bov.ev w. acc. 547 a; w. e added to stem 331. 422. f 860 b. dat. 595 b. 437. 448. lyc' ata 23 D. ov7rEow 448 D, 12. e augm. 307 if; redupl. tad4Ko 447, 10; w. two aovp, aovpar, 202 D, 5. 319. 322; w. augm. or ace. 553; mid. 689 b. apa (tLpdawoo) 444, 2. red. 312. 322. 691 a. 6paa (&apvdcyw) 436 D, 4. e conn. vow. 349 if. 355 D 15giLrL 403, 3. 6pat (8p1Kolzat) 424 D, 1. e. 410 D. 411 D. t1Gpdaoo 444, 2. 408, 3. 6pa/x (-pEXw) 450, 5. e pass. sign 343. 395. li6wgt 403, 4. 298. 302. apao-aEw 472j. e fut. tense-sign 345. 373. 347 D. 400-02; w. gen. 6par's 398'D. -e dual 154. [440,1. 574e; in comp. 685; 8pcw 421, 1. e (i'/,t) 403, 1; (EV/vvus) pres. 702. [pdtzos dat. 608.' pror. 230. 3 38 GREEK INDEX. Ea to 37 32. cf. 36. EL 11 ff; for e 24D c; from a; —4v circumst. 788; -ea for -eta 212 D; for -vy e, see e; from t 30; in- case abs. 791 b. 792 a; 212D; fr. stems in es terch. w. oL 25. 334b. om. 795 e;'r yzTL 608. 178; fr. st. in ev 190 e, EL redupl. 319 e; e. in E/lt 405, 1. 359 D. 364 D; f; in plup. 351 D. plup. 351. 400 D h; om. 508 b; as ea.to. 34. 35 b; to Et 35 -eL 3 sing. act. 352a; 2 fut. 699a. b. 363 a. sing. nmid. 35 b. 363 a. ely for CY 627. edv 872; in condit. sent. El 872. 103 c; in cond. ELVae'Es 100 D. 744ff; interrog. 830. sent. 744ff; indir. sent. elsdicrs 253 D; -XtAoL ib. Edl/rep 850, 3; da'VTE 861. 733; interrog.'830; in ElaatcrtoL 253 D. eap 23 D. 160 d; wt. art. wish (el, e'jel El'ycp) eY'varTOS 253 D. 530 b. [190 f. 721.753; el3 u L 753 a. E'(sEKa, -Kce,, 24 D c. C26. -Eas to -ErL 36 b; from -,as 754 b; El E' 754b; cieli for 4' 627. egaL 406 D, 1. pV, Eli j BLCd 7 54 a; El e'ivov 440 D, 1. Ea7TaL 355 D e. (Csv) cKaf 874, 1; cKal el ET 233 D. Eav'To 235; 670. 672. 674. (Cd',) 874, 2. -etoy neut. 463 b. 676; w.?Eai 572 c; w. el (edl) 105 c. eJos for Cows 248 D, EPcA-' r-os 559 a. 660 a. -eza fem. 130. 212. 218 D. eorLep 850, 3. 872. ecdrl 427 D, 1. 219 D. 458 a. 460 c. e7rov, 450, 8. 23 D. 366 b Edw 312. 335 D. 370 D a; Elapvwds 28 D. [406 D, 1. &cs (Eiros) elbrWis, 772. O6Vc 4 842. elaTatra -aTo, 355 D e; EYTaTo e'pyvpuL 442, 4. dcwv X227 D. [253 D. ET3oV 450, 4. EtpTyw 442, 4 a. 411 D; w. e3,oucds 258 d; ie'L8a'os e]Tos 481 a; ace. 549 b. gen. 580. Ceys compar. 229; w. Eilcs 409, 6.. eYpo/a 424 D, 9. gen. 589. -eLn for -eLi 125 D, 2. etpv 405 D b. 420 D, 12. Cy}onv7e'a 448ID, 12. e'ie 110a. 721. 753. epw 312ID. 450ID, 8. Eyuepwo 432, 5. 321. 367 D a. sEIcdAw 310. -ecs 2 sing. act. 58 a. 352 a. 384 D. 409 D, 12. 417. Elcdico 411 D. -ets, -eoCoa, -ev, adj. 214..'yica'a 201 D a. EifCas 258 d. 470. 50 a. g"ypw, -ouat, 432, 5. efKa't 253 D. Eds 103 b; w. case 620. E-XeAhvs 188. [850, 1. eteEAos 23 D. 618 a; w. num. 493 f; EZc6 230. 69. 485 a; "yco^7e edico'o 253. 23 D. 79 8. w. inf. 780. eyuaat 68 a. efccW 23 D. 411 D; w. dat. els 253. 255. 156 c-; e's e'y6() 79 D. 233 D. 595 b. avhp w. superl. 665 a. eC, ES-O, e'-eS (boiagw) 450, ecisBY 153 m. 194 c. es 105 D. 406 D, 1. 3. 406 D, 3. eicc6s 409,7; e;icbs S' 703. eo'ca 431 D, 6. 312. e'Voy, 23 D. [7 371 D c. eriAAovua 25 D. 28 D. Elbdjuv 405 D, 1. EC tO eL 32. 312. 371 b; to e.ov, (alpcw) 450, 1. elsdxxooW intrans. 685. -EE to -r 178. 186. 351. etstw, eiAeoW, ei'Aew, e'XYAo, ei'Kcw 447 D, 16. ee 23 D a. 233 D. 23 D. 432 D, 22. 312 D. 6eSICKe 877, 7. eeL to EL 34. 371 b. 328 D c. 345 D. ei&r" 23 D a. [eieKoo' 23 D a. 253 D. e[.a 23 D; [D. els7rpdrTTW W. two ace. 553.?eIoPT'Js 253 D. Efl/aL (e' vLt) 440 D, 1. 318 EYco. w. gen. 589. eep7 442, 4. 318 D. 411 I)D. E'lzapT'aL 432 D, 25. eT'a 70 c. 795 a. -EES to -is 190 d. ed"l 406, 1. 105 c. 364 D. EfE- 861. 831. 110. E''olaL 431, 6. 400 D h. 410 D; copula e'cacc 322.'334 d; pf.'112. e? to 7? 32; ep to p 34. 490 a, b; om. 508 a; w. e'lws 248 ID. [a. 103 b. 6os 227 D. pred. gen. 572; w. dat. ec 624. 47 a. 74 c. 80 c. 87 e/7s' for -s 243 D. poss. 598; w. part. 713. iads 229 D. EJehAo'vTs 218 a. 797; eOTzvL 01 (o'Trves, b'aWTCdcLs 259.;b'c.o 422, 9. O e, ov, etc.) 812;-rb i'caoq-os 259; coIl. 514b; eiaev 233 D.'Ysv eTaC,a KaT& rTOUTo el- Vw. art. 538 a; supplied e7r3[C 296. 312. 322. atL, 772; 4KciV evaL 775 from o5~eIs 881; Ka)' GREEK INDEX. 3391 CeKarov 493 f; icaao'Ts EfIw 419, 11. elTros w. gen. 589. tris 683 b. elu/eJvroV 235 D. eITpefiroguat w. gen. 576. bKCd7epoy 259; w. art. 538 a. EA iy foir Euol 233 D. E''vyXda'vw w. dat. 602. eKaE'pwr ESa W. gen. 589. E(1c)erv, EA(u)Eat,, 406 D, 1. evSps 15 a. [w. inf. 781. trcarovr'ds 258 d.,upvxvtca (vxuvw) 321 D. aE 624. 47 a. 80 c. 103 b; t,cfalo, w. ace. 544 d. E'exs 238. 675-7. [57 5. 4apros w. ace. 544 e. dKo&O w. -two acc. 553. ju7rbri7x-ut 403, 7; w. gen. EadpXow w. ace. 544 e. CKE1, eICEEYE,, 249. EjA-roiAo w. dat. 605. ~4ds 258 d. feKZEvos 240. 678-9; w. art. emrpoiraev w. gen. 589. e 4t'yX7X w. part. 797. 538 a; verb om. 508 b; -e(Y) 3 sing. 79 a. o'reaTrt impers. 494 a. 763; eKeteIV 608; eiepeosI 242. -cr 3 pL aor. pass. 355 D c. e 6d1 792 a. ceO-e 249. 4e 627. 52. 103 b; in comp. eSLKr4oAuat w. gen. 574c. iceXEtpia 65 d. 605; w. dat. time 613; E`w compar. 229; w. gen. CIVri7 23 D. adv. 615; w. inf. 782. 589; w. inf. 781.',cAX,-o-t dat. 613. Evatpw 432 D, 23. 315. -o to ov 32; to ev 32 D f.'EicXAlo7aiow 315. Evaz'rdoblat 413. 315. 176 D. 363 D. 370D b, e, ichaXadvoact 437, 5 a. vazrt'os 622; w. gen. 587 eo 23 D. 233 D. rcXrV.orw 397 a. f; w. dat. 595 c; w. EotL to ot 34. wt'ds w. gen. 589. 860 b; *'b evavT'lov 502 a'o? 233 D. EVupo's 23 D. b; e eavar'as 509 a. otLKa 409, 7. 23 D. 322; w. -cc~v 23 D. 158 f; w. gen. fapflgo 328 D. dat. 603; pf. 712; pers. abs. 791 b; s'&, ar'at el,.? twcot intrans. 685. const. 777; w. par. 797. 775 a. avsvo w. two ace. 553. eopTa-oCa 312 b. ex (eAxo) 432 D, 22. EVytC, Z'EVI (~zpEpw) 450, 6. -eos adj. 470. 208. 145 c. eX (aipEw, eaAov) 450, 1. AeitA, yvi 102. 615. [781. a'O's 238 D; see rs. xdo-o-cr 223, 4; wt.' 660. E'veca, -Krv, 626; w. inf. eov to ov 34; to ev 32 D f. E'Aacpw 435, 2. 311 D. 321.'iverw 450 D, 8. 370 D b, e. 375. 392 D; sen.se 684. Eyvpeae() 79 D. 224 D. 6raciv~Ew w. two acc. 555; AXdXeta 218 D. EeEPOLP ee'pepos, 224 D. w. gen. 577 a.'AdX(orTos 223, 4. evsvoae 321 D. [5. E'rcdv 877, 5. h'Adc 435, 2. [D. 4Eva 248. 250. 811 a. 879, E7ravd-roacis w. dat. 595 d. EAXEXes,'eyXieT-tros, 222 a'vdce 248. 7e'raov'5epos 224 D. Edx'yXco 284. 321. 391 b. e;traVa 66 D. [gen, 589. Ear-vupLrzcocual 447, 5. eAeva (epXolpaz) 450, 2. y'~av 248. 250. 879, 5; w. E'redr 877, 5. AevauSepos 468 a. - a'vAr'e 248. Oref 877, 5. 869, 2. 69; wv. eAaepops W. gwen. 584 f. Eveae,'er 66 D. [544 c. aorist 706; w. ebircs E'XeVaEp6o w. gen. 580. ivxEdottat 413; w. case T.dXx'Ta, 821.'[Xco'o 312. EL' for 6Y 627. Vreita, e'7reSdv, 877, 6. EAcw 419, 19. 312. eM 102. 615 a. 4ereara w. part. 795 a. EAAaB3e 40 D. VLOl, EVo're, 812. aerevivoSe 321 D.'EkXds 1. 6Y4ritri 427 D, 20. wraw'X w. part. 798. EhA'Xrro w. part. 798. e'v"i-rov 450 D, 8. EriKocos w. gen. 584c.'EXXvYes 1. 4 g. 500 a. Evi'caw 429 D, 3. fr4/v 877, 5.'AXv1rzlh 4 f. evveds 258 d. e7r 640-42; w. inf. 780.'EAXX',rlia-s 4 f. ~i, edXLXot 253 D. 782; in comp. 544 c, 9X;urMs 51 b. 74 d.'v(ev)e'r 450 D,.8. 605; adv. 615. e'7rj[ 424 D, 32. [D. lwCo7CVTa 253 D. i'rt for r'eo'rL 615 a. eXirw 424 D, 32. 23 D. 322 vPoEoflat 413. -rea~raPw, w. gen. 583. eXva (Epxojat) 450 D, -2. E`YvV/tt 440, 1. E7rBdoaKw 444 D, 11. AXwp 153 D. evoXae' 314; case 544 c. ei'7rieErKvlrt mid. 688. eavroVi 235. 670. 676. EvoXos w. gen. 584 d. ei6rat/aAit intrans. 685. ujBd;Xwco intr. 685. [233. &'raiaa, -Eaye, 248. 66 D. e'rif5oos pers. constr. 77z C4'ae'E, iae'7o, C i E o,,'iue T'i- 406 D, 1. riarsooa 451 h, 3 10 GREEK INDEX. E rav/E'c w. gen. 5T6. epis 169. 171 D. Fr7o'.at 137. 201 a. irLc$dposg w gen. 587 f.'Eppelas 136Db. 70. 80 b. 848 b. [6 t1 er'ficEcLat w. dat. 605.'Eppis 133. &fos 23 D; gen. 591; dat, elrcivavvos w. dat. 595 c. Epgas 442, 4. [5. ev 11; interch. w. ov 25 D. Ervoupye w. gen. 578 b. epouat 424, 9. 367 D a. 422, ev from v 30; from Eo, Eov, er'tXat/6yvotlat w. gen. 574. ipos 169 D. see cO, eov.'rAhavadvoliat 437, 5 a; w.'Tprw, prt5eiw, 312. [b. ev to e 189. 326. 426. gen. 576; w. part. 799. /iPpoo 422, 6. 23 D; om. 508 ev stems in, 152j. 189 if. rAeiLrov w. part. 798. epp/i4E'vos 221 d. ev 227; *ev 227 D. friXkoxwa~, 217. Epoa 345 D. ev 233 D. Er7L/eX2s w. gen. 584 c. Eipo-r 125 d. ev"aoov (&vd'vow) 437 D, 1.'rinepAolat 413. 422, 11;'Epo-r' 217 D. evaiotlrAolv w. gen. 577 a. w. gen. 576. epvy'yadr, 425, 12. cvaaitcwv 217. 221 d. erhoalTauat 404, 6. 401 k. epvaafvo1C.at 425 D, 20. evmros 221 c. 413; w. part. 799. Epvtccdvw, -avacw, 424 D, 10. Ev6co 422,7. ET7Jr'wTlceoV w. ace. 544 e. epv6cw 424, 10. 384 D. ev'EXrts 217 c. 7rio'rpaTe'CO w. case 544 c. ]ptqouaL 405 D b. evepyeTr'co 316. erorxes 368 a. epvoadp/ares 476 b. E'v3 a 80 D; w. gen. 589. E7rrTdaroxat. w. ace. 595 a. 4pw, 420 D, 12. 23 D. 312 ev1a6s 80 D; w. part. 795 b E7rr'Ti6Eospers. constr.777. D. 378 D. [409 D, 13. EvKEXcS 178 D. eLrLrla'o w. dat. 605. epXo/ai 450, 2. 326. 366 b. euICT/LAeYos 408 D, 26. ErltpE'rolaL vw. ace. 595 a. Epws 169 D. [553. evXatf3oe4at 413. er[Xapis compar. 221 g. epwTdaO 424, 9; w. two ace. EVwVwros 40 D. erwo/at 424, 8. 312. 384; es stems in, 152 c. 176 if. evvoe'`W w. dat. 595 b. w. dat. 602. -es nom. pl. 154. 196 b. hV'OOS 221 d. Ziros 23 D. 450, 8 a. 772. es, e (edlL) 406, 1. evnwaTrpeta 218 D. e-ra 424 D, 8. es 620. 103 b; see Isr. ebAolrno 125 D. ep syncop. stems in, 173. Eo-'bs 23 D. 1531; coll. 514. e brope'w w. gen. 575. ep (ebror, Ep&) 450, 8; (ef-'o-9Lw, Eo-aw, 450, 3. 378. eVPLo-'tao 447, 6. 366 b; w. pao) 312 D. earnrpa wt. art. 530 b. part. 799. epaSC 203 D. o'arepos 23 D. 200 D. evpoos 43. Epaylai 404, 7. e7iErewe 450 D, 8. eSpos ace. 549 b. Epda 419, 3; w. gen.. 576. Eo'rt4rnY (e'roIat) 424, 8. ebpsorra 136 D a. epdoCol.at 312. -eoxra fem. adj. 214. [D. ebprs 212. epyov 23 D; dat. 608. eo'-oa, o'TaL, 440 D, 1. 318 -evs masc. 189 if. 458. 467. epyco (epfpyw) 442, 4. 23 D. E'o-aL ('Lfo) 431 D, 6. -eur gen. sg. 176 D. 189 D. 318 D. 411 D. -eorL(v) dat. pl. 154 D. 173'vs 227 D. Ep3c, (epy) 428, 14. 23 D. D. 176 D. ESTE 877, 2. 322 D. eoal 406 D, 1. 105 D. ebvppaL'vw 414. EpEeULa 424 D, 9. ETOCoi 223 D, 2. eCvpvus 178. Epe86W 392 D. Veoe 877,7. e'lXapis 217 c. EpEIKco 425 D, 19. -o-Trepos, -eo'TaTos, 221 d. eb'Xotzam w. dat. 595 b. eperwo 425, 6. 32-1 D. eoTIv dol 812. -ev5 denom. verbs 472 d. fpei,$vs from epe3os 46 b. Eir-Tao 312; w. ace. 547 b. ev6vvyov wt. art. 530 b. -*pe~e 43 D. 428, 14. Eo-Trcs 216. E'WXE'o 574 d. pevoow 430, 4. eXCoapd4tI 206 D a. eqE.AKvXUOTLKCv (v) 78 C.,pet yoluai 425, 12. E'XaTros 224 a; w. art. 536. OeeAtcw mid. 689. epevadw 425 D, 20. Eo-GC compar. 229; cf. eo'foa. 4epEfs w. dat. 602 a. Ipeo, -oa%, 424 D, 9. FwepoS 68 c. 247; wv. art. &p5a~Yepos 72. Eo0?EovL os 448 D, 12. 528 a. 538 e; appos. 538dp4LIcVolial w. gen. 574 c. 1ptLavwo, -bCaitvw, 436 D, 15. e; wv. genl. 584 g; w. j!Eq)opdco 450 D, 4. 451 h. xpivw w. dat. 602. 860 b. |Elpas compar. 222. fp-lpos, -es, 219 D. e&;r 23 D. l-taw, -oIat:, 436, 6.:-67 D GREEK INDEX. 34 ] rlEXS 153 i. p 11 if; in subj. 347 a ivsl, twxv, fi(Lu, 232. f~co 424, 11. 65 e. 12. 384. -rl voc. sing. mase. 135; t/o-uOvs w. art. 536. 408, 11. 411 D; w. acc. in dual 178. 186; acc. iuos 248 D. 8'7, 4.'specif. 549 a; w. gen. sing. 178; in plup. 351 a. S'AwV6 321 D. 580; mid. w. gen. 574 -y 2 sing. 35 b. 363. fy for edvC 744 ff. 872. b;.impers. 494; intrans. l or 860. 69. 112. 512; iy 406, 1. 404, 1. 684; middle 691; aor. interrog.'733. 830 ff. ~),ov 450D, 2. 708; w. part. 797;- 1 than 860; w. compar. ilrtca 248. 877, 3. eXwv with788; pxvape7s 586. 660; 4 KaTd 660 c;?i'1oXos 199 D. EXW,' 788; o'rcws e'Xop- (W &s, I &a-Te) w. inf. 7'oped' 28 D. Tos 792 b. 660 c. 768. Vrrep 850, 3; fve 861.'Co 422, 8. [ao, aw.~ truly 852, 10. 112.?lo to w 33; 77oL to p 34, ECo interch. w. ao, ac, see i interrog. 828 if. 69. 112. sou to e 34. eco from verbs in ace 370 ~ said 404, 1. -77os, -7a, -pas, 190 f. D d; in Att. 2 decl. 147 a 248. 608. 876, 6. 879, 4; *7rap 165. if; to c, 32. w. superl. 664. lhrepos 139.'Eco gen. sing. 136 D b; ija (e1d/) 406 D, 1. ipa 201 D b. verbs 370. 472 c; fut. 77at to. 34. [D a.'HpaXclns 180 D. 373-7. i'jd'a'coo, 1jdca, 444, 3. 370 hpLe'VEla 219 D. ce-Wa 322 D. ieyoixaL w. gen. 581 a. jpos (Eapos) 160 D. oEWoleY (E'`ctv) 408 D, 18. yepEiaoyrar 411 D. ~ipws 181. 182 D. 184. -wl' g. pl. I dec. 128 D b. ie' 855. -~s nom. pl. 190 d. -Ecos gen. sing. 186. 190 a, f. /S/ 68 D. 851 b. -ss prop. names 198. [e, f. Ews noun 65 D. 148. 182; ioxuatl 413; w. dat. 611 a; -2s adj. 475; compar. 221 wt. art. 530 b. w; part. 800; aoEs',p -patl(Y)?.S, dat. pl. 129 D. E'os conj. 877, 7. 248 D. aot 601 a. ijrosv' 223, 2; oubX.ieo'o ECovroU 11 D b. 235 D. )Roy 201 D b. 842. v&relrEa 219 D. ioauXos 209. 221 c. s (Stigma) 5 b. 254 a. ci Vs 23 D. 212. 222. riT stems in, 1521. sE/ 830-31; ie 831 a. j7-roi 852, 12. 860 a. 110. Z, 21-2; from oa 56; from -r-E to p7 34. +rop 153 D. 201 D b. at, y?, 61; in pres. 328 b. hetr[6 409 D, 6. i1TTado pass. w. case 581; a'co 371 c; w. ace. 547 b..Iei' 405, 1. w. part. 801. -Ce local 204. 56. i)EXAos 65 D. s7v diphth. 11. ev'vyJJvut 442, 5. 1epEaovVTaL 411]D.?)ps 227 D. Zevs 202, 6; om. 504 c. -eEpos 202 D, 21. Oijue 876, 7. Wce 419, 12. I i'6zY 153 m. TjX' 248 D. 879, 4. ZOd's, etc., 202 D, 6. ijKio-a 223, 2. [698.'X"6 193. -So verbs in, 328 b. 428-9. iaKco 27; om. 508 b; as pf. ilcs 65 D. 146 D. 182. 431. 4'72; fut. 375-6; i4x or -qAeE 201 ID b. Aeol. -o-w 56 D. i7LKGLa w. inf. 767. e, 17. 19. 22; to s 45-6.'(&v/uut 441, 1. jXhicos 811. 816. 76. 401 b. Ccs 210 D. hALos 65 D. a doubled 40 b; dropped. uaL (i(s) 406, 2. 355 D e; 47. 49. 386 a. H, vow. 7 ff; interch. w.a c w. ace. 544 c.' stems in, 152 f. 169 ff; 25; w. t 27. cPcas, hluas, 232. formation in, 411 ID.,r after e, ~, p, 29. ij/ees etc. 233 D. adXao'-a a wt. art. 530 b. t for 5, 24 D a. 29 D. 125 jE'pa w.?eyevero 494; om. raXe'awv 432 D, 6. D, 2. 134 D. 3V0 D g. 509b; wt. art. 530b; ISdAeta 218 D. 371 c. 335 D. 382b. gen. 591; dat. 613. atAexo 432, 6. 338 D. n from e, see e. I7jx'tcepdve 203 D. aajlees, 4a/ceiat, 219 D,O syll. augm. 308 a; pass. l'7E'Tepos 238. 675-6. Yav (avo'cw) 444, 4. sign 343. 395. ifjAt 404, 1. adaTos gea. 577 b. 84 2 GREEK INDEX. &drwr' 427, 5. apE~r (-rpE'pc) 66 c. 424, 26. ll mode-sign 348. aa~Ped, w. acc. 544 a. apnvedw 370 D b.'qjtU 403, 1. 312. 332. 400t &appos 43 a. apjvrus 153 i. D d. 401 n. 401 D h, k. adpoos 43 a. 57. 176 D. [pif 66 a. 163. 402. [D ado-o w. ace. 544 c. SpdrVTw 66 c. 427, 6.;i&(s) 80 D; i'-Ta-ra 22.,doG''owv (rax6s) 66 b. 222. apdoiKcw 445, 5. i' to i 186 D. 401 D 1.,&S'repoV 68 c. 72; appos, aurvTj'1p 173. tc 23 D; (eotLca) 409, 7. 502 b. avquEo/uaL w. dat. 595 b. iicaves w. dat. 595 c. ~aaVla 11 D b; w. inf. 767 a. av'w, -vEw, 435 D, 10. ~KccgVC, 438, 2. 408 D, 45. avcuX'Cw w. gen. 570. 577 a. avr (Trpo~c) 66 c. 424, 28. icavCos aw. gen. 589. aav/yaoTbrs bo'os, aavutao- a'pac 56. 204. faceXos 23 D. ~riTs cs, 817 b. arvpaoY 205. Y'rceVos 46 D. 408 D, 45.'re pass. sign 343. 395. aS69 65 c. 420, 2. 435 D, 10. zcvolat 438, 2. ae, rEL (rit71t) 403, 2. a&s 160 c. 182. -uKacS adj. 469; w. gen. 587. aed 125 D. ewov6a (~a/a) 11 D b. i'Cw 438 D, 2. 349 D. 27. re'?os 221 D. i'Aal.ua 404 D, 10. aetvwo 432 D, 24. I, vow. 7 if; quant. 86 iff.'Aaos 210 D. [D. kAw 422, 9. t to et 30. 326. 425. [I 27. ixdotoyart 444, 5; iX.dopjat 6Atis 202, 7. t interch. w. e 27. 186; w. I'Xecos 209-10. -aev, -.5, local 203. i omitted 39 a. 328 e. 405,'I;ios 23 D;'IXn5Si 203 D; (E4d 37. 118. 141; om. 2. [328.'IXodmpt 206 D b. 504 c; wt. art. 530; ae- t changes prod. by, 58 if.'hTxw 432 D, 22. -pt 206 D b. t subscript 11. 34. 68 a; in Iudo'a-w 430 D, 9. NEpelos 468. dat. sing. 150.195 a.183. l, stems in, 156 a.,oEpyuaovw 433, 5. i of 4th el. 328. 428 if; as -rV ace. sing. 171; dual 5epolcat 424, 12. 345 D. redupl. 332. 449 D, 7; 150. 195 b. 5dEoo (av, Sev) 426, 1. mode-sign 848.'Yv for oT 233 D. [508 b aeCS'repom 221 D. t stems in, 152 d, i. 185 ff. Yva 739 ff. 879, 6; Iva T arn pass. sign 343. 395. ~ (Etu): 405, 1. [154. 195 a. -wvos adj. 470. o6ia'e /56. -t nom. pl. 150; dat. sing. -to gen. sing. 140 D. jrlXEw 432 D, 6. -t loc. 205; demonst. 242. fo/eAv, tYwCev, 88 D. iAxvs 212 a. 221 D. ta for to 466. -~ov neut. 465 a. ~5v 852, 9. 105 D. -la fem. 464 c. 125 fE. -Los adj. 468. 7ipr (Taop)425 D, 17. 351 D. I'a for taxa 255 D. ioXEaLtpa 218 D. rl/pdwo 286. 335. tcdolarL 415. ir~roSdoeta 218 D.,L to o'o 60. LaVow 449 D, 7. L-rros coill. 514. -St local 203; imper. 358.;dXw, -eaw, 424 D, 33. 23 D. 7brr'ra 136 D a. 361. 400 b. 401 b. 65 b. -dcow denom. 472j. Y'V"ralmat 424, 19. ~-ry7d1cY 437, 2; w. gen. Ls 450, 4. 409, 6. 23 D. Ypv77 65 D. 574b. 1s3 855. ipds 32 D e. h.at o419, 4. -f3tov neut. 465 a.'rs 153 m. &Xt3a 424, 13. i'L0os 23 D; w. gen. 587 c; Yo-a/u 409 D, 6. Yio'aKo 444, 4. 394 a. 409, tq,& 608. Ya'o't 27. 4. 433, 4; w. acc. 544 e. Y5b&ej, 46 D.'Io-ayo? 205. roilpdvLOv 68. M'prs 188. 217 c. ao',js 46 a. d pLYv/Lat (apc(o-cK) 445, 5. ispuc., ~s8pvrnv, 396 D. -Iocos, -locK7l, 465 b. aoJpLs, aorpos, 219 D. fSpc5s 169 D. Yoico 447 D, 16. Spa7r (Tp&po) 424, 26. ~E mode-sign 348. Io-41olpos w. gen. 584 a.'5pdoos 57. hEpaS 65 D. t'os 23D. 221c; w. dat, EOpyooa 60. Zepds 32 D e; w. gen. 587 c. 603; * Yor/n 509 a.;3pdooroa 428, 8. -tLw verbs in, 472 e; Att. -[orepos, -to''aTos, 221 e. &pa6co 421, 18. fut. 376.' o'qiu/tL 403, 5. 299. 303,pEK ('rpx w) 66 c. 450, 5. Y'w, I'&,vw, 431, 6. 305. 63. 347 D. C59 D GREEK INDEX. 3'43 394 a. 400-01. 409, 1. KcaXA)yrauca 218 D. Ite, 1c7, KEL (Icalw) 434, 1. 410 D. 416, 1; mid. 688; *Ka.AAX ws 228. KeIC, 87 3 b. 79 D. 105lD perf. 712. Kaao's compar. 223, 6. E-darat, ICe'CTal, 405 D, 2. loXdCw, -daw, 449 D, 2. Kacdos 146 D. acecivvvut 439 D, 4. orxvcw aor. 708. t KaAivB1 327 a. IceL,- KeZeSV', KIeoe, 249 D, TrXwo. 65 e. 449, 2. 332. cKaAvXrw5 427, 7; mid. 688. iKe7cua 405, 2. 355 D e. 378 IXbas 153 i. 185 if. KcdAs 146. D. 410 D; w. acc. 544 c. IXo5p 199 D. Katc/lopos 73 D. Ice7vos 240 D. f' 255 D. IcdLvos 139 b. Ktepcop 432, 8. 345 D. ~sco~Ic, iiuca, 199D. Icpdrcw 435, 8. 386c; w. Kexcopvuad'os 46 D. -twv patron. 466 a. ace. 547 b; w. part. 800. cKEXae'w 448 D, 13. -Iwv, -orTos, 222 if. Iccc7r'Wco 42'7, 8. Idevros 139 c. 200 D. KacY, Kiv, 68 a. KceAevt 421, 20. K, 16. 19 iff. 22; dropped Icdeov, Kavouv, 144. ceAXk 345 D. 373. 75. [46; bef. o 47. Kcdr, Kdp (cacd)'73 D. ciEXocat 424D, 34. 384D). IC bef. — mute 44; bef. p ycap (,cep'w) 432, 8. cevo's w. gen. 584 b. Ic for r, Ion. 247 D. [392 a. Kdpa, Kcdp, cadp, 202 D, 24. IcEYE' 448 D, 14. c to X in pf. 341. 387 b. Mcdp8oros 139 b. Icepacvvvu 439, 1; w. dat,,c movable in oVK: 80 a. Kcdplva 202 D, 24. 602; cepdw, -arw, 439 D. ic tense-sign 344 f. 386. icape-a 227 D. cedpas 165. 168. -Ka 1 aor. 402. eap'rep'o w. part. 800. KcEpBavw 433, 6. 382 b. cd for Ke 873 b. Icap'reps 5'7 D. Icep[cwv, -w'rTos, 223 D, 9; cdy, Icc3, etc. 73 D. capdpTLros 57 D. 223 D, 1. icepSaeEos ib.,ca3 428 D, 18. 422 D, 20. Kcdr (hcaeT) 73 D. KEv'aW, -dUcw, 425, 13. caaaper'co w. gen. 580.'ica 68 a. IcepadAaov 502 b. cKaaaphs wv. gen. 584 f. iKaTarc 631-2; w. num. 258 Kcni (cafw) 434, 1. [os ib. IcaaE'No/aL 431, 6. a; in comp. 583; w. icK~SoTros 223 D,'1;;ice.. Kaaev5wC 314. inf.'780. KIcJco 422 D, 20. 355 D e. KaaIr7Iat 406, 2. caTaayeAdw vw. gen. 583. Kc'p fern. 153 n. Ka5[coa 431, 6. 314. KaaraTeLzcywc w. gen. 577 Kicpv~ 164. icaaSirvto u incomp. pred. b. 583. c7p6o'o-w 428, 2. 490 c. 540. Ica'&-yvUvut w. gen. 574b. ci to oao' 60. 328 a. iKai 855 if. 68; w. num. icaTaovXAcoots w. dat. 595 d. KlWoTJS 139 b. 256; w. two subj. 511; Iaa'K'dJCEiat 405, 2. tiV77pt 443 D, 8. w. part. 795 f; Mtal os KaaXr.XdTco w. dat. 602. Kticiv 66 D. 525 b; Kai 95s 250; Kal caTraVcwo w. gen. 580. ciKcLxox'w 444 D, 12. [764. -SeV, Thv,, 525 b; Kcal yctp lcaT-a-rXoacxrw 397 a. cvvve'swco aor. 708; w. inf. 870'd; el (e&a) icat, iac ica'ratS'Vyyvvt w. ace. 546. IcVe'a 440 D, 5. EL (e'dv) 874. KaTrcdpxW w. ace. 544 e. KLYULatl (EKiov) 440 D, 5; tcafv,uai 442 D, 17. iacppovo w. gen. 583; lciaovP 411 D. Kafvw 432, 7. pass. 694 a. ctfp'v71U, -vcw, 443 D, 2. catirep 1795 f. 850, 3. 874, 3.; IKcTaXpp 404 D, 3. cLXdvce 436, 7. 404 D d. Katpds dat. 613. aazraeC4toE6 atL w. gen. 583. KIXpMlA 403, 9. aLc'Tot 864, 7. 110. cKaraLc/?l[opuat w. gen. 583. KA. (KEdXo.al) 424 D, 34.'caio 434, 1. 381 D. aTE'T7rvTro 408 D, 41. icAd' 428, 12. 360 D. rCdK (Ka'd) 73 D. Kaff'eXo intrans. 495.' xceats 171D. rcaicds compar. 223, 2; w. IKarryaopeO w. gen. 583. Khafw, cXcdw, 434, 2. 357 D acc. 548. taraavei' 703 D. KAdC 171 D. icalop7yos w. gen. 587 a. cdraw 229. 631. KiAar (cXiE7rTw) 427, 9. icdicave 73 D. Icau (Kcac) 434, 1. cXav-dco 472j. tcaXa'w 420, 5; incomp. cavcdats 442 D, 1. KcdX 419, 5. pred. 490; perf. 712. cavo'T 68 a. Kce (Kacc,) 420, 5. (rrpo)KaXti'oCCta 420 D, 5. Kaiw 434, 1. -KIXE's 178 D. 180. 198. 344 GREEK INDEX. cAdes 171. cKpas 181. 182 D. 183. XadoeuaL, Xa'vCuatL, 429 D, 5 fcXeSo 421, 15. 390. Icperaowv 223, 1. xa~ (7avardcw) 437, 5. IcXe[w, tcXE'olct, 426 D, 8. cKpE'lacat 404, 8. 401 k. Naic (daanco) 447, 11. cAXE'7rTqs 221 e. pecadvvvAl 439, 2. NXdcos compar. 221 e. cke7r1co 427, 9. 387 b. tcpEoaroo, 223 D, 1. Xac43c{aw 437, 4. 319 e, 366 Kacr1's 171 D.,cpji-aez 203 D. b; w. gen. 574 b, e; mid. fcXhtlco 421 D,15. [198. icpacvatat 443 D, 3. 690; w. part. 799. cKAxs prop. names in, 180. Kpuovo'a 60. Xc/W7rw 424, 14. cXsco, 421, 16. icp? for cptiac 201 D b. Aavdvcow 437, 5; w. acc icXKpav 433, 1. 432, 9. fcpi[~c 428 D, 20. [a. 555 a. 544 a; w. part. 801. KAiL.o'lp 206 D a. icpVco 433, 2; w. ace. 547 AaJs 147. tckodp (Ak'rTWo) 427, 9. KpovSorw 466 a. Aas 202, 10. acXv 426 D, 8. 408 D, 28. Kpoow~ 421, 23. xdoacK 447, 11. ic/za (icadco) 435, 8. tcpv'rsco 427, 11. 410 D; w. Aax (XaayXdcow) 437, 3. Kcacod 421, 12. two ace. 553. XaXeLa 218 D. [319 e. cvd o 421, 2. 371 c. iKpvca w. gen. 589.; AEyw to gather 424,15. tcEpas 182. c'a, KCTa,, (iKrei'o) 433, 4. Ae'yw to speak 424, 15 a. Kviooa, 125 D. IcTrdo/Lua 319 b. 393 a; mid. 450, 8 a. 408 D, 37; oem. IcoLvos w. gen. 587c.; / 692; pf. 712. 508 b; impers. 763;:cop, 3 e; icoiY, 608. ICTeaTeroL 201 D b. pers. 777; AEyou'tV 504 IcotvwveO, w. gen. 574 a; crel'co 433, 4. 364 D. 401 c; ob Aey4ueeov 496. w. dat. 602. n. 408,4. 432, 10. AE7rco 292. 276-7. 334b. Kotvcwwva w. dat. 602. Icrets 156 c. 412 b. 425, 7; gen. 581 IotLvwv's 202, 8. IKc'pas 182 D. \evw 421, 21.,iA7ros om. 509 b. Ic1L'SC 408 D, 26. AEX 408 D, 38. coCxco 328 D. 376. (&aro)ICT-'Yvvut 442, 6. AeXc 194 b.;c&'LS 186 D. IC7rev'c 448 D, 15. Aexcs 146. K4rsra 254. CKvudav'epa 218 D. X./3 (Xajuq3a'd) 437, 4. Kiorpos 139 a. [685. lcvup4s compar. 222 ID. Ayw c w. part. 798. Kc7wTco 427, 10; in comp. icur (ice'aw) 425 D, 13. A{Sa 126 a. 130 c. rcJpac; es icJpaKas 508 b. KcuitoKc, tCWco, icvUc, 446, 2. X10arn 455 d. [5. iCopEvvPuLLt 440, 2.,cvcec6v 175 D. X.aco, -a'co, 425, 1. 437 D, Ocp?7 125 d. Icvuicha3ev 203. Xyvcow 447 D, 11.,Kopocr, tcKd5P, 125 d. 43 a.,cvAL'w,,Kvh['O, -Co, 421, 6. A?7'ds 139 b. KoptVaoaw 430 D, 10. Kvico 438, 3. AMIs 146 D. -iccS adj. 469. 587 b. Ice.repos 224 D. AkX (XayXocvw) 437, 3. Kooais 247 D. ICKv'rc 427, 12. AX to AX 59. 328 c.'coTr 247 D. Kcvpdc, -Kcpw, 448, 5. 345 D.?ya 227 D; Aryts ib. coT'repos 247 D. 373; w. gen. 574 c; w. Xl.rdcvw 425, 7. IcoTE'o 420 D, 11. part. 801. Atir (.Aerco) 425, 7. CoTvX.iqao6dr p 206 D c. 6owY, 202, 9. xMs -= xe.o, 202 D, 25. covi 247- D. cX for XX 40 b. XALaoisal, ALTopuai, 430D,cogpos compar. 224 D. Iccias 182 D. 11. 308 D. Ko'cs 146 D. Kcds 148. AhIa, ALt[, 202 D, 26. tcpa (icEpdvvuLt) 439, 1. MXLtdOA 448 D, 23. icp8d~' 428, 13. 338. 409, 8; A, 18. 22; NA after augm. Xo (xovow) 371 e. [602 pt. 712. 308 D. See Liquids. Xd7os dat. 608; els AyovU spar (icdpa) 202 D, 24. Naas 202, 10. XoyX (xa7XdYvw) 437, 3.'prEaq~L 206 D c. NaO (Aauicdvw) 437, 4. Xoir (XES7rw) 425, 7. KcpaTrcO w. gen. 581 a. haaycs 146 D. Xotr6's 455 c. 457 b, c; ace KCpdTLo'rOS 223, 1. Na'yXaco 437, 3. 319 e. 387 552 a; gen. 591. Kcp&Tos 57 D. a; w. gen. 574 c. kXofaos, -tos, -oios, 224 D Koarts 223 D, 1. 227 D. AaTys 148. -Aos adj. 471. ~qREEK INDEX. 315?toco 371 e; mid. 688. Ixd'yeaos dat.. 609. jixeravroldoiua W. g]n. 577 c Avire'w w. acc. 547 c.'Iaoixai 422 D, 21. /ie'TETTL w. gen. 571. u.Xvos 200 D. [29. 420, 3. Ixdcoyv 222 D. [1 du. 356 b. Y/Te'XW w. gen. 574 a. Avwco 268-75. 393 D. 408 D, -Iueaa 1 pl. 355 ff; -iueaovI u TEweopi 315. Aw-p'wv, -'repos, 223 D, 1. yxeitu7 403 D, 1. [575. ye'rEwpos 26. AwTeOvra 214 D. yel'ttwo 446, 3; w. gen. IdyroXos w. gen. 584 a. Xhwadco w. gen. 580. Ixebio., 446, 3.!/E pov 887. Ahpvw, Ahworos, 223, 1. IetSOa 222. [319 D. Iyei 233 D. xeLtpoxyar 432 D, 25. 319 e. iEXpL 70 b. 80 D; w. gen. M, 18. 22; bef. p 53; bef. Iuxes = Xv 202 D, 27. 626; conj. 877, 8; w. A 53 D; mutes bef. IAeauowv 223, 3; /LE7oP 660 d. ov, 8oaov, 813 a. 46; ky/ after augm. 308 tEAas 156 c. 212-13. 220.,un 832 if. 68 D. 69. 80 b; D. See Liquids. lueAE' 201D b. w. ind. 761; w. subj. -/Aa neut. 461 a. 166. YEAL 153 r. 166. 720 b, d; w. impr. 723; ua 852, 14. 545. MexAT- 612. [inf. 711. w. part. 789,e; final739 uaa (yavda'vw) 437, 6. e'Xckw 422, 12. 308 a; w. if; interrog. 829; I4A -yat 1 sing. 355 ff. A.XI 422, 11; w. gen. 576. J.oL 508 b; /x~ ob 720 d. Mafa 12 a. /LE.di.jerTai 422 D, 11. 743. 846-7; ov y7 845; uaiLcdw 4341D, 5. 472 k. EueTlje',vxos 403 D, 1.'rTL yX 868 c; el /ui, eS ua'vocuat 432, 11. Ixu'epouatL w. gen. 577 a.,dL El 872. 754 a. Uaiocuai 434 D, 5. 409 D, 9. I-jeV 1 pl. 355. ttqoaiu., -oi, -cos, 252. uatc (,ccodoiCat) 448 D, 24. IAev 862 a; after art. 525 a.,Vse 858-9; jXuS&E E's 255; lciceaipa 219 D. 534 a; after prep. 616; EIAxt' 9s 250. iAdicap 220. for xv 852,13;'yvy, o,ig7aeS 255; neut. 848 a. Gaicpds 222 D; Iyaicp,$ 610; ryev a, 852, 13. [D e. IxtVi'aepos 252. (es) laKcpdzv 509 a. -,evat, -JAe;, inf. 359 D. 400 Ixooyiat 422 D, 21. ~aKp4XELp 218. 481. MervAews 149 a. /.7cda'oyua 448 D, 24. 351 D. jLdAa 70 c. 227. 222 a; w. evOLvado 370 D a. W071crsT 80 b. 848 b. conip., sup. 665 b. 666. xuevdv 68 c. [&xAd 848 e.,xUcioros 222 D. AdYA7 201 b. jiEv'or 864, 6; o yEdvro,uiKicos 461 b. yAd, for IXv 852, 13. - IdyeO 422, 13; w. acc. 544a. A'PKcwv 153 m. yavadyc, 437, 6. 308 D. 412 yLepts om. 509 b. anjh. (4kAXw) 422 D, 11. a; w. gen. 582; w. part. yepyxp[wo 328 D. yxov, 717. (inf.) 799. 802; T- yag v jleaa4,3pi-7 24 D a. IArn7 (Ualfvo/aL) 432, 11. 789 c. IAE'o'(o)ar'os 224 D. pUy month 172; w. app pacr (cAdp7rTw) 427 D, 21. AEao(o-)ryv(s) 80 D. 500 a; gen. 591; bovo MapaaCvv 612. ueovi4xBpta- 53. 482. yxves 816 b. uapyacuat 443 D, 4. 401D h. pl4iaos 221 c. 224 D. 643; UAy in truth 852, 13. 864, uap7rco 427 D, 21. w. art. 536; wt. art. 5; ovb (jv &kaAX 848 e; ciaprvpEco, -poxAaL, 448, 6. 530 b;,v AdoiE 496. { XL{z (i xder) 852, 10 /AdpTvpos 202 D, 11. /oa-Tds w. gen. 584b. Aj17rw 848 b. adpT-vs 152 p. 202, 11. er-ra 643-5; adv. 615; 4IA-e 858-9. 110. udo'ow (ixay) 428, 3. Oxd=a 615 a. A7u-np 173; wt. art. 530 c. ud'co-wv 222 D. uETa$AXoAW intrans. 685. q7ui'dw, -ro[Lat, 448 D, 25. ud~~'tL 163. 199 D. e~.TaSl&OItL w. gen. 574 a. /7Tr'eLTa 136 D a. uadXOlaL 422, 10; w. acc. AErTaXau/Gvcw w. gen. 574 a. I4Az{s 252; IjuTn 848 a. 547 a; w. dat. 602. JE'TaciAELt w. gen. 576; w. t5r-pws 182. [399 ff. psi 105 a. 230. part. 800. [800. -pu 1 sing. 355 if. 361. 267. eyadhAws 226. juATa,4EAoiat 413; w. part. I'a (eTs) 255. [D, 39. ueyas 219. 222; Ie'ya, c 1E- UUE-a56 w. gen. 626 r; w. Il[yvvUxL 442, 7. 395 D. 408?ycia, 226. 552 a;'7rl part. 795 c. 1.lKpds 223, 3; gen. 575 a. ue'ya 493 f; A'ya w. gen. lu a7r-Etnrw mid. 689. MulxO'Tos 468 b. 559 c; Trb Ie.'tr-ToY 502b. 1e1'Ta7rXa'o'rs 199. iLALEOlAaL 41 5. 346 GREEK INDEX. yuMv9mLoKW 444, 6. 319 b. 150. 154. 157. 195 g, i; -(v)ot 3 pl. 355. 362, 363D. 393a; w. gen. 1 sing. 356ff. 364D; 3 s- dropped bef. o 49. 50; 576; pf. 712; w. part. pl. 355ff. 400 Dd; in- stems in, 152k. (inf.) 799. 802. fin. 359. -VTL 3 pl. 355 D a. 400D a dpvCwo, /LpZvdac'w, 449, 3. va 5th class 443 D. -vrwOv 3 pl. impr. 358. tlv 233 D. 105 D. -vat inf. 359. 367 c. 400 e. vu (wvv) 5th class 329 d. MtvWo 148. 182 D. 197 D. rai 852, 14. 545. [410 D. 407.439 ff. iyo'yco 447, 12. 442, 7. Yae'tracw 434 D, 6 370 D a. vdYjpa 125 D. [867, 3 LyOroJw mid. 689 b. vacXt 110 a. vP(v) 79 D. 105 D, 112. IY in div. of syll. 83 a. vcaco 434 D, 6. PvV 112. 867, 3. pav3 132; yp'a 132 D.'ads 26. 147. Vd7 153 r; gen. 591; dat, yva (ruivoaKccw) 444, 6.:'ao-w 431, 3. 613; wt. art. 530 b. zvs'opat 370 D a. va;)s 189-90. vYc6UYo 33. ypvhpcy 217. Pavoatropos 473 b. P6Z', vvs, 233 1D. olf 230. 70 D. 105 a.'avaiX 206 D c. vWrTepos 238 D. uorpa om. 509 b. v68 dropped bef. o 49. Moioa 24 D d. Ye 5th class 329 c. 438. E, 17 a. 21-2. 47. 74 b. JoA (BAc&Kw) 445, 2. v''aros 224 a. -5 masc., fern. 152 o. 163 gov (uafobai) 409 D, 9. zeudwc 419 D, 21. 370 D b. Iewvos 24 D c. govds 258 d. vEKus 153 i. Elo 419, 13. uovaxY 258 c. ve4lo 422, 14. Pv = oi'v 628. idvos 258 c; p0vos T6'v 6X- vopLat 430 D, 12. - ipoyat, Svpew, 1-18,7. Awy 586 c; *joyd ob 848 vdpiaev 224 D. ~vw 421, 10. d; ov /',vov —&AXa (cal) ve'pTepot 224 D. 857. evup~dpt 206 D a. 0, vow. 7ff; interch. w bjovo'pdyos 221 e. vEo (re) 421, 5. a, E, see a; w. v 27. uoo (GpoTO's) 53 D; (pdepo- vYE (vv) 426, 2. 308 D. o for a 203. 349 D. 473 a; ptat) 319 D. r ecs 26. 146. for c 347 D. -Aos masc. 460 b; adj. 471. vedrsotIcos 473 b. o from e, see E.,uou 230. 105 a. vp 852, 14. 545. o to i 27; to ot 24 D c.,luovvos 24 D c. O/ds 146 D. o to ov 24 ID c. 31. y*So, -4w, -awd, 431, 7. VYsoos 138. o to W- 28. 156. 221 a. 309. uVael.otiat 370 D b. Pv/us 11 D b. 189 D. 335-6. 400 m, n.,tpucdoptat 448 D, 26. v~XwO 426 D, 2. [51. o dropped after at 221 b. vupatds 258 d. va dropped bef. a 49. cf. o conn. vow. 203. 352. 401 pvptol (vuplot) 253. 257. s'tgw 429, 2. D h. 473 a. ius 153 i. 185. vtIdO w. acc. 544 a; w. o stems in, 152 h. 193-4.,vxoPraros 224 D. gen., dat. 581; w. part. -o gen. sing. 136 c. 140; 2 /xc 420, 6. 801; pr. for pf. 698. sing. for -a'o 363. I cjuevOs 434D, 5. vtv 233 D. 105 D. 6, 7, T4, 119. 239. 243 D. /cAv (p/ obv) 34. 829. vi7rTa 429,2. 103 a; demonstr. 525; M6a'oa 24D d. vwao'optat 430 D, 12. o 6tv, o6 e', 525 a; o6 V, vLpa's 199 D. o yap, 525'y; vTC for T' N, 18. 22; bef. other cons. lhpELt wt. subj. 504 c. 521; eV T0-o7s w. sup. 48 ff; bef. & 58. 328 d. evoupci incomp. pred. 490. 627; rov w. inf. 592 b. v doubled after augm. 308 556; w. part. 799. 781 a. D; dropped in pf. 386 vdos, vous, 144. O neut. of o's 243. 68; foi c; inserted in 1 aor. -vos adj. 471. [708.'s.243 D; for TL 868 bh pass. 396 D. voaeCo w. ace. 547 a; aor. oa to w 32. cf. 36. 5th class 329. 407. 435 if. tIoos 139 e. -oas to -ous 36 b. Y movable 78-9. vdo(pt(v) 79 D. *pcBpo07radrp7 218 ID. v stems in, 152 m. YOTOS dat. 613. ya7odas 258 d. ~v neuter 138; ace. sing. -(v)aa fem. part. 360. 362. oy73a'ros 253 D. GREEK INDEX. 3.17 byoos 253. 37 D. OlKtCpJS compar. 222 D., oYdt'oo w. pred. 540. 556 oy7sIC/oToma 253 D. op4&6'cw 379. oI;ojat 405 D a. ae, PE, e, de, 239 247. -onv dual 154. 195 b. O3t'0 391a. 110; use 678-9; w. art. oy'os 23 D; om. 509 b. oivs 90. 538 a; OM' 242. o'voXoE4 312 D. oo to ov 32; ooL to or 34. 0oa/ 46 D. -oLo gen. sing. 140 D. -oos adj. in, 208. W6&s 139 c; om. 509 b; ofojlcai, oGi[La, 422, 15. 363 oov to ov 34; b'ov 243 D. gen. 590; dat. 612. a. 413,; w. gen. 570; our (6paow) 450, 4. ooovs 156 c; 3oS D. mid. 692; hyperb. 885. l7rs 248. 876, 6. 879, 4. ouvs 321 D. 616; &cs 4yB otLuaL 667. 6rl7Atcos 247.'Ovoa(o)e6s 40 D. 189 D. oLos 247. 86 D. 681 a. 811. 6'7r7vfca 248..877, 3. oE to ov 32. [35 c. 814ff; w. sup. 664; oo, 07rLinore(v) 79 D. 224D; w. oe to ov 34. 371 a; to oL o'a, w. part. 795 d. gen. 589. -oehlhs adj. 481 a. o41STE 814. 856 a. 110. 1oro(o-))w 40 D.,Cc (os) 431, 8. oTs 23 D. 154 D b. 192. 07rTSraTos 224 D. o77 to co 32; to 77 36 a. -oLora for -ovoca 362 D. &7rxAd'epos, -'raros, 224 D. oy. to oL 35 c; to.w 401 i. -oLoL(Y) dat. pl. 140 D b. rd5, ev, 248. 811 a. 879, 2. [rey 248. 250. 879, 2; at- oixv4co 422 ID, 16. [698. 67r4d 879, 1. traction 811 a. o'tXoluai 422, 16; pr. for pf.'7rot 248. 879, 3. [ff. iS;JL 248 D. 879, 1. o'c., C.1:, 422, 15. &Iro'os 247. 251. 681 b. 825 oao0,eIcKa 869, 3. 72. OKC? 247 D. irkoos 247. 681 b. 825 ff. oC 11 ff; for o 24 D c; to c. Ktiyos w. inf. 767. rco'~ros 257. 310; interch. w. eL 25. 6Jtoos 247 D. or&rJa 877, 1. -or elided 70 D; short for oA (E'?kw) 432 D, 22. 7r$TE 248. 877, 1. ace. 95 a. 365. oALbd'cts 259. [dat. 610. 67r4'repos- 247. -or voc. sing. 194 a. 3oAXyos 223, 4; gen. 575 a; o'rov 248. 879, 1. [D. oL (qe'pw) 450, 6. oAXywpeco w. gen. 576. 7r0ro=os, i'7rcirs, 247 D. 40 of pron, 230. 105 a. oAi'cwv 223 D, 4. w7rrdoE 248 D. ot adv. 248. 250. 879, 3; 3XtoAmzad 436, 9. $ovvr 434D, 7. w. gen. 589.'AAvct442, 8. 417; pf. 712.'7rccs 248. 876,3; fin. 739 -ola femrn; 130. [795 d. b'Aos w. art. 537. if; interrog. 825 if; w. oa conj. 876, 5; w. part. oArr (EX7rco) 424 D, 32. fut. 756; r7orws txL 743; 9oyw, o'ylyvruLA, 424 D, 16.'OVXuirLos dat. pl. 613. ovX (1d/) 0'7rws 848 c. o0aL 409, 6. 23 D. 318 ID. o6xJe'o w. dat. 602. op&a 450,4. 312. 322. 363 351ID. 364 D; pf. 712; $/ycvvLt 442, 9. 331.401D b; D. 366 b. 370 D a. 371 D w. part. (inf.) 799. 802; w. ace. 544 a. 545. c; w. /&. 743; w. part. EV 0oi' O'tL 868 a; o~O' o8polos, LOeOLJw, w. dat. 603. 799. b apaorov 755. o6CotIXdA 670 D a. opt ('pscw) 428, 14. oSdcW,, oCsec, 436, 8. O6CoXo7yc., w. dat. 602; w. 3pyatoo 382 b. OIl7rovs 191. part. 797; w: inf. 777. IpVy[ioLaL w. dat. 595 b; -Orl for -ota 125 D, 2. g/uApyvvluL 442, 10. w. part. 800. Og'Cvp&T.Epos 221 D. [D a. 6xoD 590 a; w. dat. 602 b. opeyvvyL, peYJw, 442 D, 18; -oIL for -ozy 140 D a. 154 6%U5c&vPlos w. gen. 587 d; w. gen. 574 c. o&KaSe 203. 110. w. dat. 603. ipeLos, opearepos, 221 D. oliKE7os 468; w. gen. 587 c. OUIts 864, 8. Spappos wt. art. 530 b. olcEco 355 D e. o'/cos 853 b. 864, 8. 874 b; optYco 442 D, 11. tKtoaofl'ca 443 D, 1. w. part. 795 f. 6pIEcot w. two ace. 555. 3DCOaELv 203. ov compar. stems in, 174. 3pvaro&ipas 136 D. 6Koor 203 D. Oap 201 b. ipYLs 155 f. 169. 202, 12. ototL 95 b. 205. o've obovYe 203 D. Up'vltL 442, 11. 311 D. 321 oYICove 203 D. oY'tEpos 199. [k, n. D. 345 D. 349 D. 384 D, olitos 23 D; om. 509,. OvIVS7LLu 403, 6. 27. 332. 401 408 D, 40. oiU'crEpc w. gen. 577 a. o',oua ace. 549 b; dat. 608. opovco 442 D, 11. 318 GREEK INDEX, Joiozowo 428, 4. 321. wt. zct 545; o7 l4h 845; O'p(E'Xw 328 C. 345 D. 6pgpavds w. gen. 584 f. // ov 846-7. [671-3. oSpeXos 201 b.?PXLs 153 i. ou, oT,', 230. 105 a. 668. 03q)raaXLpco 472j. Os stems in, 181 iff. ov adv. 248. 250. 879, 1. b'pLs 153 i. [577 h. -or neut. 176 if. 461 b. ov'aros (ovs) 202 D, 13. pXOIatcdvcoW 436, 11; w. gen. -os gen. sing. 154. 196 a; o6a6cq, -oi, -cs, 252. 1,p/pa 248 D. 739 ff. 877, 7. ace. pl. 140 D c. ov6e' 858-9; ov6eS es 255i oX (4EXw) 424D, 11. [D c. as possess. 23 D. 238. 672 oM6' (Zs 250. OXos 201D a; 6XeOEin 206 a. 675a. ovires 255; w. pl. 514b; 0b4 ew.ijvY494;w. gen. 589. os demonst. 243 a. 525 b, /3. our6es SSTLos o' 817 a; lO/Lpaasr w. gen. 587 a. Qs rel. 243. 247. 681 a. 808 ovie' 848 a. 683 c; ovOc- ioStos compar. 221 c. ff; pl. for sing. 514 d; yJs 578 b; foll. by i'Kca- 3/ooqpyos compar. 221 e. neut. for masc. fem. 522. Tos or Tls 881. ow to co 32; for co 370 ID a oadicts 259. ove'r-epos 252. -oo verbs 370. 472 a. oa~itx.pat 816 b. ovib, see o; ovOc 68 b. Sbos 247. 681 a. 811. 814ff; o'bKe' 848 b. 80 b. I1, 19 ff; Yrr 247 D. 40 D. accus. 552 a; dat. 610; obki 65 D. 7r bef. T-mute 44; bef. u ob'ov, ov 848 d. oViconi,, oViKOuv, 866 a. 112. 46; bef. o' 47. [392 a. oOos7rep 251. ovX4dLEyos 28 D. 7r to cp in perf. 341. 387 b. s7rep 850, 3. OvXd7roio 28 D. 7ra (7rnhrapar) 335 D. oc(adi 259 D. -os ace. sing. 193 D. iray (rriyvut) 442, 12. O'aoTrTos 247 D. oU', 866; w. rel. 251. 816'raa (rrdcrXw) 447, 13. ooae 201 D a. a; after prep. 616. 7raifoo 431, 4. Vo'oVOat 429 D, 4. o0,eeKa 68 b. 626. 868, 2. rai- 153. 158 a, d. 160Sc; /Io o'os 40 D. 247 D. 869, 3. wt. art. 530 c. osre 856 a. ouvopa 24 D c. r'afco 421, 13. eovoo, -o3u,Vy 144. o1rrt 68 b. 7raxatos compar. 221 b. O'STls 246. 247. 251. 681 b. oirwe 848 b. vraXaco 421, 14. 811 iff. 825 if. 110. obpacraev 203 ID. i7rdlAy in comp. 52. [42. oappaivopat 436, 10; with obpc', 312. r&daXX 432 D, 26. 408 D, gen. 576. ovgpeos 28 D; o~pos 05 AD. nrdprpwros 224D. O-Tav 877, 1. -ovs adj. 470. 208. rwapalivo, epav6wY, 472 k. Ore 248. 113 a. 869, 2. 877, ovs 160 c. 202, 13. 432 D, 19. 1; w. aor. 706; w. Td- orw'd, -Clw, 423 D, 5. 401 ra;, in comp. 52. X1-Ta 821; eis'Te ICE D n. 408 D, 21. 7ravrdraor'tL() 79 6. 877, 7. ov-re 858-9. 512. rrairaX-p 258 c.'T(')EV, ii'eo, tTEWY,' 6oTEol- ovT- s 252; o0rT 848 a. rdvrojaev 203. 0r, 246 D. o-ros 239. 247. 678-80; rdw'sr 225. OTL 70 b. 70 D. 113 a; decl. fem. dual 521; w. art. rap (rrepw) 432, 13. 868, 1. 733 if; caus. 869, 538 a; w. nom. for voc. rrdp 73 D. 646. 1; w. superl. 664; ex- 541. cf. 545; —-rTOo rrapd 646-8. 618; in comp. pressed by pron. 813. ('aDra) appos. 502b; 605; w. compar. 661, 822-3; o6X Yirt 848 c. w. verb om. 508 a, b; w. in. 780. TLs, oiTi'a,'TrLas, 246 D. pI. for sing. 518b; neut. Ircpa 102 a. 102 D. 615 a. OTrt 40 D. 246D. for masc. fern. 522; asl rapal3afvo w. ace. 544 d. ov 5 b. 11ff; for o 24 D; adv. 552 a; w. gen. 559 rapat 24 D. 646. interch. with ev 25 D; c; w. gb, V6, 525 a. [rapacopdow 315. [603. from o, see o. o6urooi 242. 550 C. rapar-X(rios 221 c; w. dat au gen. sing. 136c. 140. orwco(s) 239a. 248. 80;e; rapao veudc(, 392D; im -ou 2 sing. 363. w. part. 795 a. pers. 494. ob, oc, o6X, oviX, 103. 80 a. obx, o6vxgf, see ov. irapaS[-ai1uL mid. 689 b. 74 c. 832 iff; interrog. dEexw 432, 12. 328 c; inlr-apacapf4w w. gen. 580 829; w. superl. 665a; wish 721 b. [ rapoF (-pSo6 424. 18. GREEK INDEX. 3 S rapc[tw impers. 494. [605.!7rTrc 217; compar. 221 d. MrTvw 438, 4. 334 c. rdpEtlg 406, 1 c; w. dat. 7rp 105 d. 110. 850, 3; w. 7rrfvOrn, -Pdcw, 443 D,'i. TrapdXw w. two acc. 556; part. 795 f. lrtpa6owco 446 D, 4. mid. 690. 7repa compar. 229. 7r'wv 219 D. 221 d. 7rap['"racuat w. dat. 605. 7repas 168. 7rX (7rekAouaL) 424 D, 35. wrdporae(v) 79 D; 7rapo'rTe- 7repow 424, 18. 422, 17. 7rka (T7rfurA7,l) 403,'7; (7re pos 224 D. 7rdpacw 424D, 36. 383 D. Adw) 428 D, 21. 401 D, ~rapotlvwEo 315. 408 D, 43. 7rXhay (7rhAovow) 428, 5. rdpos w. inf. 769. nrept 649-51. 70 b. 102 b. rX d'o 328 b. 7ras 158 f. 160 b. 161. 259; 616; w. num. 493 f; w. &rAac (7rdccw) 424, 20. w. art. 537; vras TrI 514 inf. 781; in comp. 605; -7rAdouos mult. 258 b. 585 i b. 683 b; rav w. gen. irE'p for i'epi 633 b. wrdavo 430, 6. 559 c; w7avTt 610.'rep 615. 112. nlhacataas 612; -ao-t 205.,racdo 430, 5. 7rEpLyyvo/Lat w. gen. 581.'hE'es, -as, 223 D, 5. arovoav 222 D. repLopd&o w. part. q99. rXe7;, (zrkeov) 223, 5. 660 dL 7rdoxaw 447, 13. 409 D, 14;;reprbrroro w. dat. 605.'Xe-Zos 210 D. fT 7raahv' 789 c. Wreptor'S.evosy 90. Trelo"TdLts 259. raTrdacw 427, 19 a. 428, 5 a. re'pvWVL 443 D, 5. irXeOwv, WrXe'w, 223, 5. xaxreolLat 448, 8.'repvot(y) 79 &. rA-ckoo 424, 20. 7raTrp 173; wt. art. 530 c. 7res, 7reTr, (7r,~r1-w) 449, 4. 7rXeoveKre'o w. gen. 581. lId'rpotcXos 199 D. ro'owo 429, 1. 7rXEos 210 D. iraa, 421, 19; mid. 688; 7rETdwvyVu 439, 3. 7TXEOv, r.evies, 223 D, 5. w. part. 798. HleTreCs 146 D.'rXevpd 199 D. lraxds compar. 222 D. 7rroyTa, r rETa/Aat, 424, 19. erXAo (rTxv, ArXev) 426, 3; vreiov, wt. art. 530 b. 384. 408, 5. 422, 18. 377. 371 b; w. ace. 544 a. 7reawc 295. 284. 384 D. 409'rEsvaoyat 425, 14. ran'ws 210. D, 15. 417. 425, 8; pf. Irddpov 433 D, 7. arXios ace. 549 b; dat.'12; mid. 688; w. acc. retpvJTres 425 D, 16. 609; w. pl. 514 a. 547 c; w. dat. 595 b; 7rl, 7r, 248. 608. 105 b. krXvb6s 202 D, 28. 7rlEr'TEo' 806 b.' 7rTyvv/U 442, 12. 408 D, 41. vrxwa 403, 7; w. gen. 575. irefcco 448, 9. 417. 7rXiA w. gen. 589. 626. rewdoI 371 c; w. gen. 576. 7rqdcw w. acc. 544 c. irkXqpoW w. gen. 575. rIELpatevs 190 e. Ilhqi'rds 466. r-XTioLdCw w. dat. 602. rwepdoyLa w. gen. 576. m.irXcos 247. xro'oi[o, compar. 221 c; w. 7rwepap 168 D. n7rbKa 248; w. gen. 589. gen. 589. 7repwo 432, 13. ri'Xvs 153 i. 185. w' Xoow 428, 5. 397 a. 7reire6W 448, 9. IrL to o'r 429. 7rXivaos 139 a; coll. 514. 7rceAd~o 428 D, 21. 408 D, riietpa 219 D. -7rAoos, -rXovs, multipl. 258 22. 8349 D; w. dat. 544b. la ('rdetw) 425 D, 8. b. 585 i. [584 b. Tr(e)xda&o, r'eXdw, 428 D,21. 7rtvpl/yi, -ydw, 443 D, 6.'rAovo'os 468; with gen. rexeIrvs 153 i. 185. [384D. 7rtu7rX/tci 403,,7; w. gen. 7rXovTreo w. gen. 575. IrEXoLyaL, ireXw, 424 ID, 35. 575. r.oX (5r7A5cw) 424, 20. rv'erds 258 d. 7rttrpntUl 403, 8. 7rXv (Or&co) 426, 3. vrenre 253 D. 7rlYi6oco 426 D, 4.?rXyco 433, 3. nrdc/r 424, 17. 391 b; w. vrtco 435,4. 378. 408, 15. rXTco 426 D, 3. 408 D, 25. ace. 547 a. [584b. 416, 7; w. gen. 574e. 7rv.,& (7rvv, rvev) 426,4. re'vls 218. 220; w. gen. 7rtr[olaco 446, 1. 377. 369 D. 408D, 30 rer, (7raocrXw) 447, 13. rlnrpdoacw 444, 7. w. ace. 547 d. rerEo 371 D c. 7rt7r'w 449, 4. 409 D, 17. rvl-yco 424, 21. reia dat. 611. 7rlo'e o with dat. 595 b; Ilvd6 202, 14. re'roaoe 409 D, 14. pass. 694 a. wo (7rircw) 435, 4. [825,'re~rpWVfi 509 b.' raLrts 460 a. r4aev, roa4/, 248. 1065 b Fri'rrW (7rEoo'e) 429, 1. rtouvpes 255 D. vroawo 420, 8. 371 D c. 350 GIREEK INDEX. nr63, 7ro~A, 248 D. 105 b. 7rora/'ds attrib. app. 500 a. lposavadw 3 1 D c. 7ro?, 7rd, 248. 105 b. oTdaotuaL 424, 19. [ff. wrpseL,tu w. dat. 6( 5. =or0ew incomp. pred. 490 c; rr-E, WOTES, 248. 105 b. 825 7rposKPEL w. gen. 571; w. om. 508 b; w. two acc. lIOTEI3aV 32 D h. inf. 595 b. 763; irpos' 555; w. part. 797;- 7r&dEpos 247; *T'rvepo, (7r4- Kov 793. 797. mid. 690; mid. w. two Tepa) 831. 733. wrpJa'E(v) 79D: w. gen. ace. 556; —Ed (caKFOs) -oTi for 7rnps 73 D. 652. 589; w. 7rpfI 769. 7roito 788; w. acc. 544 a; 7roTva, nrdTvza, 218 D. 7rpostvveW 438, 3 a. w. part. 801. 7roT-dv 73 D. 7rposTraX~a~ ace. abs. 792 a. 7roLa (7refco) 295. nrov 248. 105 b. 590 a. 825 /rpd4cW w. roi 590 a. vroos 247.825ff; 7rors 247. if; w. gen. 589; nro'7l'p4scJr6' 199 D. VronTrvco 472 k. 426 D, 4. 248. 105 b. nIrp'TEpos 224; w. art. 532;'roAeuewo, -[ICo, -4-o, 472i; r'ovXv 4TErpa 218D. rpT'pEpoi, 552 a; rpdrTenroAebdu[t 328 D. 7rovXVs 212 D. 219 D. pov'rpv, 769. vr5Als 185. 186 D; wt. art. 7rovs 153 f. 161. 170. 191. 7rpOTr' 76. 652. 530 b; dat. 607;,6Xas,rpa (,-tl'npv7,,) 403, 8; (n,- 7rpOTOv 525 d. [C. 87 D; n'dXrvSe 203 D.' rpda'cw) 444, 7. 7rpovpyov 68; compar. 221 7roIxTE-Co mid. 690 a; pass. rpaa (7r'p aw) 424 D, 36. rpdqoacos dat. 608. 694 b. 7rpaos 219 a. n7poq'po w. gen. 581. [D. 7roAlct(s) SOD. 259. [b. 7rpdoiw (7rpay) 428, 6. 387 npdcppaoiar, nrp-p4pwov, 219 nrotaactAdoios, -7rAo.so, 258 b; w. ace. 547 d; two lrpoxwpe? impers. 504 d. nrroXhaX~ 258 c. ace. 553; w. ~6, Kaaos, 7rpvqTatrs wt. art. 530 a. 7roAoaosr4s 257. 684; mid. 553. 578 c. vrpcos compar. 221 c. 7roXAvtr-op 15 a. 7rpE&rw 595 b. 763. r'pdc10ToS 224 D. nro,,s 219; compar. 223,'pio'Ba,'paoepactpa, 219 D.'prWTOr 224. 488 c; ('b) 5; w. article 528 a; w. rp'EoeBCVw-h, 7rpEOJ3EL,G 202, -rpCTov 552 a; T'rjv 7rp&gen. 559e; ovb roXds 15. [mid. 690a. Tn, 509a. 842;-(,rb) wrokX, (r&) nrpe~,3eco w. ace. 546; rna (7rencrd'vuA) 439, 3; nroAXXa, 552 a. cf. 528 a. rpEo-,vs 202, 15. 219 D. (nerrop/at) 424,19; (rTrto" 610; nroAAXo 575 a; 7roX- rpeaotvrns 202, 15. ow) 428 D, 7. A'wo 610; &rnl roA, 493 f. npacwo 403 D, 8. rnrafpw, n7r-dppv[uat, 442, 13. 496; —-reh.ow, n-7c',, w. n-pta 408, 8. 401 k. 450, 7. 7rTEppouo(a 214 D. art. 528 a; wt. 1 660 d;;nph 878; w. inf. T69; w. mrn -oow 428, 7.408 D, 23. Oi LrAE'Troi 528 a. fin. verb 771; rb VrpSV rn[ooW 430, 7. noptn-' 455 c. 457 c. 524. nWTO (nrfrnw) 449, 4. 7roup (n~rnrw) 424, 17. 7rpi~ 421, 17. rrTvXl 202 D, 29. 7ro0ew 420, 9. Vpo (rn&pwnrat) 424 D, 37. rnwot 419, 20. rov, (n.doaXo) 447,13. pipJ 625. 652. 68; w. com- 7rcTcow 428, 7. nop (Eropov) 424 D, 37. par. 661; w. inf.'781; 7rTwoXs compar. 221 e. r.ops (nrip6w) 424, 18. nrpb TOO 525 d. nrvu (nrvvdvolza1) 437, 7. nropE4co 424 D, 36. irpofBafo wv. ace. 544 c. rIvro? 205. rrop co. mid. 689. nrpJ4eotys 614. rIviywcs (rn'v,) 202, 14. 7rdpco w. gen. 589. 7rpoavtpoCuat 413. -'ca'ros 224D. rcopqpwo 472 k. 7rposica 552. rvvrdo/Aat 437, 7; w. gen. vro~e 248 D. 7rpoKcatXfopta 420 D, 5. 576. 582; w. part. 799; IlooEIMS, (-dwy, -E'o, -av) pKrpCKE1al w. gen. 583. os?yb 7r. 667. 26 D. 32 D h. 172 b. 175 c. 7rpocrwnco intrans. 685. 7rip 153 n. 161. 199. r'o'os 247. 825 ff; gen. 578'pdA.l~4ns 726. n7rp for ~pp 40 b. b; dat. 610. r'povoeojac 413. 7rd 105 b; w. ov (x4S) 848 b. noods 247. 7rpJs 652-4. 76. 73 D; in rJs 248. 105 b. 825 ff; w. nrooor 47 D. 154 D b. comp. 605; w. compar. gen. 589; n7rs ov dLcEhaA 9r4on-os 257. 661; w. inf. 780. 782; 711; 7rcs 248. 105b. r-4r for 7ro4s 73 D. adv. 615; hyperb. 885. GREIEK INDEX. 351 P, 18. 22; w. t 58; metath. -s nom. sing. 123. 136 a.1 -ai(v) 3 sing. pl. 79 a. -355 in 2 aor. 383 D; see 150. 154. 156. 195 f. f. 361-2. 400 a, h. Liquids. 400 f. -0.za, -0-is, fem. 460 a. p, p, 15. 43. -s dat. pl. 129. 143. 150. aiycow aor. 708. p stems in, 152 n. [828 c. -s ace. pl. 150. 195 h. 0'1y4 dat. 608. pd 865. 70 D. 105 D; * pa -s 2 sing. 355 ff. [467 c. -/-plos adj. 471. pd3bos 139 e. -s patronym. 466; gentile eZTos 200. ay (P~yvvpui) 442, 14. -aa fem. adj. (part.) 214. aow7radw 379. pas (paico) 392 D. -aa: 2 sing. 355. 363. 400 c. aK 6th class 330. 444 if. paros compar. 223, 7. acaipw 432, 14. ao iterative 410 D. pavco 392 D. Zahapi7'i 612. [504 c. 0-ds7rT-w 427, 15. paLw 421 D, 24. rarxrtco. 328 b; subj. om. aicads (a.iccp) 167. pd',cro. 427, 13. a-apj7r 254. aeadvyvuvu 439, 4. [416, 6, pwov, p,.-ors, 223, 7. -a-av 3 pl. 355 if. 400 d. ie'AAXc 432, 15. 408, 10 pe (edpvica) 450, 8. a-aJw 431 D, 5. aCesi'rouat 427, 16. pea, peZa, 223 D, 7. ia-r (a-i4w) 425, 2. aK-Crrw 427, 17. jpe (pe) 428, 14. aavcb 40 b. 83 b. a-i8vytlu 443 D, 8. pew (pv pev) 426, 5; w. lapircv 197 D. aCeA (a-,EXAco) 408, 10. gen. 575. [D h. adTTojuat w. gen. 515. aicore'w 427, 16; mid. 690; f45yvpUv 442, 14. 334 d. 400 a-avTov 235. w.' 743; w. iwsr 7 56. p-'1tros, 57T-repos, 223 D, 7. a-dpa 22; D. aicJros 197. pf'yw, 448 D, 16. a-ap1s 176. 220. 227 D.:KZAxV 125 D. pjyiwCO, (pSLryAJs) 223 D, 10. aac-Tepos 210 D. [416, 5. a-,cTro, 427, 18. piyJco 371 d. a-,elvuLt 440, 3. 408, 9. K-cdp 167. p4SdJ-ev 203. -a- for C-56. a-udco, 0a.pXw, 371 c. [c. CP7irs'r 448, 10. [14. -ae local 204. — o 2 sing. 355 if. 363. 400 USbrmw 293. 284. 410D. 427, a- 230. 105 a. ad- 7r, adp a, 431 D, 5. Pis 153 m. a-eavToO 235. 6'70. 676. ao-, aov, 230. 105 a. -pos adj. 471. -eBoyuat 46 b. 413. a-dos 210 D. PvauuJs 46 a. 460 b. 887. -e7o, oa-ev, 233 D. a-opsJ 139 b. pv (p'Sc) 426, 5. -aeiwo desider. 472j. oJr 238. 675-7. [450 D, 8. pvo/ua, 405 D b. a-ed, 421, 17. 308 D. 426 D, a-r (a'roral) 424, 8; (eDaor)'pv7rJco 319 D. 9; subj. orm. 504 c. a7rav,'aw w. gen. 575. PW'Y (P{'yvU'm) 442, 14. a-;'as 182 D. a7rdw 419, 6; mid. 689. PScyvJcL 441, 2. 0ae-vdss 46 b. 4'1. 547 c. a-7refpco 432, 16. a-Eo, a-ED, 233 D. a-revbwo 49. 381. 391 c. (a-, s) 5 a. 16. 18. 22. a-eeco 426 D, 9. 308 D. 319 a-7retos, a-7reos, 178 D. r after mutes 47. 372 a; D. 367 D b. 381 D. 408 oa7rosr 139 a. after v 48-52. D, 31. a-rovsdcwo 379. a- bef. cons. 54-6. aECo)vTroD 235 D. a7rov6uh 25 D; dat. 608. a- from T, see 7. [8 a. a-ruEioP, appos. 502 b, c. a- 41-2. 60. 328 a; see s a- to h 63. 312 a. 332. 424, 0a-pSepov 62 a. doubled. a- omitted 54. 55. 64. 178. a.-7rw 425, 2. 417. -aaco verbs 328 a. 428 if. 183; in -a-al, -ao, 363. a-s 160 c. a-T abbrev. 5b. 401 c; in tense-sign 345. a.- after cons. 54. ara ('1a.r iup) 403, 5. 374-6. 378. 381-2. -a-6a 2 sing. 356 a. 357 D. aT'rdrau 200.' added to vowel-stems 400 g; in-,eeaSa 355 D d. 0a-raauJs 200. 342. 390. 421. 455 d. -a-ae, -.a-o,'-a.-o', 355 ff. a-Tdats 62. 476 b. [D. 308 D. -acwo, — a.wv, -a-aoo-as, 358. a-TdXvs 153 i. r doubled 40 D. 247 D. 344 -a-i 2 sing. 355-6. 406 a. a-T-elow (a-o'i) 425, 9. r tense-sign 344ff. 372ff. -a-0(v) dat. pl. 79/3. 129. a —reX0o (a-ltX) 425, 10. 381 ff. 394. 395. 143. 150. 154.159.195d. Te0XXwo 290. 278. 284. 489, movable 80 c. 80 D. -a-i() locative 205. 79 y. 17. 385 2 GREEK INDEX. OTEYWrV4r 139 c. crq)s 238 D. [D. Te' for o' 233 D. orTepyo 424, 22. ~(pc5, aopw, etc. 230. 233 Tre'prm'os'72 a. or-eptoiccw, oTepEoW, Tr-rEpo- ocpcolTepos 238 D.'Tet' 233 D.!.al, 447, 7. ox, 0-Xe (eXw) 424, 11. retLco 433, 5. ~revTaL, -To, 405 D c. rXoxaors compar. 221 b. -ietpa fem. 459. rT(y7ua 5 b. 254. 0odw (trw, oow) 431, 5. TeTiXos wt. art. 530 b. rirxos 202 D, 30. 898 a. woKCpCT('S 179. 198. TreIws, T7Eos, 248 D. woro 125 d. o'&ca wt. art. 530 c; acc. TEIC (-'ISCw) 449, 5. [D b 0-ToX, -TdXhos, 457 a. 549 a; dat. 609. TEKcAap, ~EIIcLwp, 153 D. 201 rTopy (reT'pyw) 424, 22. [4. oaos, oas, 210. TezlApLoov appos. 502 b, c. oa'ope'vvLuv, o'TpyVUL, 440, ao0-wp 172 b. IT-EXEos w. gen. 587 e. o-To0XadoliZ w. gen. 574 c. a-4pwoY compar. 221 d. TeXevwTc' 788. O-TpdTev/la coll. 514 a.'reX4., 288. 284. 370 D b aorpawev'o w. acc. 547 b; T, 16. 19 ff; to a 66; to a 374. 419, 14. pass. 694b. 45-6. 62.76. TE'os ace. 552. rTpaT7r1.E' w. gen. 581 a. T dropped 47. 49 iff. 75. wTExWw 435, 9. 394; w. acc. OTpaTJwrEooy wt. art. 530 b. 155. 165 ff. 355. 386 a. 546; w. gen. 574 e. o,~pe'cpw 424, 23. 389. 414. T 3d class 327. 427. TezLow 435 D, 9. crpcvlwuL 441, 3. -Ta for -Tr-s 136 D a; voc. Te'o, reroo'I, 244 D. r0vToEw 448 D, 17. sing. 135. -1o4Y (-e'a) 804ff; subj: -TuvceXo(W 328 D. Ta (TrwEv) 433, 5. om. 494; o-ia om. 501 ov (oeo6) 426 D, 9. Tay (Teraycv) 384D; (r-dO- a;. plur. 518 a. av 230. 485 a. ow) 428, 9. [D. -TEso verb. adj. 261 c. 398. auy-yeuhy w. gen. 587 d. -Tai 3 sing. 355 ff; Tal 239 804ff; w. dat. 600. ovyL7yo'YCS~KW w. gen. 5'77 Tar (-icwo) 425, 3. -eos for ao's 238 D. a; w. dat. 605. Tadas 213. 156 c. Tepar 168. rvlyc7rK,-os 139 d. TraXa (ridXaroa) 408 D, 6. TEp'pr/ 213. [247. v-yXaLpw w. gen. 577 a.. TaXa 99. -wepos compar. 220 ff. 238. vAXdow w. two ace. 553. TrdAvw 435 D, 9. TepIrw 424, 24. 384 D. 397 V6XXas, AXXAa, 136 d. TaI ('Tav) 202, 16. D; w. part. 800. [38. yv/lat'vw pers. constr. 777. T[7rapds 68 c. TrepooatL, Trepoatvw, 424 D,.rA'as w. art. 537. Tavwo 433 D, 5. TEoaaoapes 255; Tee'oepes, op61cA*kos w. gen. 587 a; TdtLs dat. 609. T eoaoIeporTa, 255 D. w. dat. 603. [adv. 615. Tapa oow 428, 8. [TET'/o (e A) 384 D. o-vv 628. 52; in comp. 605; Tapr (re p7rw) 424 D, 24. TE'Tope 255 D. ovvaLpEow; (W's) o'UEXdLwtI Tap e6es, rapopeCal 219 D. Terpaivow 449, 6. 382 b. ehreLv 601 a. 772. a-doo 428, 9. 338. 392. TeTpaarXy 258 D. ouvvaTdw 3'71 D c. -TaTos superl. 220 f. [234. TeTpds 258 d. ob'vuo 258 a. Tah'Td, TaVTJd,,TauT6,, 68 c. TETpaoL 255 D; TETpawTO -.oy~7 fern. 464b. TadTfl 248. 608. 253 D; TreTpaXad 258 D. aryoioa w. part. 799 a. Tap (darroTw) 427, 5. 66 c. Te) 244D.'vTeCoYW; T'ya vs'TELW w739. Tdq)pos 139 b. TEV, Treois, TEUs, 233 D. VvTpets 258 a. Taop~c 425 D, 17. Trevx (rvy7XXdv) 437, 8. vf,'rTpLgBoat w. gen. 574 b. TdXa 70 c. 227. TevXw (vTX) 425, 15. 392 D o~s 185. 161. 153 i. 63. rTaXs compar. 222. 66 b; 437 D, 8. o~dpcoi (Topay) 428, 15. hP., TaX'l 0To'r 552. 509 a. TE(Xn om. 509 b. oapdXxw 432, 18. dcwv 239 D. TEWC, TEwY, 244 D. C-drTTw 428, 15. [230. Tacs 199. TEwS 248 D. oqpe 105 D. 233 D; opea -Te 2 pl. 355ff. rs 433 D, 5. opeasr, opeZas, etc. 233 D. we for ae (Trtari/A) 403, 2. Tj'Se 248.'cSETepOS 238. 6575-6. Te 855 if. 70 a. 105 d. 511;* TKW 425, 3.417. i-cp(() 79 D. 105D. 233 D. after art. 534 a; after TAe 229 D. qfoplt 105 a. 230. prep. 616.,r1Xeerdw' 432 D, 6. GREEK INDEX. 353,~XAtcos, -dsae, -oiros, 241. t'~yw (Tla'y) 425 D, 18. -rps fem. 459. 247. 679.:l' o-is 477. Tpio'rs 258 b. rvXho, TrhAoTa'ow, 229 D. -To 3 sing. 355 ff. rpLTra7os 488 c. -r:sepov 62 D. T1'ev,,'ids, 248 D. [d. Tp'rTaTos 253 D. ~r/zqos 248 D. [356 b.'rot 852, 11. 68c. 70 D. 105 Tp'X (aptp() 66 a. -T'P 3 dual 355 iff; 2 du. T-o for oS 239 D; for roft Tp'LX 258 c; TpFXca, pLX ~rytcKa, -4cfe, -aUTa, 248. 233 D. [rot, 867, 5. ad, 258 D. -Tflp masc. 459; sync. 173. To7yap, TroL7apov^,'roiydp- Tpota 12 a. -Tlplo, neut. 463 a. oftvvv 867, 4. -rpo, neut. 462. -Trs.masc. 459. 467 b. 135. TroTor, roLsSe, Troiov'ros, TrporEw 424 D, 25. 136 D a. 241. 247. 679.. Tpr7os ace. 552; dat. 608;.-T's fern. 464 a. cf. 152 e. TosSe(o(r)L, Tort'ae, 239 D. wrpbs Tporrov 653 a. r.o'(,) 239 D. Toc (rtcr) 449, 5. ipocp (Tpe&rw) 424, 25; (rpe -a for a 40 b. T{'Aj/La 125 d. pwo) 424, 26. ri to o-a 60. 328 a; to a- -Trov 2, 3 du. 355 if. rpvuP (apv'7rrw) 66 c. 62; inserted 469.'rvos 90. [666. Tp&c?6w 425, 4. 334 d. -ri 3 sing. 355. 400 D a. -TJs verb. adj. 261 c. 398. Tpc6s 160 c. 406 a. ToaavTcdKis 259.'rpcow (i-'LpKWo) 445 I)D, 6. TIE (TeTrq) 386 D. TdaoS,. Toao'-S, roo-o7'roS, TT 41; see ao-, -aao-W. TL rJ/zL 403, 2. 297. 301. 65 241. 247. 679; *Too'o'TO Tv for av (46iw) 420, 2. c. 347 D. 355 D e. 400- 552 a; T'aoO'06T 610. T-6 for oa- 233 D. 402; mid. 689; TtrJue- T'dTe 248; w. part. 795 a; TvYXdWo 437, 8; w. gen vos 28 D. Ei TC'' T(Te 613. 574 c. 582; w. part. 801. rfICTW 449, 5. 332. 387 a; o TOO from TIS, T's, 244 b.'vX4d, 552 a.'Ie&ic, 786 a. TOVPyarTo, 68. UVK (TEVXw) 425 D, 15. TriLL 279. 285. 335; w. TOTepoZo 68 D c. 72 D. TV7P1 233 D. gen. 578 a. T4ppa 8248 D. TVrTCr 427, 19; w. cogn. T~LjUnS (-14ets) 214 D. - pa for Tep dat. pl. 173. acc. 547 b. 555 a.,tLoVwpEC mid. 691. -'pa fem. 462 a. i-vpaePow w. gen. 581 a. ify for -of 233 D. Tpa (TrIrpao) 449, 6. TV-cAS w. gen. 584c. TZO, Tri;,VLL, 435, 5 p. PaCY ('rp6cyw) 425, 4. T5dw 424, 28. 66 c. Tir(o)re 38 D. rpa.yq5Ss 12 a. TV(p6Ss 199. Ttpvvs S1 b. 74 d.' pafrfroliev (T'4p'rw) 397 D. TvX (.TEXW ) 425, 15; (Tryu -TiS fem. 459. 460 a. Tpd7rw, -4Eo, 424 D, 25. XdcVW) 437, 8. rSt interrog. 244. 247. 105 pdpco 424 D, 26. TSX'7 gen. 592 a; dat. 608. b. 682. 825 ff;'rt 552 a; TpacXo 450 D, 5. -ToW, -TOV, — w(oa, 358. Tb'i 538 d; 1',a'i- 508 Tpe~Is, Trpfa, 253. 255. TC- from'iSs, Tls, 244. b; t['o'To 508 a; T-pE'7rwo 424, 25. 389. 397k?; TrOhJaEs 68ID c. TroUTO urotes 556. mid. 688. 689 a. -Twp masc. 459. rls indef. 244. 247. 251. Tp-cow 424, 26. 66 c. 334 a. Tc-s 250 D. [D c. 105 b. 683; coill. 514 b; 389; w. two ace. 555. T-EvT4 llDb; TWVbTO 68 after article 534 a; om. TpExw 450, 5. 66 c. bef. gen. 571; supplied'lpo 419, 15. T, vow. 7ff. 12c; v- 15; from oU6ets 881; ey-ys TP2X (pd(o'o-&o) 428, 8. V- 15 D. 7T 552 a; d e' TLIS, Tar -pta fem. 459; quant. 130. v to ev 30. 326. 425 if. tzdP Tt, etc. 525 a. Tplds 258 d. v interch. with o, co, or C,,'tTatavw 433 D, 5.'pICto 424, 27. 27. 186. [86 if. TLTpdwo 449, 6. 335 a. - p[tCw (TpLy) 428, 16. v not elided 70 d; quant.'r'pcia-iCo 445, 6. [D, 15. TprIprls' 17e7. v om. 39. 190. 328 e. 426. -riLTiKoioaL 44X7 D, 17. 425 Trpcis 258 D. v stems in, 152 d, i. 185 Fti rtlw 435 D, 5. [10. Tp'VXca'-Los, irp'Aiov's, 258. 6vl3X?,a'Aeav 73 D. r-Aa (gr`TXv) 408, 6. 409 D; T'ri7rAl 258 D. vepo-r'-s compar. 221 f Tr/xe ('e/xUVw) 435, 9.'i,l'rovs 191. y?1~s' 178. 16 354 cIREEK IND)EX. -v0pLov neut. 465 a. 45, 17. 19 ff; doubled 40 b.,4ya, -'cw, 411 D. V'8op 167. p bef. r-mute 44; bef. pu ro'p 454 b. ve to v 187 b. 46; bef. ~ 47. Ox, (7rEfpvo) 433 D, 7. VL diphth. 11 ff. [D. pa (qPalvw) 432 D, 19; (q(7- Oofiep6s 471. Yu to v 401 D 1; to vL 186 Itx) 404,2; -refpauat 433 pooBE'o w. pf 743. -vua fem. part. 216 b. D, 7. Oo,3os dat. 611; w. bui7 I8; v`ds 202, 17; om. 509,. {ay (eilw) 450, 3. cdBovae 203 D. vUE, V/Es, etc. 233 D. (paeivs, pacva'raros, 221 D. Po7vZZ 164. vLE&repos 238. 675-6. paEsow, Oadr',m', 432 D,19. )ov-ow 472 j. vyU,, w'A,, vl'f,, 232. opalvco 291. 282-3. 284. 343 )popE'w 371 D c. V/.pe, etc. 233 D. 15 D. D. 386 c. 387 a. 396 D. dpws 166 D. iL,u(v) 79 D. 414. 417. 432,19; aor. ~ppyvuvp, 442, 15. [D. ivpEus 238 D. pass. 708; mid. 688; w. pdpoa (ppa6) 428,17. 884 -vv acc. sing. 171. part. (inf.) 797. 802. dppaWco (cpway) 442, 15. -'oo denom. verbs 472 h. qcavEpds w. part. 797. cppeap (qpp7n'/s) 167. v'r for vrd 73 D. Ocos 166 D. Op&v 153 m. [D. nraf 655..bcKai 444, 8. 404, 2. cppooam (qpKt) 428, 10. 360 v'7rap 201 b. [part. 797. (6ia)pao'oKw 446:D, 4..cppvlo'LS dat. 609. vi7rpXw w. dat. 598; w. qei8o/Aal 425, 11. [D. ppovr,'wi, W. wU 743; w. va'ros (6irep) 224 a. [781. 4 ev (7rEov)) 433 D, 7. 384 o0rws 756. inrEp (ibrEtp) 633-4; w. inf. lEpTEpoS, -Ta'os, Opw'pros, qppovrw'Trs w. ace. 544 e. Zr7eplOcew w. gen. 583. 223 D, 1. c pov~os 72 a. S'repae(v) 79 D. (pepcao 450, 6. 349 D. 384. Opovpls 72 a. V7rEp'epos, -raros, 224 a. 406 D, 4; om. 508 b; w. vq6aye 203 D.,vreppai(voar w. gen. 583. part.800; *epJE,'os7S8. pvyds 218.. v7r-epOv&s'Ws 817 b. (peV w. gen. 592 a. (pvyaCyvw (pEvyw) 425, 16. vir'e5vos w. gen. 584 d. (Peu'yw 425, 16. 377; w. -l'~vs adj. 178. [202 D, 11. vrh1coos w. gen. 584 c. ace. 544a; w. gen. 577 /(pXvAac 457 a, c; vXaKcos virmpea~a w. dat. 595 d. b; pr. for pf. 698. p6vAa5 163. 454b. v7rLvoXuEatL 438, 6. 332; (plyos 139. 4wvAco-oao 428, 11; W. ace. mid. 692. qu1d 404, 2. 10lOc. 400-01. 544 a; w. xi{ 743; uvnv7rvw 370D c. 450,8 a; Opaat 504 c; ov Tac'reo, 806 b. v6rJ 655-7; w. pass. 600. nprz 842.,' cp)tos 471; w. ace. 544 e 693; in comp. 605. |pis 105 c. [part. 801. vnpco 345 D. v7r5Iwucos w. gen. 584 d. pqdvco, 435, 3. 408, 7; w. vtors acc. 549 b; dat. 608. v7r6dKELaa w. gen. 578 a; w. cpaefpw 432, 20. 386 c. Obw 423, 4. 386 D. 408, 17. dat. 605. | av6aco 411 D. [D, 27. 416, 3; pf. 712. aro7rTe6aO 315; w. p{i 743. t(pmvw 435, 6. 401 D 1. 408 owpdoptat w. part. 739. 7r1d7xe~yos w. gen. 587 e. paoveco w. dat. 544b. 595 os 160 c. viroeXrjs w. gen. 584 d. b; w. gen. 577 a. Oc6s 1531. 160 c. 166. vsroXos w. dat. 595 c. Op&h'os w. inf. 767. (5ta)cp5o'ico 446 D, 4. Vs 153 i. 63. [aop (Oeipow) 432 D, 20. vufvin 199 D. -P,(v) 206 D. 79 D. X, 17. 19 ff; bef. -.mute vo'-cdrlos 224 D. [613. O (peta8oat) 425 D, 11. 44; bef. t 46; bef. a va'rerpaia w. gen. 585; dat. (piXavaaXCo7Js w. gen. 587 a. 47; doubled 40 b. Vr-Tepeo 691. pLXA'w 280. 287. 835. 448 xa3 (xavadvw) 437 D, 9. v6orepLCO w, gen. 581. D, 18; w. two ace. 555. Xdcoa 428, 18. o'E'epoS (-Taros) 224. 488 1tAouoeiBs's 40 D. xalpc 432, 21. 31; w. c; w. gen. 585. (Pidx7roAar 217 c. ace. 544c. 547 c; w. fOozv, 6'Lo-or 223 D, 12. [piAos compar. 221 c. 222 dat. 611 a; w. part.'0. Iv5Lre'r'iXos 28 D. D; w. dat. 595 c. Xaxdw 419,7. r61.'W 421, 11; VEL 504 C; (LJAoTl/eouam 413. xaXe7ratvc w. dat. 5 vov'ros 791 a. bAdaW 419, 4. xaXNE7TrJ w. dat. 595 e. GREEK INDEX. 355 XaX.Er'&s pipw w. dat. 611. Xpwco 421, 8. c1K poos 43 D. XaAzo,6dpela 219 D. XpJa 125 d. cMc6s 212 D. 222 D. Xav, Xv, (Xa'raKw) 444, 9. XpoJ'os 591. 613. -cv masc. 463 c. [195 c Xa,'odw 437 D, 9. Xpv~,vui, XpCow 441, 4. -wv gen. pl. 128. 142. 154. Xap (Xatpw) 432, 21. Xp~s 169 D. &Sv part. 406, 1. xapites 214. 50 a. 158 e. Xv (XC'O) 426, 6. &z 24 D d. 866. 220. 470, 5. Xc', X,, 68 a. 72. &CEouaL 450,7. 312; w Xdpis 153r. 171. 221 g; Xrv'vvjl 421,9. gen. 578 a. acc. 552. 677. X&oi/at w. gen. 577 a. dwup, arapw7ros, 68 D c. XdmKcc 444, 9. Xc~Pa om. 509 b. cs'sWr w. gen. 584 e. Xlco 428, 19. Xwpis w. gen. 589. 626 r. 6pa dat. 613; w. inf. 767 XeL&WvY gen. 591. c&pasa w. gen. 587 e. XClp 153 n. 202, 18; om. I', 17 a. 21-2. 47.74 b. Z5paco 205. 509 b; EtS Xe7paS 602 a. -4 masc., fem. 152 o. 163. &pLrTos 68 D c. XepoV,, -l0oos, 223, 2. d/cuuos 139 a. ws stems in, 181 iff. yEL'ao/aL 437 D, 9. *dp 153 b. -ws Att. 2 decl. 146; 8 xe'w 426 D, 6. [2. av'cn w. gen. 574 b. decl. 182; gen. sing. Xepet'ov, Xepi', etc. 223 D, dcod 421, 4. 371 c. 186. 190 a; adj. 210; Xw (xv, Xev) 426, 6. 378. *E for ope' 233 D. pf. part. 216; adv. 225 ff. 381. 408 D, 32. DeIrzouac w. acc. 547 c; w. &s 103 c. 112. 248; uses XAxJs 139 b. gen. 580. 875 a-g; w. pred. 489 e; x;/cv 153 m. ijjpos 139 a. w. gen. 589; after pos. X' to aa- 60. 328 a. *hXo 421, 4. [609. 659; w. superl. 664; w. XLzAds 258 d. 4'vX', wt. art. 530c; dat. aor. 706; in wish 721; XT'&v, Kca&,,, 66 D. /xowo (vy) 424, 29. indirect 733 ff. 868, 2; Xt.~v 153 m. final 739 ff; w. part. 793. XAaS (KeX.acScs) 360 D. 1, vow. 7 if; from o, see o. 795 e; in exclam. 815 Xo3 (XE/w) 428, 19. co for o 360 D; for ov 24 a; o.s TdXLaOTa 821; w. Xopeow w. acc. 544 c. D d. 371 d. princ. verb 823. Xop7yo W. acc. 546. w, V, interch. 25; w, vl, 27. &s prep. 621. 614. 103 c Xovs 202, 19. oW in Att. decl. 146ff. [d. &is 112. 104 a. 248. 250. x.O 421, 9. p diphth. 11 ff; for ol 371 &s for oUS 202 D, 13. xpa (KXpptui) 403, 9. 335 a. -w fem. 193-4; gen. sing. (s7rFp 876, 2. 850, 3. 110. Xplauoew 448D, 19. 136Db; adv. 229; 1 251; w. acc. abs. 793; Xpdoo/acz 335 a. 371 c. 370 sing. 267. 352 a. i5srep El 754; i'srepouv Da; w. dat. 607a; in &68; w. voc. 119b. 543 251. part. 788. a; w. ace. 545; w. gen. j5sre 876, 4. 867, 6. 856 a. Xpdw 421, 3. 335 a. 592 a. 110; after pos. 659; w. XpEos 178; XPE'ws 202, 20. oryaae 68. verb. 770-71; subord. Xpeciv 404, 3.`e 239 a. 248. 853 b; expressed by X~p 404, 3; w. case 544 c;,SX 12 a. 32 D e. pronoun 813. 822. w. inf. 764 b; impf. 703. -"&ds adj. 481 a. owr stems in, 1521. Xp-,ua dat. pl. 609.'cWSs 153 m. wu diphth. 11. XphoL'iLOS 471. &~afcw 448, 11 312. 410 D. wCVros, w'rTds, 11 D b. 68 D Xpyawrs 137; Xpgj/-n s ib. ~IKa 227 D. cjXpLdC 472j. 356,ENGLISII INDEX. ENGLISH INDEX. Abbreviations 5 b. 675 b; w. rls 683; w. inf. 767; w, Ability, adj. 469 a. fp~ 840;-Verbal. adj. 261 c. 398. see Ablative in Lat. = Gr. gen. 557. 579 if. reos (re'o,, z-a) in Greek Ind. Seo 589. 590 b. 191; = dat. 594. 627. Neuter, Attributive, Predicate-Noun. Absolute, gen. 790 if. 593. 582; ace. Adjuncts of participle 795. 792 f; compar. 662. Adonic verse 917 a, b. Abstract words 117; nouns of number Advantage, dat. 596 if. 258 d; verbals 457; in comp. 474; Adverbial ace. 552.'72; part. 788. in plural 518 c; w. art. 526: 529 iff; Adverbs, elision 70 c; enclit. 105; forparticiple 786 b. mation 225ff; compar. 228ff; deAbundance, adj. 470. monst. 239 a; correl. 248ff; neg. Acatalectic verse 891. 252; numeral 253; of div. 258 c; in Accent 89ff; in- decl. 120ff; 1 decl. aiis 259; in comp., w. aug. 316; 128. 135 a. 137; 2 decl. 145. 149; 3 pred. adj. for adv. 488 c; w. art. 492 decl. 160. 172 b. 173. 175. 179. 186; f, h; w. ace. 545; w. gen. 588 if. 781; adj. 207 b; pron. 232. 233 D. 239 D. w. dat. 602 b; w. T1 683 a; w. p4m 840; 244; verbs 365ff. 370 Da; Mt-forms prep. as adv. 615; rel. adv. 811a. 400 k. 401 k; eZ1J 406 b, c; in forma- 817. 819. 875 ff. tion 456 if; in comp. 479;-rhythmic Adversative conjunctions 862 if. accent 894. Aegean islands, Ionic of, 2. Accompaniment, dat. 604. Aeolic, dialect 2. 3 a; digamma 23 D; Accusative 115c; in decl. 127. 148. aor. opt. 349 b; poetry (basis) 916; 150. 154. 155. 157. 171. 195. 198; dactyls 918. contr. 36 b; with Be 203; adv. 226. Aeschines, Attic of, 3 d. 228; —Synt. 544ff; app. w. sent. 501 Aeschylus, Attic of, 3 d. ff; w. gen. 574b; w. dat. 595 a; w. Affection of body, verbs of, 472j. comp. vbs. 605; w. prep. 617 ff; w. Age, demonst. 241; correl. 247. inf. 773ff; ace. abs. 792ff; inf. as Agent, suff. 458-9. 457 c; gen. 582a; ace. 780; rel. sent. as ace. 810. dat. 596. 600. 805; w. pass. 693. 624 Action, suffixes 460. 469 a. 476 b; ex- c. 653 b. 656 b. pressed by tenses 262. 695 ff. Agreement, gen. rules 497 if; pecul. of Active voice 260; fut. pf. 264. 394a. number afid gender 511ff. [917 s. 713; no voice-sign 343; conn. vow. Alcaeus, Aeolic of, 3 a; Alcaic verse 349 if; endings 354 ff; trans. and in- Alpha priv., see a in Greek Ind. trans. in diff. tenses 416ff;-Svnt. Alphabet 5if. 684ff; act. for pass. 767 a. Amphibrach 888. Acute accent 89 if. [680 a. Anaclasis 925 a. Address, voc. 543; nom. 541; w. oTros Anacoluthon 886. Adjectives 207 ff. 114. 132. 144. 158 e, Anacreontic verses 925 a. f. 174ff. 177 ff. 187-8; formation Anacrusis 896. 468 if. 457 b; comp. 473 ff;-Synt, Anapaest 888; anapaestic rhythms 912 658 if; equiv. 492; adj. pron. 492b; ff, logaoedic anap. 916. 919. w. subst. 487 if; agr't 498; fem. wt. Anastrophe 102. subj. 509 a; of place w. art. 536; w. Anceps, syllaba anc. 897. ace. 548ff; w. gen. 584ff. 559c, e; Antecedent 491; agr't 503; om. 510 w. dat. 595 c. 596 ff; w. poss. pron. 504 c; in rel. sent. 807 if. ENGLISH INDEX. 357 Antepenult 85 b. Attributive 488 if. 492 d-h. 498. 512 b. Antibacchius 888. 523; appos. 500a; subj. om. 509; Antispast 888. w. article 526. 531 ff; w. cogn. acc. Antistrophe 898 c. 547; w. ace. of specif. 549; part. 785 Aorist 262ff. 266ff; augm. 307; iter. if. 788 e; re]. sent. 807. 810. 410D;-Synt. 696. 705 ff.:716ff. 704; Augment 307 ff. 355. 368 b. in wish 721 b; subj. w. jp 7.23; in Auxiliary, El[u 385. 392-3. hyp. per. 746; subj. for fut. pf. 747 Bacchius 888; bacchic rhythms 928 ff. a. 760 a; part. act. 791 c. Barytone 91ff; stems 171. 179. Aorist, First, stem-vowel 337; tense- Basis 916. 923 a. sign 344 ff; mode-sign 347 D; conn. Boeotia, Aeolic of, 2. vow. 349; endings 364; accent 367; Brachylogy 881. formation 380 iff; in Ka 402; transi- Breathings 14 ff. 89. tive sense 416. Bucolic, poetry 3 b, d; caesura 910. Aorist, Second, stem-vow. 334 a; conn. Caesura 893. 67 D d; masc., fem. 910. vow. 352 d; accent 366 if; formation Cardinal numbers 253. 255 if. 383 if; pu-form 267. 336 b. 353 b. 399 Cases 115 c; def. 201 ff;-Synt. 539 if; if. 408: formation in ~ 411D; in- of infin. 779 if; in rel. sent. 807 ff. transitive sense 416. Case-endings 114. 154. Aorist, Passive, pass. sign 343 D; mode- Catalectic verse 891. sign 348; conn. vow. 353; endings Causal conjunctions 869 iff. 354ff; formation 395ff; in depon. Causative, verbs 554; use of act. 686; verbs 413. 415. use of mid. 689 b. Apocope 73 D. Cause, gen. 558. 566. 572 g. 577. 578 c. Apodosis 732. 744. 851. 862 b. 592; dat. 594. 611. 782; circumst. Aposiopesis 883. part. 789 c. 795 d, e; gen. abs. 790 c. Apostrophe 70 if. Characteristic, gel. 568. Apposition, kinds of, 500 if. 547 d; in- Choliambus 904j. finitive in, 766. Choriambus 888; choriambic rhythms Appositive 489'; agr't 499 f. 512c; 924. [D. 128 D. subj. om. 506; subj. implied 523 b, c. Chorus, as indiv. 519 a; song 898 e. 86 675 b; attrib. as app. 533; pron. 538 Circumflex accent 89 if. 88 e. e; rel. sent. 823 b. Circumstantial part. 787 if. 800 a. Aristophanes, Attic of, 3 d. Classes of verbs 325 ffi 1st. 325. 331. Aristotle, dialect of, 3 e. 404ff. 419ff; 2d. 326. 372c. 386b. Arsis 894. 28 D. 86 D. 88 D. 387 a. 425 if; 3d. 327. 427; 4th. 328. Article 119. 239; crasis 68; proclitic 428ff; 5th.329.326.331.407.435ff; 103 a; w. aV'rOs 234; for rel. 243 )D; 6th. 330. 331. 332 a. 444ff; 7th. 331. — Synt. 524ff; agr't 498; attrib. 492 448; 8th. 332. 403. 449; 9th. 333. a, d; w. indet. subj. 496 a; w. gen. 450. part. 559 b, d; w. aS'by ai-oTO 674; Close vowels 10. 11. 27. 30. 32. 33. 67 w. ofos 816; w. ye' 850, 1; of incorp. D b. 17 1; stems in, 1-51. 185 if. 401 1. antec. 809 a. See Neuter. Cognate, mutes 19; accus. 547 if. Asclepiadean verse 920 f, g. Collective subject 514. Aspiration, rej. or transf. 65 ff; of lab. Common, dialect 3 e; quantity 87; or pal. 341. 387 b. 392 a. gender 118. Association, dat. 594. 602. Comparative, adj. 220ff. 174ff; adv. Asyndeton 854. 228 if; - pos. 221D; from subst. Atona 103. 224D; pron. 247; ending 238a. Attic, dial. 3 d; 2 decl. 146 if. 184. 210; 257. 259;-Synt. 659 ff; w. gen. 585. ending 186; redup. 321. 332. 387; 581; w. f 586. 860b; w. dat. 610; future 376. w. inf. 768; conjune. 875 if. Attraction 807 if. Completed action 262. 318. 695 if. 715. 358 ENGLISH INDEX. Composition of words 473 if; -v in, 52; Co-ordinate, mutes 20. 44;-sentences elision 71ff; div. of syll. 84; refi. 724a. 751. 818c. 853 a. pron 235; recipr. 237; indef. rel. Copula 490 a; omitted 508 a. 246. 251; prep. in comp. 614ff. 620 Copulative, forms wt. art. 530 c; con if. 544 d. 685. junc. 855 if. Compound words 452. 473 ff;-Subst. Coronis 68. 130 c. 135. 172b. 180. 191;-Adj. Correlative, pron. 247 7; adv. 248. 209. 217 (; w. gen. 584b, c;-Verbs, Crasis 68 ff. 72; accent 99. aug. 313 ff; redup. 323; accent 368; Crete, Doric of, 2. w. gen. 583; w. dat. 605;-Sentences Cretic 888. 900 b; rhythms 922 if. 724ff. 826 b. 856 b; —NTegatives 832 Dactyl 888; dactylic rhythms 908 if. ff. 843. Dative 115 c; euph. 50'70 f. 79; accent Concession, part. 789 f.'790 e. 795 f. 121. 149b. 160; in decl. 126. 129. Concessive conjunctions 874. 143. 150. 154. 159. 195; (p for, 206 Conclusion 744ff. 874. D; Synt. 594ff; w. prep. 617 ff; w. Concrete words, pl. for sing. 518 c. inf. 776; w. ror, TrEov, 805; inf. as Condition 744 iff. 783. 874; w.,uA 835. dat. 782; rel. sent. as dat. 810. 839; indet. 722a; infin. 770; part. Declarative conjunctions 868. 789 e. 790 d; part. w. dative 601a; Declension 114. 122; 1st. 123 iff; 2d,, part. w. g& 803 a. 138 if; 3d. 151 iff; irreg. 197 ff. Conditional, sentences 744 ff. 728ff. Defectives 153 D n. 201 ff; adj. 218. 835. 862 b. 863 a; conjunctions 872 223 D, 2, 5. 227 D; compar. 224; if. 830. perf. 321 D; perf. part. 318 D; aor. Conjunctions 853ff; crasis 68; syniz. 345 D. 384 D. 69; elision 70 b. 100; proclit. 103 c; Definitive apposition 500 d. 547 d. wrXv 626 r; in fin. sent. 739 ff; con- Degree, of comparison 220 if; of differ. dit. sent. 744ff; w. part. 794; rel. ence, dat. 610. pron. for conj. 822. Deliberation, subjunc. of, 720 c.'28 ff. Connecting vowels, accus. 195 i; loc. 735 b. 737. 755. endings 203; verbs 346 ff. 267. 355 Demonstratives (pron. and adv.) 239 ff. D e; 6th cl. 330; ace. 366 if; pr. inf. 247 ff;-Synt. 678 if. 669 c; as antec. 371 a; Fu-forms 400 h. 401 h, 1. 407 a. 810 a; w. art. 538 a; w. interrog. 409; iter. form. 410 D;-patronym. 826 a; w. 68 851; of ref. 491; agr't 466; compounds 473 a. [587 d. 503; art. as dem. 524 iff; rel. as dem. Connection, gen. 558. 563. 572 d. 576. 525 8. 243. Consonants 16ff; euphony 40ff; div. Demosthenes, Attic of, 3 d. of syll. 82 ff; position 86 ff; stems in, Denominatives 453 if; denomin. verbs 151. 157. 195 i. 324. 332. 334 a. 338. 265. 315. 472. 2onsonant-deciension 122. 151 ff. 195 ff. Dependent, Sentences'24ff. 853; ap211 fif. 36 b. pos. 502; w. gen. 570. 582; subj. of Contingent, d& 744. 710 b.'741. 873. part. 792b; w. interrogatives 826; Continued action 262. 695 if. 714. w. negatives 833. 835 ff;-Questions Contraction 32 f; crasis 68; quant. 88 682. 825 if. 830ff. 836; —Verbs w. f; accent 98;-in subst. 132. 144ff. indir. refl. 670 a. 147. 168. 174ff. 176ff. 180. 181-ff. Deponentverbs 260; of/ut-forms40lk. 185ff. 189ff. 193;-in adj. 208. 214 404; w. aor. pass. 413; w. passive D. 215. 221 d;-in adv. 225;-in meaning 415. 694 c; use of mid. 692A verbs 370ff; aug. 312. 313; redup. Derivative verbs 265. 322; pass. sign 343; fut. 345. 373. Descriptive apposition 500c. 374ff; opt. 348; plup. act. 351 a; Desiderative verbs 472j. w. (o)aL, (O)o, 363; jut-forms 400 h, i, Designation, gen. 558. 561. k. 401 c, k, 1; iter. 410 D;-in forma- Determinative compounds 482. tion 455 a;-in verse 892. Diaeresis 13. 89. ENGLISH INDEX. 359 Dialects 1ff; dialectic formations, in comp., sup. 220 if; 238 a. 257. 259; verb 410 ff. verbs 354 ff. 400-01; suffixes 454ff. Diastole 11 3 a. Epic dialect 3 c. Digamma 23 D. 39. 61 D a. 86 D. 87 D. Epicoene 118. 254. 312 a. 473 a. 483 b. Epitrite 888. Diiambus 888. Epode 898 e. Dimeter 890; tioch. 902 b; iamb. 907 Epsilon-class 331. 448. b; anap. 914. Equivalents of subst. and adj. 492 if. Diminutives,- sufi. 465; neut. 117 c. Ethical dative 596. 599. Diphthongs 11ff. 14. 89; contraction Euphony of vowels 24ff; consonants 34; before p 43; crasis 68 a; syniz. 40ff; final sounds 67 if. 69; elision 70 D. 455 b; quant. 86 ff; Eupolidean verse 920 i. stems 158 a. 189 ff; augm. 310. Euripides, Attic of, 3 d. Dipody 889. Exclamation, nom. 541; ace. 546; gen. Direct, compounds 477. 480; middle 592 a; rel. 815 a. 875 a. 688; object 486. 544. 595. 684. 687; Expectation, modes for, 720 if. 728 ff. question 682. 828 ff; sentence 734 ff. 747 ff. 760 c; of answer 829. Disadvantage, dat. 596 if. Extent, ace. 550; gen. 567. 572 h. Disjunctive,. questions 831; conjunc- Fearing, fin. sent. 743; w. pu~ ov 846. tions 860 if. Feet, in verse, 888. Dispondee 888. Feminine 115 a. 117 b; 2 decl. 139; 3 Distich 898 b; elegiac 911.' decl. 152ff; adj. 207a,b. 211; wt. Distinction, gen. 581. 584g. masc. 218 D; irreg. 219; 2 pf. part. Distributives 258 a. 338 D;-fem. caesura 910. Ditrochee 888. Figures of syntax 880 ff. Division, adverbs of, 258 c. Final, sounds, euph. of, 67 ff;-cons. Dochmius, dochmiac rhythms, 928 iff. 74ff;-vow., in compar. 222;-sellDoric, dialect 2.3 b; future 377. tence 739ff. 728ff. 835; —conjunc. Double consonants 21. 22. 40. 86. 319 871;-syll. of verse 897. a; double object 553. Finite modes 261 a. 354; Synt. 719 if; Doubling of cons. 40ff. 247 D. 308D. pred. 485; agr't 497. 539ff. 511 ff; 319 D. 344D. subj. om. 504; w. irptv, 65sTe, 771. Doubtful vowels'7 f. First tenses 266 a. Drama, Doric in, 3 b. Fitness, adj. 469 a. Dual 115 b;-Synt. 511 b. 517. 521. Formation of words 452 ff Duplication of contract vowel 370 D a, c. Formative lengthening 28 Duration, gen. 567. 572 h. Fulness, adj. 470. See Plenty. Effect, ace. 546. Future 262ff. 266; teIlse-sign 344ff; Elegiac (pentam.) 909 i; distich 911. conn. vowel 352 a, d; formation 372 Elements of verb 306 ff. if; trans. 416;-Syntax 696. 710 if Elision 70ff; in div. of syll. 84b; ac- 712a. 718; univ. truth 697; pres. cent 100. 111 c; in formation 455 b. for, 699; subj. for, 720e; in rel. Ellipsis 880. - See Omission. sent. 756; w. ovf,, 845; —Fut. mid. Emphatic; enclit. 111 b. 232; pronouns as act. or pass. 379. 412;-Fut. pass., 241.242. 251. 504 a. 667 ff. 673 ff. 680; endings 354ff; formation 395 if. negatives 845. 848 a. 858 if; particles Future Perfect 262 iff. 266; redup. 318; 850 f. 860 a; subj. of inf. 775 b; om. tense-sign 344; formation 394; Synt. of art. 530 c; prolepsis 726; place of 696. 713. 712 a. 718 a; aor. subj. for, &v 783 c. 747 a. 760a. Enclitics 105 ff. Galliambic verse 926 i, j. Endings 114; 3 decl. 154; accented Gender 115 a. 117ff. 139. 152ff; het160. 173; local 203ff; adj. of two, erog. 200; adj. of one, 218 a. 221f; 209 ff. 217; adj. of one, 218. 221 e pecul. of synt. 511ff. 360 ENGLISH INDEX. Generic article 526. 529 if. Impersonal verbs 494 a. 504 e, d. 518 a. Genitive 115 c; accent 121. 149 b. 160; 575 a.'764b; part.'792; v. a. iln l'Eo in decl. 126. 128. 136-7. 140. 142. (7ea) 804ff; pers. for impers. 777. 150. 154. 195; 5ev for, 203 D; cpL for, Improper, diphthongs 11.11 lb. 14. 89; 206 D;-Synt. 557 if; as attrib. or hiatus 67 D e; prepos. 614. 626. pred. noun 492e, h. 509B. 531; w. Inceptive, class 330. 444ff; aorist 708. X pLz, 8f1cWr,, 552; w. caus. verb 554; Incorporation 807 ff. w. dat. 595 d; w. prep. 617 if; w. Indeclinable 245. 255. 853b. compar. 660; w. poss. pron. 675 b; Indefinites (pron. and adv.) 247 ff. 244 w. inf. 776; w. part. 786 a; gen. abs. if. 236; enclit. 1005;-Synt. 683;790ff; inf. as gen. 781; rel. sent. a,s indef. action 262. 695ff; frequency gen. 810.'29 b. 749 a. 760 c; subj. of inf. 774. Gentiles, suff. 467; adj. 468 b. Indefinite Relatives (pron. and.adv.) Glyconic verse 917. 920-21. 246 if. 251. cf. 257;-Synt. 681 if; as Gnomic aorist 707. indefin. 816a; as interrog. 825ff; Grave accent 89 ff. irxws 876, 3. Groups 889. Independent, nom. 542; sentence w. Hellas, Hellenes, 1. ov, Au, 833 ff. Hellenistic dialect 4 f. Indeterminate, condition 722 a; subj. Eephthemimeris 889. or obj. 494 ff. 504 d. 505 d. 509 c. 510 Herodotus, Ionic of, 3 e. c. 513 c. 518 a. 563 b. 791 a. 792 b. Heroic hexameter 910. Indicative 261ff; conn. vow. 347b. Hesiod, Epic of, 3 c. 349 ff; endings 355 if; tenses 696 ff; Ileteroclites 197. in simp. sent.'19. 721 b; dep. sent. Heterogeneous 200. 727. 731 a; indir. sent. 735; fin. sent. Hexameter 890; heroic 910. 742 ff; hyp. per.'745 ff; rel. sent. 755 Hexapody 889. if. 7 61; w. neg. 834ff. 845. Hiatus 67; at end of verse 897. Indirect, compounds 478. 480; middle Hippocrates, Ionic of, 3 c. 689; object 486. 594ff.'765. 806 a; Hipponactean verse 900 m. 904j. questions 682.'733. 830 ff; reflexives Historical tenses 263; endings 355ff; 670ff; sentences 733ff.'730. present 699. Inferential conjunctions 865 if. Homer, Epic of, 3 c. Infinitive 261; conn. vow. 349..352 d; Hyperbaton 885. endings 359; accent 367; /u~-form Hypercatalectic verse 891 b. 400-01;-Synt. 762ff; w. subj. 485 Hypodiastole 113 a. c; w. obj. 486 b; w. pred. noun 490 Hypothetical, indic. 746b. 736a. 755. d; equiv. of subst. 493 c; as subj. 783 b. 803 b; period'744ff; rel. sent. 494a. 518 a,b. 792a; om. 508c; 757 ff. 730. 835. 839. antec. of rel. 513 c; w. Kal T(dv 525 b; Iambus 888; iambic rhythms 903 ff. w. Trov, of purpose 592 b; w. pos. for Imperative 261; bt of, 65 b; conn. vow. compar. 659; w. compar. 660 c; w. 349. 352; endings 358; accent 366; ueAxw 711; of nor. and fut. 717 b. perf. act. 385; Ln-form 400-01; fut. 718; w. &pexora 721 b; w. dep. sent. for, 710 a; in simp. sent. 719. 723;'725; in or. obl. 734 c. 738; for supp. in hyp. per. 745. 747. 751; in rel. part. 802; w. 4ors 804a; w. rel. sent. 755; inf. for, 784; w. /i 833; 813. 814; w. neg. 837 if. 847. w. ah 851. Inflection 114ff. Imperfect 262ff. 266; aug. 307; 3 pl. Influence, dat. 594ff. mid. 355 D e; formation 324 iff. 369 Initial vowels 14. 15; erasis 68; syniz. if; /lu-form 336 a. 399 iff; iter. 410 D; 69; elisiorr70; aug. 307. 312;-irn form. in & 411 D;-Synt. 696. 701 ff. itial a 63. 712 a; in wish 721 b; for pres.'735 a; Insertion of mute 53. 392 D. in hyp. per. 746. Instrument, suff. 462; dat. 594. 607. ENGLISH INDEX. 361 ntensfve, pron. 234. 669. 674; w. art. 324. 345. 394; fut. 373; 1 aor. 382-; 638b; w. dat. of accomp. 604;- 1 pf. 386 a; pf. mid. 391. verbs 472 k:-particles 850 if. Litotes 665 a. nterchange, of vowels 25 iff. 334 (see Local, endings 203 if; conjunc. 879. Variation); in formation 455 c;-of See Place. quantity 190 f. Locative case 205. 594. [nterest, dat. 594. 596 ff. 689. Logaoedic rhythms 916 if. Interjection 543. 592 a. Long vowels 7 if; contraction 32. 33; interrogatives (pron. and adv.) 244. syniz. 69; quant. 86 ff; accent 93 iff; 247 if. cf. 257; Synt. 682. 825 ff; w. augment 309. art. 538 d; as pred. acc. 556; oVKcoWv Lyric poetry 3 a, b, d. 866 a;-interrog. sentences 824 iff. Lysias, Attic of, 3 d. Intransitive verbs 486. 684 if. 777 b; w. Manner, adv. 248. 875 if; dat. 594. 608 ace. 544ff; w. dat. 595b; w. gen. if. 782; aor. part. 717 a; hyp. rel. as subj. 571; w. inf. as subj. 763; sent. 758 if; supp. part. 801; OTlVY mid. 690 a; pass. 694 b; mixed sense, 3grcs 812; quest. 824 if. trans. and intr. 416 if. Masculine 115 a. 117 a. 152 if; for fem. Inverse attraction 817. [925 ff. 209. 212 a. 217ff. 518 d; dual 521; Ionic, dialect 2. 3 c; feet 888; rhythms for neut. 513 c. 559 e; for person in Iota subscript, see L in Greek Ind. gen. 520;-caesura 910. [b. 575. Iota-class 328. 428 if. Material, adj. 470; gen. 558. 560. 572 Irregular, decl. 197 if; adj. 219; mean- Means, suif. 462; dat. 594. 607. 782; ing in verb-forms 412 if. part. 717 a. 789 b. 790 b. Ischiorrhogic, iambic 907 c. Measure, gen. 558. 567. 572 h. Isocrates, Attic of, 3 d. Mental action, gen. 576. 584 c. Italy, Doric of, 2. Metaplastic 199. Iterative formation 410 D. Metathesis 57. 173. 340. 383 D. 386 c. Ithyphallic verse 900 c. 902 b. 394. 397 D. 398 D. Kindred, names in Eds 145c; accus. Metre 887. 547 a, b. Mt-forms 267. 353. 336; aor. subj. 347 Koppa 254. D; opt. 348; endings 355 D e. 356 c; Labials 19. 22. 48; aspirated 341. 387 inflection 399 ff; iter. 410 D. b. 392 a; labial stems 152 o. 163 ff. Middle mutes 20. 22.40. 87 b. 327. 328 a, b. 427. 429. Middle voice 260. 343; conn. vow. 349 Lengthening of vowels 28 if. 48 ff (362). if; endings 354 iff; fut. 379. 412;57. 156. 1.61. 214. 221; augrm. 307; Synt. 687 ff. 694c. 806b. redup. 320; after Att. redup. 321; Mixed, class 333. 450; senses, trans. verb-stem 326. 425. 335ff. 345. 372 and intrans. 416 iff; forms of supposib. 382; pass. sign 343. 347 D; perf. tion 750. [714ff. part. 360D; e'w to Edl 370 Db; /zm- Modes 261. 719iff; tenses in, 697 ff. forms 400 m, n. 400 D i. 401 b, n; in Mode-signs 346 if. 357 a. 400 i. 401 i, L formation 455 d. Modern Greek 4 g. Lesbos, Aeolic of, 3 a. [bers 253 if. Molossus 888. Letters 5; names neut. 117 c; for num- Monometer 890; monopody 889. Likeness, dat. 594. 603. Motion, obj. 551; w. prep. 617 if; w Line, verses used by the, 898 a. adv. 879. Linguals 19. 22; ling. stems 165 if. 328 Movable letters 78 if. cf. 70 g. a, b. 386 a. 430; ling. verbs 345. Multiplicatives 258 b; w. gen. 585 i. Liquids 18. 22. 46. 48. 57 (340). 83 a; Mutes 19. 20. 22. 44-5. 46. 47; and li. mute and liq. 87. 221 a. 227 D. 319 b; quid 87. 221 a. 227 D. 319 b; —stems -liq. stems 158b. 172 ff. 324. 328c, 158 c. 324. 326. 396 b;-verbs 324; d. 334a. 337; 1 perf. 386c; 1 pass. fut. 372a. 375 ff; 1 perf. 386a; pf. 396 a; 4th class 432-3;-liq. verbs mid. 391. 862 ENGLISH INDEX. Nasals 18. 22. 83 a. 347. 352 a, c;-na- 786; antec. 510. 810 iff; article 530; sal class 329. 435 ff. obj. after Ac 545; rls, Tl, 571; 8e Nature, long by, 86. 575 a; f 660 d. 769; liv 746 b. 748; Negatives 80 a, b. 252. 255; w. Acl 545; subj. w. inf. 774ff; part. w. rvwyXdvco w. &pX~Y 552; w. superl. 665 a; w. 801 a; before 07rcos 756; in fin, sent. fut. for imper. 710 a; w. imper. 723; 739; hyp. per. 752 if; rel. sent. 759. fearing 743; et 6, Ari after, 754b; 819. 820; gen. abs.'791;-omission purpose 781 a; —Neg. sentences 832 of thesis 895. if. 858 if; foll. by &aA' 1 863 c; by Open vowels 10. 11. 25. 27. 32. gTlL A 868 c. Opposition, dat. 602.. Neuter 115 a. 117 c. 152 if. 218; pl. w. Optative 261; mode-sign 346. 348; sing. verb 497 b. 515. 511 i; in app. conn. vow. 348. 349. 352 b; endings w. sent. 502; attrib. 509 c; for masc. 357; accent 365. 95 b; -pf. act. 385; or fem. 522 ff; pronoun w. gen. 570. pf. mid. 393; pt-form 400ff; aor. 582; verbal in -Teos 804b; relative and fut. 717b. 718; in'simp. sent. 813. 823;-neut. art. w. gen. 563 b; 719. 721ff; dep. sent. 729ff; indir. w. inf. 778ff. 837. 847; w. part. 786 sent. 735ff; fin. sent. 739ff; hyp. b;-neut. adj., as adv. 226. 228; as per. 748 ff; rel. sent. 755. 757 ff; w. cogn. ace. 547c. 548; as adv. acc. neg. 834 ff. 55.2 a; w. gen. part. 559 c; as degree Oratio recta, obliqua, 734 ff. 749.'773 b. of diff. 610. 836. 837 b. Nominative 115c. 70f. 123. 125. 136. Ordinals 253. 256. 257; w. ace. 550ci 141. 150. 154. 195. 197. 199;-Synt. w. aiSrrs 669 a. 539 iff; as subj. 485; agr't 497; in Orthography 5 if. app. w. sent. 501; w. inf. 775. 784; Orthotone 105 b. 111. w. reos 804 a; inf. as nom.'779; rel. Oxytone 91 iff; stems 158 b, e. 193. sent. as nom. 810.' Paeon 888. 922. Notation of numbers 254. Palatals 19. 22. 48; aspir. 341. 387 b. Nouns 114 ff; of number 258 d. 392 a; pal. stems 152 o. 163 ff. 328 a,b. Number 115 b; heterog. 200; defective Paroemiac verse 913 e. 914. 915; loga201; in verbs 261 a; pecul. of syntax oedic 917 g, h. 511 ff;-words of, 247. 258 d. 259; Paroxytone 91 iff. w. art. 528 a; w. gen. 559. Participle 261. 156 b. 158 f. 160 a. 214 Numerals 253 ff; w. prep. 493 f; w. art. ff; 2 pf. 338 D; conn. vow. 349. 352 528; w. o l 7rd'es 537. ff; endings 360. 362; accent 367; Object 486. 493 d; indet. 495; orn. 505; pf. w. eIgtd 385. 392 ff. 713; 1p-form accus. 544; of motion 551; double 400ff;-Synt. 785 if. 762; w. obj. 553; w. cogn. ace. 555; w. pred. 486b; w. pred. noun 490 d; equiv. acb. 556; gen. 573 if; w. inf. or part. of adj. 492 c, d; agr't 498; om. 508 762 b; as subj. of inf. 776; w. supp. c; attrib. 531 if; w. dat. of interest part. 796; w. reos, Te'ov, 804. 806; 601a; compar. 666; neut. pass. 694 inf. as obj. 764ff; quest. 824ff. See b; aor. and fut. 717. 718; w. dep. Direct, Indirect. sent. 725; in or. obl. 734 c; w. e'os Objective, compounds 480. 479; gen. 804 a; w. interrog. 826; w. neg. 839. 558. 565. 572 f. 677. 841; w. 7r'p 850, 3. Obliqua, see Oratio. Particles 849 if; accent 112. 105 d; w. Oblique cases 116; as obj. 486. indef. rel. 251; of wishing 721 a, b; Odes of Pindar 898 e. adjuncts of part. 795; interrog. 828 Omission, of diaer. 13 a; vowels 38 if; ff; neg. 832 f. aug. 307 D. 309 D. 311 a; redup. 318 Partitive, appos. 500 b; gen. 558 ff. D; cons. of redup. 319; tense-sign 571. 572 a. 574. 337. 345; stem-vowel 339; endings Passive voice 260. 264; w. oa 342; pass. 361ff; —of subj., pred., obj. 504ff. sign 343; aor. opt. 348; conn. vow ENGLISH INDEX. 363 853; endings 354 ff; formation 395 Plenty, gen. 575. 584 b. if; in dep. verbs 413. 415; as mid. Pleonasm 884. 414;-Synt. 693ff; w. indet. subj. Pluperfect 262 ff. 266; aug. 307. 311; 494; w. ace. 553. 555. 595 a; w. nom. redup. 318; conn. vow. 351. 353; 2 for ace. 556; w. dat. of agent 600.; sing. 363; 3 pl. 355D e. 356 c; forw. prep. 624c. 653 b. 656 b; w. inf. mation 385 ff; jL-form 399 ff;-Synt. as subj.'763. 696. 706. 112a; in wish 721b; in Past time 263. 307. 696. 698 if. hyp. per. 746;-plup. pass. 494. 600. Patronymics, suff. 466. Plural 115 b; w. sing. vb. 497 b. 515 if; Pause, caesural 893; at end of verse pl. and sing. 514ff; pl. and dual 517; 897; in sense 86 D. pl. for sing. 518. Pentameter 890; elegiac 911. Polyschematist rhythms 921 a. 926 m. Pentapody 889. Position, long by, 86. 221 a. 227 D. 319. Penthemitneris 889. Positive 220 if. 659. [598 a. Penult 85 b. Possession, gen. 558. 562. 572 c. 587 c. Perfect 262ff. 266ff; redup. 318ff; ac- Possessive pron. 238. 675ff; w. art. cent 367.; formation 385 ff;-Synt. 538 c; art. as, 627 d;-poss. com696.'712. 715; univ. truth 697; pres. pounds 481. for, 698; aor. for,'7<6. Possessor, dat. 596. 598. Perfect Active; part. 216. 353. 791 c; Possibility, w. superl. 664b; modes'719 stem-vow. 334. 338; cons. aspir. 341; ff. 728 ff. 747 ff. 760 d.'71. tense-sign 344ff; mode-sign 348; Postpositive 849. conn. vow. 350; w. pres. form 350 D. Potential opt. 722. 730.'735 c. 743. 752. 359 D. 360 D; pui-form 267. 353 b. 399 755. 783 a. 803 a. if. 409; intrans. 416 if. Praepositive 849. Perfect, Middle; euph. 51; w. a 342; Praxillean verse 918 g. 2 sing. 363; 3 pl. 355 D e;-Passive, Predicate 485; w. acc. of specif. 549; w. indeterm. subj. 494; w. dat. of om. 508; —pred. noun 488ff; agr't agent 600. 498-9. 511ff. 518. 622ff; om. 507; Periphrastic fut. w. pdXec'711. subj. om. 506; w. attrib. part. 532 a; Perispomenon 91ff. w. art. 535 if; in nom. 540; in ace. Person 230 if. 261 a. 354 if; subj. 485 a. 556; in gen. 572. 568; in dat. 607; 504; rel. subj. 503 a; two or more w. inf.'773ff. 784; inf. as pred. 763; subj. 511; 1 pl. for sing. 518 d; 3d interrog. 826 a; v. a. in r'ros 804 if; for 1st, 2d, 672; person in gen. 504 c. pred. part.'787 ff. 505 c. 520.: Predication, incomplete 490. 572. Personal, pron. 230 if. 667ff. 671. 675; Prepositions, crasis 68; elis.'70 b; apoc. for rel. 818 d; equiv. of subst. 493 b'73 D; accent 100. 102. 103b; w. pron. gen. w. art. 538 a; as eth. dat. 599; 232. 243 D; tmesis 255; aug. 313 ff; -endings 354ff;-constr. forimpers. in comp. 474. 477. 482. 544 d. 583. 777; constr. w.'e-os 804ff. 605. 685;-Synt. 614 ff; w. obj. 486 Phalaecean verse 917 q. a; w. case, for adj. or subst. 492 g, h. Pherecratean verse 917. 920-21. 403 f. cf. 488 c; bef. 6 pEr, 6 3e, 525 Phoenician alphabet 6 c. a; bef. words wt. art. 530 b; w. avr'bs Pindar, Dor. 3 b; odes 898 e. aviroi 674; w. inf. 780 ff; om. in rel. Place, adj. 224 D. 536. 587 f; —adv. 56. sent. 820; w. ye' 850, 1.'9?. 248 ff. 589. 590. 879;-endings Present 262ff. 266 ff; formation 324 ff. 203ff; names 214ID; suff. 463; de- 369ff; conn. vow. 352; endings 355 sign. wt. art. 530 b; gen. 590. 559; D e,; Lu-form 267. 336 a. 353 b. 399 iff dat. 594. 612; w. prep. 620ff; dem. -Synt. 696ff. 714. 702. 107.'12 pron. 678 a; in rel. expr. 812. 813 a; imper. w. p'723. hyp. rel. sent. 158 ff; quest. 824ff. Priapean verse 920 h. Plato, Attic of, 3 d, cf. Remn. Primitive verbs 265 if. 8364'.NGLISH INDEX. Principal, dialects 2; tenses 263. 355 if; 493b; w. art. 538 a; w. compar. sentences 724 ff. 823 b; verbs, w. inf. 660-a; w. mid. 688 a. or part. 763 iff. 787 iff. Relatives (pron. and adv.) 243. 247 Af Probability 747. 7711. 250. 68; Synt. 681. 491. 755 ff. 807 ff; Proceleusmatic 888. agr't 503. 513 b; antec. om. 510; af Proclitics 103ff. ter art. 525 c; as demonst. 243. 525 Prolepsis 726. 777 a, b. B; as interrog. 825 b; as conj. 853 Pronoun 230 if. 667 if; enclift. 105; di- b; w. particles 866. 251; w. 7rp 850, astole 113a; of ref. 491; adj. pron. 3; w. 6' 851; art. as rel. 243 D;492.b; subst. pron. 493 b; w. indet. rel. sentences 755ff. 807 ff. 728 ff. 710 subj. 496 a; app. w. sent. 502 a; or. c. 504 c, d. 862 b. See lndefinite Rel 504 a,b. 505 b; w. art. 538; w. -y' atives, and Reference. 850, 1; w. &h 851. See Neuter, Rlef- Resolution in verse 892. erence, Personal, etc. Respect, dat. 609. 767 a. Pronunciation 9. 11 a, b. 12 b, c. 13. 14. Restrictive article 526 ff. 16. 17. 21. 86 a. Result, suffixes 461; infin. 770 Proparoxytone 91 iff. Rhythm 887. Proper names 126 a. 136 d. 146 D. 172 Romaic language 4g. b. 180. 189 D. 198; attrib. app. 500a; Roman letters, for Greek, 5. 12. 15. 16. nation as sing. 519 b; with or with- Root 265. 222. out art. 530 a. Rough, breathing 14 i. 80 a. 310 a. 332; Properispomenon 91 if. mutes 17. 20. 22. 40( 65 a. 319. 338. Prosodiac verse 913 c; logaoedic 917 i,j. Sampi 254. [917 r. Protasis 732. 744. Sappho, Aeolic of, 3 a; Sapphic verse Protracted class 326. 425 if. Scazon 900 m. 902 a. 904j. 906 a. Protraction of vowels 28 f. 335 if. Second tenses 266 a. 423-4. 428. 432. Punctuation 113. 67 D c. Secondary dialects 2. Pure vowels and syllables 85 a; a pure Semivowels 18. 22. 40. 126. 130 d. 168 D;-pure verbs 324. Sensation, gen. 576. 584 c. 345 a. 372 b. 374. 386. 393 a. 396 D; Sentence 485 if. 724 if; equiv. of subst. w. added a 342. 390. 396 a. 421. See 493 d; as subj. 494 a. 504 c, d. 518 b; Vowel-stems. in appos. 501 if; connected by conj. Purpose 710 c. 739 iff. 756; inf. 592 b. 853 if. See Simple, Compound, IDe781 a. 765. 770; fut. part. 789 d; w. pendent, etc. pA 835. Separation, gen. 580. 584f. Pyrrhic 888. Sharing, gen. 574. 584 a. Quality, pronouns of, 241. 247; suffixes Short vowels 7 if; interchange 25; con461 b. 464. traction 32; elision 70. 242; quant. Quantity, of vow. 86 ff. 130 ff. 161. 190 86ff; accent 93ff; retained in verbf. 207 a. 392 D;-pron. of, 241. 247. inflection 419 if. Radical verbs 265. Sibilant 18. 22. Reality 719ff. 727. 742ff. 745ff. 771. Sicily, Doric of, 2. Recessive accent 97. 179. 365. 456. Simple, vowels 34. 43; correl. 247; Reciprocal pron. 237. 672 b. words 452ff; sentence 485. 719ff; Reduplicating class 332. 349. suppos. 745. Reduplication 318 ff. 65 a. 311. 368b; Singular 115 b; vb. w. pl. subj. 497 b. in 2 aor. 384; in 8th class 332. 449; 515 if; sing. and pl. 514 if; sing. for in 6th class 444. pl. 519. 683 b. Reference, pron. of, 491; agr't 503. 512 Size, correl. 247. [40. 72. if. 522 if; antec. implied 523 b, c. See Smooth, breathing 14 if; mutes 20. 2B:Demonstrative, Relative. Sonant letters 20 a. 22 a. Reflexive pron. 235. 233 D (238 a);- Sophocles, Attic of, 3 d. Synt. 670 ff. 668; equiv. of subst. Source, gen. 582 ENGLISH INDEX. 365 Space, ace. 550. Systems, of tenses 266. 369 if; in verse Special formation of verbs 418 if. 897 b. 898 c. Specification, acc. 549. 780 a. Tau-class 327. 427. Spondee 888; spondaic hexam. 909 k. Temporal, aug. 307 if; conjunc. 877 if. Stem 114. 116. 265. 324ff; stem-class'706. See Time. 325. 419 ff. Tenses 262 if. 695 ff. 735 a. See First, Stigma 5 b. 254. Second, Principal, Historical, PresStrophe 898 d, e. ent, etc. Subject 485. 489; indet. 494. 496; agr't Tense-signs 344 ff. 337. 378. 497. 539; omitted 504. 506. 509. 786. Tense-stem 345 ff. 791 a; two or more 511 if; collect- Tense-systems, see Systems. ive 514; of pass. 693; w. inf. 773ff. Tetrameter 890; troch. catal. 902 a; 784; w. supp. part. 796; sentence as iamb. cat. 907 a; anap. cat. 915. subj. 493 d. 494 a; gen. as subj. 571; Tetrapody 889. inf. as subj. 763; questions 824ff. Theocritus, Doric of, 3b. See Indeterminate, Sentence, Verb, Theophrastus, dial. of, 3 e. Attributive, etc. [690. Thesis 894 if. Subjective, gen. 558. 564. 572 e; mid. Thessaly, Aeolic of, 2. Subjunctive 261; mode-sign 346ff; Thucydides, Attic of, 3 d, cf. Rem. endings 357. 361 D;. perf. act. 385; Time, adj. 470; adv. 248. 877 iff. 879; pf. mid. 393; pu-form 400 if; in simp. design. wt. art. 530 b; ace. 550; gen. sentences 719ff. 723; depend. sent. 591; dat. 594. 613; w. prep. 620ff; 728ff; indir. sent. 735ff; final sent. tenses 695ff; hyp. rel. sent. 758ff; 739 f; hypoth. per. 747 ff; rel. sent. part. 788. 795 a, b, c; gen. abs. 790a; 755. 757 ff; indir. questions 830; rel. expr. 812. 813 a; questions 824 w. neg. 833. 845. ff; oovo ob 848 d. Subordinate sentence 724ff. 818 b. 853. Tmesis 255. 477. 616. See Dependent. Tragedy, Attic of, 3 d, cf. Rem. Subscript, see L in Greek Ind. Transitive verbs 486. 684 if. 777 b; w. Substantives 114ff; compar. 224D; ace. 544ff; w. two acc. 553ff; w. formation 457 f; compos. 473 f; dat. 595 a; adj. w. gen. 587 a; mixed qualified 487 if; equiv. 493; subst. senses 416 iff. pron. 493 b; in agr't 498-9; qualify- Transposition, see Ml3etathesis. ing, in ace. 547 d; w. gen. 558 ff. Tribrach 888. 587 e; w. two gen. 569; w. dat. 595 Triemimeris 889. [907 b. d. 596ff; w. inf. 767; w. ph 840; Trimeter 890; iambic 906; iamb. cat. inf. as subst. 762. 778 if. Tripody 889. Suffixes 265. 454 if. Trochee 888; trochaic rhythms 899ff. Superlative 220 ff. 228 ff (cf. 257. 259); 916 d. 925 a. — Synt. 663 iff; w. gen. 559. 586 c; Ultima 85 b; accented in decl. 121. 160. w. dat. of diff. 610; w. Er ToIs 627; Unlikeness, dat. 603. w. 6h 851. Value, gen. 567. 572h. 578. 577 b. 584c. Supplementary participle 787. 796 ff. Variation of vowels 334. 383. 386 c. 387 Supposition, varieties 745 if. a. 397 a. Surd letters 20 a. 22 a. Vau 23 D, see )Digamma. Swearing, particles 852, 10, 14; w. ace. Verbals 453 if; noun, w. ace. 544 e; 545; gen. w. -rp&s 653 a. adj., see dJs, -Eosr, in Greek Ind. Syllabic augment 307 if. Verbs 260ff; denom. 265. 472. 478; Syllables 81ff; quant. 86 ff; ace. 89 ff. comp. 477 if; omitted 508. 754. 819; Syncope 38. 173. 384; of thesis 895. subj. om. 504; obj. om. 505; w. gen. 901. 905. 920. [D)b. 570ff; w. dat. 595ff; w. rel. 818. Synizesis 37. 69. 128D b. 136Db. 370 See F'inite, Impersonal, Transitive, Syntax 485 ff. Intrans., Pure, Liquid, etc. 366 ENEGLISH INDEX, Verses S90. Versification 887 iff. Vowel-decl. 36 a. 122. 150. 195ff. 207 Vicarious lengthening 31. ff; —Vowel-stems 154D)b. 157. 195 i. Vocative 115c. 119b. 127. 135. 141. 324. 335 ff; 4th class 328e. 434; w, 154. 155. 158. 172 b; Synt. 543. 541. added o 342. 421; made by transp. Voices 260. 412 if. 684 if. 386 c. 394. Vowels 7 if; euphony 24 if; metath. 57. Want, gen. 575. 584 b. 340; w. o 63 if; pure 85a; quant. Way, adv. 248. 86ff; accent 89ff;. variation.334; Whole, gen. 558ff. lengthening 335 if; omission 338. Wishing 721. 753. 834. 870. See Long, Short, Close, Open, Con- Xenophon, Attic of, 8 d. metiyng, etc. Zeugma 882. D1. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. Germania and Agricola of Caius Cornelius Tacitus: With Notes for Colleges. By W. S. TYLER, Professor of the Greek and Latin Languages in Amherst College. 12mo, 193 pages. Tacitus's account of Germany and life of Agricola are among the most fascinating and instructive Latin classics. The present edition has been prepared expressly for college classes, by one who knows what they need. In it will be found: 1. A Latin text, approved by all the more recent editors. 2. A copious illustration of the gram. ilatical constructions, as well as of the rhetorical and poetical usages peculiar to Tacitus. In a writer so concise it has been deemed necessary to pay particular regard to the connection of thought, and to the particles as the hinges of that connection. 3. Constant comparisons of the writer with the authors of the Augustan age, for the purpose of indicating the changes which had already been wrought in the language of the Roman people. 4. An embodiment in small compass of the most valuable labors of such recent German critics as Grimm, Giinther, Gruber, Kiessling, Dronke, Roth, Ruperti, and Walther. Fr~som PROF. LINCOLN, of BroWot U[eiversity. "I have found the book in daily use with my class of very great service, very practical, and well suited to the wants of students. I am very much pleased with the Life of Tacitus and the Introduction, and indeed with the literary character of the book throughout. We shall make the book a part of our Latin course." The History of Tacitus: By W. S. TYLER. With Notes for Colleges. 12m1o, 453 pages. The text of Tacitus is here presented in a form as correct as a comparison of the best editions can make it. Notes are appended for the student's use, which contain not only the grammatical, but likewise all the geographical, archaeological, and historical illustrations that are necessary to render the author intelligible. It has been the constant aim of the editor to carry students beyond the dry details of grammar and lexicography, and introduce them to a familiar acquaintance and lively sympathy with the author and his times. Indexes to the notes, and to the names of persons and places, render reference easy. From PROF. HXAcKETT, of Nrewton Theological Seminary. "The notes appear to me to be even more neat and elegant than those on the' Germania and Agricola.' They come as near to such notes as I would be glad to write myself on a classic, as almost any thing that I have yet seen." D. APPLETO~N & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. The Works of Horace. With English Notes, for the use of Schools and Colleges. By J. I. LINCOLN, Professor of the Latin Language and Literature in Brown University. 12mo, 575 pages. The text of this edition is mainly that of Orelli, the most important readings of other critics being given in foot-notes. The volume is introduced with a biographical sketch of Horace and a critique on his writings, which enable the student to enter intelligently on his work. Peculiar grammatical constructions, as well as geographical and historical. allusions, are explained in notes, which are just full enough to aid the pupil, to excite him to gain a thorough understanding of the author, and awaken in him a taste for philological studies, without taking all labor off his hands. While the chief aim has been to impart a clear idea of Latin Syntax as exhibited in the text, it has also been a cherished object to take advantage of the means so variously and richly furnished by Horace for promoting the poetical taste and literary culture of the student. From as? article by PROF. BARR, of the University Of tIeidelberg, in th tIe Ileidelberg Annals of Literature. "There are already several American editions of Horace, intended for the use of schools; of one of these, which has passed through many editions, and has also been widely circulated in England, mention has been formerly made in this journal; but that one we may not put upon an equality with the one now before us, inasmuch as this has taken a different stand-point, which may serve as a sign of progress in this department of study. The editor has, it is true, also intended his work for the use of schools, and has sought to adapt it, in all its parts, to such a use; but still, without losing sight of this purpose, he has proceeded throughout with more independence. In the preparation of the Notes, the editor has faithfully observed the principles (laid down in his preface); the explanations of the poet's words commend themselves by a compressed brevity which limits itself to what is most essential, and by a sharp precision of expression; and references to other passages of the poet, and also to grammars, dictionaries, etc., are not wanting." Sallust's Jugurtha and Catiline. With Notes and a Vocabulary. By NOBLE BUTLER and MINARD STURGIS. 12mo, 397 pages. The editors have spent a vast amount of time and labor in correcting the text, by a comparison of the most improved German and English editions. It is believed that this wvill be found superior to any edition hitherto published in this country. In accordance with their chronological order, the'"Jugurtha" precedes the "Catiline." The Notes are copious and tersely expressed; they display not only fine scholarship, but (what is quite as necessary in such a book) a practical knowledge of the difficulties which the student encounters in reading this author, and the aids that he requires. The Vocabulary was prepared by the late WILLIAMs H. G. BUTLER. It will be found an able and faithful performance. D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICA. A.TIONS. Virgil's IEneid. With Explanatory Notes. By HENRY S. FRIEZE, Professor of Latin in the State University of Michigan. Illustrated. 12mo, 598 pages. The appearance of this edition of Virgil's ZEneid will, it is believed, be hailed with delight by all classical teachers. Neither expense nor pains have been spared to clothe the great Latin epic in a fitting dress. The type is unusually large and distinct, and errors in the text, so annoying to the learner, have been carefully avoided. The work contains eighty-five engravings, which delineate the usages, costumes, weapons, arts, and mythology of the ancients with a vividness that can be attained only by pictorial illustrations. The great feature of this edition is the scholarly and judicious commentary furnished in the appended Notes. The author has here endeavored not to show his learning, but to supply such practical aid as will enable the pupil to understand and appreciate what he reads. The notes are just full enough, thoroughly explaining the most difficult passages, while they are not so extended as to take all labor off the pupil's hands. Properly used, they cannot fail to impart an intelligent acquaintance with the syntax of the language. In a word, this work is commended to teachers as the most elegant, accurate, interesting, and practically useful edition of the _Eneid that has yet been published. From Jon II. BrUNNErr, President of Hiwasse College. "The typography, paper, and binding of Virgil's Eneid, by Prof. Frieze, are all that need be desired; while the learned and judicious notes appended, are very valuable indeed." From Princiopal of Piedmont (Va.) Academy. "I have to thank you for a copy of Prof. Frieze's edition of the.Lneid. I have been exceedingly pleased in my examination of it. The size of the type from which the text is printed, and the faultless execution, leave nothing to be desired in these respects. The adherence to a standard text throughout, increases the value of this edition." From D. G. MooRE, Principal TU. Higbi School, Rutland. "The copy of Frieze's'Virgil' forwarded to me was duly received. It is so evidently superior to any of the other editions, that I shall unhesitatingly adopt it in my classes." D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONS. Select Orations of M. Tullius Cicero: With Notes, for the use of Schools and Colleges. By E. A. JOHNSON, Professor of Latin in the University of New York. 12mo, 459 pages. This edition of Cicero's Select Orations possesses some special advantages for the student which are both new and important. It is the only edition which contains the im. proved text that has been prepared by a recent careful collation and correct deciphering of the best manuscripts of Cicero's writings. It is the work of the celebrated Orelli, Madvi,, and Klotz, and has been done since the appearance of Orelli's complete edition. The Notes, by Professor Johnson, of the New York University, have been mostly selected, with great care, from the best German authors, as well as the English edition of Arnold. From THOMAa CHASE, Tutor -in Latin in hfarvard University. "An edition of Cicero like Johnson's has long been wanted; and the excellence of the text, the illustrations of words, particles, and pronouns, and the explanation of various points of construction and interpretation, bear witness to the Editor's familiarity with some of the most important results of modern scholarship, and entitle his work to a large share of public favor." "It seems to us an improvement upon any edition of these Orations that has been published in this country, and will be found a valuable aid in their studies to the lovers of classical literature." —Troy Daily Whig. Cicero de Officiis: With English Notes, mostly translated from ZUMPT and BONNELL. By THOMAS A. THACHER, of Yale College. 12mo, 194 pages. In this edition, a few historical notes have been introduced in cases where the Dictionary in common use has not been.found to contain the desired information; the design of which is to aid the learner in understanding the contents of the treatises, the thoughts and reasoning of the author, to explain grammatical difficulties, and inculcate a knowledge of grammatical principles. The Editor has aimed throughout to guide rather than carry the learner through difficulties; requiring of him more study, in consequence of his help, than he would have devoted to the book without it. From M. L. STOEVE, Professor of the Latin Language and Literature in Pen2sylqvania College. "I have examined with much pleasure Prof. Thacher's edition of Cicero de Officiis. and am convinced of its excellence. The Notes have been prepared with great care and good judgment. Practical knowledge of the wants of the student has enabled the Editor to furnish just the kind of assistance required; grammatical difficulties are removed, and the obscurities of the treatise are explained, the interest of the learner is elicited, and his industry directed rather than superseded. There can be but one opinion with regard to the merits of the work, and I trust that Professor Thacher will be disposed to continue his labors so carefully commenced, in this department of classical learning." D. APPLETON c& CO.'S PUBLWCAlIONS. Lincoln's Livy. Selections from the first Five Books, together with the Twenty-First and Twenty-Second Books entire; with a Plan of Rome, a Map of the passage of Hannibal, and English Notes for the use of Schools. By J. L. LINCOLN, Professor of the Latin Language and Literature in Brown University. 12mo, 329 pages. The publishers believe that in this edition of Livy a want is supplied which has been universally felt; there being previous to this no American edition furnished with the requisite aids for the successful study of this Latin author. The text is chiefly that of Alschefski, which is now generally received by the best critics. The notes have been prepared with special reference to the grammatical study of the language, and the illustration of its forms, constructions, and idioms, as used by Livy. They will not be found to foster habits of dependence in the student, by supplying indiscriminate translation or unnecessary assistance; but come to his help only in such parts as it is fair to suppose he cannot master by his own exertions. They also embrace all necessary information relating to history, geography, and antiquities. Lincoln's Livy has been highly commended by critics, and is used in nearly all the colleges in the country. Fromn PROF. ANDERSON, of Waterville College. "A careful examination of several portions of your work has convinced me that, for the use of students, it is altogether superior to any edition of Livy with which I am acquainted. Among its excellences you will permit me to name the close attention given to particles, to the subjunctive mood, the constant reference to the grammars, the discrimination of words nearly synonymous, and the care in giving the localities mentioned in the text. The book will be hereafter used in our college." Beza's Latin Version of the New Testament. 12mo, 291 pages. The now-acknowledged propriety of giving students of languages familiar works for translation-thus adopting in the schools the mode by which the child first learns to talk -has induced the publication of this new American edition of Beza's Latin Version of the New Testament. Ever since its first appearance, this work has kept its place in the general esteem; while more recent versions have been so strongly tinged with the peculiar views of the translators as to make them acceptable to particular classes only. The editor has exerted himself to render the present edition worthy of patronage by its superior accuracy and neatness; and the publishers flatter themselves that the pains bestowed will insure for it a preference over other editions. L). APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATIONVS. Caesar's Commentaries on the Gallic War. With English Notes, Critical and Explanatory; a Lexicon, Geographical and Historical Indexes, a Map of Gaul, etc. By Rev. J. A. SPENCER, D. D. 12mo, 408 pages. In the preparation of this volume, great care has been taken to adapt it in every respect to the wants of the young student, to make it a means at the same time of advancing him in a thorough knowledge of Latin, and inspiring him with a desire for further acquaintance with the classics of the language. Dr. Spencer has not, like some commen*tators, given an abundance of help on the easy passages, and allowed the difficult ones to speak for themselves. His Notes are on those parts on which the pupil wants them, and explain, not only grammatical difficulties, but allusions of every kind in the text. A well-drawn sketch of Cxesars life, a Map of the region in which his campaigns were carried on, and a Vocabulary, which removes the necessity of using a large dictionary and the waste of time consequent thereon, enhance the value of the volume in no small degree. Quintus Curtius: Life and Exploits of Alexander the Great. Edited and illustrated with English Notes. By WILLIAM HENRY CROSBY. 12mo, 385 pages. Ctsrtius's History of Alexander the Great, though little used in the schools ofrthis country, in England and on the Continent holds a high place in the estimation of classical instructors. The interesting character of its subject, the elegance of its style, and the purity of its moral sentiments, ought to place it at least on a par with Cresar's Commentaries or Sallust's Histories. The present edition, by the late Professor of Latin in Rutgers College, is unexceptionable in typography, convenient in form, scholarly and practical in its notes, and altogether an admirable text-book for classes preparing for college. Froln PROF. OWEN, qf thie _ew B orYci Free Academy. "It gives me great pleasure to add my testimonial to the many you are receiving in favor of the beautiful and well-edited edition of Quintus Curtius, by Prof. Wm. Henry Crosby. It is seldom that a classical book is submitted to me for examination, to which I can give so hearty a recommendation as to this. The external appearance is attractive; the paper, type, and binding, being just what a text-book should be, neat, clear, and durable. The notes are brief, pertinent, scholar-like, neither too exuberant nor too meagre, but happily exemplifying the golden mean so desirable and yet so very difficult of attainment." A). APPLETONi c CO.'S PUBLICA TIOiV6S. Arnold's. Greek Course. Revised, Corrected, and Improved, by the Rev. J. A. SPENCER, D. D., late Professor of Latin and Oriental Languages in Burlington College, N. J. FIRST GREEK BOOK, on the Plan of the First Latin Book. 12mo, 254 pages. PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 12mo, 231 pages. SECOND PART TO THE ABOVE. 12mo, 248 pages. GREEK READING BOOK. Containing the substance of the Practical Introduction to Greek Construing, and a Treatise on the Greek Particles; also, copious selections from Greek Authors, with Critical and Explanatory English Notes, and a Lexicon. 12mo, 618 pages. A complete, thorough, practical, and easy Greek course is here presented. The beginner commences with the " First Book," in which the elementary principles of the language are unfolded, not in abstract language, difficult both to comprehend and to remember, but as practically applied in sentences. Throughout the whole, the pupil sees just where he stands, and is taught to use and apply what he learns. His progress is, therefore, as rapid as it is intelligent and pleasant. There is no unnecessary verbiage, nor is the pupil's attention diverted from what is really important by a mass of minor details. It is the experience of teachers who use this book, that with it a given amount of Greek Grammar can be imparted to a pupil in a shorter time and with far less trouble than with any other text-book. The " First Book" may with advantage be followed by the " Introduction to Greek Prose Composition." The object of this work is to enable the student, as soon as he can decline and conjugate with tolerable facility, to translate simple sentences after given examples and with given words; the principles employed being those of imitation and very frequent repetition. It is at once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise-book. The "Second Part " carries the subject further, unfolding the most complicated constructions, and the nicest points of Latin Syntax. A Key is provided for the teacher's use. The "Reader," besides extracts judiciously selected from the Greek classics, contains valuable instructions to guide the learner in translating and construing, and a complete exposition of the particles, their signification and government. It is a fitting sequel to the earlier parts of the course, everywhere showing the hand of an acute critic, an accomplished scholar, and an experienced teacher. Ferom the REV. DR. COLaE.AN, Professor of Greek and Leatin, Princeton, N. J. " I can, from the most satisfactory experience, bear testimony to the excellence of your series of Text-Books for Schools. I am in the daily use of Arnold's Latin and Greek Exercises, and consider them decidedly superior to any other Elementary Works in those languages. " D. APPLETON & CO.'S PUBLICATJONS. Short and Comprehensive Greek Grammar. By J. T. CHAMPLIN, Professor of Greek and Latin in Waterville College. 12mo, 208 pages. In compiling this Grammar, Professor Champlin has drawn upon the best critics and grammarians, and with the results of his research has interwoven much original matter suggested during several years' experience in teaching, and editing Greek authors. His design is to exhibit the essential facts and principles of the language in the clearest, briefest, and most practicable form possible. With this view, all theories and complications belonging to general grammar have been avoided, and only their results used. The amplification and illustration of principles have been carried only so far as is necessary to their comprehension. In this way all the real wants of the Greek student are met, while his attention is not distracted by unnecessary and embarrassing details. Materials for oral exercises' are supplied, and a sketch of Greek versification is given in an appendix. From the Rev. Ma. ANDERsON, Ivew Orleans. "I believe the author has fully accomplished what he proposes in his preface. To those wishing to study Greek, I am satisfied he has presented a book which will much tend to simplify the- study to beginners; and at the same time, without being too voluminous, presents a lucid and full an exposition of the principles of the language as can be contained within so small a compass." Kuhner's Greek Grammar: Translated by Professors EDWARDS and TAYLOR. Large 12mo, 620 pages. Kiihner's is universally acknowledged to be the most accurate, comprehensive, clear, and practical grammar of the Greek language now extant. It is the work of one who devoted his life to Greek philology, and spent years of patient labor in perfecti'g this work. Too full and learned for the beginner, it is just what is needed for the college cirriculum, containing all that a book of reference should contain. The student will never appeal to its pages in vain. In fulness of illustration, copiousness of reference, and philosophical analysis of the various forms of language, it is unsurpassed, we might say unequalled. The present translation is made by two distinguished American scholars, who have revised the whole, verified the references, and appended an original treatise of their own on Greek versification. As now presented to the public, it is believed to be as perfect a grammar of the Greek language as enlightened research and profound scholarship can produce.